HP2 Z12 Study Guide

Switch Overview
Module 1
Objectives
This module introduces you to the HP switch portfolio. It also describes basic networking switch technologies. After completing this module, you should be able to:
List features of the three HP switch series and the type of network to which each series is targeted Describe the different ways to classify switches, based on the switchs form factor, manageability, or Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) functionality Describe the differences among unmanaged, Web-managed, and managed switches Explain the different environments where switches are deployed
Rev. 10.31
1 1
Servicing HP Networking Products
HP Switch Series
HP Switch Series
HP Switch Series
A-Series E-Series V-Series
Categorizing Switches
Rev. 10.31
HP has divided its extensive product portfolio of ProCurve and 3Com switches into the HP Advanced, or A; Essential, or E; and Value, or V, Series. The next few slides will introduce you to these product series and their target business customer.
1 2
Rev. 10.31
Switch Overview
HP A-Series
HP A-Series
Designed for:
Large
or complex deployments
Includes:
Robust
networking solutions from the H3C division of 3Com
Benefits:
Single
platform Single-pane-of-glass management High capability Mission-critical design Advanced power management Best-in-class performance Flexibility allowing for customization
4 Rev. 10.31
The HP A-Series is designed for customers who have large or complex deployments and are seeking advanced technology to drive competitive advantage through their IT infrastructure at a lower cost of ownership. Built on robust networking solutions from the H3C division of 3Com, the A-Series offers the following advantages to these customers:

Single platform (a common operating system from edge to core) Single-pane-of-glass management High capability Mission-critical design Advanced power management Best-in-class performance Flexibility allowing for customization
Rev. 10.31
1 3
HP E-Series
HP E-Series
Designed for:
Business
customers with changing networking needs solutions from ProCurve
Includes:
Networking
and 3Com
Benefits:
Deployment
simplicity management lifetime warranty
Single-pane-of-glass Industry-leading Reduced
total cost of ownership
(TCO)
5 Rev. 10.31
Competitive advantage and cost-cutting initiatives have led businesses to seek a more agile infrastructure that can adapt to the changing needs of customers, employees, and the business itself. And in the current economic climate especially, the need for flexible, scalable solutions is all the more pressing. The HP E-Series is designed for customers with changing networking needs who are looking for essential and proven technology that is easy to use, easy to deploy, reliable, future proof, and cost effective. Combining networking solutions from HP ProCurve and 3Com, the E-Series offers these customers:

Deployment simplicity Single-pane-of-glass management Industry-leading lifetime warranty Reduced total cost of ownership (TCO)
1 4
Rev. 10.31
Switch Overview
HP V-Series
HP V-Series
Designed for:
Value-conscious
customers in small office environments solutions from ProCurve and 3Com installation
Includes:
Networking
Benefits:
Plug-and-play Ease
of operation
Industry-leading
lifetime warranty on most products
Rev. 10.31
Finally, the HP V-Series is designed for value-conscious customers who are in small office environments and seek reliable and easy-to-use connectivity solutions. The VSeries combines networking solutions from HP ProCurve and 3Com that offer the following advantages:

Plug-and-play installation Ease of operation Industry-leading lifetime warrantyThe majority of the V-Series switches have a lifetime warranty, but for a complete overview go to http://h17007.www1.hp.com/us/en/support/warranty/index.aspx.
Rev. 10.31
1 5
HP Switch Series Categorizing Switches
Form factor OSI Layer functionality Deployment options
Rev. 10.31
This section describes how switches can be categorized based on their form factor, manageability, and functionality. They can also be categorized based on where they are deployed on the network. For example, switches that provide network access to endpoint devices are often called LAN access or access layer switches.
1 6
Rev. 10.31
Switch Overview
Categorizing Switches Based on Form Factor or Manageability

Categorizing Switches Based on Form Factor or Manageability
Fixed-port switch Stackable switch Modular switch Managed switch Web-managed switch Unmanaged switch Non-blocking switch
Rev. 10.31
HP Networkings portfolio includes a variety of switch types, which support a variety of options and capabilities. Sometimes the easiest way to categorize switches is based on their form factor or their manageability. Understanding the following terms will help you identify some of the key differences between switches.
Fixed-port switchA switch that has a limited, predefined number of ports. Typically, a fixed switch is one rack unit (RU) and is a stackable switch as well. Stackable switchA switch that can be connected to one or more other stackable switches for ease of management and operation. Typically, stackable switches have a fixed number of ports and are rack mountableeither a one or two rack unit (RU). Vendors implement stackable switches in different ways. For example, some vendors use proprietary protocols, specialized management application, and special-purpose ports to connect the stackable switches. With its newer stackable switches, HP uses virtual IP stacking, in which all the stackable switches share a virtual IP address. You can manage all the switches by accessing this virtual IP address.
Note Only older, formerly branded ProCurve stackable switches, such as the ProCurve 2512 and 2524, require a stacking kit and special-purpose ports.
Rev. 10.31
1 7
Modular switchA switch that does not have a defined number of ports. The switchs ports are part of a modulea hardware componentthat can be inserted into or removed from the switch. The switchs port capacity is, therefore, determined by which modules are installed. Managed switchA switch that supports the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) and allows you to control each ports communication parameters. For example, you can enable or disable a managed switchs individual ports, configure link speeds, and determine duplex settings. These are the minimum capabilities for a managed switch. Most managed switches provide a variety of other features as well, such as local mirroring (also called port mirroring), quality of service (QoS), and port security.
Web-managed switchA managed switch that is managed only through a Web browser interface. Unmanaged switchA switch that enables Ethernet devices to communicate but does not have a management interface. You simply connect the switch to other devices, and the network is operational. Unmanaged switches are intended for networks that require basic connectivity and have little or no IT support. They are cost-effective and offer intuitive and simple configuration. Non-blocking switchA switch for which the backplane speed or internal switching mechanism bandwidth is at least as large as the sum of the speeds of all of the ports.
1 8
Rev. 10.31
Switch Overview
Categorizing Switches Based on the OSI Model

Categorizing Switches Based on the OSI Model
7 Application Layer 6 Presentation Layer 5 Session Layer
4 Transport Layer 3 Network Layer 2 Data Link Layer

1 Physical Layer Ethernet
Layer 2 Switch
Layer 3 Switch Dynamic Routing Protocols IP Static Routes
Layer 4 Switch Policy-Based Switching Application-Based Prioritization
OSI Protocol Stack

9 Rev. 10.31
Switches can also be categorized by their ability to perform functions that are defined in the Open System Interconnection (OSI) model. Developed to ensure that network devices interoperate, the OSI model divides network architecture into seven layers which, from top to bottom, are the Application, Presentation, Session, Transport, Network, Data-Link, and Physical Layers. This course focuses on layers 1-4.
Layer 1
The Physical Layer consists of the standards that control devices physical connections to each other using, for example, cables and connectors. This layer controls the transmission of information by specifying the mechanical and electrical characteristics of the protocol: connector size, pin assignments, voltage levels, and so forth. This layer can also deal with cable specificationshow far apart the communication devices can be placed from one another, for example. On switches, routers, and wireless devices, you can use the port LEDs (which are sometimes called link lights) to monitor and troubleshoot the physical connection. (The LEDs on HP networking devices are described later in this course.)
Rev. 10.31
1 9
Layer 2
The Data Link Layer is primarily concerned with packaging data packets and controlling their transmission between two endpoints as well as with arranging bits received from the Physical Layer into logical frames. The Data Link Layer may detect errors and corruption that occur at Layer 1, the Physical Layer. The Data Link Layer is divided into two sub layers: the Media Access Control (MAC) Layer and the Logical Link Control Layer. The MAC sublayer controls how a computer sends data across a network and how the network will receive it. It also handles how devices are permitted to transmit data. The Logical Link Control Layer dictates frame synchronization and flow control.
Layer 3
The Network Layer uses logical addresses, or IP addresses, to facilitate communication across networks. Routers and switches that operate at Layer 3 perform network routing functions. Using Layer 3 protocols such as IP, these devices can connect multiple networks, determining which traffic should be routed to Network A versus Network B versus Network C, and so on. In addition, Layer 3 functions include error handling, congestion control, and packet sequencing. This means that routers and Layer 3 switches might also perform fragmentation and reassembly, and report delivery errors.
Layer 4
The Transport Layer handles the transfer of data between devices. Protocols operating at this layer can use flow control and error control mechanisms to ensure the delivery of data. TCP and UDP function at the Transport Layer.
1 10
Rev. 10.31
Switch Overview
Layer 2, 3, and 4 Switches

Layer 2, 3, and 4 Switches
Layer 2 Forward traffic based on MAC address
Layer 3 Route traffic based on IP address
Layer 4 Enable policy-based switching Support application-based prioritization
10
Rev. 10.31
Layer 2 Switch
A Layer 2 switch forwards traffic based on the frames Layer 2 information specifically the MAC address. Because the switch operates at Layer 2, it is also sometimes called a bridge.
Layer 3 Switch
A Layer 3 switch can forward traffic based on the frames Layer 3 informationits IP address, for exampleas well as based on Layer 2 information. A Layer 3 switch functions as a router (although a Layer 3 switch does not support WAN connections as described in Module 19: Router Overview). A primary differentiation between a Layer 3 switch and a router is that the Layer 3 switch typically forwards traffic more quickly than a router. This difference arises because the Layer 3 switch makes forwarding decisions at the hardware-level, dynamically reprogramming hardware with current routing information. A Layer 3 switch can forward IP traffic between directly connected virtual LANs using Layer 3 information. They can also exchange route information with other Layer 3 switches or routers. The IP forwarding capabilities of these switches make them ideal distribution or core level devices. In addition to forwarding traffic based on IP address, Layer 3 switches deal with error handling, congestion control, and packet sequencing.
Rev. 10.31
1 11
Light Layer 3 Switches

Light Layer 3 switches can perform basic Layer 3 tasks. They can, for example, facilitate static routing. They may also support Routing Information Protocol (RIP), but they do not support Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) or other dynamic routing protocols.
Layer 4 Switch
A Layer 4 switch supports policy-based switching and can prioritize or limit traffic based on the type of application being used. To identify the application, the switch examines the packet header and locates the port number, which is found in Layer 4, the Transport Layer. Essentially, a Layer 4 switch can make switching decisions and prioritize traffic based on multiple factors, such as IP address and TCP and UDP port numbers. For example, a company could configure policies to ensure that video-conferencing traffic receives priority over FTP or HTTP traffic.
1 12
Rev. 10.31
Switch Overview
Deployment Options
Deployment Options
1 1
Rev. 10.31
Switches can also be categorized by where they are deployed on the network.
Data Center
The data center (often referred to in a mid-market business network as a server closet, a scaled-down version of an enterprise data center) is home to a networks computational power, storage, and applications. Data center switches often provide front-to-back (reversible) airflow to reduce cooling expenses; redundant hotswappable power supplies and hot-swappable fan trays for resiliency; and enhanced port buffering for demanding, high-availability applications.
Core
The core is the backbone of the network, a central or common point where traffic flows between users, their workgroups, and shared resources. Most inter-workgroup traffic flows through the core, so it is important that networking devices located in the core introduce little or no delay (latency). Core switches are usually wire-speed, highly available devices.
Rev. 10.31
1 13
Distribution
Distribution switches are consolidation points for switches that connect directly to end stations. Distribution points are often called Main Distribution Frames (MDF) or Intermediate Distribution Frames (IDF) and may be part of a computer room. Distribution points may include voice and data wiring. In large networks, the distribution layer typically implements broadcast control among VLANs and physically distinct LANs. The Layer 3 switches make broadcast control possible.
LAN Access
Switches at the LAN access layer connect directly to end stations, such as PCs, laptops, and printers. A LAN access switch is the last switch between end stations and shared network resources. LAN access switches are often located in wiring closets, with cable runs that terminate in user cubicles or offices.
1 14
Rev. 10.31
Switch Overview
Summary
Summary
HP switches are divided into Advanced (A), Essential (E), and Value (V) series. HP switches can be categorized by form factor, management options, OSI functionality, and network deployment location.
12
Rev. 10.31
This module has introduced you to the HP Advanced (A), Essential (E), and Value (V) series of switches, which encompass products from HP ProCurve, 3Com, and the H3C division within 3Com. You are now familiar with the types of switches in each series, and the customers for which each type was designed. This module also looked at ways to categorize switches, based on form factors and management options. It also introduced the roles that different types of HP switches play within the OSI model, and where in the network you would find these HP switches. You should now have a good idea of what types of switches you will encounter when troubleshooting an HP customers network.
Rev. 10.31
1 15
1 16
Rev. 10.31
HP A-Series Switch Overview

Module 2
Objectives
This module introduces you to the HP A-Series switches, which are designed to meet the needs of large enterprise customers demanding high availability, high scalability, and a comprehensive feature set for data centers, enterprise, and campus networks. After completing this module, you should be able to:

Describe the basic characteristics of each HP A-Series switch Classify A-Series switches, based on the switchs form factor, manageability, and Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) functionality Explain the different environments for which each A-Series switch is designed
Rev. 10.31
2 1
A-Series Switches
A-Series Switches
A-Series Switches A3100-SI Switch Series A3100-EI Switch Series A3600-EI Switch Series A3610 Switch Series A5120G-SI Switch Series A5120G-EI Switch Series A5500G-SI Switch Series A5500G-EI Switch Series A5800G Switch Series A5810 Switch IntelliJack Switch Series HP 6120 Blade Switches Categorization of A-Series Switches HP Data Center Connection Manager
3 Rev. 10.31
This section describes HP A-Series switches. With the exception of the HP 6120 Blade Switches, the A-Series switches were formerly branded H3C or 3Com switches. If you are supporting a switch with an older name, use the Product Naming Conversion Matrix, which is included with this course, to identify the new name and find the related information in this course.
Note
This course does not cover the following A-Series Switches. Use the associated URL to access the hardware installation guide for each switch: A12500 Switch Series: (http://www.h3c.com/portal/Technical_Support___Documents/Technic al_Documents/Switches/H3C_S12500_Series_Switches/) HP A9500 Switch Series: (http://www.h3c.com/portal/Technical_Support___Documents/ Technical_Documents/Switches/H3C_S9500E_Series_Switches/) HP A7500 Switch Series: (http://www.h3c.com/portal/Technical_Support___Documents/ Technical_Documents/Switches/H3C_S7500E_Series_Switches/) HP A5820X Switch Series: (http://www.h3c.com/portal/Technical_Support___Documents/ Technical_Documents/Switches/H3C_5820X_Series_Switches/)
2 2
Rev. 10.31
HP A3100-SI Switch Series

HP A3100-SI Switch Series
A3100-8-SI
8 10/100 ports 1 10/100/1000 port Throughput up to 2.68 mpps
A3100-16-SI
16 10/100 ports 1 10/100/1000 port Throughput up to 3.87 mpps
Rev. 10.31
The HP A3100-SI Switch Series consists of fixed-port, Light Layer 3, managed switches for enterprise networks. A3100-SI switches are designed for the access layer: they provide 10/100 Mbps downlink and 1000 Mbps uplink ports. They connect directly to endpoints using 10/100 ports and aggregate the traffic to higher capacity switches nearer the network core using 10/100/1000 ports. The HP A3100-8-SI switch includes the following:
Eight auto-sensing 10/100 ports

Note Throughout this module, unless otherwise noted, a port listed as 10/100/1000 will be understood to be auto-sensing and auto-MDIX, to support Base-T (copper) cabling, and to comply with IEEE 802.3 Type 10Base-T, IEEE 802.3u Type 100Base-TX, and IEEE 802.3ab 1000Base-T Gigabit Ethernet. Similarly, unless otherwise noted, a port listed as 10/100 Mbps will be understood to be auto-sensing, to support Base-T (copper) cabling, and to comply with IEEE 802.3 Type 10Base-T and IEEE 802.3u Type 100Base-TX.
One 10/100/1000 port Throughput up to 2.68 mpps One RJ-45 console port
2 3
Rev. 10.31
The HP A3100-16-SI switch includes the following:

16 auto-sensing 10/100 ports One 10/100/1000 port Throughput up to 3.87 mpps One RJ-45 console port
2 4
Rev. 10.31
HP A3100-SI Switch Series (Cont.)

A3100-24-SI
24 10/100 ports 2 10/100/1000 ports Throughput up to 6.55 mpps
A3100-8-SI switch with 1 extended module slot

8 10/100 ports 1 module slot Throughput up to 2.68 mpps
5 Rev. 10.31
The A3100-24-SI switch includes the following features:

24 auto-sensing 10/100 ports Two 10/100/1000 ports Throughput up to 6.55 mpps One RJ-45 console port Eight auto-sensing 10/100 ports One module slot Throughput up to 2.68 mpps One RJ-45 console port
The A3100-8-SI switch with 1 extended module slot includes the following features:

Rev. 10.31
2 5

A3100-16-SI Switch with 2 Extended Module Slots
16 10/100 ports 2 module slots Throughput up to 5.36 mpps
A3100-24-SI Switch with 2 slots

24 10/100 ports 2 module slots Throughput up to 6.55 mpps
6 Rev. 10.31
The A3100-16-SI switch with 2 Extended Module Slots includes the following features:

16 auto-sensing 10/100 ports Two module slots Throughput up to 5.36 mpps One RJ-45 console port 24 auto-sensing 10/100 ports Two module slots Throughput up to 6.55 mpps One RJ-45 console port
The A3100-24-SI switch with 2 slots includes the following features:

2 6
Rev. 10.31
HP A3100-EI Switch Series

A3100-8-EI switch A3100-8-PoE-EI switch
8 10/100 ports 1 dual-personality port Throughput up to 2.68 mpps A3100-8 EI switchfanless A3100-8-PoE EI switchPoE
Rev. 10.31
The HP A3100-EI Switch Series consists of fixed-port, Light Layer 3, managed switches for enterprise networks. A3100-EI switches are designed for the access layer: they provide 10/100 Mbps downlink and 1000 Mbps uplink ports. They connect directly to endpoints using 10/100 ports and aggregate the traffic to higher capacity switches nearer the network core using 10/100/1000 ports. The switches support static routes, and allow users to assign the management VLAN an IP address. The A3100-8-EI and A3100-8-PoE-EI switches include the following features:

Eight auto-sensing 10/100 ports One dual-personality portthis port can be used as either a 10/100/1000 port or a Small Form Factor Port (SFP). (SFPs provide a variety of options including fiber optic; see Module 3: HP A-Series Switch Hardware for more information.) Throughput up to 2.68 mpps One RJ-45 console port
The A3100-EI switch is available in an AC and DC model. There are a couple of differences between the two eight-port switches in this series: the A3100-8-EI switch is fanless, and the A3100-8-PoE-EI switch provides Power over Ethernet (PoE) on all Ethernet ports.
Rev. 10.31
2 7
HP A3100-EI Switch Series (Cont.)

16 10/100 ports 2 dual-personality ports Throughput up to 5.36 mpps A3100-16 EI switchfanless

24 10/100 ports 2 dual-personality ports Throughput up to 6.55 mpps A3100-24 EI switchfanless
8 Rev. 10.31
The A3100-16-EI and A3100-16-PoE-EI switches include the following features:

16 auto-sensing 10/100 ports Two dual-personality ports Throughput up to 5.36 mpps One RJ-45 console port
Again, there are differences between the two switches: the A3100-16-EI switch is fanless, and the A3100-16-PoE-EI switch provides PoE on all Ethernet ports. The A3100-24-EI and A3100-24-PoE-EI switches include the following features:

24 auto-sensing 10/100 ports Two dual-personality ports Throughput up to 6.55 mpps One RJ-45 console port
The A3100-24-EI switch is fanless, and the A3100-24-PoE-EI switch provides PoE on all Ethernet ports. The A3100-16-EI and A3100-24-EI switches are available in AC and DC models.
2 8
Rev. 10.31

24 10/100 ports 4 SFP ports Throughput up to 9.53 mpps
A3600-24-SFP-EI switch
24 10/100 SFP ports 2 10/100/1000 ports 2 SFP ports Throughput up to 9.53 mpps
Rev. 10.31
The HP A3600-EI Switch Series consists of fixed-port, Layer 3/4, managed switches. The switches in this series support static routes, Open Shortest Path First (OSPF), Routing Information Protocol (RIP), Protocol Independent Multicast Dense Mode (PIMDM), and PIM Sparse Mode (PIM-SM). In addition, these switches offer the latest traffic-prioritization technologies to optimize applications on converged networks. These features, coupled with advanced security features and reliability, make the A3600-EI switches well-suited for the access and distribution layers in an enterprise network. The A3600-EI switches come with a variety of port options, including the 28-port switches shown here. The A3600-24-EI and A3600-24-PoE-EI switches provide the following features:

24 auto-sensing 10/100 ports Four open SFP ports (See Module 3: HP A-Series Switch Hardware for a list of optional SFP transceivers that customers can purchase and install in these ports.) Throughput up to 9.53 mpps One RJ-45 console port
The A3600-24-PoE-EI switch provides PoE on all Ethernet ports. The internal power supply provides a total PoE power of 300 watts to PoE-enabled devices such as IP phones; optional supplemental power is available.
Rev. 10.31
2 9
The A3600-24-SFP-EI switch includes the following features:

24 auto-sensing 10/100 ports Two auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Two open SFP ports (See Module 3: HP A-Series Switch Hardware for a list of optional SFP transceivers that customers can purchase and install in these ports.) Throughput up to 9.53 mpps One RJ-45 console port
2 10
Rev. 10.31

48 10/100 ports 4 SFP ports Throughput up to 1 1.78 mpps
10
Rev. 10.31
The A3600-48-EI and A3600-48-PoE-EI switches include the following features:

48 auto-sensing 10/100 ports Four open SFP ports (See Module 3: HP A-Series Switch Hardware for a list of optional SFP transceivers that customers can purchase and install in these ports.) Throughput up to 1 1.78 mpps One RJ-45 console port
The A3600-48-PoE-EI switch provides PoE on all Ethernet ports.
Rev. 10.31
2 11
HP A3610 Switch Series

HP A3610 Switch Series
A3610-24 switch with 2 GigT and 2 SFP ports
24 10/100 ports 2 10/100/1000 ports 2 SFP ports Throughput up to 9.53 mpps
A3610-24 switch with 4 SFP ports

1 1
Rev. 10.31
The HP A3610 Switch Series includes fixed-port, Layer 3/4, managed switches. The switches in this series support static routes, OSPF, and Border Gateway Protocol (BGP). This series provides intelligent network management switches intended for a network environment where advanced features, high performance, and dense port distribution are required. For enterprise networks, HP recommends deploying A3610 switches at the access layer or distribution layer. For small to medium-sized networks, the versatile A3610 switches can be deployed at the access layer or the network core. The A3610-24 switch with 2 GbE and 2 SFP ports includes the following features:

24 auto-sensing 10/100 ports Two auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Two open SFP ports Throughput up to 9.53 mpps One RJ-45 console port 24 auto-sensing 10/100 ports Four open SFP ports
The A3610-24 switch with 4 SFP ports includes the following features:

2 12
Rev. 10.31
Throughput up to 9.53 mpps One RJ-45 console port
(See Module 3: HP A-Series Switch Hardware for a list of optional SFP transceivers that customers can purchase and install in the open SFP ports.)
Rev. 10.31
2 13
HP A3610 Switch Series (Cont.)

HP A3610 Switch Series (Cont.)
A3610-24-SFP switch
2 10/100/1000 ports 24 Fast Ethernet SFP ports 2 SFP ports Throughput up to 9.53 mpps
A3610-48 switch
12
Rev. 10.31
The A3610-24-SFP switch includes the following features:

Two auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports 24 open Fast Ethernet SFP ports Two open SFP ports Throughput up to 9.53 mpps One RJ-45 console port 48 10/100 ports Four open SFP ports Throughput up to 13.1 mpps One RJ-45 console port
The A3610-48 switch includes the following features:

(See Module 3: HP A-Series Switch Hardware for a list of optional SFP transceivers that customers can purchase and install in the open SFP ports.)
2 14
Rev. 10.31
HP A5120G-SI Switch Series

A5120-16G-SI switch
16 10/100/1000 ports 4 SFP ports Throughput up to 29.8 mpps
13
Rev. 10.31
The HP A5120G-SI Switch Series consists of fixed-port, Light Layer 3, managed switches designed for networks where high performance, high-density port access, and easy installation are required. These switches can be deployed at the access layer or at the distribution layer in enterprise networks that require gigabit connectivity. The A5120-16G-SI switch includes the following features:

16 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Four open SFP ports Throughput up to 29.8 mpps One RJ-45 console port
Rev. 10.31
2 15
HP A5120G-SI Switch Series (Cont.)

HP A5120G-SI Switch Series (Cont.)
A5120-24G-SI switch
A5120-48G-SI switch
14
Rev. 10.31
The A5120-24G-SI switch includes the following features:

24 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Four open SFP ports Throughput up to 41.7 mpps One RJ-45 console port 48 auto-sensing 10/100 /1000 ports Four open SFP ports Throughput up to 77.4 mpps One RJ-45 console port
The A5120-48G-SI switch includes the following features:

2 16
Rev. 10.31
HP A5120G-EI Switch Series

A5120-24G-EI switch
20 10/100/1000 ports 4 dual-personality ports Throughput up to 35.7 mpps
A5120-24G-EI switch with 2 slots A5120-24G-PoE-EI switch

20 10/100/1000 ports 4 dual-personality ports 2 open module slots Throughput up to 95.2 mpps
15
Rev. 10.31
The HP A5120G-EI Switch Series consists of Gigabit Ethernet, managed switches. They support static routes, giving them the designation of Light Layer 3 switches. In a medium to large-sized enterprise or campus network, A5120G-EI switches can be deployed at the access layer or distribution layer, providing high-performance and large-capacity switching service. HP also recommends deploying the A5120G-EI Switch Series at the access layer in data centers to deliver a high-density gigabit speed server access solution. The A5120-24G-EI switch includes the following features:

20 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Four dual-personality portsEach port can be used as either a 10/100/1000 port or a Gigabit Ethernet SFP port (See Module 3: HP A-Series Switch Hardware for more information about supported SFP transceivers.) Throughput up to 35.7 mpps One RJ-45 console port
The A5120-24G-EI switch with 2 slots and the A5120-24G-PoE-EI switch include the following features:

20 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Four dual-personality ports
Rev. 10.31
2 17
Two open module slots (on the rear panel of the switch) (See Module 3: HP ASeries Switch Hardware for more information about supported modules.) Throughput up to 95.2 mpps One RJ-45 console port
The A5120-24G-PoE-EI switch provides PoE on all Ethernet ports.
2 18
Rev. 10.31
HP A5120G-EI Switch Series (Cont.)

A5120-48G-EI switch
44 10/100/1000 ports
4 dual-personality ports Throughput up to 71.4 mpps
A5120-48G-EI switch with 2 slots A5120-48G-PoE-EI switch with 2 slots

16 Rev. 10.31
The A5120-48G-EI switch includes the following features:

44 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Four dual-personality ports Throughput up to 71.4 mpps One RJ-45 console port
The A5120-48G-EI switch with 2 slots and the A5120-48G-PoE-EI switch with 2 slots include the following features:

44 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Four dual-personality ports Two open module slots (on the rear panel of the switch) (See Module 3: HP ASeries Switch Hardware for more information about supported modules.) Throughput up to 130.9 mpps One RJ-45 console port
The A5120-48G-PoE-EI switch with 2 slots provides PoE on all Ethernet ports.
Rev. 10.31
2 19

A5500-24G-SI switch A5500-24G-PoE-SI switch
A5500-48G-SI switch A5500-48G-PoE-EI switch

17 Rev. 10.31
The HP A5500G-SI Switch Series consists of fixed-port, managed switches that provide high-speed connections10/100/1000 and 10 GbE. These switches support static routes and RIPmaking them Light Layer 3 switches. Designed for converged networks, the A5500G-SI switches are deployed at the data center, distribution layer, and even access layer in large enterprise networks. In small networks, they can also be deployed as a core switch. The A5500-24G-SI and A5500-24G-PoE-SI switches include the following features:

20 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Four dual-personality ports Two open module slots (on the rear panel of the switch) (See Module 3: HP ASeries Switch Hardware for more information about supported modules.) Throughput up to 95.2 mpps One RJ-45 console port
The A5500-24G-PoE-SI switch provides PoE on all Ethernet ports. The A5500-48G-SI and A5500-48G-PoE-EI switches include the following features:

44 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Four dual-personality ports
2 20
Rev. 10.31
Two open modules slots (on the rear panel of the switch) (See Module 3: HP ASeries Switch Hardware for more information about supported modules.) Throughput up to 130.9 mpps One RJ-45 console port
The A5500-48G-PoE-EI switch provides PoE on all Ethernet ports.
Rev. 10.31
2 21

A5500-24G-SFP-EI switch
8 dual-personality ports 16 open SFP ports 2 open module slots Throughput up to 95.2 mpps
A5500-24G-EI switch A5500-24G-PoE-EI switch

18 Rev. 10.31
The HP A5500G-EI Switch Series is comprised of fixed-port, Layer 3/4, managed switches that provide advanced security, reliability, and multi-service support capabilities. They are full Layer 3 switches, supporting static routes and the following routing protocols:

RIP OSPF BGP IS-IS
They also support multicast routing protocols PIM-DM and PIM-SM. The A5500G-EI switches are deployed at the access layer, distribution layer, and data center in large enterprise and campus networks. In medium and small-sized networks, these switches can also be deployed at the core. Designed for maximum flexibility, these switches are available with 24 or 48 GbE ports. PoE and non-PoE models are available with open module slots and dualpersonality ports for fiber-optic flexibility. The A5500-24G-SFP-EI switch includes the following features:
Eight dual-personality ports, which can be used either as 10/100/1000 ports or SFP ports 16 open SFP ports
Rev. 10.31
2 22
Two open module slots (on the rear panel) Throughput up to 95.2 mpps One RJ-45 console port 20 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Four dual-personality ports Two open module slots (on the rear panel) Throughput up to 95.2 mpps One RJ-45 console port
The A5500-24G-EI and A5500-24G-PoE-EI switches include the following features:

(See Module 3: HP A-Series Switch Hardware for more information about supported modules and SFP transceivers.) The A5500G-EI switch is available in a DC and AC model. In addition, the A5500-24G-PoE-EI switch provides PoE on all Ethernet ports.
Rev. 10.31
2 23

A5500-48G-EI switch A5500-48G-PoE-EI switch
19
Rev. 10.31
The A5500-48G-EI switches include the following features:

44 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Four dual-personality ports Two open module slots (on the rear panel) Throughput up to 130.94 mpps One RJ-45 console port
The A5500-48G-PoE-EI switch also provides PoE on all Ethernet ports. (See Module 3: HP A-Series Switch Hardware for more information about supported modules and SFP transceivers.)
2 24
Rev. 10.31
HP A5800G Switch Series

HP A5800G Switch Series
A5800-24G-SFP flex-chassis switch
24 SFP ports 4 SFP+ ports 1 module slot Throughput up to 154.75 mpps
A5800-24G switch A5800-24G-PoE switch

24 10/100/1000 ports 4 SFP+ ports 1 module slot Throughput up to 155 mpps
20 Rev. 10.31
The HP A5800G Switch Series consists of fixed-port, managed Layer 3/4 switches. They support:

Static routes OSPF RIP IS-IS
They also support multicast routing protocols PIM-DM and PIM-SM. The A5800G switches meet the requirements of the most demanding enterprise networking applications. These switches offer the highest levels of resiliency and secure connectivity, as well as the latest traffic-prioritization technologies to optimize applications and ensure business continuity in converged networks. In addition, some models feature PoE, with support for up to 20W per port, and are PoE+ ready. The A5800G switches are optimized for deployment at the core in SMB networks or at the distribution, data center, and access layers of enterprise campus networks. The A5800-24G-SFP switch includes the following features:

24 SFP ports Four SFP+ ports One open module slot

2 25
Rev. 10.31
Throughput up to 154.75 mpps One management port on the rear panel One RJ-45 console port One USB port
To access the console port or to use the USB port, you must open the panel under the logo that is on the right side of the switchs front panel.
The A5800-24G-SFP also supports hot-swappable fans. The A5800-24G and A5800-24G-PoE switches include the following features:

24 10/100/1000 ports Four SFP+ ports providing 10-GbE speeds One open module slotThis slot can accommodate an SFP slot module or Ethernet port module. Throughput up to 155 mpps One RJ-45 console port on the front panel One USB port on the front panel
In addition, the A5800-24G-PoE switch provides PoE on all Ethernet ports. (For more information about supported modules and SFP transceivers, see Module 3: HP A-Series Switch Hardware.)
2 26
Rev. 10.31
HP A5800G Switch Series (Cont.)

HP A5800G Switch Series (Cont.)
A5800-48G switch A5800-48G-PoE switch
48 10/100/1000 ports 4 SFP+ ports 1 module slot Throughput up to 190.4 mpps
A5800-48G switch with 2 slots

48 10/100/1000 PoE ports 4 SFP ports 2 module slots 1 OAA module slot Throughput up to 21 mpps 1
21 Rev. 10.31
The A5800-48G and A5800-48G-PoE switches include the following features:

48 10/100/1000 ports Four SFP+ ports providing 10-GbE speeds One open module slot, which supports an SFP, SFP+, or 10/100/1000 port module Throughput up to 190 mpps One RJ-45 console port One USB port
To access the console port or to use the USB port, you must open the panel under the logo that is on the right side of the switchs front panel. In addition, the A5800-48G-PoE switch provides PoE on all Ethernet ports. The A5800-48G switch with 2 slots includes the following features:

48 10/100/1000 PoE ports Four SFP ports Two open module slots, which support SFP, SFP+, or 10/100/1000 port modules
Rev. 10.31
2 27
One Open Application Architecture (OAA) module slot, which supports an optional firewall, wireless LAN (WLAN) access controller, or Intrusion Protection System (IPS) module Hot-swappable PoE module slot Throughput up to 21 mpps 1 One RJ-45 console port on the front panel One USB port on the front panel Hot-swappable, redundant fans
The two open module slots are on the front panel. The OAA module slot and the PoE module slot are on the rear panel. (See Module 3: HP A-Series Switch Hardware for more information about supported modules.) The A5800-48G switch with 2 slots does not ship with a power supply or a PoE module. Both must be purchased separately. Likewise, the two module slots are empty.
2 28
Rev. 10.31
HP A5810 Switch
HP A5810 Switch
A5810 Switch
48 10/100/1000 ports 2 SFP+ ports 2 dual-personality ports Throughput up to 101
mpps
Available in AC or DC
model
22
Rev. 10.31
Designed for enterprise networks, the A5810 switch can be deployed at the access layer, data center, or distribution layer. In SMB networks, it can also be deployed at the core. This switch provides the highest levels of resiliency and secure connectivity, as well as the latest traffic-prioritization technologies to optimize applications and ensure business continuity in converged networks. The A5810 Switch is a fixed-port, managed, Layer 3/4 switch. It supports:

Static routes OSPF RIP IS-IS
This switch also supports multicast routing protocols PIM-DM and PIM-SM. It provides the following:

48 10/100/1000 ports Two SFP+ ports Two dual-personality ports Throughput up to 101 mpps
The switch is available in an AC or DC model.

Rev. 10.31
2 29
HP IntelliJack Switch Series

HP IntelliJack Switch Series
NJ1000G Switch
4 10/100/1000 ports 2 pass-through ports
NJ2000G IntelliJack Switch

4 10/100/1000 ports 2 pass-through ports
23
Rev. 10.31
The HP IntelliJack Switch Series is designed to increase network connections and provide support for legacy analog and digital devices. Deployed at the access layer, these Layer 2 switches are connected to an RJ-45 jack and mounted on the wall. They can be powered by PoE or an optional 48V local power supply. The NJ1000G switch is an unmanaged switch; the NJ2000G switch is a Webmanaged switch. The NJ100G and NJ2000G switches provide the following:

Four 10/10/1000 ports Two built-in pass-through ports for legacy telephone or additional LAN connections HP Single-port 802.3at Gigabit PoE Midspan Power Supply HP NJ1000/2000 Local AC-to-DC 48V Power Supply HP V1905-24 switch (Which you will learn more about in Module 8: HP V-Series Switch Overview.)
The switches can forward PoE on two ports if the customer has one of the following:

2 30
Rev. 10.31
HP 6120 Blade Switches

HP 6120 Blade Switches
6120G/XG
16 internal 1-GbE downlinks 4 external 10/100/1000 uplinks 2 external 1-GbE SFP ports 1 external 10-GbE CX4 uplink 2 external 10-GbE XFP ports
6120XG
16 internal 1-GbE downlinks 8 external SFP+ 10-GbE uplinks
24
Rev. 10.31
Designed for the data center, the HP 6120G/XG and the 6120XG switches are installed into an HP c-Class BladeSystem enclosure. (These switches were formerly branded HP ProCurve.) Both are Layer 2, managed switches that support QoS metering and security features such as 802.1X, MAC authentication, and Web authentication. In addition, both can be automatically provisioned by the HP Data Center Connection Manager. These blade switches are well-suited for data centers that require both 1 GbE and 10 GbE connections. They have a non blocking architecture and provide wire speed on all uplinks and downlinks. The 6120G/XG switch provides:

16 internal 1-GbE downlinks Four external 10/10/1000 uplinks Two external 1-GbE SFP ports One external 10-GbE CX4 uplink Two external 10-GbE One USB console port
Rev. 10.31
2 31
The 6120XG switch provides:

16 internal 1-GbE downlinks Eight external SFP+ 10-GbE uplinks One USB console port
2 32
Rev. 10.31
Categorization of A-Series Switches

Categorization of A-Series Switches
A-Series Switches Categorization of A-Series Switches A-Series Switches Categorized by OSI Layer Deployment for A-Series Switches HP Data Center Connection Manager
25
Rev. 10.31
The next section shows how A-Series switches can be categorized as Layer 2, Light Layer 3, and Layer 3/4 switches. It also provides a table that lists the environment in which each switch can be installed: access layer, distribution layer, core, and data center.
Rev. 10.31
2 33
HP A-Series Switches Categorized by OSI Layer

HP A-Series Switches Categorized by OSI Layer
Layer 2 6120 IntelliJack Light Layer 3 A3100-SI A3100-EI A5120G-SI A5120G-EI A5500G-SI Layers 3 and 4 A3600-EI A3610 A5500G-EI A5800G A5810
26
Rev. 10.31
This table provides a quick reference for categorizing the A-Series switches according to OSI functionality they provide. Essentially, Layer 2 switches do not route traffic (although they can support multiple VLANs). Light Layer 3 switches provide limited routing capabilities. All of the Light Layer 3 switches shown here support static routes; some also support one dynamic routing protocol (typically RIP). Layer 3/4 switches provide a full suite of routing capabilities. For example, they typically support OSPF or BGP in addition to RIP and static routes.
2 34
Rev. 10.31
Deployment Options for HP A-Series Switches

Switch
A3100-SI A3100-EI A3600-EI A3610 A5120G-SI A5120G-EI A5500G-SI A5500G-EI A5800G
27 Rev. 10.31
Access Layer

Distribution Layer
Core
Data Center
(SMB networks) (SMB networks)
The HP A-Series switches include devices suitable for deployment at all layers of an enterprise network: access layer, distribution layer, core, and data center. As this slide illustrates, some switch series can be deployed in more than one layer, depending on the needs of the company and its network. HP positions the switches in these categories, but customers can deploy the switches wherever they want. However, such deployments are typically exceptions rather than common practice.
Note The HP A-Series includes switches that function at the core of enterprise networks. However, support for these switches is not covered in this course.
Rev. 10.31
2 35

Deployment Options for HP A-Series Switches (Cont.)
Switch
A5810 IntelliJack 6120
Access Layer

Distribution Layer
Core
(SMB networks)
Data Center
28
Rev. 10.31
This slide shows the deployment options for the remaining A-Series switches.
2 36
Rev. 10.31
HP Data Center Connection Manager

A Series Switches Categorization of A Series Switches HP Data Center Connection Manager
29
Rev. 10.31
Several of the A-Series switches are designed specifically for the data center. Many IT organizations spend a significant amount of time setting up and managing servers in their data centers. The HP Data Center Connection Manager can help ease the management of these servers.
Rev. 10.31
2 37

Two options:
DCM Controller, an appliance DCM ONE Software, running on HP
ONE Services zl Module
Provisions servers with settings such as IP addresses Automates and formalizes workflow processes
30
Rev. 10.31
Configuring the network for new server interfaces can be a time-consuming, inefficient process. The process can be time-consuming because it requires manual configuration. It can be inefficient because it requires the interaction of two groups who may not be accustomed to working togetherserver administrators and network administrators. Further, the process itself may not be well-documented. HP Datacenter Connection Manager (DCM) is designed to automate the process of provisioning a network for new server interfaces. By eliminating manual configuration of network settings for each new server interface, DCM enables server interfaces to be brought online quickly and easily with the appropriate settings enforced. DCM also helps server administrators and network administrators use a process for provisioning servers. Rather than reacting to server administrators requests or network conditions, network administrators can prepare in advance for new server installations by configuring connections, which determine the network attributes for server interfaces. Server administrators, on the other hand, have a process for notifying network administrators that a new server interface is being installed. Server administrators also know the type of information they must provide network administrators about the server interface.
2 38
Rev. 10.31
DCM is available in two form factors:
DCM ControllerThis 1U hardware appliance can be mounted on a 19-inch rack. DCM ONE Software, which runs on an HP Open Network Ecosystem (ONE) Services zl Module. This module can be installed in:
E5400 zl Switch Series E8200 zl Switch Series
For more information about these switch series, see Module 5: HP E-Series Switch Overview.
Rev. 10.31
2 39
Summary
Summary
Features of HP A-Series switches Different ways to categorize switches HP A-Series switches and their position in the OSI model Environments for which HP A-Series switches are designed DCM
31
Rev. 10.31
This module has introduced you to the HP A-Series switches and outlined the features that they provide. It has also explained how to categorize the A-Series switches according to their OSI functionality and the network layer where they can be deployed. Finally, this module introduced you to DCM, which allows network administrators and server administrators to work together to provision the network for server interfaces.
2 40
Rev. 10.31
HP A-Series Switch Hardware

Module 3
Objectives
This module outlines the basic HP A-Series switch components and accessories that you should be familiar with to provide support to A-Series customers. After completing this module, you should be able to: Operate the Mode button Identify LEDs on the switch and use them to troubleshoot problems Identify the module and Small Form-Factor Pluggable (SFP) transceiver options for A-Series switches Install modules and SFP transceivers into A-Series switches Describe connector and cabling options for switches Describe redundant and external power supply options for A-Series switches
Rev. 10.31
3 1
LEDs
LEDs
LEDs

LED Types Switch LEDs Port LEDs Module LEDs
A-Series Switch Modules A-Series SFP Transceivers Connectors and Cables Redundant Power for A-Series Switches Switch Fan Tray
3 Rev. 10.31
This section explains how to interpret the various LEDs found on A-Series switches. Because the LEDs for A-Series switches vary, depending on their functionality, a thorough examination of every LED on every A-Series switch would require a significant portion of the time allotted for this course. Instead, this section is designed to help you identify different types of LEDs and use them to determine what is happening on the switch. You should then be able to identify a switchs operating condition at any given moment and begin to diagnose error conditions. For a complete explanation of a switchs LEDs, refer to the Installation Manual for the specific switch model.
3 2
Rev. 10.31
LED Types
LED Types
Three types of LEDs indicate the status of the switch and its components:
Switch LEDs (status of features that impact switch operation):
Power supply Fans Diagnostics
Module LEDs (status and activity of modules):

Module status and activity PoE compatibility
Port LEDs (status and activity of specific ports):

Port activity PoE compatibility and supply Full-duplex operation Connection speed
4 Rev. 10.31
An A-Series switch may have one or more of three general types of LEDs: Switch LEDs Module LEDs Port LEDs
Switch LEDs
Switch LEDs indicate hardware and status conditions that might affect switch operation. Typical switch LEDs report on the status and operation of the following: Power supply Fan Self-test Temperature Redundant power supplies External power supplies Power over Ethernet (PoE)
Rev. 10.31
3 3
Module LEDs
Module LEDs exist only on A-Series switches with modules, such as the A5800-48G Switch with 2 Slots. They provide information such as the following about the operation of a particular module: Module status Module activity PoE compatibility
Keep in mind that A-Series switches offer a variety of functions and capabilities. Although many switches have similar LEDs, not all switches have or need the same LEDs. The preceding list includes the most common LEDs; it is not a comprehensive list. The next several slides will provide additional information about LEDs on the A-Series switches.
Port LEDs
Port LEDs provide information about the operating status of a specific port, including the following: Port activity PoE compatibility and supply Full-duplex operation Connection speed
3 4
Rev. 10.31
Switch LEDs
Switch LEDs
Power LED
7-Segment Digital LED
RPS status LED Mode LED
Rev. 10.31
Most A-Series switches have four switch LEDs: Power LED RPS LED Mode LED (also called the port status LED mode switching button) Seven-segment display LED
Some switches, however, may not have all of these LEDs. Certain LED names and aspects of LED behavior may vary among switches. The next several slides will cover other switch LEDs that are supported on various A-Series switches.
Rev. 10.31
3 5
Switch LEDs: Power LED
Switch LEDs: Power LED

Switch LED State On Green PWR (or SYS) (green/yellow/red) Red Blinking Green Yellow Off System is performing POST. POST failed on some ports. Switch is powered off. Switch is powered on. Power-on self-test (POST) failed. Meaning
Power LED
6 Rev. 10.31
Sometimes referred to as the System Status LED, the Power LED helps you determine the working status of the switch. All A-Series switches have a Power LED, marked by PWR or SYS on the front of the switch. The Power LED may be steady green, flashing green, steady red, flashing yellow, or off. Each of these indicates a specific system status. Most A-Series switches have two startup modes: normal startup and fast startup. By default, the system starts up in fast startup mode no self-test is performed. If you set the startup mode to normal, the switch performs a self-test, and it will take approximately five seconds for the switch to fully boot. When the Power LED is on/green, the switch is started normally. When the Power LED is blinking green, the system is performing a self-test. When the Power LED is on/red, the self-test failed. The Power LED and Sevensegment display LED together indicate the result of the self-test. We will cover this information later in the course. When the Power LED is blinking yellow, the self-test failed on at least one port. When the Power LED is off, the switch is powered off.
3 6
Rev. 10.31
Switch LEDs: RPS LED

Switch LED State On Green RPS (green/yellow) Yellow Blinking (green)
*All of the A5500G-EI switches have an RPS LED except the A5500-24G-SFP-EI.
Meaning AC input is normal, and the RPS is in the position or works normally. RPS input is normal, but the AC input fails or is not connected. RPS is not connected or input is abnormal.
RPS LED
Rev. 10.31
Several A-Series switches support redundant power supplies (RPS), which are discussed later in this module. Each of these switches has three input modes: AC input, RPS input, and both. When using both power input modes, the AC power input and RPS input work as backup for one another. However, the RPS will not supply power to the PoE ports on PoE switches. When the RPS LED is on/green, the AC input is normal, and the RPS is position and works normally. When the RPS LED is on/yellow, the RPS input is normal, but the AC input has failed or is not connected. When the Power LED is on/red, the RPS is not connected or input is abnormal.
Rev. 10.31
3 7
Switch LEDs: Mode Button and LED
Switch LEDs: Mode Button and LED

Switch LED State On Mode (green/yellow) Green Yellow Blinking (green) Port LEDs indicate port speed. Port LEDs indicate port duplex mode. Port LEDs indicate PoE power supply (on PWR switches only). Meaning
Mode button changes what is displayed on the Port LED for each port.
Mode Button
Mode LED
Rev. 10.31
To optimize the amount of information that can be displayed for each port in the limited space available, many switches rely on multiple-display LEDs, or Mode LEDs. These LEDs can indicate more than one port condition and are controlled by the Mode button. The Mode LED and the Port LEDs together indicate the operation status for the ports. Pressing the Mode button changes the setting of the Mode LED and the condition reported by the Port LEDs. When the Mode LED is on/green, the Port LED indicates the speed at which each port is operating. When the Mode LED is on/yellow, the Port LED indicates the duplex mode in which each port is operating. When the Mode LED is blinking green on PoE-enabled switches, the Port LED indicates the PoE status of the port. To change the setting of the port Mode LED, press the Mode button and cycle through the settings until you reach the desired one. (Mode LEDs are discussed in more detail later in the module when port LEDs are described.) Other switches may have different mode settings. If you have questions concerning the behavior of switch LEDs on a particular switch, consult the switchs Installation Manual.
3 8
Rev. 10.31
Switch LEDs: Seven-Segment Display LED

Switch LED State Displays F Displays t Meaning Fan failure Over-temperature alarm. Power LED is On/Red Seven-Segment Display LED
Seven-Segment Display LED
Rev. 10.31
Another multiple-display LED on the A-Series switches is the Seven-segment display LED. The Seven-segment display LED works together with the Power LED (and the Mode LED on PoE-enabled switches) to indicate the switchs operating status. In this and the following several slides, we will discuss the meaning of the many Power LED/Seven-segment display LED combinations.
Power LED Is On/Red

First, let us look at the statuses indicated by the Seven-segment display LED when the Power LED is on/red. When the Power LED is on/red and the Seven-segment display LED displays F, a switch fan has failed. When the Power LED is on/red and the Seven-segment display LED displays t, the switch has exceeded its maximum temperature.
Rev. 10.31
3 9

Switch LED Seven-Segment Display LED State Blinking Number Meaning Self-test (POST) failed. The LED flashes the test ID of the failed test. POST running. The LED displays the POST test ID. Software loading. Power LED is Blinking Red
Power LED is Blinking Green

Displays Numbers Oneby-One
Clockwise Rotating Bar
Power LED is On/Green

Displays C
Switch is the command switch in the cluster. Switch is cluster member. Switch is waiting to join cluster. Member ID of the switch in the cluster.
Displays S Displays c Displays a Number
10
Rev. 10.31
Power LED Is Blinking Red

Now, let us look at the statuses indicated by the Seven-segment display LED when the Power LED is blinking red. When the Power LED is blinking red and the Sevensegment display LED flashes a number (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9), the self-test (POST) failed. The flashing number indicates the POST test ID of the failed test. Consult the Installation Manual for information about test IDs.
Power LED Is Blinking Green

Next, let us look at the statuses indicated by the Seven-segment display LED when the Power LED is blinking green. The Power LED blinks green while it is running the POST. During this time, the Seven-segment display LED will display the specific number of each test ID as it is run. When the test completes, a bar rotates clockwise around the Seven-segment display LED.
Power LED Is On/Green

HPs Intelligent Resilient Framework (IRF) allows you to cluster a group of interconnected switches to be managed as a single common fabric with one IP address; this increases network resilience, performance and availability while simultaneously reducing operational complexity.
3 10
Rev. 10.31
The Seven-segment display LED indicates the cluster status of the switch when the Power LED is on/green. In this case, the Seven-segment display LED should be interpreted as follows: Displaying C means the switch is the command switch in the IRF cluster. Displaying S means the switch is an IRF cluster member. Displaying c means the switch is waiting to join an IRF cluster. Displaying a specific number means that the number displayed is the switchs member ID in the IRF cluster.
Rev. 10.31
3 11

Switch LED State Meaning
Power LED is On/Green AND Mode LED is Blinking Green Seven-Segment Display LED Displays PoE Signs LED indicates the percentage of the switchs maximum PoE power that is being used
1 1
Rev. 10.31
Power LED Is On/Green and Mode LED Is Blinking Green

The Seven-segment display LED indicates one additional status on PoE-enabled switches. On a PoE-enabled switch, when the Mode LED is blinking green and the Power LED is on/green, the Seven-segment display LED indicates the percentage of the switchs maximum PoE power that is being used. For example, a single bar across the bottom of the LED indicates that zero to twenty percent of the totally PoE power the switch can provide is being used.
3 12
Rev. 10.31
Port LEDs
Port LEDs
A3610-24 Switch with 4 SFP Ports
LED in the top row corners
HP A3100-8-EI Switch Port LEDs to the side of switch

12 Rev. 10.31
Port LEDs communicate information regarding specific ports rather than information concerning the switch in general. This slide and the next several slides examine port LEDs and explain how to interpret their behavior. The slide illustrates two different locations for port LEDs. On some switches, such as the A3100-8-EI switch, all Ethernet port and switch LEDs are located together on one side of the switch, as shown above. On other switches, such as the A3610-24 switch with 4 SFP ports, however, switch LEDs are located together on one side of the switch, but each port has one port LED, which is located in the top corners of the top row of ports.
Rev. 10.31
3 13
Port LEDs at Speed Mode Setting

Port LEDs at Speed Mode Setting
LED State On Meaning Port is enabled. LED flashes quickly when sending and receiving link signal. Port operating at highest speed. Port operating at low speeds. Port has failed POST. Port is down. Mode LED is Steady Green
Port
Green Yellow
Blinking (yellow) Off
One Port LED per port
13
Rev. 10.31
Mode LED (Steady Green)
On most A-Series switches, each port has one LED. This Port LED interacts with the Mode LED to communicate information regarding the specific port, such as the active, link, duplex, and speed statuses of the port. As explained earlier, the operation of the Mode LED is controlled by the Mode button on the switch chassis, and the current selection is revealed by the LEDs color. Press the Mode button to change from one mode to the next. A green Mode LED means the Port LED is in speed mode. A green Port LED indicates that the port is operating at its maximum speed (1000 Mbps or100 Mbps, depending on the switch). The LED flashes quickly when the port is enabled and receiving a link signal. A yellow Port LED indicates that the port is operating at slower speeds (10/100 Mbps or10 Mbps, depending on the switch). The LED flashes quickly when the port is enabled and receiving a link signal. If the Port LED is off, then the port is either not receiving a link beat, or the port has been disabled.
3 14
Rev. 10.31
Port LEDs at Duplex Mode Setting
Port LEDs at Duplex Mode Setting

LED State On Meaning Port is enabled. LED flashes quickly when sending and receiving link signal. Port operating in full-duplex mode. Port operating in half-duplex mode. Port has failed POST. Port is down. Mode LED is Steady Yellow
Port
Green Yellow
Blinking (yellow) Off
One Port LED per port
14
Rev. 10.31
Mode LED (Steady Yellow)
You can use the Mode button to check the duplex mode of each port. Press the button until the Mode LED displays yellow. In Duplex Mode, a Port LED displays green if the port is operating in full-duplex mode (meaning data can be transmitted in two directions simultaneously). The Port LED displays yellow if the port is operating in half-duplex mode (meaning data can be transmitted in one direction at a time). If the Port LED is blinking yellow, the port failed POST. If the Port LED is Off, the port is not in use or is down.
Rev. 10.31
3 15
Port LEDs at PoE Mode Setting

LED State On Meaning Mode LED is Blinking Green
Green Yellow
Blinking
Port is supplying PoE power. PoE power supply failure. Connected device is not powered by PoE.
Port
Green
Connected devices power requirements exceed the ports maximum PoE power supply. Switch does not have enough available PoE power to support the connected device.
Yellow
Off
Port has failed POST. Port is down.
15
Rev. 10.31
You can use the Mode LED to check the PoE status on each port. Press the button until the Mode LED is blinking Green. When the Mode LED is set to PoE mode, a green Port LED indicates that the corresponding port is configured to provide PoE power to the connected device. If the Port LED is yellow, the PoE power supply has failed, or the connected device is not using PoE. If the Port LED is blinking green when the Mode LED is set to PoE mode, the switch does not have enough power to provide PoE to the connected device. If the Port LED is blinking yellow, the port failed POST. If the Port LED is Off, the port is not in use or is down.
3 16
Rev. 10.31
Dual-Personality Port LEDs

LED Port (speed mode) (PoE mode) State On (green) Blinking (yellow) Off On (green) Blinking (yellow) Off Meaning Port is operating at highest speed. LED flashes quickly when sending and receiving link signal. Port has failed POST. Port is down. Port is operating in full-duplex mode. LED flashes quickly when sending and receiving link signal. Port has failed POST. Port is down. Mode LED is Steady or Blinking Green
Mode LED is Steady Yellow
Port (duplex mode)
Mode LED
16 Rev. 10.31
Many A-Series switches feature dual-personality ports. Companies can use each dual-personality port for a Gigabit Ethernet link, or they can purchase an SFP transceiver, which supports other types of links. (Available SFP transceivers for ASeries switches are listed later in this module.) If the 10/100/1000Base-T port is in use, the LED for that port will reflect this use. Likewise, if the SFP port is in use, the LED for that port will be engaged.
Rev. 10.31
3 17
Module LEDs: Module Status

Module LEDs: Module Status
LED SLOT 1/ SLOT 2 State Green Blinking (yellow) Off Meaning Module is installed and operating normally. Module type is incorrect or is not working properly. No module is installed.
A5800-48G Switch with 2 Slots
Module Status LEDs
17
Rev. 10.31
This slide shows the Module LEDs, using the A5800-48G switch as an example. The Module LEDs on the other switches may not be exactly the same, but you should be able to easily identify them. You can also consult each switchs Installation Manual for a thorough explanation of the switchs LEDs. The A5800G switches have numbered LEDs, each one corresponding to one of the switchs module slots. For example, since the A5800-48G switch only has one module slot, the LED is labeled SLOT1. If the Module LED is on, a module has been installed in the corresponding slot and is operating correctly. If the lettered Module LED is off, the corresponding slot is empty. If the LED is blinking yellow, the corresponding module is not the correct type of module, not installed properly, or is malfunctioning.
3 18
Rev. 10.31
LEDs on the Installed Modules
LEDs on the Installed Modules

LED Speed Mode State* Green Yellow Port (SFP+ or 10/100/1000) Blinking (yellow) Off Duplex Mode State* Green Yellow Blinking (yellow) Off Meaning Port is operating at the highest speed (10 Gbps or 1000 Mbps). LED flashes quickly when port is sending or receiving data. Port is operating at the lowest speed (1 Gbps or 10/100 Mbps). LED flashes quickly when port is sending or receiving data. Port has failed POST. Port is down. Meaning Port is operating in full-duplex mode. LED flashes quickly when port is sending or receiving data. Port is operating in half-duplex mode. LED flashes quickly when port is sending or receiving data. Port has failed POST. Port is down.
*The Port LEDs on some modules are not affected by the Mode button.
18 Rev. 10.31
After you install a module, you can use the LEDs on the module itself to monitor the status of ports. Port LEDs on modules function in much the same way as those on the switch itself. On some modules, the Mode button changes the information that the Port LED reports. If you press the Mode button until the Mode LED displays a solid green, the modules Port LEDs are in speed mode. (This mode is also sometimes referred to as rate mode.) In this mode, a Port LED is green if the port is transmitting at its highest speed. Depending on the module installed, the highest speed might be 10 Gbps or 1000 Mbps. If a Port LED is yellow, the port is operating at its lowest speed, such as 1 Gbps or 10/100 Mbps. If you press the Mode button until the Mode LED displays yellow, the modules Port LEDs are in duplex mode. If the Port LED is green, the port is operating in full-duplex mode. (The ports on some modules support only full duplex.) If the Port LED is yellow, it is operating in half-duplex mode. On other modules, the Mode button does not affect the Port LED. For example, the modules installed into the A5120G-EI switches are not affected by the Mode button.
Rev. 10.31
3 19
HP A-Series Switch Modules

HP A-Series Switch Modules
LEDs A-Series Switch Modules

Installing Modules Requirements for Hot-Swapping Modules A-Series Switch Modules and Other Components
A-Series SFP Transceivers Connectors and Cables Redundant Power for A-Series Switches Switch Fan Tray
19 Rev. 10.31
This section explains how to both install and hot-swap modules. It also provides a table that lists the switches that provide expansion modules and the supported modules.
3 20
Rev. 10.31
Install a Module into an A-Series Switch

Install a Module into an A-Series Switch
1. Remove the blank panel covering the switchs module slot. 2. Insert the module into the guides. 3. Push in the two levers on the front of the module. 4. Tighten the screws.
20
Rev. 10.31
Prepare to Install the Module

Before you begin installing a module, make sure that the module is supported by the switch. Then, either remove a slot cover from the modular switch or remove a previously installed module. To remove a slot cover or a module, use a Phillips-head screwdriver to loosen the two screws securing the module in the slot. (You should retain the slot cover for future use.) After loosening the screws on an installed module, pull the levers at the bottom of the module toward you. You can then slide the module out of the switch.
Install the Module

Avoid electrostatic discharge problems by handling the modules only by their bulkheads. To install the module, complete these steps: 1. 2. Insert the module into the slot, using the guides on the side of the switch chassis. Push on the outer edge of the module (near both screws), sliding it in until you feel resistance. (Modules are designed with low-force connectors. Fully insert the module into its slot, but be careful to not push too vigorously.) Push in the two levers at the bottom of the module. This will slide the module further into the switch until it the face of the module is flush with the face of the switch. The levers will rest against the front of the module.
3.
Rev. 10.31
3 21
4.
After the module is fully inserted, insert the two retaining screws to secure the module in place. The screws should be tightened until they are secure but not over-tightened.
Note If you do not use one or more of the slots, make sure that the slot cover plate is still attached over the slot for safe operation and proper switch cooling. You should not have more than one module slot uncovered at a time.
3 22
Rev. 10.31
Hot-swapping and Hot-inserting Modules
Hot-swapping and Hot-inserting Modules

Hot-swappable:
Remove the current
module
Replace the module with
another of the same type
Hot-insert:
Install a new module
without rebooting
21
Rev. 10.31
A-Series switches that have expansion modules support hot-swapping, which allows you to replace a module without interrupting the operation of the switch. To hot-swap a module, you must replace a module with one of the same type. The replaced or new module is then immediately operational; you do not have to reboot the switch. Several A-Series switches ship with empty module slots. Since the A-Series supports hot-inserting, if at any point you need to add a module to an empty slot, you can do so without rebooting the switch.
Rev. 10.31
3 23
Modules for HP A3100-SI, A5120G-EI, A5500G-SI and A5500G-EI Switches

Modules for HP A3100-SI, A5120G-EI, A5500G-SI, and A5500G-EI Switches
Switch A3100-8-SI Switch with 1 extended module slot A3100-16-SI Switch with 2 extended module slots A3100-24-SI Switch with 2 Slots A5120-24G-EI Switch with 2 Slots A5120-24G-PoE-EI A5120-48G-EI Switch with 2 Slots A5120-48G-PoE-EI Switch with 2 Slots A5500G-SI Switch Series Module HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP 1 Port Gig-T 3100 SI Module 1 Port Gig-SX SC 3100 SI Module 1 Port Gig-LX SC 3100 SI Module S3100-SI 1PT 100MB FX MM MDL 1-Port 10/100Base-T POE 3100 SI Module 2-Port 10-GbE A5500 Local Connection Module 2-Port 10-GbE SFP+ A5500/E4800/E4500 Module 2-Port 10-GbE XFP A5500 Module 1-Port 10-GbE XFP A5500 Module
HP 1-Port 10-GbE XFP A5500 Module HP 2-Port 10-GbE XFP A5500 Module HP 2-Port 10-GbE A5500 Local Connection Module HP HP HP HP 1-Port 10-GbE XFP A5500 Module 2-Port 10-GbE XFP A5500 Module 2-Port 10-GbE A5500 Local Connection Module 2-Port GbE SFP A5500/E4800 Module
A5500G-EI Switch Series
22
Rev. 10.31
This slide lists the modules that can be installed in:

The three A3100-SI switches that support modules The four A5120G-EI switches that support modules The A5500G-SI Switch Series The A5500G-EI Switch Series
For an up-to-date list of modules, visit the HP Networking Web site.
3 24
Rev. 10.31
Modules and Other Components for HP A5800G Switches

Modules and Other Components for HP A5800G Switches
Switch A5800-24G-SFP Module HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP A5800 300W DC Power Supply A5500 150WAC Power Supply A5500 150WDC Power Supply A5800 2RU Spare Fan Assembly 4-Port 10-GbE SFP+ A5800 Module 2-Port 10-GbE SFP+ A5800 Module 16-Port SFP A5800 Module 16-Port Gig-T A5800 Module A5800 300W AC Power Supply A5800 750W DC Power Supply A5800 750W AC PoE Power Supply A5500 150WAC Power Supply A5500 150WDC Power Supply A5800 300W DC Power Supply 4-Port 10-GbE SFP+ A5800 Module 2-Port 10-GbE SFP+ A5800 Module 16-Port SFP A5800 Module 16-Port Gig-T A5800 Module
A5800-24G A5800-24G-PoE A5800-48G A5800-48G-PoE
23
Rev. 10.31
This page and the next one list the components for the A5800G Switch Series. Keep in mind that power supplies, fan trays, and PoE modules are hot-swappable. The A5800-24G-SFP switch supports the following modules, power supplies, fan modules, and PoE modules:

HP A5800 300W DC Power Supply HP A5500 150WAC Power Supply HP A5500 150WDC Power Supply HP A5800 2RU Spare Fan Assembly HP 4-Port 10-GbE SFP+ A5800 Module HP 2-Port 10-GbE SFP+ A5800 Module HP 16-Port SFP A5800 Module HP 16-Port Gig-T A5800 Module
The A5800-24G, A5800-24G-PoE, A5800-48G, and A5800-48G-PoE switches support the following modules:

HP A5800 300W AC Power Supply HP A5800 750W DC Power Supply

3 25
Rev. 10.31
HP A5800 750W AC PoE Power Supply HP A5500 150WAC Power Supply HP A5500 150WDC Power Supply HP A5800 300W DC Power Supply HP 4-Port 10-GbE SFP+ A5800 Module HP 2-Port 10-GbE SFP+ A5800 Module HP 16-Port SFP A5800 Module HP 16-Port Gig-T A5800 Module
For an up-to-date list of modules for each switch, visit the HP Networking Web site.
3 26
Rev. 10.31
Modules and Other Components for HP A5800G Switches (Cont.)
Modules and Other Components for HP A5800G Switches (Cont.)

Switch A5800-48G Switch with 2 Slots Module HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP A5800 300W AC Power Supply A5800 750W AC PoE Power Supply A5500 150WAC Power Supply A5500 150WDC Power Supply A5800 300W DC Power Supply A5820 VPN Firewall Module 4-Port 10-GbE SFP+ A5800 Module 2-Port 10-GbE SFP+ A5800 Module 16-Port SFP A5800 Module 16-Port Gig-T A5800 Module PoE A5800 Module
A5810 Switch (AC) A5810 Switch (DC)
24
Rev. 10.31
The A5800-48G switch with 2 slots supports the following modules:

HP A5800 300W AC Power Supply HP A5800 750W AC PoE Power Supply HP A5500 150WAC Power Supply HP A5500 150WDC Power Supply HP A5800 300W DC Power Supply HP A5820 VPN Firewall Module HP 4-Port 10-GbE SFP+ A5800 Module HP 2-Port 10-GbE SFP+ A5800 Module HP 16-Port SFP A5800 Module HP 16-Port Gig-T A5800 Module HP PoE A5800 Module
The A5810 switch supports the following modules:


3 27
Rev. 10.31
HP A-Series SFP Transceivers

HP A-Series SFP Transceivers
LEDs A-Series Switch Modules A-Series SFP Transceivers
Installing an SFP transceiver Disconnecting the Cable Connected to the SFP Transceiver Removing an SFP transceiver Fast Ethernet SFP Transceivers Gigabit SFP Transceivers 10-GbE SFP+ Transceivers
Connectors and Cables Redundant Power for A-Series Switches Switch Fan Tray
25 Rev. 10.31
The next section explains how to install or remove an SFP transceiver. It also lists the A-Series switches and the SFP transceivers they support.
3 28
Rev. 10.31
Installing an SFP Transceiver

Installing an SFP Transceiver
1. Pivot the clasp on the transceiver up- it should catch a knob on the top of the transceiver. 2. Hold both sides of the transceiver and gently push it into the socket until you feel the spring tabs catch in the socket.
26 Rev. 10.31
To install an SFP transceiver, complete the following steps: 1. 2. 3. Remove any fibers from the transceiver before installing it. Pivot the clasp on the transceiver up until it catches a knob on the top of the transceiver. Hold the transceiver on both sides and push the transceiver into the socket until it makes firm contact with the socket. You should be able to feel the top and bottom clasp release catch.
If you are installing a transceiver in an area with limited space, you can gently push on the front face of the transceiver instead of holding it by the sides during installation.
Rev. 10.31
3 29
Disconnecting the Cable Connected to an SFP Transceiver
Disconnecting the Cable Connected to an SFP Transceiver

1. Use your thumb to apply gentle pressure to the connector. 2. Pull the clasp on the cable out.
27
Rev. 10.31
To disconnect a cable connected to an SFP transceiver, complete the following steps: 1. Use your thumb to apply gentle pressure to the connector and loop your forefinger through the ring attached to the cable connector, as shown in the picture above. 2. Pull the clasp on the cable out in a parallel direction. It is very important to make sure you pull the cable directly backward; if you try to pull the cable in a direction that is not parallel to the socket, you could damage the clasp or triangular fillister, which is a part of the socket that connects to the clasp to keep the cable from slipping out while installed.
3 30
Rev. 10.31
Removing an SFP Transceiver
Removing an SFP Transceiver

1. Disconnect the fiber cable from the transceiver. 2. Pivot the clap down to a horizontal position. 3. Gently pull the transceiver out of the socket.
28
Rev. 10.31
To remove an SFP transceiver, complete the following steps: 1. 2. 3. Disconnect the fiber cable from the transceiver. Pivot the clasp down to a horizontal position. Hold the transceiver on both sides and gently pull it out of the socket.
Make sure to pivot the clasp down to a horizontal position. Doing so releases the spring tabs from the socket. If you try to pull the transceiver out with the clasp in vertical position and the spring tabs still caught in the socket, you could damage the spring tabs or the transceiver socket.
Rev. 10.31
3 31
Fast Ethernet SFP Transceivers

A3100-EI A3600-EI A3610 A5120G-SI A5120G-EI A5500G-EI A5800G
HP X1 100M 15 SFP LC FX HP X1 100M 10 SFP LC LX HP X1 100M 15 SFP LC BX 10-U HP X1 100M 15 SFP LC BX 10-D HP X1 100M 10 SFP LC LH40 HP X1 100M 10 SFP LC LH80
29
Rev. 10.31
This table shows which A-Series switches support Fast Ethernet SFP transceivers.
3 32
Rev. 10.31
Gigabit SFP Transceivers

Gigabit SFP Transceivers
A3100EI HP X125 1G SFP LC SX HP X120 1G SFP LC LX HP X120 1G SFP LC BX 10-U HP X120 1G SFP LC BX 10-D HP X125 1G SFP LC LH40 1310nm HP X120 1G SFP LC LH40 1550nm HP X125 1G SFP LC LH70 HP X125 1G SFP RJ45 T
30 Rev. 10.31
A3100SI
A3600EI
A3610
A5120GSI
A5120GEI
A5500GEI
A5800G
This table shows which A-Series switches support Gigabit SFP transceivers. (Additional Gigabit SFP transceivers are listed on the following page.)
Rev. 10.31
3 33
Gigabit SFP Transceivers (Cont.)

Gigabit SFP Transceivers (Cont.)
The remaining Gigabit SFP transceivers are supported only by the A3100-EI Switch Series:
HP X170 1G SFP LC LH70 1470 HP X170 1G SFP LC LH70 1490 HP X170 1G SFP LC LH70 1510 HP X170 1G SFP LC LH70 1530 HP X170 1G SFP LC LH70 1550 HP X170 1G SFP LC LH70 1570 HP X170 1G SFP LC LH70 1590 HP X170 1G SFP LC LH70 1610
31
Rev. 10.31
The A3100-EI Switch Series also supports the Gigabit SFP transceivers listed below. HP X170 1G SFP LC LH70 1470 HP X170 1G SFP LC LH70 1490 HP X170 1G SFP LC LH70 1510 HP X170 1G SFP LC LH70 1530 HP X170 1G SFP LC LH70 1550 HP X170 1G SFP LC LH70 1570 HP X170 1G SFP LC LH70 1590 HP X170 1G SFP LC LH70 1610
3 34
Rev. 10.31
10-GbE SFP+ Transceivers

10-GbE SFP+ Transceivers
A5800G Switch Series
HP X130 10G SFP+ LC SR HP X130 10G SFP+ LC LRM HP X130 10G SFP+ LC LR
32
Rev. 10.31
This table lists the 10-GbE SFP+ transceivers the A5800G Switch Series supports: HP X130 10G SFP+ LC SR HP X130 10G SFP+ LC LRM HP X130 10G SFP+ LC LR
Rev. 10.31
3 35
Connectors and Cables

Connectors and Cables
LEDs A-Series Switch Modules A-Series SFP Transceivers Connectors and Cables

Copper Cabling System Cable Specifications Connectors Auto-Sensing MDIX Technology
Redundant Power for A-Series Switches Switch Fan Tray

33 Rev. 10.31
This section examines the connector and cable specifications for A-Series switches. The interface-connector-cable combination can have a significant impact on the performance of the network and should therefore be given careful consideration. The section also discusses the auto-sensing MDIX feature available on every A-Series switch port.
3 36
Rev. 10.31
Copper Cabling System

Copper Cabling System
TIA/EIA-568-A defines a performance rating system for UTP cable and connecting hardware:
Category 3 performance is defined up to 16MHz. Category 4 performance is defined up to 20MHz. Category 5 performance is defined up to 100MHz. Category 6 performance is defined up to 200MHz.
Impedance and structural return loss Attenuation Propagation delay
34
Rev. 10.31
In 1991, the Electronic Industries Association published standard EIA-568, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, which specified the use of voice-grade unshielded twisted pair (UTP) as well as shielded twisted pair for in-building data applications. At that time, the specification was felt to be adequate for the range of frequencies and data rates found in office environments. Up to that time, the principal interest for LANs was in the range of data rates from 1 Mbps to 16 Mbps. As users migrated to higher performance workstations and applications, companies were increasingly interested in providing LANs that could operate up to 100 Mbps over inexpensive cable. In response to this need, the Electronic Industries Association issued EIA-568-A in 1995. The new standard reflects advances in cable and connector design and test methods. It specifies 150-ohm shielded twisted pair and 100-ohm unshielded twisted pair. EIA-568-A recognizes four categories of UTP cabling:
Rev. 10.31
Category 3UTP cables and associated connecting hardware that have transmission characteristics specified up to 16MHz. Category 4UTP cables and associated connecting hardware that have transmission characteristics specified up to 20MHz. Category 5UTP cables and associated connecting hardware that have transmission characteristics specified up to 100MHz. Category 6UTP cables and associated connecting hardware that have transmission characteristics specified up to 200MHz.
3 37
Of these, Category 3 and Category 5 cable have received the most attention for LAN applications. Category 3 corresponds to the voice-grade cable found in many office buildings. Over limited distances, and with proper design, data rates of up to 16Mbps should be achievable with Category 3. Category 5 is a data-grade cable that is becoming increasingly common for pre-installation in new office buildings. Over limited distances and with proper design, data rates of up to 100Mbps should be achievable with Category 5. A key difference between Category 3 and Category 5 cable is the number of twists in the cable per unit distance. Category 5 is much more tightly twisted, typically 3 to 4 twists per inch compared to 3 to 4 twists per foot for Category 3. The tighter twisting is more expensive but provides much better performance than Category 3. EIA-568-A specifies the expected performance of Category 3 and 5 UTP, as well as the more expensive shielded twisted pair STP. The first parameter used for comparison, attenuation, is fairly straightforward. The strength of a signal falls off with distance over any transmission medium. For copper wire media, attenuation is generally logarithmic and therefore is typically expressed as a constant number of decibels per unit distance. Attenuation introduces three considerations for the designer: First, a received signal must have sufficient magnitude so that the electronic circuitry in the receiver can detect and interpret the signal. Second, the signal must maintain a level sufficiently higher than noise in order to be received without error. Third, attenuation is an increasing function of frequency.
Near-end crosstalk, as applied to twisted-pair wiring systems, is the coupling of the signal from one pair of conductors to another pair. These conductors may be the metal pins in a connector or wire pairs in a cable. The term near end refers to coupling that takes place when the transmit signal entering the link couples back to the receive conductor pair at that same end of the link; that is, the near transmitted signal is picked up by the near receive pair. Enhanced Category 5 and Category 6 specify cable performance characteristics to higher levels.
3 38
Rev. 10.31
Cable Specifications
Cable Specifications
Interface Type
100/1000Base-T 1000Base-LX 1000Base-LH 1000Base-LX 1000Base-SX 1000Base-SX 100Base-FX 10GBASE-ER 10GBASE-LR 10GBASE-SR 10GBASE-LRM
35 Rev. 10.31
Cable Supported
Category 5 UTP Single-mode (9 micron) Single-mode (9 micron) Multimode (62.5 or 50 micron) Multimode (62.5 micron) Multimode (50 micron) Multimode (62.5 or 50 micron) Single-mode (9 micron) Single-mode (9 micron) Multimode (62.5 micron) and Multimode (50 micron) Multimode (62.5 or 50 micron)
Maximum Distance
100 meters 10 kilometers 70 kilometers 550 meters 220 meters 500 meters 2 kilometers 40 kilometers 10 kilometers 33 meters and 300m 220 meters
When the IEEE began to define the specifications for transmission of Ethernet frames at 1 Gbps, they recognized the need to allow it to work over a variety of media. The approved cable types and their maximum distances are shown in the table above. Note that you must use the best-quality fiber cables to achieve the maximum distances. (These guidelines are for a point-to-point link between two switches or between a switch and a station.) An important goal for Gigabit Ethernet is to provide backward compatibility with existing standards for 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, and 100Base-FX. Although the 10Base-T standard allows for voice-grade unshielded twisted pair cabling (Category 3 UTP), 100Base-T requires data-grade cable known as Category 5 UTP. To support 1000Base-T (known as IEEE 802.3ab), the Category 5 UTP standard has been enhanced to impose some additional restrictions. When using 1000Base-T over existing wiring, you must verify that the cabling complies with Category 5E (addendum 5 to the TIA-568-A standard, which is also known as ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A-5). Many existing Category 5 installations are suitable for gigabit over copper, but because signals are sent over all four pairs, the cabling system must adhere to using all four pairs and should be tested for attenuation, nearend crosstalk (NEXT), and far-end crosstalk (FEXT). 1000Base-T can be used when the distance between switches is short. For example, it may be used for several switches in the same room or for short distances between a switch and servers with gigabit network adapters. 1000Base-T can also be used over distances up to 100 meters between floors or wiring closets.
Rev. 10.31
3 39
Another option for connecting network devices is fiber-optic cable, which is available in single mode and multimode. One difference between these two types of cables is in the diameter of the glass channel down the center of the cable (also known as the core). Another difference is in the way that signals are transmitted through the core. In single mode fiber, a laser generates a single signal that travels straight down the center of the channel in what is called coaxial mode. The signal is constrained in a narrow (9-micron diameter) core and is carried over long distances. With single mode fiber, the 1000Base-LX standard specifies up to 10 kilometers; however, single mode fiber is capable of carrying a signal up to 70 kilometers using long-haul transceivers known as Gigabit-LH. In multimode fiber, the transmitter generates multiple light signals that are reflected off the internal walls of the cable. The variance in propagation of the signals translates into a shorter distance before attenuation makes the signal indistinguishable. In general, a smaller diameter constrains the signal more than a larger diameter; 50-micron multimode fiber allows a distance up to 500 meters, while 62.5-micron fiber supports a distance up to 220 meters. The 100Base-FX standard specifies multimode fiber at a maximum supported distance of 2 kilometers. So, while the media may be compatible for an upgrade from 100Base-FX to 1000Base-SX or LX, you should always verify the distance. Gigabit Ethernet requires single mode cable for distances that are over 550 meters. At times you may need to use multimode fiber at distances exceeding 550 meters. In this situation you may need to consider how many available strands of fiber are currently installed and determine whether traffic could be carried over multiple links. Although 100Base-FX transceivers use LEDs to generate light signals, both 1000BaseLX and 1000Base-SX transceivers use lasers due to Gigabit Ethernets high data rate. However, the properties of laser-generated signals make it better suited to single mode fiber; multiple light rays generated by a laser (over multimode fiber) will interfere with each other, severely limiting the maximum distance. It should be noted that, with the exception of Gigabit-LH, these are standards-driven specifications. Recent developments in technologies have allowed for greater distances in the gigabit fiber technologies. Much of this is dependent upon the quality of the fiber used in the installation. Many vendors now claim greater distances than previously stated when the standards were finalized. In some situations HP now supports 10 kilometers on single-mode fiber for Gigabit Ethernet. IEEE 802.3ae defines the standard for 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10 GbE), which provides data rates of 10 gigabits per second over fiber optic cable. 10BASE-ER and 10GBASE-LR run on single-mode fiber optic cable. 10GBASE-SR and 10BASE-LRM run on multimode fiber optic cable.
3 40
Rev. 10.31
Connectors
Connectors
LC
MTRJ
RJ-45
36
Rev. 10.31
The connector type describes the port pin assignments and the attachment port. The most common interface on todays switches and routers is the RJ-45. It supports UTP cable (Category 3, 4, 5, 5e, and 6) and data rates from 10 to 1000 Mbps (maximum distance is 100 m). Another common interface is the MTRJ. It is a multi-mode fiber connector with the same form factor as the RJ-45, but internally it has a send and a transmit fiber. It supports a 100 Mbps data rate up to a distance of 2 km. For fiber optic ports, there are several port connectors. Typically, the LC connectors attach to SFP transceivers or mini-GBICs. They provide the smallest footprint and thus the greatest port density.
Note D4 is an older-style connector found in older military and government infrastructures.
The interface-connector-cable combination can have a significant impact on the performance of the network. Be careful and note that a particular type of connector does not ensure a particular type of cable. An LC could be connecting either multimode or single mode. The SFP transceivers or mini-GBICs look the same, so you must be sure to read the label.
Rev. 10.31
3 41
Auto-Sensing MDIX Ports
Auto-Sensing MDIX Ports

All A-Series switches support auto-MDIX:
Automatically reverses transmit and receive pins as needed Allows you to use a straight through cable even when the connecting
device requires a crossover cable

Also automatically negotiate speed with end device
37
Rev. 10.31
By default, A-Series switch ports provide auto-MDIX, which automatically reverses transmit and receive pins as needed. This means that even in situations in which you would normally need a crossover cable, you can still use a straight-through cable. For example, some DSL routers require a crossover cable. Because A-Series switches have auto-MDIX, however, you can use a regular straight-through cable to connect to these types of devices. In addition, A-Series switch ports automatically negotiate speed with the end device. You can change this default setting to configure a particular speed.
3 42
Rev. 10.31
Redundant Power for A-Series Switches

Redundant Power for A-Series Switches
LEDs A-Series Switch Modules A-Series SFP Transceivers Connectors and Cables Redundant Power for A-Series Switches

Two Power Supplies Installing a Power Supply External RPS
Switch Fan Tray

38 Rev. 10.31
This section examines options for providing A-Series switches with sources of redundant power. Redundant power protects the entire network: if the primary source of power fails, the network will continue operating without disruption.
Rev. 10.31
3 43
Two Power Supplies

Two Power Supplies
The A5800-48G switch with 2 slots and the A5800-24GSFP switch support two power supplies. The power supply modules are hot-swappable and provide backup in case one power supply fails.
39
Rev. 10.31
Some switches support redundant, load-sharing power supplies, which are installed in the back of the switch. To provide true redundancy, this second power supply should be connected to a different AC power source than the other supply. Then, if one AC power source fails, the switch will continue to run.
3 44
Rev. 10.31
Install a Power Supply

1. Insert the power supply into an open power supply slot. 2. Push the power supply all the way back until the power supply face is flush with the back face of the switch. 3. Tighten the screws.
40
Rev. 10.31
To install the power supply, complete the following steps: 1. Using a Philips-head screwdriver, loosen and remove the screws holding the slot cover or existing power supply in place. 2. Install the power supply into an open power slot as shown in this slide.
Caution The switch power supplies are hot-swappable; they can be installed while the switch is receiving power from the supply in another slot. But, as indicated by the caution statement on the power supply, the supply must not be connected to AC power before being installed.
3. Push the power supply all the way into the switch chassis until the face of the power supply is flush with the back face of the switch. 4. Insert and tighten the screws to secure the power supply.
Rev. 10.31
3 45
External RPS Devices for A-Series Switches

External RPS Devices for A-Series Switches
A-Series switches support:
HP RPS 1000 A3 HP RPS 800 A HP RPS 500 A3
41
Rev. 10.31
A-Series switches also support external power supplies, which provide power redundancy. External redundant power supplies are crucial to providing high network availability by ensuring that connected switches can continue operating even if the main power supply fails. Customers can use one of three RPSs with A-Series switches:

RPS 1000 A3 RPS 800 A RPS 500 A3
In addition to providing redundancy, the RPS 1000 A3 provides additional PoE.
3 46
Rev. 10.31
HP RPS 1000 A3 (8A Outputs)

Redundant power for switches Additional power for PoE-enabled switches A-Series switches support:
A3600-EI Switch Series A3600-24-EI A3600-48-EI A3600-24-SFP-EI A3610 Switch Series A3610-24 with 4 SFP Ports A3610-24 with 2 GigT and 2 SFP Ports A3610-24-SFP A3610-48
42
Rev. 10.31
The RPS 1000 A3 is the only RPS that provides additional power for PoE-enabled switches. The unit has two power inputs and eight total output connections; two of the outputs are 25A (amp) outputs, and other six are 8A. The slide shows the switches that can be connected to the 8A outputs. The RPS 1000 A3 provides up to 2900 W of power with two power modules installed. The RPS 1000 A3 (8A outputs) can be used in conjunction with the following:

A3600-24-EI A3600-48-EI A3600-24-SFP-EI A3610-24 with 4 SFP Ports A3610-24 with 2 GigT and 2 SFP Ports A3610-24-SFP A3610-48
Rev. 10.31
3 47

Redundant power for switches Additional power for PoE-enabled switches A-Series switches support:
A3610 Switch Series A3610-24 with 4 SFP Ports A3610-24 with 2 GigT and 2 SFP Ports A3610-24-SFP A3610-48 A5800G Switch Series A5800-24G-PoE A5800-48G-PoE A5800-48G with 2 slots
43
Rev. 10.31
The RPS 1000 A3 can be used in conjunction with the following switches and those listed on the next page:

A3610-24 with 4 SFP Ports A3610-24 with 2 GigT and 2 SFP Ports A3610-24-SFP A3610-48 A5800-24G-PoE A5800-48G-PoE A5800-48G switch with 2 slots
3 48
Rev. 10.31
HP RPS 1000 A3 (25A Outputs, Cont.)
HP RPS 1000 A3 (25A Outputs, Cont.)

A3600-EI Switch Series A3600-24-SFP-EI A3600-48-PoE-EI A3600-24-EI A3600-48-EI A3600-24-SFP-EI A5120G-EI Switch Series A5120-24G-PoE-EI A5120-48G-PoE-EI with 2 Slots A5500G-SI Switch Series A5500-24G-PoE-SI A5500-48G-PoE-SI A5500G-EI Switch Series A5500-24G-PoE-EI A5500-48G-PoE-EI A5500-24G DC-EI
44
Rev. 10.31
This table continues the list of switches that can be used with the1000 A3 (25A outputs):

A3600-24-SFP-EI A3600-48-PoE EI A3600-24-EI A3600-48-EI A3600-24-SFP-EI A5120-24G-PoE-EI A5120-48G-PoE-EI Switch with 2 Slots A5500-24G-PoE-SI A5500-48G-PoE-SI A5500-24G-PoE-EI A5500-48G-PoE-EI A5500-24G DC-EI
Rev. 10.31
3 49
HP RPS 800 A
HP RPS 800 A
Redundant power for switches A-Series switches support:
A5500G-EI Switch Series A5500-48G-EI A5800G Switch Series A5800-24G A5800-24G-SFP
45
Rev. 10.31
The RPS 800 A provides redundant power for A-Series switches. Unlike the RPS 1000 A3, however, the RPS 800 A does not provide PoE. The 800-A supports the following switches:

A5500-48G-EI A5800-24G A5800-24G-SFP
3 50
Rev. 10.31
HP RPS 500 A3
HP RPS 500 A3
Redundant power for switches A-Series switches support:
A3600-EI Switch Series A3600-24-EI A3600-48-EI A3600-24-SFP-EI A3610 Switch Series A3610-24 with 4 SFP Ports A3610-24 with 2 GigT and 2 SFP Ports A3610-24-SFP A3610-48 A5120G-EI Switch Series A5120-24G-EI with 2 Slots A5120-24G-EI A5120-48G-EI with 2 Slots A5120-48G-EI
46
Rev. 10.31
The RPS 500 A3 provides redundant power for A-Series switches. It does not provide additional PoE. It supports the following switches:

A3600-24-EI A3600-48-EI A3600-24-SFP-EI A3610-24 with 4 SFP Ports A3610-24 with 2 GigT and 2 SFP Ports A3610-24-SFP A3610-48 A5120-24G-EI Switch with 2 Slots A5120-24G-EI A5120-48G-EI Switch with 2 Slots A5120-48G-EI
Rev. 10.31
3 51
HP RPS 500 A3 (Cont.)
HP RPS 500 A3 (Cont.)

A5500G-EI Series A5500-24G-EI A5500-24G DC-EI A5500G-SI Series A5500-24G-SI A5500-48G-SI
47
Rev. 10.31
The 500 A3 RPS also supports the following switches:

A5500-24G-EI A5500-24G DC-EI A5500-24G-SI A5500-48G-SI
3 52
Rev. 10.31
Switch Fan Tray

Switch Fan Tray
LEDs HP A-Series Switch Modules HP A-Series SFP Transceivers Connectors and Cables Redundant Power for A-Series Switches Switch Fan Tray
Hot-Swappable Switch Fan Tray
48
Rev. 10.31
This section examines the A-Series switches which support hot-swappable fan trays, and provides instructions on how to swap out the fans.
Rev. 10.31
3 53
Switch Fan Tray

Switch Fan Tray
Supported on:
A5800-24G-SFPswitch A5800-48G with 2 slots
switch (shown here)
49
Rev. 10.31
The A5800-24G-SFP switch and the A5800-48G with 2 slots switch have fan trays that can be replaced if a problem occurs. Both switches ship with the fans already installed, but replacements can be hot-swapped in case a fan tray fails. The fan trays for each switch are listed below.

LSW1BFAN (For the A5800-24G-SFP switch) LSW1FAN (For the A5800-48G switch with 2 slots)
Replacing Fan Trays on the A5800-24G-SFP Switch and the A5800-48G Switch with 2 Slots
You can hot-swap the fan trays on the A5800-24G-SFP switch and the A5800-48G switch with 2 slots as long as the new tray is installed within 2 minutes of removing the previous tray. If the system operates for more than two minutes without the fan trays installed, the chassis will overheat. For both switches, the fan trays are on the back panel. To replace the fan tray, complete these steps: 1. Loosen and then remove the screws securing the fan tray in place. 2. Using the handle on the installed fan tray, pull the fan tray out of the switch chassis. 3. Insert the new fan tray into the switch chassis and push until it is firmly seated. 4. Insert and tighten the screws on the new fan tray.
3 54
Rev. 10.31
Summary
Summary
Use LEDs to monitor status of the switch and to troubleshoot problems Learn how to install modules and transceivers. Review RPS options for A-Series switches Learn how to install fan trays.
50
Rev. 10.31
This module introduced you to the basic hardware components for A-Series switches. To review what you have learned, make sure that you can explain the basic types of LEDs on A-Series switches and review the information these LEDs can provide you when you are at a customer site. In addition, you should have learned how to install modules and SFP transceivers as well as switch fan trays. Finally, this module reviewed review the RPS options for ASeries switches.
Rev. 10.31
3 55
3 56
Rev. 10.31
Basic Configuration of HP A-Series Switches

Module 4
Objectives
In the previous module, you learned how to identify fault conditions and other problems on an HP A-Series switch by examining its LEDs. To deal with these problems, you might need to collect more information from one of the switchs management interfaces, bypass a fault configuration or install a new software image. Or, if you are installing a new switch to replace a failed one, you must get the switch up and running the customers configuration. You will now learn the basics of gaining access management to HP A-Series switches, navigating their management interfaces, and completing the necessary tasks. By the time that you have completed this module, you will be able to:

Manage configurations and software on A-Series switches Access the A-Series switches CLI out-of-band and in-band Identify the command levels of the CLI and navigate the CLI Use the CLI help functions to find the correct syntax for commands Perform basic management tasks in the CLI Replace a failed switch and, if possible, restore the customers configuration Access the Boot ROM menu to solve problems with lost passwords or corrupted software Set up access to the Web browser interface
Rev. 10.31
4 1
HP A-Series Software Images and Configuration Files


Software Images Configuration Files
Management Access with the CLI Management Access with the Web Browser Interface Collect Diagnostic Information Solve Problems Using the Boot ROM Menu and CLI Replace a Switch
Rev. 10.31
Later in this module, you will learn some processes for solving the problems that you learned how to identify in the previous module. For these processes to make sense, however, you first need some background knowledge. The first three sections of this module provide this background knowledge, starting with the concepts of software images and configuration files. The operating system (OS) for HP A switches is contained in a software image file that is loaded when the switch boots up. The switchs particular settings, such as IP settings, port settings, and so forth, are stored in configuration files. This section teaches you about how these files are stored, managed, and loaded for active use. You must understand these concepts so that you can correctly install new software when a switchs software is corrupted or otherwise not working. Similarly, you might need to download a working configuration file to a switch with faulty settings or to a replacement switch.
4 2
Rev. 10.31
Switch Boot Process
Switch Boot Process
Boot ROM Two pieces of code
1 Boot ROM runs Hardware is initialized System software image runs
System software image
Rev. 10.31
When you apply power to a switch, the switch begins to boot. First the Boot ROM code is loaded. This code manages the boot process. As this code runs, the switchs hardware is initialized and checked. When this step completes successfully, the Boot ROM calls up and begins to boot the system software image, which contains the actual OS for the switch.
Rev. 10.31
4 3
Obtaining Software Image Files
Obtaining Software Image Files
A-Series switch
FTP server TFTP server
NVRAM flash memory Stored as files
System software
System software
System software
Rev. 10.31
The Boot ROM code and system software image are stored in the switchs flash memory (its non-volatile random access memory [NVRAM]), which is maintained when the switch is powered down. HP sometimes issues updates to the software. This software can be downloaded to the switchs NVRAM from a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) or Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server. On most A-Series switches, the Boot ROM and the system software are stored in separate files and are updated separately. Most updates affect the system software image only, but sometimes the Boot ROM code must be updated first. The release notes should indicate whether you need to do so.
4 4
Rev. 10.31
Managing HP A-Series Software Images
Managing HP A-Series Software Images

A-Series switch
NVRAM (flash memory)
System software
Main attribute Backup attribute
System software System software
System software
System software
6 Rev. 10.31
An HP A-Series switch can store multiple Boot ROM and software image files in its flash memory, but only one image runs. You can control the image to which the switch is booted by setting the main and backup attributes. The switch boots the software with the main attribute first. If this software fails to boot for some reason, the switch attempts to boot the software with the backup attribute. Only one software image file has the main attribute, and only one has the backup attribute. However, the same file can have both attributes. The Boot ROM code, when it is stored in a separate file, is similarly marked with main and backup attributes.
Rev. 10.31
4 5
Startup-Config and Running-Config
Startup-Config and Running-Config
A-Series switch
1 System boots up
Startup-config
Running-config Running-config
Configuration is changed
File saved in NVRAM flash memory
Rev. 10.31
When the switch boots up, it applies the settings that are stored in one of the configuration files stored in flash memory. This file is called the startup-config file because it is applied whenever the switch boots up. The settings that are loaded from the startup-config become the running-config. You can make changes to the running-config, and the new settings become the new running-config. The running-config is stored in RAM and is not preserved when the switch is powered down.
4 6
Rev. 10.31
Saving Configuration Files
Saving Configuration Files

A-Series switch
Running-config
Configuration is saved NVRAM (flash memory)
Named file Named file Named file
Rev. 10.31
You can preserve the settings in the running-config by saving them to a named file in the flash memory. The HP A-Series switches can store multiple configuration files.
Rev. 10.31
4 7
Selecting the Startup-Config File
Selecting the Startup-Config File

A-Series switch
Saved file
Main attribute Backup attribute
Startup-config
Saved file Saved file Saved file

9 Rev. 10.31
Startup-config if main fails
Saved file
Just as an A-Series switch can store multiple software images, but only one is booted, only one of the saved configuration files is the startup-config that is applied when the switch boots up. The switch first uses the saved file that is marked with the main attribute as the startup-config. If this file is corrupted and cannot be applied, the file with the backup attribute becomes the startup-config file. The rules for setting the main and backup configuration file are the same as those for image files:

One file can be marked with the main attribute One file can be marked with the backup attribute The main and backup file can be the same file (but do not have to be)
4 8
Rev. 10.31
Management Access with the CLI

Management Access with the CLI
HP A-Series Software Images and Configuration Files Management Access with the CLI

Introduction to the CLI CLI Privilege Levels Accessing the CLI In-band and Out-of-Band Local and Remote Management Authentication Navigating the CLI CLI Tips and Shortcuts
Management Access with the Web Browser Interface Collect Diagnostic Information Solve Problems Using the Boot ROM Menu and CLI Replace a Switch
10 Rev. 10.31
You will now learn about different ways to access and manage HP A-Series switches, beginning with an introduction to the CLI, which is the main management interface for these switches. You will learn about the command privilege levels so that you can obtain the correct level for the commands that you need to use. You will find out how to access the CLI in several different ways, and how to authenticate when necessary. You will then learn the basics of navigating the CLI with the help of some tips and shortcuts.
Rev. 10.31
4 9
Management Interfaces
You can manage HP A-Series switches in several different ways. In a Command Line Interface (CLI), you type commands that change the switchs configuration settings. All settings can be configured through the CLI, making it the most comprehensive management option. A Web browser interface is a Graphical User Interface (GUI) that you access by contacting the switch with your Web browser. You might find this interface easier to use, particularly because it includes online help for various settings. However, you may not be able to reach this interface when the switch is experiencing problems, making the CLI your principal management option. One final notethe HP A-Series switches can participate in an SNMP solution. In such a solution, network administrators manage a solution centrally from an SNMP server, which collects information from and issues commands to SNMP agents residing on infrastructure devices. Because you will be managing individual devices, this course will not discuss SNMP.
4 10
Rev. 10.31
HP A-Series CLI Command Levels
HP A-Series CLI Command Levels

HP A-Series switches
0
CLI Command levels
Visitor Diagnosis commands such as ping and traceroute Monitor Basic read-only commands System Services configuration commands (read-write) Manager System (files, users) management commands (read-write)
1 2
12
Rev. 10.31
On HP A-Series switches, each CLI command is associated with one of four command levels:
Level 0Visitor Visitor level commands, such as ping and traceroute, help you diagnose a device and find connectivity problems.
Level 1Monitor Monitor commands display information about configuration settings and event logs. They also provide debugging for more in-depth troubleshooting. These commands are read-only; in other words, the command reads information from the current configuration or stored logs, but they do not write changes to the switchs configuration.
Level 2System System commands, which are read-write, primarily relate to configuring the services that the switch provides. For example, configuring IP settings, port settings, routing protocols, and so forth, are system level commands. Some commands related to saving configuration changes are also found at the system level.
Rev. 10.31
4 11
Level 3Manage Manage commands, which are also read-write, deal with managing the switchs file system as well as management users. For example, at this level, you can add management users, change the users rights or password, and so forth.
The command levels are user-configurable (using manage level commands). For example, you could change a particular display command from monitor level to system level. However, most customers leave the command levels at the default settings, so when you learn the syntax for particular commands a bit later, you will learn the default level for that command.
4 12
Rev. 10.31
Access to the CLI
Access to the CLI
In-band
Out-of-band
Ethernet connection
Direct serial connection to console port
13
Rev. 10.31
There are two basic ways that you can reach the CLI:
In-band With in-band access, you use the Ethernet connection on your management station to contact the switch over the network at its management IP address. You can connect your station directly to one of the switchs ports, as shown in the slide, but this is not necessary. As long as the switch has network connectivity, you can reach it from any port in the LAN.
Out-of-band An out-of-band connection is devoted to the communication between your management station and the switch. Using a serial cable, you connect the console port on your station directly to the console port on the switch. This form of access does not require the switch to have network connectivity, which often makes it a good choice when the device is experiencing problems. You do, however, need physical access to the switch.
Rev. 10.31
4 13
In-band Access
In-band Access
Telnet SSH (encrypted)
Ethernet connection
CLI
<ASwitch> ping 172.16.1.2 User interface PING 172.16.1.2: 56 data bytes, VTY0 - N press CTRL_C to break C User privilege level = 0 Reply from 172.16.1.2: bytes=56
Sequence=1 ttl=255 time=25 ms
14
Rev. 10.31
You can use one of two protocols to establish an in-band management session to the CLI:

Telnet SSH
The protocols seem similar from a users viewpointyou will see the same CLIbut SSH is more secure because it encrypts the traffic flowing between the switch and your management station. The encryption prevents hackers from capturing packets and learning information about the customers infrastructure. You will need a terminal session application that supports Telnet or SSH to establish the session with the switch. Examples include TeraTerm and PuttY, which are freely downloadable. When you establish an in-band management session with the CLI, the switch assigns you to a user interface, which controls the settings for the session. The user interfaces for in-band sessions are labeled VTY. Each management user who connects to the switch at the same time is assigned to a different interface. The interfaces are differentiated by number, with the first user being assigned to 0, the next to 1, and so forth. The number of separate sessions that are allowed varies from device to device.
4 14
Rev. 10.31
Each user interface (for example, VTY0 and VTY1) has its own settings. The most important setting for your purposes is the user privilege level, which determines the level of commands that a user connected to that interface can issue. The user privilege levels correspond with the command levelsvisitor, monitor, system, and manage. A user at a particular level can enter all the commands at his or her own level and levels below. For example, a manage user can issue all commands. By default, the user privilege level for VTY interfaces is 0 (visitor). A customer could have altered this setting, so you should ask. In addition, other settings can override this privilege level. You will learn more later in this module.
Rev. 10.31
4 15
Out-of-band Console Access
Out-of-band Console Access

Cable
RJ-45 to DB-9 adapter cable
Terminal software settings:

Baud rate = 9,600 Data rate = 8 Parity = None Stop bits = 1 Flow control = None
Serial connection
CLI
<ASwitch> system-view [ASwitch]
User interface AUX0 User privilege level = 3
15
Rev. 10.31
To obtain out-of-band console access to a switch, you must use the proper cable to connect your station to the switch. This RJ-48 to DB-9 adapter cable ships with the switch. One connector on this switch is an Ethernet connector and fits in the console port on the switch. The DB-9 connector fits in your stations console port. Most terminal session software that supports Telnet or SSH (TeraTerm and PuttY, for example), also supports console sessions. You can also create a console session using Windows HyperTerminal. You must set the proper settings, which are listed on the slide, in your software. Otherwise, you might not see the CLI at all, or the text might be garbled. When you establish a console session with an A-Series switch, you are assigned to a user interface that is labeled AUX. The A-Series switches about which you are learning support one console port and thus one console session labeled AUX0. The default user privilege level for the AUX interface is manager (3).
4 16
Rev. 10.31
Remote Out-of-band Console Access
Remote Out-of-band Console Access

You can connect to the console port through a modem. The modem must use the correct settings.
Modem
Serial connection to the console port
PSTN
Modem
CLI
<ASwitch> system-view [ASwitch]
16
Rev. 10.31
Some of the HP A-Series switches offer a means to connect to the console port remotely. The customer must connect the console port to a modem that is connected to the PSTN. On your end, you must connect your management station to a modem that can reach the customers modem. You can then dial in to the modem and access the console port. For this solution to work, the customers modem must use the correct settings (because the customer might have any type of modem, this course will not document how to implement the settings):

Answers automatically after the first ring Ignores DTR and RTS signals Disables flow control Forces DSR to high level Disables returning command response and result
Rev. 10.31
4 17
Authentication to User Interfaces
Authentication to User Interfaces

Authentication method set per-user interface
User interface VTY1 5 User interface AUX0
Authentication: C None, Password* or Scheme (AAA)

Authentication: C None*, Password, or Scheme (AAA)
Ethernet connection
Serial connection to console port
*Default setting
17 Rev. 10.31
You might be prompted to authenticate when you establish your management session. HP A-Series switches support several types of authentication, which the following slides discuss in more detail:
None, which actually means that you do not need to authenticate but are immediately granted the user privilege level set on the interface Password Scheme (part of an Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting [AAA] solution)
The authentication method is set per-user interface. The default setting for all VTY interfaces is password while the default setting for the AUX interface is none. If you are attempting to access a configured switch, you should talk to the customer and find out which method is being used on the interface that applies to your connection.
4 18
Rev. 10.31
Password Authentication (Local)
Password Authentication (Local)

Password set locally on the user interface
1. Switch prompts for password. 2. Management user types password. 3. Switch validates password and grants the access set for the user interface (AUX0 or VTY0-n).
Ethernet or console connection
18
Rev. 10.31
Lets look at password and scheme authentication in more detail, beginning with password. When a user connects to a user interface set to password authentication, the switch prompts for a password. The management user submits the password, which the switch validates against the password set for that user interface and stored locally on the switch. If the password matches, the switch allows the user to connect, granting the user the privilege level set for that interface.
Rev. 10.31
4 19
AAA Scheme Authentication (Local)
AAA Scheme Authentication (Local)

The switch authenticates users against its list of local users:
1. Switch prompts for credentials. 2. Management user types username and password. 3. Switch validates credentials and grants the access level and type set for that user.
1 2 bob *******
Local users
terminal/telnet 3 bob ******* manage (3) mary telnet ******* system (2)
19
Rev. 10.31
When an interface enforces scheme authentication, the switch refers to schemes that are configured on the switch globally to decide how to authenticate the user. First, you will look at a local scheme because this is the default setting for VTY interfaces. With a local scheme, management users are authenticated against user accounts configured on the switch itself. Each user account has its own privilege level, which determines the level of commands that the user can enter. Note that, if the user is not assigned a privilege level, he or she receives level 0 even if the interface itself is set to a higher level. In addition, the account specifies the type of management access that the user is allowed (whether console or Telnet and so forth). When you attempt to connect to a user interface using the scheme method, you must know the credentials for a user stored on the switch, the user privilege level that you will receive, and the type of access that you are allowed.
4 20
Rev. 10.31
AAA Scheme Authentication (Remote)
AAA Scheme Authentication (Remote)

Users authenticate to a remote RADIUS or TACACS server
1. Switch prompts for user name and password. 2. User supplies user name and password. 3. Switch forwards login credentials to server.
1
4. Server validates login credential against its database and send results to switch. 5. Switch grants access level and type set for user.

20 Rev. 10.31
bob 2 *******
RADIUS or TACACS server
A user interface might be set to a remote authentication scheme. Such a scheme references a RADIUS or TACACS server, which is responsible for authenticating the management user. The switch still prompts the user for his or her username and password when the user initiates a management session. But the switch then forwards the credentials to the external server. This server both checks the validity of the credentials and assigns the user to a privilege level. When you need to access a user interface using this type of authentication, you will need the credentials of a user stored on the network server with the attribute for the privilege level that you need.
Rev. 10.31
4 21
Changing User Privilege Level
Changing User Privilege Level

Command: super <level>
Higher to lower always allowed Lower to higher requires super password set for that level
Super password location set by user interfaces super user authentication method:
Password HWTACACS Both
21
Rev. 10.31
As you have learned, you are assigned to a particular user privilege level when you establish your management session. However, you can change privilege levels by entering the super command and typing the number of the level to which you want to change. For example, you can type: super 3. You are always allowed to move to levels that are lower than your current level. Someone might do so before handing off the control of the terminal session to a lower-level administrator. However, if you attempt to move to a higher level, you must enter the super password set for that level (even if you originally logged in at the level that you are trying to reach). The super passwords location is set by the user interfaces super user authentication method. If it is set to password (the default), you must know the super password configured on the switch. If the switch does not have a super password for the level that you are attempting to reach, you will not be permitted to change levels. If the super user authentication method for your interface is HWTACACS, you must enter the password set on the external TACACS server.
Note An interface might also be set for both methods, in which case, one of the methods is a backup method. For example, HWTACAS is the primary method, but the server cannot be reached, so the password is checked against the switchs local super password.
4 22
Rev. 10.31
Navigate CLI Views
Navigate CLI Views
system-view User privilege level System (2)
User view: <device name> System view: [device name]
quit return Ctrl+Z quit
Other command views Ex. [device name-ui-aux0]
22
Rev. 10.31
The A-Series switch CLI is divided into several different views, each of which contains a set of related commands. You must be in the correct view to enter a particular command. For example, the super command about which you just learned must be entered from the user view. From now on, whenever you are introduced to a command, you will be told which views support that command. Note that a view, which is related to logical organization, is different from a command level, which is related to security. A view might contain commands associated with several different command levels. You can determine your current view by examining the CLI prompt. When you first connect, you are in the user view, which is indicated by angle brackets (< >) around the switchs device name. The user view provides commands related to troubleshooting and viewing settings as well as to managing configurations. From the user view, you can change to system view, which is the central point for all views in which settings are configured. The prompt changes to indicate that you are in the system view, square brackets ([ ]) replacing the angle brackets. To reach the system view from the user view, enter the system-view command. Note that this is a system level (2) command, so users at the visitor and monitor level must remain in the user view.
Rev. 10.31
4 23
The system view branches into several other command views, some of which themselves lead to more command views. The slide shows an example of a command viewthe AUX0 user interface view, in which you configure settings for that interface. The prompt also changes to indicate the command view, adding a string that is specific to the view. For example, the prompt for the AUX0 user interface command view is [device name-ui-aux0]. Use the quit command to move back one viewfor example, from a command view to the system view or from the system view to the user view. Many user view commands can only be entered from the user view, so you might want to move to that view quickly. At any point, you can enter return to move directly to the user view.
4 24
Rev. 10.31
CLI Help
CLI Help
Display the commands available at the current view:
<device name>?
Display the options available for a command:

<device name> terminal ?
Display the commands that begin with the string:

<device name> c? Switch displays a list of commands beginning with those letters.
Display hotkeys:
<device name> display hotkey

23 Rev. 10.31
You do not have to memorize the exact syntax for every command because the CLI provides help functions. Enter ? at the command prompt to see a list of all commands that are available at that view as well as descriptions of those commands. Most commands include multiple options from which you must choose. To see all options that are available for a command, enter ? after the command, making sure to separate the command and ? with a space. If the option itself leads to more options, type ? again to see those. You will know that the command is complete when you see <cr> listed as the option. If you know the letter or letters with which the command starts, you can type those letters followed by ? (with no space). All commands that begin with those letters in that view are displayed. Finally, the CLI supports several hotkeys, which allow you to repeat commands, cancel commands, and so forth. Enter the display hotkey command to see a list of the keys and an explanation of their function.
Rev. 10.31
4 25
Common CLI Commands
Common CLI Commands

Command
Manager level (3) copy delete System level (2) undo save Monitor level (1) display** reset** debugging Visitor level (0) tracert ping *Many commands support multiple options. See the switchs CLI reference guide for details. **Some options require system level privilege.
24 Rev. 10.31
Explanation
Copy software image or configuration file Delete software image or configuration file Restore default, disable function, or remove configuration Save running-config as a named file Display system information Reset counters or configurations Display real-time messages related to switch functions Test connectivity between the switch and another device
The table in the slide provides a reference for commands that you will often use in managing an HP A-Series switch. Most of these commands support several options. For example, for the copy command, you must specify the source file and the destination file, or, for the display command, you must enter the option for the type of information that you want to view. Remember that you can use ? to see a list of valid options. The undo options function depends on the command in front of which it is placed. It can disable a function, remove a configuration, or restore the default setting for a configuration. The table divides commands according to their command level. Note that some display and reset commands are at the monitor level (1) and some are at the system level (2).
4 26
Rev. 10.31
Web Browser Interface Management Access

Web Browser Interface Management Access
HP A-Series Software Images and Configuration Files Management Access with the CLI Management Access with the Web Browser Interface Access the Interface Navigate the Interface Find a Switchs IP Address Collect Diagnostic Information Solve Problems Using the Boot ROM Menu and CLI Replace a Switch
25
Rev. 10.31
Lets leave the CLI for the moment and briefly examine another option for managing HP A-Series switches: the Web browser interface.
Rev. 10.31
4 27
Access the Web Browser Interface

URL = Switch IP address or FQDN Login (same user privilege levels as CLI)
26
Rev. 10.31
The Web browser interface offers an easy and intuitive way to manage HP A-Series switches. Because you require IP connectivity to the switch in order to reach this interface, you will probably use it less often than the CLI in support situations. In addition, the Web browser interface is not available at factory default settings. However, you should still know how to reach the interface when it is available. To access the interface, simply open a compatible Web browser such as Internet Explorer (IE) and enter the switchs management IP address for the URL. (You can also use the fully-qualified domain name (FQDN) if your management station uses a DNS server that knows how to resolve the switchs hostname.) Log in with the credentials that the customer gives you. Management access to the Web browser interface is divided into similar levels as the CLI. If you do not have manager access, some windows and settings will not be available.
4 28
Rev. 10.31
Navigate the Web Browser Interface
Navigate the Web Browser Interface

Switch name Port status
Navigation bar
Select a task
27
Rev. 10.31
When you first access the Web browser interface, you are at the Device Summary > Device View window. This window shows the status for all of the ports on the switch. (To see what the different colors mean, click the Color Key tab.) The lower pane displays the switchs hostname, MAC address, software version, and other key information. To access other windows, use the navigation bar at the left. The slide shows the tasks that branch out from the Administration level. To complete a task, click it and follow the guidelines in the interface.
Rev. 10.31
4 29
Find a Switchs IP Address: Device Detect Application
Find a Switchs IP Address

Device Detect Application 1
28
Rev. 10.31
As mentioned, you will usually access the HP A-Series switch via a console session for troubleshooting. But imagine that you do not have physical access to the switch or are locked out of console access. You must access the switch through an inline management session such as the Web browser interface (or Telnet or SSH to the CLI). But this requires you to know the switchs IP address. The customer might be able to tell you. But if not, you might find discovering the switchs address problematic. You can search the DHCP leases for an address assigned to the switchs MAC address if the customer allows you. But the Device Detect Application offers an easier solution. This application is provided with the A-Series switches, and you can also download it from the HP Networking Web site. Simply install the software on your management station, run the software, and follow these steps: 1. In the first window, select the network adaptor on which you are connected to the switch. (You can have a direct connection or a connection through the LAN). Click Next. Next, select the scope for the discovery and click OK:
2.
Perform discovery on subnetSelect this option when you know or suspect that the switch has an IP address on the same subnet as your management station.
4 30
Rev. 10.31
Perform discovery on IP rangeWhen you have less idea of the switchs IP address, you should select this option. Enter the range of viable IP addresses in the LAN. (You could also enter a range of most likely addresses, and, if the discovery fails, run the application again with a different range.)
3.
The Discovered Devices window lists the switches as they are detected. You can select a switch and click open to access its Web browser interface.
Rev. 10.31
4 31
Collect Diagnostic Information

Collect Diagnostic Information
HP A-Series Software Images and Configuration Files Management Access with the CLI Management Access with the Web Browser Interface Collect Diagnostic Information Solve Problems Using the Boot ROM Menu and CLI Replace a Switch
29
Rev. 10.31
With this background in the HP A-Series switches software, configuration files, and management interfaces, you are ready to learn about troubleshooting. You will begin by learning some CLI commands that are useful for collecting diagnostic information. (To issue these commands, you must create a terminal session to the CLI and log in as you learned how to do earlier.)
4 32
Rev. 10.31
Diagnostic Information
Collect information about the switch:
Version Configuration Recent commands
Save out complete diagnostic information.
30
Rev. 10.31
You will learn how to view the switchs software version and other system information, the configuration files that are in use and the contents of the files, and recently issued commands. You will also learn how to create a file with complete diagnostic information.
Rev. 10.31
4 33
display version Command
display version Command

Monitor (1) Display information about the switchs software image:
<ASwitch> display version
H3C Comware Platform Software Comware Software, Version 5.20, Feature 1110 Copyright (c) 2004-2010 Hangzhou H3C Tech. Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. H3C S5800-32C-PWR uptime is 0 week, 0 day, 8 hours, 25 minutes H3C S5800-32C-PWR with 2 Processor 512M bytes SDRAM 4M bytes Nor Flash Memory 512M bytes Nand Flash Memory Config Register points to Nand Flash Hardware Version is Ver.B CPLD Version is 003 Boot ROM version BootRom Version is 102 [SubSlot 0] 24GE+4SFP Plus+POE Hardware Version is Ver.B [SubSlot 1] No Module
System boot file version
31
Rev. 10.31
The display version command is available at the monitor level and from any view. Use this command to find out whether the system software image and the Boot ROM code are up-to-date. The command also displays other information such as the system uptime and the memory capacities.
4 34
Rev. 10.31
display startup Command
display startup Command

Monitor (1) Display which saved configuration is being used as the startup:
<ASwitch> display startup
MainBoard: Current startup saved-configuration file: NULL Next main startup saved-configuration file: flash:/aa.cfg Next backup startup saved-configuration file: flash: /bb.cfg
startup-config that the switch booted
Saved file that will boot Saved file that will boot if the main fails
32
Rev. 10.31
As you learned, an HP A-Series switch can hold multiple configuration files. When you need to know which file is acting as the actual startup-config, enter another monitor level command: display startup. (You can be in any view.) The command displays the current startup-configthat is, the file that was applied when the switch last bootedas well as the file that is marked as the startup-config for the next time the switch boots. It also shows the file marked as the backup startupconfig in case the main one fails to load. In the example in the slide, the switch was at factory default settings when it loaded (NULL configuration file). The switch has since been configured, and the configurations have been saved to two named files, aa.cfg and bb.cfg, the first of which was marked as the main startup config and the second as the backup. Each file preserves the running-config at the time that the file was saved. (The runningconfig now might match either file or neither). Note that this command does not tell you anything about the settings within the configuration files. You will learn the commands for that next.
Rev. 10.31
4 35
display current-configuration and saved-configuration Commands
display current-configuration and savedconfiguration Commands

System (2) Display the configurations in the running-config or startup-config :
<ASwitch> display [current-configuration | saved-configuration]
version 5.20, Test 5310 # sysname ASwitch # domain default enable system 3-8 # telnet server enable # multicast routing-enable # vlan 1 # domain system access-limit disable ---- More ---33 Rev. 10.31
Running-config (dynamic memory)
Configuration selected as main startup-config (NVRAM)
To see the actual settings within the running-config or startup-config, you must be at the system command level but can be at any view. Enter display current-configuration to see the settings in the running-config, which are important because these settings are currently in effect. Enter display saved-configuration to see the settings in the main startup-config, which will be the settings applied whenever the switch boots up in the future. The slide illustrates how the configurations settings are displayed to the terminal. Each applied configuration is displayed in one line, but the output only includes settings that deviate from the default settings. Global configurations are displayed first, then port configurations, and then user interface configurations. If the terminal runs out of room before the entire configuration has been displayed, you see - - - -More- - - -. Press [Spacebar]. When you add the by-linenum option to either of the commands, a number is added at the beginning of each line, enabling you to refer to particular settings more easily as you troubleshoot.
4 36
Rev. 10.31
display history-command Command
display history-command Command

Monitor (1) Display the recent command history:
[ASwitch] display history-command system-view vlan 2 port Gig 1/0/27 quit Most recent command
34
Rev. 10.31
Sometimes you will be configuring a switch and want to double-check what you just did. Or you might be brought in to troubleshoot a problem and need to see what changes have been made to the switch recently. The most recently entered commands are stored in the history buffer, which holds ten commands by default but can be enlarged. The display history-command command outputs the history buffer to the terminal, beginning with the least recent command in the buffer and proceeding to most recent (except for the display-history command itself). Note that commands are displayed exactly as they were entered, so you will not see the full command if a user entered a command in shortened form. The display history-command is a monitor level command that can be entered from any view.
Rev. 10.31
4 37
display diagnostic-information Command
display diagnostic-information Command

Monitor (1) Compile detailed information about the switchs operation and configuration:
<ASwitch> display diagnostic-information Save or display diagnostic information (Y=save, N=display)? [Y/N]:n ================================================= ===============display clock=============== ================================================= 08:54:16 UTC Fri 11/15/2008 =================================================== ===============display version=============== ======================================== ---- More ----
35
Rev. 10.31
Another monitor level command, display diagnostic-information, combines the output for several display commands to give you a detailed view into the switchs operation and configuration. When you enter the command, you are given the option to output the information to a saved file (press [y]) or to the terminal (press [n]). If you choose to save the information to a file, you can then transfer that file off of the switch (youll learn how later). The slide shows the beginning of the output if you choose to display the diagnostic information.
4 38
Rev. 10.31
Solve Problems Using the Boot ROM Menu and CLI

Solve Problems Using the Boot ROM Menu and CLI
HP A-Series Software Images and Configuration Files Management Access with the CLI Management Access with the Web Browser Interface Collect Diagnostic Information Solve Problems Using the Boot ROM Menu and CLI

Access the Boot ROM Menu Install New Software Bypass a Faulty Configuration
Replace a Switch
36
Rev. 10.31
You will now learn basic processes for accessing a switch that cannot be accessed by normal means. You will then learn some tasks that can help to get the switch running again.
Rev. 10.31
4 39
Boot ROM Menu
Boot ROM Menu

Access the Boot ROM to solve problems when the switch is faulting or the configuration locks you out.
1 Open a console session 3 Boot ROM runs Boot ROM 2 Boot the switch
4 Hardware is initialized When prompted, 5 press [Ctrl+B] The boot process 6 is interrupted
37 Rev. 10.31
The Boot ROM menu offers a fail-safe means of managing the switch when other methods have failedwhether due to corrupted software, to a startup-config with settings that lock you out, to a forgotten password, or to another cause. To access the Boot ROM menu, you must initiate a console session with the switch, power cycle it, and monitor the boot process. As you learned earlier, the boot ROM loads first; after it loads but before the software loads, you are presented with the option to press [Ctrl+B]. Doing so interrupts the boot process and takes you into the Boot ROM menu. Pay attention, you have only five seconds to press [Ctrl+B] or even one second if the customer has changed the switch to boot quickly. You will be prompted to enter a password. By default, the password is empty; simply press [Enter]. The customer should tell you if a password has been set.
4 40
Rev. 10.31
Install New Software: Update the Boot ROM
Install New Software

Update the Boot ROM
Install new image when the current is corrupted

BOOT MENU 1. Download application file to flash 2. Select application file to boot 3. Display all files in flash 4. Delete file from flash 5. Modify bootrom password 6. Enter bootrom upgrade menu 7. Skip current configuration file 8. Set bootrom password recovery BOOT MENU 9. Set switch startup mode 1. Update full BootRom 0. Reboot 2. Update extended BootRom Enter your choice(0-9): 6 3. Update basic BootRom 0. Return to boot menu Enter your choice(0-9): 1
38
Rev. 10.31
In the first support situation that you will examine, the switch is unable to boot completely due to corrupted or faulty software. You have accessed the Boot ROM menu, and now you must install the new software. First, obtain the software image file (it should have a .bin extension) and save it to your management workstation. As you learned earlier, you might need to update both the Boot ROM code and the system software file (also called application file). The two updates might be contained in the same file, or you might need to obtain two. In either case, you must update the Boot ROM code. Lets go through that process step by step: 4. 5. First enter 6 for Enter bootrom upgrade menu. You need a full upgrade. Enter 1.
The process continues on the next slide.
Rev. 10.31
4 41
Install New Software: Use XMODEM

Use XMODEM
XMODEM transfers work even if the switch has no IP connectivity

BOOT MENU 1. Set TFTP protocol parameter 2. Set FTP protocol parameter 3. Set XMODEM protocol parameter Enter your choice(0-3): 3 BOOT MENU 1.* 9600 2. 19200 3. 38400 Fastest 4. 57600 5. 115200 0. Return Enter your choice (0-5):
39 Rev. 10.31
Match
You have several options for downloading the new software to the switch. In this course, you will learn how to use XMODEM because this type of transfer works even when the switch has no IP connectivity. Select 3 for Set XMODEM protocol parameter. Next, the Boot ROM menu presents several choices for the baud rate, which determines how quickly the file can be transferred. As you learned earlier, you set the baud rate on your terminal session software to 9600 for sessions with the switch CLI. (For this reason, 9600 is starred as the current baud rate.) However, you can set the baud rate higher for a faster file transfer and typically should. Select the rate that you want in the Boot ROM menu. You must then match that rate in your terminal software settings. The slide shows the Setup > Serial port window in TeraTerm as an example. You should refer to the help for your terminal software.
4 42
Rev. 10.31
Install New Software: Transfer the File

Transfer the File
BOOT MENU Press enter key when ready Now please start transfer file with XMODEM protocol. If you want to exit, Press <Ctrl+X>. Loading ...CCCCCCCCCC
40
Rev. 10.31
After you have set your terminal software to the correct baud rate, press Enter in the Boot ROM menu. You are prompted to begin the file transfer. You must initiate this transfer from your terminal software. The slide shows the process for TeraTerm. You select File > Transfer > XMODEM > Send. In other software, you might select Send file from a menu and then choose XMODEM for the protocol. You will be prompted to browse to the software file that you saved to your management station. Do so. As the software transfers and installs, the Boot ROM menu will print Loading CCCCCCCCC to the terminal. Be patient. Even at the fastest baud rate, XMODEM transfers are quite slow compared to TFTP and FTP transfers. The process will take tens of minutes.
Rev. 10.31
4 43
Install New Software: Complete the Boot ROM Update

Complete the Boot ROM Update
When prompted, complete the installation: 1. Update the basic boot ROM. 2. Update the extended boot ROM. 3. Change your baud rate back to 9600. 4. Return to the main menu.
41
Rev. 10.31
You will see this message after the Boot ROM has installed successfully: Loading ...CCCC Done! Will you Update Basic BootRom? (Y/N): 1. 2. 3. 4. Enter Y to update the basic sections of the Boot ROM. When prompted again, enter Y to update the extended sections. Change the baud rate on your terminal software back to 9600. Return to main menu (0).
You must reboot the switch for the Boot ROM code to take effect. However, you will first install the new system software file.
4 44
Rev. 10.31
Install New Software: Install New System Software

Install New System Software
Follow a process similar to updating the bootROM:

1. 2. 3.
Choose to download an application file. Choose XMODEM for the method.

BOOT MENU
Set the correct baud rate and send the file.
1 1. Download application file to flash

2. Select application file to boot 3. Display all files in flash 4. Delete file from flash 5. Modify bootrom password 6. Enter bootrom upgrade menu 7. Skip current configuration file 8. Set bootrom password recovery 9. Set switch startup mode 0. Reboot Enter your choice(0-9): 1
42
Rev. 10.31
Installing the system software is very similar to installing the Boot ROM; therefore, you will not receive as much detail about the process. First, you will enter 1 to download the application file to flash. Again, you will be presented with several choices for the file transfer. Select XMODEM and set the baud rate, preferably to 1 15200, first in the Boot ROM menu and then in your terminal session software. Finally, initiate the file transfer from your terminal session software.
Rev. 10.31
4 45
Install New Software: Set the New Software to Main

Set the New Software to Main
After transferring the new software:

1. 2. 3.
Set the new file to the main software. Return to the main Boot ROM menu (0). Reboot the switch (0).
BOOT MENU Writing flash..................................................... ................Done! Please input the file attribute (Main/Backup/None) M Done!
43
Rev. 10.31
When the new software has successfully installed, the Boot ROM menu displays the message shown in the slide. Enter M to set the software to the main software that is loaded when the switch boots. Then enter 0 to return to the main Boot ROM menu and 0 again to reboot the switch. The switch should now be able to boot successfully. Access its CLI and use the display commands that you learned earlier to verify that the customers configuration is running. You should also enter ping <IP address> to verify connectivity.
4 46
Rev. 10.31
Bypass a Faulty Configuration
Bypass a Faulty Configuration

Forgotten password Locked out of management interfaces Other critical failure 1. Access the Boot ROM Menu. 2. Bypass the configuration. 3. If possible: a. Get IP connectivity. b. Backup the current startup-config. c. Restore a known good configuration. 4. Restore factory default settings (last resort). 5. Reboot.
44
Rev. 10.31
In the next troubleshooting situation, the switchs configuration is causing problems so severe that management access is cut off. Perhaps the user has forgotten the password; perhaps the IP settings are incorrect and the console access is disabled; perhaps no one has management access. Or the network and services settings themselves could be causing switch and network failures. You will access the Boot ROM menu and bypass the configuration. You will then use the CLI to load a known good configuration on the switch. Preferably, you will be able to set up IP settings on the switch so that you can back up the faulty startupconfig. The customer and your manager can then work together to troubleshoot and find the problem with the configuration. You can then restore the fixed configuration or another known good configuration to the switch. Otherwise, you might be able configure the switch to use a known good configuration file that is stored in its flash memory. As a last resort, your manager might tell you to restore the switch to its factory default settings. When the switch has been restored to a known good configuration (or factory defaults), reboot it. You will now learn the details for completing this process.
Rev. 10.31
4 47
Use the Boot ROM Menu to Bypass the Configuration
Use the Boot ROM Menu to Bypass the Configuration

The switch reloads at factory default settings.
BOOT MENU 1. Download application file to flash 2. Select application file to boot 3. Display all files in flash 4. Delete file from flash 5. Modify bootrom password 6. Enter bootrom upgrade menu 1 7. Skip current configuration file 8. Set bootrom password recovery 9. Set switch startup mode 2 0. Reboot Enter your choice(0-9): 7
45
Rev. 10.31
First, open a console session with the switch, reboot it, and access the Boot ROM menu as you learned how to do earlier. When you are presented with choices, enter 7 for Skip current configuration file. Confirm that you want to bypass the current configuration (enter Y). Finally, select 0 to reboot the switch. Let the switch boot without interrupting the process. The factory default settings will be applied. After bootup, you will have complete access to the switch because at these settings, console access requires no password and grants manager level rights.
4 48
Rev. 10.31
Get IP Connectivity: Assign an IP Address
Get IP Connectivity
Assign an IP Address System (2); system view Create the VLAN and configure it as the management VLAN:
<ASwitch> system-view Assign an IP address [ASwitch] vlan <ID> System (2); system view <type> <ID> [ASwitch-vlan<ID>] port [ASwitch-vlan<ID>] quit [ASwitch] management-vlan <ID>
Set the VLANs IP address:

[Aswitch] interface Vlan-interface <ID> [ASwitch-Vlan-interface<ID>] ip address [dhcp-alloc | <address> [mask | length]>
46
Rev. 10.31
To complete the initial setup, you will need to establish IP connectivity between the switch and the rest of the LAN. Then you can restore a configuration to the switch, copy new software to the switch, manage the switch in-band, and so forth. An ASeries switch, at its final configuration, will often support multiple IP addresses and perhaps a complex routing configuration. You will simply learn how to configure one IP address so that you can complete basic tasks. First, obtain this information from the customer:

The VLAN ID on which the switch can connect to the LAN Whether the switch should receive a DHCP IP address or a static one and, in the case of the latter, what this IP address should be
You might also consider connecting a switch Ethernet port directly to your management station, in which case you should use VLAN 1 and an IP address on the same subnet that you statically configure on your Ethernet interface. Then follow this process: 1. You should be at the system view. Create a VLAN, using the ID given to you by the customer. For example:
[ASwitch] vlan 67
Rev. 10.31
4 49
5.
You must connect a port on the switch to another switch port using an Ethernet cable. (Or connect the switch to your management station.) Assign this port to this VLAN. For example, enter:
[ASwitch-vlan67] port GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
6. 7.
Move back to the system view:

[ASwitch-vlan67] quit
You must generally assign the IP address to the management VLAN, which is VLAN 1, by default. In fact, on Layer 2 A-Series switches, the management VLAN is the only VLAN that can have an IP address. If the customer gave you a different VLAN ID from VLAN 1, change the management VLAN with this command:
management-vlan <ID>
For example:
[ASwitch] management-vlan 67
8. 9.
Create an IP interface for the VLAN. For example:

[ASwitch] interface Vlan-interface 67
Set the IP address. A static IP address consists of the dotted IPv4 format address and either the prefix length or the subnet mask. For example:
[ASwitch-Vlan-interface67] ip address 10.0.67.12 24
To set the interface to DHCP instead, enter this command:

[ASwitch-Vlan-interface67] ip address dhcp
4 50
Rev. 10.31
Get IP Connectivity: Set Up a Default Route
Get IP Connectivity
Set Up a Default Route System (2); system view only Set up a default IP route to a router.
[ASwitch] ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0 <router IP address>
Example
[ASwitch] ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0 10.1.67.1
Visitor (0) Verify connectivity to your management station or other TFTP server:
[ASwitch] ping <IP address>
47
Rev. 10.31
At this point, the switch can communicate on the one subnet on which it has an address. If the switch received a DHCP address, it probably also received a default route, which gives it full connectivity. But if you assigned the switch a static IP address, you must configure a default route yourself. The command for creating a static default route is shown in the slide. For example, from the system view, enter:
ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0 10.1.67.1
(There are more options for this command, but this form works for your purposes.) You should now test connectivity with the ping command. Ping your management station. Or, if you are planning to transfer configurations to and from other locations, ping those IP addresses.
Rev. 10.31
4 51
Back Up the Startup-Config to a TFTP Server
Back Up the Startup-Config to a TFTP Server

System (2); user view only Back up the (main) startup-config to a TFTP server:
<ASwitch> backup startup-configuration to <server address> [<file>]
Example
<ASwitch> backup startup-configuration 10.1.67.20 ASwitch_051610.cfg
A-Series switch Startup-config

ASwitch_051610.cfg TFTP 10.1.67.20
48 Rev. 10.31
The customer probably has configurations in the startup-config that he or she wants to preserve. In addition, someone needs to analyze the file and determine what is introducing the problems. Therefore, you will upload the file from the switch memory by backing it up. You will learn how to back up the file to a TFTP server because you can easily obtain such a server from a free Internet download. Then all you have to do is install the TFTP server on your management station and run the application; no configuration should be required.
Note HP A-Series switches can also transfer files to an FTP server. You would need to obtain the address of an FTP server from the customer and possibly credentials as well. This course will not cover transferring files via FTP.
Once you have the TFTP server running, enter this command from user view (you need system level access) to back up the startup-config:
<ASwitch> backup startup-configuration to <server address> [<file>]
4 52
Rev. 10.31
Replace <server address> with the TFTP servers IP address (the address on your management station if you installed the server there). If you enter a filename, use a .cfg extension to ensure that the configuration can be restored to the switch when necessary. If you decide not to enter a filename, the file is stored on the TFTP server under the name specified for the main startup-config file on the switch. For the example shown in the slide, you enter:
<ASwitch> backup startup-configuration to 10.1.67.20 ASwitch_051610.cfg
Rev. 10.31
4 53
Restore a Known Good Configuration: From a TFTP Server
Restore a Known Good Configuration

From a TFTP Server System (2) Restore the startup-config from a TFTP server:
<ASwitch> restore startup-configuration from <server address> <file.cfg>
ASwitch_051610.cfg
Running-config Startup-config
TFTP server 10.1.67.20 Note: System must be rebooted after copy
A-Series Switch
49
Rev. 10.31
If the problem with the startup-config is as simple as forgotten password, you or the customer can simply edit the configuration file with a text editor and read the password (if it was stored in non-encrypted form). Or you could set the AUX0 interface to none authentication so that the customer can access the switch with this startup-config and set a new password. For example: user-interface aux 0 authentication-mode scheme idle-timeout 0 0 becomes: user-interface aux 0 authentication-mode none idle-timeout 0 0 In many cases, you will send the file to your technical experts. They might send you a good configuration. Or the customer might have a known good configuration that was saved earlier. In either case, copy the known good configuration to your management station or other TFTP server.
4 54
Rev. 10.31
You can then restore the startup-config from a TFTP server. You need system level access and must be at the user view. Enter this command:
<ASwitch> backup startup-configuration from <server address> <filename>
You must specify the TFTP servers IP address and the filename as stored on the server. For example:
<ASwitch> backup startup-configuration from 10.1.67.20 ASwitch_051610.cfg
After the command executes successfully, the configuration file is saved to the switchs flash memory and is set as the main startup-config file. However, the settings do not take effect until the switch reboots.
Rev. 10.31
4 55
Restore a Known Good Configuration: From the Switch Flash Memory
Restore a Known Good Configuration

From the Switch Flash Memory Monitor (1); user view View the current startup-config.
<ASwitch> display startup
Manage (3); user view View all files in flash.

<ASwitch> dir
System (2); user view Change the startup-config.

<ASwitch> startup saved-configuration <file.cfg> main
50
Rev. 10.31
Instead of restoring a configuration that was saved to an external location, you can configure the switch to use a configuration file that is stored in its flash memory. For example, the customer might have saved an earlier configuration there that will serve to get the switch back up and running. First view the current startup-config files using the display startup command. To see other configuration files that can potentially work as the startup-config, enter dir from the user view. When you have found a good candidate for the startup-config, enter the following command (which requires system level access but must be entered from the user view: <ASwitch> startup saved-configuration <file.cfg> main For <file.cfg>, type the exact name of the file that you discovered with the dir command. (You can use a similar command, startup saved-configuration <file.cfg> backup, to set a backup option.) The new startup-config will be applied after you reboot the switch.
4 56
Rev. 10.31
Restore Factory Default Settings: Option 1
Restore Factory Default Settings

Option 1 System (2): Delete the startup-config and reset to factory default settings.
<ASwitch> The saved <ASwitch> The saved reset saved-configuration [main] configuration file will be erased. Are you sure? [Y/N]:y reset saved-configuration backup configuration file will be erased. Are you sure? [Y/N]:y
1 2
Saved file A Saved file B
Main attribute reset saved[main] Backup attribute reset saved backup
Saved file B
1 2
51
Saved file A Saved file A

Rev. 10.31
reset saved [main]
Saved file A
reset saved backup
Instead of restoring a configuration file, you might be told to restore the switch to the factory default settings. To do so successfully, you must think back to an HP A-Series switchs bootup process. The switch first attempts to load the main startup-config; if that file is corrupt or nonexistent (set to NULL), the switch attempts to load the backup startup-config; if that file also is corrupted or non-existent, the switch loads the factory default settings. Therefore, to get the switch to boot at factory defaults, you must set both the main and backup startup-config files to NULL, either by deleting the files or by removing the main and backup attributes from them. This slide shows the commands for the first approach. The reset savedconfiguration or reset saved-configuration main commands both delete the main startup-config file. The reset saved-configuration backup command deletes the backup startup-config file. For example, an A-Series switch has several saved configuration files. File A is set as the main startup-config, and file B, as the backup. When you enter reset savedconfiguration, file A is deleted. However, file B still exists, and if you reboot now this file will be loaded rather than the factory default settings. To return to the factory defaults, you must enter reset saved-configuration backup, which, in this example, deletes file B.
Rev. 10.31
4 57
The second example shown in the slide illustrates an important nuance of the reset saved-configuration command. When a file is set as both the main and backup startup-config file, this command only erases the specified attribute and not the file itself. For example, file A is set as the main and backup startup-config, and you enter reset saved-configuration. Now file A is only the backup startup-config, and there is no main startup-config. But if you reboot the switch now, the switch will still boot file A instead of the factory defaults. Remember: the backup startup-config is loaded when a main one does not exist. To revert to factory defaults, you must enter reset saved-configuration backup, which now deletes file A entirely since the backup attribute is the only one that it has. In short, if you want to delete the startup-config and revert to factory defaults, you can do so with one command (reset saved-configuration) only if your switch has no backup startup-config. If it does have a backup, you must enter both the main and backup versions of the reset saved-configuration command even when the same file is set as main and backup.
4 58
Rev. 10.31
Restore Factory Default Settings: Option 2
Restore Factory Default Settings

Option 2 System (2) Reset to factory default settings but preserve the current files
<ASwitch> <ASwitch> The saved <ASwitch> startup saved-configuration <main filename> backup reset saved-configuration backup configuration file will be erased. Are you sure? [Y/N]:y undo startup saved-configuration
startup saved-configuration A.cfg backup

2 3
reset saved-configuration backup undo startup savedconfiguration
52
Rev. 10.31
Sometimes you will need to revert a switch to its factory-default settings, but the customer still wants to preserve the current startup-config file (or files). You can meet this requirement with one command when the switch has no backup startup-config. Simply enter the undo saved-configuration command, which removes the main attribute from the main startup-config file, but preserves the file itself. When the switch reboots, it loads the factory default settings because no main or backup startupconfig is specified. The slide displays the proper commands for meeting this requirement when the customers switch has both a main and a backup startup-config file. (The process is complicated slightly because there is no undo saved-config backup command.) First, move the backup attribute from the backup startup-config to the main startupconfig by entering startup saved-configuration <filename> backup, specifying the filename of the main startup-config. The former backup file is preserved in the flash memory but no longer plays a role in the boot process. The main startup-config file, file A, now has both the main and backup attributes, so you can enter reset saved-configuration backup to set the backup startupconfig to NULL without deleting the file. Finally, enter undo startup saved-configuration to take file A out of the boot process without deleting it. Now the switch will boot at the factory default settings, but the customers configurations remain intact.
Rev. 10.31
4 59
Reboot the Switch
Reboot the Switch

System (2); user view only When a working configuration is saved to the startup-config, reboot the switch:
<ASwitch> reboot Start to check configuration with next startup configuration file, please wait. ........DONE! This command will reboot the device. Continue? [Y/N]: y
53
Rev. 10.31
When you have a working configuration on the switch and set to the main startupconfig, you must reboot the switch. Move to the user view and enter reboot. When the switch has booted with the new startup-config, access its CLI and verify that the new configuration is functioning. (The customer can log in, the switch has IP connectivity, and so forth.)
4 60
Rev. 10.31
Replace a Switch
Replace a Switch
HP A-Series Software Images and Configuration Files Management Access with the CLI Management Access with the Web Browser Interface Collect Diagnostic Information Solve Problems Using the Boot ROM Menu and CLI Replace a Switch

Restore a Backup Configuration Create a Basic Configuration
54
Rev. 10.31
Sometimes you cannot repair a switch. You are simply called on to remove the failed switch and install a replacement. This section guides you through the basic process.
Rev. 10.31
4 61
Replace a Switch: Backup Config Available
Replace a Switch
Backup Config Available
Does the customer have a backup config?
Yes
1. Install the new switch. 2. Access the CLI via a console session. 3. Get IP connectivity. 4. Update software (optional). 5. Restore the config.
55
Rev. 10.31
Ideally, the customer has a backup config for the failed switch. If this is the case, you simply need to follow this process: 1. 2. 2. 3. 4. Install the new switch as you learned how to do in Module 3: HP A-Series Switch Hardware. Access the CLI via a console session. Set up IP connectivity for the switch. Update the software from the CLI, if necessary. (The replacement switch might not be running the same software as the failed switch.) Restore the backup configuration.
You have already learned how to access the CLI and complete all of these steps except for updating the software from the CLI. The next slide explains how to complete this task with TFTP (FTP is another option not discussed in this course).
4 62
Rev. 10.31
Upgrade the Software from the CLI
Upgrade the Software from the CLI

Manage (3) Obtain the software image from a TFTP server:
<ASwitch> tftp <server address> get <file1.bin> [<fileA.bin>]
System (2) Upgrade the software:

<ASwitch> bootrom update file <fileA.bin> slot 1
System (2) Upgrade the software:

<<ASwitch> boot-loader file <fileA.bin> slot [all | <id>] [main | backup]
56
Rev. 10.31
First, you must obtain the necessary system software image and copy it to your TFTP server. Remember to check whether the switch needs an accompanying Boot ROM; check the current Boot ROM version with the display version command and see whether it corresponds with the required version in the software images release notes. Once the necessary file or files are on the TFTP server, transfer them to the switch using the tftp command shown in the slide. You must specify the IP address of the TFTP server as well as the filename for the software image stored on the server. You can optionally specify a new name for the image file on the switch; otherwise, the image is saved with the same filename that it has on the server. Remember to upload the boot ROM update, as well, if it is a different file. To upgrade the software, you must specify the new files as the files to be booted when the switch next reboots. For the Boot ROM update, move to the user view and enter the bootrom update command shown in the slide, specifying the correct file for the Boot ROM. To update the system software image, enter the boot-loader update command, again specifying the appropriate file. You can set the image to the main one or to the backup one, but, of course, you should set it to the main one if you want it to take effect. Finally, enter reboot to force the new software to load.
4 63
Rev. 10.31
Replace a Switch: Backup Config from Failed Switch
Replace a Switch
Backup Config from Failed Switch

No
Can you access the failed switch at all?
Yes
1. Access the failed switch. 2. Back up the config. 3. Install the new switch. 4. Access the new switchs CLI via a console session. 5. Get IP connectivity. 6. Update software (optional). 7. Restore the config.
57
Rev. 10.31
If the customer does not have a backup config that you can restore to the replacement switch, investigate whether you can reach the failed switch at all. Perhaps the switch is being replaced due to failed ports but is still reachable through the CLI. Perhaps, although it has been decided that the switch must be replaced, you can still reach the switchs CLIeven if you must access the Boot ROM menu to do so. If you can reach the switch CLI, back up the configuration as you learned how to do. Then follow the same process that you just learned: installing the new switch, getting it up and accessible through IP, updating the software, and restoring the configuration.
4 64
Rev. 10.31
Replace a Switch: No Backup Config
Replace a Switch
No Backup Config
1
No

No
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
58 Rev. 10.31
Install the new switch. Access the new switchs CLI via a console session. Get IP connectivity. Update software (optional). Identify the switch. Set up management access (optional). Save the config.
Finally, you will consider a situation in which you cannot obtain a backup configuration to load on the replacement switch. In this case, you will simply install the new switch, configure basic IP settings, and update its software, if necessary. You are quite familiar with this process by now. At that point, the switch will be up and running. You can configure a few more settings if the customer wants. You might identify the switch with a unique name, and you might set up some rudimentary management access controls. However, for the sake of security, the customer might prefer its own IT staff to set up the management access. Then you will save the configuration; an experienced administrator will take over from there.
Rev. 10.31
4 65
Initial Setup
Initial Setup
You can configure: A unique system name Contact information, such as phone extension or email address Physical location information, such as building and wiring closet
System view System (2)
[ASwitch] sysname <name> [<name>] snmp-agent sysinfo location <location> [<name>] snmp-agent sysinfo contact <contact>
Manage (3)
Prompts reflect new name
59
Rev. 10.31
As part of the basic setup, configure the switchs system name, contact information, and physical location so that management users can identify the switch. The first command shown in the slide gives the switch a unique system name. After you enter the command, the command prompt changes. For example:
[ASwitch] sysname MySwitch [MySwitch]
Note that this command must be entered at the system view and is also a system level command. The next two commands require manager access and only apply if this switch is part of an SNMP solution. They inform the SNMP server where the switch is located and who is responsible for managing it. For example:
[ASwitch] snmp-agent sysinfo location ClosetA_Shelf2 [ASwitch] snmp-agent sysinfo location Swami C
4 66
Rev. 10.31
Set Up Management Access: Console Access with Password Authentication
Set Up Management Access

Console Access with Password Authentication Manager (3) Protect console access to the switch by setting a password on the AUX user interface:
<ASwitch> system-view [ASwitch] user-interface aux 0 [ASwitch-ui-aux0] authentication-mode password [ASwitch-ui-aux0] set authentication password [simple | cipher] <password>
60
Rev. 10.31
Although many customers will want to set up management access on their own, sometimes you might need to implement some preliminary protection. As you recall, console access to the switch is unprotected by default. You can quickly add a password by using the commands shown in the slide. 1. 2. 3. 4. Move to system view.
<ASwitch> system-view
Access the user interface that controls console access.

[ASwitch] user-interface aux 0
Change the authentication mode from none to password:

[ASwitch-ui-aux0] authentication-mode password
Then set the password. It is best practice to use the cipher option, which stores the password in encrypted form in the configuration file. (The user still enters the password in plaintext.) For example:
[ASwitch] set password cipher myp@ss
Rev. 10.31
4 67
Set Up Management Access: Console Access with Scheme Authentication

Console Access with Scheme Authentication Manager (3): Protect console access by:
Enforcing scheme authentication on the AUX user interface Creating user accounts
<ASwitch> system-view [ASwitch] local-user <username> [ASwitch-luser-<username>] set password [simple | cipher] <password> [ASwitch-luser-<username>] authentication-attribute level <level> [ASwitch-luser-<username>] service-type terminal [ASwitch-luser-<username>] quit [ASwitch] user-interface aux 0 [ASwitch-ui-aux0] authentication-mode scheme
61
Rev. 10.31
Instead of setting a password that is specific to the AUX user interfaces, you can enforce scheme authentication on the interface. Scheme authentication allows the customer to have several different management users with different credentials and user privilege levels. You can implement scheme mode authentication in many ways that are beyond the scope of this course. But at the factory default settings, the switch uses a local authentication scheme. The basic process for creating local users and applying scheme authentication to console sessions follows: 1. 2. 3. If you are not at the system view, move there. Create a local user. For example:
[ASwitch] local-user manager
Set the users password. Again, it is best practice to store the password in encrypted form:
[ASwitch-luser-manager] set password cipher mgrpa$$
4. 5.
Assign the user a user privilege level. For example:

[ASwitch-luser-manager] authentication-attribute level 3
Specify that the user is allowed console access:

[ASwitch-luser-manager] service-type terminal
4 68
Rev. 10.31
6. 7. 8.
Move back to the system view:

[ASwitch-luser-manager] quit
Access the AUX interfaces as you learned how to do on the previous slide:
[ASwitch] user-interface aux 0
Change the authentication mode from none to scheme.

[ASwitch-ui-aux0] authentication-mode scheme
Rev. 10.31
4 69
Set Up Management Access: Telnet and Web Browser Interface Access Requirements
Telnet and Web Browser Interface Access Requirements
Telnet or HTTP server enabled (default setting)

[ASwitch] telnet server enable [ASwitch] ip http enable
IP connectivity to the switchs management IP address Authentication configured

Ethernet connection IP connectivity
62
Rev. 10.31
If the customer wants you to set up management access, you should typically also configure Telnet so that the switchs CLI can be reached in-band. Similarly, you might need to set up Web browser interface access.
Note As you learned, SSH access is more secure than Telnet; however, the setup is correspondingly more complex and beyond the scope of this course.
The switch must meet certain conditions to allow users to log in with a Telnet or Web browser interface session. The appropriate servers must be enabled as they are by default. In case you need to re-enable the services, the slide includes the commands. Enabling Telnet requires manage level access, but a system level user can enable the Web server. The Telnet or Web user also requires IP connectivity to the switchs management IP address, which you learned how to set earlier. Finally, you need to establish a method for authenticating the Telnet or Web users. The next slides explain how to set up several forms of authentication.
4 70
Rev. 10.31
Set Up Management Access: Telnet Access with Password Authentication

Telnet Access with Password Authentication
Manage (3); user interface view Set the password:

[ASwitch] user-interface vty 0 <n> [ASwitch-ui-vty0-<n>] set authentication password [simple | cipher] <password>
Set the interfaces privilege level (optional, default 0):

[ASwitch-ui-vty0-<n>] user privilege level <level>
63
Rev. 10.31
By default, VTY user interfaces, which control Telnet access, enforce password authentication. However, the interfaces have no default password, so users cannot log in. If the customer wants password authentication for Telnet, you must simply set the password: 1. From the system view, access the VTY user interfaces. You can configure an entire range of interfaces at once by entering the low and high number in the range after the vty option. If you do not know the number of interfaces, use the help command:
[ASwitch] user-interface vty 0 ?
The terminal outputs the range of valid inputs. Once you know the high number in the range, you can enter the correct command. For example:
[ASwitch] user-interface vty 0 3
2.
Specify the password, indicating whether the password should be encrypted or stored in plaintext. For example:
[ASwitch-ui-vty0-3] set authentication password cipher tel%p@ss
3.
All management users who log in through an interface that enforces password authentication receive the privilege level set for that interface, which is 0 by default on VTY interfaces. Use the command shown in the slide to set the privilege level desired by the customer for Telnet access. For example:
[ASwitch-ui-vty0-3] user privilege level 2 4 71
Rev. 10.31
Set Up Management Access: Telnet Access with Scheme Authentication

Telnet Access with Scheme Authentication Manage (3); user interface view Set the interfaces authentication mode to scheme:
[ASwitch] user-interface vty 0 <n> [ASwitch-ui-vty0-<n>] authentication-mode scheme [ASwitch-ui-vty0-<n>] quit
Manage (3); system view Create a user or grant an existing user the Telnet service type:
[ASwitch] local-user <username> [ASwitch-luser-<username>] set password [simple | cipher] <password> [ASwitch-luser-<username>] authentication-attribute level <level> [ASwitch-luser-<username>] service-type telnet
64
Rev. 10.31
Alternatively, you can force Telnet users to authenticate according to the AAA scheme configured on the switchwhich, for the purposes of this course, is to use the switchs list of local users. To enable Telnet users to log in using these local user accounts, enter these commands from system view:
[ASwitch] user-interface vty 0 <n> [ASwitch-ui-vty0-<n>] authentication-mode scheme
Next, you must create local user accounts for the Telnet managers. If you have already created such users for other purposes, users can use those accounts to log in over Telnet. However, you must authorize the user for Telnet access by entering the service-type telnet command in the view for that local user account. The slide displays all the commands that are necessary for creating a new user (other commands are available but beyond the scope of this course). Remember to set the user privilege level (otherwise, it will be 0 despite what you set on the user interface).
Note When you enter the service-type telnet command from the local user interface view, the switch adds Telnet as a valid type of access without changing the access that is currently allowed. For example, you created an account that specified the terminal service type for a local user. Then you accessed the local user account and specified Telnet for the service type. Now the user can log in through a console or a Telnet session. If you want to remove a service type, you must enter the undo commandfor example, undo service-type terminal. 4 72
Rev. 10.31
Set Up Management Access: Authentication for the Web Browser Interface

Authentication for the Web Browser Interface
Web users must:

Log in with AAA credentials Be granted Telnet for the service type
You can use the same local users as for Telnet access.
Ethernet connection
1 2 bob *******
65 Rev. 10.31
Local users
3 bob terminal/telnet ******* manage (3) mary telnet ******* system (2)
As you recall, for users to log in to the Web browser interface using HTTP, they must be able to reach the switchs management IP address, and the switchs HTTP services must be enabled. The users must also be able to authenticate, and this slide explains how to ensure that they can. No specific user interface exists for controlling management users access to the Web browser interface. Web users must always log in with AAA credentials; for your purposes, this means that the switch must have a list of local users. Because the Web browser interface categorizes users in the same four levels as the CLI, the user account should also specify a user privilege level. In addition, the service type must include Telnet. If you have already created accounts for users allowed Telnet access, these users will automatically have Web access as well.
Rev. 10.31
4 73
Set Up Management Access: Super Passwords

Super Passwords Manage (3) or System (2)* Set super passwords to allow users to move to higher privilege levels
[ASwitch] super password level <level> [simple | cipher] <password>
*Cannot set super password for level 3

66 Rev. 10.31
As you learned, a user must enter a super password to access a command level that is higher than the current level. By default, there are no super passwords, so users cannot change levels. If the customer wants to enable this functionality for command levels 1, 2, or 3, you must use the command shown in the slide to set the local super passwords. You must be in the system view to enter the command, and you must have at least system level access; however, manager access is required to set the manager level (3) super password. For example, enter: [ASwitch] super password level 3 cipher super3! [ASwitch] super password level 2 cipher super2! [ASwitch] super password level 1 cipher super1!
4 74
Rev. 10.31
Save Initial Setup Changes
Save Initial Setup Changes

System (2) Save configuration changes to the startup-config:
<ASwitch> save [safely] [main]
OR
<ASwitch> save <file.cfg> <ASwitch> startup saved-configuration <file.cfg> [main]
Example
<ASwitch> save safely
67
Rev. 10.31
The time has come to turn the switch over to the customer. To ensure that the settings are not lost, save them to the current startup-config. (You can be in any view.) The first command shown in the slide offers the easiest way to do so. It is best practice to use the safely option; the command executes more slowly but the current configuration is protected in case the switch loses power or reboots during the save. For example, enter:
<ASwitch> save safely main
The following command has the same effect:

<ASwitch> save safely
The following commands have the same effect, but do not save the configuration safely:
<ASwitch> save main <ASwitch> save
You will be prompted to use the current startup-config file name. You can also specify a different name; in either case, the configuration is set as the main startup-config. Instead of saving the configurations to the startup-config with one command, you can separate the process in two. First enter the save command with a file name and no other options. For example:
<ASwitch> save mycfg.cfg
Rev. 10.31
4 75
Then set the file as the main or backup startup-config using the command shown in the slide. This process enables you to save changes to a file and later decide to apply them to the startup-config. Once you have saved your changes, you have completed your share of the configuration.
4 76
Rev. 10.31
Summary
Summary
Software images Configuration files CLI command levels and views Management access through:
CLI Web browser interface Boot ROM Menu
Solving problems with Boot ROM Menu and CLI Replacing switches
68 Rev. 10.31
In this module, you have acquired a background knowledge of HP A-Series software images, boot process, and configuration files. You can access an HP A-Series switchs CLI using a console or a Telnet session, and you can navigate through the various views. You understand that you must have the correct user privilege level to enter certain commands, and you can move to higher privilege levels using super passwords. You can reach a switch on its Web browser interface and navigate through the windows. When a switch is otherwise inaccessible, you can access the Boot ROM Menu and install new software or bypass a configuration that is causing problems. With the Boot ROM Menu and a variety of CLI commands at your disposal, you can complete basic support tasks.
Rev. 10.31
4 77
4 78
Rev. 10.31
HP E-Series Switch Overview

Module 5
Objectives
This module introduces you to the HP E-Series switches, which are designed for customers who want essential and proven technology. To help meet their business goals, these customers require future-proof, easy-to-use, secure networking solutions. After completing this module, you should be able to:

Describe the basic characteristics of each HP E-Series switch Classify each HP E-Series switch based on its form factor, manageability, and Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) functionality Explain the different environments for which each E-Series switch is designed
Rev. 10.31
5 1
Switches Formerly Branded 3Com

Formerly Branded 3Com Switches HP E4210 Switch Series HP E4210G Switch Series HP E4500 Switch Series HP E4500G Switch Series HP E4800G Switch Series HP E5500 Switch Series HP E5500G Switch Series HP Switches Categorizing E-Series Switches
Rev. 10.31
The E-Series includes switches that were previously branded as 3Com switches and switches that were previously branded as HP ProCurve switches. This section outlines the basic features of the formerly branded 3Com switches that are now part of the E-Series.
5 2
Rev. 10.31
HP E4210 Switch Series

E4210-8 Switch E4210-8-PoE Switch
8 10/100 ports 1 dual-personality port Throughput up to 2.7 mpps E4210-8-PoE SwitchPoE on 4 10/100 ports

16 10/100 ports 2 dual-personality ports Throughput up to 5.4 mpps E4210-16-PoEPoE ports on 8 10/100
ports
Rev. 10.31
The E4210 Switch Series consists of fixed-port, managed Fast Ethernet switches. These Layer 2 switches also support stackable scalability with a single-IP address. Designed for companies that are looking for economical network solutions, these switches can be deployed at the access layer in enterprise branch offices and small workgroup networks. The E4210-8 and E4210-8-PoE switches include the following:

Eight 10/100 auto-sensing ports One dual-personality port Throughput up to 2.7 mpps One RJ-45 console port AC power supply
The E4210-8-PoE switch provides PoE power on four 10/100 ports.
Rev. 10.31
5 3
The E4210-16 and E4210-16-PoE switches include the following:

16 auto-sensing 10/100 ports Two dual-personality ports Throughput up to 5.4 mpps One RJ-45 console port AC power supply
The E4210-16-PoE switch provides PoE on eight 10/100 ports. For information about the SFP transceivers supported on these switches, see Module 6: HP E-Series Switch Hardware.
5 4
Rev. 10.31
HP E4210 Switch Series (Cont.)

24 10/100 ports 2 dual-personality ports Throughput up to 6.6 mpps E4210-24-PoE SwitchPoE on all
10/100 ports
E4210-48 Switch
Rev. 10.31
The E4210-24 switch includes the following:

The E4210-24-PoE switch also provides PoE on all 10/100 ports. The E4210-48 switch includes the following:

48 auto-sensing 10/100 ports Two 10/100/1000 ports Two SFP ports Throughput up to 13.1 mpps One RJ-45 console port AC power supply
For information about the SFP transceivers supported on these switches, see Module 6: HP E-Series Switch Hardware.
5 5
Rev. 10.31
HP E4210G Switch Series

E4210-24G Switch E4210-24G-PoE Switch
20 10/100/1000 ports 4 dual-personality ports 2 open module slots Throughput up to 95.2 mpps E4210-24G-PoE SwitchPoE on all
10/100 ports
E4210-48G Switch
6 Rev. 10.31
The E4210G Switch Series consists of fixed-port, managed Gigabit Ethernet switches. Designed to be deployed at the access layer, these switches support static routing, making them Light Layer 3 switches. All the switches in this series have open module slots to allow for expansion, and they support stackable scalability. The E4210-24G and E4210-24G-PoE switches include the following:

20 10/100/1000 auto-sensing ports Four dual-personality ports Two open module slots Throughput up to 95.2 mpps One RJ-45 console port AC power supply
The E4210-24G-PoE switch provides PoE power on all 10/100/1000 ports.
5 6
Rev. 10.31
The E4210-48G switch includes the following:

44 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Four dual-personality ports Two open module slots Throughput up to 131.0 mpps One RJ-45 console port AC power supply
For information about the SFP transceivers supported on these switches, see Module 6: HP E-Series Switch Hardware.
Rev. 10.31
5 7

24 10/100 ports 2 dual-personality ports Throughput up to 6.5 mpps E4500-24-PoE SwitchPoE on
10/100 ports

48 10/100 ports 2 dual-personality ports Throughput up to 10.1 mpps E4500-48-PoE SwitchPoE on
10/100 ports
Rev. 10.31
The E4500 Switch Series consists of fixed-port, managed, Fast Ethernet switches. They are Light Layer 3 switches, supporting static routes and RIP. They also support stackable scalability with single-IP address management. This switch series is designed for companies that need economical access layer connectivity in enterprise and branch office networks. The E4500-24 switch includes the following:

The E4500-24-PoE switch also provides PoE on all 10/100 ports.
5 8
Rev. 10.31

The E4500-48-PoE switch supports PoE on all 10/100 ports. For information about the SFP transceivers supported on these switches, see Module 6: HP E-Series Switch Hardware.
Rev. 10.31
5 9

20 10/100/1000 ports 4 dual-personality ports 2 module slots Throughput up to 95.2 mpps E4500-24G-PoE SwitchPoE on all
10/100/1000 ports
Rev. 10.31
The E4500G Switch Series includes fixed-port, managed, Gigabit Ethernet switches. Like the E4500 Fast Ethernet switches, the E4500G switches support static routes and Routing Information Protocol (RIP), making them Light Layer 3 switches. They also support stackable scalability with single-IP address management. The E4500G switches can be deployed at the access or distribution layer. They are particularly well-suited for medium-sized businesses and small enterprises that want to build a converged network. For example, when an IP phone is connected to an E4500G switch, the switch automatically detects the phone and dynamically assigns the phones port to a voice VLAN. The E4500-24G switch includes the following:

20 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Four dual-personality ports Two open module slots (on the rear panel) Throughput up to 95.2 mpps AC power supply One RJ-45 console port
The E4500-24G-PoE switch provides PoE on all 10/100/1000 ports.
5 10
Rev. 10.31
Customers can purchase 10-GbE modules and install them in the open module slots. They can also install SFP transceivers in the SFP ports. For more information, see Module 6: HP E-Series Switch Hardware.
Rev. 10.31
5 11
HP E4500G Switch Series (Cont.)

44 10/100/1000 ports 4 dual-personality ports 2 module slots Throughput up to 131 mpps E4500-48G-PoEPoE on all
10/100/1000 ports
Rev. 10.31

44 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Four dual-personality ports Two open module slots (on the rear panel) Throughput up to 131 mpps AC power supply One RJ-45 console port
The E4500-48G-PoE switch provides PoE on all 10/100/1000 ports. Customers can purchase 10-GbE modules and install them in the open module slots. They can also install SFP transceivers in the SFP ports. For more information, see Module 6: HP E-Series Switch Hardware.
5 12
Rev. 10.31

20 10/100/1000 ports 4 dual-personality ports 2 module slots Throughput up to 95.2 mpps E4510-48G-PoE SwitchPoE on
all 10/100/1000 ports
E4510-48G Switch
44 10/100/1000 ports 4 dual-personality ports 2 module slots Throughput up to 131 mpps
10 Rev. 10.31
The E4510G Switch Series includes fixed-port, managed, Gigabit Ethernet switches. These switches support static routes, making them Light Layer 3 switches. (However, they do not support dynamic routing protocols.) They also support stackable scalability with single-IP address management. The E4510G switches can be deployed at the access or distribution layer. The E4510-24G and the E4510-24G-PoE switches provide the following:

20 10/100/1000 ports Four dual-personality ports Two module slots (on the rear panel) Throughput up to 95.2 mpps One RJ-45 console port
The E4510-24G-PoE switch also provides PoE on all 10/100/1000 ports. It has a total of 370W for PoE.
Rev. 10.31
5 13

44 10/100/1000 ports Four dual-personality ports Two module slots (on the rear panel) Throughput up to 131 mpps One RJ-45 console port
5 14
Rev. 10.31

10/100/1000 ports
E4800-24G-SFP Switch
16 SFP ports 8 dual-personality ports 2 module slots Throughput up to 107.2 mpps
1 1 Rev. 10.31
The E4800G Switch Series includes fixed-port, managed, Gigabit Ethernet switches. These Layer 3/4 switches support static routes and dynamic routing protocols RIP, OSPF, BGP, and IS-IS. They also support multicast routing protocols PIM-SM and PIMDM. With support for stackable scalability with single-IP address management, these switches can be deployed:
At the access or distribution layer of large enterprise networks and campus networks In the core of medium and small-sized enterprise networks 20 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Four dual-personality ports Two open module slots (on the rear panel) Throughput up to 107.2 mpps One RJ-45 console port AC/DC power supply with a connection for a redundant power system (RPS)
The E4800-24G and E4800-24G-PoE switches include the following:

The E4800-24G-PoE switch provides PoE on all 10/100/1000 ports.
Rev. 10.31
5 15
The E4800-24G-SFP switch includes the following:

Eight dual-personality ports for 10/100/1000 connections or SFP transceivers 16 SFP ports Two open module slots (on the rear panel) Throughput up to 107.2 mpps AC/DC power supply with a connection for an RPS One RJ-45 console port
5 16
Rev. 10.31

E4800-48G E4800-48G-PoE Switch
10/100/1000 ports
12
Rev. 10.31

44 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Four dual-personality ports Two open module slots (on the rear panel) Throughput up to 142.9 mpps AC/DC power supply with a connection for an RPS One RJ-45 console port
The E4800-48G-PoE switch supports PoE on all 10/100/1000 ports. It provides up to 15.4 W on a port with a total PoE budget of 370W. Customers can use an RPS for supplemental PoE power. Customers can purchase 10-GbE modules and install them in the open module slots. They can also install SFP transceivers in the SFP ports. For more information, see Module 6: HP E-Series Switch Hardware.
Rev. 10.31
5 17

24 10/100 ports 4 Gigabit SFP ports (factory-installed) Throughput up to 9.5 mpps E5500-24-PoEPoE on all 10/100
ports
E5500-24-SFP Switch
24 open SFP ports 2 10/100/1000 ports 2 Gigabit SFP ports (factory-installed) Throughput up to 9.5 mpps
13
Rev. 10.31
The E5500 Switch Series includes fixed-port, managed switches that provide stackable scalability with single-IP address management. These Layer 3/4 switches support static routes, dynamic routing protocols RIP and OSPF, and multicast routing protocols PIM-DM and PIM-SM. The E5500 switches can be deployed at the access layer or distribution layer in medium and large-sized networks. The E5500-24 and E5500-24-PoE switches provide the following:

24 auto-sensing 10/100 ports Four Gigabit SFP ports (1000Base-X), which are factory installed Throughput up to 9.5 mpps AC and/or DC power supply with a connection for an RPS One RJ-45 console port
The E5500-24-PoE switch supports PoE on its 10/100 ports.
5 18
Rev. 10.31
The E5500-24-SFP switch includes the following:

24 open SFP ports Two auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Two Gigabit SFP ports (1000Base-X), which are factory-installed Throughput up to 9.5 mpps AC and/or DC power supply with a connection for an RPS One RJ-45 console port
For the E5500-24-SFP switch, customers can purchase SFP transceivers to install in the 24 open SFP ports. For more information, see Module 6: HP E-Series Switch Hardware.
Rev. 10.31
5 19

48 10/100 ports 4 Gigabit SFP ports (factory-installed) Throughput up to 13.1 mpps E5500-48-PoEPoE on all 10/100
ports
14
Rev. 10.31

48 auto-sensing 10/100 ports Four Gigabit SFP ports (1000Base-X), which are factory-installed Throughput up to 13.1 mpps AC and/or DC power supply with a connection for an RPS One RJ-45 console port
The E5500-48-PoE switch supports PoE on its 10/100 ports.
5 20
Rev. 10.31

20 10/100/1000 ports 4 dual-personality ports 1 module slot Throughput up to 136.9 mpps E5500-24G-PoE SwitchPoE on all
10/100/1000 ports
E5500-24G-SFP Switch
20 SFP Gigabit ports 4 dual-personality ports 1 module slot Throughput up to 136.9 mpps
15 Rev. 10.31
The E5500G Switch Series consists of fixed-port, managed Gigabit switches. Supporting static routes, dynamic routing protocols RIP, OSPF, BGP; and multicast routing protocols PIM-DM and PIM-SM, these Layer 3/4 switches also provide stackable scalability. The E5500G switches can be deployed at the access layer or distribution layer in medium and large-sized networks. On smaller networks, they may be deployed at the core. The E5500-24G and E5500-24G-PoE switches include the following:

20 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Four dual-personality ports One open module slot (on the rear panel) Throughput up to 136.9 mpps AC and/or DC power supply with a connection for an RPS One RJ-45 console port
The E5500-24G-PoE switch provides PoE on 24 10/100/1000 ports.
Rev. 10.31
5 21
The E5500-24G-SFP switch includes the following:
20 SFP Gigabit ports (1000Base-X), which are factory-installed and ready to provide connections Four dual-personality ports One open module slot (on the rear panel) Throughput up to 136.9 mpps AC and/or DC power supply with a connection for an RPS One RJ-45 console port
Customers can purchase a 1-GbE or 10-GbE module and install it in the open module slot. They can also install SFP transceivers in the SFP ports. For more information, see Module 6: HP E-Series Switch Hardware.
5 22
Rev. 10.31

44 10/100/1000 ports 4 dual-personality ports 1 module slot Throughput up to 172.6 mpps E5500-48G-PoE SwitchPoE on all
10/100/1000 ports
16
Rev. 10.31

44 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Four dual-personality ports One open module slot (on the rear panel) Throughput up to 172.6 mpps AC and/or DC power supply with a connection for an RPS One RJ-45 console port
The E5500-48G-PoE switch provides PoE on 48 10/100/1000 ports. Customers can purchase a 1-GbE or 10-GbE module and install it in the open module slot. They can also install SFP transceivers in the SFP ports. For more information, see Module 6: HP E-Series Switch Hardware.
Rev. 10.31
5 23
HP Switches
HP Switches
Formerly Branded 3Com Switches HP Switches HP E2510 Switch Series HP E2520 Switch Series HP E261X Switch Series HP E2810 Switch Series HP E291X Switch Series HP E3500 Switch Series HP E4200 vl Switch Series HP E5400 zl Switch Series HP E6200-24G-mGBIC yl Switch HP E6600 Switch Series HP E8200 zl Switch Series HP Threat Management Services zl Module
Categorizing E-Series Switches

17 Rev. 10.31
The next section outlines the E-Series switches that were previously branded HP ProCurve switches.
5 24
Rev. 10.31

E2510-24 Switch
24 10/100 ports 2 dual-personality ports Throughput up to 6.5 mpps Fanless
E2510-48 Switch
48 10/100 ports 2 10/100/1000 ports 2 open SFP ports Throughput up to 13 mpps
18 Rev. 10.31
The HP E2510 Switch Series features four fixed-port, Layer 2, managed switches. This series offers a choice of either Fast Ethernet or Gigabit connectivity, with support for fiber uplinks. In addition, these switches support single IP address management for a virtual stack of up to 16 switches. Designed primarily for small-to-medium business (SMB), these switches are deployed at the access layer. The fanless, quiet operation of the E2510-24 switch makes it an ideal solution for SMBs that have open space work environments. (The other models have fans.) The E2510-24 switch provides the following features:

24 auto-sensing 10/100 ports Two dual-personality ports Throughput up to 6.5 mpps One RJ-45 serial console port 48 auto-sensing 10/100 ports Two auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Two open SFP ports Throughput up to 13 mpps One RJ-45 serial console port
5 25
The E2510-48 switch provides the following features:

Rev. 10.31

E2510-24G Switch
E2510-48G Switch
19
Rev. 10.31
The E2510-24G and E2510-48G switches provide higher speed links than the other two switches in this series. The E2510-24G switch supports the following features:

20 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Four dual-personality ports Throughput up to 35.7 mpps One RJ-45 serial console port 44 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Four dual-personality ports Throughput up to 71.4 mpps One RJ-45 serial console port
The E2510-48G switch supports the following features:

5 26
Rev. 10.31

E2520-8-PoE Switch
8 10/100 ports 2 dual-personality ports Throughput up to 4.1 mpps Up to 15.4W PoE per port Fanless
E2520-24-PoE Switch
24 10/100 ports 2 10/100/1000 ports 2 dual-personality ports Throughput up to 6.2 mpps Up to 15.4W PoE per port
20 Rev. 10.31
The HP E2520 Switch Series consists of four Layer 2 switchesall of which provide PoE. In addition to PoE, two models support Fast Ethernet connections, while two provide Gigabit Ethernet connections. PoE and high-speed connections make these switches an attractive choice for SMBs that want to implement voice, video, and wireless APs on a converged network. These switches provide connectivity at the access layer. The E2520-8-PoE switch includes the following:

Eight auto-sensing 10/100 ports Two dual-personality ports Throughput up to 4.1 mpps Up to 15.4W PoE per port Fanless operation One RJ-45 console port 24 auto-sensing 10/100 ports 2 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Two dual-personality ports. Throughput up to 6.2 mpps Up to 15.4W PoE per port
5 27
The E2520-24-PoE switch includes the following:

Rev. 10.31
One RJ-45 console port
5 28
Rev. 10.31

E2520-8G-PoE Switch
8 10/100/1000 ports 2 dual-personality ports Throughput up to 14.8 mpps Up to 15.4W PoE per port Fanless
E2520-24G-PoE Switch
20 10/100/1000 ports 4 dual-personality ports Throughput up to 35.7 mpps Up to 15.4W PoE per port
21 Rev. 10.31
The E2520-8G-PoE switch includes the following:

Eight auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Two dual-personality ports Throughput up to 14.8 mpps Up to 15.4W PoE per port Fanless operation One RJ-45 console port 20 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Four dual-personality ports Throughput up to 35.7 mpps Up to 15.4W PoE per port One RJ-45 console port
The E2520-24G-PoE switch includes the following:

Rev. 10.31
5 29
HP E261X Switch Series

E2615-8-PoE Switch
8 10/100 ports 2 dual-personality ports Throughput up to 4.1 mpps Fanless PoE
E2610-24-PPoE Switch
24 10/100 ports 2 10/100/1000 ports 2 SFP ports Throughput up to 9.5 mpps PoE on 12 ports
22 Rev. 10.31
The HP E261X Switch Series includes the following switches:

E2615-8-PoE switch E2610-24-PPoE switch E2610-24 switch E2610-24-PoE switch E2610-48 switch E2610-48-PoE switch
These fixed-port, managed switches support static routes, giving them the designation of Light Layer 3 switches. Four switches in the series also provide PoE. The E261X switches are designed primarily for the access layer, connecting devices such as endpoints, printers, other peripherals, and servers to the network. They provide a cost-effective solution for customers who are building converged enterprise networks. The E2615-8-PoE switch includes the following:

Eight 10/100 ports Two dual-personality ports Fanless operation

Rev. 10.31
5 30
PoE (except on dual-personality ports)
7.5 W on up to eight ports 15.4W on up to four ports
Up to 4.1 mpps throughput 24 auto-sensing 10/100 ports Two auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports PoE
The E2610-24-PPoE switch features:

Up to 126 W distributed over 12 PoE ports Up to 15.4 W on eight ports or an average of 10.5 Watts on 12 ports
Two open SFP ports Up to 9.5 mpps throughput One RJ-45 console port
Rev. 10.31
5 31
HP E261X Switch Series (Cont.)

Differences:
E2610-24-PoE switchPoE on
10/100/1000 ports
E2610-24fanless
23
Rev. 10.31
The E2610-24 and E2610-24-PoE switches feature:
24 auto-sensing 10/100 ports Two auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Two open SFP ports Up to 9.5 mpps throughput One RJ-45 serial console port
The E2610-24-PoE switch provides up to15.4 W on all 24 ports. The E2610-24 switch, on the other hand, is fanless for silent operation.
5 32
Rev. 10.31

48 10/100 ports 2 10/100/1000 ports 2 SFP ports Throughput up to 13 mpps E2610-48-PoE SwitchPoE on
10/100/1000 ports
24
Rev. 10.31
The E2610-48 and E2610-48-PoE switches feature:
48 auto-sensing 10/100 ports Two auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Two open SFP ports Up to 13.0 mpps throughput One RJ-45 console port
Each switchs two 10/100/1000 ports operate independentlythey are not dualpersonality ports. In addition, the E2610-48-PoE switch provides a total of 406 W. It can deliver 15.4 W on 24 ports or 8.4 W on 48 ports.
Note The E2610-PoE switches can connect to an EPS/RPS to provide backup power and additional power for PoE. These switches support the HP E600 Redundant & External Power Supply or the HP E610 External Power Supply.
Rev. 10.31
5 33

E2810-24G Switch
E2810-48G Switch
25
Rev. 10.31
The HP E2810 Switch Series consists of two fixed-port, stackable Gigabit switches with Layer 2 capabilities. Deployed at the access layer, these switches are designed for networks requiring secure, high-performance connectivity along with advanced traffic monitoring and prioritization. This series is a cost-effective, easy-to-use solution with a shallow, stackable form for customers who have smaller server closets. The E2810-24G switch includes the following features:

20 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Four dual-personality ports Throughput up to 35.7 mpps One RJ-45 console port 44 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Four dual-personality ports Throughput up to 71.4 mpps One RJ-45 console port
The E2810-48G switch includes the following features:

5 34
Rev. 10.31

E2915-8G-PoE Switch
8 10/100/1000-T ports 2 dual-personality ports Fanless PoE Throughput up to 14.8 mpps
26
Rev. 10.31
The HP E291X Switch Series provides Gigabit Ethernet connectivity for companies that are implementing high-performance networks. The series includes five fixed-port switchesfrom a very compact eight-port switch to 24-port and 48-port switches. These switches support static routes and RIP, making them Light Layer 3 switches. The E291X switches can be deployed at the access layer in enterprises, remote branch offices, and converged networks and at the server access layer in the data center. The E2915-8G-PoE switch is designed for organizations that must deploy access-layer switches in open spaces. The E2915-8G-PoE switch features:

Eight 10/100/1000 ports Two dual-personality ports Fanless operation Kensington lock slot (lock sold separately) Up to 14.8 mpps One RJ-45 console port
This switch has a compact footprint with flexible deployment options.
Rev. 10.31
5 35
The E2915-8G-PoE switch can also power up to eight devices that use 7.5 watts, such as IP video cameras, IP phones, and wireless access points (APs). In addition, the switch can dynamically allocate up to 15.4 watts of power to each port, with a total of 67 watts available across the eight ports.
5 36
Rev. 10.31

E2910-24G al Switch E2910-24G-PoE+ al Switch
20 10/100/1000 ports 4 dual-personality ports 1 open module slot Throughput up to 95 mpps E2910-24G-PoE+ al
Up to 15.4W per port for PoE Up to 30W per port for PoE+
27
Rev. 10.31
The E2910-24G al and E2910-24G-PoE+ al switches feature:

20 10/100/1000 ports Four dual-personality ports One open module slot (rear panel) Throughput up to 95 mpps One RJ-45 console port USB port
The E2910-24G-PoE+ al switch supports up to 15.4W per port for PoE or up to 30W per port for PoE+. It also detects and provides power to pre-standard PoE devices. Customers can purchase modules that support 10 GbE connections for the open module slot on the rear panel. For more information, see Module 6: HP E-Series Switch Hardware.
Rev. 10.31
5 37

E2910-48G al Switch E2910-48G-PoE+ al Switch
44 10/100/1000 ports 4 dual-personality ports 1 open module slot Throughput up to 131 mpps E2910-48G-PoE+ al
Up to 15.4W per port for PoE Up to 30W per port for PoE+
28
Rev. 10.31
The E2910-48G al and E2910-48G-PoE+ al switches feature:

44 10/100/1000 ports Four dual-personality ports One open module slot Throughput up to 131 mpps One RJ-45 console port USB port (rear panel)
The E2910-48G-PoE+ al switch supports up to 15.4W per port for PoE or up to 30W per port for PoE+. It also detects and provides power to pre-standard PoE devices. Customers can purchase modules that support 10 GbE connections for the open slot. For more information, see Module 6: HP E-Series Switch Hardware.
5 38
Rev. 10.31
HP E4200 vl Switch Series

E4204 vl Switch
4 open module slots Throughput up to 24 mpps
E4204-44G-4SFP Switch
44 10/100/1000 ports 2 open module slots 4 open SFP ports Throughput up to 24 mpps
E4202-72 vl Switch
72 10/100 ports 2 open module slots Throughput up to 22.4 mpps
29 Rev. 10.31
The HP E4200 vl Switch Series provides a flexible, cost-effective, modular solution as an alternative to stackable switches. The Light Layer 3 switches support routing based on static routes. (They do not support dynamic routing protocols.) These switches are excellent platforms for expansionfor example, adding new users at the access layer of the network. They can be deployed at the access layer of large, complex networks or at the core, distribution, and access layers of SMB networks. The series includes three models that have a four-module form factor:

E4204 vl switch E4204-44G-4SFP switch E4202-72 vl switch:
The E4204 vl switch ships with four open module slots. Depending on which modules the customer purchases, it supports a maximum of 96 10/100 ports or 96 10/100/1000 ports or 16 SFPs or a combination of these. It also has a RS-232C DB9 console port. In addition, the switch has a throughput of up to 24 mpps.
Rev. 10.31
5 39
The E4204-44G-4SFP switch ships with the following features:
44 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports:
One HP Switch vl 24-Port Gig-T Module One HP Switch vl 20-Port Gig-T + 4-Port SFP Module
Two open module slots Four open SFP ports One RS-232C DB-9 console port Throughput up to 24 mpps
Depending on which modules the customer installs in the two open module slots, the switch can support a maximum of 48 10/100 ports or 92 10/100/1000 ports or 12 SFPs or a combination of these. The E4202-72 vl switch ships with the following features:

72 auto-sensing 10/100 ports Two open module slots One RS-232C DB-9 console port Throughput up to 22.4 mpps
Depending on which modules the customer installs in the two open module slots, the 4202-72 vl switch supports a maximum of 120 10/100 ports or 48 10/100/1000 ports or eight mini-GBICs or a combination.
5 40
Rev. 10.31
HP E4200 vl Switch Series (Cont.)

HP E4200 vl Switch Series (Cont.)
E4208 vl Switch
E4208-68G-4SFP vl Switch
68 10/100/1000 ports 5 open module slots 4 open SFP ports Throughput up to 48 mpps
E4208-96 vl Switch
96 10/100 ports 4 open module slots Throughput up to 48 mpps
30 Rev. 10.31
The E4200 vl Switch Series includes three models that have an eight-module form factor:

E4208 vl switch E4208-68G-4SFP vl switch E4208-96 vl switch:
The E4208 vl switch ships with eight open module slots. Depending on which modules the customer installs, this switch can support a maximum of 192 10/100 ports or 192 10/100/1000 ports or 32 mini-GBICs or a combination. It also has one RS-232C DB-9 console port for management access. In addition, the switch has a throughput of up to 48 mpps. The E4208-68G-4SFP vl switch ships with the following features:
68 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports:
Two HP Switch vl 24-Port Gig-T Modules (J8768A) One HP Switch vl 20-Port Gig-T + 4-Port SFP Module (J9033A)
Four open SFP ports One RS-232C DB-9 console port Five open module slots Throughput up to 48 mpps
5 41
Rev. 10.31
The switch can support a maximum of 120 10/100 ports or 188 10/100/1000 ports or 24 mini-GBICs. The E4208-96 vl switch ships with the following features:
96 auto-sensing 10/100 ports
One HP Switch vl 24-Port 10/100-TX Module (J8765A
One RS-232C DB-9 console port Four open module slots Throughput up to 48 mpps
The switch can support a maximum of 192 10/100 ports or 96 10/100/1000 ports or 16 mini-GBICs.
5 42
Rev. 10.31

E3500-24G-PoE yl switch
20 10/100/1000 ports 4 dual-personality ports 1 open module slot (rear panel) Throughput up to 75.7 mpps PoEup to 15.4W per port
E3500-24G-PoE+ yl switch
20 10/100/1000 ports 4 dual-personality ports 1 open module slot (rear panel) Throughput up to 75.7 mpps PoEup to 30 W per port
31 Rev. 10.31
The HP E3500 Switch Series includes both Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet fixedport, managed switches. Built on the HP ProVision ASIC, these switches are designed to be future-proof. The ProVision ASIC enables HP to program new intelligent features into the switch software; customers can then upgrade their software to take advantage of these new features.
Note
The E3500 Switch Series uses the same software as other ProVision ASIC switches: HP E5400 zl Switch Series, HP E6200 yl Switch, and HP E8200 zl Switch Series. These switches are full Layer 3/4 switches, supporting static routes, RIP, and OSPF. (A premium license is required to enable OSPF.) The E3500 yl switches provide Gigabit Ethernet connections, and customers can purchase a module and install it in the rear panel to add 10-GbE connections to the E3500 yl switches. With these high-speed connections, the E3500 yl switches can be deployed at the access layer of large, complex networks or at the server access layer in the data center. In SMB networks, the E3500 yl models can be deployed at the distribution layer or core of SMB networks. The E3500 switches (with no yl in the name) provide Fast Ethernet connections, with the option of installing four SFP transceivers or mini-GBICs for uplinks. The E3500 switches can be deployed at the access layer of large, complex networks.
Rev. 10.31
5 43
The E3500-24G-PoE yl switch includes the following features:

20 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Four dual-personality ports Total of 398 W of PoE, for up to 15.4W on 10/100/1000 ports One open module slot on the rear panel One RS-232C DB-9 console port One USB port Throughput up to 74 mpps
The E3500-24G-PoE+ yl switch supports the same features, with some minor differences. The E3500-24G-PoE+ yl switch supports PoE+ (802.3at), which means that it can provide up to 30W per port. It also has an RJ-45 console port (rather than an RS-232C DB9 console port).
5 44
Rev. 10.31

E3500-48G-PoE yl switch
44 10/100/1000 ports 4 dual-personality ports 1 open module slot (rear panel) Throughput up to 111.5 mpps PoEup to 15.4W per port
E3500-48G-PoE+ yl switch
44 10/100/1000 ports 4 dual-personality ports 1 open module slot (rear panel) Throughput up to 111.5 mpps PoE+up to 30W per port
32 Rev. 10.31
The E3500-48G-PoE yl switch includes the following features:

44 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Four dual-personality ports Total of 398 W of PoE, for up to 15.4W on 10/100/1000 ports One RS-232C DB-9 console port located at the back of the switch One USB port located at the back of the switch Throughput up to 1 1.5 mpps 1
The E3500-48G-PoE+ yl switch supports the same features, with some minor differences. The E3500-48G-PoE+ yl switch supports PoE+ (802.3at). It has a total of 698 W of PoE power, supplying up to 30 W per port. It also has an RJ-45 console port (rather than an RS-232C DB9 console port).
Rev. 10.31
5 45

20 auto-sensing 10/100 ports 4 dual-personality ports Throughput up to 8.9 mpps PoEup to 15.4W per port
E3500-48 switch E3500-48-PoE switch

44 auto-sensing 10/100 ports 4 dual-personality ports Throughput up to 12.5 mpps
33 Rev. 10.31
There are four Fast Ethernet switches in the E3500 series. The E3500-24 and E350024-PoE switches include:

20 auto-sensing 10/100 ports Four dual-personality ports Throughput up to 8.9 mpps One RS-232C DB-9 console port
The E3500-24-PoE switch also provides a total of 398 W of PoE power, with up to 15.4 W per port. The E3500-48 and E3500-48-PoE switches include:

44 auto-sensing 10/100 ports Four dual-personality ports Throughput up to 12.5 mpps One RS-232C DB-9 console port
The E3500-48-PoE switch also provides a total of 398 W of PoE power, with up to 15.4 W per port.
5 46
Rev. 10.31
HP E5400 zl Switch Series

E5406 zl Switch
6 open module slots 2 open power supply slots Throughput up to 240.2 mpps
E5406-48G zl switch
48 10/100/1000 ports 1 Switch zl 875W Power Supply (1
open power supply slot)

4 open module slots Throughput up to 240.2 mpps
34
Rev. 10.31
Like the HP E3500 Switch Series, the HP E5400 zl Switch Series is built on the ProVision ASIC. These switches are designed for vigorous network environments driven by the highest requirements for performance, security, mobility, and convergence. The E5400 zl Switch Series offers capabilities at Layer 2, 3, and 4, providing advanced intelligent edge capability in a modular (6-slot and 12-slot) form factor. All models have open power supply slots for redundant power.
Note
The E5400 zl Switch Series uses the same software as other ProVision ASIC switches: HP E3500 Switch Series, HP E6200 yl Switch, and HP E8200 zl Switch Series. The E5400 zl switches support a variety of modules for network connectivity providing 10/100/1000 ports (with and without PoE or PoE+) or SFP ports. These switches also support modules that provide application services, firewall, VPNs, and wireless services. For more information about these modules, see Module 6: HP ESeries Switch Hardware. The E5400 zl series includes six switch chassis options: The six-slot E5406 zl switch does not ship with any power supplies or modulesall slots are empty. Depending on the modules the customer purchases, the E5406 zl switch supports a maximum of 144 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports or 24 10-GbE ports or 144 mini-GBICs, or a combination. It also supports up to 240.2 mpps throughput.
Rev. 10.31
5 47
The E5406 zl switch also supports up to two power supplieseither an HP Switch zl 875 W Power Supply or an HP Switch zl 1500 W Power Supply. To provide redundancy, each power supply should be connected to different AC power sources. Then, if one AC power source fails, the switch will continue to run. The E5406-48G zl switch has the following features:
48 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports (two HP Switch zl 24-Port 10/100/1000 PoE Modules) One HP Switch zl 875W Power Integrated PoE on all 10/100/1000 ports
One open slot for additional 875W or 1500W (220V only) power supply Optional connection to an external power supply for more power
Note The HP zl Power Supply Shelf can provide up to 1800 watts of PoE power to the switch if the internal PoE power supply should fail or as additional PoE power to the switchs PoE ports is needed.
Four open module slots One RS-232C DB-9 console port One USB port Throughput up to 240.2 mpps
The E5406-48G zl switch supports a maximum of 144 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports or 16 10-GbE ports or 96 mini-GBICs, or a combination.
Note The 5400 zl switch can also function as a distribution switch.
5 48
Rev. 10.31
HP E5400 zl Switch Series (Cont.)

E5406-44G-PoE+/4SFP zl Switch
44 10/100/1000 ports 4 open module slots 4 open SFP ports Throughput up to 240.2 mpps PoE+
35
Rev. 10.31
The E5406-44G-PoE+/4SFP zl switch ships with the following:
44 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports (one HP 24-Port 10/100/1000 PoE+ zl Module and one 10/100/1000 PoE+ and 4-Port Mini-GBIC zl Module) One HP Switch zl 1500 W Power Supply Integrated PoE+ on all 10/100/1000 ports
One open slot for additional power supply Optional connection to an external power supply for more power
Note The HP zl Power Supply Shelf can provide up to 1800 watts of PoE power to the switch if the internal PoE power supply should fail or as additional PoE power to the switchs PoE ports is needed.
Four open module slots Four open SFP ports One RS-232C DB-9 console port One USB port Throughput up to 240.2 mpps
Rev. 10.31
5 49
With the purchase of additional modules, the E5406-44G-PoE+/4SFP zl switch supports a maximum of 16 10-GbE ports or 140 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports or 100 mini-GBICs or a combination.
5 50
Rev. 10.31

E5412 zl Switch
12 open module slots 4 open power supply slots Throughput up to 480.3 mpps
E5412-96G zl Switch
96 10/100/1000 ports 2 Switch zl 875W Power Supplies
(2 open power supply slots)

8 open module slots Throughput up to 480.3 mpps
36
Rev. 10.31
The 12-slot E5412 zl switch does not ship with any power supplies or modules; all module slots are empty. Depending on the modules the customer purchases, the E5412 zl switch supports a maximum of 288 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports or 48 10-GbE ports or 288 mini-GBICs or a combination. It also provides up to 480.3 mpps throughput. The E5412-96G zl switch has the following features:
96 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports (four HP Switch zl 24-Port 10/100/1000 PoE Modules) Two HP Switch 875W zl Power Supplies Integrated PoE on all 10/100/1000 ports
Two open slots for additional 875W or 1500W (220V only) power supply Optional connection to an external power supply for more power
Eight open module slots One RS-232C DB-9 console port One USB port Throughput up to 480.3 mpps
The E5412-96G zl switch supports a maximum of 288 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports or 32 10-GbE ports or 192 mini-GBICs, or a combination.
Rev. 10.31
5 51

E5412-92G-PoE+/4 SFP zl Switch
96 10/100/1000 ports 8 open module slots 4 open SFP ports Throughput up to 480.3 mpps PoE+
37
Rev. 10.31
The E5412-92G-PoE+/4SFP zl switch has the following features:
96 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports (three HP 24-Port 10/100/1000 PoE+ zl Modules and one HP 20-Port 10/100/1000 PoE+ and 4-Port mini-GBIC zl Module) Four open SFP ports Eight open module slots Two HP 1500W PoE+ zl Power Supplies One RS-232C DB-9 console port One USB port Throughput up to 480.3 mpps Integrated PoE on all 10/100/1000 ports
Two open slots for additional 1500W power supply Optional connection to an external power supply for more power
The E5412-92G-PoE+/4SFP zl switch supports a maximum of 32 10-GbE ports or 284 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports or 196 mini-GBICs or a combination
5 52
Rev. 10.31
HP E6200-24G-mGBIC yl Switch
HP E6200-24G-mGBIC yl Switch
24 open SFP ports One open module slot Throughput up to 75.7 mpps
38
Rev. 10.31
The HP E6200-24G-mGBIC yl switch is a fixed-port switch that provides Layer 2, 3, and 4 capabilities in a 1U stackable format; it is intended to aggregate network traffic from the edge of the network to the core. The E6200-24G-mGBIC yl switch includes at purchase all premium features; there is no need to purchase a premium license. The E6200-24G-mGBIC yl switch has the following features:

24 open SFP ports One open module slot on the back panel Throughput up to 75.7 mpps
The open module slot on the back panel supports the HP Switch yl 10-GbE 2-Port CX4 + 2-Port X2 Module, which provides two 10-GbE ports and two open transceiver slots.
Note
The E6200-24G-mGBIC yl switch uses the same software as other ProVision ASIC switches: HP E3500 Switch Series, HP E5400 zl Switch Series, and HP E8200 zl Switch Series.
Rev. 10.31
5 53

E6600-24G Switch
20 10/100/1000 ports 4 dual-personality ports Up to 35.7 mpps
E6600-24G-4XG Switch
20 10/100/1000 ports 4 dual-personality ports 4 SFP+ 10-GbE ports Up to 75.7 mpps
39
Rev. 10.31
The HP E6600 Switch Series consists of managed, Layer 2, 3/4 switches. Built on the HP ProVision ASIC, these switches are optimized for the server access layer in a data center. They have front-to-back airflow so that they can be installed at the top of a server rack. To provide uninterrupted service, the switches support redundant, hotswappable power and redundant, hot-swappable fans. The E6600 switches also perform Layer 3 routing, supporting RIP, OSPF, and static routes. In addition, they provide advanced security features and QoS. The E6600 series includes five switches. The E6600-24G switch provides the following:

20 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Four dual-personality ports Up to 35.7 mpps Two power supply slots with one HP E6600 Switch Power Supply included with purchase One RS-232C DB-9 console port
5 54
Rev. 10.31
The E6600-24G-4XG switch provides the following:

20 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Four dual-personality ports Four SFP+ 10-GbE ports Up to 75.7 mpps Two power supply slots with one HP E6600 Switch Power Supply included with purchase One RS-232C DB-9 console port
(See Module 6: HP E-Series Switch Hardware for more information about supported mini-GBICs and SFP transceivers.)
Rev. 10.31
5 55

E6600-24XG Switch
24 SFP+ 10-GbE ports Up to 240.2 mpps
40
Rev. 10.31
There is one more 24-port switch in the E6600 series. The E6600-24XG switch includes the following:

24 SFP+ 10-GbE ports Two power supply slots with one HP E6600 Switch Power Supply included with purchase Up to 240.2 mpps One RJ-45 console port One RJ-45 out-of-band management port
(See Module 6: HP E-Series Switch Hardware for more information about supported mini-GBICs and transceivers.)
5 56
Rev. 10.31

E6600-48G Switch
44 10/100/1000 ports 4 dual-personality ports Up to 71.4 mpps
E6600-48G-4XG Switch
48 10/100/1000 ports 4 SFP+ 10-GbE ports Up to 130.9 mpps
41
Rev. 10.31
The E6600-48G switch provides the following:

44 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Four dual-personality ports Two power supply slots with one HP E6600 Switch Power Supply included with purchase Up to 71.4 mpps One RJ-45 console port One RJ-45 out-of-band management port 48 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Four SFP+ 10-GbE ports Two power supply slots with one HP E6600 Switch Power Supply included with purchase Up to 130.9 mpps One RJ-45 console port One RJ-45 out-of-band management port
5 57
The E6600-48G-4XG switch provides the following:

Rev. 10.31

E8206 zl Switch
6 open module slots 2 open power supply slots (1 power supply required) 1 management module and 1 open management module 2 fabric modules 1 system support module 1 chassis/fan tray Throughput up to 240.2 mpps
42 Rev. 10.31
Built on the ProVision ASIC, the HP E8200 zl Switch Series includes highperformance, highly available, modular switches that enable unified core-to-edge network solutions. To ensure system continuity and enhance network productivity, they provide platform and software high-availability features. They function as Layer 3/4 switches, supporting static routes and dynamic routing protocols RIP and OSPF, multicast routing and IPv6 routing. They can also function as Layer 2 switches. The E8200 zl switches support a variety of modules for network connectivity providing 10/100/1000 ports (with and without PoE or PoE+) or SFP ports. These switches also support modules that provide application services, firewall, VPNs, and wireless services. For more information about these modules, see Module 6: HP ESeries Switch Hardware. The E8200 zl switches can be deployed at any network layer in large, complex networks and in data centers. The E8206 zl switch has the following features:

Six open module slots Two open power supply slots (one required) One HP ProCurve Switch 8200zl Management Module Two HP ProCurve Switch 8200zl Fabric Modules One HP ProCurve Switch 8200zl System Support Module
Rev. 10.31
5 58
One HP ProCurve Switch 8212zl Chassis/Fan Tray Throughput up to 240.2 mpps
The E8206 zl switch supports a maximum of 288 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports or 48 10-GbE ports or 288 mini-GBICs or a combination
Rev. 10.31
5 59

E8212 zl Switch
12 open module slots 4 open power supply slots (2 power supplies required) 1 management module and 1 open management module 2 fabric modules 1 system support module 1 chassis/fan tray Throughput up to 480.3 mpps
43 Rev. 10.31
The E8212 zl switch has the following features:

12 open module slots Four open power supply slots (two required) One ProCurve Switch 8200zl Management Module Two ProCurve Switch 8200zl Fabric Modules One ProCurve Switch 8200zl System Support Module One ProCurve Switch 8212zl Chassis/Fan Tray Throughput up to 480.3 mpps
The E8212 zl switch supports a maximum of 288 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports or 48 10-GbE ports or 288 mini-GBICs, or a combination.
5 60
Rev. 10.31
HP Threat Management Services zl Module

Monitor mode:
IDS
Routing mode:
Firewall IPS VPN User authentication NAT Routing High availability (HA) Logging
44 Rev. 10.31
Installed in an E5400 zl or E8200 zl Series switch
The HP Threat Management Services zl Module is designed to help protect companies from threats that originate both inside and outside the corporate network. Installed into an E5400 zl or E8200 zl Series switch, the module can function in one of two modes:

Monitor mode Routing mode
In monitor mode, the TMS zl Module functions as an intrusion detection system (IDS). Traffic is mirrored to the modules internal port, and the module scans it for threats, such as worms, viruses, denial of service (DoS) attacks, and other threats. If the TMS zl Module detects suspicious traffic, it can send a notification message. In routing mode, the TMS zl Module provides several security features. It has a firewall, which can filter traffic on the internal network, identifying and blocking attacks. In addition, the firewall supports access policies, allowing companies to control routed traffic. In routing mode, the TMS zl Module can also function as an intrusion prevention system (IPS). The module detects the same types of threats as it does in monitor mode. In routing mode, however, the TMS zl Module can take action against such threats.
Rev. 10.31
5 61
The TMS zl Module supports virtual private networks (VPNs), which protect traffic that passes through an untrusted network such as the Internet or a wireless network that does not offer encryption. In addition to these three main security features, the TMS zl Module in routing mode provides user authentication, network address translation (NAT), high availability, and logging.
5 62
Rev. 10.31

Formerly Branded 3Com Switches HP Switches Categorizing E-Series Switches E-Series Switches Categorized by OSI Layer Functionality Deployment Options for E-Series Switches
45
Rev. 10.31
The final section in this module provides two at-a-glance references: The first helps you quickly identify the OSI functionality of each E-Series Switch. The second shows you the deployment options for these switches.
Rev. 10.31
5 63
E-Series Switches Categorized by OSI Functionality

E-Series Switches Categorized by OSI Functionality
Layer 2 HP E4210 HP E4210G HP E2510 HP E2520 HP E2810
Light Layer 3 Layers 3 and 4
HP E4500 HP E4500G HP E4510G HP E261X HP E291X HP E4200 vl
HP E4800G HP E5500 HP E5500G HP E3500 HP E5400 zl HP E6200 yl HP E6600 HP E8200 zl
46
Rev. 10.31
As you can see here, the HP E-Series provides switches to meet the needs of a wide range of customersfrom companies needing only Layer 2 functionality to organizations requiring advanced Layer 3/4 functionality.
5 64
Rev. 10.31
Deployment Options for E-Series Switches

Switch
HP E4210 HP E4210G HP E4500 HP E4500G & E4510G HP E4800G HP E5500 HP E5500G
Access Layer

Distribution Layer
Core
Data Center
47
Rev. 10.31
The E-Series also includes switches that can be deployed at any layer of large, complex networks or SMB networks.
Rev. 10.31
5 65

Access Layer HP E2510 HP E2520 HP E2810 HP E261X HP E291X HP E3500 HP E4200 vl HP E5400zl HP E6200 yl HP E6600 HP E8200 zl Distribution Layer Core Data Center
48
Rev. 10.31
Again, these switches are designed primarily for large, complex networks and some SMBs. Customers with large enterprises will typically deploy HP A-Series switches, while many SMBs will use HP V-Series switches.
5 66
Rev. 10.31
Summary
Summary
E-Series Switches
Formerly Branded 3Com switches HP switches
49
Rev. 10.31
This module has introduced the HP E-Series switches. You have learned how to recognize these switches and how to classify them according to several factors:

Whether they are fixed-port or modular Whether they provide Gigabit or Fast Ethernet connectivity Whether they provide PoE or PoE+ Whether they function as Layer 2, Light Layer 3, or Layer
Rev. 10.31
5 67
5 68
Rev. 10.31
HP E-Series Switch Hardware

Module 6
Objectives
This module outlines the basic components and accessories that you should be familiar with to provide support for HP E-Series switches. After completing this module, you should be able to:
Identify E-Series switch LEDs and use them to diagnose and troubleshoot problems Identify E-Series switches that support the Mode Select button and use it to gather diagnostic information about the switches Identify E-Series switches that support a hardware reset and use it to return the switches to factory default settings Identify E-Series switches that have a Clear button and use it to erase management passwords Identify the types of module, mini-GBIC, and transceiver options available for HP E-Series switches Recognize which E-Series switches support modules, mini-GBICs, and transceivers into HP E-Series switches Describe redundant and external power supply options for E-Series switches
Rev. 10.31
6 1
LEDs
LEDs
LEDs
LED Types LEDs on HP Managed Switches Port LEDs
Hardware Reset HP E-Series Switch Modules HP E-Series mini-GBICs and Transceivers Redundant Power for HP E-Series Switches
Rev. 10.31
LEDs are one of the most useful tools you have for diagnosing and troubleshooting problems. This section outlines the types of LEDs on most HP E-Series switches and explains how to interpret them.
6 2
Rev. 10.31
LEDs on E-Series Switches

LEDs on E-Series Switches
Purpose:
Monitor switch operations Troubleshoot problems
Three main types of LEDs:

Switchstatus of features that impact switch operation Modulestatus of modules (modular switches only) Portstatus and activity of specific ports:
Rev. 10.31
LEDs report the status of switch operations, such as the switchs self test, power over Ethernet (PoE), general power supply, and network activity on each portto name just a few. If the switch experiences a problem, the LEDs immediately reflect it. By viewing and interpreting the LEDs, you can begin to pinpoint and identify the problem. Like most managed switches, the HP E-Series switches have three main types of LEDs:
Switch LEDsThese LEDs report on the status of features that impact switch operation. You can use switch LEDs to determine at the status of hardware components, such as:
Power supply Fan Self-test Temperature Redundant power supplies External power supplies
Switch LEDs can also show the status of functionality such as Power over Ethernet (PoE).
Rev. 10.31
6 3
Module LEDsThese LEDs report on the status of the modules that are installed in a modular switch such as HP E4200 vl Switch Series, HP E5400 zl Switch Series, and HP E8200 zl Switch Series.
Module status Module activity PoE compatibility
Port LEDsThese LEDs report on the status and activity of each port in the switch.
Port activity PoE compatibility and supply Full-duplex operation Connection speed
6 4
Rev. 10.31
Locate LEDs on Formerly Branded 3Com Switches

Locate LEDs on Formerly Branded 3Com Switches
Similar to LEDs on formerly branded H3C switches For more information about LEDs on these switches, refer to Module 3: HP A-Series Switch Hardware.
7-Segment Digital LED Power LED RPS status LED Module 1LED Module 2 LED
Mode button
5 Rev. 10.31
As you know, the HP E-Series includes two groups of switches:

Switches that were previously branded as 3Com switches Switches that were previously branded as HP ProCurve switches
The LEDs on these two groups of switches vary slightly. The LEDs on the 3Com switches (like the one shown in the slide) are similar to those on the H3C switches that are part of the HP A-Series. If you are servicing a 3Com switch, refer to Module 3: HP A-Series Switch Hardware for information about LEDs. The rest of this section will focus on the switches that were previously branded HP ProCurve. (For a complete explanation of a particular switchs LEDs, refer to the Installation and Getting Started Guide for the specific switch model. These guides are available on the HP Web site.) The remainder of this section will focus on the switches that were previously branded HP ProCurve.
Rev. 10.31
6 5
Locate Basic Switch LEDs on HP Switches

Locate Basic Switch LEDs on HP Switches
Test LED
Fan LED
Power LED Fault LED Locator LED (Blue)
Rev. 10.31
HP switches have several basic LEDs:

Power LED Fault LED Locator LED Test LED Fan LED
Note The remainder of this section covers the LEDs on switches that were previously branded HP ProCurve switches. For information about switches that were formerly branded 3Com (including the E4210, E4210G, E4500, E4500G, E4510G, E4800G, E5500, and E5500G), see Module 3: HP A-Series Switch Hardware.
The slide shows where each of these LEDs are located on an E5400 zl switch. Because the LEDs are clearly identified, you should be able to easily locate them on other switches.
6 6
Rev. 10.31
Use Basic Switch LEDs to Troubleshoot Problems
Use Basic Switch LEDs to Troubleshoot Problems

LED
Power (green) Fault (orange) State On Off Off Blinking Locator On On or blinking Off Off On Fan (green) Blinking On Blinking Meaning Switch is receiving power Switch is not receiving power Normal state Switch is experiencing fault condition Failed self-test; check other LEDs Distinguishes switch from other switches
Test (green)
Normalswitch is not undergoing self-test Self-test/initialization in progress Switch component has failed self-test Cooling fan is operational Cooling fan failurecheck Fault LED
Rev. 10.31
The slide lists basic switch LEDs on HP E-Series switches. By examining these basic switch LEDs, you can begin to isolate or eliminate problems. When the LEDs are on, they indicate the following:

PowerThe switch is receiving power. FaultIf the fault light is on, the switch has failed its self-test. If the fault LED is blinking, the switch is experiencing a fault condition. For example, a hardware failure may have occurred on the switch, one of the switch modules, an individual port, a power supply, or a fan. The Status LED for the module or other device that is experiencing the fault will flash simultaneously. You will learn more about other fault conditions later in this module.
Locator LEDIf you use a Telnet session or a Web browser session to manage a switch that is in a room that houses many switches, you may not be able to easily locate the physical switch chassis. You can activate the blue Locator LED, which will then either glow solid or begin to flash, allowing you to find the switch. TestThe self-test is underway. A blinking Test LED indicates that the test has failed. If this happens, the Fault LED will flash simultaneously. (If the self-test is completed successfully, the LED turns off.)
Rev. 10.31
6 7
FanThe fan is operating normally. A blinking LED indicates that the fan has failed.
6 8
Rev. 10.31
Switch LEDs: Temperature LED
Switch LEDs: Temperature LED

Switch LED
Tmp
State
On/Off* (green) On/Blinking (orange)
Meaning
Switch temperature conditions are normal. An abnormal temperature condition has been detected.
*Off or on (green) indicates normal temperatures, depending on the switch.
PoE LED Tmp LED Fan LED Test LED

8 Rev. 10.31
Most HP switches have a Tmp LED, which indicates the switch temperature condition:

On/GreenThe switch temperature is normal. Blinking/OrangeAn abnormal temperature condition has been detected on the switch.
Note On some switchesE5400 zl switches, for examplethe temperature LED stays off at normal switch temperature and only turns on when there is a temperature anomaly. Keep in mind, though, that a blinking orange temperature LED always indicates abnormal switch temperature.
If the Tmp LED is blinking orange, you should check the room where the switch is housed. For example, make sure the temperature of the room is not too high and there is sufficient airflow around the switch. If you are servicing an E6600 switch, you may want to check the air flow direction. See the Switch Fan Trays section at the end of this module. If the switch is an E5400 zl or E8200 zl switch, make sure that the customer has followed the guidelines for installing the modules. For example, if the customer has an HP Threat Management Services (TMS) zl Module or an HP AllianceONE Services zl Module, you must verify that the switch chassis does not exceed a certain temperature. If the module is installed in the left side of the switch, the temperature
6 9
Rev. 10.31
should not exceed 50 degrees C. If the module is on the right side, the temperature should not exceed 40 degrees C.
6 10
Rev. 10.31
Switch LEDs: Mode Select Button and Indicator LEDs
Switch LEDs: Mode Select Button and Indicator LEDs

Switch LEDs
Indicator
State
On/Off (green)
Meaning
Indicates the setting of the Mode LEDs, based on what has been selected with the Mode Select button: Actdisplays port activity FDxdisplays ports operating in full duplex Maxdisplays ports operating at maximum speed (100 Mbps or 1000 Mbps) PoEdisplays status of PoE on the port
Mode Select
button
Indicator LEDs (Act, FDx, Spd, PoE)

9 Rev. 10.31
Mode Select button changes what is
displayed on the Mode LED for each port.
To optimize the amount of information that can be displayed for each port in the limited space available, many switches rely on multiple-display LEDs, or Mode LEDs. These LEDs can indicate more than one port condition and are controlled by the Mode Select button. Pressing the Mode Select button changes the setting of the Mode LED and the condition reported by the LED. For example, the Mode LED in the slide above can indicate one of four port conditions:

Port activity Ports operating at full duplex Ports operating at maximum speed Network events possibly requiring operator attention
To change the setting of the port Mode LED, press the Mode Select button and cycle through the settings until you reach the desired one. (Mode LEDs are discussed in more detail later in the module when port LEDs are described.) In addition to the Mode LEDs, switches have Indicator LEDs, which display the switchs current mode setting. For example, the HP E2610-24 switchs indicator LEDs match its Mode LED settings:

ActMode LEDs are indicating network activity. FDxMode LEDs are indicating ports operating at full-duplex.
6 11
Rev. 10.31
SpdMode LEDs are indicating ports operating at maximum speed.

Note On some switches, the Mode Select button changes the information that is displayed by the Module LEDs or the port Link LED. These functions are described later in this module.
PoEIf the PoE indicator LED is lit, the Link and Mode LEDs indicate PoE status:
Link LED
OnPoE is enabled on the port. OffPoE is disabled on the port. Slow BlinkingInternal PoE fault on this port. Fast BlinkingThe port is denied PoE power or has an external load fault. OnPoE power is being supplied on this port. OffPoE is not being supplied on this port.
Mode LED
6 12
Rev. 10.31
Switch LEDs: PoE
Switch LEDs: PoE

Switch LED
PoE (green/orange)
State
On (green) Off Slow blinking* (orange) Rapid Blinking** (orange)
Meaning
Normal operationready to supply PoE power Off during boot process only Internal hardware failure External power supply fault PoE has been denied to one or more ports.
*Blinking on/off approximately once every 1.6 seconds **Blinking on/off cycle approximately once every .5 seconds
PoE LED Tmp LED Fan LED Test LED

10 Rev. 10.31
Switches that support PoE are equipped with a PoE LED. (This LED is not the Mode LED at the PoE setting.) Interpret the PoE LED as follows:
On/GreenA green PoE LED indicates that the switch is ready to provide PoE power. This is normal behavior for switches capable of supplying PoE power. Blinking/OrangeA blinking orange PoE LED indicates that one or more of the switchs ports has experienced a fault condition. In this case, the switchs Fault LED will blink simultaneously. If it is a self-test failure, the Test LED will blink simultaneously. When the Mode Select button is used to put the LEDs in PoE mode, the Mode LED will also blink simultaneously. When both the PoE and the Fault LED are blinking, the type of error condition is indicated by the speed of the blinking:
Slow blinking (approximately one flash every 1.6 seconds)indicates an internal hardware failure Rapid blinking (approximately one flash every .5 seconds)indicates a fault on an external power supply
When the PoE LED is blinking but the Fault LED is not, the switch is experiencing an oversubscription condition. In other words, not enough power is available for each port that demands it. When set at PoE mode, the Mode LED for the port or ports that are not receiving power will also blink.
Rev. 10.31
6 13

Switch LED
RPS Status (green)
State
On Blinking Off
Meaning
HP E600 RPS/EPS unit is connected, operating correctly, and could be powering the switch. HP E600 RPS/EPS unit is connected but powering another switch; HP 600 unit has experienced a fault. HP E600 RPS/EPS not connected or is not powered on.
RPS LED
1 1 Rev. 10.31
Some HP switches support redundant power supplies (RPS), which are discussed later in this module. If the internal power supply in a switch fails, the RPS will immediately provide all the power necessary to keep the switch running. However, most RPS devices will not supply power to the PoE ports on PoE switches. (There is one exception that will be discussed in the RPS section later in this module.) A switchs RPS LED indicates the status of the RPS:
On/GreenAn RPS is connected and operating correctly. The RPS could be currently powering the switch. Blinking/OrangeThe RPS is connected but has experienced a fault. LED OffThe RPS is not connected or is not powered on.
6 14
Rev. 10.31
Switch LEDs: EPS LED
Switch LEDs: EPS LED

Switch LED EPS Status (green) State On Blinking Meaning Switch is connected to a RPS/EPS or EPS and receiving power. The External Power Supply has experienced a fault: Off PoE is oversubscribed. Switch software may not support the EPS function. There is a fan, power, or temporary fault. Switch detects the EPS but cannot communicate with it.
External Power Supply is not connected or is not powered on.
EPS LED
12 Rev. 10.31
An External Power Supply (EPS) provides power to:

PoE ports on PoE switches if the switchs internal AC power supply fails PoE modules on switches
EPS units are discussed in more depth later in this module. The EPS LED indicates the EPS status for a switch that supports a connection to such a device:

On/GreenThe switch is connected to an EPS and is receiving power from it. Blinking/OrangeThe EPS is connected but has experienced a fault or is unplugged. OffThe switch is not connected to an EPS or the EPS is not powered on.
To view the PoE status of a module (if the module and the switch support this capability), you can use the Mode Select button as described on the following page.
Rev. 10.31
6 15
Switch LEDs: Module LEDs
Switch LEDs: Module LEDs

LED
Module
State
On (green) Off Blinking (orange)
Meaning
Module is installed and operational. Module is not installed. Module LED briefly blinks when a module is hot swapped. Prolonged blinking signifies module has failed. Module slot supports PoE Internal slot fault or insufficient power Module in slot is not a PoE module.
Module in PoE Mode*
On (green) Blinking Off
*Not available on all switches
Module LEDs
13
Rev. 10.31
Module LEDs
Modular switches such as the E5400 zl and E8200 zl switches have lettered LEDs, each one corresponding to one of the switchs module slots. If a lettered Module LED is on, a module has been installed in the corresponding slot and is operating correctly. If the lettered Module LED is off, the corresponding slot is empty. If the LED is blinking orange, the corresponding slot or module is experiencing a fault condition. If this happens, the Fault LED will also blink to notify you that there is a fault condition. A fault condition may indicate that the module has experienced a hardware failure. It may also indicate that the switch is running a version of the software that does not support the module. For example, the TMS zl Module requires the E5400 zl and E8200 zl switch to run software version K.13.55 or above. If you install a TMS zl Module in a switch that is running an earlier version of the software, the Module LED and the Fault LED will blink. You can simply upgrade the switch software to the required version to remedy this problem.
Note The Module LED flashes very briefly when a module is being hot swapped. If the LED flashes for a prolonged time, the module in the corresponding slot has failed its self-test or encountered some other fault condition.
6 16
Rev. 10.31
Module LED in PoE Mode

Like Port Mode LEDs, the Module LEDs can be controlled by the Mode Select button. That is, pressing the Mode Select button can change the information that the Module LEDs display. For example, if the Mode Select button has been used to put the Port Mode LEDs in PoE Mode, then the Module LEDs will convey information relating to each module slots PoE status. A green Module LED indicates that the corresponding slot is supporting PoE power. A blinking Module LED indicates that there is a PoE internal fault in the slot, a PoE load fault, or simply not enough power for the corresponding slot. If the Module LED is off, the corresponding module does not support PoE or the slot is empty.
Rev. 10.31
6 17
Switch LEDs: Mgt or MM Status LED
Switch LEDs: Mgt or MM Status LED

Switch LED State Meaning
Management module is installed and fault free. Switch is powered off. There is a fault on the Management module.
Mgmt (E5400 zl)/ On (green) MM Status (E8200 zl) Off Blinking (orange)
Mgmt LED
14
Rev. 10.31
The HP E5400 zl and E8200 zl switches support removable Management modules and have an LED to communicate the status of these modules. The E5400 zl switches have the Mgmt LED, and the E8200 zl switches have the MM Status LED.

On/GreenThe module has been installed and is functional. OffThe switch is powered off. Blinking/OrangeThe module is experiencing a fault.
Unlike the E5400 zl switches, which only support one Management module, the E8200 zl switches support redundant Management modules to support missioncritical operations. When two Management modules are installed and powered on, one Management module is active, and the other module operates in standby mode. In addition to the MM Status LED, the E8200 zl switches have a bank of MM State LEDs to show the status of each Management module:

ActvThis LED is green if the management module is active. StbyThis LED is green if the management module is in standby mode. DwnThis LED is green if the management module is shut down.
6 18
Rev. 10.31
Switch LEDs: CF and DIM LEDs
Switch LEDs: CF and DIM LEDs

E5400 zl & E8200 zl Switch LED CF State On (green) Off Blinking (orange) DIM On (green) Off Blinking (orange) Meaning Compact Flash is fault free. Compact Flash status is unknown. Compact Flash has a fault or alert condition. Dual In-line Memory Module (DIM) is fault free. DIM status is unknown. DIM has a fault or alert condition.
CF LED DIM LED
15
Rev. 10.31
The HP E5400 zl and E8200 zl switches also have LEDs that show the status of the internal Compact Flash (CF) memory and the Dual In-Line Memory Module (DIM) status. (An emerging standard for RAM circuits, the DIM enables a 64-bit data path.) On the E8200 zl switches, these LEDs are listed as Component Status on the Management module, as shown on the next slide. The CF LED has three different states:

On/GreenThe Compact Flash status is known and is fault free. OffThe Compact Flash status is unknown. Blinking/OrangeThe Compact Flash has a fault or an alert condition. Check the other LEDs to help identify the problem.
If the CF, Fault, and Self Test LEDs are blinking, the Compact Flash failed self-test. If the CF and Fault LEDs are blinking, an operational fault has occurred. If the CF LED is blinking rapidly (400 milliseconds, or ms, On and 400ms Off), an operational alert occurred and is unresolved. (For example, Compact Flash might not be present.)
The DIM LED also has three states:

On/GreenThe DIM status is known and fault free. OffThe DIM status is unknown.
6 19
Rev. 10.31
Blinking/Orange The DIM has a fault or an alert condition. Check the other LEDs to help identify the problem
If the DIM, Fault, and Self Test LEDs are blinking, DIM failed self-test. If DIM and Fault LEDs are blinking, an operational fault has occurred. If the DIM LED is blinking rapidly (400ms On and 400ms Off), an operational alert occurred and is unresolved.
6 20
Rev. 10.31
Switch LEDs: SSM LED
Switch LEDs: SSM LED

E8200 zl Switch LED SSM State On (green) Off Blinking (orange) Meaning Communication with the System Support Module (SSM) is good. No communication with the SSM, or no SSM is installed. Communication link to the SSM is bad, or the SSM has failed.
Component Status LEDs CF DIM SSM
System Support Module
16
Rev. 10.31
In addition to the CF and DIM LEDs, the E 8200 zl switches have a third Component Status LEDthe SSM LED. This LED shows if the Management module can communicate with the system support module (SSM) module:

On/GreenThe communication link with the SSM is good. OffThe communication link with the SSM is down, or no SSM is installed. Blinking/OrangeThe communication link with the SSM is bad, or the SSM itself has failed
Rev. 10.31
6 21
Switch LEDs: Power Supply LED
Switch LEDs: Power Supply LED

Switch LED Power or Internal Power State On (green) Off Blinking (orange) Meaning Power supply is installed. Power supply is not installed. Power supply installed is not plugged in or has experienced a fault.
Internal Power LEDs (1-4)
17
Rev. 10.31
Switches may also have Power or Internal Power LEDs, which correspond to the power slots located at the back of the switch. If a supply is plugged into an active AC power source, the corresponding Internal Power LED will turn on. If an Internal Power LED is blinking, the power supply installed in the position corresponding to the number is not plugged in to an active AC power source or has experienced a fault. The switch Fault LED will blink simultaneously.
6 22
Rev. 10.31
Interpreting Port LEDs on Switches

Interpreting Port LEDs on Switches
LED Link (green) State On Off Meaning Port is enabled and receiving link signal. No active network cable is connected to the port. The port is not receiving link beat or sufficient light. The port has been disabled through switch management. Blinking Mode (green) Port has failed self test; the Fault, Self Test LEDs, and appropriate module status LEDs flash simultaneously. Mode LEDs display network activity information based on the setting dictated by the Mode Select button, such as Full Duplex operation, speed, or activity.
One Link LED per port One Mode LED per port
18 Rev. 10.31
Port LEDs communicate information regarding specific ports rather than information concerning the switch in general. On some switches, port LEDs are located together on one side of the switch. On other switches, such as the one shown here, each port has two port LEDs, which are located at the bottom or top of the port.

Link LED Mode LED
These LEDs communicate information regarding the specific port.
Link LED
The green Link LED indicates that the port is enabled and receiving a link signal. If the Link LED is off, then the port is either not receiving a link beat, or the port has been disabled.
Note In certain Mode settings, the significance of the Link LED can change, as described on the next page.
Mode LED
As explained earlier, the operation of the Mode LED is controlled by the Mode Select button on the switch chassis, and the current selection is revealed by the Indicator LEDs on the switch. Press the Mode Select button to change from one mode to the next.
Rev. 10.31
6 23
On each Mode LED, the information indicated by an On status is determined by the current mode setting. For example, many switches have these settings, which indicate the following when the Mode LED is on:

ActThe port is experiencing network activity. FDxThe port is operating in full duplex mode. Spd or SpeedThe port is operating at full speed (100 Mbps or 1000 Mbps depending on the switch and the port).
If the switch supports PoE the Mode LED might bet set to PoE, as described on the next page.
6 24
Rev. 10.31

Port LED Link (green) State On Off Mode (green) On Off Meaning Indicates that the port is configured to enable PoE power delivery to the connected device Indicates that PoE power delivery has been disabled to that port Indicates the port is providing PoE power Port is not providing PoE power
Push Mode button until it is in PoE mode.
One Link LED per port One Mode LED per port; can operate in PoE mode
19
Rev. 10.31
In a switchs default state, its port Link LEDs indicate whether the corresponding ports are connected to devices and receiving link signals. If the PoE indicator LED is lit, the Link and Mode LEDs indicate PoE status:
Link LED:
On: PoE is enabled on this port Off: PoE is disabled on this port. Slow Blinking: Internal PoE fault on this port. Fast Blinking: This port is denied PoE power or has an external load fault. On: PoE power is be supplied on this port Off: PoE is not being supplied on this port.
Note The Mode LED setting is changed, as explained earlier in this module, by pressing the Mode Select button.
Mode LED:
Rev. 10.31
6 25

Port LED T/S (green) State On Meaning T indicates 10/100/1000Base-T RJ-45 port is enabled. S indicates SFP port is enabled
Port 47S
Port 47T
20
Rev. 10.31
Many HP switches feature dual-personality ports. Companies can use each dualpersonality port for a Gigabit Ethernet link, or they can purchase a mini-GBIC or SFP transceiver, which supports other types of high-speed links. (Available mini-GBICs or SFP transceivers are listed later in this module.) HP switches that support dual-personality ports have an additional port LED: the T/M LED. This LED indicates whether:

The 10/100/1000Base-T RJ-45 port is enabled (T) The SFP port is enabled (S)
Note On older switches, you may see a T/M LED instead of a T/S LED. It behaves the same way; the M simply stands for mini-GBIC instead of S for SFP.
6 26
Rev. 10.31
LEDs at StartupHP E5400 zl Switch

LEDs at StartupHP E5400 zl Switch
During the self test:
Power, Fault, and switch LEDs turn on. After 30 seconds, all LEDs on modules, such as port LEDs, turn on. Fault LED lights up and then turns off. Chassis LEDs turn orange and then off. Test, Fan, and Power LEDs turn green and stay on. Test and Fan LEDs turn off.
Power LED Fault LED Locator LED (Blue)
Switch LEDs
Port LEDs
21 Rev. 10.31
Now that you understand the different types of LEDs on HP switches, you should become familiar with the behavior of LEDs as a switch starts up. By watching the LEDs, you should be able to determine whether or not a switch is booting successfully. This slide provides an examplethe startup process for the HP E5400 zl switch.
LED Behavior During the Self-Test

When you power on a switch, the Power, Fault, switch, and module LEDs turn on initially. Then, after approximately 30 seconds, all of the module LEDs turn on as the modules receive power and code is downloaded to them. The Fault LED turns off, and all the chassis LEDs turn off except the Power, Self Test, Fan Status, and Power Status LEDs. When the download of code to the modules is completed, the module LEDs turn off. You may see each port LED turn on briefly, in sequence, as the port is tested. For the duration of the self-test, the Self Test LED stays on.
LED Behavior When the Self-Test Completes Successfully

When the switch successfully completes its self-test, the Power LED stays on. The Status LEDs on the switch chassis stay on for the devices installed, including the LEDs that correspond to each switch module installed, the LEDs that correspond to each power supply installed, and one LED for all the fans. The Fault and Self Test LEDs should then go off.
Rev. 10.31
6 27
Port LEDs as the Switch Modules Begin Normal Operational Mode

As switch modules begin to operate normally, the ports become active. If the ports are connected to active network devices, the Link LEDs stay on, and the Mode LEDs behave according to the mode selected. In the default mode (Activity), the Mode LEDs should flicker, showing network activity on the ports. If the ports are not connected to active network devices, the LEDs will stay off.
6 28
Rev. 10.31
Hardware Reset
Hardware Reset
LEDs Hardware Reset
Reset and Clear Buttons Restoring Switches to Factory Defaults
HP E-Series Switch Modules HP E-Series mini-GBICs and Transceivers Redundant Power for HP E-Series Switches
22
Rev. 10.31
You may sometimes need to reboot a switch or return it to factory default settings. On some HP switches, you can perform a hardware reset and use switch buttons to return the switch to factory default settings. (You can also access the switchs command line interface to reboot the switch or return it to factory default settings, as explained in the next module.)
Rev. 10.31
6 29
Reset and Clear Buttons

Reset and Clear Buttons
Some HP switches have Reset and Clear buttons.
Reset button Initiates a warm reboot Clears any temporary error conditions that may have occurred Executes the switch self-test Resets all network activity counters to zero Activates recently installed transceivers and modules Clear button Deletes any CLI passwords when pressed by itself for at least 1 second Reset and Clear button together Restore factory default settings when pressed in a specific pattern
23
Rev. 10.31
Some HP switches (such as the HP E5400 zl Switch Series, the HP E8200 zl Switch Series, and the HP E3500 Switch Series) have Reset and Clear buttons. These buttons can be used alone or together to execute particular tasks.
Reset Button
The Reset button is used to reboot the switch while it is powered on. This action deletes configuration changes not written to memory, clears any temporary error conditions that may have occurred, executes the switch self-test, and resets all network activity counters to zero. If a switch does not have a Reset button, you can simply disconnect it from its power source.
Clear Button
The Clear button, when pressed by itself for at least one second, deletes the management passwords configured on the switch.
Reset and Clear Button

The Clear and Reset buttons can be pressed simultaneously to return the switch to its factory default configuration. Such action clears the current startup-configas well as any changes made to the running-configand restores the factory default configuration to the switch.
6 30
Rev. 10.31
The startup-config is the configuration that is stored on the switch and read into memory when the switch is rebooted. After a switch is powered on, the configuration it is using is called the running-config. When you make a configuration change to the switch, it automatically becomes part of the running-config. If you want the change to be permanent, you must explicitly save the change to the startup-config. If you do not save the change to the startup-config, the switch does not retain the setting when it is shut down or rebooted. You will learn more about the startup-config and the running-config in Module 7: Basic Configuration of HP E-Series Switches.
Rev. 10.31
6 31
Using a Hardware Reset to Revert to Factory Default Settings

Using a Hardware Reset to Revert to Factory Default Settings
Reset Clear Button Button
1. On switches that have Reset and Clear buttons,
simultaneously press both buttons.

2. Continue to press the Clear button while releasing the
Reset button.
Flashing Self Test LED
3. When the Self Test LED flashes, release the Clear button.
Reset Button
24 Rev. 10.31
Clear Button
On switches that have both Reset and Clear buttons, you can use these buttons to return a switch to its factory default settings. This process will remove all configurations in the startup-config and running-config and may temporarily create network connectivity issues. If you are restoring the factory default settings for a reason other than configuration problems, you should save the valid switch configuration prior to performing the factory default reset. Module 7: Basic Configuration of E-Series Switches discusses this process in detail. To restore a switch to its factory default configuration using the Reset and Clear buttons, complete these steps. 1. Using a pointed object, simultaneously press both the Reset and Clear buttons on the front of the switch. The Power and Fault LEDs light up. (These LEDs are described in the next section of this module.) Continue to press the Clear button while releasing the Reset button. When the Self Test LED begins to blink, release the Clear button. It can take up to 30 seconds for the LED to blink, depending on the switch model.
2. 3.
After the switch completes its self-test, it will begin operating using its factory default settings.
6 32
Rev. 10.31
HP E-Series Switch Modules

HP E-Series Switch Modules
LEDs Hardware Reset HP E-Series Switch Modules
Requirements for Hot-swapping and Hot-inserting
Modules
Installing Modules Modules Supported by HP Switches
HP E-Series mini-GBICs and Transceivers Redundant Power for HP E-Series Switches

25 Rev. 10.31
This section lists the requirements for hot-swapping or hot-inserting a module into a switch chassis and explains how to install a module. Finally, it provides a table that lists which modules are supported by each HP E-Series modular switch.
Rev. 10.31
6 33
Hot-swapping or Hot-inserting Modules

Hot-swapping or Hot-inserting Modules
Hot-swappingreplace a module with a module of the same type (including model and revision) while the switch is powered on. Hot-insertinginstall a new module in an empty slot while the switch is powered on. In both cases, the module is immediately activated.
Hot-swapping
Hot-inserting
26
Rev. 10.31
HP modular switches support both hot-swapping and hot-inserting. These features allow you to replace a module or install a new module without interrupting the operation of the switch. To hot-swap a module, you must replace a module with one of the same type. That is, both modules must have the exact same model number:
Note A revision product does not have the same module number as the original product: For example, HP devices JxxxA and JxxxBwhere xxx represents the same series of numbers, and B signifies a revision of Aare not the same product. The two modules would not be hot-swappable.
To hot-insert a module, you simply add a module in a slot where one was not previously installed. You can perform either task while the switch is operational. The replaced or new module is then immediately operational; you do not have to reboot the switch.
6 34
Rev. 10.31
Install a Different Type of Module
Install a Different Type of Module

If you replace a module with a different type of module, you must reboot the switch to activate the new module.
27
Rev. 10.31
Sometimes, however, you may need to replace a module with a different type of module. For example, you may want to remove a 100Base-FX module and install a Gigabit-SX module in its place. In this circumstance, you must reboot the switch after the new module is installed so the switch processor can properly initialize and configure the new module type. Until the switch is rebooted, the module will not operate, the Module Status LED will continue to flash, and all the LEDs on the module will stay on continuously.
Rev. 10.31
6 35
Checklist for Installing HP AllianceONE Services zl Modules
Checklist for Installing HP AllianceONE Services zl Modules

Temperature requirements Number of modules supported in each chassis Required switch software version Module licensing
28
Rev. 10.31
The E5400 zl and E8200 zl switches support HP AllianceONE Services zl Modules, which provide additional network services. For example, one of these modules, the Threat Management Services zl Module, provides a firewall, virtual private networks (VPNs), and an intrusion detection system/intrusion prevention system (IDS/IPS). HP AllianceONE Service zl Modules have requirements that other modules do not. When installing such modules, check the following:
Temperature requirementsThe module may have specific temperature requirements. For example, the TMS zl Module requires the chassis temperature to be no higher than 50 Celsius if the module is installed on the left side of the chassis and no higher than 40 Celsius if it is installed on the right side. Number of modules supported in each chassisOn the E5406 zl, E5412 zl, and E8212 zl switches, you can install up to four HP AllianceOne Services zl Modules in the same chassis. If you attempt to install a fifth module, that module will not boot. On the E8206 zl switch, you can install up to two such modules in the same chassis.
6 36
Rev. 10.31
Required switch softwareSome modules require the switch to be running a certain version of the software (or above). For example, the TMS zl Module requires the E5400 zl or E8200 zl switch to be running software K.13.55 or above. If the switch is running a lower version of the software, it will not recognize the module. In this case, you must update the switch software with the required version. Download the switch software from the HP Networking Web site and follow the instructions outlined in Module 7: Basic Configuration of HP E-Series Switches. Module licensingSome modules, such as the TMS zl Module, have their own licensing requirements. Consult the modules installation manual for specific instructions.
Rev. 10.31
6 37
Install a Module
Install a Module
1. Wearing an ESD preventive wrist strap, insert the module into the guides on the switch. 2. Push the module on the outer edges (near both screws), sliding it in until you feel resistance. 3. Push in the two levers on the front of the module. 4. Tighten the screws.
29
Rev. 10.31
Prepare to Install the Module

Before you begin installing a module, make sure that the module is supported by the switch. Then, either remove a slot cover from the modular switch or remove a previously installed module. To remove a slot cover or a module, use either a flatbladed or Torx T-10 screwdriver to loosen the two screws securing the module in the slot. (You should retain the slot cover for future use.) If you are removing a module from an HP E5400 zl or E8200 zl switch, pull the levers at the bottom of the module toward you. You can then slide the module out of the switch. If you are removing a module from another modular switch, such as the E4200 vl switch, there are no levers so you will simply slide the module out of the switch chassis.
Install the Module

Avoid electrostatic discharge problems by wearing an ESD preventive wrist strap and handling the modules only by their bulkheads. To install the module, complete these steps. 1. Insert the module into the slot, using the guides on the side of the switch chassis.
6 38
Rev. 10.31
2. Push the module near both screws, sliding it in until you feel resistance. The module will protrude from the switch approximately inch, or 1.3 centimeters. Modules employ low-force connectors. Fully insert the module into its slot, but be careful to not push too vigorously. 3. Push in the two levers at the bottom of the module. This will slide the module further into the switch until the face of the module is flush with the face of the switch. The levers will rest against the front of the module. Again, if you are installing a module into a different modular switch such as the E4200 vl switch, you can skip this step because the modules do not have levers. 4. After the module is fully inserted, insert the two retaining screws to secure the module in place. The screws should be tightened until they are secure but not over-tightened.
Note If you do not use one or more of the slots, make sure that the slot cover plate is still attached over the slot for safe operation and proper switch cooling. You should not have more than one module slot uncovered at a time.
Rev. 10.31
6 39
Modules for the HP E4210G, E4500G, E4510G, E4800G, and E5500G Switches
Modules for HP E4210G, E4500G, E4510G, E4800G, and E5500G Switches
Switch E4210G Module HP 1-Port 10-Gig XFP E45/E48 Module HP 2-Port 10-Gig XFP E45/E48 Module HP 2-Port 10-Gig LCM E45/E48 Module HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP 1-Port 10-Gig XFP E45/E48 Module 2-Port 10-Gig XFP E45/E48 Module 2-Port 10-GbE SFP+ A5500/E4800/E4500 Module 2-Port 10-Gig LCM E45/E48 Module 2-Port 10-Gig XFP E45/E48 Module 2-Port 10-Gig LCM E45/E48 Module 1-Port 10-Gig XFP E45/E48 Module 2-Port 10-GbE SFP+ A5500/E4800/E4500 Module 2-Port GbE SFP A5500/E4800 Module
E4500G/E4510G
E4800G
E5500G
HP 8-Port SFP E5500 Module HP 1-Port 10-GbE E5500 Module XENPAK HP 2-Port 10-GbE E5500 Module XFP
30
Rev. 10.31
This slide shows the modules that the E4210G, E4500G, E4510G, E4800G, and E5500G Switch Series support. (Check the HP Networking Web site for an up-todate list of modules.)
E4210G

HP 1-Port 10-Gig XFP E45/E48 Module HP 2-Port 10-Gig XFP E45/E48 Module HP 2-Port 10-Gig LCM E45/E48 Module
E4500G and E4510G

HP 1-Port 10-Gig XFP E45/E48 Module HP 2-Port 10-Gig XFP E45/E48 Module HP 2-Port 10-GbE SFP+ A5500/E4800/E4500 Module HP 2-Port 10-Gig LCM E45/E48 Module
6 40
Rev. 10.31
E4800G

HP 2-Port 10-Gig XFP E45/E48 Module HP 2-Port 10-Gig LCM E45/E48 Module HP 1-Port 10-Gig XFP E45/E48 Module HP 2-Port 10-GbE SFP+ A5500/E4800/E4500 Module HP 2-Port GbE SFP A5500/E4800 Module
E5500G

HP 8-Port SFP E5500 Module HP 1-Port 10-GbE E5500 Module XENPAK HP 2-Port 10-GbE E5500 Module XFP
Rev. 10.31
6 41
Modules for HP E2910 al, E3500 yl , E4200 vl, and E6200 yl Switches
Modules for HP E2910 al, E3500 yl, E4200 vl, and E6200 yl Switches
Switch HP E2910 al Modules HP 2-Port 10-GbE CX4 al Module HP 2-Port 10-GbE SFP+ al Module HP 10-GbE al Interconnect Kit HP Switch yl 10-GbE 2-Port CX4 + 2-Port X2 Module HP 10-GbE 2-Port SFP+/ 2-Port CX4 yl Module HP HP HP HP HP HP Switch Switch Switch Switch Switch Switch vl vl vl vl vl vl 4-Port Mini-GBIC Module 12-Port 100-FX MTRJ Module 24-Port 10/100-TX Module 20-Port Gig-T + 4-Port SFP Module 24-Port Gig-T Module 1-Port 10-GbE X2 Module
HP E3500 yl & E6200 yl HP E4200 vl
31
Rev. 10.31
This slide shows the modules that the HP E2910 al, E3500 yl, and E6200 yl fixedport switches support. These switches have an open module slot on their rear panel. This slide also shows the modules that the E4200 vl Switch Series supports. This series consists of modular switches. (Check the HP Networking Web site for an up-todate list of modules.)
HP E2910 al Switch

HP 2-Port 10-GbE CX4 al Module HP 2-Port 10-GbE SFP+ al Module HP 10-GbE al Interconnect Kit
HP E3500 yl and E6200 yl Switches

HP Switch yl 10-GbE 2-Port CX4 + 2-Port X2 Module HP 10-GbE 2-Port SFP+/ 2-Port CX4 yl Module
6 42
Rev. 10.31

The HP E4200 vl Switch Series supports the following modules:

HP Switch vl 4-Port Mini-GBIC Module HP Switch vl 12-Port 100-FX MTRJ Module HP Switch vl 24-Port 10/100-TX Module HP Switch vl 20-Port Gig-T + 4-Port SFP Module HP Switch vl 24-Port Gig-T Module HP Switch vl 1-Port 10-GbE X2 Module
Rev. 10.31
6 43
Modules for HP E5400 zl and E8200 zl Switches

Modules for HP E5400 zl and E8200 zl Switches
Switch HPE 5400 zl & E8200 zl Fast Ethernet Modules Gigabit Modules Modules HP 24-Port 10/100 PoE+ zl Module HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP Switch zl 24-Port 10/100/1000 PoE Module Switch zl 20-Port 10/100/1000 + 4-Port Mini-GBIC Module 24-Port 10/100/1000 PoE+ zl Module 20-Port 10/100/1000 PoE+ and 4-Port Mini-GBIC zl Module Switch zl 4-Port 10-GbE X2 Module 4-Port 10GbE SFP+ zl Module Switch zl 24-Port Mini-GBIC Module Switch zl 4-Port 10-GbE CX4 Module ONE Services zl Module Threat Management Services zl Module Threat Management Services zl Module with 1-year IDS/IPS subscription ProCurve Manager Plus Agent with ProCurve ONE Services zl Module
10 GbE Modules
Appliances
32
Rev. 10.31
The HP E5400 zl and E8200 zl Switch Series support the same Fast Ethernet, Gigabit, 10 GbE, and Appliance modules. (Check the HP Networking Web site for an up-to-date list of modules.)
Fast Ethernet
HP 24-Port 10/100 PoE+ zl Module
Gigabit Ethernet

HP Switch zl 24-Port 10/100/1000 PoE Module HP Switch zl 20-Port 10/100/1000 + 4-Port Mini-GBIC Module HP 24-Port 10/100/1000 PoE+ zl Module HP 20-Port 10/100/1000 PoE+ and 4-Port Mini-GBIC zl Module
10 GbE

HP Switch zl 4-Port 10-GbE X2 Module HP 4-Port 10GbE SFP+ zl Module HP Switch zl 24-Port Mini-GBIC Module HP Switch zl 4-Port 10-GbE CX4 Module
6 44
Rev. 10.31
Appliances

AllianceONE Services zl Module HP Threat Management Services zl Module HP Threat Management Services zl Module with 1-year IDS/IPS subscription HP ProCurve Manager Plus Agent with ProCurve ONE Services zl Module
Rev. 10.31
6 45
Modules for HP E5400 zl and E8200 zl Switches (Cont.)

Modules for HP E5400 zl and E8200 zl Switches (Cont.)
Switch HP E5400 zl & E8200 zl WLAN Services HP E8200 zl Only Module HP E-MSM765zl Mobility Controller HP HP HP HP E8200zl Management Module E8200zl Fabric Module E8200zl System Support Module E8212zl Fan Tray
33
Rev. 10.31
The E5400 zl and E8200 zl Switch Series also support WLAN services with the addition of the HP MultiService Mobility Controller. For more information about this controller, see Module 15: HP Series E Wireless Overview. For power supplies, customers have several options. Depending on their power and PoE requirements, they can purchase 875 W power supplies, 1500 W power supplies, or 1500 W PoE+ power supplies. In addition, the E8200 zl Switch Series supports some modules that the E5400 zl switch does not.

HP E8200zl Management Module HP E8200zl Fabric Module HP E8200zl System Support Module HP E8212zl Fan Tray
6 46
Rev. 10.31
HP E-Series mini-GBICs and Transceivers

HP E-Series mini-GBICs and Transceivers
LEDs Hardware Reset HP E-Series Switch Modules HP E-Series mini-GBICs and Transceivers
Transceivers Formerly Branded 3Com HP mini-GBICs and Transceivers Installing a mini-GBIC or SFP Transceiver Installing a Transceiver
Redundant Power for HP E-Series Switches

34 Rev. 10.31
The next section lists the mini-GBICs and transceivers supported on E-Series switches. It also illustrates how to install a mini-GBIC and a transceiver.
Rev. 10.31
6 47
Fast Ethernet SFP Transceivers Formerly Branded 3Com

Fast Ethernet SFP Transceivers Formerly Branded 3Com
E4210 HP X1 100M SFP LC 14 FX HP X1 100M SFP LC 10 LX HP X1 100M SFP LC 10 FX Dual Mode HP X1 100M SFP LC 10 LX10 HP X1 100M SFP LC 14 BX-D HP X1 100M SFP LC 14 BX-U E4210G E4500 E4500G & E4510G E4800G E5500 E5500G
35
Rev. 10.31
Some of the formerly branded 3Com switches in the HP E-Series support Fast Ethernet SFP transceivers. Note that the HP X1 100M SFP LC FX Dual Mode and the HP X1 100M SFP LC 10 10 LX10 Dual Mode should be deployed in pairs. Likewise the HP X1 100M SFP LC 14 BX-D and the HP X1 100M SFP LC BX-U should be used in pairs. 14
6 48
Rev. 10.31
Gigabit SFP Transceivers Formerly Branded 3Com

Gigabit SFP Transceivers Formerly Branded 3Com
E4210 HP X124 1G SFP LC SX HP X124 1G SFP LC LX HP X125 1G SFP RJ45 T HP X124 1G SFP LC LH70 E4210G E4500 E4500G & E4510G E4800G E5500 E5500G
36
Rev. 10.31
All of the formerly branded 3Com switches in the HP E-Series support Gigabit SFP transceivers.
Rev. 10.31
6 49
10-GbE XENPak Transceivers Formerly Branded 3Com

10-GbE XENPak Transceivers Formerly Branded 3Com
E4210 HP X130 10G XENPAK SC LX4 HP X134 10G XENPAK SC LR HP X134 10G XENPAK SC SR HP X130 10G XENPAK CX4 HP X134 10G XENPAK SC ER E4210G E4500 E4500G & E4510G E4800G E5500 E5500G
37
Rev. 10.31
The E4210G and E5500G Switch Series support 10-GbE XENPak Transceivers.
6 50
Rev. 10.31
10-GbE XFP Transceivers Formerly Branded 3Com

10-GbE XFP Transceivers Formerly Branded 3Com
E4210 HP X134 10G XFP LC LR HP X134 10G XFP LC SR HP X130 10G XFP CX4 HP X134 10G XFP LC ER E4210G E4500 E4500G & E4510G E4800G E5500 E5500G
38
Rev. 10.31
The E4500G, E4510G, E4800G, and E5500G Switch Series support 10-GbE XFP transceivers.
Rev. 10.31
6 51
10-GbE SFP+ Transceivers Formerly Branded 3Com

10-GbE SFP+ Transceivers Formerly Branded 3Com
E4210 HP X130 10G SFP+ LC LR HP X130 10G SFP+ LC SR HP X130 10G SFP+ LC LRM E4210G E4500 E4500G & E4510G E4800G E5500 E5500G
39
Rev. 10.31
The E4500G, E4510G, and E4800G Switch Series also support 10-GbE SFP+ transceivers.
6 52
Rev. 10.31
HP Fast Ethernet SFP Transceivers

HP Fast Ethernet SFP Transceivers
E2510 HP 100-FX SFP-LC Transceiver HP 100-BX-D SFP-LC Transceiver HP 100-BX-U SFP-LC Transceiver E2520 E261X E2810 E291X E3500 E4200 vl E6200 yl E6600 E5400 zl & E8200 zl
40
Rev. 10.31
The next slides list the mini-GBIC and transceivers supported on the switches formerly branded HP ProCurve. All of these switches support Fast Ethernet mini-GBICs.
Rev. 10.31
6 53
HP Gigabit mini-GBICs
HP Gigabit mini-GBICs
E2510 HP Gigabit-SXLC Mini-GBIC HP Gigabit-LX LC Mini-GBIC HP Gigabit-LHLC Mini-GBIC HP Gigabit 1000Base-T Mini-GBIC HP 1000-BX-D SFP-LC MiniGBIC HP 1000-BX-U SFP-LC MiniGBIC
41 Rev. 10.31
E2520
E261X
E2810
E291X
E3500
E4200 vl
E6200 yl
E6600
E 5400 zl & E8200 zl
All of the HP switches also support Gigabit mini-GBICs, allowing customers to add high-speed fiber links to their switches.
6 54
Rev. 10.31
HP 10-GbE and 10-GbE SFP+ Transceivers

HP 10-GbE and 10-GbE SFP+ Transceivers
E291X HP 10-GbE X2-CX4 HP 10-GbE CX4 Media Converter HP 10-GbE X2-SC ER HP 10-GbE X2-SC LR HP 10-GbE X2-SC SR HP 10-GbE X2-SC LRM HP 10-GbE SFP+ SR HP 10-GbE SFP+ LR HP 10-GbE SFP+ LRM E3500 E4200 vl E6200 yl E6600 E5400 zl & E8200 zl
42
Rev. 10.31
The HP E29XX, E3500, E4200 vl, E6200 yl, E5400 zl, E6600, and E8200 zl Switch Series support transceivers that provide 10-GbE transmission speeds.
Rev. 10.31
6 55
Install a mini-GBIC or SFP Transceiver
Install a mini-GBIC or SFP Transceiver

For formerly branded 3Com switches, follow instructions in Module 3: HP A-Series Switch Hardware. On HP switches, hold the mini-GBIC by the black rubber grip and gently insert it into the slot until it clicks into place.
43
Rev. 10.31
As you know, the former 3Com switches are similar to the HP A-Series switches. For information about installing an SFP transceiver, see Module 3: HP A-Series Switch Hardware. For other E-Series switches, use the process outlined below. You can install or remove a mini-GBIC or SFP transceiver without powering off the switch. When you install a mini-GBIC or SFP transceiver, it is immediately operational if the switch software supports it. Before you install the mini-GBIC or SFP transceiver, you should always check the documentation to ensure that the switch is running the software version required to support that mini-GBIC or SFP transceiver. You should also keep the following in mind:
The SFP ports operate only at full duplex. Half duplex operation is not supported. Ensure the network cable is not connected when you install or remove a miniGBIC or SFP transceiver.
Many SFP ports on HP switches are one part of a dual-personality port. They have a corresponding 10/100/1000Base-T RJ-45 port. If a mini-GBIC or SFP transceiver is installed in the SFP port, the corresponding RJ-45 port is disabled and cannot be used.
Caution Use only supported HP mini-GBICs or SFP transceivers with your switch. Non-HP mini-GBICs and SFP transceivers are not supported, and using them may result in product malfunction. 6 56
Rev. 10.31
Install a Mini-GBIC or SFP Transceiver

Hold the mini-GBIC or SFP transceiver by its rubber grip and gently insert it into an SFP port on the switch until the mini-GBIC or transceiver clicks into place.
Remove a Mini-GBIC or SFP Transceiver

You should disconnect the network cable from the HP mini-GBIC or SFP transceiver before removing it from the switch. Depending on when you purchased your HP mini-GBIC or SFP transceiver, it will have one of three different release mechanisms: a plastic tab on the bottom of the GBIC, a plastic collar around the GBIC, or a wire bail. To remove a mini-GBIC that has the plastic tab or plastic collar, push the tab or collar toward the switch until you see the mini-GBIC release from the switch (you can see it move outward slightly), and then pull it from the slot. To remove a mini-GBIC that has the wire bail, lower the bail until it is approximately horizontal, and then using the bail, pull the mini-GBIC from the slot.
Rev. 10.31
6 57
Install a Module
Install a Module
For some switches, you must first install a module that supports transceivers. On some switches, you install this module on the rear panel.
Open transceiver slots

44 Rev. 10.31
Some of the fixed-port switches in the E-Series include a module slot on their front or back panel. For example, the HP E3500 yl and E6200 yl switches have a module slot on their back panel. For these modules, you purchase an HP Switch yl 10-GbE 2Port CX4 + 2-Port X2 Module, which includes two 10-GbE CX4 ports and two additional transceiver slots. Customers can increase their high-speed links by purchasing two additional transceivers for the open slots.
6 58
Rev. 10.31
Redundant Power for HP Switches

Redundant Power for HP Switches
LEDs Hardware Reset HP E-Series Switch Modules HP E-Series mini-GBICs and Transceivers Redundant Power for HP E-Series Switches
Redundant Power Supplies for Modular Switches Formerly Branded 3Com Redundant Power Supply
(RPS) devices
HP RPS and External Power Supply (EPS) devices
45 Rev. 10.31
This section examines options for providing HP E-Series switches with redundant power. Redundant power protects the entire network: if the primary source of power fails, the network will continue operating without disruption.
Rev. 10.31
6 59
Optional Redundant Power Supplies for Modular Switches

Optional Redundant Power Supplies for Modular Switches
All HP modular switches support optional redundant, loadsharing power supplies.
AC Power
Slot for Additional Power Supply
Fan Tray
46
Rev. 10.31
HP E-Series modular switches support redundant, load-sharing power supplies. On the HP E4200 vl, E5400 zl, and E8200 zl Switch Series, the power supplies are installed on the switch rear panel. To provide true redundancy, the two power supplies should be connected to different power sources. Then, if one power source fails, the switch will continue to run. (The photo above also shows the E5406 zl switch fan tray, which is discussed later in this module.)
Note Some HP modular switches, despite their redundancy options, are operational with only one functioning power supply source. The E5412 zl, and E8212 zl switches, however require at least two installed and functioning power supplies, or the switches will not be fully operational.
6 60
Rev. 10.31
Power Supplies for the HP E5400 zl and E8200 zl Switch Series

Power Supplies for HP E5400 zl and E8200 zl Switch Series
Chassis Power 875W zl Power Supply J8712A (1 127/ 10200-240 VAC) 1500W zl Power Supply J8713A (220 VAC only) 1500W PoE+ zl Power Supply J9306A (1 127/ 10200-240 VAC) 600W PoE Power 273W PoE+ Power
8212 zl/5412 zl: Up to 4 power supplies, 3600W PoE/PoE+ 8206 zl/5406 zl: Up to 2 power supplies, 1800W PoE/PoE+ (Additional PoE/PoE+ with HP Power Shelf)
600W
900W
600W
300W/ 900W
300W/ 900W
47
Rev. 10.31
The E8200 zl and E5400 zl switches do not ship with power supplies. Customers must purchase one or more of the following power supplies:

HP 875W PoE zl Power Supply HP 1500W PoE zl Power Supply HP 1500W PoE+ zl Power Supply
The 875W zl Power Supply supplies 273 watts for PoE power. The 1500W zl Power Supply provides up to 900 watts for PoE power, and the1500W PoE+ zl Power Supply provides up to 900 watts for PoE or PoE+ power. The E8212 zl and E5412 zl switches support up to four power supplies; the E8206 zl and E5406 zl switches support up to two. As a result, the E8212 zl and E5412 zl can supply up to 3600 watts of PoE/PoE+ power, depending on the power supplies installed, and the E8206 zl and E5406 zl can supply up to 1800 watts. These power supplies can also be used with the HP zl Power Supply Shelf to provide additional PoE/PoE+ power of up to 1800 watts. All three power supplies provide 600 watts of chassis power to the switch.
Rev. 10.31
6 61
Power Cords for E5400 zl and E8200 zl Switch Power Supplies

Power Cords for HP E5400 zl and E8200 zl Power Supplies
The E8200 zl and E5400 zl power cords are sized to meet the increased current requirements of PoE. These power cords may not be found in a typical environment.
J8712A and J9306A use a C15 (notched) power cord. J8713A uses a C19 power cord.
Typical Plug Connecter
J8712A 875W Power Supply J9306A 1500W Power Supply Plug Connecter
J8713A 1500W Power Supply Plug Connecter
48
Rev. 10.31
The power cords available for the E8200 zl and E5400 zl switches are sized for the increased current that can be drawn to meet the needs of PoE. As a result, these power cords may not be found in a typical environment, and power cords borrowed from other products will not work in most instances. You must use the cords shown here.
6 62
Rev. 10.31
HP E4200 vl Switch Series Power Supply

HP E4200 vl Switch Series Power Supply
One power supply ships with the E4200 vl switch. Customers can purchase an additional power supply for redundancy:
HP gl/xl/vl Switch Redundant Power Supply
49
Rev. 10.31
The HP E4200 vl Switch Series ships with one power supply, but customers can purchase an additional power supply for redundancy. To provide the best protection, customers should connect each power supply to a different power source.
Rev. 10.31
6 63
HP E6600 Switch Redundant Power Supplies

HP E6600 Switch Power Supplies
Designed for the data center Ships with one power supply, but supports two
50
Rev. 10.31
Although the E6600 is not a modular switch, it supports a redundant power supply. Because this switch is designed for the data center, continual uptime is critical. The second power supply helps protect against loss of power. Again, for the best protection, customers should connect each power supply to a different power source. The E6600 switch ships with one power supply; customers must purchase the second power supply separately.
6 64
Rev. 10.31

1. Insert the power supply into an open power supply slot. 2. Push the power supply all the way back until the power supply face is flush with the back face of the switch. 3. Tighten the screws.
51 Rev. 10.31
To install the power supply, complete the following steps: 1. Using either a flat-bladed or TorxT-10 screwdriver, loosen and remove the screws holding the slot cover or existing power supply in place. 2. Install the power supply into an open power slot as shown in this slide.
Caution The switch power supplies are hot-swappable; they can be installed while the switch is receiving power from the supply in another slot. But, as indicated by the caution statement on the power supply, the supply must not be connected to AC power before being installed.
3. Push the power supply all the way into the switch chassis until the face of the power supply is flush with the back face of the switch. 4. Insert and tighten the screws to secure the power supply.
Rev. 10.31
6 65
RPS Devices for Formerly Branded 3Com Switches

RPS Devices for Formerly Branded 3Com Switches
Formerly branded 3Com and H3C switches support the same RPS devices. These devices were previously branded H3C:
HP RPS 1000 A3 HP RPS 800 A HP RPS 500 A3
52
Rev. 10.31
In addition to purchasing redundant internal power supplies, customers can protect their network by installing a redundant power supply (RPS). An RPS can be connected to more than one switch, providing power if the switchs internal power supply fails. The former 3Com switches support the same RPS devices that A-Series (former H3C) switches support. (For more information about these RPS devices, see Module 3: HP A-Series Switch Hardware.)
6 66
Rev. 10.31
HP RPS 1000 A3
HP RPS 1000 A3
Redundant power for switches Additional power for PoE-enabled switches E-Series switches supported:
HP E4210-24-PoE HP E4210G switches HP E4500 PoE switches HP E4500G PoE switches HP E4800 PoE switches HP E5500G switches
53 Rev. 10.31
The RPS 1000 A3 is the only RPS device that provides both redundant power for switches and additional power for PoE-enabled switches. If customers are using a former 3Com switch that provides PoE, they should use the RPS 1000 A3.
Rev. 10.31
6 67
HP RPS 800 A and RPS 500 A3

HP RPS 800 A and RPS 500 A3
Redundant power for switches RPS 800 A:
HP E4800-48G
RPS 500 A3
HP E4800-24G HP E5500-24 HP E5500-24-SFP HP E5500-48 HP E5500-24G HP E5500-24G-SFP HP E5500-48G
54 Rev. 10.31
The RPS 800 A and RPS 500 A3 support the non-PoE switches listed here.
6 68
Rev. 10.31
HP E630 Redundant/External Power Supply

HP E630 Redundant/External Power Supply
Redundant power
Provides redundant power for one
switch
External power for HP IEEE 802.3af and IEEE 802.3at PoE-compatible devices
Provides PoE for two switches Supplies 398 Watts to each switch
55
Rev. 10.31
Customers with HP switches (previously branded HP ProCurve) have several options for external redundant power and additional PoE power. For example, the HP E630 Redundant/External Power Supply (RPS/EPS) can provide a maximum of 185W RPS power and 398W PoE power to each switch. The HP E630 RPS/EPS supports the follow switches.
RPS only
E2910-24G al switch E2910-48G al switch E3500-24-PoE switch E3500-48-PoE switch E3500-24G-PoE yl switch E3500-48G-PoE yl switch E6200 yl switch E2910-24G-PoE+ al switch E2910-48G-PoE+ al switch
EPS and RPS
Rev. 10.31
6 69
These switches must be running the following minimum software versions:

The E2910 PoE+ al switches require W.14.35 or later. The E3500 PoE-enabled switches require K.14.52 or later.
Connecting RPS and EPS Ports to Switches

To connect the RPS and EPS ports to switches, push the RPS or EPS cable plug into the RPS/EPS port until the thumb screws engage with the screw holes in the unit. Then, tighten the thumb screws. When the E630 RPS/EPS is powered on and connected to a switch, the device connected LED on the RPS/EPS should go on to confirm it is connected to a poweredon switch. If the LED does not go on, check the connection between the E630 RPS/EPS and the switch.
6 70
Rev. 10.31
HP E620 Redundant and External Power Supply

HP E620 Redundant and External Power Supply
Redundant power
Provides redundant power for up to two switches at the same time
External power for HP IEEE 802.3af PoE-compatible devices

Provides PoE for two switches Supplies 398 Watts to each switch
56
Rev. 10.31
The HP E620 Redundant and External Power Supply provides both RPS and EPS to the following switches:

E3500 Switch Series E2910 al Switch Series E6200 yl Switch
RPS Port Operation

The E620 RPS/EPS can provide redundant power to two switches at one time. It can provide up to 195 Watts of power at +12 VDC to each switch. The E620 RPS/EPS can detect switches connected to each RPS port and also the status of their primary AC power supply. The unit supports a hot-plug feature: you can connect or disconnect switches to the RPS ports without causing disruption to either device.
EPS Port Operation

The E620 RPS/EPS supports two EPS ports that can provide power to PoE capable switches through EPS cables. It can provide PoE power to a switch as a primary source or as a backup to a switch that has its own internal PoE power supply. Each EPS port can provide up to 398 Watts of PoE power at 50VDC each.
Rev. 10.31
6 71
Connecting RPS and EPS Ports to Switches

To connect the E620 RPS/EPS to a switch, complete these steps. 1. Push the RPS or EPS cable plug into the desired portusually located at the back of the switchuntil the thumb screws engage with the screw holes in the unit. 2. Tighten the thumb screws. When power is on for the E620 RPS/EPS and for the connected switch, the Device Connected LED will light to confirm a powered-on switch is at the other end of the cable.
Note When connecting devices to the E620 RPS/EPS, be sure to use only the cables supplied with the unit.
6 72
Rev. 10.31
HP E610 External Power Supply

HP E610 External Power Supply
Provides external power for HP IEEE 802.3af PoEcompatible devices
Four EPS ports, which are grouped into pairs Supplies a maximum of 408 Watts for each pair of ports (total of 816
Watts)
408 Watts to one device in a pair 204 Watts to each device in a pair
Supported switches:
HP 2610 PoE Switch Series
57
Rev. 10.31
HP also offers the E610 External Power Supply, an EPS-only unit that supports the HP E2610 PoE Switch Series. The E610 EPS has four EPS ports, which are grouped into pairs. For each pair of ports, the E610 EPS provides a maximum of 408 W. If you connect a device to only one port in a pair, that device receives the entire 408 Watts. If you connect a device to each port in a pair, each device receives 204 Watts, or half of the available power for the pair of ports.
Connecting EPS Ports to Switches

To connect an EPS port to a switch, complete the following steps: 1. Push one end of the EPS cable plug into the EPS port on the E610 EPS and the other end into the appropriately labeled EPS port of the switch until the tabs on the cable connectors click into place. 2. After the connectors click, the connection is complete. Be sure to use only the cables supplied with the E610 EPS.
Rev. 10.31
6 73
HP zl Power Supply Shelf

HP zl Power Supply Shelf
Provides additional power for PoE on:
E5400 zl switch E8212 zl switch
3U
Holds up to two power supplies, which are sold separately Connects to one or two E5400 zl or E8200 zl switches through a 2m EPS cable
Chassis is 24.7 cm (9.75 in.) deep.
58
Rev. 10.31
The HP zl Power Supply Shelf supports the E5400 zl switch and the E8212 zl switch, providing additional power for PoE. (If you need additional power for PoE on the E3500 switches, you should purchase the E620 RPS/EPS.) The Power Supply Shelf is a 3U chassis that holds up to two power supplies. These power supplies are sold separately from the Power Supply Shelf, allowing you to install the power supplies that meet your networks power requirements. You can choose from the same two power supplies that are available to power the E5400 zl switch and E8100 zl switch:

875W zl Power Supply 1500W zl Power Supply HP 1500W PoE+ zl Power Supply
To connect the Power Supply Shelf to an E5400 zl switch or E8212 zl switch, use the 2m EPS cable that ships with the Power Supply Shelf.
Caution The switch power supplies are hot-swappable, but the power supply must be disconnected from AC power before being installed or removed.
6 74
Rev. 10.31
LEDs on the Power Supply Shelf
LEDs on the Power Supply Shelf
Fault and power LEDS
Power status
EPS (PoE) port status EPS port 1 EPS port 2
Fault and power LEDs

59 Rev. 10.31
The power LED has a simple function: it is on if the Power Supply Shelf is on, and off if the Power Supply Shelf is off. During normal operation, the fault LED is off. If it is on, an error has occurred with one of the EPS ports. Check the EPS port status LED to determine which one is experiencing the problem. The power status LED is green if the corresponding power supply is installed and plugged in. This LED is off if no power supply is installed. If the power supply is experiencing a problem or if it is not plugged in, the power status LED flashes orange. Two LEDs report the status of each EPS port:
Device connected LEDThis LED is on if there is a valid connection to an E5400 zl Switch. It is off if there is no connection. Power status LEDThis LED is on if the power supply is providing power to a connected E5400 zl switch. It is off if there is not a valid connection to the E5400 zl or E8212 zl switch. If the LED is flashing orange, there is a fault condition on the corresponding power supply.
Rev. 10.31
6 75
Switch Fan Trays

Switch Fan Trays
Supported on:
HP E5400 zl Switch Series HP E8200 zl Switch Series HP E6600 Switch Series
HP E8212zl Switch
60 Rev. 10.31
HP E8212zl Fan Tray
The E5400 zl, E6600, and E8200 zl Switch Series have fan trays, which can be replaced if a problem occurs.
Replacing Fan Trays

You can hot-swap the fan trays on these switches. However, you should replace the fan tray within 3 minutes after you remove the previous tray. The switches will shut down if you do not install the new fan tray within 3 minutes because the switch chassis will overheat. The fan trays are on the back panel. To replace the fan tray on the E5400 zl and E8200 zl switches, complete these steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. Loosen and then remove the screws securing the fan tray in place. Using the handle on the installed fan tray, pull the fan tray out of the switch chassis. Insert the new fan tray into the switch chassis and push until it is firmly seated. Insert and tighten the screws on the new fan tray.
6 76
Rev. 10.31
Reversing Air Flow on the E6600 Switch

If you are servicing an E6600 switch and the temperature LED is on, you may want to evaluate the airflow direction. In a four-post rack mount, you must ensure that the air flow direction in an E6600 switch is from the cold side to the hot side of the aisle. If necessary, reverse the direction of the fans to provide adequate switch cooling. By default, the air flows from the back panel to the front panel. If the cool side of the aisle is the front panel, you may need to change the default direction so that air flows from the front panel to the back panel instead. 1. Remove the fan tray assembly. a. b. 5. 6. 7. Unscrew the retaining screws. Hold the two retaining screws, and then pull the fan tray assembly straight out.
Using a T10 screwdriver, remove the four retaining screws. Lift the fan assembly from the fan tray high enough to turn it over. Rotate the fan assembly 180 degrees and replace the fan assembly into the fan tray, sheet metal side up.
8. 9.
Take care to align the sensing pin between the two sensors and replace the 4 retaining screws. Slide the fan tray assembly into the switch.
10. Tighten the retaining screws
Rev. 10.31
6 77
Note
If you reverse the direction of the fans to provide adequate switch cooling, ask the customer if he or she wants to record the preferred air-flow direction for this switch in the CLI. To do so, enter the following command at the global configuration context:
system fan-pref-airflow-dir { port-to-power | power-to-port }
A syslog message is then generated if the fan tray is installed in the wrong direction in the future. For information about entering commands, see Module 7: Basic Configuration of ESeries Switches.
6 78
Rev. 10.31
Summary
Summary
LEDs indicate the state of the switch and its ports. Some HP E-Series switches are equipped with Reset and Clear buttons for deleting passwords and returning switches to default settings. Pressing the Mode Select button changes the function of the Mode LED. HP E-Series switches support GBIC and transceiver options; modular switches support interchangeable modules. Redundant and external power supply options are available for most HP E-Series switches.
61
Rev. 10.31
This module presented the following concepts:

You can use switch LEDs to assess the state of the switch and its ports. Some HP E-Series switches are equipped with Reset and Clear buttons, which allow you to delete passwords and return the switches to factory default settings. You can press the Mode Select button to change the function of the Mode LED. This allows you to gather more information about the operation of the switch. HP E-Series switches support mini-GBICs and transceivers, which allow customers to increase their switch capacity with high-speed connections. Modular switches support interchangeable modules. Redundant and external power supply options are available for many HP ESeries switches.
Rev. 10.31
6 79
6 80
Rev. 10.31
Basic Configuration of HP E-Series Switches

Module 7
Objectives
This module discusses fundamental aspects of HP E-Series switch management, including management options, management interfaces, commands, and tasks. After completing this module, you should be able to:
Identify management users for each HP E-Series switch and describe their different levels of switch access List the management interfaces available on each HP E-Series switch and describe the advantages of using each interface Explain how to establish a management session with each HP E-Series switch and begin using a management interface to configure the switch Navigate through and perform fundamental switch management tasks within the CLI, menu interface, or Web browser interface on HP E-Series switches
Rev. 10.31
7 1
Managing HP E-Series Switches

Managing HP E-Series Switches
Run the same base software as HP A-Series switches Use the instructions in: Module 4: Basic Configuration of HP ASeries Switches
Switches Formerly Branded HP ProCurve

Run versions of the HP switch software Follow instructions outlined in this module
Rev. 10.31
As you are aware, the HP E-Series includes two main groups of switches: those previously branded as 3Com switches and those previously branded as HP ProCurve switches. The switches that were formerly branded 3Com run the same base software as the A-Series switches, and include the following switches:

HP E4210 Switch Series HP E4210G Switch Series HP E4500 Switch Series HP E4500G Switch Series HP E4800G Switch Series HP E5500 Switch Series HP E5500G Switch Series
To access and manage these switches, use the instructions outlined in Module 4: Basic Configuration of HP A-Series Switches. The switches that were formerly branded HP ProCurve run versions of the HP switch software, and include the following switches:

HP E2510 Switch Series HP E2520 Switch Series HP E261X Switch Series

Rev. 10.31
7 2
HP E2810 Switch Series HP E291X Switch Series HP E3500 Switch Series HP E4200 vl Switch Series HP E5400 zl Switch Series HP E6200-24G-mGBIC yl Switch HP E6600 Switch Series HP E8200 zl Switch Series
In this module, these switches are referred to as HP switches, which run HP switch software. This module will focus on managing them.
Rev. 10.31
7 3
HP E-Series Switch Software Images and Configuration Files

HP E-Series Switch Software Images and Configuration Files
Switch Software and Configuration Files

Software Images Configuration Files
Management Options CLI Diagnostic Information Software and File Management Switch Replacement Menu Interface Menu Interface Web Browser Interface
4 Rev. 10.31
Before you access the HP E-Series switches that run HP switch software, you should understand how these switches store software images and configuration files.
7 4
Rev. 10.31
Managing Software Images on HP Switches
Managing Software Images on HP Switches
Primary Image Secondary Image
Rev. 10.31
In Module 4: Basic Configuration of HP A-Series Switches, you learned that switches have boot ROM code and a software image. The boot ROM code loads first. After checking and initializing the hardware, the boot ROM loads the software image.
Note If you are servicing a switch in the E4210, E4210G, E4500, E4500G, E4800G, E5500, or E5500G Switch Series, use the instructions in Module 4: Basic Configuration of HP A-Series Switches. These switches run the same base software as the HP A-Series switches.
You also learned that HP periodically releases updates for many of its switches. These updates might provide new features or improve switch performance. Most of the time, software updates do not require a boot ROM update. If a boot ROM update is required, however, the release notes will notify you. For some switches, HP provides the boot ROM update and the software image update as two separate files. For the HP switches described in this module, however, HP more often provides both the boot ROM update and the software image update in the same file The HP switches described in this module have two flash memory areas where software images can be stored. Because the two areas can store different images, you can keep a copy of the previous software image as well as the latest software image. You can then reboot to the previous software image if necessary.
Rev. 10.31
7 5
On these HP switches, the two software images are referred to as:

Primary image Secondary image
7 6
Rev. 10.31
Multiple Configuration Files on HP Switches
Multiple Configuration Files on HP Switches

HP switches (except the E2810 Switch Series) store up to three configuration files:
Determine which configuration file the switch should use when booting
with a particular software image Test a new configuration and ensure that the switch reboots with a trusted configuration if an unattended reboot occurs
Boot command
Primary Boot Path

Secondary Boot Path
Startup-Config Options: File Memory slot 1 File Memory slot 3
File Memory slot 2
Running-config
By default, the switch uses the configuration file stored in memory
slot 2.
Rev. 10.31
With the exception of the HP E2810 Switch Series, switches that run HP switch software allow you to store up to three configuration files. When you save multiple configuration files on the switch, each configuration file is stored in one of three memory slots, which are numbered 1 to 3. You will learn more about managing multiple configuration files later in this module.
Rev. 10.31
7 7
Management Options
Management Options
Switch Software and Configuration Files Management Options

Management Interfaces Management Users
CLI Diagnostic Information Software and File Management Switch Replacement Menu Interface Menu Interface Web Browser Interface
7 Rev. 10.31
You can use one of three management interfacesthe CLI, the menu interface, or the Web browser interfacewhen you service the following HP switches:

HP E2510 Switch Series HP E2520 Switch Series HP E261X Switch Series HP E2810 Switch Series HP E291X Switch Series HP E3500 Switch Series HP E4200 vl Switch Series HP E5400 zl Switch Series HP E6200-24G-mGBIC yl Switch HP E6600 Switch Series HP E8200 zl Switch Series
Whichever management interface you decide to use, you should log in as a manager-level user if you need to make configuration changes on the switch.
7 8
Rev. 10.31
CLI Menu interface Web browser interface SNMP (not covered in this course)
Rev. 10.31
The HP switches listed on the previous page support the following management interfaces:

CLI Menu interface Web browser interface SNMP management interface (accessed through an SNMP management console)
The CLI is the most comprehensive interface to use. The menu interface is often useful when you are configuring many features at one time or if you are looking for an organized way to view and configure a subset of switch configuration options. For example, you can configure all the ports and view all the settings for the ports from one window in the menu interface. The Web browser interface provides user-friendly switch access; some networking professional use this interface to monitor switch activity. HP switches also support management through an SNMP management console. However, this course does not cover the SNMP management interface.
Rev. 10.31
7 9
Advantages of Using the CLI
Advantages of Using the CLI

Provides access to the complete set of management options Enables quick, detailed system configuration Provides help for determining available options Supports out-of-band or Telnet access
Enter the ? Help key to view a list of available commands.
Rev. 10.31
The CLI offers several advantages:
It is the only interface that provides access to the complete set of management options. It enables quick, detailed system configuration. It is accessible out-of-band or in-band.
For novice users with limited experience, the CLI may at first seem the most daunting of the available management interfaces. As explained later in this module, help keys are available at each level, making it easier to use the CLI.
7 10
Rev. 10.31
Advantages of Using the Menu Interface
Advantages of Using the Menu Interface

Provides quick, easy management access to a menu-driven subset of switch configuration and performance features Allows you to access the switch out-of-band or in-band Allows faster navigation
Menu-driven subset of configuration features
10
Rev. 10.31
The menu interface provides several advantages for switch management:
It provides quick and easy access to a menu-driven subset of configuration and performance features. It allows you to manage the switch in-band or out-of-band. It enables faster navigation through switch setup and configuration options. It eliminates the need to know or memorize CLI commands.
The menu interface can be particularly useful when you are configuring many features at one time. Keep in mind, however, that it does not provide the same comprehensive set of commands as the CLI does.
Rev. 10.31
7 11
Advantages of Using the Web Browser Interface
Advantages of Using the Web Browser Interface

Familiar Web browser interface More visual cues, colors, status bars, device icons, and so on Easy navigation
1 1
Rev. 10.31
With the K.15.XX switch software release, the Web browser interface on the HP E3500, E5400 zl, E6200 yl, E6600, and E8200 zl Switch Series was updated. The Web agent introduced in this version is enabled by default and improves usability. The Web browser interface offers users the following management advantages:

Familiar browser interface More visual cues, colors, status bars, device icons, and so on Easy navigation
The Web browser interface is usually not as comprehensive as the CLI interface. Still, its user-friendly format and mouse-click navigation schemecharacteristics consistent with commonly used Web browserscan make it the preferred management interface of network experts and novices alike.
7 12
Rev. 10.31
Management Users
Management Users
E3500-24G-PoE yl Switch
Operator Read-only access Manager Read-write access
12
Rev. 10.31
The HP switches described in this module offer two levels of switch management access:

Operatorgrants the user read-only access to the switch Managergrants the user write access
When a network administrator logs in as an operator, he or she can only view information about the switch. The operator cannot make configuration changes. When a network administrator logs in as a manager, he or she can make changes to the switch configuration.
Rev. 10.31
7 13
User Authentication: Local
User Authentication: Local

Management passwords are stored on the switch.
1. Switch prompts for username and password. 2. Management user types username and password. 3. Switch validates username and password and grants appropriate access.
13
Rev. 10.31
Both the operator and the manager level can and should be password protected. There are two ways organizations can set up management user authentication: local or centralized. When you visit a customer site, ask the network administrator if the company is using local or centralized authentication for management users. With local authentication, management usernames and passwords are stored locally on the switch. In this case, the switch compares the login credentials that the user enters with those that are configured and stored on the switch. You can configure one password for each management user. You can configure one password for the manager level and one password for the operator level. All users with a particular access level share the same login credentials. When a management user logs in, he or she receives the access-level assigned to the password. If the supplied password matches the operator level, the user is given read-only access. If the password matches the manager level, the user is given readwrite access. If the customer is using local authentication, simply ask for the password assigned to the manager user.
7 14
Rev. 10.31
User Authentication: Centralized
User Authentication: Centralized

1. Switch prompts for username and password. 2. Manager or operator supplies username and password. 3. Switch forwards login credentials to server.
3
Server validates login credential 4. Server validates login against its database its credential against and send results to switch. database and send results to switch. 5. Switch grants appropriate access level. 5. Switch grants appropriate access level.
14
Rev. 10.31
With centralized authentication, usernames and passwords are stored on a server (such as a RADIUS server or a TACACS+ server) that the switch can access through the network. A benefit of this approach is that each switch user can be given a unique username and password and granted appropriate switch access. If the customer is using centralized authentication, you will need to ask for a username and password that provide manager-level access.
Rev. 10.31
7 15
CLI
CLI
Switch Software and Configuration Files Management Options CLI

In-band or out-of-band management Serial cables for HP switches CLI Privilege Levels CLI Tips and Shortcuts
Diagnostic Information Software and File Management Switch Replacement Menu Interface Menu Interface Web Browser Interface
15 Rev. 10.31
The following slides discuss the CLI management interface in detail. The CLI userprivilege levels are explained and several of the CLI fundamental commands are outlined.
7 16
Rev. 10.31
Access to the CLI

Access to the CLI
In-band
Out-of-band
HP E-Series switches
Ethernet connection
Direct serial connection to console port
16
Rev. 10.31
If you decide to use the CLI, you can access it in-band or out-of-band. If you are replacing a switch, you will need to use one of the following:
Out-of-bandYou can establish a console connection and begin configuring the switch. To establish a console connection, use the settings listed below in the terminal session software (such as Tera Term or Microsoft HyperTerminal):
9600 bps 8 data bits No parity 1 stop bit XON/XOFF flow control
In-bandBy default, HP switches are configured to receive a dynamic IP address from a DHCP server. If the customer has a network DHCP server, you can connect the switch to the network and ask the network administrator who manages the DHCP server to tell you the IP address leased to the switch. You can then use Telnet or Secure Shell (SSH) to access the switch.
If you need to review out-of-band or in-band management, see Module 4: Basic Configuration of HP A-Series Switches.
Rev. 10.31
7 17
Serial Cables for HP Switches
Serial Cables for HP Switches

DB-9 to DB-9 Serial Cable (5184-1894) HP E3500-24G-PoE yl Switch HP E3500-48G-PoE yl Switch HP E3500-24 Switch HP E3500-24-PoE Switch HP E3500-48 Switch HP E3500-48-PoE Switch HP E4200 vl Series Switch HP E5400 zl Series Switch HP E6200-24G-mGBIC yl Switch RJ-45 to DB-9 Adapter Cable (5188-3836) HP E2510 Series Switch HP E2520 Series Switch HP E261X Series Switch HP E2810 Series Switch HP E291X Series Switch HP E3500-24G-PoE+ yl Switch HP E3500-48G-PoE+ ylSwitch HP E8200 zl Series Switch
17
Rev. 10.31
The slide above lists the appropriate serial cable for the switches that run the HP software. The switches in the left column support a DB-9 to DB-9 serial cable (5184-1894). The switches in the right column support a RJ-45 to DB-9 adapter cable (5188-3836).
7 18
Rev. 10.31
CLI Levels
CLI Levels
Context Configuration: HP Switch (vlan-10)# Global Configuration: HP Switch (config)# Manager: HP Switch# Operator: HP Switch>
Operator access Manager access
User privileges increase with each level.
18
Rev. 10.31
As mentioned earlier, the HP switches described in this module support two users: operator and manager. The operator user has read-only access to the switch and can access only the operator level. The manager user, however, can access all the switch levels and make configuration changes to the switch. To identify your current level in the switch CLI, check the switch prompt: it contains the name of the switch and a notation indicating the level.
Operator
The operator level is identified by the > in the switch prompt:
HP Switch>
At the operator level, you can view statistics by using the show command or access the menu interface. You can also use link-test and ping commands to perform Layer 2 and Layer 3 connectivity tests from the CLI or the menu interface. (You will learn how to access the menu interface in the next section in this module.)
Manager
Operator users equipped with the appropriate password can use the enable command to gain manager-level access and advance to the manager level. The manager level is identified by the # in the switch prompt. At the manager level, there is no notation enclosed in parentheses, as there will be if the user has moved to a higher level in the CLI. There is only the switch host name and the #, as shown below:
Rev. 10.31
7 19
HP Switch#
Users at the manager level have access to all of the same commands as users at the operator level. In addition, a user at the manager level can clear statistics and make configuration changes. This includes writing, erasing, and copying configuration files and software images to and from the switch.
Global Configuration
The global configuration level is identified by the word config enclosed in parentheses:
HP Switch(config)#
The global configuration level can be accessed by users at the manager level. The global configuration level is used to manage specific aspects of switch operation.
Context Configuration
In the context configuration level, specific levels are represented by an associated word enclosed in parentheses. In the following prompt, for example, the switch CLI is at the VLAN 10 level.
HP Switch(vlan-10)#
The context configuration allows you to make changes to specific interfaces such as a VLAN or port interface.
7 20
Rev. 10.31
Navigate the CLI Levels
Navigate the CLI Levels

If you access the switch as operator, you receive access to the operator level. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. From the operator level, type enable to gain read-write access. When prompted, enter the manager password. Type configure terminal to enter the global configuration context. Enter the context you want to configure. Type exit to return to the previous privilege level.
HP Switch> enable 1 Password: ****** 2 HP Switch# configure terminal 3 HP Switch(config)# vlan 10 4 HP Switch(vlan-10)# exit 5 HP Switch(config)#
19
Rev. 10.31
To allow you to access the switch for the initial configuration, the switch does not have default passwords for the management users. When you connect to a switch that is using factory default settings, the CLI prompt presents a default switch name followed by the number sign (#). The default name is based on the switch model. The # indicates that you are at the manager level, or read-write mode. To help you understand how to navigate the switch CLI, however, the following steps are based on entering the switch as an operator user. In this example, the switch has been configured with a password for both the operator and the manager user. If you enter the password for the operator user, start with step 1. If you enter the password for the manager user, skip steps 1 and 2 and start with step 3. 1. From the operator level, enter:
HP Switch> enable
2. When you are prompted, enter the password for the manager level. If you do not know the manager password, you cannot access this level. 3. To move to the global configuration level, enter
HP Switch# configure terminal
4. Move to a more specific configuration level by entering the appropriate command. For example, enter the following command to move to the VLAN 10 level:
HP Switch(config)# vlan 10 HP Switch (vlan-10)#
Rev. 10.31
7 21
Enter any command available at the VLAN 10 level or enter exit to return to the global configuration level. The exit command is available at any level and takes you to the privilege level immediately below the current level. If you are in the operator level, the exit command terminates the management session.
7 22
Rev. 10.31
CLI Help
CLI Help
Display the commands available at the current CLI level:
HP Switch# help HP Switch# ? Press Tab
If you do not know the entire command, type the first few letters of the command and press Tab.
HP Switch# co[Tab] configure copy
Switch displays a list of commands beginning with those letters.
20 Rev. 10.31
The CLI offers several help features designed to simplify management and improve productivity. Some of the most important are as follows:
You can view a list of the available commands by using one of the following help commands:
Enter help Type ? at any context Press the Tab key
You can also use ? to view the options for commands. For example, by typing show ? you can view a list of all the show command options. (When you use ? it is not necessary to press Enter.)
You can also use the Tab key to obtain context-sensitive completion of a partial command. For example, if you enter co<Tab> at the manager level, the CLI will indicate the available commands that start with co are configure and copy.
The CLI allows you to shorten commands to the minimum number of characters necessary for uniqueness. For instance, at the manager level, the CLI will execute the configure command after con is entered because it is the only command that begins with those characters.
Rev. 10.31
7 23
Frequently Used CLI Commands
Frequently Used CLI Commands

Command
Manager-Level** clear copy erase write memory setup Operator-Level link-test ping menu show Test connectivity between the switch and another device Access the menu interface Display system information Reset system statistics counters Copy software image or configuration file Delete software image or configuration file Save changes to the startup-config Access the quick setup in the menu interface
Explanation
*Many commands support multiple options. See the switchs CLI reference guide for details. **Includes all operator-level commands
21 Rev. 10.31
This table lists some of the more frequently used CLI commands in both the manager and operator level. For example, you can use the copy, erase, and write commands to manipulate software images and configuration files. The show command is particularly helpful for monitoring the switch and troubleshooting problems. (To view a list of options for the show command, type show ? at the switch prompt.)
Note Each command has a number of possible options. You can consult the switchs CLI reference guide for a complete list of command options, or access the switch CLI and use the ? help key to view a list of the available options.
The next section describes commands that can help gather diagnostic information about the switch.
7 24
Rev. 10.31
Overview of Switch Software and Configuration Files Management Options CLI Diagnostic Information
CLI show commands
Software and File Management Switch Replacement Menu Interface Web Browser Interface
22
Rev. 10.31
Oftentimes, you will need to collect information about the switch so that you can determine exactly what is causing the problem. In Module 6: HP E-Series Switch Hardware, you learned how to use the switchs LEDs to gather information. In this section, you will learn how to enter show commands to collect information that will help you evaluate the switch.
Rev. 10.31
7 25
show version Command
show version Command

Display information about the switchs software image:
HP Switch# show version Management Module 1: Active Image stamp: /sw/code/build/btm(feb10_int_t4a) Mar 22 2010 23:02:09 K.14.47 89 Boot Image: Primary Management Module 2: Standby Image stamp: /sw/code/build/btm(feb10_int_t4a) Mar 22 2010 23:02:09 K.14.47 89 Boot Image: Primary
23 Rev. 10.31
Active or Standby
Switch software Primary or Secondary Flash
One of the first things you should do is check which software version the switch is running. You can then check the HP Networking web site (www.hp.com/networking) to determine the latest software image available for that switch model. If the switch can store two software images, you should copy the software image to the secondary flash. You can then boot the switch to the secondary software image and ensure that configuration runs without any issues on the new software image. If there is a problem, you can boot the switch from the primary software image.
Note Later in this module you will learn how to update a switchs software image. Depending on the hardware and software involved, other steps may be required. You should always read the release notes that accompany the updated software to make sure you understand the process completely.
This slide shows the output that is displayed when you enter show version on an E8212 zl switch. From the output shown here, you can see that the switch is booting to management module 1, the switch is running software version K.14.47, and the switch has been booted with the software image in its primary flash.
7 26
Rev. 10.31
show config and show running-config Commands
show config and show running-config Commands

HP Switch# show config Startup configuration: Vlan 1 name Default_VLAN untagged 1-24,A1-A4 ip address dhcp-bootp exit HP Switch# show running-config Running configuration: Vlan 1 name Default_VLAN untagged 1-24,A1-A4 ip address 10.1.1.8 255.255.255.0 exit
Command
Configuration stored in nonvolatile memory.
Command
Configuration stored in dynamic memory.

IP address changed since last boot
24
Rev. 10.31
You can use the show config command to review the switchs startup-config. The startup-config is saved configuration which is read into memory when the switch is booted. (This command corresponds to the display saved-configuration command on switches that were formerly branded H3C or 3Com.) Sometimes it is useful to compare the startup-config with the running-config. You may be able to identify a new configuration change that is related to the problem. Or you can determine if changes need to be saved or not. (However, you can more easily see this information by entering the show config status command, as shown on the next page.) This slide demonstrates the kind of information the switch might display when you enter these commands. (The slide shows only a portion of the startup-config and the running-config.) Note the difference in the IP addresses listed for each command. If the startup-config is not updated, the new IP address contained in the running-config will be lost once the switch reboots. Use the show running-config command to display a switchs current runningconfig. (This command corresponds to the display current-configuration command on switches that were formerly branded H3C or 3Com.)
Rev. 10.31
7 27
show config status and show history Commands
show config status and show history Commands

Compare the startup-config and the running-config:
HP Switch# show config status
Display the last commands that were entered:

HP Switch# show history 4 exit 3 configure 2 show version 1 enable
Recent command history
25
Rev. 10.31
As explained earlier, a switch stores two configuration files that may or may not be the same at any given moment: the running-config and the startup-config. It is important to know when the two files differ and in what way so that you can decide whether or not to save the changes to the startup-config. You can use the show config status command to display a report, showing any differences between the switchs running-config and startup-config. If the two configurations are different, the results will include a notice telling you that the running-config needs to be saved. You can use the show history command to display the recently entered commands. The HP switches described in this module store up to 25 commands numbered 1 to 25in their history buffers. To scroll through the list of commands, press the up or down cursor arrows from the CLI prompt. Enter the show history command to see a complete list of buffer commands. (The show history command will be discussed in detail later in the module.) To repeat a command in the buffer multiple times, enter the word repeat plus the commands buffer number plus count and the number of times you want the command to repeat. For instance, the command repeat 6 count 1 will repeat the sixth command in the buffer once.
7 28
Rev. 10.31
show tech Command
show tech Command

Compile detailed information about the switchs operation and configuration:
HP Switch# show tech HP Switch# show tech all
26
Rev. 10.31
When you are troubleshooting complex problems, you may want to collect information about the switch and its configuration and send it to HP Technical Support for further analysis. To gather this information, enter the show tech command. The output for this command includes information such as the following:

Image stamp Running configuration Event log Boot history Port configuration and status IP routes VLAN information GVRP support Load balancingstatic and dynamic trunks
To collect comprehensive information, you can use the show tech all command.
Rev. 10.31
7 29
Because the reports generated by both commands are so extensive, you may want to capture the output and copy it to a text editor or word-processing program such as Microsoft Notepad, Microsoft Word, or Corel WordPerfect. You can then review details more easily.
Note Depending on the switch and the number of features configured on it, the output of the show tech all command can produce a large file.
7 30
Rev. 10.31
Software and File Management

Software and File Management
Overview of Switch Software and Configuration Files Management Options CLI Diagnostic Information Software and File Management
Update the switch software Boot to primary or secondary image Save the configuration file
Switch Replacement Menu Interface Web Browser Interface

27 Rev. 10.31
This section describes several important management tasks: updating the switch software, booting the switch to the primary or secondary software image, and saving the current configuration file.
Rev. 10.31
7 31
Manage Software Images and Configuration Files

Manage Software Images and Configuration Files
Upgrade a switch image to a new version Back up a configuration file Copy a configuration file to the startup-config
Syntax: copy <source> <destination> [options]
Source*
TFTP USB** running-config startup-config
Destination
TFTP USB flash startup-config
Options
TFTP servers IP address filename
*These are not all of the source and destination options available. **Supported on the E2910 al, E3500 yl, E5400 zl, E6200 yl, and E8200 zl switches
28 Rev. 10.31
You use the copy command to manage software images and configuration files. For example, you can use the copy command to:

Upgrade a software image to a new version Back up a configuration file Copy a configuration file to the startup-config
The command syntax is as follows:

HP Switch (config)# copy <source> <destination> [options]
The slide above lists the available commands for the source, destination, and options portions of the command. The slides that follow show the exact syntax for:

Updating the software image from a TFTP server or a USB device Copying configuration files to and from a TFTP server
7 32
Rev. 10.31
Use a TFTP Server to Upgrade to a New Software Image
Use a TFTP Server to Upgrade to a New Software Image

Download the updated software image to a TFTP server. In the switch CLI, enter:
Edge_1(config)# copy tftp flash 10.1.1.9 k_14_60.swi secondary Edge_1(config)# boot system flash secondary
TFTP server
Image update
File: k_14_60.swi IP Address: 10.1.1.9
29 Rev. 10.31
Primary Flash Secondary Flash
The latest software images for all HP switches are available from the HP Networking Web site at http://h10144.www1.hp.com/customercare/support/software/ switches.htm. The site also includes a link for requesting email notification when new software images are released. You first download the new software image as a compressed archive file and extract the software image. You then copy the file to a TFTP server or a USB drive for distribution to the switches.
Note Several freeware TFTP servers, such as SolarWinds TFTP server or Tftpd32, are available for download.
Enter the following command to update the software image:

Edge_1 (config)# copy tftp flash <TFTP servers IP address> <software image file> [primary | secondary] Hint When using the copy command, keep in mind that you first specify the source (the location from which you will copy the file) and then the destination (the location to which you will copy the file). For example, if you want to copy the file from a TFTP server to the switch flash, you would enter copy TFTP flash and then the other options that you want to include in the command.
Rev. 10.31
7 33
Suppose the IP address of the TFTP server is 10.1.1.9, the software image is K_14_60.swi, and you want to update the secondary software image. You would enter:
Edge_1 (config)# copy tftp flash 10.1.1.9 k_14_60.swi secondary
Switches that have only one software image will automatically reboot after the new image is copied to the switch. For switches that have two software images, however, you must reboot the switch to activate the software image; the installation process does not force a reboot. To force a warm reboot, use the boot command described later in this module.
7 34
Rev. 10.31
Use a USB Device to Upgrade to a New Software Image
Use a USB Device to Upgrade to a New Software Image

On the E2910 al, E3500, E5400 zl, and E8200 zl Switch Series and the E6200-24G-mGBIC yl switch:
Copy the updated software image to a USB device. Insert the USB into the auxiliary port on the switch and enter:
Edge_1(config)# copy usb flash k_14_60.swi secondary Edge_1(config)# boot system flash secondary
30
Rev. 10.31
The E6200-24G-mGBIC yl switch and the E2910 al, E3500, E5400 zl, E6600, and E8200 zl Switch Series support USB as a source or destination for the copy command. (The E3500, E5400 zl, and E6200-24G-mGBIC yl switches must be running software version K.12.01 and above. The E6600 and E8200 zl Switch Series were introduced after this version was released, so they have always supported USB with the copy command. The E2910 al Switch Series runs a different version of switch software and likewise has always supported USB with the copy command.) To update the switch software using a USB device, copy the updated software image to the USB device and insert it into the switch as shown here. Then enter the copy command as shown above.
Rev. 10.31
7 35
Boot from the Primary or Secondary Software Image
Boot from the Primary or Secondary Software Image

To immediately reboot from the primary or secondary image:
Edge_1 (config)# boot system flash [<primary | secondary>]
Specify primary or secondary
31
Rev. 10.31
In addition to immediately rebooting a switch to test a new software image, you can use the boot system flash command to determine which image the switch will boot from in the future. This command is available from either the manager level or the global configuration level of the CLI.
Edge_1 (config)# boot system flash [primary | secondary] Note You can test a new software version by booting the switch from an image held in secondary flash memory. After you verify the switchs operation, you can copy the software image to the primary image and then reboot the switch from the primary image.
7 36
Rev. 10.31
Copy the Running-Config to a TFTP Server
Copy the Running-Config to a TFTP Server

Running-config
xx xx xx
copy running-config tftp 10.1.1.20 file_name.cfg

TFTP server 10.1.1.20
xxxxx xx xxx xx xx xx xx xxx x x
Startup-config
xx x xx xxx
Recommendation: a separate folder for each switch
xxx xxx xx xxxxx xx xxx
Edge_1
32 Rev. 10.31
You should always try to save the customers current configuration to a TFTP server. That way, if you need to replace the switch or revert to this configuration, you can simply load the configuration file. To back up a switchs current configuration, use the copy command as shown in the slide. Note that the backup copy has been named file_name.cfg. You can name the file whatever you choose. Just remember to separate multiple words in the name with the underscore rather than a space. Also, when you are backing up multiple switches to a single TFTP server, HP recommends that you create a folder for each switch on the TFTP server, as shown here by the folders Core_1, Core_2, Edge_1, and Edge_2. Then, if you want to save a configuration file to a specific folder on the TFTP serversuch as Edge_1you would enter a command such as the following:
HP Switch# copy running-config tftp 10.1.1.20 edge_1\file_name.cfg
Rev. 10.31
7 37
Copy the Startup-Config to a TFTP Server
Copy the Startup-Config to a TFTP Server

Running-config
xx xx xx xxxxx xx xxx xx xx xx xx xxx x x
Startup-config
xx x xx xxx xxx xxx xx xxxxx xx xxx
Recommendation: a separate folder for each switch
Edge_1
33 Rev. 10.31
Copying the startup-config can be a good idea if you have made significant configuration changes to the running-config and you have not yet entered the write memory command to save those changes to the startup-config. The command for copying the startup-config is nearly identical to the command for copying the running-config. Instead of specifying running-config, you would type startup-config.
Note In the example shown above, the filename for the backup copy of the startupconfig includes the date of the backup and the initials of the administrator backing up the configuration. You can use any filename you choose, but it is a good idea to establish a standard for naming these files so that you can easily identify and track them.
7 38
Rev. 10.31
Copy a Configuration File to a USB
Copy a Configuration File to a USB

On the switches that support USB devices: 1. Insert a USB device into the switchs auxiliary port. 2. Enter one of the following commands:
Copy the startup-config.
Edge_1# copy startup-config usb 080808_tms.cfg

Copy the running-config.
Edge_1# copy running-config usb 080808_tms.cfg
34
Rev. 10.31
To copy a configuration file (startup or running) to a USB, insert it into the USB port on the switch, and execute the appropriate command shown above. Note that as in previous examples, the command includes the file name and the initials of the person saving the file. This is to make switch management easier and is merely a recommendation.
Rev. 10.31
7 39
Copy a Configuration File from a TFTP Server
Copy a Configuration File from a TFTP Server

Running-config
xx xx xx xxxxx xx xxx xx xx xx xx xxx x x
Startup-config
xx x xx xxx xxx xxx xx xxxxx xx xxx
Note: System must be rebooted after copy
Edge_1
35 Rev. 10.31
To restore configurations from a TFTP server, use the same copy command you would use to back up configurations. Only a few parameters are different. In the example above, the first optiontftpin the copy command indicates that the configuration should be copied from the TFTP server and the second option startup-configindicates it should be copied to the switchs startup-config. As before, the IP address specifies the TFTP server. You can use this command to restore an earlier configuration to a switch or to install a configuration on a new switch.
HP Switch# copy tftp start-up 10.1.1.20 <name of file>
The switch must then be rebooted.
7 40
Rev. 10.31
Copy a Configuration File from a USB
Copy a Configuration File from a USB

To copy a configuration file from a USB drive: 1. Insert a USB device into the switchs USB port. 2. Enter:
Edge_1# copy usb startup-config 080808_tms.cfg
36
Rev. 10.31
The slide above shows the command for copying a configuration file that is stored on a USB drive to an HP switch. This command differs slightly from the command for copying a configuration file from a TFTP server to the switch. Again, keep in mind that the 080808_tms.cfg portion of the command is merely the name of the file in this example. Note that you cannot copy the configuration file to the running-config.
Rev. 10.31
7 41
Determine Which Configuration File the Switch Is Using
Determine Which Configuration File the Switch Is Using

View which configuration file is used when switch is booted:
HP Switch (config)# show config files Configuration files: id | act pri sec | name ---+-------------+------------------1 | * * * | config1 2 | | 3 | |
37
Rev. 10.31
As mentioned earlier in this module, you can store multiple configuration files on all the switches described in this module, except the E2810 Switch Series. To display the startup-config files that are stored on a switch and see how each file is being used, enter:
HP Switch (config)# show config files
You can interpret the display as follows:
idIdentifies the memory slot for each startup-config file available on the switch. actAn asterisk ( * ) in this column indicates that the corresponding startupconfig file is currently active. priAn asterisk ( * ) in this column indicates that the corresponding startupconfig file is currently assigned to the primary boot path. secAn asterisk ( * ) in this column indicates that the corresponding startupconfig file is currently assigned to the secondary boot path.
The slide shows the default configuration if the switch was shipped from the factory with software installed in both the primary and secondary boot paths: one startupconfig file named config1 is used for both boot paths and is stored in memory slot 1. In this default configuration, memory slots 2 and 3 do not have configuration files.
7 42
Rev. 10.31
Specify Which Configuration File the Switch Uses
Specify Which Configuration File the Switch Uses

Specify which configuration file should be used on reboot:
HP Switch (config)# startup-default [primary | secondary] config <filename>
Specify which configuration file should be used in reboot:

HP Switch (config)# boot system flash <primary | secondary> config <filename>
Simply reboot the switch

HP Switch (config)# boot
38
Rev. 10.31
To specify the default configuration file, which is used when the switch is booted from either the primary or secondary software image, enter:
HP Switch (config)# startup-default config <filename>
To have the switch use a particular configuration file when it boots from the primary or secondary software image, enter the following command:
HP Switch (config)# startup-default [primary | secondary] <filename>
For example, if you want the switch to use the config4 file only when it boots from the secondary image, you would enter:
HP Switch (config)# startup-default secondary config4
You can also specify which configuration file the switch should use when you enter the boot system flash command to boot the switch from the primary or secondary software image:
HP Switch (config)# boot system flash <primary | secondary> config <filename>
If you simply want to reboot the switch, enter:

HP Switch (config)# boot
The switch reboots from primary flash by default unless you specify the secondary flash by entering either the boot system flash [primary | secondary] or boot set-default flash [primary | secondary] command. The boot command will reboot based on how these options have been selected.
Rev. 10.31
7 43
erase startup-config Command

erase startup-config Command
Return the switch to factory default settings.*
HP Switch# erase startup-config Configuration will be deleted and device rebooted, continue [y/n]? y
Passwords are not erased unless the include-credentials command has been entered.
39
Rev. 10.31
You can use the erase startup-config command to return a switch to factory default settings. When you enter this command, you are prompted to confirm the action. If you do not want to erase the startup-config, press N and prevent the reboot. Otherwise, press Y to erase the startup-config and reboot the switch to factory default settings. This command does not erase the management passwords unless you have previously entered the include-credentials command. When you enter this command, currently configured manager and operator usernames and passwords are included in and displayed in the running-config. (Other security settings are included as well.) For example, a manager username and password may be stored in the running-config file as follows:
password manager user-name George SHA1 2fd4e1c67a2d28fced849ee1bb76
If you then enter the erase startup-config command, the management user passwords are erased.
7 44
Rev. 10.31
Monitor ROM Console

Monitor ROM Console
Use the monitor ROM console to fix problems such as a corrupted software image.
Switch is booting . . .
You have two seconds to select one of three Boot Profiles.

40 Rev. 10.31
If you are updating a switch software image and a power failure occurs, it might corrupt the software image. If this happens and the switch does not automatically boot to the other software image stored on the switch, you may need to interrupt the boot process and start a Monitor ROM Console session. You can then reset the switch, reboot the switch, or have the switch boot from the other software image.
Accessing the Monitor ROM Console

To access the Monitor ROM Console, you must manage the switch out-of-band: you must connect your workstation to the switch using the switchs console serial port and cable. When the switch is powered on, you will see a Boot Profiles menu similar to the one in the slide above. When this menu appears, you have approximately two seconds to select one of the following options:

Press 0 to access the Monitor ROM Console Press 1 to ensure the switch boots from the primary software image Press 2 to ensure that the switch boots from the secondary software image
Rev. 10.31
7 45
Press 0 to begin a Monitor ROM Console session. You will see the following message and prompt: Enter h or ? for help. => When the switch is in a Monitor ROM Console session, all the LEDs (including Port LEDs) turn on and remain on until you end that session. If you enter help, it lists the available commands, with a brief description of each. Below is a partial list of the commands:
do(wnload) sp(eed) <baud> h(elp) ? id(entify) jp(jump) <1|2> - Download via Xmodem - Set a new baud rate - Display help screen - Display help screen - Print out identification string - Jump to product code, optional 1-primary, 2-secondary q(uit) boot reset v(ersion) - Exit the monitor - Reboot the system - Reset the system - Display version information
Other commands require a more in-depth knowledge of switch operation and are beyond the scope of this course. The point to remember is this: if you are working with a switch that will not boot properly, you can access the switchs Monitor ROM Console and boot to another software image.
7 46
Rev. 10.31
Switch Replacement
Switch Replacement
Overview of Switch Software and Configuration Files Management Options CLI Diagnostic Information Software and File Management Switch Replacement
Replacing a Switch: Backup Config Available Replacing a Switch: Back up Config from a Failed Switch Replacing a Switch: No Backup Config
Menu Interface Web Browser Interface

41 Rev. 10.31
This section outlines the process for replacing a switch, including the steps you will take to get the new switch functioning on the customers network.
Rev. 10.31
7 47
Replace a Switch: Backup Config Available
Replace a Switch
Backup Config Available
Yes
1. Install the new switch. 2. Access the CLI via a console session. 3. Configure IP settings (optional). 4. Update software (optional). 5. Restore the backup config.
42
Rev. 10.31
As you learned in Module 4: Basic Configuration of HP A-Series Switches, you should first check if the customer has a good backup copy of the switch configuration. If there is a backup, you can easily get the switch operating on the network. First, remove the old switch and install the new switch. Next, access the CLI, using a console session. The next stepconfigure IP settingsis optional, depending on if you will use a USB or TFTP server to update the software and restore the backup configuration. USB devices are supported on the E2910 al, E3500, E5400 zl, and E8200 zl Switch Series and the E6200-24G-mGBIC yl switch. With a USB device, an IP address is not required because you can simply insert the USB device into the switchs USB port.
7 48
Rev. 10.31
Assign an IP Address
Assign an IP Address
Enter the global configuration context to define IP settings:
HP Switch# show running-config . . . vlan 1 untagged 1-24,A1-A4 ip address bootp-dhcp exit HP Switch# config HP Switch(config)# vlan 1 ip address 10.1.1.3/24 HP Switch(config)# show running-config . . . vlan 1 untagged 1-26 ip address 10.1.1.3 255.255.255.0 exit
43 Rev. 10.31
The DHCP server is supplying VLAN 1s IP address. Assign a VLAN an IP address.
The new IP address and subnet mask are in dynamic memory only for now.
If you are going to use a TFTP server to update the switch software and restore the backup configuration, you will need to assign the switch an IP address. (If you are using a USB drive, you can skip this step.) This slide shows the command you use to configure a static IP address for a VLAN. Notice that by default the switch will get IP addresses for VLANs from a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server. Also notice that you can enter the vlan ip address command from the global configuration level. You can also configure a static IP address by first entering the VLAN configuration level and then entering the ip address command, as shown below.
HP Switch (config)# vlan 1 HP Switch (vlan-1)# ip address 10.1.1.1/24
In the example above, the show running config command is issued first to review the switchs initial IP address. A second show running config command reveals the updated IP address.
Rev. 10.31
7 49
Assign a Default Gateway or Default Route
Assign a Default Gateway or Default Route

For Layer 2 switches, configure a default gateway. For Layer 3, or routing, switches, set up a default IP route.
HP Switch# show running-config . . . ip default-gateway 192.168.115.1 Edge_1# config Edge_1(config)# ip default-gateway 10.1.1.1 Edge_1(config)# show running-config . . . ip default-gateway 10.1.1.1
*The default gateway should be in the same subnet as the default VLAN.
Current default gateway Configure the default gateway New gateway*
44
Rev. 10.31
For switches that operate at Layer 2, you must configure an IP default gateway:
HP Switch (config)# ip default-gateway <IP address>
Replace <IP address> with the IP address of the default gateway. In the example, the default gateway is 10.1.1.1. If the switch is operating as a routing switch at Layer 3, however, it does not require a default gateway. To ensure your management workstations traffic can be routed to and from the switch, you should use the ip route command to configure a default route.
HP Switch (config)# ip route 0.0.0.0/0 <Next hop>
Replace <Next hop> with the IP address of the nearest router. You will need to ask the customer for this IP address. For example, you might enter:
HP Switch (config)# ip route 0.0.0.0/0 10.1.2.2
(IP routing and default routes are beyond the scope of this course. For more information, see the management and configuration guide for the particular switch you are using.) It is a good idea to check the running-config (show running-config) after you configure a default gateway to verify that the information was entered correctly.
7 50
Rev. 10.31
Save Configuration Changes

To save configuration changes to the startup-config, enter:
HP Switch(config)# write memory
This command can be executed from within manager, global configuration, and context configuration levels
45
Rev. 10.31
You should save configuration changes by entering:

HP Switch (config)# write memory
Rev. 10.31
7 51
Update the Software and Restore the Configuration
Update the Software and Restore the Configuration

Update the switch software
HP Switch# copy tftp flash 10.1.1.9 k_14_60.swi secondary
HP Switch# copy usb flash k_14_60.swi secondary
Restore the saved configuration

HP Switch# copy tftp startup-config 10.1.1.9 backup.cfg
HP Switch# copy usb startup-config backup.cfg
46
Rev. 10.31
Once the switch has an IP address, you can use a TFTP server to update the switch software and restore the saved configuration. Another option is to use a USB device to update the switch software. You can instead use a USB device to copy the saved configuration to the switchs startup-config.
7 52
Rev. 10.31
Replace a Switch: Back up Config from Failed Switch

Replace a Switch
Back up Config from Failed Switch

No
1. 2. 3. 4.
Yes
Access the failed switch. Back up the config. Install the new switch. Access the new switchs CLI via a console session. 5. Configure IP settings (optional). 6. Update software (optional). 7. Restore the config.
47
Rev. 10.31
If the customer does not have a backup configuration, you should try to access the failed switch and attempt to save the configuration to a TFTP server or a USB drive. To copy the configuration to a TFTP server, use one of the following commands:
HP Switch# copy running-config tftp <IP address> <file_name> HP Switch# copy startup-config tftp <IP address> <file_name>
Replace <IP address> with the IP address assigned to the TFTP server. Replace <file_name> with a name that is meaningful to you. To copy the configuration to a USB device, use one of the following commands:
HP Switch# copy running-config usb <file_name> HP Switch# copy startup-config usb <file_name>
Replace <file_name> with a name that is meaningful to you. You will then complete the steps outlined for replacing a switch with a saved backup configuration.
Rev. 10.31
7 53
Replace a Switch: No Backup Config

Replace a Switch
No Backup Config
Does the customer have a backup config? Can you access the failed switch at all?
No
No
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Install the new switch. Access the new switchs CLI via a console session. Configure IP settings. Update software (optional). Identify the switch. Configure management passwords (optional). Save the config.
48
Rev. 10.31
Sometimes you will not be able to back up the configuration. In such cases, you will install the switch, access the new switchs CLI through a console session, and configure the IP settings the customer wants this switch to use. Review the commands for configuring IP settings, as described earlier in this module. You may want to help the customer identify the switch by configuring a host name for it. For best practices, you should recommend that the customer change the default passwords on the switch as well. These commands are explained on the next few pages.
Note Keep in mind that the customer is responsible for the configuration of the switches you are servicing. For configuration help, the customer should rely on a reseller or purchase an HP Care Pack. (For information about care packs, see http://h10144.www1.hp.com/customercare/services/carepacks/carepacks.htm.
Finally, you should save your configuration changes.
7 54
Rev. 10.31
Identify the Switch
Identify the Switch

You can configure:
A unique host name Contact information, such as phone extension or email address Physical location information, such as building and wiring closet
Global configuration context
HP Switch 3500yl-24G(config)# hostname Edge_1 Edge_1(config)# snmp-server location data center Edge_1(config)# snmp-server contact Admin-555.5555
Prompt reflects new switch name
49
Rev. 10.31
When you are managing multiple switches, you may want to assign a host name to each switch so that you can easily identify it. You can also specify location and contact information to help other network administrators or technicians who may not be familiar with the account. The slide above outlines the steps for naming a switch and specifying contact information. Notice that you enter the global configuration context to configure the host name and the location and contact information. As mentioned earlier, when you make changes, they are dynamically executed and stored in the running-config, which is held in volatile memory and does not survive a reboot.
Rev. 10.31
7 55
Configure an Operator Password
Configure an Operator Password

Protect the switch operators read-only access by assigning an operator password:
HP Switch# configure terminal 1 HP Switch(config)# password operator New password: ******** Please retype new password: ******** HP Switch(config)#
2 3
50
Rev. 10.31
You should immediately set a password for both a manager password and an operator password, as described later in this module. After you configure these passwords, users receive access privileges based on which password they enter when they log in. If they enter the operator password as shown in the slide, they enter the operator level of the CLI and cannot move to the manager level unless they enter the manager password. If a user logs in to the switch using the manager password, however, that user immediately receives access to the manager level (completely bypassing the operator level). If you keep the default setting for management usersno passwordsusers will always receive access to the manager level when they access the CLI. You should configure a password for the operator management user. Complete the following steps: From the manager level in the CLI, enter:
HP Switch# configure terminal
Enter the command to configure the operator password:

HP Switch(config)# password operator
When you are prompted, enter the password and then confirm it.
7 56
Rev. 10.31
Notice that you must be at the global configuration level to enter the password command. If you try to enter this command at the manager level, (HP Switch#), the switch will not recognize the command.
Rev. 10.31
7 57
Configure a Manager Password
Configure a Manager Password

Protect read-write access to the switch by assigning a manager password:
HP Switch(config)# password manager 1 New password: ******** 2 Please retype new password: ******** HP Switch(config)#
51
Rev. 10.31
To assign a manager password from the CLI, complete these steps: From the global configuration level, enter:
HP Switch(config)# password manager
When you are prompted, enter the password and then confirm it. To save configuration changes to the startup-config, enter:
HP Switch(config)# write memory
You can enter this command from the manager, global configuration, and context configuration levels.
7 58
Rev. 10.31
Menu Interface
Menu Interface
Switch Software and Configuration Files Management Options CLI Diagnostic Information Software and File Management Switch Replacement Menu Interface

Accessing the Menu as operator or manager Navigate the Menu Interface Getting Help Using the Full Menu Interface
52
Web Browser Interface

Rev. 10.31
Although the CLI is the most comprehensive management interface, the menu interface can be a convenient way to configure switch settings. The next section examines the menu interface and provides instructions for configuring the switch through this management interface.
Rev. 10.31
7 59
Access the Menu Interface

Access the Menu Interface
Available either in-band or out-of-band. From the CLI, enter:
HP Switch# menu
53
Rev. 10.31
As mentioned earlier, the HP switches described in this module offer a menu interface, which provides you with a subset of switch CLI commands in an easy-to-use menu format. You can access the menu interface either in-band or out-of-band. Simply access the CLI and enter the menu command from the manager level. The menu interface enables you to quickly configure key switch parameters, including:

Manager and operator passwords System parameters IP settings Time protocol Ports Trunk groups A network monitoring port Spanning Tree operation SNMP community names IP authorized managers VLANs (virtual LANs) and GVRP
Rev. 10.31
7 60
The menu interface also makes it easy to:

View switch statuses and counters Examine Event Log information Update switch software Reboot the switch
Rev. 10.31
7 61
Operator-Level or Manager-Level Access
Operator-Level or Manager-Level Access
54
Rev. 10.31
This slide shows the E8212 zl switchs Main Menu window when you log in as an operator and when you log in as a manager. The Main Menu windows for other HP switches will be similar. The Main Menu window at the manager level offers considerably more options for the user than it does for operator level. At the manager level, you can make configuration changes; at the operator level, however, you cannot. At the operator level, you can view the switchs status and counters and event log. At the manager level, you can access: 1. Status and CountersSelecting this option grants you access to display windows, showing switch information, port status and counters, port and VLAN address tables, and spanning tree information. Switch ConfigurationSelecting this option grants you access to configuration windows for displaying and changing the current configuration settings. Console PasswordsSelecting this option grants you access to the window used to set or change manager-level and operator-level passwords and to delete manager and operator password protection. Event LogSelecting this option allows you to monitor switch events and view error messages, which are useful for checking and troubleshooting switch operation.
2. 3.
4.
7 62
Rev. 10.31
5.
Command Line (CLI)Selecting this option returns you to the CLI interface at the same privilege level (manager or operator) you are operating at within the menu interface. Reboot SwitchThis option allows you to perform a warm reboot of the switch and clear most temporary error conditions. Rebooting the switch also resets the network activity counters to zero and the system up-time to zero. (A reboot is required to activate a change in the VLAN Support parameter.) Download OSThis option allows you to download a new software image to the switch. Run SetupSelecting this option grants you access to the Switch Setup window so that you can quickly configure basic switch options (such as IP addressing, default gateway, logon default interface, spanning tree, and so on). StackingSelecting this option allows you to configure stacking options with supporting switches.
6.
7. 8.
9.
10. LogoutThis option closes the menu interface and console session, and terminate Telnet access to the switch
Rev. 10.31
7 63
Navigate the Menu Interface
Navigate the Menu Interface

Title identifies menu window Options settings
Actions line Help

55 Rev. 10.31
Navigation instructions
Menu interface windows include these elements:

Option fields or read-only information such as statistics Navigation and configuration actions, such as Save, Edit, and Cancel Help line to describe navigation options, individual options, and read-only data
To navigate the menu interface, you use arrow keys. To make changes, use the arrow key to move to the Edit action and press Enter. This puts the cursor in the upper half of the window, where you can type the system name. Continue using the arrow keys to move to other options on the window. Some options allow a limited list of settings. For example, in the case of the IP Config option, the choices are:

DHCP/Bootp Disabled Manual
Use the spacebar to cycle through the choices. If you want to configure a static IP address, you must select Manual.
7 64
Rev. 10.31
Getting Help
Getting Help
1. 2. 3. A selected item in the Actions line means the Actions line is active. The Help line provides a brief description of the highlighted Action item. Press H or select Help and press Enter to display Help for the options.
3 1
56
Rev. 10.31
In most windows, there is a Help option in the Actions line. Whenever an item in the Actions line is highlighted, press H, and a separate help window is displayed. The Help line under the Actions items describes the currently selected action or data field.
Rev. 10.31
7 65
Select the Switch Configuration Option
Select the Switch Configuration Option
57
Rev. 10.31
To begin configuring the switch from the menu interface, select the Switch Configuration option from the Main Menu. Note that some submenus are available to manager-level users only. For example, the Switch Configuration Menu allows you to modify the IP configuration, port settings, and other items only if you have manager-level access.
7 66
Rev. 10.31
Port Configuration
Port Configuration
58
Rev. 10.31
To configure ports on the switch, select Port/Trunk Settings from the Switch Configuration Menu shown on the previous page. When the Switch Configuration Port/Trunk Settings window is displayed, note again the navigation instructions included at the bottom of the window. You can quickly enable or disable any of the switchs ports. Simply select the Edit option in the Actions line and press Enter. Then, use the arrow keys to move to the port you want to edit and press the spacebar to toggle through available settings.
Rev. 10.31
7 67
Switch Setup Window
Switch Setup Window

Manager password
Default gateway
IP address for management VLAN

59 Rev. 10.31
The Switch Setup window allows you to quickly complete the initial configuration of the switch. You can define basic options, including IP settings, passwords, a host name, location, and contact information for the switch. To access this window, enter the setup command from the CLI or select Run Setup from the Main Menu. The Switch Setup window provides a convenient method for configuring several switch features at one time. From this window, you can:

Specify a host name and administrator contact information Select a default interfaceeither the CLI or the menu interface Configure an IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway of the management VLAN Set user passwords Enable Spanning Tree
To navigate the Switch Setup window, use the arrow keys to move among the various options; press the spacebar to toggle through options; and finally, press Enter to move to the Actions line. These same instructions are listed in the Help lines at the bottom of the window. In the slide above, the cursor is placed within the Actions line. You can use the arrow keys to select the Edit option that is located within the Actions line. After you select the Edit option, press Enter. You can use the arrow keys to move the cursor from option to option.
7 68
Rev. 10.31
Reboot Required
Reboot Required
The Menu interface displays an asterisk (*) next to items that have been modified and require a reboot
Reminder to reboot the switch to activate configuration changes

60 Rev. 10.31
If you use the menu interface to make configuration changes that require a reboot, the switch displays an asterisk (*) next to the menu item in which the change has been made. For example, if you change and save the setting for the maximum number of VLANs the switch will support, an asterisk is displayed next to the VLAN Support option in the VLAN Menu window. An asterisk is also displayed next to the Switch Configuration option in the Main Menu. To activate changes that are marked with an asterisk, go to the Main Menu and select the Reboot Switch option.
Note Executing the write memory command in the CLI does not affect pending configuration changes indicated by an asterisk in the menu interface. That is, only a reboot from the menu interface or entering a boot or reload command from the CLI will activate a pending configuration change indicated by an asterisk in the menu interface.
Rev. 10.31
7 69
Updating Software
Updating Software
Select Download OS from the Main Menu
Confirm the download
61
Rev. 10.31
You can use the menu interface to upload switch software from a TFTP server. Before you begin the update process, check the following:
A software version for the switch has been stored on a TFTP server accessible to the switch. (Again, software files and updates are available at www.hp.com/networking.) The switch is properly connected to your network and has already been configured with a compatible IP address and subnet mask. The TFTP server is accessible to the switch via IP. Obtain the IP address of the TFTP server in which the software file has been stored. If VLANs are configured on the switch, identify the VLAN in which the TFTP server is operating. Determine the name of the software file stored in the TFTP server for the switch (for example, E0820.swi).
You should also:
To download the software, complete the following steps: 1. In the console Main Menu, select Download OS to display the window in the slide above. (The term OS or operating system refers to the switch software.) 2. Press E (for Edit).
7 70
Rev. 10.31
3. Ensure that the Method field is set to TFTP (the default). 4. In the TFTP Server field, type the IP address of the TFTP server in which the software file has been stored. 5. In the Remote File Name field, type the name of the software file. If you are using a UNIX system, remember that the filename is case-sensitive. 6. Press Enter, then X (for eXecute) to begin the software download. A progress bar indicates the progress of the download. When the entire software file has been received, all activity on the switch halts and you will see Validating and writing system software to FLASH . . . 7. After the primary flash memory has been updated with the new software, you must reboot the switch to implement the newly downloaded software. Return to the Main Menu and press 6 (for Reboot Switch). You will then see this prompt: Continue reboot of the system? : No 8. Press the spacebar once to change No to Yes and press Enter to begin the reboot.
Note When you use the menu interface to update switch software, the new image is always stored in primary flash. Also, using the Reboot Switch command in the Main Menu always reboots the switch from primary flash. Rebooting the switch from the CLI gives you more options.
After you reboot the switch, confirm that the software updated correctly: 1. From the Main Menu, select Status and Counters; from the Status and Counters menu, select General System Information. 2. Check the field entitled Software revision to confirm the download.
Rev. 10.31
7 71

Overview of Switch Software and Configuration Files Management Options CLI Diagnostic Information Software and File Management Switch Replacement Menu Interface Web Browser Interface

Access the Web Browser Interface Switch Status Management Tasks
62
Rev. 10.31
The final section of this module examines the Web browser interface. You will learn how to interpret display presentations and perform fundamental management tasks using this management interface.
7 72
Rev. 10.31

Requirements:
The switchs Web agent is enabled by default. The switch has an IP address. Java applets are enabled on the Web browser.
Enter the switchs IP address as the URL:
10.1.1.9the switchs IP address
63
Rev. 10.31
Although the Web browser interface provides limited functionality, it can be a good monitoring tool and simplify basic configuration tasks. With the K.15.XX switch software release, the Web browser interface on the following HP switches is updated: E3500, E5400 zl, E6600, and E8200 zl Switch Series and the E6200-24G-mGBIC yl switch. The Web agent included in K.15.XX and above improves usability, making this interface even easier to navigate and use. To enable access to the Web browser interface, the switch must have an IP address. In addition, you must enable Java applets on your Web browser. Once these requirements are met, you can open a Web browser window and enter the switchs IP address as the URL.
Rev. 10.31
7 73
View the Switch Status
View the Switch Status
64
Rev. 10.31
This slide displays the updated Web agent on the HP E3500, E5400 zl, E6600, and E8200 zl Switch Series and the E6200-24G-mGBIC yl switch. If these switches are running software version K.14.XX and below, the Web browser interface will have a different appearance, but it will still be easy to navigate. The Web browser interface will also differ in appearance if you are providing support for other HP switches. The Web browser interface has a left navigation bar and tabs on the top of most windows. Experienced Web users should feel comfortable with this layout, making the interface easy to use. As mentioned earlier, one of the advantages of using the Web browser interface is its graphical display, which allows you to more easily monitor switches. Although this course cannot show you every graphical display you might encounter when using the Web browser interface, it can give you an example of the type of displays that are available and help you interpret it. For example, the Home > Status window allows you to see at-a-glance information such as the system uptime, the CPU utilization, the switch software version, the VLANs configured on the switch, the modules installed in the switch, and the active ports. You can also quickly access alert logs and scroll down to view in-depth information about ports.
7 74
Rev. 10.31
Configure Usernames and Passwords
Configure Usernames and Passwords
65
Rev. 10.31
To configure management user names and passwords, click Security > Device Passwords. As you can see, this window allows you to configure both usernames and passwords. On these switches, the manager and operator passwords are used to control access to all switch interfaces. To configure a username and password, click Change on the right side of the window. The window expands as shown above, allowing you to configure a username, password, and access level. After you make your changes, click Save to save them to the startup-config.
Rev. 10.31
7 75
Back Up the Configuration or Update the Switch Software
Back Up the Configuration or Update the Switch Software
66
Rev. 10.31
To back up the customers current configuration or update the switch software, click System > Updates/Downloads. To save out the configuration, click Download under Configuration File. If you want to update the switch software, download the latest version from the HP Networking Web site and copy it to your management workstation. Then, click Update under Software Image and follow the prompts to complete the update.
7 76
Rev. 10.31
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
67
Rev. 10.31
The WebAgent provides several troubleshooting options. In the left navigation bar, expand Troubleshooting to view these options. If you click Configuration Report, you can view the switchs running-config. You can then review the list of configured parameters and possibly identify a problem. You can click Ping/Link Test to verify network connectivity. You can use ping (ICMP echoes) to test connectivity between the switch and another devicewhether that device is on the same subnet or a different subnet. You can use a link test to verify connectivity between the switch and a designated network device on the same subnet (or VLAN). During the link test, IEEE 802.2 test packets are sent to the designated network device in the same VLAN or broadcast domain. The remote device must be able to respond with an 802.2 Test Response Packet.
Rev. 10.31
7 77
Summary
Summary
Switch software and configuration files HP management interfaces:
CLI: most comprehensive and powerful Menu: subset of CLI commands in a menu-driven format Web browser: user-friendly browser presentation of management
features
HP switch management users:

Operator Manager
Managing switches
68 Rev. 10.31
In this module you learned how software and configuration files are stored on the following HP switches:

HP E2510 Switch Series HP E2520 Switch Series HP E261X Switch Series HP E2810 Switch Series HP E291X Switch Series HP E3500 Switch Series HP E4200 vl Switch Series HP E5400 zl Switch Series HP E6200-24G-mGBIC yl Switch HP E6600 Switch Series HP 8200 zl Switch Series
You also learned about the three management interfaces available on these switches and the two default management users. You then learned how to gather diagnostic information, perform software updates, manage configuration files, and replace a switch (including configuring the initial settings). Finally, you took a quick look at the menu and Web browser interfaces.
7 78
Rev. 10.31
HP V-Series Switch Overview

Module 8
Objectives
This module introduces you to the HP V, or Value, Series switches. By the time that you have finished this module, you should be able to:

Identify HP V-Series switches Classify the HP V-Series switches according to their ports, functionality, and management options
Rev. 10.31
8 1
HP V-Series Overview
HP V-Series Overview
Designed for SMBs Unmanaged and Web-managed (smart-managed)
Rev. 10.31
HP V-Series switches are cost-effective, plug-and-play products for small to medium businesses (SMBs) with fewer than 100 nodes. Because SMBs do not have the staff to deploy or managed complicated products, the V-Series switches operate with little to no managementwhile still providing the high performance and basic security features that more and more companies, even small ones, require. Earlier, you learned that switches can be deployed at the core, edge, or distribution level. V-Series switches, on the other hand, are typically deployed in a flat architecture with a site having only one or a few switches.
8 2
Rev. 10.31
HP V-Series Portfolio
HP V-Series Portfolio
Unmanaged switches
HP V1410 Switch Series HP V1405 Switch Series HP V1400 Switch Series
Smart-Managed switches
HP V1910 Switch Series HP V1905 Switch Series HP V1900 Switch Series HP V1810G Switch Series HP V1700 Switch Series
Rev. 10.31
The HP V-Series portfolio can be divided into two basic groups:
UnmanagedThese switches have no management interface at all and are completely plug-and-play. Smart-managedThese switches can be deployed as plug-and-ploy devices but can also be managed, primarily through a Web browser interface.
As you see, several groups of HP switches fit into both categories.
Rev. 10.31
8 3
Unmanaged HP V-Series Switches


V1410 Series V1405 Series V1400 Series
Smart-managed HP V-Series switches
Rev. 10.31
Unmanaged switches are intended for small businesses with networks that require basic connectivity and have little or no IT support. Their plug-and-play setup makes them easy to install, and their fanless design enables open-space deployment. HP offers several different types of unmanaged Layer 2 switches. Some of the switches operate at speeds up to 1 Gigabit; others are intended for 10/100 Mbps environments. Some of these switches are rack mounted, and others are deployed on the desktop. (For this course, desktop deployment means that you might find the switch on any horizontal surface or even upside-down under a table or mounted vertically to a wall.) None of these switches have fans, so they operate quietly and can be installed in offices (rather than a server closet). You will now be introduced to each switch, learning to identify its features and to recognize its physical form factor.
8 4
Rev. 10.31
HP V1410 Switch Series

V1410-8G
8
10/100/1000 ports up to 1 mpps 1.9 Fanless

Throughput
Front panel Rear panel
V1410-16G
16
10/100/1000 ports up to 23.8 mpps Fanless

Throughput
V1410-24G
22
10/100/1000 ports up to 35.7 mpps 2 dual-personality ports, either: 10/100/1000-T port SFP port Fanless
Throughput
6 Rev. 10.31
The HP V1410 Switch Series includes unmanaged Layer 2 switches with Gigabit connectivity. The V1410-8G switch has eight 10/100/1000 ports. To accommodate deployment on desktops, the V1410-8G switch has LEDs on the front panel with the eight ports on the rear panel. It can be mounted on a wall or under a table. This switch has a compact footprint and is fanless. It includes a Kensington lock slot for an optional security cable. Its power supply is external, and the switch includes a power supply tray to keep the mounting area neat. The V1410-16G and V1410-24G switches are similar but provide more ports. For these switches, the ports are on the front panel, as shown in the slide. The V141024G also supports fiber-optic connections with its two dual-personality ports, which can be used as either 10/100/1000 ports for copper cables or open SFP ports. (Customers can purchase mini-GBICs, which support a variety of connectivity options, including fiber optic, to insert in the SFP port.)
Note Throughout this module, unless otherwise noted, a port listed as 10/100/1000 Mbps is understood to be autosensing, to support auto-MDIX, to support Base-T (copper) cabling, and to comply with IEEE 802.3 Type 10Base-T, IEEE 802.3u Type 100Base-TX, and IEEE 802.3ab 1000Base-T Gigabit Ethernet. Similarly, unless otherwise noted, a port listed as 10/100 Mbps is understood to be autosensing, to support auto-MDIX, to support Base-T (copper) cabling, and to comply with IEEE 802.3 Type 10Base-T and IEEE 802.3u Type 100Base-TX.
Rev. 10.31
8 5

V1405-16G switch

16 10/100/1000 ports Throughput up to 23.8 mpps Fanless
V1405-24G switch

24 10/100/1000 ports Throughput up to 35.7 mpps Fanless
Rev. 10.31
The HP V1405 Switch Series consists of unmanaged, fixed-port switches for SMBs. These easy-to-install, 1U, rack-mounted switches are plug-and-play. Nonetheless, they provide advanced Layer 2 switching features such as IEEE 802.1p traffic prioritization to ensure that voice and video traffic receives the quality of service that it needs. Furthermore, the switches automatically reduce their power consumption based on the number of connected ports and reduce consumption further still with fanless operation. The V1405 switches provide high-speed connectivity and wirespeed performance with 16 10/100/1000 Mbps ports in the V1405-16G and 24 10/10/1000 Mbps ports in the V1405-24G.
8 6
Rev. 10.31
HP V1405 Switch Series (Cont.)

V1405-16 switch

16 10/100 ports Fanless 24 10/100 ports Fanless 24 10/100 ports 2 10/100/1000 ports Throughput up to 6.5 mpps Fanless
Rev. 10.31
V1405-24 switch

V1405-24-2G switch

Also members of the V1405 Switch Series, the V1405-16, V1405-24, and V1405-242G switches are rack-mounted, unmanaged switches. They do not have fans and provide intelligent power consumption. Supporting 10/100 Mbps connectivity, these non-blocking switches are deployed in lower-speed environments. (In a non-blocking switch, the backplane speed or internal switching mechanism bandwidth is at least as large as the sum of the speeds of all of the ports.) The V1405-16 has 16 10/100 Mbps ports and the V1405-24 has 24. The V1405-24G is distinguished by two 10/100/1000 Mbps ports, for uplink connections to servers or other switches, in addition to its 24 10/100 Mbps ports.
Rev. 10.31
8 7

V1405C-5G, V1405C-8G, or V140516G Desktop switches

5, 8, or 16 10/100/1000 ports Fanless
V1405C-5, V1405C-8, or V1405-16 Desktop switches

5, 8, or 16 10/100 ports Fanless
Rev. 10.31
The next members of the V1405 Series have C, or Desktop, in their names. These switches are similar to the other members of the series, providing reliable Layer 2 connectivity for SMBs who need either Gigabit or 10/100 Mbps speeds. However, with a fanless design and unobtrusive fixed-port physical form factor, the switches are deployed at the desktop. As you see in the slide, these switches divide into two groups, the Gigabit switches (with G in the model name) and the 10/100 Mbps switches, each type featuring a 5port, 8-port, or 16-port model. All of these are non-blocking switches, providing wirespeed throughput for each port. All of the switches on this slide provide similar power-reduction green technologies to those on the previous V1405 switches. In addition, the Gigabit switches support 802.1p priority for QoS.
8 8
Rev. 10.31

V1400-8G switch

8 10/100/1000 ports Throughput up to 1 mpps 1.9 Fanless 22 10/100/1000 ports 2 dual-personality Gigabit ports Throughput up to 35.7 mpps Fanless
V1400-24G switch

10
Rev. 10.31
The HP V1400 Series consists of two fixed-port, unmanaged Layer 2 models suitable for edge deployment in small networks requiring basic connectivity. It is designed to meet the needs of companies that have no IT support or a small IT staff. To facilitate deployment in offices that do not have a server closet, the V1400 switch is fanless. The V1400-8G switch includes the following features:

Eight 10/100/1000 ports Throughput up to 1 millions of packets per second (mpps) 1.9 22 10/100/1000 ports Two dual-personality ports, which can be used as either RJ-45 10/100/1000 ports or open SFP ports Throughput up to 35.7 mpps
The V1400-24G switch included the following features:

Rev. 10.31
8 9
Unmanaged HP V-Series Switches Summary
Unmanaged HP V-Series Summary
Unmanaged Connectivity switches 10/100 Layer 2 only 10/100/1000

V1400 V1405 V1410 G models
Deployment Desk Rack
C and Desktop models
Other models
1 1
Rev. 10.31
Refer to this table for a reference guide to the switches about which you just learned. You can quickly see which switches provide high-speed connectivity and where each switch can be deployed. Note that the HP V1410 and V1400 Series switches can be rack-mounted or deployed at the desktop (however, the 8 port models are desktop only).
8 10
Rev. 10.31
Smart-Managed HP V-Series Switches

Smart-Managed HP V-Series Switches
Unmanaged HP V-Series Switches Smart-Managed HP V-Series Switches

V1910 V1905 V1900 V1810G V1700 OfficeConnect Managed Switch 9 FX
12
Rev. 10.31
Smart-managed switches are designed for customers whose needs have grown beyond the one-size-fits all approach of an unmanaged switch, but still have a limited IT staff. These switches can be deployed as plug-and-play devices, or a customer can configure them to implement more advanced and specialized functions. An easy-to-use Web browser interface guides the customer through most management tasks. In fact, smart-managed switches are sometimes also called Webmanaged switches. However, the term smart-managed is preferred for the HP products because several of the V-Series switches feature a limited command line interface (CLI) in addition to the Web browser interface. The smart-managed switches can be divided into several series: HP V1910 Series Switches HP V1905 Series Switches HP V1900 Series Switches HP V1810G Series Switches HP V1700 Series Switches HP OfficeConnect Managed Switch 9 FX
Rev. 10.31
8 11
The switches can be distinguished according to several factors: Whether they provide 10/100/1000 or 10/100 Mbps connectivity Whether they operate at Light Layer 3 or Layer 2 only Whether they provide PoE Whether they are rack-mounted or desktop-deployed
The following slides cover the smart-managed switches in more detail, teaching you how to distinguish them according to these factors.
8 12
Rev. 10.31

Light Layer 3 smart-managed switches:
V1910-16G switch

16 10/100/1000 ports 4 SFP ports Throughput up to 29.8 mpps 24 10/100/1000 ports 4 SFP ports Throughput up to 41.7 mpps 48 10/100/1000 ports 4 SFP ports Throughput up to 77.4 mpps
Rev. 10.31
V1910-24G switch

V1910-48G switch

13
The HP V1910 Switch Series provides enhanced functionality with more features and the ability to manage these features through a Web browser interface. First, you will look at the Gigabit capable switches in this series, the V1910 switches. Shown in the slide, are three models in this series, the V1910-16G, V1910-24G, and V1910-48G, with 16, 24, and 52 10/100/1000 ports respectively. Each switch also provides four open SFP ports in which customers can install various mini-GBICs for additional connectivity options. These V1910 switches are all Light Layer 3 switches; that is, each supports multiple IP addresses and several static routes. They also provide basic access control lists (ACL), making them the ideal switch for an SMB that needs to divide users into different subnets.
Rev. 10.31
8 13

Light Layer 3 smart-managed switches:
V1910-24G-PoE(170W) switch

24 10/100/1000 PoE+ ports 4 SFP ports Throughput up to 41.7 mpps

24 4
V1910-24G-PoE(365W) switch
10/100/1000 PoE+ ports up to 41.7 mpps SFP ports
Throughput
14
Rev. 10.31
Here, you see the two members of the V1910 switches that provide PoE. The V191024G-PoE(170W) and V1910-24G-PoE(365W) switches both provide 24 10/100/1000 PoE+ ports. They are distinguished by the amount of power that they provide, up to 170W or 365W.
8 14
Rev. 10.31

Layer 2 smart-managed switches:
V1905-24 switch

24 10/100 ports 2 dual-personality ports Throughput up to 6.6 mpps

48 2
V1905-48 switch
10/100 ports dual-personality ports Throughput up to 10.1 mpps
V1905-24-PoE switch

24 10/100 PoE ports 2 dual-personality ports Throughput up to 6.6 mpps

Rev. 10.31
15
The V1905 Series includes several switches that operate at 10/100 Mbps: the V1905-24, V1905-48, and V1905-24-PoE, providing 24, 48, and 24 ports, respectively. Each of these switches also provide two dual-personality ports, which can be used to connect to upstream switches or to servers that require more bandwidth. On all of the former 3Com switches, a dual-personality port is actually a set of two ports, only one of which can be used at once:

One 10/100/1000 port (for copper cables) One SFP port into which a variety of mini-GBICs, supporting different types of connections, including fiber-optic ones, can be installed (see Module 3: HP ASeries Switch Hardware for more information on transceivers).
The V1905-24-PoE switch provides PoE (up to 154W). Unlike the V1910 switches, the V1905 Series switches operate at Layer 2 only.
Rev. 10.31
8 15

V1905-10G-PoE Switch

9 10/100/1000 PoE ports 1 dual-personality port Throughput up to 14.8 mpps Fanless 8 10/100 PoE ports 1 dual-personality port Throughput up to 2.66 mpps Fanless
V1905-8-PoE Switch

16
Rev. 10.31
The next members of the V1905 Series are also smart-managed switches with capabilities such as 802.1X port security and advanced QoS. These switches are ideal for desktop deployments. The V1905-10G-PoE Switch supports PoE for each of its nine 10/100/1000 Mbps ports while the V1905-8-PoE Switch provides PoE on eight 10/100 ports. Each switch also features one dual-personality port. On the V1905-10G-PoE switch, the 10/100/1000 port component of the dual-personality port is PoE-capable.
8 16
Rev. 10.31

V1900-8G Switch

7 10/100/1000 ports 1 dual-personality port Throughput up to 1 mpps 1.4 Fanless
17
Rev. 10.31
The HP V1900 Switch Series includes a single member: the V1900-8G Switch, designed for desktop deployment at a small company that nonetheless requires a smart-managed switch with options for security and QoS. This switch supports Gigabit connectivity with seven 10/100/1000 ports and one dual-personality port.
Rev. 10.31
8 17
HP OfficeConnect Managed Switch 9 FX

OfficeConnect Managed Switch 9 FX

4 10/100 ports 4 10/100 PoE ports 1 dual-purpose port: 100Base FX uplink SFP port
Throughput up to 2.69 Mpps Fanless
18
Rev. 10.31
The OfficeConnect Managed Switch 9 FX provides another option for companies seeking a smart-managed switch that supports 10/100 Mbps connectivity. The switch provides eight 10/100 Mbps ports, four of which support PoE. For its uplink connection, the switch features a dual-purpose port in which customers can install either a 100Base FX link or an SFP transceiver if they need a different type of fiberoptic link.
8 18
Rev. 10.31
HP V1810G Switch Series

V1810G-8

8 10/100/1000 ports PoE-PD Throughput up to 1 mpps 1.9 Fanless 22 10/100/1000 ports 2 dual-personality ports Throughput up to 35.7 mpps Fanless
V1810G-24

19
Rev. 10.31
The HP V1810G Switch Series replaced the V1800 Switch Series, providing enhancements in deployment options, physical security, and energy efficiency. Both models in this seriesthe V1810G-8 and the V1810G-24can be deployed on the wall, ceiling, tabletop or under table. The V1810G-24 can also be installed in a rack mount. Both switches have a Kensington lock slot so they can be physically secured in open areas. Like the V1800 switches, the V1810G switches are Layer 2, Web-managed switches. The V1810G-8 switch has a compact footprint and provides the following:

Eight 10/100/1000 ports Fanless for quiet operation in open areas Throughput of up to 1 mpps 1.9
The V1810G-8 switch can also be powered by an upstream PoE device, making it a good option for places where a power outlet is not available. The HP V1810G-24 switch provides the following:

24 10/100/1000 ports Two dual-personality ports, which can be used as either 10/100/1000 ports or open SFP ports Throughput of up to 35.7 mpps
Rev. 10.31
8 19

V1700-8

7 10/100 ports 1 10/100/1000 port Throughput up to 2.0 mpps Fanless 22 10/100 ports 2 dual-personality Gigabit ports Throughput up to 6.2 mpps Fanless
V1700-24

20
Rev. 10.31
The HP Series V1700 switch consists of two fixed-port, Layer 2 models: the V1700-8 switch and V1700-24 switch. These switches are ideal for businesses making the transition from unmanaged to managed networks. They are designed with no fan, enabling quiet operation for deployment in open spaces and come with the industryleading HP warranty. The V1700-8 switch includes the following features:

Seven 10/100 ports One 10/100/1000 port Throughput up to 2.0 mpps 22 10/100 ports Two dual-personality ports, which are the same type of dual-personality port as the V1810Gs Throughput up to 6.2 mpps
The V1700-24 switch comes with the following features:

8 20
Rev. 10.31
Smart-Managed HP V-Series Switches Summary
Smart-Managed HP V-Series Summary

Smart-Managed switches
V1910 V1905 V1900 OfficeConnect Managed 9 FX V1810G V1700 Connectivity 10/100/1000 10/100 Functionality Light Layer 3 Layer 2 Some models PoE Deployment Rack Desk
G models
Some models Some models
Some models
21
Rev. 10.31
Again, use this table as a reference guide for comparing the smart-managed HP VSeries switches according to their capabilities and deployment options.
Rev. 10.31
8 21
Summary
Summary
V-Series switches: Unmanaged versus smart-managed Connectivity options Deployment options Functionality and support for PoE
22
Rev. 10.31
This module has introduced you to the HP V-Series switches. You have learned how to recognize them and how to classify them according to several factors:

Whether they are unmanaged or smart-managed Whether they provide Gigabit or 10/100 Mbps connectivity Whether they are rack or desktop deployed Whether they provide PoE Whether they act at Layer 2 or Light Layer 3
8 22
Rev. 10.31
HP V-Series Switch Hardware

Module 9
Objectives
This module familiarizes you with the hardware of the HP V, or Value, Series switches. You will learn to identify the basic LEDs on these switches and use these LEDs to troubleshoot common problems. You will also learn about the hardware accessories that you might encounter with these switches. By the time that you have finished this module, you should be able to:

Identify LEDs on HP V-Series switches Follow the correct procedure to determine whether to replace HP V-Series switches with power problems Recognize fault conditions on HP V-Series switches Reset HP V-Series switches that support hardware resets Identify accessories for HP V-Series switches, including small form-factor pluggable (SFP) transceivers and external redundant power supplies (RPSs)
Rev. 10.31
9 1
V-Series LEDs
V-Series LEDs
V-Series LEDs

Power Port Diagnosing Power Problems Diagnosing Self Test Failures and Fault Conditions
Hardware Reboots and Resets Accessories for HP V-Series Switches
Rev. 10.31
First, you will examine the LEDs on V-Series switches. These LEDs are quite similar to those you learned about on the A-Series and E-Series switches. Therefore, the discussion will be quite brief. (If you need more help, refer to the earlier modules.)
9 2
Rev. 10.31
HP V-Series Hardware
LED Types
LED Types
V-Series switches generally have two types of LEDs: Power Port LEDs (status and activity of specific ports):
Port PoE
activity compatibility and supply (some models) operation speed
Full-duplex
Connection
HP V1910-24G-PoE(365W) switch only: RPS LED
Rev. 10.31
V-Series switches generally have only two types of LEDs:
Power LEDIndicates whether the switch is booted up and receiving power. Because only one V-Series switch has a Fault LED, the Power LED often also indicates fault conditions by glowing in different way. You will learn more a bit later. Port LEDsReport on the status and activity of specific ports. The V-Series Port LEDs resemble those on other HP switches. Some switches have only one LED per port, which indicates both status and activity (and possibly speed). Other switches have two LEDs per port, also indicating full-duplex operation or PoE compatibility and supply (for PoE switches). Some of these switches also have Mode buttons that toggle a single LED through several functions. (See Module 6: HP E-Series Switch Hardware for information about Mode buttons.)
The HP V1910-24G-PoE (365W) also provides an RPS LED; you will learn about the RPS later in this module.
Rev. 10.31
9 3
Identify LEDs on HP V-Series Switches
Identify LEDs on HP V-Series Switches

Link/Act LEDs FDx LEDs
HP 1700-8 Switch
Power LED
Spd LEDs: Off = 10 Mbps On = 100 or 1000 Mbps
Rev. 10.31
The slide illustrates the location of these LEDs on an HP V1700-8 switch. The locations are similar on these switches:

HP V1410 Series switches HP V1400 Series switches HP V1810G Series
Remember to view the number for the port LED and match it to the number on the port because ports are not always assigned IDs in the same order on every switch. On these switches, each port has three LEDs associated with it. The Link/Act LEDs show whether the port has a connection (the LED is on) and whether there is activity on that connection (the LED flashes). The other LEDs report on other characteristics of the link such as its speed and duplex mode (an illuminated FDx LED indicates full duplex mode). You will typically be most interested in the Link/Act LED because this LED signals possible problems with a connection. If the LED is off but the port has a physical connection, look for physical problems (a bad cable, connector, and so forth) and data link problems (on a managed switch, the port is disabled, the duplex mode is mismatched, and so forth). Note that the V1410-8G is unique in that its LEDs are on the front panel, but its ports on the back.
9 4
Rev. 10.31
Identify LEDs on HP V1910, V1905, and V1900 Series Switches
Identify LEDs on HP V1910, V1905, and V1900 Switch Series

HP V1910-24G-PoE(170W)
Mode button Mode LED
Port LEDs Speed mode = Link/Activity PoE mode = State of PoE
HP V1905-10G-PoE
HP V1905-24-PoE
Port LEDs
Link/Activity Duplex PoE status

6 Rev. 10.31
On the V1910 switches, look for the port LEDs on the right side of the front panel. Each 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet port has two LEDs associated with it, which function much like the Link/Activity LEDs about which you have already learned. However, one LED, which is green, indicates a 1000 Mbps connection, and the other, which is yellow, indicates a 10/100 Mbps connection. (The V1910-48G provides only one LED per port, but since it glows two different colors, you can interpret it in the same way.) When you are examining V1910-24G-PoE(170W) and V1910-24G-PoE(365W) switches, remember that they have a Mode button. If the Mode LED next to the button is solid green, the port LEDs behave as described for other V1910 switches. But if this LED is flashing, the port LEDs indicate whether the port is providing PoE (green), is over-subscribed and cannot provide the power that the connected device needs (flashing green), or is not providing PoE (yellow). Make sure to press the Mode button to see the information pertinent to the situation. The V1905 Series switches provide similar port LEDs to those shown on the previous slide, indicating status/activity and duplex mode. However, these switches do not provide Speed LEDs because their ports support only 10/100 Mbps connections. On the V1905-10G-PoE and V1905-8-PoE switches, one LED per-port reports specifically on the PoE status; you do not need to click a Mode button.
Rev. 10.31
9 5
Note On the V1910-48G and V1905-48, look for the port LEDs over the ports themselves rather than grouped together on the right of the panel. If you need more information about a specific LED, refer to the latest documentation for the switch that you are servicing.
9 6
Rev. 10.31
Identify LEDs on V1405C and V1405 Desktop Switches
Identify LEDs on HP V1405C and V1405 Desktop Switches
HP V1405C-5G
Port LEDs Flash = Activity On Gigabit only: Green = 1 Gbps Yellow = 10/100 Mbps
7 Rev. 10.31
Power LED (illuminated logo)
Several switches in the HP V1405 Switch Series do not have labeled Power LEDs. Instead, the logo on the right side of the front panel is illuminated when the switch is powered on. These switches include:

V1405C-5 V1405C-8 V1405-16 Desktop V1405C-5G V1405C-8G V1405-16G Desktop
(These switches were formerly branded as OfficeConnect Unmanaged switches; you might see that label on the switch.) These switches have only one LED per-port, so that LED conveys all information about the port; a solid glow indicates a connection and blinking, activity on that connection. On the Gigabit switches, the color of the LED indicates the speed (green for 1000 Mbps and yellow for 10/100 Mbps).
Rev. 10.31
9 7
Identify Dual-Personality and SFP Port LEDs
Identify Dual-Personality and SFP Port LEDs

You might see: A numbered LED or an LED next to the SFP or dualpersonality port Module LED
HP V1810G-24
HP V1900-8G
Rev. 10.31
As you learned in the previous module, some HP V-Series switches provide small form-factor pluggable (SFP) ports, which accept SPF transceivers that in turn provide interfaces for fiber optic connections. Other HP V-Series switches have dualpersonality ports, which can accept either a Base-T connection or an SFP transceiver. On some HP V-Series switches, such as the V1810G-24 switch shown in the slide, each dual-personality port is a single physical port. On others (the HP V-Series switches that were formerly branded as 3Com), the dual-personality port consists of two physical portsone of which accepts a Base-T connection, one of which accepts an SFP transceiver, and only one of which can be active at once. Depending on the switch, you will find the LEDs that report on the SFP or the dualpersonality ports in different locations.
Numbered LED or Port LED

You will find it simple to locate the LEDs for the SFP ports on HP V1910 Series switches. Just like LEDs for the 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet ports, these LEDs are located either over the SFP port or at the right of the front panel, numbered with the same numbers as the SFP ports. Similarly, when the dual-personality port consists of a single physical port, the port LEDs resemble those for the switchs Base-T Ethernet ports. If these LEDs indicate problems, check both the cable and the SFP transceiver (or mini-GBIC). Make sure that the transceiver is installed correctly.
9 8
Rev. 10.31
The HP V1905-24, V1905-24-PoE, and V1905-48 switches have two physical ports for the dual-personality port. Both ports share the same Link/Activity and Duplex/SFP LEDs. The LEDs behavior depends on which port is in use. (If both ports are connected, by default, the SFP port takes priority, and the other connection does not come up.) When the 10/100 port is in use, the LEDs behave like other 10/100 port LEDs on this switch. When the SFP port is in use, the Link/Activity LED indicates the status of the connection while the Duplex/SFP LED indicates whether a module is installed (green for installed, even if the connection is down). If the Duplex/SPF LED indicates that the module is installed, but the other LED is off, check both the cable and that the SFP transceiver is well-mounted. The dual-personality port LEDs for the HP V1905-8-PoE are similar; however, the second LED is called Duplex/Module Active.
Module LED
Other HP V-Series switches provide a separate LED for the SPF port within the pair. Therefore, you must look for that LED when troubleshooting the connection. These switches include the following:

HP V1905-10G-PoE HP V1900-8G
The name of this LED begins with Module (Module Present or Module Active, respectively). Similarly, the OfficeConnect Managed FX9 switch provides a Module Status LED for its SFP port (which is not part of a dual-personality port pair). These Module LEDs turn on when an SFP transceiver is installed in the corresponding SFP port and has established a connection. If the SFP port has a connected cable, but the LED is not illuminated, then the SPF transceiver might not be well-mounted or the cable might be faulty.
Rev. 10.31
9 9
Procedure for Power Failures
Procedure for Power Failures

1 Check the power supply at both ends
Problem solved?
No Yes
Power cord was loose
Use a known good outlet

Problem solved?
No Yes
Use new outlet
Use a known good power adapter

No
Replace switch
9 Rev. 10.31
Problem solved?
Yes
Replace power adapter (if covered)
When a switch is connected to a power source, but its Power LED does not illuminate, then the switch has a problem related to power. When you are called in to troubleshoot such a problem, follow the procedure indicated in the slide: 1. 2. Check the power supply at both ends, looking for a loose connection. If this does not solve the problem, connect the switch to a known good power outlet (preferably, one that is successfully supplying power to a switch of the same type). If this does not solve the problem, try using a different power adapter. Refer to the products specifications for a list of supported adapters. Preferably, use a known good power adapter, one that is successfully supplying power to a switch of the same type. If this solves the problem, tell the customer to use a different power adapter. Replace the adapter if it is covered by the warranty or service contract. If the new power adapter does not solve the problem, replace the switch.
3.
4. 5.
For an unmanaged switch, you simply need to install the new switch. For managed switches, you might need to complete the initial configuration and reload the customers configuration on the new switch. The next module gives guidelines.
9 10
Rev. 10.31
Procedure for Power Failures on PoE-Powered HP V1810G8Switches
Procedure for Power Failures on PoE-Powered HP V1810G-8 Switches

1 Use known good RJ-45 cable
Problem solved?
No Yes
Use new cable
Check the power on the PoE source

Problem solved?
No Yes
Use new outlet
3
Replace switch
10 Rev. 10.31
Check the port priority

No
Problem solved?
Yes
Retain new priority
HP V1810G-8 switches can be powered by PoE instead of by a traditional power source. When they are, you must use a different procedure to troubleshoot. First, use a known good RJ-45 cable to connect the V1810G-8 port 1 (the port that receives PoE) to the PoE power source (which might be an injector or a PoE switch). If this does not solve the problem, check the PoE source and verify that it has enough power to supply to the V1810G switch (15W). Finally, if the PoE source is a switch, have the switch administrator check the PoE priority of the port that connects to the V1810G-8. The priority must be high enough to ensure that the switch will deliver power to the V1810G-8. Once you are certain that the PoE source is delivering the proper amount of power, check the V1810G-8 Power LED. If it is still not illuminated, the switch has failed. Replace it.
Rev. 10.31
9 11
HP V1400, V1410, and V1700 Switch Series Fault Condition
HP V1400, V1410, and V1700 Switch Series Fault Condition

Determine if self-test failed:
If
Port LEDs do not match the picture, self-test has failed
Power cycle the switch twice to confirm failure

HP 1400-24G, 1410-24G, or 1700-24 HP 1400-8G, 1410-8G, or 1700-8
Unconnected ports Unconnected ports
Before Speed pressing LED on FDx LEDs on Link/Act and Speed LEDs off
1 1 Rev. 10.31
Link/Act and Mode LEDs off
You might also need to troubleshoot problems with Port LEDs that are not illuminated when the port is connected. However, the procedure for troubleshooting these problems (checking the Ethernet cable and so forth) is the same as that on HP A and E-Series switches. Therefore, this module will not cover this procedure. Instead, you will focus on recognizing and dealing with fault conditions on various VSeries switches, beginning with the V1400, V1410, and V1700 Series. You might be called in to look at a switch for which the Power LED is illuminated (so it does not have a power problem), but seems to be experiencing problems. Perhaps the switch is not forwarding traffic. Additionally, in the case of a V1700 Series switch, you might not be able to access its Web browser interface. You can verify that the switchs self-test has failed by power cycling the switch, waiting a moment, and then checking the LEDs for the unconnected ports. All port LEDs temporarily illuminate while the switch completes its self test, but most of the LEDs for the unconnected ports should then turn off. On a V1400-8G, V1410-8G, or V1700-8 switch, only the FDx LEDs for unconnected ports should be illuminated. On a V1400-24G or V1410-24G, before you press the Mode button, all of the port LEDs should be off and the Speed LED should be on. If the switchs unconnected port LEDs do not match this description and remain lit, the self test has failed. Power cycle the switch again to confirm the failure. Then, if the problem is not solved, replace the unmanaged switch. For the V1700 switches, you
9 12
Rev. 10.31
should first attempt to return the switch to its factory default settings and see whether that repairs the problem. You will learn how a bit later in this module.
HP V1910 Series Fault Condition
HP V1910 Switch Series Fault Condition

Symptom:
Power Port
LED blinking slowly (3Hz)
LED blinking slowly yellow*

HP V1910-24G-PoE(170W)
Problem: Self-test failed Solution:

Access
Boot ROM Menu and bypass the configuration or reinstall software necessary, replace switch Port LED blinking? Power LED blinking?
If
*On the V1910-48G, the port LEDs are off.

12 Rev. 10.31
On V1910 Series switches, you can recognize a POST failure by examining the Power LED. This LED blinks at 1 Hz while the switch boots up. If the LED continues to blink slightly more rapidly (at 3 Hz), the POST has failed. Wait several minutes to confirm. The Port LEDs that failed the POST will also blink slowly yellow at 3Hz (however, they will be off on a V1910-48G). You should power-cycle the switch to verify the failure. Next, you should power cycle the switch again and press [Ctrl+B] when prompted during the boot process. Then attempt to load known good software on the switch or to bypass a bad configuration. The V1910s Boot ROM menu is just like the one that you learned how to use in Module 4: Basic Management of HP A-Series Switches. (Of course, if your attempts at fixing the switch do not succeed, you should escalate the problem or replace the switch as appropriate.)
Rev. 10.31
9 13
HP V1905 Series Fault Condition
HP V1905 Switch Series Fault Conditions

Symptom: Power LED yellow Problem: Self-test failed Solution:
Access If
failsafe mode (covered in next module)
necessary, replace Power LED
HP V1905-10G-PoE
13 Rev. 10.31
On the V1905 Series switches, you can recognize a self-test failure by the Power LED glowing yellow. (This might occur when one or more ports have failed.) Again, confirm the failure with a power cycle. If the problem persists, you must access failsafe mode and attempt to reset the configuration or load good software on the switch. You will learn how in the next module.
Note The V1905-10G-PoE switch does not support fail-safe mode.
9 14
Rev. 10.31
HP V1900-8G and OfficeConnect Managed FX Switch Fault Conditions
HP V1900-8G and HP OfficeConnect Managed 9 FX Switch Fault Conditions

Symptoms
Status Alert
Problem = Self-test failed Solution = Access CLI and

collect information or reinstall software
HP V1900-8G
LED is yellow (V1900-8G) LED is solid orange (OfficeConnect Managed 9 FX)
Status LED
HP OfficeConnect Managed Switch 9 FX FX
Alert LED
14 Rev. 10.31
The V1900-8G and OfficeConnect Managed 9FX switches have special LEDs that indicate problems, the Status LED or Alert LED, respectively. When this LED is on, the switch is experiencing a problem of some sortfor example, the software might have become corrupted. If possible, you should access the CLI, as you will learn how to do in the next module, and collect diagnostic information. You can reinstall software from the CLI as well. On the V1900-8G switch, you can also access the fail-safe menu and attempt to fix the switch from there (the next module explains how). If you cannot reach the CLI or solve the problem in the failsafe menu, you might need to escalate the problem or replace the switch as appropriate.
Rev. 10.31
9 15
HP V1810G Switch Series Fault Condition
HP V1810G Switch Series Fault Condition

Blinking Fault LED
Self
test failed; power-cycle twice to confirm failed; power-cycle twice to confirm

Blinking?
Blinking Fault LED and Port LED

Port
Blinking?
15 Rev. 10.31
The HP V1810G Switch Series also has a specific Fault LED. This LED blinks to indicate a problem. If it is blinking, but none of the Port LEDs is blinking, the switch system itself has failed its self test or experienced another fatal error. Power up the switch two times to confirm the problem. You can try resetting the switch to its factory default settings to fix the problem; you will learn how to do this later in this module. You might also need to reinstall its software. If both the Fault and a Port LED are blinking, that port has failed. You might need to replace the switch.
9 16
Rev. 10.31
Hardware Reboots and Resets

Hardware Reboots and Resets
V-Series LEDs Hardware Reboots and Resets

Reboot Switches Execute a Hardware Reset to Factory Default Settings
Accessories for HP V-Series Switches
16
Rev. 10.31
You will now learn about tasks that you can perform using the switch hardware itself (no need to access the switchs management interface): rebooting the switch and resetting the switch to factory default settings.
Rev. 10.31
9 17
Reboot HP V-Series Switches
Reboot HP V-Series Switches

Switches with no Reset button
Power cycle (remove and restore the power adapter) Press the Reset button for a warm reboot and self-test Power cycle for a hard reboot and self-test

Reset button
17 Rev. 10.31
Rebooting an HP V-Series switch is as simple as power cycling the switch; that is, removing the power adapter and then replacing it. On the HP V1810G Series only, you have the option of executing a warm reboot (also called a soft reboot), in which the switch gracefully shuts down and then restarts. For a warm reboot, press the Reset button on the front panel. A hard reboot might be necessary to deal with some problems; in this case, power cycle the switch.
9 18
Rev. 10.31
Reset HP V1810G Series Switches to Factory Default Settings
Reset HP V1810G Series Switches to Factory Default Settings

1. 2. 3.
Press the Reset and Clear buttons Release the Reset button When all three Mode buttons blink, release the Clear button
Reset button Clear button
18
Rev. 10.31
With the V1810G Series switches front panel buttons, you can also reset the switch to factory default settings. In this way, you can reset a faulting switch to known-good settings even though you cannot gain management access to it. Use a similar procedure as that for many E-Series switches: 1. 2. 3. Press the Reset and Clear buttons. Release the Reset button while holding the Clear button. When all three Mode buttons (circled in the figure in the slide) begin to blink, release the Clear button.
When the switch reboots, it runs the factory default settings including its IP address and password. (You can press and hold the Clear button on its own to reset only the password.)
Rev. 10.31
9 19
Reset HP V1700 Series Switches to Factory Default Settings
Reset HP V1700 Switch Series to Factory Default Settings

1. Remove the switchs power adapter. 2. Remove all cables. 3. Connect port 1 to port 2. 4. Reconnect the power adapter. 5. Wait at least 40 seconds before disconnecting port 1 from port 2. No Reset or Clear button
Cable ProCurve 1700-8 Switch

19 Rev. 10.31
You can also initiate a hardware reset to factory defaults on the HP V1700 Series switches although these switches have no Reset button. Follow these steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the switchs power adapter. Remove all cables. Connect port 1 to port 2. Reconnect the power adapter. Wait at least 40 seconds before disconnecting port 1 from port 2.
9 20
Rev. 10.31
Accessories for V-Series Switches

Accessories for HP V-Series Switches
V-Series LEDs Hardware Reboots and Resets Accessories for HP V-Series Switches

Mini-GBICs SFP Transceivers External RPS
20
Rev. 10.31
You will now learn about the HP V-Series accessories that you might need to recognize and install, including:

Mini-GBICs, which are installed in SFP ports or dual-personality ports External Redundant Power Supplies (RPSs)
Rev. 10.31
9 21
HP V-Series Mini-GBICs
HP V-Series Mini-GBICs
Mini-GBIC
Gigabit-SX-LC Gigabit-LX-LC Gigabit-LH-LC
V1400
V1410
V1810G
V1700
1000BX-D SFP-LC 1000BX-U SFP-LC 100-FX SFP-LC 100BX-D SFP-LC 100BX-U SFP-LC
21
Rev. 10.31
You will need to know which transceivers a particular switch supports so that you can install the correct ones and so that you can recognize when a non-compatible transceiver is causing a fault condition. The table displays the wide variety of SFP transceivers, also called mini-GBICs, available for HP V1400, V1410, V1700, and V1810G Series switches. You might recognize these mini-GBICs from the HP E-Series Hardware module, as these mini-GBICs are also supported by many switches in that series.
Note Installing these mini-GBICs is simple. You simply plug them into the SFP or dualpersonality port and then connect the correct cable to the interface in the miniGBIC. For more information, see Module 6: HP E-Series Hardware.
9 22
Rev. 10.31
HP V-Series SFP Transceivers
HP V-Series SFP Transceivers

Mini-GBIC
1000Base-SX 1000Base-LX 1G SFP 1000Base-LH70 1000Base-T
V1910
V1905
V1900
OfficeConnect Managed 9FX
22
Rev. 10.31
As you recall from the previous module, the V1910, V1905, V1900 Series switches support dual-personality port pairs, which include an SFP port. Similarly, the OfficeConnect Managed 9FX Switch provides a port that can act as an FX port or an SFP port. Refer to the table to see which SPF transceivers you can install in various switchs SFP ports.
Note Installing these transceivers is simple. You simply plug the (empty) transceiver into the SFP port. If it provides a clasp, pivot the clasp until it catches the knob. Then connect the correct cable to the interface in the transceiver. For more information, see Module 3: HP A-Series Hardware.
Rev. 10.31
9 23
HP V-Series External RPS

HP V-Series External RPS
HP RPS 1000 A3 Redundant Power Supply
Power supply for the HP V1910-24G-PoE(365W) switch
25 Amps -52 to -55 VDC
RPS 1000 A3 Cable A, JD5 Connector
V1910-24G-PoE(365W)
23
Rev. 10.31
The HP V1910-24G-PoE(365W) switch can receive power from an HP RPS 1000 A3 Redundant Power Supply, one of the RPSs that you already learned about with the ESeries switches. The RPS 1000 A3 is the only RPS supported for this switch. You must also use the correct cable to connect the switch to the RPS; the slide displays the specifications. The switch has both an AC and DC power input. You can connect one or both, for redundancy. When operating at is capacity, the V1910-24G-PoE(365W) switch draws:
AC power:
523 W for system power 365 W for PoE 92 W for system power 740 W for PoE
DC power
The V1910-24G-PoE(365W)switch provides an RPS Status LED directly above the Mode button and Mode Status LED. Look at this LED to discover whether the switch is successfully receiving power from the RPS (LED glows solid green) or whether the switch is not receiving power or the DC input is abnormal (LED is off).
9 24
Rev. 10.31
Summary
Summary
HP V-Series LEDs V-Series power failures V-Series fault conditions Hardware reboots and resets Mini-GBICs RPSs
24
Rev. 10.31
In this module, you have been introduced to features of the HP V-Series switches hardware and taught how you can use those features to provide support for customers. You learned how to use LEDs to recognize power failures and fault conditions on V-Series switches, and you learned how to execute reboots and resets to factory defaults using the hardware. You also learned about supported hardware accessories for the V-Series switches:
SFP transceivers (or mini-GBICs), which can be installed in SFP and dualpersonality ports The HP RPS 1000 A3 for V1910-24G-PoE(365W) switches
Rev. 10.31
9 25
9 26
Rev. 10.31
Basic Configuration of HP V-Series Switches

Module 10
Objectives
In the previous module, you learned how to recognize problems with HP V-Series switches. This module will give you the skills that you need to address some of these problems. Andwhen you must replace a switchyou will use the same skills to get the new switch up and running. By the time that you have completed this module, you will be able to:

Identify management options for V-Series switches Access and navigate a smart-managed switchs CLI or Web browser interface Complete basic management tasks in either interface Use fail-safe mode for troubleshooting
Rev. 10.31
10 1
Management Overview of HP V-Series

Software Capacity Configuration File Capacity Management Users Management Options
CLI Fail-Safe Mode Web Browser Interface

3 Rev. 10.31
From previous modules, you are familiar with the basics of switch management switch software, configuration files, the roles of different management users, the various types of management interfaces, and so forth. In terms of concepts, this module does not introduce much that will surprise you; as you would expect, the management of HP V-Series switches is somewhat simpler than that of the switches intended for enterprises with larger IT staff. This section, therefore, will simply lay out the options for management the HP V-Series switches with the assumption that you will understand what these options mean.
10 2
Rev. 10.31
V-Series Software Image Capacity
V-Series Software Image Capacity

Multiple Software Images One backup One active
HP V1910 Series HP V1905-10G-PoE HP V1905-8-PoE
Single Software Image
Dual Software Image
Unmanaged switches* HP V1905-24 HP V1900-8G HP V1905-48 HP V1700 Series HP V1905-24-PoE HP OfficeConnect Managed Switch 9 FX HP V1810G Series
*No updates for these switches

4 Rev. 10.31
As you have learned, although only one software image runs at a time, a switch can have one, two, or multiple software images, those switches with more than one image having greater resiliency in case of the corruption of one image. The table shows the number of software images supported by each switch in the HP V-Series. Note that all of the unmanaged switches, even though they cannot be configured, do run a software image; however, this software cannot be updated.
Rev. 10.31
10 3
V-Series Configuration File Capacity
V-Series Configuration File Capacity

No config file
Unmanaged switches
Changes to runningconfig immediately applied to startup

HP V1905-24 HP V1905-48 HP V1905-24-PoE HP V1900-8G HP OfficeConnect Managed Switch 9 FX HP V1700 Series
Running and startup-config

HP V1810G Series HP V1905-10G-PoE
Multiple configuration files One running-config One startup-config

HP V1910 Series HP V1905-8-PoE
Rev. 10.31
The unmanaged switches, of course, do not contain any configuration file that you can alter. And, as this module concerns switch management, this will be the last mention of this segment of the HP V-Series. But the smart-managed switches run configuration files much like the other switches that you have learned about in this course. However, several of the V-Series switches do not have a truly separate concept of a running-config and startup-config. In other words, all changes made to the configuration are immediately applied and immediately saved to the startup configuration (which is reapplied whenever the switch reboots). Switches of this type include:

V1905-24, V1905-48, V1905-24-PoE switches V1900-8G switches OfficeConnect Managed Switch 9 FX V1700 Series switches
On other V-Series switches, changes applied to the currently running configuration must be saved to the startup-config to be made permanent. These switches include:

V1905-10G-PoE switches V1810G Series switches
10 4
Rev. 10.31
Finally, the V1910 Series switches and V1905-8-PoE switches can store multiple configuration filesjust as they do multiple software images. One of the files functions as the startup-config. And, of course, these switches have a running-config with the currently applied settings.
Rev. 10.31
10 5
Privilege Levels for Smart-Managed HP V-Series Switches
Privilege Levels for Smart-Managed HP VSeries Switches

4 Levels (like A-Series)
Visitor Monitor Config Ping and Read Read and traceroute access configure Manage Complete access
2 Levels (like E-Series)

Monitor Read access Manage Complete read-write access
1 Level Administrator Complete access
HP V1910 Series
HP V1905-24 HP V1900-8G HP V1905-48 HP V1810G Series HP V1905-24-PoE HP V1700 Series HP V1905-10G-PoE HP V1905-8-PoE HP OfficeConnect Managed Switch 9 FX
Rev. 10.31
The A-Series switches, as you learned in Module 4: Basic Configuration of HP ASeries Switches, have four access levels. Management of the V1910 Series switches follows the same strategy. You will need to obtain the credentials for the access level required for the task that you must complete. For simple connectivity checks, you can log in as a visitor; to view configurations, you must log in as a monitor; to make any configuration changes, such as to the IP address, you must log in at the config level (equivalent to the A-Series system level); and the update the software or reset the switch to factory defaults, you must log in as a manager. As with the A-Series switches, each level contains the rights for lower levels; therefore, it is a good idea to log in as a manager whenever possible. Most other V-Series switches follow the slightly simpler pattern of the E-Series switches: a monitor level with read-only access and a manager level with complete access. These switches are:

V1905 Series switches OfficeConnect Managed Switch 9 FX switches
The following V-Series switches provide a single level of access, so you only need to worry about obtaining the correct credentials:

V1900-8G switches V1810G Series switches V1700 Series switches

Rev. 10.31
10 6
Note Simplifying matters is that most of these switches have only one management user for access to the limited CLI through a console connection. For example, the V1910 Series switches divide the Web browser interface, which offers full management features, into four access levels. But a single password provides access to the limited CLI.
Rev. 10.31
10 7
Management Options for Smart-Managed HP V-Series Switches
Management Options for Smart-Managed HP V-Series Switches

Switch
HP V1910 Series HP V1900 Series HP V1905 Series HP OfficeConnect Managed Switch 9 FX HP V1810G Series HP V1700 Series Web browser interface CLI SNMP
Rev. 10.31
All of the smart-managed V-Series switches support a Web browser interface, which is typically the primary management tool for switches in this series. As hinted in the previous slide, the V1900 Series, V1905 Series, V1910 Series and OfficeConnect Managed Switch 9 FX switches also have a CLI, which, depending on the switch, might provide only a few commands or almost any command that you need to configure any setting. You will learn more about each CLI in a little while. These switches can also be managed by a Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) server; however, this option will not be covered in this course.
10 8
Rev. 10.31
CLI
CLI
Management Overview of HP V-Series CLI
Access the CLI Navigate the CLI Complete Basic Tasks in the CLI
Fail-Safe Mode Web Browser Interface
Rev. 10.31
You might need to access a switchs CLI when the switch has lost network connectivity or when you do not know its IP address. From the CLI, you can complete most of the tasks that you may be called on to do. In this section, you will learn how to access and navigate the CLI on each switch in the HP V-Series that supports this option. A reference of commands for several basic tasks will then be provided.
Note You can access the CLI in-band (with a Telnet or SSH session) or out-of-band with a console session. This section will focus on out-of-band access because this is the type that is required when you cannot reach the switch at its IP address.
Rev. 10.31
10 9
Access the CLI: Serial Cables for HP V-Series Switches
Access the CLI
Serial Cables for HP V-Series Switches
RJ-45 to RS-232 Cable HP OfficeConnect Managed Switch 9 FX
RJ-45 to DB-9 Cable HP V1910 Series HP V1905 Series
Rev. 10.31
The first step to accessing the CLI through a console session is obtaining the correct serial cable to connect your management station to the switch. The V-Series switches have a console port that accepts an RJ-45 connector (the same type as Ethernet cable). The other side of the cable is a traditional serial connector. Refer to the table for the exact specification.
10 10
Rev. 10.31
Access the CLI
Access the CLI

Terminal software settings:
Baud rate = 38,400 Data rate = 8 Parity = None Stop bits = 1 Flow control = None
Log in:
Default username = admin No default password If passwords have been changed, log in with the credentials
you are given

10 Rev. 10.31
The table shows the correct settings for your terminal software, which you learned about in earlier modules. When prompted to log in, use the credentials that you were given. Only the V1905-8-PoE and OfficeConnect Managed Switch 9 FX switches have multiple types of console users; for these switches, try to obtain the manager credentials. If you do not know the login credentials, you can try the default username, admin, and default password, none (press [Enter]).
Rev. 10.31
10 11
V1910 and V1905 Switch Series CLI
V1910 and V1905 Switch Series CLI

The V1910 and V1905 Series* CLI provides a basic set of commands.
V1910 Series and V1905-10G-PoE
<Sysname> command <options>
HP V1905-24, HP V1905-48, and HP V1905-24-PoE

Select menu option: command <Prompts for options>
*With the exception of the V1905-8-PoE switches

1 1 Rev. 10.31
The V1910 Series and V1905-10G-PoE switches have nearly identical CLIs. These CLIs consist of only a few commands, mostly related to basic management and support tasks. The V1905-24, V1905-48, and V1905-24-PoE switches also have a similar CLI. However, in this CLI, you simply enter what would be the first part of a command in the other switches CLI. You are then prompted for the options. For example, to set the IP address on a V1910 Series switch, you might enter:
ipsetup address 10.1.4.12 24 default-gateway 10.1.4.1
On a V1905-24-PoE switch, on the other hand, you would simply enter:

ipsetup
Then you would be prompted for the IP address, mask, and default gateway.
10 12
Rev. 10.31
V1900-8G Switch CLI
V1900-8G Switch CLI

Basic set of commands Three top level commands
System Subcommands IP Subcommands Console Subcommands
Select menu option: toplevelCommand subcommand
Select menu option: toplevelCommand Select menu option(toplevelCommand): subcommand
12
Rev. 10.31
The V1900-8G switch also features a CLI with a limited set of commands. These commands are organized into menus. In the top-level menu, you can enter three commands, System, IP, and Console, each of which takes you to a new menu, where you can enter more commands. You have the option of entering an entire command, both the top level command and the subcommand, in the top level menu. Or you can enter one command at a time until you have completed a task. You can use the help (?) to see the commands in the current menu, so the second option works best when you cannot remember the complete command.
Note You must enter the full word for each command; this switch does not autocomplete entries.
Rev. 10.31
10 13
V1905-8-PoE CLI
V1905-8-PoE Switch CLI

More comprehensive command set Organized into modes Save with this command: copy
enable
running-config startup-config
Normal EXEC mode: Switch> Privileged EXEC mode: Switch#
config
Global Configuration: Switch(config)# Other modesfor example, interface Switch (config-if)#
13
Rev. 10.31
The V1905-8-PoE CLI switch features a CLI that is closer to those to which you were introduced when you learned about the E-Series switches. You can move from a basic command set (normal EXEC mode) to a privileged one, using the enable command and perhaps a password. Then with the config command, you can access the global configuration mode and other modes. Examining the complete structure of this CLI exceeds the scope of this course (refer to the switch documentation). You will simply need to learn a few commands. Keep in mind that, on this switch, you need to save configurations that you make in the CLI. Use the command shown in the slide.
10 14
Rev. 10.31
HP OfficeConnect Managed Switch 9 FX CLI

CLI
More comprehensive command set Organized into menus (like mode contexts)
Select menu option: toplevelCommand subcommand subcommand
Select menu option: toplevelCommand Select menu option(menu): subcommand Select menu option(submenu): subcommand
14
Rev. 10.31
The CLI of the HP OfficeConnect Managed Switch 9 FX also features a more comprehensive command set. Similar to the V1900-8G CLI, you have the option of entering a complete command, or entering one part of the command at a time in successive menus. Again, we will not examine the complete structure of the CLI. You can refer to the switch documentation for this information. You can also enter ? to obtain help as you configure the switch.
Rev. 10.31
10 15
Basic CLI Tasks
Basic CLI Tasks

Tasks View system information Assign IP address Ping Reset to factory defaults Install software Change console password
15
Rev. 10.31
From a console session to the CLI, you can complete several tasks, including:

Viewing system information Assigning the switch an IP address Pinging Resetting to factory defaults Installing software Changing passwords
The following slides present the CLI commands for completing these tasks on each type of V-Series switch with a CLI.
10 16
Rev. 10.31
View System Information

V1910 Series summary V1905-24 V1905-48 V1905-24-PoE summary V1905-10GPoE summary V1905-8-PoE V1900-8G 9 FX
show version show system
IP status
system summary
16
Rev. 10.31
Use the commands shown in the slide to learn information about the switch, including (but not limited to) the switchs:

IP address Software version Hostname Uptime
Below is a sample output when the summary command is entered on an HP V191024G-PoE switch:
IP Method: DHCP IP address: 10.153.96.86 Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 Default gateway: 0.0.0.0 Current boot app is: flash:/2900_release.bin Next main boot app is: NULL Next backup boot app is: NULL 3Com Corporation 3Com Baseline Switch 2928-PWR Plus Software Version 5.20 ESS 1101 3-11 Copyright (c) 2004-2009 3Com Corp. and its licensors. All rights reserved.
Rev. 10.31
10 17
3Com Baseline Switch 2928-PWR Plus uptime is 0 week, 0 day, 3 hours, 11 minutes 3Com Baseline Switch 2928-PWR Plus 128M bytes DRAM 128M bytes Nand Flash Memory Config Register points to Nand Flash Hardware Version is REV.B CPLD Version is 001 Bootrom Version is 112 [SubSlot 0] 24GE+4SFP+POE Hardware Version is REV.B
10 18
Rev. 10.31
Assign a Static IP Address
Assign a Static IP Address

V1910 Series V1905-24 V1905-48 V1905-24PoE
1.
V190510G-PoE
V1905-8PoE
V1900-8G
9 FX
ipsetup address <address> [mask | length] [defaultgateway <address>]
ipsetup
2.
manual
3.
Follow prompts.
ipsetup address <address> <mask> [defaultgateway <address>]
1.
1.
1.
interface <VLAN ID>

2.
ip dhcp disable
2.
protocol ip basicconfig
OR
gettingstarted
2.
ip address <address> <mask>

3.
ip defaultgateway <address>
ip setup <address> <mask> <defaultgateway address> <VLAN ID>
manual
3.
Follow prompts.
17
Rev. 10.31
You will need to assign a replacement switch an IP address when you first set it up. You might also assign an IP address to a recovered switch. Enter the commands shown in the slide, depending on the switch. Follow prompts is not a command, but simply indicates that you will be presented with prompts for the IP address, mask, and so forth and you should fill them in. Note that these commands are for static IP addresses. For example, on the V190524, V1905-48, and V1905-24-PoE switches and the OfficeConnect Managed Switch 9 FX, you enter manual to indicate that you are entering a static address (you would use auto to obtain an address with DHCP). Also note that on the V1900-8G switch, you must disable DHCP before you can set a manual IP address. Only on the V1905-8-PoE switch must you access a VLAN interface to assign the IP address (on other switches the IP address is automatically assigned to VLAN 1).
Rev. 10.31
10 19
Test Connectivity with a Ping
Test Connectivity with a Ping
V1910 Series
V1905-24 V1905-48 V1905-24-PoE
V190510G-PoE
ping <address>
V1905-8PoE
ping <address>
V1900-8G
9 FX
ping ping <address> <address>
ip ping <address>
protocol ip ping <address>
18
Rev. 10.31
After you configure the IP settings, you must test them by pinging other devices in the LAN. The table displays the correct ping command for each switch.
10 20
Rev. 10.31
Reset to Factory Default Settings

V1910 Series V1905-24 V1905-48 V1905-24PoE
initialize
V1905-10GPoE
V1905-8-PoE
V1900-8G
9 FX
initialize
initialize
initialize
system restore [keep ip]
system control initialize
19
Rev. 10.31
Sometimes a switch configuration might cause the switch to fail or other problems in the network. If you have determined that you need to reset the switch to its factory default settings, enter the commands shown on the slide. Note that on a V1900-8G switch, you can use the keep ip option to reset all settings to factory defaults except the switchs IP settings.
Rev. 10.31
10 21
Install Software
Install Software
V1910 Series
1. upgrade <serveraddress> <sourcefilename> {bootrom | runtime} 2. reboot
V1905-24 V1905-48 V1905-24-PoE

1. upgrade 2. Follow prompts. 3. reboot
V1905-10GPoE
1. upgrade <serveraddress> <sourcefilename> {bootcode | runtime} 2. reboot
V1905-8-PoE
V1900-8G
9 FX
1. copy tftp file 2. Follow prompts. 3. boot system opcode <filename>
ip tftpget <serveraddress> <sourcefilename>
1. system control software Upgrade 2. system control reboot
20
Rev. 10.31
A corrupt software image file can also cause a switch to fault. When a switch fails its self test, you can attempt to reinstall the software image, which you will need to obtain and place on a TFTP server that the switch can reach. Note that the V1910 Series and V1905-10G-PoE switches have boot code that might also need to be updated. The release notes for the software image should indicate the correct boot code version.
10 22
Rev. 10.31
Set the Console Password
Set the Console Password

V1910 Series
1.
V1905-24 V1905-48 V1905-24-PoE

1. 1.
V190510G-PoE
V1905-8-PoE V1900-8G
9 FX
1.
1.
1.
password
2.
password
2.
password
2.
line console
2.
console password
2.
Follow prompts.
Follow prompts.
system management password

2.
Follow prompts.
login local
3.
Follow prompts.
Follow prompts.
password [0 | 7] <password>
21
Rev. 10.31
Before you finish setting up a replacement switch, you should change the console password to protect this type of access. The table indicates the correct procedure on each switch.
Rev. 10.31
10 23
Fail-Safe Mode
Fail-Safe Mode
Management Overview of HP V-Series CLI Fail-Safe Mode
Access Fail-Safe Mode Complete Troubleshooting Tasks
22
Rev. 10.31
Fail-safe mode is a special mode that you can access on several HP V-Series switches by interrupting the boot process. In some ways, it is similar to the Boot ROM menu on HP A-Series and V1910 Series switches. This section teaches you how to access fail-safe mode and use it for troubleshooting.
10 24
Rev. 10.31
Fail-Safe Mode Overview
Fail-Safe Mode Overview

These V-Series switches support fail-safe mode:
HP V1905 Switch Series* HP V1900-8G Switch
Access a switchs fail-safe mode to troubleshoot problems such as:

The switch is faulting (corrupt software or other problem). The password is lost.
*Except the V1905-10G-PoE switches

23 Rev. 10.31
The slide displays the V-Series switches that support a fail-safe mode. You should access this mode to troubleshoot problems such as:
A switch that is unresponsive or will not boot completely. Such a switch will exhibit one of the fault conditions that you learned how to recognize in the previous module. The password is lost. You can use the fail-safe mode to reset passwords.
Rev. 10.31
10 25
Access Fail-Safe Mode: V1905 Series Switches
Access Fail-Safe Mode

V1905 Switch Series 2 Boot the switch
Open a console session Boot ROM
3 Boot ROM runs
When prompted, 4 press [Ctrl+C] You enter 5 Fail-safe mode
FailSafe mode
24
Rev. 10.31
The slide illustrates the process for accessing fail-safe mode on V1905 Series switches: 1. 2. 3. 4. Open a console session with the switch. Reboot the switch. The boot ROM runs. When the boot ROM finishes loading and gets ready to boot the system software, you will see a prompt to press [Ctrl+C]. You have five seconds to do so.
Note When a switch cannot boot completely (you would see a Yellow Power LED), it will stay at fail-safe mode.
5.
You enter fail-safe mode and are presented with several options.
10 26
Rev. 10.31
Use Fail-Safe Mode: V1905 Series Switches
Use Fail-Safe Mode

V1905 Switch Series
Initialize Password Reboot* Upgrade
Reset to factory default settings when the current configuration is faulty Reset all passwords to default (username = admin; password empty) Install new image when the current is corrupted
*Not an option on V1905-8-PoE switch

25 Rev. 10.31
The slide displays four options. Use Initialize to reset the switch to its factory default settings. Use Upgrade to install a new software image on the switch. You might select one of these options when the switch is experiencing a fault condition in an attempt to return the switch to known good settings and software. Use Password when you have been locked out of a management interface. This command resets all passwords that are stored locally on the switch. You can then log in to the CLI or to the Web browser interface using the admin username (and no password). On the V1905-24, V1905-48, and V1905-24-PoE switches, you can reboot the switch directly from fail-safe mode.
Rev. 10.31
10 27
Access Fail-Safe Mode: V1900-8G Switches
Access Fail-Safe Mode

V1900-8G Switch 1 Open a console session 3 Boot ROM runs Boot ROM Press [Ctrl+Shift+ -] 4 You enter 5 Fail-safe mode 2 Boot the switch
Booting image 0
Booting image 0 Entering safe mode SRAM testing: Passed S/W Version: V1.0.0 H/W Version: R01 serial number0001 Default IP address: 169.254.0.1 **Bootup finish** Entered safe mode
26 Rev. 10.31
The process for accessing fail-safe mode on V1900-8G switches is quite similar to the process for the other switches. Note, however, that you will not be prompted to press the keys that take you into fail-safe mode. Instead, watch carefully for this message:
Booting image 0
Press [Ctrl+Shift+ -]. You will see the messages shown in the slide, indicating that you have entered safe mode.
10 28
Rev. 10.31
Use Fail-Safe Mode: V1900-8G Switches
Use Fail-Safe Mode

V1900-8G Switch
Reset to factory default settings:

>system restore default *** Restoring to default configuration... *** Restored to default configuration... *** Activating new configuration... >exit
27
Rev. 10.31
Use the system restore default command to reset the switch to factory default settings. After the prompt returns, enter exit, and the switch will continue the boot process.
Rev. 10.31
10 29

Management Overview of HP V-Series CLI Fail-Safe Mode Web Browser Interface Access the Interface Complete Basic Tasks
28
Rev. 10.31
You will now be introduced to the Web browser interfaces of HP V-Series switches. This interface is particularly important for these switches as it is the only management interface for the HP V1700 and V1810G Series switches and the main interface for most smart-managed switches. You will learn how to access the interface with guidelines for discovering a switchs IP address when you do not know it. You will be introduced to the windows in which you complete the same basic tasks that you just learned about completing in the CLI. The intent of this section is for you to become familiar with the process of Web management; an illustration of every window on every switchs Web browser interface will not be provided.
10 30
Rev. 10.31

1. If you know the IP address, enter it as the URL.
10.1.1.9the switchs IP address
2. Log in as a user with the appropriate privilege level.
29
Rev. 10.31
You access a V-Series switchs Web browser interface in the same way that you would any other HP switchs. You do need to know the IP address, but the HP VSeries switches are configured with default IP addresses, meaning that you can often access the Web browser interface when you first install the switch. Of course, your management station and the switch must have connectivity. After you navigate to the switchs IP address in your Web browser (use HTTP), you will be prompted to login. You learned about the various privilege levels earlier in this module. Be sure to obtain the correct credentials for the tasks that you must perform. If you are setting up a new switch, the default credentials are:
HP V1910 Series, V1905 Series, V1900-8, and OfficeConnect Managed Switch 9 FX switches:
Username = admin Password = [empty] Password = [empty]
HP V1700 Series and V1810G Series switches:
For a V1910 Series switch, you must also input the verify code shown in the Login window.
Rev. 10.31
10 31
Obtain an Unknown IP Address
Obtain an Unknown IP Address

1. Try the default IP address. 2. V1900, V1905, V1910 Switch Series and HP OfficeConnect Managed Switch 9 FX:
Use the Switch Detect Application. Access the CLI on the console port (when
available).
V1810G and V1700 Switch Series:

Execute a hardware reset to factory
default settings.
30
Rev. 10.31
If you do not know the IP address, you will need to obtain it before you can access the device. For a replacement switch, at factory default settings, you can access the switch at its default address (the next slide shows what these are for each switch). For a V1910 Series, V1905 Series, V1900-8, or OfficeConnect Managed Switch 9 FX that is not operating at factory defaults, you can use the Switch Detect Application to discover the device IP address. (See Module 4: Basic Configuration of HP A-Series Switches for more information.) You can also access the CLI and view the IP address as you learned how to do in the previous section. The HP V1810G and V1700 Series switches do not support a CLI. Therefore, when you cannot discover the IP address of one of these switches, you must reset the switch to factory default settings using the procedure demonstrated in Module 9: HP VSeries Switch Hardware.
10 32
Rev. 10.31
Default V-Series Switch IP Addresses
Default V-Series Switch IP Addresses

V1900 and V1905 Switch Series: DHCP first No DHCP, switch default HP V1810G and V1700 Switch Series: 192.168.2.10 /24
Label on right of rear panel, top cover, or underside

*Note: The 9 FX does not have a default IP address
31 Rev. 10.31
By default, V1910 Series, V1905 Series, V1900-8, and OfficeConnect Managed Switch 9 FX switches receive DHCP addresses if DHCP services are enabled for the VLAN on which they are installed. If you have access to the DHCP server, you can look on it for new switches IP addresses. Otherwise, you might need to use the 3Com Switch Detect Application. If the switch cannot receive an IP address, it takes a default address. Each switch has its own default address in the 169.254.0.0/16 subnet. You can find the unique IP address on the switchs label, which is on the right of the rear panel, the top cover, or the underside of the switch, depending on the model.
Note The OfficeConnect Managed Switch 9 FX does not have a default IP address. Before you can access the Web browser interface, you must connect to the device on its console port and assign it an IP address using the CLI.
The default IP address of an HP V1810G and V1700 Series switch is 192.168.2.10/24. To connect to a switch using its default address, you should generally connect your management station directly to an Ethernet port on the switch. You must configure your management station with an IP address on the same subnet.
Rev. 10.31
10 33
1. 2.
32
Click System > Information to view switch information. Click System > Name to record the switchs name and administrative information.
Rev. 10.31
You will now be guided through the process of completing basic management tasks on an HP V1700 Series switch. Using the Web browser interface to manage other smart-managed HP V-Series switches is a similar process although the location of particular windows and names of particular settings vary on different types of switches. To view system information on an HP V1700 Series switch, click System and the Information. You can then see the switchs name, its hardware and software version, and its IP address among other information. To change the switchs name and other administration, you would click Name under System.
Task
View system information
V1910 Series
Summary > System Information Device Information
V1905 Series
Device Summary > Device View
V1900-8G Switch
Status
Task

Physical Interface > Ethernet > Port Setup Summary
V1810G Series
V1700 Series
View system information
Status > System Description
System > Information
10 34
Rev. 10.31

Diagnostics > Factory Defaults
33
Rev. 10.31
Resetting a switch to factory default settings is not a typical part of a switchs initial setup. However, you might need to do so when the switch has a configuration that is causing problems. The slide shows an example of a window for resetting the configurationthe Diagnostics > Factory Defaults window on an HP V1700 Series switch. Note that on this switch, you can keep the current IP address if you want. This allows you to revert to the factory default setting but still manage the switch on its current address. Some of the other switches also support this option, so look for it before you reset.
Task
Reset to factory defaults
V1910 Series
Device > Configuration > Initialize
V1905 Series
Administration > Reset
V1900-8G Switch
System > Tools
Task

System > Control > Initialize
V1810G Series
V1700 Series
Reset to factory defaults
Rev. 10.31
10 35
Save Current Configurations
Save Current Configurations

Some V-Series switches require changes to be saved to the startup-config: V1910 Switch Series V1905-10G-PoE and V1905-8-PoE switches V1810G Switch Series V1910s
34
Rev. 10.31
Some HP V-Series switches immediately save changes to the startup-config when you apply them to the running-config. Others require you to save the changes manually. It is important to remember which switches these are so that you do not lose your configurations. The table shows which switches these are, and the window in which you save the current configuration.
Task
Save configurations
V1910 Series
Configuration > Save
V1905-10G-PoE Switch
Save Configuration (at the top of the navigation bar)
V1905-8-PoE Switch
Save Configuration (at the top of the navigation bar)
V1810G Series
Maintenance > Save Configuration
10 36
Rev. 10.31
Set the IP Address
Set the IP Address
1. Click System > IP Address to configure the switchs IP address and password. 2. Click System > Rate Limits to determine rate limits for broadcasts and multicasts.
35
Rev. 10.31
If you have accessed a new switch at its default IP address, you must now set the switchs permanent IP address. Here you see the window for IP settings on an HP V1700 Series switch, which is accessed at System > IP Address. Set the switchs IP address and subnet mask. Also remember to set the default gateway address. Many of the HP V-Series switches support multiple VLANs. When you configure IP settings, make sure that the VLAN ID is set correctly. For example, a customers LAN might use VLAN 2 and subnet 10.1.2.0/24 for infrastructure devices IP addresses. You would need to select the correct VLAN ID when you configure the address on the 10.1.2.0/24 subnet. After you set the switch to its permanent IP address, you will lose your management session. Reconfigure your management station to use an IP address on the same subnet and access the Web browser interface again. At this point, you can also reestablish on the new switch the connections that used to be supported by the switch that failed.
Rev. 10.31
10 37
The tables display the location for the simplest setup for a management IP address; some of the switches support multiple IP addresses and other ways to define them.
Task
Set an IP address
V1910 Series
Wizard > IP Setup
V1905 Series
Administration > IP Setup
V1900-8G Switch
System > LAN Settings
Task

System > Getting Started
V1810G Series
V1700 Series
Set an IP address
Network > Get Connected
System > IP Address
10 38
Rev. 10.31
Test Connectivity
Test Connectivity
Diagnostics > Ping Test
36
Rev. 10.31
After you configure the IP settings, you should verify that they are correct by testing connectivity. For example, on an HP V1700 Series switch, click Diagnostics > Ping Test. Then type in the IP address that you want to ping and click Apply. Although all of the smart-managed HP V-Series switches support pings, several only do so from the CLI, as indicated by Not applicable in the table.
Task
Initiate a ping
V1910 Series
Network > Diagnostic tools > Ping
V1905 Series
Not applicable
V1900-8G Switch
Not applicable
Task

V1810G Series
V1700 Series
Initiate a ping
Network > Get Connected
Rev. 10.31
10 39
Restore and Back up Configurations
Restore and Back up Configurations

3 Download = Backup Upload = Restore 4 1 2 5
1. Click Support from the left menu column. 2. Click Configuration File. 3. Select Upload to restore a configuration. 4. Click Browse to select the configuration file on your management station. 5. Click Apply.
37 Rev. 10.31
If the customer has backed up the switchs configuration, then you can now load it on the replacement switch. In the Web browser interface of some of the HP V-Series switches, this process is called restoring the configuration. In other interfaces, it is called uploading a configuration, or copying a configuration to the startup-config. On an HP V1700 Series switch, click Support > Configuration File. Then select Upload to restore a configuration. The configuration file should be saved on your management station, click Browse to navigate to it. When you click Apply, the configuration is copied to the switch. Whenever you configure a customers switch, you should back up the configuration in case the customer needs to restore it later. You might also back up the configuration of a failed switch to load it on a new switch. On the HP V1700, you can back up the current configuration from the Support > Configuration File window. Simply select Download instead of Upload and follow a similar process to restoring the configuration. On other switches, you might need to access a different window to backup the configuration. You might also have the option to backup and restore from either the local management station (using HTTP) or from a TFTP server.
10 40
Rev. 10.31
Task
Restore a configuration
V1910 Series
Device > Configuration > Restore
V1905 Series
Administration > Backup & Restore > Restore or Restore Configuration Administration > Backup & Restore > Backup or Backup Configuration
V1900-8G Switch
System > Tools
Backup a configuration
Device > Configuration > Backup
System > Tools
Task

System > Backup Configuration > Restore System > Backup Configuration > Save
V1810G Series
V1700 Series
Restore a configuration Backup a configuration
Maintenance > Update Manager Maintenance > Backup Manager
Support > Configuration File Support > Configuration File
Rev. 10.31
10 41
Set a Password
Set a Password
HP V1700sSystem > Password HP V1910s Authentication > Users > Add Local User 1 1 2 3
1. Password and username
2. Methods of access 3. Privilege level
38
Rev. 10.31
The customer might want you to set or change the password to the Web browser interface in order to protect the switch (or the customer might prefer to do so him or herself). On the left, the slide displays the System > Password window an HP V1700 Series switch. This switch and the HP V1810G Series switch do not specify a username for the manager, so you only need to configure the password. On HP V-Series switches that support multiple management users, you should modify the default admin user to change the default password. You can also set up a new user. In the latter case, you might also need to indicate the ways that the user can manage the device, whether with Telnet (which also permits Web access), with SSH, and so forth. (Remember, for these switches, the console password is separate; you set that password in the CLI). The figure on the right illustrates the window for creating a user on a V1910 series switch.
Task
Set a password for management access
V1910 Series
Authentication > Users
V1905 Series
Administration > System Access > Setup and Modify tabs
V1900-8G
System > Password
10 42
Rev. 10.31
Task

Security > Device > User > Create and Modify tabs
V1810G Series
V1700 Series
Set a password for management access
Maintenance > Password Manager
System > Password
Rev. 10.31
10 43
Update Software
Update Software
1 2 4
1. Click Support from the left menu column. 2. Click Update Software. 3. Click Browse and select the appropriate file. 4. Click Apply.
39 Rev. 10.31
You might need to update a switchs software. First obtain the software. Then save the file to your management station. (On some switches, you can alternatively upload the software file from an FTP or TFTP server on your station or another device).
Note For some switches, you might need to obtain a boot ROM image as well; the software release notes should indicate whether this is the case. Typically, you install the boot ROM through the CLI.
The slide displays the process for an HP V1700 Series switch: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click Support from the left menu column. Click Update Software. Click Browse and select the appropriate file. Click Apply.
10 44
Rev. 10.31
Task
V1910 Series
V1905-24 V1905-48 V1905-24-PoE

Administration > Firmware Upgrade
V1905-10G-PoE and V1905-8PoE Switches

Administration > Firmware Upgrade > Restore Image *You must also set the new image as the active image in Administration > Firmware Upgrade > Active Image
V1900-8G Switch
System > Tools
Install software
Device > Device Maintenance > Software Upgrade
Task

System > Control > Software Upgrade
V1810G Series
V1700 Series
Install software
Maintenance > Update Manager *Update type is Code *You can choose whether to update the active or backup software. To later change which software image is active, select Maintenance > Dual Image Configuration
Support > Update Software
Rev. 10.31
10 45
Summary
Summary
V-Series management options CLI management Troubleshooting with fail-safe mode Web browser interface management
40
Rev. 10.31
You have learned the basics of managing V-Series switches. You can access the switches that have CLIs on their console port or over Telnet or SSH. You can access all of the V-Series switches Web browser interfacesand you know how to find the IP address at which to access the switch. You can complete basic management tasks in both interfaces. You have also learned how to access fail-safe mode on several HP V-Series switches, and use the commands to reset a forgotten password, install good software, or reset to factory default settings.
10 46
Rev. 10.31
Wireless Overview
Module 1 1
Objectives
This module introduces you to the HP Value (V), Essential (E), and Advanced (A) Series wireless solutions. After completing this module, you should be able to:
List basic features of the 802.1 1a/b/g/n Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) specifications for wireless LAN technology Describe the different wireless environments for which each HP wireless series is designed, and the ways in which the wireless devices could be deployed
Rev. 10.31
11 1
Overview of 802.1 Standards 1

Overview of 802.11 Standards
Standard 802.1 1b 802.1 1a 802.1 1g Frequency 2.4 GHz 5 GHz 2.4 GHz Advertised Speed 1 Mbps 1 54 Mbps 54 Mbps Notes First widely adopted standard; largely obsolete Not compatible with 802.1 1b; higher speeds available only at closer range Compatible with 802.1 1b; operates at 802.1 speeds if 802.1 devices are 1b 1b nearby; might have greater range than 802.1 but often experiences more 1a interference (speed drops with distance) Compatible with both 802.1 1b/g and 802.1 1a.
802.1 1n
2.4 or 5 GHz
600 Mbps
Rev. 10.31
Within HPs wireless portfolio customers can find support for the 802.1 1a, 802.1 1b, 802.1 1g, and 802.1 IEEE specifications for wireless LAN technology. In this section, 1n well quickly go over these wireless standards:
802.1 was the first widely adopted standard but is becoming obsolete. 1b 802.1 devices operate in the 2.4 GHz range with a maximum theoretical 1b speed of up to 1 megabits per second (Mbps). 1 802.1 1a, the next standard to be ratified, increases the slow rates offered by 802.1 1b, achieving advertised speeds of up to 54 Mbps. 802.1 radios operate 1a in the 5 GHz band. Due to the nature of radio communication, the faster possible rates of 802.1 come at the cost of range. Devices operating on this 1a standard must be 25 to 50 percent closer together than 802.1 devices to 1b achieve their maximum speeds, making 802.1 a more practical option when 1a high throughput is more important than wide coverage. The 802.1 frequency band offers a larger range of channels on which to 1a operate, allowing you to create more overlap between APs. 802.1 radios are not compatible with 802.1 radios. 1a 1b 802.1 matches the higher speed of 802.1 but is compatible with legacy 1g 1a 802.1 equipment. That is, APs operating at 802.1 speeds can transparently 1b 1g adapt to 802.1 stations in their coverage area and provide access at 802.1 1b 1b speeds.
Rev. 10.31
11 2
HP Wireless Overview
802.1 1g-compliant radios operate in the 2.4 GHz band and advertise rates of up to 54 Mbps. Because 802.1 uses a lower frequency band than 802.1 1g 1a, it might offer a larger range (depending on other environmental factors). However, stations still must be closer to the AP to take advantage of the higher speeds. 802.1 radios are not compatible with 802.1 devices. The two types of radios 1g 1a operate on different frequency bands, so they do not interfere with each other either. The 802.1 1b/g frequency band (2.4 GHz) tends to experience more interference than the 802.1 band (5 GHz). 1a
802.1 is a standard for high-speed wireless connections. This standard offers 1n maximum theoretical data rates up to 600 Mbps. 802.1 can operate in either 1n the 2.4 GHz or the 5 GHz band and is compatible with both 802.1 1b/g and 802.1 1a.
Note Advertised speeds are the maximum theoretical rates at which devices operating on a given standard can transmit; the figure relates to radio technology, not actual throughput. For various reasons, actual rates experienced by an end user will be significantly lower than advertised rates and can vary widely, even within a session.
For more information about wireless standards, see the Wireless Fundamentals Guide version 8.21 (at http://cdn.procurve.com/training/ TechnicalCertification/Mobility/WirelessFundamentals.zip).
Rev. 10.31
11 3
HPs Wireless Portfolio: The V, E, and A-Series

HPs Wireless Portfolio: The V, E, and A-Series
HPs wireless solutions are categorized into the V, E, and A-Series.
V-Series
E-Series
A-Series
Rev. 10.31
At the beginning of this course we discussed the solution series into which HPs product portfolio is categorized. As with the switching and WAN solutions, HPs wireless solutions are categorized into the V, E, and A-Series.
11 4
Rev. 10.31
HP V-Series Wireless Products

Designed for:
Small businesses with limited IT
knowledge
Networks of fewer than 100 devices,
most of which are wired
Plug-and-play for simplified deployment Ease of management/troubleshooting from Web interface

5 Rev. 10.31
The V-Series is designed to meet the wireless networking needs of small businesses with limited IT knowledge. You may encounter these products on the networks of customers with fewer than 100 devices, most of these wired. The standalone HP Wireless Access Point 10ag and HP V1 Wireless-N Router Series are plug-and-play 10 for simplified deployment, and can be easily managed from their Web interface. You can use this interface to troubleshoot as well.
Rev. 10.31
11 5
HP E-Series Wireless Products

HP E-Series Wireless Products
Designed for:
Mid-market business networks Businesses with changing
networking needs
Plug-and-play for simplified deployment Ease of management/troubleshooting from Web interface E-Series MSM APs can be deployed in autonomous or controlled mode.
6 Rev. 10.31
You are likely to find the HP E-Series wireless productswhich, like the V-Series, are deployed and managed easilyin a mid-market business customers network. Size is not the only factor in E-Series selection, however. The HP E-Series is designed for customers with changing networking needs who are looking for essential and proven technology that is easy to use, easy to deploy, reliable, future-proof, and costeffective. Target vertical markets include hospitality, healthcare, education, transportation, and manufacturing. The E-Series includes one AP that operates in standalone, or autonomous, mode only. All of HPs E-Series MultiService Mobility (E-MSM) APs, however, have two modes of operation: autonomous mode and managed mode, which is known as controlled mode. In most instances you can use the Web browser interfacethe APs or the controllers, depending on mode of operationto troubleshoot these devices and to deploy replacement devices if the customers device cannot be repaired. In autonomous mode, HPs full-featured APs are deployed on their own to enforce company access policies, securing wireless communications through industrystandard authentication and encryption methods, and applying quality of service (QoS) measures. In small offices, a single AP will often provide more than enough capacity. Your customers might also be using an autonomous AP to provide wireless access in one area of a larger office. For example, they might provide wireless access in conference rooms only. Servers and network devices in the existing network would
11 6
Rev. 10.31
secure and manage wired traffic. Your customer only needs to integrate the wireless network with the existing structure and policies. Controlled modecentralized control of HP E-MSM APs by the HP MultiService Mobility 700, or E-MSM700, Series controllersis the factory default setting for HP E-MSM APs. Controlled mode automates deployment, services provisioning, and software distribution. All security, QoS, and other policies can be centrally defined through the controllers Web-based management tool, ensuring that a consistent set of services is delivered throughout the network.
Rev. 10.31
11 7
Traffic Control on HP E-Series Networks

Traffic Control on HP E-Series Networks
Rev. 10.31
HP E-Series wireless solutions enable your customers to choose how wireless traffic is controlled and distributed on to the wired network.
Distributed forwardingEach AP can forward traffic independently. Traffic is thus distributed across multiple points, an approach of particular value given the rise of 802.1 deployments where high-speed wireless connectivity generates a 1n great deal of traffic. Distributed forwarding with centralized authenticationYour customer might also choose to let E-MSM APs handle all wireless data traffictransmitting it directly onto the networkwhile still forwarding all traffic related to the authentication process to the controller. One benefit of this approach is simplified RADIUS setup, which is valuable when IT time is at a premium or staff experience is limited. Centralized access controlFinally, centralized authentication and access control enables the controller to act as the gatekeeper to the wired network. For example, all guest users could be required to authenticate through a Web login page before accessing the protected network, enabling the business to support a large and rotating number of guest accounts without compromising network security.
11 8
Rev. 10.31
HP A-Series Wireless Products

HP A-Series Wireless Products
Designed for:
Large or complex deployments
Ease of management/troubleshooting from Web interface Robust CLI for those familiar with CLI commands A-Series APs can be deployed in fit or fat mode.
Rev. 10.31
The HP A-Series is designed for customers with large or complex deployments seeking networking technologies that address the needs of branch offices, enterprise headquarters, campus networks, and metropolitan area networks, and do so at a lower cost of ownership. Target vertical markets include healthcare; manufacturing; finance; and federal, state, and local government. As with the V and E-Series, you can use each A-Series products Web browser interface to manage the device. If you are familiar with the command-line interface (CLI), however, it is robust and a main management interface for the A-Series wireless solutions. All of the HP A-Series APs that were formerly products of 3Com can be deployed in either standalone, or fat, mode, or managed, or fit, mode. All of the HP A-Series APs that were formerly products of H3C are standalone, or fat, devices only.
Rev. 10.31
11 9
Traffic Control on HP A-Series Networks

Traffic Control on HP A-Series Networks
Rev. 10.31
Like the HP E-MSM autonomous APs, HP A-Series fat APs perform encryption, authentication, and signal routing for AP-to-AP handoffs. HP A-Series fit APs also provide local traffic encryption to provide security close to the user and decrease latency; but other functions such as AP routing and handoffs are moved to the controller. Authentication, too, is the purview of controllers, which integrate with backend AAA servers, consistently enforcing user and group access policies across the wireless LAN to provide secure session integrity as users roam throughout the network. To ensure the seamless transmission of data HP A-Series wireless controllers support both centralized and distributed data forwarding. Users can configure local forwarding for data traffic from clients with a specified service set identifier (SSID), virtual LAN (VLAN), or SSID and VLAN, and centralized forwarding for data traffic from other clients.
11 10
Rev. 10.31
Summary
Summary
HPs wireless solutions are divided into the V, E, and ASeries based on the size of business for which each solution is suited
The V-Series is designed to meet the needs of small businesses. The E-Series is suited to mid-market businesses. The A-Series is designed for large deployments.
Types of APs:
The V-Series offers a standalone AP. The E-Series offers a standalone AP, and a suite of APs that can be
standalone or managed.
The A-Series offers some APs that are managed only and some that
can be standalone or managed.

10 Rev. 10.31
HPs wireless solutions are divided into the V, E, and A-Series based on the size of business for which each solution is suited
The V-Series is designed to meet the needs of small businesses. The E-Series is suited to mid-market businesses. The A-Series is designed for large deployments.
The V-Series offers a standalone AP. The E-Series also offers a standalone AP, and a suite of APs that can be standalone or managed. The A-Series offers some APs that are managed only and some that can be standalone or managed.
Rev. 10.31
11 11
11 12
Rev. 10.31
HP A-Series Wireless Overview

Module 12
Objectives
This module introduces you to the HP A-Series access points (APs), Wireless LAN (WLAN) access controllers, and WLAN access controller modules. After completing this module, you should be able to:

List the products that compose the HP A-Series wireless solutions Describe the basic functionality of:
HP A-Series APs HP A-Series WLAN access controllers HP A-Series WLAN access controller modules
Rev. 10.31
12 1
A-Series APs
A-Series APs
A-Series APs A-WA2x00 AP Series A9100 AP Series A9500 AP Series A7700 AP Series A8700 AP Series Antennas Supported by A-Series APs WLAN Access Controllers and Modules
Rev. 10.31
This section outlines the basic features of the HP A-Series APs.
12 2
Rev. 10.31
A-WA2x00 AP Series
A-WA2x00 AP Series
A-WA2620E A-WA2620
2 radios, which support
802.11a/b/g/n
Antennas:
A-WA2620E: 6 external antennas A-WA2620: 6 internal with 3 external connectors
Fit mode Single 10/100/1000 port PoE-PD or external power adapter Plenum rated: A-WA2620E
Rev. 10.31
The A-WA2x00 AP Series includes 802.1 1a/b/g and 802.1 1a/b/g/n single- and dual-radio APs. All radios are dual-band. These APs support up to 64 users per radio and can be deployed in branch offices, enterprise headquarters, and campus networks. The A-WA2x00 APs are fit APs. They can be controlled by any of the WLAN access controllers described later in this module. The A-WA2620E AP includes the following:

Two radios, which support 802.1 1a/b/g/n Six external 2dBi dual-frequency omnidirectional antennas One 10/100/1000 port Power over Ethernet Powered Device (PoE-PD) or external power adapter Plenum rated
APs that are plenum rated can be installed in plenum spaces (or ventilation areas). The A-WA2620 AP includes the following:

Two radios, which support 802.1 1a/b/g/n Six 2dBi dual-frequency omnidirectional internal antennas One 10/100/1000 port PoE-PD or external power adapter
12 3
Rev. 10.31
The A-WA 2620 provides connectors for three optional external antennas for a single band.
Note The antennas supported by each AP are listed at the end of the section.
12 4
Rev. 10.31
A-WA2x00 AP Series (Cont.)

A-WA2612 A-WA2610
Antennas:
1 radio, which supports
802.11a/b/g/n
Fit mode 1 10/100/1000 port PoE-PD or external power
A-WA2612: 3 internal antennas A-WA2610: 3 external antennas
adapter Plenum rated: A-WA2610
Rev. 10.31
The A- WA2612 AP includes the following:

One radio, which supports 802.1 1a/b/g/n Three internal omnidirectional antennas One 10/100/1000 port PoE-PD or external power adapter One radio, which supports 802.1 1a/b/g/n Three external omnidirectional antennas One 10/100/1000 port PoE-PD or external power adapter Plenum rated
The A WA2610 AP includes the following:

Rev. 10.31
12 5

A-WA2220 A-WA2110
A-WA2220: 2 radios, which
support 802.11a/b/g
A-WA2110:1 radio, which
supports 802.11a/b/g Fit mode 2 external antennas Controlled management 1 10/100 port PoE-PD or external power adapter
Rev. 10.31
The A-WA2220 AP provides the following:

Two radios, which support 802.1 1a/b/g Two external omnidirectional antennas One 10/100 port PoE-PD or external power adapter One radio 802.1 1a/b/g Two external omnidirectional antennas One 10/100 port PoE-PD or external power adapter
The A WA21 AP includes the following: 10

12 6
Rev. 10.31
A9500 AP Series
A9500 AP Series
A9552
2 radios, which support 802.11a/b/g/n 6 internal antennas 3 connectors for external antennas 1 10/100/1000 port PoE-PD or external power adapter Fat version
Rev. 10.31
The A9500 AP Series includes the A9552 AP. This AP can be deployed in any environment, including factories, warehouses, retail stores, and health clinics.

The A9552 AP provides the following: Two radios, which support 802.1 1a/b/g/n 6 internal antennas Three connectors for external antennas One 10/100/1000 port PoE-PD or external power supply
This AP ships in fat mode but can be converted to fit mode. (This conversion requires different AP software.) In fit mode, the A9552 AP can be controlled by any of the WLAN access controllers described later in this module.
Rev. 10.31
12 7
A9100 AP Series
A9100 AP Series
A9152
802.11a/b/g/n
3 internal antennas 1 10/100/1000 port PoE-PD or external power adapter Fat version
Rev. 10.31
The A9100 AP Series includes the A9152 AP, which is designed to meet the wireless requirements of any environment, including offices, schools, factories, warehouses, retail spaces, and clinics. This AP provides the following:

One radio, which supports 802.1 1a/b/g/n Three internal antennas One 10/100/1000 port PoE-PD or external power supply
This AP ships in fat mode but can be converted to fit mode. (This conversion requires different AP software.) In fit mode, the A9152 AP can be controlled by any of the WLAN access controllers described later in this module.
12 8
Rev. 10.31
A8700 AP Series
A8700 AP Series
A8760
2 radios, which support
802.11a/b/g
Two external antennas 1 10/100 port PoE-PD or external power adapter Fat mode PoE injector in the box
Rev. 10.31
The A8700 AP Series includes the A8760 AP. A good option for organizations that do not require 802.1 this AP provides the following: 1n,

Two radios, which support 802.1 1a/b/g Two external antennas One 10/100port PoE-PD or external power supply
It also ships with a PoE injector, so it can be powered through PoE without a PoEenabled switch. This AP ships in fat mode but can be converted to fit mode. (This conversion requires different AP software.) In fit mode, the A8760 AP can be controlled by any of the WLAN access controllers described later in this module.
Rev. 10.31
12 9
A7700 AP Series
A7700 AP Series
A7760
802.11a/b/g
Two external antennas 1 10/100 port PoE-PD or external power adapter Fat mode PoE injector in the box
10
Rev. 10.31
The A7700 AP Series includes the A7760 AP, an AP that can be installed in areas where 802.1 coverage is not required. It is small and easy to deploy. Because a 1n PoE injector is shipped in the box, it can be powered by PoE without a PoE-capable This AP also provides:

One radio, which supports 802.1 1a/b/g Two external dual-band 2.4/5.15GHz omnidirectional antennas One 10/100 port PoE-PD or external power adapter
The A7760 AP ships in fat mode but can be converted to fit mode. (This conversion requires different AP software.) When running in fit mode, it can be controlled by any of the WLAN access controllers described later in this module.
12 10
Rev. 10.31
Antennas Supported by A-Series APs

Antennas Supported by A-Series APs
3/4 dBi Dual Band Ceiling Mount Omni N-Type (female) Indoor A-WA2620E A-WA2620 A-WA2612 A-WA2610 A-WA2220 A-WA21 10 A9552 A9152 A8760 A7760 4/6 dBi Dual Band Hallway N-Type (female) Indoor 6/8 dBi Dual Band Omni N-Type (female) Indoor/outdoor 8/10 dBi Dual Band Panel N-Type (female) Indoor/outdoor 18/20 dBi Dual Band Panel N-Type (female) Indoor/outdoor
* To install these antennas with these APs, you need the R-SMA to SMA 6-inch adapter cable and an extension cable.
1 1 Rev. 10.31
This slide and the next show the antennas supported by A-Series APs. Each slide lists the type of connector on the antennasuch as N-Type (female)and notes if the antenna can be installed indoor, outdoor, or both.
3/4 dBi Dual Band Ceiling Mount Omni Antennadesigned for close-range connections and ceiling installations 4/6 dBi Dual Band Hallway Antennaintended for mid-range hallway installations 6/8 dBi Dual Band Omni Antennadesigned for mid-range point-to-multipoint installations 8/10 dBi Dual Band Panel Antennadesigned for mid-range point-to-multipoint installations 18/20 dBi Dual Band Panel Antennadesigned for long-range point-to-point installations R-SMA to SMA 6-inch adapter cable (part number JD905A), which enables you to connect the extension cable to the AP
When you install these antennas, you must use:
Rev. 10.31
12 11
Appropriate extension cable:
Ultra Low Loss 6 Foot Antenna Cable (JD902A) Ultra Low Loss 20-Foot Antenna Cable (JD903A) Ultra Low Loss 50-Foot Antenna Cable (JD904A)
Antenna cables introduce loss in the radio frequency signal. You should use the shortest cable you possibly can.
Note The antennas may not be used with all channels in all countries. Review the documentation for each AP you plan on installing with an antenna.
12 12
Rev. 10.31
Antennas Supported by A-Series APs (Cont.)

Antennas Supported by A-Series APs (Cont.)
2/3 dBi Dual Band 3 Element Rubber Duck RSMA (male) Indoor A-WA2620E A-WA2620 A-WA2612 A-WA2610 A-WA2220 A-WA21 10 A9552 A9152 A8760 A7760 2.5/4 dBi Dual Band 3 Element MIMO RSMA (male) Indoor 2.5/4 dBi Dual Band 6 Element MIMO RSMA (male) Indoor
*No external adapters or cables are required to install these antennas with these APs.
12 Rev. 10.31
This slide and the previous one show the antennas supported by A-Series APs. Each slide lists the type of connector on the antennasuch as N-Type (female) or RSMA (male)and notes if the antenna can be installed indoor, outdoor, or both. The antennas listed on this slide are designed to help customers improve their RF coverage. They do not require either an adapter cable or an extension cable.

2/3 dBi Dual Band 3 Element Rubber Duck Antenna 2.5/4 dBi Dual Band 3 Element MIMO Antenna 2.5/4 dBi Dual Band 6 Element MIMO Antenna
Rev. 10.31
12 13
A-Series WLAN Access Controllers

A-Series WLAN Access Controllers
A-Series Wireless Access Points (APs) A-Series WLAN Access Controllers
A3000G Wireless Switch Series

A3000-24G-PoE+ A3000-10G-PoE+ A3000-8G-PoE+ A-WX5004 A-WX5002
A-WX WLAN Controllers
A-Series Controller Modules
A5800 Access Controller Module for 32-64 APs A5800 Access Controller Module for 64-256 APs
13
Rev. 10.31
This section outlines the basic features of the A-Series WLAN access controllers.
12 14
Rev. 10.31

A3000-24G-PoE+
Wireless switch Up to 48 APs 20 10/100/1000 ports 4 dual-personality ports Web-based, CLI, and SNMP
management
PoE/PoE+
14
Rev. 10.31
The A3000G Wireless Switch Series provide centralized management of 802.1 1a/b/g/n wireless networks. The A3000-24G-PoE+ is designed for use in branch offices and campus networks. In addition to providing central management and control of APs, it functions as a switch, providing 10/100/1000 ports for network connectivity. The A3000-24G-PoE+ is a wireless switch, which includes the following:
Ability to control up to 48 APs A 24-AP license is included, and licenses can be added in 12-AP increments. 20 10/100/1000 ports Four dual-personality ports for 10/100/1000 connections or small form factor port (SFP) transceivers PoE and PoE+
Up to 30W per port Total 370W PoE
Rev. 10.31
12 15
Customers have several options for managing the WX WLAN access controllers, (including the A3000-24G-PoE+):
Web browser interface that can be accessed by using either:
Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) HTTP over Secure Socket Layer (HTTPS) Serial connection Telnet session Remote Secure Shell (SSH) v2 session
Command line interface (CLI) that can be accessed through:
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) v1 or v2
12 16
Rev. 10.31
A3000G Wireless Switch Series (Cont.)

A3000-10G-PoE+
Wireless switch Up to 24 APs 8 10/100/1000 ports 2 SFP ports Web-based, CLI, and SNMP
management
PoE/PoE+
15
Rev. 10.31
The A3000-10G-PoE+ is a wireless switch, which includes the following:
Ability to control up to 24 APs. A 12-AP license is included, and licenses can be added in 12-AP increments. Eight 10/100/1000 ports Two SFP ports Web-based, CLI, or SNMP management PoE and PoE+
Rev. 10.31
12 17

A3000-8G-PoE+
Wireless switch Up to 8 APs 8 10/100/1000 ports Web-based, CLI, and SNMP
management PoE/PoE+
16
Rev. 10.31
The A3000-8G-PoE+ is a wireless switch, which includes the following:

Ability to control up to eight APs (license is included) Eight 10/100/1000 ports Web-based, CLI, or SNMP management PoE and PoE+
12 18
Rev. 10.31

A-WX5004
Wireless switch Up to 256 APs 4 dual-personality ports Web-based, CLI, and SNMP
management
17
Rev. 10.31
The A-WX5004 is a wireless switch, which includes the following:
Ability to control up to 256 APs A 64-AP license is included, and licenses can be added in 32-AP increments. Four dual-personality ports for 10/100/1000 connections or SFP transceivers Web-based, CLI, or SNMP management
Rev. 10.31
12 19
A-WX WLAN Controllers (Cont.)
A-WX WLAN Controllers (Cont.)

A-WX5002
Wireless switch Up to 64 APs 2 dual-personality ports Web-based, CLI, and SNMP
management
18
Rev. 10.31
The A-WX5002 is a wireless switch, which includes the following:
Ability to control up to 64 APs A 32-AP license is included, and another 32-AP license can be added. Two dual-personality ports for 10/100/1000 connections or SFP transceivers Web-based, CLI, or SNMP management
12 20
Rev. 10.31

A5800 Access Controller Module for 32-64 APs

Up to 64 APs 1 10/100 management port 2 internal 1-GbE Ethernet switch interfaces Web-based, CLI, and SNMP management
A5800 Access Controller Module for 64-256 APs

19
Up to 256 APs 1 10/100/1000 management port Compact flash card slot 1 internal 10-GbE Ethernet switch interface Web-based, CLI, and SNMP management
Rev. 10.31
Rather than purchase a wireless switch, customers may want to purchase a WLAN access controller module that can be installed into their A5800 Switch chassis. The A5800 Access Controller Module for 32-64 APs can be installed in A5800-48G with 2 Slots, A5800-48G-PoE, A5800-48G, A5800-24G-PoE, A5800-24G, and A5800-24G-SFP switches. This module offers the following:
Ability to control up to 64 APs A 32-AP license is included, and licenses can be added in 32-AP increments. One 10/100 out-of-band Ethernet management port Two internal 1-GbE Ethernet switch interfaces Web-based, CLI, or SNMP management
The module uses the two internal Ethernet switch interfaces to communicate with the switch. The A5800 Access Controller Module for 64-256 APs can be installed in an A580048G with 2 Slots switch. This module offers the following:
Ability to control up to 256 APs A 64-AP license is included, and licenses can be added in 32-AP increments. One 10/100/1000 out-of-band Ethernet management port Compact flash card slot, with one Compact Flash card included when the module is shipped
12 21
Rev. 10.31
10-GbE Ethernet switch interface Web-based, CLI, or SNMP management
The module uses the internal Ethernet switch interface to communicate with the switch.
12 22
Rev. 10.31
Summary
Summary
APs
Fit or fat Single- and dual-radio models 802.11 a/b/g/n Antennas
WLAN controllers
Wireless switches Modules
20
Rev. 10.31
This module has introduced you to the A-Series wireless solutions. You have learned about the APs that function as fit APs and those that function as either fit or fat. You also learned that some APs have a single radio and others have two radios, and many support external antennas. In addition, you learned that customers can purchase WLAN access controllers to control multiple fit APs. These WLAN access controllers are available as wireless switches or as access controller modules, which are installed in a switch.
Rev. 10.31
12 23
12 24
Rev. 10.31
HP A-Series Wireless Hardware

Module 13
Objectives
This module introduces you to the HP A-Series wireless hardware components, providing you with the information you need to support these devices. After completing this module, you should be able to:

Identify HP A-Series wireless device LEDs and use them to troubleshoot problems Reset the HP A-Series wireless APs to factory default settings
Rev. 10.31
13 1
LEDs on A-Series Wireless Devices

Types of AP LEDs Example AP LEDs Types of Controller LEDs Example Controller LEDs
AP Hardware Reset Modules and Transceivers for Controllers
Rev. 10.31
This section explains how to interpret the LEDs on HP A-Series wireless devices. For a complete explanation of LEDs, refer to the wireless devices Installation Manual.
13 2
Rev. 10.31
Types of AP LEDs
Types of AP LEDs
LED Type Power Usage Indicates if the AP is receiving power On or off (green) Self-test (amber blinking)* Hardware failure (solid amber)* Indicates status of radio: On or off Normal operation or error Receiving or sending data Indicates status of Ethernet port: Active connection Connection speed Receiving or sending data Labels Power Symbol
Radio
Radio 2.4G or 5G 1 or 1 1a 1b/g 10/100M and 1000M Link/Activity or Link LAN
Ethernet port
* A9552 AP and A8760 AP

4 Rev. 10.31
Each A-Series AP has three types of LEDs:
Power LED indicates whether or not the AP is receiving power. If the Power LED is on (typically green), the AP has normal power. If the LED is off or blinking, the AP does not have a good power connection, or the connection is faulty. The Power LED on the A9552 AP will also blink amber while the AP performs its self-test when it boots. If the CPU or system fails in some way, the Power LED will display solid amber. Reboot the AP at least twice to verify the condition persists. If it does, you may need to replace the AP. The Power LED on the A8760 1 1a/b/g PoE AP also displays amber during the boot process. If this LED remains amber after it has completed the reboot process, a hardware failure has occurred.
Radio LEDs indicates if a radio is on or off, if it is operating normally, and if it is receiving or sending data. For fit APs, the radio LEDs will be on only after the AP receives its configuration from the WLAN access controller and this configuration enables the radio. If an AP has only one radio, this LED may be labeled Radio. If an AP has two 802.1 radios, it will have two radio LEDs: one labeled 2.4G 1n and one labeled 5G.
Rev. 10.31
13 3
If the 2.4G LED is on, it shows that a radio is working in this band. If the LED is off, the radio is not initialized or is faulty. If the LED is blinking slowly, the radio link is working normally. If the LED is blinking rapidly, data is being transmitted or received. If the 5GHz LED is on, a radio is working normally in this band. If the LED is off, the radio is not initialized or is faulty. If the LED is blinking slowly, the radio is working normally. If the LED is blinking rapidly, data is being transmitted or received.
If an AP has one 802.1 radio and one 802.1 1a 1b/g radio, it will have two radio LEDs: one labeled 1 and one labeled 1 1a 1b/g.
The 1 LED indicates that a radio is operating in 802.1 5.0 GHz. If the 1a 1a LED is flashing, data is being transmitted or received. The 1 1b/g LED indicates that a radio is operating in 802.1 1b/g 2.4 GHz. If the LED is flashing, data is being transmitted or received.
An AP might also have two radio LEDs labeled 1 and 1 1a 1bg, if it has one radio that supports 802.1 1a/b/g.
Ethernet Port LEDThe Ethernet port LEDs indicate if a valid Ethernet connection has been established, and show the connection speed (such as 10/100 Mbps or 1000 Mbps) and the amount of activity on that connection. Some APs have two Ethernet port LEDs, which are labeled 10/100M and 1000M. These LEDs may be at the corners of the Ethernet port or in line with the other AP LEDs. Other APs have one Ethernet port that is labeled:
Link/Activity or Link LAN
In general, if the LED is on, the Ethernet port has a valid connection. If the LED is off, the Ethernet port is not connected, or the connection is faulty. If the LED is blinking, data is being transmitted or received.
13 4
Rev. 10.31
AP LEDs
AP LEDs
Power 2.4G 5G Link/Activity
A-WA2620
Rev. 10.31
Rather than examine the LEDs on all of the APs in the A-Series, this course provides an example AP to show you how to identify and interpret AP LEDs. The A-WA2620 AP has four LEDs: Power, 2.4G, 5G, and Link/Activity LEDs. Because this AP has a 2.4G LED and a 5G LED, you know it has 802.1n radios. In addition, you can see the AP has only one Ethernet port LED, labeled Link/Activity, to correspond to its one 10/100/1000 port. The LEDs provide the following information:
LED Power State On Off or blinking On Off Blinking slowly Blinking rapidly On Off Blinking slowly Blinking rapidly On Off Blinking Rev. 10.31 Description The AP is on and receiving adequate power. The AP is off, the power supply is not well connected, or the AP is not receiving enough power. The radio is on. The radio is not initialized or is faulty. The radio is working normally to provide a wireless network in the 2.4GHz band. Data is being transmitted or received. The radio is on. The radio is not initialized or is faulty. The radio is working normally to provide a wireless network in the 5GHz band. Data is being transmitted or received. The Ethernet port is connected to another device and has established a valid Ethernet connection. The Ethernet interface is not connected to another device. Data is being transmitted or received.
2.4GHz
5GHz
Link/Activity
13 5
Types of Controller LEDs

Types of Controller LEDs
LED Type Power System or RUN PoE/PoE+ RPS Port Usage Indicates the status of the power supply Indicates the working status of the system Indicates the controller supports power over Ethernet (PoE)/PoE+ and shows its status Indicates if a redundant power supply (RPS) is attached and shows it status Indicates status of Ethernet port: Active connection Connection speed Receiving or sending data Indicates a module is installed and shows its status Reports status of Compact Flash
Module CF
6 Rev. 10.31
The A-Series WLAN access controllers have LEDs that convey the following information. Not all controllers have all LEDs.

Power LEDindicates if the power supply is working correctly. System or RUN LEDsreports on the general status of system. Some WLAN access controllers have one System LED while others have both a System LED and a System Alarm LED. On the A5800 Wireless Access Controller Modules, the system LED is called RUN. Port LEDsindicate the status of switch ports. Ethernet portsThe Activity LED shows whether data is being transmitted or received. The Link LED shows whether the port is connected. Dual-personality portsThe 1000M LED shows whether the dualpersonality port is connected and its status. The 10/100M LED shows whether the dual-personality port is connected and its status. ManagementIndicates the status of the management port.
Module Slot LEDshows the status of any modules that are installed in the controller. RPS LEDshows whether the redundant power system (RPS) is functioning normally.
Rev. 10.31
13 6
Mode LED indicates the status of PoE/PoE+. For example, this LED may indicate that, the ports cannot provide PoE/PoE+ because an over-temperature, over-voltage, or under-voltage situation has caused the PoE/PoE+ system to shut down. CF LEDThe CF LED shows the status of the Compact Flash (CF).
Rev. 10.31
13 7
Wireless Unified LAN Controller A-WX5004 LEDs

DualPersonality 1000M 10/100M Activity System Power 1
DualPersonality 10/100M
10/100M Link
Module
Power 2
Rev. 10.31
The Wireless Unified LAN Controller A-WX5004 has a System LED and two Power LEDs (for its two power modules). In addition, the controller has port LEDs for its four dual-personality ports, which allow customers to use either 10/100/1000 ports or SFP ports. (Dual-personality ports are also referred to as combo ports.) Each dualpersonality pair has two LEDs: one to indicate the status of 1000 Mbps connections and one to indicate the status of 10/100 Mbps connections. This controller also has an out-of-band management port. When you connect your management workstation to this port using a crossover Ethernet cable, two LEDs report the status of your management session. Finally, the controller has a module slot and a corresponding LED to show the status of this module. The LEDs provide the following information:
LED
Dual-personality 1000M Dual-personality 10/100M Management port 10/100 Activity Management port 10/100 Link
State
Solid green Blinking green Off Solid yellow Blinking yellow Off Blinking yellow Off Solid green Off
Description
The port is connected at 1000 Mbps. The port is transmitting or receiving data at 1000 Mbps. The port is not connected at 1000 Mbps. The port is connected at 10/100 Mbps. The port is transmitting or receiving data at 10/100 Mbps. The port is not connected at 10/100 Mbps. The port is transmitting or receiving data. No data is being transmitted or received. The port is connected. The port is not connected. Rev. 10.31
13 8
System
Solid green Slowly blinking green Solid yellow Off Solid green Off Solid green Solid yellow Off
The system is performing a power-on self test (POST) or is downloading software. The system is working normally. The POST has failed or another fatal error has been detected in the system. The power is not connected. A module is present in the slot. A module is not present in the slot. The power supply is working normally. The power supply is faulty. No power supply is installed in the slot.
Module Power (2)
Rev. 10.31
13 9

DualPersonality 1000M 10/100M Activity System Power 1
DualPersonality 10/100M
10/100M Link
System Alarm
Power 2
Rev. 10.31
The Wireless Unified LAN Controller A-WX5002 has both a System LED and a System Alarm LED. Like the A-WX5004, this controller has two Power LEDs and LEDs for dual-personality ports (although the A-WX5002 has only two dual-personality ports). This controller also has an out-of-band management port. When you connect your management workstation to this port using a crossover Ethernet cable, two LEDs report the status of your management session. The LEDs provide the following information:
LED
Dual-personality 1000M Dual-personality 10/100M Management port 10/100 Link Management port 10/100 Activity System System alarm Power supply (2)
State
Solid green Blinking green Off Solid yellow Blinking yellow Off Solid green Off Blinking yellow Off Blinking green Solid on or off Off Blinking red Solid green Off
Description
The port is connected at 1000 Mbps. The port is transmitting or receiving data at 1000 Mbps. The port is not connected at 1000 Mbps. The port is connected at 10/100 Mbps. The port is transmitting or receiving data at 10/100 Mbps. The port is not connected at 10/100 Mbps. The port is connected. The port is not connected. The port is transmitting or receiving data. No data is being transmitted or received. The system is running normally. The system is not running normally. The system is running normally. The system is not running normally. The power supply is working normally. No power supply is installed in the slot. Rev. 10.31
13 10
Wireless Unified LAN Controller A3000-24G-PoE+ LEDs
Wireless Unified LAN Controller A300024G-PoE+ LEDs
10/100/1000 Ports
DualPersonality Ports
PWR RPS MOD1 MOD2 Mode
Rev. 10.31
The Wireless Unified LAN Controller A3000-24G-PoE+ has one LED that the AWX5002 and A-WX5004 do not have: The A3000-24G-PoE+ has an RPS LED to report the status of an attached Redundant Power Supply (RPS). In addition, the LEDs for the controllers switch ports are located at the top of the top row of ports. The left LED is for the port on the bottom-row, and the right LED is for the port on the top row. This controllers LEDs provide the following information:
LED
10/100/1000 ports
State
Solid green Blinking green Solid yellow Rapidly blinking yellow Slowly blinking yellow Off
Description
A 1000 Mbps link is present on the port. The port is transmitting or receiving data at 1000 Mbps. A 10/100 Mbps link is present on the port. The port is transmitting or receiving data at 10/100 Mbps. The port failed the POST. No link is present on the port.
Rev. 10.31
13 11
Dualpersonality ports
Mode (PoE/PoE+)
Solid green Blinking green Solid yellow Rapidly blinking yellow Slowly blinking yellow Off Solid green Blinking green Solid yellow
A 1000 Mbps link is present on the port. The port is transmitting or receiving data at 1000 Mbps. A 100 Mbps link is present on the port. The port is transmitting or receiving data at 100 Mbps. The port failed the POST. No link is present on the port. PoE/PoE+ is operating normally. PoE/PoE+ is not available because the maximum power output has been reached, or the remaining power is insufficient. The ports cannot provide PoE/PoE+ because the over-temperature, overvoltage, or under-voltage protection system shut down the PoE/PoE+ system. At least one port failed the POST. If the PoE board is in position, the failure may be caused by a UART communication failure or other self-test error. PoE/PoE+ is not connected. A module is present in the slot. The slot does not support the installed module. The module is transmitting or receiving data. The module failed the POST. No module is present, or it is not connected. Both AC and DC inputs are normal. The AC input is abnormal, or no AC is present. No DC power is present. The system is performing a power-on self test (POST) or downloading software. The system is working normally. The system failed the POST or has detected a serious fault. At least one port has failed the POST, or the system detected a minor fault. No AC power is present.
Blinking yellow
MOD1 and MOD2
RPS (redundant power system) Power supply
Off Solid green Solid yellow Blinking green Blinking yellow Off Solid green Solid yellow Off Solid green Blinking green Solid red Sold yellow Off
13 12
Rev. 10.31
Wireless Unified LAN Controllers A3000-10G-PoE+ and A30008GPoE+ LEDs
Wireless Unified LAN Controllers A300010G-PoE+ and A3000-8G-PoE+ LEDs
10/100/1000 ports
SFP Ports
Mode (PoE/PoE+)
Power
10
Rev. 10.31
The Wireless Unified LAN Controllers A3000-10G-PoE+ and A3000-8G-PoE+ have the same basic types of LEDs. For example, they have port LEDs: the A3000-10GPoE+ has LEDs for 10/100/1000 ports and for SFP ports. The A3000-8G-PoE+ has LEDs for 10/100/1000 ports only. On both models, the LEDs for 10/100/1000 ports are at the top of the top row of ports. The left LED is for the bottom-row port, and the right LED is for the top-row port. These controllers also have a Mode LED to indicate the status of PoE/PoE+ and a Power LED to indicate the status of the power supply. The LEDs provide the following information:
LED
10/100/1000 ports
State
Solid green Blinking green Solid yellow Rapidly blinking yellow Slowly blinking yellow Off
Description
A 1000 Mbps link is present on the port. The port is transmitting or receiving data at 1000 Mbps. A 10/100 Mbps link is present on the port. The port is transmitting or receiving data at 10/100 Mbps. The port failed the POST. No link is present on the port.
Rev. 10.31
13 13
SFP ports (A3000-10GPoE+)
Mode (PoE/PoE+)
Solid green Blinking green Solid yellow Rapidly blinking yellow Slowly blinking yellow Off Solid green Blinking green Solid yellow
A 1000 Mbps link is present on the port. The port is transmitting or receiving data at 1000 Mbps. A 100 Mbps link is present on the port. The port is transmitting or receiving data at 100 Mbps. The port failed the POST. No link is present on the port. PoE/PoE+ is operating normally PoE/PoE+ is not available because the maximum power output has been reached, or the remaining power is insufficient. The ports cannot provide PoE/PoE+ because the over-temperature, overvoltage, or under-voltage protection system shut down the PoE/PoE+ system. At least one port failed the POST. If the PoE board is in position, the failure may be caused by a UART communication failure or other self-test error. PoE/PoE+ is not connected. The system is performing a power-on self test (POST) or downloading software. The system is working normally. The system failed the POST or has detected a serious fault. At least one port has failed the POST, or the system detected a minor fault. No AC power is present.
Blinking yellow
Power
Off Solid green Blinking green Solid red Sold yellow Off
13 14
Rev. 10.31
LEDs on the A5800 Wireless Access Controller Modules
LEDs on the A5800 Wireless Access Controller Modules

The A5800 for 32-64 APs has the four LEDs shown below. The A5800 for 64-256 APs has two LEDs: PWR and management port LED.

1 1 Rev. 10.31
PWR RUN Management CFS
The A5800 WLAN Access Controller Module for 32-64 APs has the following LEDs:
LED
PWR
State
Solid green Solid red Off Slowly flashing green Rapidly flashing green Off
Description
The power system is operating normally. The power system has failed. No power is being supplied to the module. The module is operating normally. The module is booting/loading software.
RUN
The system has been reset. The RUN LED will begin to blink rapidly
when the bootup process starts.
The system has experienced a problem and is not operating properly.

CFS Solid green Flashing green Off Solid green Flashing green Sold yellow Flashing yellow Off Rev. 10.31 A compact flash (CF) card is inserted into the module. The card is operating normally, but no write or read operation is being performed. A CF card is inserted into the module. The card is operating normally, and a write or read operation is being performed. A CF card is not inserted into the module. The port operates at a rate of 1000 Mbps; no data is being sent or received on the port. The port operates at a rate of 1000 Mbps and is sending and receiving data. The port operates at a rate of 10/100 Mbps; no data is being sent or received on the port. The port operates at a rate of 10/100 Mbps and is sending and receiving data. There is no management connection.
Management
13 15
The A5800 WLAN Access Controller Module for 64-256 APs has only two LEDs: a PWR LED and an LED for the management port.
13 16
Rev. 10.31
Installing the A5800 Wireless Access Controller Modules

Installing the A5800 Wireless Access Controller Modules
The A5800 for 32-64 APs is installed in the OAP slot (#2 below). The A5800 for 64-256 APs is installed in the module (interface) slot.
12
Rev. 10.31
The A5800 Wireless Access Controller Module for 32-64 APs can be installed in an A5800-48G with 2 Slots switch. This module is installed on the switchs back panel in the open OAP slot, as shown above. To install this module, complete the following steps: 1. Wear an ESD-preventive wrist strap and make sure that the ESD-preventive wrist strap is properly grounded. 2. Loosen the screws on the OAP filler panel with a Phillips screwdriver and then remove it from the slot. (Keep this panel for future use.) 3. Take the module out of the package and insert it in the switch, using one of the following orientations: Position the ejector levers at the bottom Position the ejector levers at the bottom (reversely)
The module can be installed in either way. Select the orientation that works best for your switch. 4. Push the module slowly along the guide rails and then push the ejector levers inward to lock the module in position.
Rev. 10.31
13 17
5. Use a Philips screwdriver to fasten the screws on the module clockwise until the A5800 Wireless Access Controller Module for 32-64 APs is fixed into the chassis. The A5800 Wireless Access Controller Module for 64-256 APs can be installed in the following switches:

A5800-48G with 2 Slots A5800-48G-PoE A5800-48G A5800-24G-PoE A5800-24G A5800-24G-SFP
The module is installed in the open module (or interface) slot on the back panel of these switches, as shown below.
Follow the same basic steps to install this module (as you do the LSWM1WCM10 module), except always install this module with the ejector levers at the bottom.
13 18
Rev. 10.31
Problem: Device Will Not Power On

Problem: Device Will Not Power On
Device is supposed to be powered by PoE:
Ensure Ethernet cable is tightly seated in both endpoints (such as the
AP and PoE injector/PoE-enabled switch).

Ensure switch is not oversubscribed. Ensure PoE injector is connected to a good power supply. Ensure cable is good.
Device is supposed to be powered by adapter:

Ensure both sides of adapter are tightly seated. Ensure customer is using the correct AC adapter. Check power source.
13
Rev. 10.31
LEDs are designed to help you identify and solve problems when they occur. This slide provides a checklist of items you should check if you connect an AP or WLAN access controller to a power source and it does not power on.
Rev. 10.31
13 19
Problem: Ethernet Port Is Not Functioning Properly

Problem: Ethernet Port Is Not Functioning Properly
LED indicates an Ethernet connection is not established:
Ensure Ethernet cable is tightly seated in both endpoint devices. Ensure cable is not faulty. Ensure switch port is enabled.
LED indicates port is not operating at correct speed:

Ensure both devices support the higher speed.
Device does not send or receive traffic from the port:

Ensure AP received a valid IP address in the correct VLAN. Check VLAN assignment on the port.
14
Rev. 10.31
If you connect a new AP or WLAN access controller to the network and the wireless devices Ethernet port LED indicates a valid connection is not established, you should check the seemingly obvious causes first. The checklist in the slide serves as a starting point. If the port is not transmitting data at the speed you expect, make sure both endpoint devices support the higher speed. If the two devices are having difficulty autonegotiating a speed, you may want to manually configure the two devices to support the higher speed. Check the configuration guides for both devices. If a wireless device is not sending or receiving data, make sure that it has been assigned a valid IP address in the correct VLAN or subnet. You may need to verify the address and VLAN assignment on the devices switch port with the customer.
13 20
Rev. 10.31
AP Hardware Reset
AP Hardware Reset
A-Series Wireless LEDs AP Hardware Reset Modules and Transceivers for Controllers
15
Rev. 10.31
All of the APs, except the A-WA21 AP, have a Reset button, which you can use to 10 return the AP to factory default settings. However, the controllers and modules do not have such a button. They are returned to factory default settings using a software reset, which will be covered in the next module in this course.
Rev. 10.31
13 21
Hardware Reset
Hardware Reset
Reset Button
A-WA2620E Reset Button
A-WA2610
16 Rev. 10.31
To reset an AP, apply power to it and then press and hold the Reset button for 20 seconds. After the AP reboots, it will be using factory default settings.
13 22
Rev. 10.31
Modules and Transceivers for Controllers

Modules and Transceivers for Controllers
A-Series Wireless LEDs AP Hardware Reset Modules and Transceivers for Controllers
17
Rev. 10.31
The next section lists the modules supported by the controllers.
Rev. 10.31
13 23
Modules and Power Supplies

Modules and Power Supplies
WLAN Access Controller A3000-24G-PoE Modules A-WX5004 Modules Power supplies Modules HP 1-Port 10-Gig Mod (XFP) E4200G Module HP 1-Port 10-Gig Mod (XFP) E4200G Module HP A5500 150WAC Power Supply HP A5500 150WDC Power Supply
18
Rev. 10.31
Two WLAN access controllers have expansion slots: the A3000-24G-PoE and AWX5004. You can install modules that support high-speed links. The A-WX5004 also supports two power supplies.
13 24
Rev. 10.31
10GbE and Gigabit Transceivers

10GbE and Gigabit Transceivers
A-WX5004 A-WX5002 A300024G-PoE+ A300010G-PoE+
HP X135 10G XENPAK SC SR HP X135 10G XENPAK SC LR HP X130 10G XFP LC SR HP X130 10G XFP SC LR HP X125 1G SFP RJ45 T HP X125 1G SFP LC SX HP X120 1G SFP LC LX HP X120 1G SFP LC BX 10-U HP X120 1G SFP LC BX 10-D
19
Rev. 10.31
The A-WX5004, A-WX5002, A3000-24G-PoE+, and A3000-10G-PoE+ support Gigabit Ethernet transceivers. The A3000-24G-PoE+ also supports 10GbE transceivers.
Rev. 10.31
13 25

A-WX5004 A-WX5002 A300024G-PoE+ A300010G-PoE+
HP X1 100M SFP LC BX 10-U 15 HP X1 100M SFP LC BX 10-D 15 HP X1 100M SFP LC FX 15 HP X1 100M SFP LC LX 10
20
Rev. 10.31
The A3000-24G-PoE+ and A3000-10G-PoE+ also support Fast Ethernet transceivers.
13 26
Rev. 10.31
Summary
Summary
LEDs
APs WLAN Access controllers
Hardware reset Modules and transceivers
21
Rev. 10.31
In this module, you learned about the types of LEDs available on A-Series APs and WLAN access controllers. You also learned how to install the A5800 Wireless Access Controller Modules and how to perform a hardware reset on APs. Finally, you learned that two of the WLAN access controllers support expansion modules and most of the WLAN access controllers support SFP transceivers.
Rev. 10.31
13 27
13 28
Rev. 10.31
Basic Configuration of HP A-Series Wireless Products

Module 14
Objectives
This module introduces you to the HP A-Series wireless basic configuration functions that you should be familiar with to provide support to A-Series wireless customers. After completing this module, you should be able to:
List the management interfaces available on each HP A-Series wireless device and explain when you might choose one over another Explain how to establish a management session with each A-Series wireless device and begin using the appropriate interface Navigate through and perform fundamental management tasks within the CLI or Web browser interface for the A-Series wireless devices Convert a fat AP to a fit AP
Rev. 10.31
14 1
Managing A-Series Fat APs

Managing A-Series Fat APs
Managing A-Series Fat APs Software Images and Configuration Files Management Options Accessing the CLI Performing Basic Support Tasks in the CLI Accessing the Web Browser Interface Performing Basic Support Tasks in the Web Browser Interface Managing A-Series WLAN Access Controllers Converting APs from Fat to Fit
Rev. 10.31
As you have learned, customers can deploy APs as standalone, or fat, devices or as fit devices within a multiple AP deployment that is managed by a centralized wireless LAN (WLAN) access controller. Because you take different steps to support the two different types of deployments, this module will discuss the management of AP Series wireless solutions in several sections. This first section explains how to manage fat APs. Module 12: HP A-Series Wireless Solutions Overview introduced you to four HP ASeries APs that can operate as fit or fat devices:

A9552 A9152 A8760 A7760
You will now learn how to manage these devices when they operate in fat mode.
14 2
Rev. 10.31
HP A-Series Fit/Fat AP Software Images

HP A-Series Fit/Fat AP Software Images
Fit/fat A-Series APs run different software based on their mode. Fat APs can store multiple images, but only one is active
Multiple Software Images One active
Multiple Software Images One backup One active

A9552 AP A9152 AP
A8760 AP A7760 AP
Rev. 10.31
These four A-Series APs support two types of software, one for fat mode and one for fit (or managed) mode. It is very important that the AP run the correct type of software for the mode in which the customer wants the AP to operate. You will learn how to switch between the two modes at the end of this module. For now, simply note that the APs can store multiple software images in their flash memory. However, only one image functions as the active, or main, software, which the AP always boots unless the file is corrupt. On the A9552 and A9152 APs, another image can also operate as backup software. The software for the A9552 and A9152 APs is the 3ComWare software, with which you are familiar from the ASeries switches.
Rev. 10.31
14 3
HP A-Series Fat AP Configuration Files

HP A-Series Fat AP Configuration Files
Changes to runningconfig immediately applied to startup
Multiple files Changes to runningconfig immediately applied to startup (sysconfig)

A8760 AP
Multiple files One running-config One startup-config One backup startup-config

A9552 AP A9152 AP
A7760 AP
Rev. 10.31
When you make configuration changes to an A8760 or A7760 AP, the changes will immediately apply and be saved to the APs startup configuration (the configuration that the AP boots when it power cycles or reloads). On the A8760, the startup-config is called sysconfig. You can preserve the current settings by copying the sysconfig file to a different filename, such as sysconfig_bak which the AP stores in its flash memory. Then you can make changes, which apply to the running-config and sysconfig. To revert to the earlier settings, copy the file to which you save the previous sysconfig to the sysconfig file. You can also download a configuration to the AP from a TFTP or FTP server and copy that file to the sysconfig file. On the A9552 and A9152 APs, on the other hand, you must remember to save your configuration changes; these APs have separate running-configs and startup-configs. These APs can also store multiple configuration files in their flash memory, and you can select one of these files to act as the main startup-config and another to act as a backup startup-configjust as on the HP A-Series switches.
14 4
Rev. 10.31
Management Options for HP A-Series Fat APs

Management Options for HP A-Series Fat APs
When APs operate in fat mode, you manage them individually with:
CLI
(not supported for A7760) browser interface
Web
SNMP
*SNMP is not covered in this course.
Rev. 10.31
When these APs operate in fat mode, you must manage each AP individually. You can use a CLI or Web browser interface to manage the fat AP except that the CLI is not supported on the A7760 AP. Note that the APs can also participate in a Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) solution, if your customer has such as solution. However, this course does not deal with such solutions. You will now learn how to access the CLI and Web browser interfaces and complete basic support tasks on each fat AP.
Rev. 10.31
14 5
Access the CLI Out-of-Band
AP A9552 A9152
Cable
Terminal software settings Baud rate = 9600 Data Bits = 8 Parity = None Stop bits = 1 Flow Control = none
Default credentials
None required Username = admin Password = password
RJ-45 to DB-9 A8760
Rev. 10.31
You can access the fat APs CLI out-of-bandthat is, through a dedicated management port, which, on these APs, is a console port that accepts an RJ-45 connector. You will find this port in different locations on each AP; you might need to check the undercarriage. Once you have located the port, use the proper cable (indicated in the slide) to connect it to your management stations serial port. As you have learned in earlier modules, you must run terminal software on your station to open a management session to the CLI. The slide indicates the correct settings for this software. You might be prompted to log in; ask the customer for the correct settings. The slide lists the default credentials.
14 6
Rev. 10.31
Access the CLI In-band
Access the CLI In-band
AP A9552 A9152 A8760
Terminal protocol options
Default credentials No Telnet access at factory defaults Username = admin Password = password
Telnet Telnet or SSH
Rev. 10.31
You can also access A-Series fat APs CLI using Telnet or, on the A8760 AP only, SSH. In-band access requires you to have IP connectivity with the AP. (The section on accessing the APs Web browser interface will give tips for finding that address if the customer cannot tell you.) For the A9552 and A9152 APs, the credentials for Telnet access might differ from those for console access. Obtain them from the customer.
Note The A9552 and A9152 do not offer Telnet access at their factory default settings. (Telnet is enabled, but no password is set, so you cannot log in.) Access devices operating at the factory default settings on their console port.
Rev. 10.31
14 7
CLI Overview
CLI Overview
AP CLI organization Organized into views like the A-Series switches
CLI privilege levels Four privilege levels like the A-Series switches: Manage System Monitor Visitor
A9552
A9152
Privilege EXEC
A8760
Global configuration Interface configuration modes
One manager
Rev. 10.31
Once you have accessed the CLI, you can navigate through it and enter commands to view information about the devices status and to manage the device.
A9552 and A9152 AP CLI

You will recognize the CLI for the A9552 and A9152 APs as consistent with the CLI of the A-Series switches. The CLI is divided into the user view, system view, and other command views, and it restricts commands according to the privilege level to which you are assigned when you log in. You will need system or manage level access to complete most support tasks, but you can collect diagnostic information as a monitor. By default, when you log in through the console port, you have manage level access.
A8760 AP CLI
If you want to use the CLI to manage A8760 APs, you will have to navigate a different CLI. This CLI is divided into a privilege EXEC mode, used for monitoring and managing the device, and a global configuration mode, used for making changes to the configuration. The global configuration mode further divides into three interface configuration modes from which you can configure these settings:

Ethernet interface settings, including IP address (interface-ethernet) Radio settings (interface-wireless) WLAN settings (interface-wireless-vap)
14 8
Rev. 10.31
You will complete most support tasks in the privilege EXEC mode. All management users log in to an A8760 AP with the same username and password; therefore, you do not need to worry about obtaining the correct level of access.
Rev. 10.31
14 9
Perform Basic Support Tasks in the CLI
Perform Basic Support Tasks in the CLI

Viewing diagnostic information Restore a configuration to an AP
Backup Restore
the old APs configuration the configuration to the AP
Update an APs software Reset an AP to factory default settings Reboot an AP Set an APs IP address
10
Rev. 10.31
Module 4: HP A-Series Basic Switch Management explained in depth how to use CLI commands to:

View diagnostic information Restore a customers configuration to a replacement device, including backing up the old devices configuration and restoring the configuration to the new device Update the devices software Reset the device to factory default settings Reboot the device Set the devices IP address
You will execute nearly the same troubleshooting procedures and commands to complete these tasks on the A9552 and A9512 APs. Therefore, this module simply provides a table of commands for each task (Table 1). Once you understand how to use commands like these, you can apply this knowledge to other devices even when the command syntax is differentas it is on the A8760 AP. Table 2 shows the correct syntax for commands on that device.
14 10
Rev. 10.31
Note
Table 1 explains how to set an IP address on a particular VLAN and assign that VLAN to the APs Ethernet port. You should ask the customer for the correct VLAN to assign to the AP. Both tables explain how to upload and download files to and from TFTP servers; the APs also support FTP transfers, but these are not covered in this course.
Table 1: Common HP A-Series CLI Commands

Function Collect diagnostic information
Display information about the APs software image, main control boards, and interface boards Display which saved configuration is being used as the startup-config (main and backup) Display the configurations in the running-config (different from default) Display the configurations in the main saved-config (different from default) Display the most recently entered commands (10 by default) Compile detailed information about the switchs operation and configuration View all files in the flash memory Assign an IP address to the APs Ethernet interface display version monitor (1) any
HP A-Series AP Command
Privilege Level
View
Different from ASeries Switch?
display startup
monitor (1)
any
display current-configuration
system (2)
any
display saved-configuration
system (2)
any
display history-command
monitor (1)
any
display diagnostic-information
monitor (1)
any
dir
manage (1)
user
Set up IP connectivity on the AP

interface vlan <ID> ip address [dhcp-alloc | <address> [mask | length] port Ethernet 0/1/0 Create a default route Verify connectivity ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0 <router IP address> ping <IP address> system (2) visitor (0) system (2) system VLAN interface command
system any
Rev. 10.31
14 11
Backup and restore the startup-config

Back up the (main) startupconfig to a TFTP server Restore the startup-config from a TFTP server backup startup-configuration to <server address> [<file>] restore startup-configuration from <server address> <file.cfg> save [safely] [main] or save <filename> startup saved-configuration <filename> [main | backup] save <filename> startup saved-configuration <filename> [main | backup] reset saved-configuration main reset saved-configuration backup reboot tftp <server address> get <source filename> [<destination filename>] bootrom update file <filename> boot-loader file <filename> [main | backup] sysname <name> user-interface console 0 authentication-mode password set authentication password [simple | cipher] <password> local-user <username> set password [simple | cipher] <password> authentication-attribute level <level> service-type terminal quit user-interface console 0 authentication-mode scheme system (2) system (2) user user
Manage configurations
Save configuration changes directly to the startup-config system (2) any
Save configuration changes to a named file Set a saved configuration file as the startup-config
system (2) system (2) user
Reboot or reset the router

Delete the startup-config and reset to factory defaults system (2) user
Reboot the router
system (2) manage (3)
user user
Upgrade the router software

Obtain a file (such as a software image) from a TFTP server Upgrade the Boot ROM code Select the software image from which the router will next boot
system (2) system (2)
user user
Specify system information

Set the system name Protect console access to the switch by setting a password on the console user interface system (2) manage (3) manage (3) manage (3) system system user interface command
Set up management access through console and Telnet connections

X
Protect console access by creating user accounts and enforcing scheme authentication (with local users)
manage (3)
system local user command
system user interface command
14 12
Rev. 10.31
Set up Telnet access and protect it with a password
telnet server enable user-interface vty 0 <n> set password [simple | cipher] <password> user privilege level <level>
manage (3)
system view user interface command
Set up Telnet access and protect it with scheme authentication
telnet server enable local-user <username> set password [simple | cipher] <password> authentication-attribute level <level> service-type telnet quit user-interface vty 0 <n> authentication-mode scheme
manage (3)
system user interface command system
Set super passwords to allow users to move to higher levels
super password level <level> [simple | cipher] <password>
manage (3) (or system for system and below)
Table 2: A8760 AP Commands

Display information about the APs software image and hardware version Display the current/saved configuration (all changes are immediately saved) Display the most recently entered commands Display information about the switchs system show show show show version bootfile hardware config EXEC
A8760 AP Command
CLI Mode
EXEC EXEC EXEC Global configuration Ethernet interface configuration EXEC
show history show system interface ethernet ip [dhcp | address <address> <mask> <default router address>]
Set up IP connectivity on the AP

Assign an IP address to the APs Ethernet interface (including the different router for the AP)
Verify connectivity
ping <IP address>
Back up the (main) startup-config to a TFTP server copy config tftp *You will be prompted for the filename and TFTP server address EXEC
Restore the startup-config from a TFTP server* You must reboot the AP for the configuration to take effect Preserve the current file
copy sysconfig sysconfig_bak
EXEC
Rev. 10.31
14 13
Obtain the new file
Copy the new file to the startup-config
copy tftp file *You will be prompted for the type of file (2), name of the file on the TFTP server, and the server IP address. copy <filename> sysconfig
EXEC
EXEC
Reboot or reset the AP

Delete the startup-config to reset to factory defaults and reboot the AP Reboot the AP reset configuration reset board copy tftp file *You will be prompted for the type of file (1 or 3), name of the file on the TFTP server, and the server IP address. bootfile <filename> EXEC EXEC EXEC
Upgrade the AP software

Obtain a file (such as a software image) from a TFTP server
Select the software image from which the router will next boot
EXEC

Set the system name system name <name> Global configuration Global configuration Global configuration Global configuration Ethernet interface configuration Global configuration Global configuration
Set up management access

Set the management username username <name> *The name is case-sensitive and can be from 3 to 16 characters password <password> *The name is case-sensitive and can be from 3 to 16 characters interface Ethernet [no] ip telnet-server enable Enable (or disable) HTTP and HTTPS access to the Web browser interface (by default, HTTP access is enabled and HTTPS is disabled) [no] ip http [no] ip https
Set the management users password
Enable (or disable) Telnet access (enabled by default)
14 14
Rev. 10.31

1. Obtain IP connectivity to the AP. If necessary, change your stations IP address. 2. In a Web browser, navigate to the APs IP address. 3. Log in:

Default username = admin Default password = password
1 1
Rev. 10.31
You will now learn how to access an HP A-Series fat APs Web browser interface. This type of access requires you to have IP connectivity to the AP. If the AP has an address on the customers LAN, you might be able to connect your station to the LAN, obtain a DHCP address, and access the AP through the LAN. Ask the customer if his or her environment has any ACLs that might prevent you from doing so. Otherwise, you can connect your station directly to the APs Ethernet port. In this case, you must manually change your stations IP address to an address on the same subnet as the AP. After you have obtained connectivity (you can ping the AP from your management stations command prompt to verify), open a Web browser on your management station. Log in with the credentials provided by the customer. (The slide shows the default credentials.) For A9552 and A9152 APs, you must also input a verify code, which demonstrates that you are a person and not an application that is attempting to crack the password. Simply type the letters shown in the login window (highlighted in red in the slide). If you are logging in to an AP that has not yet been configured, you will be prompted to configure a few settings. Follow the prompts. On an A8760 AP, select Advanced setup.
Rev. 10.31
14 15
Table 3: Suggested Web Browser

AP
A9552 and A9152
Web Browser
Internet Explorer (IE) 6.0 SP 2 or higher Mozilla Firefox 3.0 or higher
A8760 and A7760
IE 5.0 or higher
14 16
Rev. 10.31
Find an A-Series Fat APs IP Address: Factory Default AP and No DHCP Server
Find an A-Series Fat APs IP Address

Factory Default AP and No DHCP Server
The AP uses its default IP address. Set your management stations address to the same subnet. Connect your management station directly to the AP.
AP A9552 A9152 A8760 A7760 Default IP address
192.168.0.50 169.254.2.1 169.254.2.2
12
Rev. 10.31
Sometimes the customer might not be able to tell you the APs IP address; or you might be attempting to access a replacement AP at the factory default settings. This slide and the next give tips for finding the APs IP address. First, consider a replacement A-Series fat AP that has just booted up. By default, the AP attempts to obtain an IP address. If it cannot do soit is not connected to the LAN or the LAN does not provide DHCP servicesthe AP uses its default address instead. The table in the slide displays the default IP addresses used by the A-Series fat APs. You must set your management stations address in the same /24 subnet. For example, set the stations address to 192.168.0.49 in order to connect to an A9552 AP. Then connect your station directly to the APs Ethernet port. You will now be able to access the AP at its Web browser interface, assign it a new IP address, and perform other tasks to get the AP up and running.
Rev. 10.31
14 17
Find an A-Series Fat APs IP Address: Existing AP or Factory Default AP and DHCP Server
Find an A-Series Fat APs IP Address

Existing AP or Factory Default AP and DHCP Server
1. Connect 2. Launch 3. When
You can use WIDMan to find the APs IP address:

the management workstation to the AP (directly or through the network). WIDMan on your workstation. the network tree shows the AP, select it and click Configure.
Configure
13
Rev. 10.31
Sometimes you will need to access a new AP or one that you have reset to factory default settings. The AP has received an IP address from a DHCP server, but you do not know what it is. (Perhaps a different department is responsible for managing the DHCP services.) In other situations, you need to service a device, but the customer cannot tell you its IP address. In either case, the Wireless Infrastructure Device Manager (WIDMan) will help you find the APs address. This application ships with the A-Series fat APs; you can also obtain in from the HP networking Web site. Install the application on your management station. Then connect your station to the AP (either directly or through the network). Launch WIDMan. The application discovers the AP and obtains information about it. (The discovery process might take some time.) When you see the AP in the network tree, select the APs name. You can click Properties to see information about the AP, including its IP address, or you can click Configure to launch a connection to the APs Web browser interface.
14 18
Rev. 10.31
Perform Basic Support Tasks in the Web Browser Interface: A9552 and A9152 APs
Perform Basic Support Tasks in the Web Browser Interface

A9552 and A9512 APs
Software Upgrade
Reboot
Device Management Configuration Backup Restore Save Initialize
14
Rev. 10.31
It is beyond the scope of this course to guide you through each window in the Web browser interface. However, you should be able to navigate through the interface using the navigation bar at the left without much problem. To help you out, the slide and table indicate the locations for the windows in which you complete basic support tasks.
Table 4: A9552 and A9512 AP Web Browser Interface

Task
View diagnostic information
Web Browser Interface Window

Device > Device Management > Diagnostic Information Device > Configuration > Backup and Device > Configuration > Restore
Additional Information
Restore a customers configuration to a replacement device, including backing up the old devices configuration and restoring the configuration to the new device Update the devices software
Device > Device Management > Software Upgrade
When you back up a configuration from the Web browser interface, you save it directly to your management station. You do not need an FTP or TFTP server. Similarly, when you restore the configuration or update the software from the Web browser interface, you can simply save the file on your management station. The Web browser interface lets you browse through your stations files and select the one you need.
Reset the device to factory default settings Reboot the device Rev. 10.31
Device > Configuration > Initialize Device > Device
14 19
Set the devices IP address
Management > Reboot Network > VLAN Device > Interface
Ask the customer for the correct VLAN setting and IP address for the APs Ethernet port. If the customer tells you to use a different VLAN from the one with the IP address that you are currently contacting (typically, VLAN 1), create that VLAN in the Network > VLAN window. Then create the VLAN interface and set the IP address on that interface in the Device > Interface window. Only then, in the Network > VLAN window, assign the APs Ethernet port as a member of this VLAN. (Typically, the port should be an untagged member, but the customer might tell you to make it a tagged member instead.) If the customer tells you to use the current VLAN, simply change the IP address in the Device > Interface window. In either case, you will lose connectivity with the AP; you must contact it on the new IP address.
14 20
Rev. 10.31
Perform Basic Support Tasks in the Web Browser Interface: A8760 AP

A8760 AP
Firmware Upgrade Backup Configuration Restore Configuration Restore Factory Settings Reset Access Point
15
Rev. 10.31
This slide displays the left navigation bar for the A8760 APs Web browser interface. It also lists the tasks that you can complete from the Administration window, where you will find most options relevant to basic support. If you need to set the APs address, select TCP/IP. After you change the address, you will lose connectivity to the Web browser interface. You must contact the AP at the new address and log back in again if you need to complete other tasks.
Table 5: A8760 AP Web Browser Interface

Task Web Browser Interface Window Additional Information
View diagnostic information Status Restore a customers configuration to a Administration replacement device, including backing up the old devices configuration and restoring the configuration to the new device Update the devices software Administration
You must backup and restore the configuration to and from a TFTP server.
As on the 9552 and 9512 APs, you
can upgrade the AP from software that is saved on your management station, which might be easier than using a TFTP server. When you upgrade the software, you must choose its type: standalone (for a fat AP) or manager (for a fit AP)
Rev. 10.31
14 21
Reset the device to factory default settings Reboot the device Set the devices IP address
Administration Administration
TCP/IP

Make sure that you can access the device on the new IP address.
14 22
Rev. 10.31
Perform Basic Support Tasks in the Web Browser Interface: A7760 AP

A7760 AP
Collect diagnostics Set the IP address Backup/Restore configuration Update the software Restore factory settings Reset the AP
16 Rev. 10.31
Here you see the left navigation bar for the A7760 APs Web browser interface. Look under System Status to collect information about the APs state. Look in the Management section for the windows in which you complete most configuration tasks. Note that, as on the A8760 AP, when you update the software, you must select its type as stand-alone. (You will learn later about updating the software to managed software.) And as always, be aware that you will lose connectivity with the AP if you change its IP address; make sure that you can reach the AP at the new address, or you will need to access the AP on its console port to fix the configuration.
Table 6: A7760 AP Web Browser Interface

Task
View diagnostic information Back up and restore a configuration Update the devices software Reset the device to factory default settings Reboot the device Set the devices IP address
Web Browser Interface Window

System Status > System Summary System Status > Event Log List Management > Backup/Restore Settings Management > Firmware Upgrade Management > Backup/Restore Settings Management > Reboot System Configuration > IP Settings
Rev. 10.31
14 23
Managing A-Series WLAN Access Controllers

Managing A-Series WLAN Access Controllers
Managing A-Series Fat APs Managing A-Series WLAN Access Controllers Software Images and Configuration Files Management Options Accessing the CLI Performing Basic Support Tasks in the CLI Accessing the Web Browser Interface Performing Basic Support Tasks in the Web Browser Interface Converting APs from Fat to Fit
17
Rev. 10.31
In Module 12: A-Series Wireless Overview you learned that all A-Series APs can operate as fit APs, which are managed by a wireless LAN (WLAN) access controller. This section describes how to configure these WLAN access controllers.
14 24
Rev. 10.31
Managing Software and Configuration Files

Managing Software and Configuration Files
Consistent with A-Series switches
Boot
process software images and running-config
Multiple
Startup-config
Main attribute System software System software System software

18 Rev. 10.31
Backup attribute
System software
The A-Series WLAN access controllers use the same base software as the A-Series switches. This means that the WLAN access controllers have the same boot process and store and use software and configuration files in the same way. You can review the exact details of software and configuration file management in Module 4: Basic Configuration of A-Series Switches; a quick summary is provided here.
When the WLAN access controller boots, the Boot ROM code loads first and manages the boot process. After initializing and checking the controllers hardware, the Boot ROM boots the system software. The Boot ROM code and system software image are stored in the WLAN access controllers non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM), which is also called flash memory. Like an A-Series switch, the WLAN access controller can store multiple Boot ROM and software image files in its flash memory, but only one image runs. You control the image to which the controller is booted by setting the main and backup attributes. When the WLAN access controller is booted, it applies the settings in the startup-config file, and these settings then become the running-config. Because the running-config is stored in RAM, changes you make are not preserved unless you save them to the startup-config, which is stored in NVRAM.
14 25
Rev. 10.31
A WLAN access controller can store multiple configuration files. Just as you control which software image is used, you control which configuration file is used as the startup-config. The controller uses the configuration file that has the main attribute. If this file is corrupted and cannot be applied, the controller will load the configuration file with the backup attribute.
14 26
Rev. 10.31
Management Options
Management Options
CLI Web browser interface
Quick Start
SNMP (not covered in this course)
19
Rev. 10.31
You can manage HP A-Series WLAN access controllers using the Command Line Interface (CLI), the Web browser interface, or a Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) server.
CLIAllows you to type commands that change the controllers configuration settings. All settings can be configured through the CLI, making it the most comprehensive management option. Web browser interfaceProvides a Graphical User Interface (GUI) that you access through your Web browser. You might find this interface easier to use, particularly because it includes online help for various settings. However, you may not be able to reach this interface when the controller is experiencing problems. You would then need to use the CLI. The A-Series controllers Web browser includes a Quick Start wizard that guides you through a complete configuration of the device. This course introduces the Quick Start but does not examine it in-depth, because this course focuses only on the configuration functions you need to install and service the device.
SNMPAllows you to manage the controller centrally from an SNMP server, which collects information from and issues commands to SNMP agents residing on infrastructure devices. Because you will be managing individual devices, this course will not discuss SNMP.
Rev. 10.31
14 27
Management Access
Management Access
Options for a new WLAN access controller:
Access the Web browser interface
using default settings

Use console access
Options for an existing WLAN access controller:

Ask customer for IP address Use a console session
Web Browser Interface Default IP address:192.168.0.100 Default username: admin Default password: admin
20
Rev. 10.31
New WLAN Access Controller

If you are installing a new WLAN access controller, you can access the controller in one of the following ways:

By using the default settings to access the Web browser interface By establishing a console session.

Unlike the A-Series switches, the WLAN access controllers support management access through a Web browser by default. You can connect your management workstation directly to a switch port on the controller and configure your workstation to use an IP address in the same subnet as the controllers default address, which is 192.168.0.100/24. The browser interface is compatible with the Web browsers listed below. You must enable JavaScript on the Web browser.

Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 SP2 and higher Mozilla Firefox 3.0 and higher Google Chrome 2.0.174.0 and higher
14 28
Rev. 10.31
When the login page is displayed, enter the default login credentials:

Username: admin Password: admin
You will also need to enter a verify code, which is provided on the right of the Verify Code field on the login screen. The Web interface provides four user security levels. Ensure you are logged in with the highest level, which is the Management level. The default admin user name logs in at the Management level.
Visitor: Users at this level can perform ping and traceroute operations, but they cannot access the device data or configure the device. Monitor: Users at this level can access the device data but cannot configure the device. Configure: Users at this level can access data and configure the device, but they cannot upgrade the host software or complete backup and restore tasks. Management: Users at this level can perform any operations on the device.
Console Session
As you recall from Module 4: Basic Configuration of A-Series Switches, a console session is out-of-band, and you must use an RJ-48 to DB-9 adapter cable (which shipped with the WLAN access controller) to connect your management workstation to the controller. You then use terminal session software, such as Tera Term or Windows HyperTerminal, to establish a console session. Use the following settings:

Baud rate: 9600 Data rate: 8 Parity: none Stop bits: 1 Flow control: none
If you use incorrect settings, you might not see the CLI at all, or the text might be garbled. When you establish a console session with the WLAN access controller, you are assigned to a user interface that is labeled AUX. The default user privilege level for AUX interfaces is manage (or level 3, the equivalent of management access to the Web browser interface). You can then begin to configure the WLAN access controller or gather diagnostic information.
Rev. 10.31
14 29
Existing WLAN Access Controller

If you need to access an existing WLAN access controller, ask the customer for the IP address and enter that as the URL in your Web browser. Likewise, if Telnet or SSH has been enabled, ask for the IP address and use that address to establish a Telnet or SSH session. If the customer cannot give you the IP address, you can establish console access as well. Again, if you need more information about establishing these types of sessions, see Module 4: Basic Configuration of A-Series Switches The next section explains how to use the Web browser interface. Then the CLI Configuration section covers the same tasks as performed in the CLI. When providing support for a WLAN access controller, of course, you can use the management interface that you prefer.
14 30
Rev. 10.31
New Installation: Web Browser Quick Start

New Installation: Web Browser Quick Start
System name, country code, and time settings IP settings WLAN settings RADIUS settings Port settings AP configuration
21
Rev. 10.31
After you log in to the Web browser interface, you will see that Quick Start is the first item in the navigation bar. The Quick Start wizard leads you through steps to configure a WLAN access controller and the APs it controls. Many of the configurations are beyond the scope of this course and require that you collect information from your customer to enter into the wizard. However, the Quick Start wizard is also handy for basic configurations, including setting the country code and time zone. You can also use the Quick Start wizard to configure the APs connected to a WLAN access controller. To launch the Quick Start wizard, open the Web browser interface and select Quick Start from the left-hand navigation tree. Then follow the on-screen prompts. Skip any steps that are not relevant to your tasks. The Quick Start wizard takes you through the following configuration steps:

Basic configuration, including setting the country code and time zone IP configuration Wireless LAN (WLAN) settings RADIUS settings Portal configuration Guest wireless network configuration AP configuration
14 31
Rev. 10.31
Configure an IP Address on a New WLAN Access Controller: Create the VLAN

Configure an IP Address on a New WLAN Access Controller
1. Click Network > VLAN. 2. Click Add to create a VLAN (VLAN 1 exists by default). 3. Type the ID and click Apply.
Create the VLAN
22
Rev. 10.31
When you are configuring a new WLAN access controller or one that has been returned to factory defaults, you must assign it a new IP address so that it can connect to the customers LAN. Ask your customer for the correct IP address and corresponding VLAN. First you must create the VLANunless the VLAN is VLAN 1, which is created by default. In that case, move directly to configuring the VLAN interface. Otherwise, follow these steps: 1. In the left navigation bar, click Network > VLAN. 2. Click Add. 3. Type the VLAN ID and click Apply.
14 32
Rev. 10.31
Configure an IP Address on a New WLAN Access Controller: Create the VLAN Interface
1. Click Device > Interface. 2. Click Add to create the VLAN interface, which controls IP settings.
Create the VLAN Interface
23
Rev. 10.31
Next you must create an interface for the new VLAN; the interface controls the IP settings. Click Device > Interface in the navigation bar. Then click Add. If, however, you are altering the IP address on VLAN 1, simply edit the VLAN interface settings. Find the Operation column for Vlan-interface1 and click the modify icon, which is circled in the slide.
Rev. 10.31
14 33
Configure an IP Address on a New WLAN Access Controller: Set the IP Address

1. Select the new VLAN for Interface Name. 2. Typically, select DHCP or static for IP Config. 3. If you select static, set the VLANs IP address. 4. Click Apply.
24 Rev. 10.31
Set the IP Address
In this window, you configure the APs IP settings: 1. SelecttheVLANthatyoujustcreatedfortheInterface Name. 2. Typically,selectDHCP orStatic AddressforIP Config. 3. Ifyouoptforastaticaddress,youmustthensetthecontrollersIPaddress,themask foritssubnet,anditsdefaultrouter.AlsomakesurethatIPv6 ConfigissettoNone (unlessthecustomerwantstouseIPv6). 4. ClickApply.
14 34
Rev. 10.31
Configure an IP Address on a New WLAN Access Controller: Configure the Port

1. Click Network > VLAN and modify the VLAN. 2. Select a port under Untagged Member. 3. Click Apply. 4. Connect that port to the LAN and access the controller on the new IP address.
25 Rev. 10.31
Configure the Port
If you are configuring VLAN 1, you will now lose access to the WLAN access controllers Web browser interface. Connect the controller to the customers LAN, change your management stations IP address to one valid on the LAN (or DHCP), and reconnect to the Web browser interface at the new IP address. When configuring any VLAN except 1, you must assign a controller port to the VLAN with the new IP address: 1. ClickNetwork>VLAN. In the Operations column for the new VLAN, click the modify icon. 2. Select a port on the switch under Untagged Member (or Tagged Member if the customer tells you to). 3. Click Apply. You will now lose access to the controller. Connect the port to the LAN and access the controller on its new IP address.
Rev. 10.31
14 35
Back Up Configuration Files

Back Up Configuration Files
1. Click Device > Configuration.

2. Click the Backup tab at top of menu. 3. Click the lower Backup button to save the file with an .xml extension. 4. Save the file to local media. 5. Record filename.
26
Rev. 10.31
Before performing any maintenance on a WLAN access controller you should back up the configuration file by doing the following: 1. 2. 3. In the main Web window, click Device in the navigation bar and then click Configuration. Click the Backup tab at the top of the Device menu. Click the lower Backup button to save the configuration file with a .xml extension. Even though you have the option to save the file as a .cfg file, you should select the .xml option to ensure complete configuration information is backed up for later restoration. 4. 5. Follow the instructions in the file download dialogue box to save the file to local media such as a Compact Flash (CF) card. Record the name and location of the file for later, when you or someone else restores the configuration.
14 36
Rev. 10.31
Reset the WLAN Access Controller to Factory Defaults

Reset the WLAN Access Controller to Factory Defaults

2. Click the Initialize tab at top of menu. 3. Click the Restore Factory-Default Settings button.
27
Rev. 10.31
If you need to restore the WLAN access controller system to its factory defaults, you should try to first back up the current configuration file, as described on the previous page. Then complete these steps. 1. In the main Web window, select Device in the navigation tree and then click the Configuration tab. 2. Click the Initialize tab at the top of the Device menu. 3. Click the Restore Factory-Default Settings button. The controller will now be reset to its factory default settings and will reboot.
Rev. 10.31
14 37
Restore a Configuration File

Restore a Configuration File

2. Click the Restore tab at top of menu. 3. Click the lower Browse button to select a file with an .xml extension. 4. Click Apply.
28
Rev. 10.31
After you have reset a controller, you can restore its configurations from a saved .xml configuration file by doing the following: 1. In the main Web window, select Device in the navigation tree and then click the Configuration tab. 2. Click the Restore tab at the top of the Device menu.

Click the lower (.xml) Browse button to bring up a download dialogue box. Follow the instruction in the Browse dialogue box to locate the configuration backup .xml file. Click Apply.
The configuration will now be restored to the controller.
14 38
Rev. 10.31
Reboot a WLAN Access Controller

Reboot a WLAN Access Controller
1. Save current configuration. 2. Click Device and then click the Reboot button. 3. Select the Check configuration with next startup configuration file option. 4. Click Apply.
29
Rev. 10.31
Before rebooting a WLAN access controller, save the configuration to ensure you dont lose any changes you have made since it was last saved. To save the current configuration, do the following: 1. 2. In the main Web window, click Device in the navigation tree and then click the Save tab at the top of the Device menu. Click the Save Current Settings button. Saving a configuration takes some time. After you have saved the current configuration file, do the following to reboot the controller: 3. 4. In the main Web window, click Device in the navigation tree and then click Reboot. Select the Check configuration with next startup configuration file option. The controller will check the configuration before rebooting. If the check succeeds, the controller will reboot the device; if the check fails, a dialog box will be displayed, telling you that the current configuration and the saved configuration are inconsistent. The controller will not reboot. In this case, you need to save the current configuration manually before you can reboot the device... 5. Click Apply.
Rev. 10.31
14 39
Upgrade the System Software

Upgrade the System Software
1. Click Device > Software Upgrade tab at top of menu.

2. Click the Browse button and locate the new system software file. 3. Select optional settings. 4. Click Apply.
30
Rev. 10.31
To upgrade the system software to the latest version, download the new software version from the HP Web site, and save it to your management workstation. The Software Upgrade function allows you to install the new system application and set it as the main boot file or as the backup boot file. (The device will boot from the backup boot file if the main boot file is unavailable.) Keep in mind that upgrading software is time consuming, and you should not perform any operation in the Web interface while the upgrade is in process. To upgrade the system boot file, complete the following steps: 1. 2. In the main Web window, click Device and the click the Software Upgrade tab. Next to File, select the Browse button and navigate to the upgrade file. You may have downloaded this file from a TFTP server or have it on a media device such as a CF card. The file must be an application file with a .bin or .app extension. For the File Type, select Main if this will be the main boot file or Backup if this will be the backup boot file. If you plan to overwrite an existing file with a file of the same name, select If a file with the same name already exists, overwrite it without any prompt. Otherwise, if an older file with the same name already exists, you will not be able to upgrade the software.
3. 4.
14 40
Rev. 10.31
5. 6.
Select Reboot after the upgrade is finished. It is necessary to reboot for the changes to take effect. Click Apply.
Rev. 10.31
14 41
Add an AP
Add an AP
1. Click AP > AP Setup. 2. Click Create. 3. Type:
AP Name AP model number Serial number
AP Serial Number
4. Click Apply.
31
Rev. 10.31
If you are servicing an existing network, the WLAN access controllers and APs are likely already connected. However, if you need to replace an AP or the access controller itself, you must ensure that the:

Existing WLAN access controller discovers the new AP New WLAN access controller discovers all the APs Click AP in the navigation tree and then click AP Setup. Type the AP name. Select the AP model from the drop-down menu. Select auto or manual in the Serial ID drop-down menu. If you selected auto, the serial number of the new AP will be filled in automatically. If you selected manual, type the serial number of the AP manually. You can find the serial number on a label on the bottom or back of the AP.
You can add new or replacement APs to the network by following the steps below. 1. 2. 3. 4.
You can now connect the AP to the network. If the AP is in the same subnet, it will begin to communicate with the WLAN access controller. When the AP is discovered, it will be displayed in the AP > AP Setup window. If the AP is not in the same subnet, the customer must configure special DHCP settings or DNS settings to enable Layer 3 discovery for the AP. Because this requires access
14 42
Rev. 10.31
to the customers DHCP or DNS service, this configuration is not covered in this course.
Rev. 10.31
14 43
Auto AP Option
Auto AP Option
1. Click Advance > Auto AP.

2. Select enable. 3. Click Apply.
32
Rev. 10.31
If you are installing a new WLAN access controller, you probably do not want to type in the serial number for all of them. In this case, the easiest way to configure APs is using Auto AP option. After the controller discovers all the APs, HP recommends that you disable the Auto AP option. First, however, you need to complete the following steps to enable it: 1. 2. 3. From the left-hand navigation tree, select Advance > Auto AP. In the Auto AP pull-down menu, select enable. Click Apply.
The APs connected to the network will now be automatically discovered and configured. If the AP is not in the same subnet, the customer must configure special DHCP settings or DNS settings to enable Layer 3 discovery for the AP. Because this requires access to the customers DHCP or DNS service, this configuration is not covered in this course.
14 44
Rev. 10.31
CLI Commands
CLI Commands
Task
Reset to factory default settings Reboot Back up Restore
Command
<Sysname> reset saved-configuration [main | backup] <Sysname> reboot <Sysname> backup startup-configuration to <TFTP server IP address> <filename> <Sysname> restore startup-configuration from <TFTP server IP address> <filename>
33
Rev. 10.31
The HP A-Series WLAN access controllers provide a consistent CLI with the HP ASeries switches and the HP A-Series fat A9552 and A9512 APs. For detailed instructions in the basic commands needed to configure the HP A-Series WLAN access controllers, refer to Module 4: Basic Configuration of HP A-Series Switches. You can also refer to Table 1: Common HP A-Series Commands within this module.
Rev. 10.31
14 45
Add an AP from the CLI

Add an AP from the CLI
System (2); system view Add the AP manually:
[AController] wlan ap <name> model <model>
System (2); AP template view

[Acontroller-wlan-ap-<name>] serial-id <serial number>
AP Serial Number
34
Rev. 10.31
You will now learn two new CLI commands, ones specific to WLAN access controller functionality. Just as you can add an AP from the Web browser interface, you can choose to add an AP from the CLI. Enter these commands to add the AP manually and specify its serial number:
wlan ap <name> model <model> serial-id <serial number>
For example, enter:

[AController] wlan ap ap1 model 9152 [AController-wlan-ap-ap1] serial-id 9V7FASNBC2D00
The CLI provides other commands for configuring APs and WLAN functionality, but they are beyond the scope of this course.
14 46
Rev. 10.31
Reset APs
Reset APs
Physical reset CLI reset
reset wlan ap {all |
name <ap-name>}
35
Rev. 10.31
As you service a network, you may need to reset APs. Resetting APs cannot be accomplished using the Web browser interface. If you are resetting one or a few APs, the easiest way is to reset them using their physical reset button. To physically reset the APs, insert a small device such as a paper clip into the rest hole and hold for five seconds. If you are resetting several APs, or if the APs are located in the ceiling or other hardto-reach location, you will likely want to reset them remotely. You can do this using the controllers CLI. From the user view, enter this command, which requires monitor (0) level access:
reset wlan ap {all | name <ap-name>}
For example, to reset a single AP named AP1, enter the following command:
<AController> reset wlan ap name ap1
To reset all the APs currently managed by the controller, enter the following command:
<AController> reset wlan ap all
Rev. 10.31
14 47
Converting APs from Fat to Fit

Converting APs from Fat to Fit
Managing A-Series Fat APs Managing A-Series WLAN Access Controllers Converting APs from Fat to Fit

Add the Fat AP on the WLAN Access Controller Change the APs Mode
36
Rev. 10.31
A customer might need you to help convert a fat AP to a fit AP, allowing the previously standalone AP to become part of a centralized deployment. This section teaches you how.
14 48
Rev. 10.31
Add the Fat AP on the WLAN Access Controller
Add the Fat AP on the WLAN Access Controller

Add The
the fat AP to the WLAN access controllers configuration.
A9552 and A9152 must be added before conversion so that they can download software.
AP > AP Setup > New

AP Serial Number
37
Rev. 10.31
When you convert the fat AP to fit mode, you must add the AP to the WLAN access controllers configuration. In the case of the HP A9552 and A9152 APs, you must complete this step before converting the AP because the AP will need to contact the controller and download its software from the controller. Enabling auto AP is not enough; you must add the AP to the controller. You learned how to add APs from AP > AP Setup window earlier in this module. Specify the AP name and model. You can enter the serial ID manually as shown (you might also be able to select auto for the serial ID).
Note If you want to manage the controller from the CLI, enter these commands: [Controller-wlan] wlan ap <name> model <9552 | 9152> [Controller-wlan-ap-<name>]serial-id <serial> [Controller-wlan-ap-<name>] quit [Controller-wlan] display wlan ap <name> [Controller-wlan] display current-configuration
Rev. 10.31
14 49
Verify That the Controller Has the APs Fit Software
Verify That the Controller Has the APs Fit Software

View files in flash and look for the APs software.
Device > File Manage
38
Rev. 10.31
You should verify that the WLAN access controller has the correct software for the AP model that you are changing to fit mode. In the controllers Web browser interface, click Device > File Management. Look through the list for the following software:

For a A9552 or A9152 AP, wa2600a_fit.bin For a A8760 or A7760 AP, wa2100.bin
If the controller lacks the correct software, you must obtain it, save it on your management station, and then upload it to the controller. The section below the list of files allows you to upload files.
Note If you want to manage the controller from the CLI, enter the dir command.
14 50
Rev. 10.31
Convert HP A8760 and A7760 APs from Fat to Fit: Reset the AP
Convert HP A8760 and A7760 APs from Fat to Fit

Reset the AP
1. Connect your management station directly to the APs Ethernet port. 2. Initiate a hardware reset on the AP. 3. Open a Web browser, and access the AP at its default IP address. 4. Log in to the Web browser interface and follow prompts.
39 Rev. 10.31
The next steps in the procedure differ depending on the type of AP that you are converting. You will first learn how to convert the A8760 and A7760 APs: 1. Connect your management station directly to the APs Ethernet port. 2. Initiate a hardware reset on the AP by inserting a non-conducting object in the APs reset hole on its undercarriage (the A7760 AP) or back (the A8760 AP). Press for five seconds (on the A7760 AP) or ten seconds (on the A8760 AP). 3. Because the AP is connected to your station, it cannot receive a DHCP address when it reboots. Access the APs Web browser interface at its default address, as you learned how to do earlier in this module. 4. Log in. Because this is the first time that you have accessed the AP since it was reset, you must complete some initial setup. Follow the prompts. For the A8760 AP, select Advanced setup.
Rev. 10.31
14 51
Convert HP A8760 and A7760 APs from Fat to Fit: Install the Managed Software

Install the Managed Software
1. Copy the managed software to your station. 2. Update the software, selecting Managed for the type. 3. Select Managed for the Startup Mode. 4. Reboot the AP.
40 Rev. 10.31
Next you must install the managed software on the AP. 1. You can obtain the software from the HP networking Web site. Make sure to obtain the managed software and not the standalone software. (The notes should indicate the type.) Copy the software to your management station. 2. Update the software on the AP using its Web browser interface. (If necessary, refer to Table 5 and 6 for help finding the window.) Make sure to select Managed for the software type before you click the button to initiate the upgrade. 3. After the upgrade has completed, change the APs startup mode to Managed. This setting is in the same window as the software upgrade on the A8760 AP; for the A7760 AP, you must move to the System Configuration > System Properties window.
14 52
Rev. 10.31
Convert HP A8760 and A7760 APs from Fat to Fit: Connect the AP to the Network

Connect the AP to the Network
While the AP reboots, establish a connection that provides: Layer 2 connectivity between the AP and the controller DHCP services for the AP
VLAN
Controller DHCP server
AP
Management PC
41
Rev. 10.31
While the AP reboots, connect it to the network. You must connect the AP so that it has Layer 2 connectivity with the WLAN access controller. That is, the untagged VLAN on the APs switch port is the same VLAN on which the controller has its IP address. The AP also needs to receive a DHCP address. The network DHCP server can either be on the same subnet as the AP, or the APs router can have a helper address to the DHCP server. Simply ask the customer if the DHCP services are available on the VLAN. You have now converted the AP from fat to fit, and, after it finishes booting, it will discover the controller and become managed by it. Before you learn how to verify that this has occurred, consider how to convert A9552 and A9152 APs from fat to fit.
Rev. 10.31
14 53
Convert HP A9552 and A9512 APs from Fat to Fit Mode

1. Verify the APs connection meets the requirements. 2. Access the AP on a console connection. 3. Change the mode.
<AP> ap-mode fit
VLAN
Controller DHCP server
AP
42 Rev. 10.31
Management PC
Follow these steps to convert the A9552 and A9152 APs from fat to fit mode: 1. You can leave this type of AP connected to the network while you convert it. Verify that the APs connection meets the same requirements for the A8760 and A7760 APs after the conversion:
Layer 2 connectivity to the controller DHCP services on the APs subnet
2. You must access the AP over a console connection. 3. Enter this command (which is a hidden command that must be entered from the console):
<AP> ap-mode fit
Enter y for both of the prompts. The AP converts to fit mode and reboots. You can monitor the process in the console session. When you are granted console access again, the process has completed.
14 54
Rev. 10.31
Verify That the AP is Managed
Verify That the AP is Managed

1. Access the controller CLI. 2. Verify that the AP is discovered and running.
<Controller> display wlan ap all Total Number of APs configured : 7 Total Number of configured APs connected : 5 Total Number of auto APs connected : 0 AP Profiles ----------------------------------------------------------AP Name APID State Model Serial-ID ----------------------------------------------------------ap3150_wx3024 1 Idle 8760_3150 9H7C8VL17BD40 ap4620_a_wx3024 2 Run/M WA4620 9V7FAWME17700 ap7760_wx3024 3 Run/M 7760_2750 9TZ497L965240 ap9550_wx3024 4 Run/M 9550 9U7Q9VMABCA82 ap9552_auto 5 Idle 9552 auto wa4620_wa3024 6 Run/M WA4620 9V7FAWME179A0 ap9552_1 7 Run/M 9552 219801A0AL9099G00461 ----------------------------------------------------------43 Rev. 10.31
Log in to the controllers CLI and enter this command:

<AController> display wlan ap all
Find the formerly-fat AP by its name and serial number. Verify that the APs status is listed as Run/M. If you see an Idle status, the AP might not have finished the discovery process yet. However, if the Idle status persists, the process has failed. Double-check that the AP has booted, that it can receive an IP address, and that it is on the same subnet as the controller.) If you want to obtain details about AP registration, such as the IP address obtained by the AP, enter this command:
<AController> display wlan ap all verbose
The conversion is now complete.
Rev. 10.31
14 55
Summary
Summary
Accessing the CLI and Web browser interface on HP A-Series wireless products Completing basic support tasks in these interfaces Converting fat APs to fit APs managed by a WLAN access controller
44
Rev. 10.31
This module has taught you how to access the CLI and Web browser interface on HP A-Series wireless products. Using your choice of these interfaces, you can now complete basic support tasks such as backing up and restoring configurations, upgrading the software, setting an IP address on the device, and so forth. You can also follow the correct procedure for converting fat APs to fit APs that are managed by a WLAN access controller.
14 56
Rev. 10.31
HP E-Series Wireless Overview

Module 15
Objectives
This module introduces you to the HP E-Series wireless products. After completing this module, you should be able to:

List the products that compose the wireless E-Series Describe the basic design of:
HP E-Series access points (APs) HP E-MSM317 Access Device HP E-Series Mobility and Access Controllers HP E-MSM415 RF Security Sensor
Rev. 10.31
15 1
HP E-Series APs
HP E-Series APs
HP E-MSM APs HP E-M110 AP HP E-MSM422 AP HP E-MSM410 AP HP E-MSM335 AP HP E-MSM325 AP HP E-MSM320 AP HP E-MSM310 AP HP E-MSM320-R AP HP E-MSM310-R AP HP E-MSM317 Access Device HP E-Series Controllers HP E-MSM415 RF Security Sensor
3 Rev. 10.31
The HP E-Series AP portfolio provides support for the 802.1 1a, b, g, and n wireless standards. The HP E-MSM422 and HP E-MSM410 APs support 802.1 in addition to 1n 802.1 1a, b, and g. The radios of all other E-MSM APs in the E-Series are 802.1 1a/b/g compliant. The next slide discusses the management and power features that all HP E-Series APs have in common. The rest of the section will discuss the APs individually. It will look at number of radios, 802.1 standards supported by each radio, and number and type 1 of internal antennas and external antenna connectors.
15 2
Rev. 10.31
HP E-Series AP Management/Power Features

HP E-Series AP Management/Power Features
All E-MSM APs operate in controlled (default) or autonomous mode. The E-M110 operates in autonomous mode only. Autonomous management:
Web browser interface Command-line interface SNMP v3
All APs are IEEE 802.3af PoE compliant.

4 Rev. 10.31
All HP E-Series MultiService Mobility (E-MSM) APs can operate in one of two modes: controlled mode (default)in which APs are centrally managed by an E-Series controlleror autonomous mode. E-MSM controllers are discussed a little later in this module. The E-M1 AP can operate in autonomous mode only. 10 All of the HP E-Series APs have the following management and power features in common. You have three options for managing the APs in autonomous mode: a Web-based management interface, a command-line interface (CLI), and SNMP v3.
The Web browser interface offers an intuitive, task-based approach. You can access this interface remotely using HTTP over Secure Sockets Layer (HTTPS), a protocol that encrypts data that is part of a Web session. The CLI can be used to perform configuration and management tasks via the serial port or an IP connection on any of the AP interfaces. With these products, however, the robust Web browser interface is the interface of choice. There are no features available through the CLI that cannot be configured through the Web browser interface.
Rev. 10.31
15 3
SNMP support allows you to manage the AP in the context of other devices on your network. An SNMP v3 agent on the AP:
Submits information such as device settings, traffic statistics, and alarms to a central SNMP server Accepts commands from SNMP management software, allowing for centralized administration Supports encryption to protect sensitive information
Configuration of HP E-Series APs and controllers is covered in Module 17 of this course. Finally, all HP E-Series APs are IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet (PoE) compliant.
15 4
Rev. 10.31
HP E-M1 AP 10
HP E-M110 AP
One radio:
802.11a/b/g
No internal antennas Two external antennas Two external RP SMA antenna connectors One 10/100 port DB-9 serial console port connector 5 VDC or 802.3af PoE
5 Rev. 10.31
Console Port Ethernet Port Power Connector
The HP E-M1 AP is an entry-level, single IEEE 802.1 10 1a/b/g radio device that includes the following:
Two external 2 dBi dual-band 2.4/5 GHz omnidirectional antennas (they radiate horizontally in all directions, providing 360 degrees of coverage) Two reverse-polarity male SMA external antenna connectors with diversity One 10/100 Ethernet port and DB-9 serial console port connector Support for 5 VDC power in addition to 802.3af PoE.
Rev. 10.31
15 5
HP E-MSM422 AP
HP E-MSM422 AP
Two radios:
One 802.11a/b/g/n, one
802.11a/b/g
Five internal antennas Four external RP SMA antenna connectors Power One 10/100/1000 port DB-9 serial console port connector 48 VDC or 802.3af PoE
6 Rev. 10.31
Connector
Ethernet Port
Console Port
The HP E-MSM422 supports 802.1 to increase network speed and reliability and 1n extend the operating distance of wireless networks. The AP includes the following:
Two radiosRadio 1 is an 802.1 1a/b/g/n radio, and radio 2 an 802.1 1a/b/g radio. Two adjustable flaps with integrated antennasThe upper flap has three antennas and the lower flap has two. The included antennas are dual-band 2.4/5 GHz omnidirectional (they radiate horizontally in all directions, providing 360 degrees of coverage), and three of the five support 3x3 multiple-input, multiple-output (MIMO) antenna design for improved signal quality. They can broadcast the signal for the 802.1 1a/b/g/n radio. The two remaining antennas support diversity, so they can be used together on the same 802.1 1a/b/g radio to improve signal quality. Four reverse-polarity male SMA external antenna connectors, three with diversity. A 10/100/1000 Ethernet port and DB-9 serial console port connector Support for 48 VDC power in addition to 802.3af PoE
15 6
Rev. 10.31
HP E-MSM410 AP
HP E-MSM410 AP
One 802.11a/b/g/n radio Three integrated antennas No external antenna connectors One 10/100/1000 port Serial console port with an RJ-45 connector 802.3af PoE
Ethernet port Console port
7 Rev. 10.31
The E-MSM422 is not the only HP E-MSM AP with built-in support for 802.1 The 1n. HP E-MSM410 AP includes the following:

A single 802.1 1a/b/g/n radio 3x3 MIMO capabilities by way of its three integrated dual-band 2.4/5 GHz omnidirectional antennas (they radiate horizontally in all directions, providing 360 degrees of coverage) One 10/100/1000 Ethernet port and RJ-45 serial console port connector Support for 802.3af PoE only (not compatible with an external power supply)
Rev. 10.31
15 7
HP E-MSM335 AP
HP E-MSM335 AP
Three 802.11a/b/g radios Six internal antennas Three external RP SMA antenna connectors One 10/100/1000 port Serial console port with a DB-9 connector 48 VDC or 802.3af PoE
Power Connector Ethernet Port Console Port
Rev. 10.31
The HP E-MSM335 AP provides two radios for 802.1 1a/b/g coverage, and a third radio that can provide either 802.1 1a/b/g coverage or continuous real-time RF security when used in conjunction with HP RF Manager, a wireless intrusion detection/intrusion prevention system (wireless IDS/IPS). This AP also includes the following:
Two adjustable flaps with integrated antennasBoth flaps have three antennas. The included antennas are dual-band 2.4/5 GHz omnidirectional (they radiate horizontally in all directions, providing 360 degrees of coverage) or directional. Three reverse-polarity male SMA external antenna connectors with diversity A 10/100/1000 Ethernet port and DB-9 serial console port connector Support for 48 VDC power in addition to 802.3af PoE
15 8
Rev. 10.31
HP E-MSM325/E-MSM320 APs
HP E-MSM325/E-MSM320 APs
Two 802.11a/b/g radios No internal antennas Four external antennas Four external RP SMA antenna connectors Two 10/100 ports 5 VDC, Port 1 supports 802.3af PoE
Power Connector
9 Rev. 10.31
(PoE)
Antenna Connectors Port 1
Port 2
The HP E-MSM325 AP and HP E-MSM320 AP each provide one radio for 802.1 1a/b/g coverage, and a second radio that can provide either 802.1 1a/b/g coverage or continuous real-time RF security when used in conjunction with HP RF Manager, a wireless intrusion detection/intrusion prevention system (wireless IDS/IPS). The E-MSM325 is shipped with an RF Security Sensor license; a license can be purchased separately for the E-MSM320 AP. These APs also include the following:
Four external 2 dBi dual-band 2.4/5 GHz omnidirectional antennas (they radiate horizontally in all directions, providing 360 degrees of coverage) Four reverse-polarity male SMA external antenna connectors with diversity Two 10/100 Ethernet ports Support for 5 VDC power in addition to 802.3af PoEPoE is supported on Port 1. In controlled mode, Port 1 should be used. In autonomous mode, Port 1 or Port 2 can be used.
Rev. 10.31
15 9
HP E-MSM310 AP
HP E-MSM310 AP
One 802.11a/b/g radio No internal antennas Two external antennas Two external RP SMA antenna connectors Two 10/100 ports 5 VDC, Port 1 supports 802.3af PoE
Power Connector
10 Rev. 10.31
(PoE)
Antenna Connectors Port 1
Port 2
The HP E-MSM310 AP provides one radio for 802.1 1a/b/g coverage. It also includes the following:
Two external 2 dBi dual-band 2.4/5 GHz omnidirectional antennas (they radiate horizontally in all directions, providing 360 degrees of coverage) Two reverse-polarity male SMA external antenna connectors with diversity Two 10/100 Ethernet ports Support for 5 VDC power in addition to 802.3af PoEPoE is supported on Port 1. In controlled mode, Port 1 should be used. In autonomous mode, Port 1 or Port 2 can be used.
15 10
Rev. 10.31
HP E-MSM320-R/E-MSM10-R APs
HP E-MSM320-R/E-MSM310-R APs
320-R = two 802.11a/b/g radios 310-R = one 802.11a/b/g radio Two external antennas Two waterproof, N-type, female antenna connectors One 10/100 port Waterproof RJ-45 connector 802.3af PoE
Weatherproof RJ-45 connector
1 1 Rev. 10.31
The HP E-MSM310-R has nearly the same feature set as the E-MSM310, in a ruggedized form factor (durable and weatherproof, die-cast aluminum enclosure) for outdoor use. Instead of two external 2.5 dBi dual-band 2.4/5 GHz omnidirectional antennas, it includes two external 5.5 dBi 2.4 GHz omnidirectional antennas. And the external antenna connectors are weatherproof, straight-polarity, N-type, female bulkhead connectors with diversity The E-MSM320-R has nearly the same feature set as the E-MSM320, except that is packaged in a ruggedized form factor for outdoor use, and it provides the same type of external antennas and external antenna connectors as the E-MSM310-R, and supports just two external antennasagain like the E-MSM310-Rrather than four like the E-MSM320. Specifically, these outdoor E-MSM APs include the following:

Two 802.1 1a/b/g radios for the E-MSM320-R, one for the E-MSM310-R Two external 5.5 dBi dual-band 2.4/5 GHz omnidirectional antennas (they radiate horizontally in all directions, providing 360 degrees of coverage) Two waterproof, N-type, female antenna connectors with diversity A single 10/100 Ethernet port with a weatherproof RJ45 connector (both male and female included) Support for 802.3af PoE only (not compatible with an external power supply)
15 11
Rev. 10.31
HP E-MSM317 Access Device

HP E-MSM317 Access Device
HP E-MSM APs HP E-MSM317 Access Device HP E-Series Controllers HP E-MSM415 RF Security Sensor
12
Rev. 10.31
The HP E-MSM317 Access Device is distinct from the HP E-MSM APs in the following ways:
First, the E-MSM317 integrates wired and wireless connectivity. It provides four Ethernet ports, a 2.4GHz 802.1 1b/g wireless access point, and a pass-through RJ-45 connection for service and user connectivity. Second, the E-MSM317 is a controlled device only. It cannot operate in autonomous mode. Third, the E-MSM317 supports the 802.1 1b/g standards only.
Provisioning (configuring the E-MSM317 to discover and connect with an E-MSM controller) can be set up while the E-MSM317 is in its default state using the EMSM317s provisioning tool interface. This is also the only way to configure a static IP address for the device. You can use an E-MSM controller to provision multiple E-MSM317s at the same time. All other configuration is accomplished through the E-MSM controllers Web browser interface as well.
15 12
Rev. 10.31
HP E-MSM317 Access Device (Cont.)

HP E-MSM317 Access Device (Cont.)
One 802.11b/g radio Two integrated antennas Four 10/100 ports
Port 1 802.3af-compliant
Port 1, with PoE Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Port 5 (passthrough)
10/100 uplink port One pass-through port Port 5 hardwired to the pass-through port Powered by 802.3af PoE
Uplink port
Passthrough port
13
Rev. 10.31
Key features of the E-MSM317 Access Device include:

One 802.1 1b/g radio Two integrated dual 2.4 GHz omnidirectional antennas supporting diversity Four 10/100 Ethernet portsone of which is an 802.3af-compliant PoE port for use by devices such as VoIP phonesand a 10/100 uplink port used to connect the E-MSM317 to a network
Ports 1 to 4 and the uplink port are connected to the built-in Ethernet switch.
A pass-through port A Port 5 hardwired to the pass-through port and not managed by the internal Ethernet switch Support for power through 802.3af PoE only (not compatible with an external power supply: the uplink port must be connected to an 802.3af-compliant power source)
Rev. 10.31
15 13
HP E-Series Controllers
HP E-Series Controllers
HP E-MSM APs HP E-MSM317 Access Device HP E-Series Controllers HP E-MSM710 Mobility Controller HP E-MSM760 Mobility Controller HP E-MSM765 zl Mobility Controller HP E-MSM710 Access Controller HP E-MSM760 Access Controller HP E-MSM415 RF Security Sensor
14
Rev. 10.31
The HP E-MSM700 Series includes both Access Controllers and Mobility Controllers. E-MSM700 Series Access Controllers provide centralized, policy-based configuration and management of E-MSM APs and the E-MSM317 Access Device. In addition to automating deployment and software distribution, they can provision identity-based services to ensure consistent QoS and security for E-MSM devices that use and roam across the network. Mobility Controllers are Access Controllers with a Mobility or Premium license installed. The license enables the controller to support Layer 3 mobility (generally referred to as roaming) as well as a number of other features. Layer 3 mobility enables users to roam between APs that are connected to different subnetswithout requiring the user to log in again or use special client software. What additional features are supported is dependent upon which of the licenses is installed. The HP E-MSM765 zl includes a Premium license (and thus is sold only as a Mobility Controller), so it supports Layer 3 mobility as soon as it is activated. The Mobility license for the HP E-MSM710, and the Premium license for the HP E-MSM760, however, are not included with these controllers and must be purchased separately.
15 14
Rev. 10.31
HP E-Series Controller Management and Ports

HP E-Series Controller Management and Ports
Management:
Web browser interface Command-line interface SNMP v3
Two Ethernet ports:

LAN port Internet port
15
Rev. 10.31
Here we will take a quick look at the management of E-MSM controllers and at their two Gigabit Ethernet ports. These features are shared by all E-MSM controllers.
Management
As with the E-MSM APs, you have three options for managing the E-MSM controllers: a Web-based management interface, a command-line interface (CLI), and SNMP v3.
The Web browser interface offers an intuitive, task-based approach. You can access this interface remotely using HTTP over Secure Sockets Layer (HTTPS), a protocol that encrypts data that is part of a Web session. The CLI can be used to perform configuration and management tasks via the serial port or an IP connection. With these products, however, the robust Web browser interface is the interface of choice. There are almost no features available through the CLI that cannot be configured through the Web browser interface. SNMP support allows you to manage the controller in the context of other devices on your network. An SNMP v3 agent on the controller:
Submits information such as device settings, traffic statistics, and alarms to a central SNMP server Accepts commands from SNMP management software, allowing for centralized administration
15 15
Rev. 10.31
Supports encryption to protect sensitive information
Ethernet Ports
Whether an Access Controller or a Mobility Controller, each E-MSM controller provides two Gigabit Ethernet ports. The ports are not identical. For example, the LAN port is preferred for receiving public access traffic (access-controlled users), and the Internet port is the preferred port for egressing traffic (that is, sending traffic originating from inside the network outside the network). These roles can be altered, however.
15 16
Rev. 10.31
HP E-MSM710 Controller
Appliance Controls up to 10 APs Can be powered by a PoE switch or PoE power injector Also supports an external power supply Serial console port with DB-9 Power connector
Rear Panel
16 Rev. 10.31
LAN port
Internet port Console port
The E-MSM710 can manage up to 10 APs. Its capacity is the same whether it is an Access Controller or Mobility Controller. The E-MSM710s LAN port supports IEEE 802.3af PoE, enabling it to be powered by a PoE switch or PoE power injector. (Note that PoE injectors designed for 10/100 networks only are NOT compatible.) The E-MSM710 is the only controller that can be powered through PoE. Alternatively, the controller has a power connector, which is used to connect an external power supply if you are not using PoE. It also provides a DB-9 female console port for a serial cable.
Rev. 10.31
15 17
Appliance Controls from 40 to 200 APs
Licensing = increments of 40 APs
RJ-45 DB-9 serial console port USB port (not used) Power connector for external power supply
Console port
17 Rev. 10.31
USB port
LAN port Internet port
The E-MSM760 can manage up to 200 APs whether it is an Access Controller or Mobility Controller. It is shipped with a 40-AP license, and additional 40-AP licenses can be purchased up to capacity. Note that, although Port 1 on the E-MSM710 is the LAN port, it is Port 2 on the EMSM760 that serves this function. Similarly, on the E-MSM760 Port 1 is the Internet port, although it is Port 2 on the E-MSM710. The E-MSM760 console port is a standard serial port with an RJ-45 connector. The controller includes a DB-9 to RJ-45 console cable. The E-MSM760 also provides a USB port for file transfers by USB device to and from the controller. The USB port is not currently functional. Finally, it includes a power connector, which is used to connect an external power supply.
15 18
Rev. 10.31
HP E-MSM765 zl Mobility Controller

HP E-MSM765 zl Mobility Controller
Switch module LAN and Internet ports connect through the switch backplane USB port Controls from 40 to 200 APs
Licensing = increments of 40 APs
USB port
18 Rev. 10.31
Unlike the E-MSM710 and E-MSM760, which are standalone appliances, the HP EMSM765 zl Mobility Controller is a Services zl Modulebased WLAN controller that plugs in to either the HP E5400 zl Switch Series or HP E8200 zl Switch Series. The LAN and Internet ports connect through the switch backplane and are mapped to specific RJ-45 jacks on an Ethernet module by VLAN configuration in the switch. The switch references the Internet and LAN ports according to the switch slot in which the E-MSM765 zl is installed. (If, for example, the E-MSM765 zl is installed in slot C, the first port [C1] corresponds to the Internet port, and the second port [C2] corresponds to the LAN port.) As on the E-MSM760, Port 1 on the E-MSM765 zl is the Internet port and Port 2 is the LAN port. There is also a USB port on the E-MSM765 zl for file transfers by USB device to and from the controller. And finally, like the E-MSM760, the E-MSM765 zl can manage up to 200 APs. It is shipped with a 40-AP license, and additional 40-AP licenses can be purchased up to capacity.
Rev. 10.31
15 19
HP E-MSM415 RF Security Sensor

HP E-MSM415 RF Security Sensor
HP E-MSM APs HP E-MSM317 Access Device HP E-Series Controllers HP E-MSM415 RF Security Sensor
19
Rev. 10.31
As its name suggests, the HP E-MSM415 RF Security Sensor is not an AP but rather a dedicated RF security sensor. Like the HP E-MSM320, E-MSM325, and E-MSM335 APs, however, the HP E-MSM415 RF Security Sensor works with HP RF Manager to provide wireless intrusion detection and prevention. Its single 802.1 1a/b/g/n radio security sensor continuously scans the 2.4 and 5 GHz bands to detect and counter security threats for 802.1 1a/b/g/n wireless devices and APs. In certain instances you will need to use the config shell to manually configure the EMSM415. We will discuss these instances in Module 17: Basic Configuration of HP ESeries Wireless Products. The config shell supports a pre-defined set of commands used to configure the Sensor. Zero configuration is also an option for the E-MSM415: it can configure itself automatically. Once configured, you can manage the E-MSM415 through the RF Manager Web browser interface.
15 20
Rev. 10.31
HP E-MSM415 RF Security Sensor (Cont.)

HP E-MSM415 RF Security Sensor (Cont.)
Same form factor as the E-MSM410 AP Three integrated antennas No external antenna connectors One 10/100/1000 port Serial console port with an RJ-45 connector 802.3af PoE
Ethernet port Console port
20 Rev. 10.31
The E-MSM415 shares its form factor with the HP E-MSM410 AP. In addition to the single 802.1 1a/b/g/n radio, it includes the following:
Three integrated dual-band 2.4/5 GHz omnidirectional antennas (they radiate horizontally in all directions, providing 360 degrees of coverage) One 10/100/1000 Ethernet port and RJ-45 serial console port connector Support for 802.3af PoE only (not compatible with an external power supply)
Rev. 10.31
15 21
Summary
Summary
The HP E-Series wireless portfolio includes APs, the E-MSM317 Access Device, controllers, and the E-MSM415 RF Security Sensor. These products operate on IEEE 802.11 standards, delivering a variety of data rates. The E-MSM415 detects and counters security threats for 802.11 wireless solutions. Most APs support external antennas to shape and extend wireless coverage. Most of these are omnidirectional, providing 360 degrees of coverage. E-MSM Controllers provide centralized, policy-based configuration and management. A license can be installed that enables Layer 3 mobility as well as a number of other features. For the most part you configure and manage these devices using a Web browser interface.
21 Rev. 10.31
The HP E-Series wireless portfolio is made up of the HP E-M1 AP, HP 10 MultiService Mobility (E-MSM) indoor and outdoor APs, the HP E-MSM317 Access Device, HP E-MSM Access and Mobility Controllers, and the HP EMSM415 RF Security Sensor. These products operate on IEEE 802.1 standards, delivering a variety of data 1 rates. APs are available that support the latest 802.1 standard to increase 1n network speed and reliability and extend the operating distance of wireless networks. And the E-MSM415 uses its radio to detect and counter security threats for 802.1 1a/b/g/n wireless devices and APs. Many E-MSM APs integrate antennas, and most support external antennas as well to shape and extend wireless coverage. Most of these external antennas are omnidirectional, providing 360 degrees of coverage. E-MSM700 Series Access Controllers provide centralized, policy-based configuration and management of E-MSM APs and the E-MSM317. Mobility Controllers are Access Controllers with a license installed that enables Layer 3 mobility as well as a number of other features. Though most of the devices also offer a CLI, for the most part you will configure and manage them using a Web browser interface.
15 22
Rev. 10.31
HP E-Series Wireless Hardware

Module 16
Objectives
This module introduces you to the HP E-Series wireless hardware components that you should be familiar with to provide support to E-Series wireless customers. After completing this module, you should be able to:

Identify E-Series wireless device LEDs and use them to troubleshoot problems Reboot and reset E-Series wireless devices using a reset button or the Web browser interface as applicable
Rev. 10.31
16 1
LEDs
LEDs
LEDs HP E-Series AP LEDs: Autonomous Mode HP E-Series AP LEDs: Controlled Mode HP E-MSM317 Access Device LEDs HP E-Series Controller LEDs HP E-MSM415 RF Security Sensor LEDs Reset Button
Rev. 10.31
This section explains how to interpret the various LEDs found on HP E-Series wireless devices, and to use them to determine what is happening on a particular E-Series wireless device. For a complete explanation of E-Series wireless device LEDs, refer to the Quickstart or Installation and Getting Started Guide for the specific wireless model. These guides are available at http://h10144.www1.hp.com/customercare/support/manuals/ index.htm.
16 2
Rev. 10.31
HP E-Series AP LEDs: Autonomous Mode

HP E-Series AP LEDs: Autonomous Mode
Info (E-MSM422) Power Ethernet Radio 1 802.1 1a/b/g Radio 1 Radio 1 802.1 1n Radio 2
4 Rev. 10.31
Radio
Radio 2
E-MSM422
E-MSM335
Radio 3
Each E-Series wireless AP has status LEDs. In autonomous mode the status LEDs convey the following information: The Power LED shows if the AP is receiving power. If the Power LED is blinking, the AP is starting up. If it continues to blink after several minutes, the software failed to load. Try Resetting or power cycling the AP. The Ethernet LED shows if data is being sent or received through the Ethernet port. The LED is off if there is no activity, or blinking if activity is present. There is also a Radio LEDor on the E-MSM422 and E-MSM335, three Radio LEDs.
On the E-MSM410 and E-MSM310 the Radio LED shows if the radio is transmitting or receiving data. Blinking confirms activity. The same is true on the E-M1 though on this AP the LED is labeled Wireless rather than Radio. 10, On the E-MSM325 and E-MSM320 the Radio LED shows if either or both radios are transmitting or receiving data. And as you can see on the slide, on the E-MSM422:

Rev. 10.31
The Radio 1 802.1 LED shows if data is being sent or received through 1n Radio 1s 802.1 signal. 1n The Radio 1 802.1 a/b/g LED shows if data is being sent or received 1 through Radio 1s 802.1 a/b/g signal. 1 The Radio 2 LED shows if data is being sent or received through Radio 2.
16 3
On the E-MSM335 the LEDs from left to right are Radio 1, Radio 2, and Radio 3. These are shown on the slide as well. Each LED shows if data is being sent or received through that radio.
Finally, as you can see above, the E-MSM422 and E-MSM335 also have an Info LED, which shows if the AP is fully operational. This LED is only functional on the EMSM422.
16 4
Rev. 10.31
HP E-Series AP LEDs: Controlled Mode

HP E-Series AP LEDs: Controlled Mode
E-MSM AP LEDs also provide information during startup/discovery in controlled mode. Once the discovery process is complete:
The Power light remains on. The Ethernet and Radio lights blink to indicate the presence
of traffic.
Rev. 10.31
During startup/discovery in controlled mode, E-MSM AP LEDs provide the following information:
LED Behavior
The Power light blinks once every two seconds. The Power light blinks once per second.
Description
The AP is starting up. The AP is looking for an IP address, or building the list of VLANs on which to perform discovery. The management tool is available until discovery occurs. The AP has obtained an IP address and is attempting to discover the controller. The AP has found a controller and is attempting to establish a secure management tunnel with it. The AP has received a discovery reply from two or more controllers with the same priority setting. The AP is unable to connect with either controller until the priority conflict is resolved. The AP is attempting to establish a local mesh link to a master node. The AP is attempting to establish wired connectivity.
The Power, Ethernet, and Radio lights blink in sequence from left to right. The Power light is on. The Radio and Ethernet lights blink alternately until the secure management tunnel is established. The Power and Radio lights blink alternately and quickly. The Ethernet light is off.
The Power and Radio lights blink slowly. The Power and Ethernet lights blink slowly.
The LEDs on the access point are very useful tools to establish why an AP may not be discovered by a controller. If, during the discovery phase the process fails, the APs LEDs provide insight into what part of the process failed.
Rev. 10.31
16 5
The most likely causes are as follows:
No DHCP server is availableIf your customer is relying on the controller for DHCP services, remember that a controllers DHCP server is disabled at factory default settings. No controller is available to communicate with the APCheck the controllers IP address, and check that the controller has a valid default gateway address. The AP or the controller could be defective.
Once the discovery process is complete, and the AP has established a secure management tunnel to a controller, the Power light remains on and the Ethernet and Radio lights blink to indicate the presence of traffic.
16 6
Rev. 10.31
HP E-MSM317 Access Device LEDs

HP E-MSM317 Access Device LEDs
During discovery
LEDs provide same information (except local
mesh) as E-MSM APs

Relevant LEDs are Power, Uplink, and P2
After discovery
LEDs provide same information as E-MSM APs Relevant LEDs are Power,
P1, P2, P3, P4, Uplink, and Wi-Fi
P1, P2, Uplink, and Power LEDs
P3, P4, PSE, and Wi-Fi LEDs
Rev. 10.31
The LEDs for the HP E-MSM317 Access Device are located to the left of Port 2 and to the right of Port 4. When the E-MSM317 is fully installed, the status lights are not visible because they are covered by the trim panel. As you can see in the following table, while the E-MSM317 attempts to discover and establish a management tunnel with an E-MSM controller, its LEDs provide the same information as the E-MSM APs (with the exception of local mesh information). Where the APs LEDs are called Power, Ethernet, and Radio, however, the E-MSM317s relevant LEDs are called Power, Uplink, and P2.
LED Behavior
The Power light blinks once every two seconds. The Power light blinks once per second.
Description
The E-MSM317 is starting up. The E-MSM317 is looking for an IP address, or building the list of VLANs on which to perform discovery. The management tool is available until discovery occurs. The E-MSM317 has obtained an IP address and is attempting to discover the controller. The E-MSM317 has found a controller and is attempting to establish a secure management tunnel with it. The E-MSM317 has received a discovery reply from two or more controllers with the same priority setting. The EMSM317 is unable to connect with either controller until the priority conflict is resolved. The E-MSM317 is attempting to establish an Ethernet connection to the Uplink port.
The Power, Uplink, and P2 lights blink in sequence from left to right. The Power light is on. The Uplink and P2 lights blink alternately until the secure management tunnel is established. The Power and Uplink lights blink alternately and quickly. The P2 light is off.
The Power and Uplink lights blink slowly.
Rev. 10.31
16 7
Once the discovery process is complete, and the E-MSM317 has established a secure management tunnel to an E-MSM controller, the LEDs provide the information shown below:
Like the Power LED on the E-MSM APs, the E-MSM317s Power LED shows if the device is receiving power. Like the Ethernet LED on the E-MSM APs, the E-MSM317s P1, P2, P3, P4, and Uplink LEDs show if data is being sent or received through the corresponding Ethernet port. Like the Radio LED on the E-MSM APs, the E-MSM317s Wi-Fi LED that shows if the radio is transmitting or receiving data.
16 8
Rev. 10.31
HP E-Series Controller LEDs: E-MSM710

Power LED
Is the controller receiving power?
Ethernet LEDs: LAN and Internet

Is data being sent or received through the port?
Front Panel
Status LEDs
7 Rev. 10.31
Power LAN port Internet port
Like the wireless E-MSM APs, the HP E-MSM710 Access Controller and HP E-MSM710 Mobility Controller have Power and Ethernet status LEDs that convey the following information:
The Power LED shows if the controller is receiving power. (If the Power LED is blinking, the controller is starting up. If it continues to blink after several minutes, the software failed to load. Try resetting or power cycling the controller.) The Ethernet LEDs shows if data is being sent or received through the Ethernet port. There is one LED for the LAN port and one for the Internet port.
Rev. 10.31
16 9

Power LED
Is the controller receiving power?
Fault LED
Has a fault occurred on the controller? Did the self test fail?
Locator LED
Where in the rack is
Power, Fault, and Locator LEDs
Ethernet LEDs Front Panel
this controller?
Ethernet LEDs: LAN and Internet

Is data being sent or received through the port? What is the link speed?
8 Rev. 10.31
LEDs are included on the left and right edges of the E-MSM760s RJ-45 connectors. Like the E-MSM710, the HP E-MSM760 Access Controller and HP E-MSM760 Mobility Controller have a Power LED and Ethernet LEDs, though in addition to Ethernet LEDs indicating whether data is being sent or received through the ports, the E-MSM760 has Ethernet LEDs that indicate link speed as well. These LEDs and all others are shown in the table below:
LED
Power (green)
State
Off Blinking On Off Blinking On
Description
The E-MSM760 has no power. The E-MSM 760 is starting up. If the Power LED continues to flash after several minutes, the software failed to load. Try resetting or power cycling the AP. The E-MSM760 is fully operational. There are no fault conditions on the E-MSM760. A fault has occurred on the E-MSM760. This LED is on briefly at the beginning of the self test after the E-MSM760 is powered on or reset. If it remains on, the AP encountered a hardware failure or has failed its self test. This LED can be used to locate the E-MSM760 within a group of devices, typically in a rack. It remains on until it is manually turned off. The normal state for this LED is off. There is no Ethernet link. Data is being sent or received. An Ethernet link has been established, but there is no transmit/receive activity. The link speed is 10 Mbps. The link speed is 100 Mbps. The link speed is 1000 Mbps. Rev. 10.31
Fault (orange)
Locator (blue) Ethernet LEDs (right edge) Ethernet LEDs (left edge)
On Off Off Blinking On Off On (green) On (orange)
16 10
HP E-Series Controller LEDs: E-MSM765 zl

HP E-Series Controller LEDs: E-MSM765 zl
Module Status LED
Is the E-MSM765 zl fully operational?
Module Locator LED

In which chassis is the controller?
CF Status/HDD Status LEDs

Have the compact flash and
HDD Status LED Compact Flash LED
hard disk drives initialized?
HDD Activity LED

Is the hard disk drive active?
Network Activity LED

9 Rev. 10.31
Module Status LED Module Locator LED
Network Activity LED HDD Activity LED
Is there network activity on one or both internal ports?
A couple of the LEDs on the E-MSM765 zl are similar to LEDs on the E-MSM760. Others are unique to this switch module. The table below lists the E-MSM765 zls modules and explains their function:
LED
Module Status (green)
State
Blinking green Solid green Blinking/solid orange Blinking/solid
Description
Initialization was successful. This LED stays in this state when the EMSM765 zl is booted to the Service OS. The E-MSM765 zl is fully operational. Error condition This LED is off by default.* This LED can be used to locate a specific module in an area full of chassis. It displays as solid only when the E-MSM765 zl is inserted into a chassis. Soft reboots do not enable the LED. You can enable it using the following switch command: services <slot ID> locate <blink [duration] | off | on [duration]> The LED is off by default. CF/HDD (compact flash/hard disk drive) has initialized. CF/HDD is not detected. This LED is off by default.* The drive is active. The drive is not active. There is network activity on one or both internal ports. If either of the ports fails, the E-MSM765 zl Status LED is set to blinking orange. There is no network activity on either port.
Module Locator (blue)
CF Status/HDD Status (green/orange) HDD Activity (green) Network Activity (green)
Solid green Solid orange Blinking Off Blinking
Off Rev. 10.31
16 11
*At boot, the Module Status, CF Status, and HDD Status LEDs are solid green for approximately two seconds, then solid orange for the same amount of time, and then back to solid green for approximately one second. Finally, all are turned off.
There are also a number of LEDs on the HP E8200 zl Series and HP E5400 zl Series switches that monitor the status of the E-MSM765 zl. These LEDS are related to the modules self test, which takes place both when the switch is powered on after the module is installed in the chassis, and when the E-MSM765 zl is installed while the switch already has power. The following LEDs on the switch help determine if the E-MSM765 zl has passed the self test:
Test LEDThis is on briefly while the module is undergoing the self test, and then goes off. (Note: If the E-MSM765 zl was installed with the switch powered off, and then the switch was powered on, the Test LED will stay on for the duration of the self test.) Fault LEDThis LED is off if the E-MSM765 zl installed properly. Module Status LEDThis LED goes on as soon as the E-MSM765 zl is installed and the switch is powered on. It stays on.
16 12
Rev. 10.31
HP E-MSM415 RF Security Sensor LEDs

HP E-MSM415 RF Security Sensor LEDs
Power, Ethernet, and Radio LEDs The LEDs work in combination
Is the E-MSM415 receiving power? Is it working normally? Is it performing troubleshooting? Is it performing intrusion detection? Is an upgrade in progress? Did it get an Ethernet link? Did it receive a valid IP address?
10 Rev. 10.31
Power, Ethernet, and Radio LEDs
Like the wireless E-MSM AP, the HP E-MSM415 RF Security Sensor has Power, Ethernet, and Radio LEDs. Together these LEDs identify 12 possible states that the Sensor can be in. For example, three solid green lights indicate the sensor is receiving power, is working normally, and is connected to an HP RF Manager. The lights also tell you when the sensor is performing intrusion prevention or troubleshooting or receiving an upgrade as well as when it cannot get an Ethernet link or valid IP address via DHCP. Note that, because there is one wireless interface for both 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz, some states are overlapping.
Power LED
Solid Green Solid Green Solid Green Solid Green Solid Green Solid Green
Ethernet LED
Solid Green Solid Green Solid Green Solid Green Solid Green Solid Green
Radio LED
Solid Green Fast Blink Slow Blink Fast Blink Fast Blink Fast Blink
Description
The Sensor is receiving power and is working normally. The Sensor is also connected to HP RF Manager. The Sensor is performing troubleshooting on 802.1 1b.g. The Sensor is performing intrusion prevention on 802.1 1b/g. The Sensor is performing troubleshooting on 802.1 1a. The Sensor is performing troubleshooting on 802.1 and 1a 802.1 1b/g. The Sensor is performing troubleshooting on 802.1 and intrusion 1a prevention on 802.1 1b/g.
Rev. 10.31
16 13
Solid Green Solid Green Solid Green Solid Green Slow-blink Green Fast-blink Green
Solid Green Solid Green Solid Green Slow Blink Solid Green Fast Blink
Slow Blink Slow Blink Slow Blink Slow Blink Any Any
The Sensor is performing intrusion prevention on 802.1 1a. The Sensor is performing intrusion prevention on 802.1 and 1a troubleshooting 802.1 1b/g. The Sensor is performing intrusion prevention on 802.1 and 1a 802.1 1b/g. The Sensor upgrade is in progress. The Sensor is unable to get an Ethernet link. The Sensor did not receive a valid IP address via the DHCP server.
16 14
Rev. 10.31
Reset Button
Reset Button
LEDs Reset Button
Reset Button for APs and the E-MSM415 Reset Button for the E-MSM317 Access Device Reset Button for the E-MSM Controllers
1 1
Rev. 10.31
There is often more than one way to reboot HP E-Series wireless devices and to reset these devices to their factory default settings, something you may need to do in the course of troubleshooting. This section describes how to use the reset button, when one is available, to reboot and reset E-Series wireless devices. Module 17: Basic Configuration of HP E-Series Wireless Products will explain how to use the Web browser interface to accomplish these same tasks.
Rev. 10.31
16 15
Reset Button for APs and the E-MSM415

Reset Button for APs and the E-MSM415
Indoor APs and the EMSM415 have a reset button. Outdoor APs do not have a reset button.
E-M1 Reset button 10 (behind pictured antenna) E-MSM335/422 Reset button
E-MSM410/415 Reset button
12
Rev. 10.31
E-MSM310/320/325 Reset button
The indoor APs and the E-MSM415 have a reset button that can be used to reboot these devices or reset them to factory defaults.

To reboot, press and quickly release the button. To reset the device to factory defaults, press and hold the reset button until all LEDs blink three times, and then release the button. Note that the factory default mode for the E-MSM APs is controlled mode. The E-M1 AP operates in 10 autonomous mode only.
Resetting an AP to factory defaults has the following effects (in addition to returning all other configured settings to their default status):

The administrator username and password are set to admin. The DHCP client is enabled on any Ethernet ports. If no DHCP server assigns an address to the AP, its address defaults to 192.168.1.1. User-installed AP licenses are deactivated but are not deleted. You must manually enable these licenses once the AP has restarted. (Factory-installed licenses are always active.)
16 16
Rev. 10.31
The reset button for the E-M1 E-MSM310, E-MSM320, E-MSM325, E-MSM335, 10, and E-MSM422 is at the rear of the device, as shown in the slide. The reset button for the E-MSM410 and E-MSM415 is located on the underside of the device, also as shown above. Due to their weatherproof enclosure, the HP E-MSM310-R and HP E-MSM320-R outdoor APs do not have a reset button.
Rev. 10.31
16 17
Reset Button for the E-MSM317 Access Device

Reset Button for the E-MSM317 Access Device
The reset button is located to the left of Port 1.
Reset button
13
Rev. 10.31
The E-MSM317s reset button is located to the left of Port 1. When the E-MSM317 is fully installed, the reset button is covered by the trim panel to prevent tampering.

To reboot the device, press and quickly release the button. To reset the device to factory defaults, press and hold the reset button until the LEDs to the left of Port 2 (Power, Uplink, P2) blink three times, then release the button.
Resetting the E-MSM317 to factory defaults deletes all configuration/provisioning settings and enables the DHCP client on the Uplink port. If no DHCP server assigns an address to the E-MSM317 on startup, the IP address for the Uplink port defaults to 192.168.1.1.
16 18
Rev. 10.31
Reset Button for the E-MSM Controllers

Reset Button for the E-MSM Controllers
Only the E-MSM710 has a reset button.
Reset button
Rear Panel
14
Rev. 10.31
The E-MSM710 is the only controller with a reset button.

To reboot the controller, press and quickly release the button. To reset the controller to factory defaults, press and hold the reset button until the front-panel LEDs flash three times, and then release the button
Resetting the E-MSM710 to factory defaults deletes all configuration settings, resets the administrator username and password to admin, disables the DHCP server on the LAN port, sets the LAN port IP address to 192.168.1.1, and sets the Internet port to operate as a DHCP client. User-installed licenses are retained after a factory reset, but are deactivated.
Note Since the E-MSM 760 and E-MSM765 zl controllers do not have a reset button, you must use the Web browser interface to reset them. You will learn how to do so in Module 17: Basic Configuration of HP E-Series Wireless Products.
Rev. 10.31
16 19
Summary
Summary
You can use the LEDs provided on E-Series wireless devices to determine what is happening on and troubleshoot a particular device. You can reboot many of these devices, and also reset them to factory default settings, using a reset button. The E-MSM310-R, E-MSM320-R, EMSM760, and E-MSM765 zl do not have a reset button.
15
Rev. 10.31
You can use the LEDs provided on E-Series wireless devices to determine what is happening on and troubleshoot a particular device. You can reboot many of these devices, and also reset them to factory default settings, using a reset button. The E-MSM310-R and E-MSM320-R APs and the EMSM760 and E-MSM765 zl Controllers do not have a reset button.
16 20
Rev. 10.31
Basic Configuration of HP E-Series Wireless Products

Module 17
Objectives
This module discusses fundamental aspects of HP E-Series wireless management, including management options, interfaces, and tasks. After completing this module, you should be able to:
List the management interfaces available on each HP E-Series wireless device and decide when you might choose one over another Explain how to establish a management session with each device and begin using the appropriate interface Navigate through and perform fundamental management tasks within the CLI or Web browser interface for the wireless devices
All the wireless products in this module were formerly branded HP ProCurve. Note that some of the Configuration Guides mentioned in this module still carry the old product names in their titles. If you are supporting a switch with an older name, use the Product Naming Conversion Matrix (Appendix C), to identify the new name and find the related information in this course.
Rev. 10.31
17 1
Managing Autonomous HP E-Series APs

Managing Autonomous HP E-Series APs
Managing Autonomous HP E-Series APs Using AP LEDs to Troubleshoot Navigating an APs Web Browser Interface Performing Autonomous AP Software Updates Resetting APs from the Web Browser Interface Reactivating User-Installed AP Licenses After Reset Accessing an AP Using the Default IP Address The AP Config File Assigning an IP Address to an Autonomous AP Managing HP E-Series Controllers Managing the Discovery Process Managing the E-MSM317 Access Device Managing the E-MSM415 RF Security Sensor
3 Rev. 10.31
As discussed in Module 15: HP E-Series Wireless Overview, you have three options for managing an HP E-Series wireless AP in autonomous mode: a Web-based management interface, a command-line interface (CLI), and, finally, SNMP v3, which allows you to manage the AP in the context of other devices on your network. The Web browser interface offers an intuitive, task-based approach. You can access this interface remotely using HTTP over Secure Sockets Layer (HTTPS), a protocol that encrypts data that is part of a Web session. The CLI can be used to perform configuration and management tasks; you can access it via the serial port or an IP connection to any of the AP ports. With these products, however, the robust Web browser interface is the interface of choice. There are no features available through the CLI that cannot be configured through the Web browser interface. This module focuses on managing HP E-MSM APs with the Web browser interface.
17 2
Rev. 10.31
Using AP LEDs to Troubleshoot

Using AP LEDs to Troubleshoot
If the AP is operational, use its LEDs to troubleshoot. See Module 16: HP E-Series Wireless Hardware.
Rev. 10.31
If the autonomous AP you are investigating is still operational, you can use its LEDs to try to determine the cause of the problem. Information on the E-Series wireless AP LEDs can be found in Module 16: HP E-Series Wireless Hardware.
Rev. 10.31
17 3
Navigating an APs Web Browser Interface

Navigating an APs Web Browser Interface
Rev. 10.31
You can also log in to the APs Web browser interface to obtain more information. You can reach the Web browser interface using any station that has IP connectivity to the AP. Access the interface by opening a Web browser, navigating to https://<APs IP address>, and logging in with the correct username and password. (The defaults are admin for both.) On this slide you can see several key elements of the APs Web browser interface. Each tab on the primary navigation bar has its own secondary navigation bar. In this example, we can see the secondary navigation bar for the Network tab. There are two links displayed at the top of every window: Home and Logout. Clicking Home returns you to the home page, and clicking Logout logs you out of the administrator account. Each configuration window has a Save button in the lower right corner. This button saves the changes to the startup configuration. It is recommended that you use Internet Explorer 7.0 or Mozilla Firefox 2.0 to access the APs Web browser interface, but you might be able to use other browsers as well.
17 4
Rev. 10.31
Performing Autonomous AP Software Updates

Performing Autonomous AP Software Updates
Before updating, check for update issues in the Release Notes.
Maintenance > Firmware updates
Rev. 10.31
An incorrect software version can cause a variety of problems, so you might update the software to quickly eliminate it as a source of trouble. Before updating an APs software, however, be sure to check for update issues in the Release Notes. Also, even though configuration settings are preserved during software updates, it is recommended that you back up your configuration settings before updating. See The AP Config File: Backup in this module for details. To update AP software, first obtain the software file and save it to your management computer. Then, in the Web browser interface, select Maintenance > Firmware updates. The Firmware updates window is displayed. Browse to the software file (extension .cim) and then select Install. At the end of the update process, the AP automatically restarts.
Rev. 10.31
17 5
Rebooting/Resetting APs from the Web Browser Interface

Rebooting/Resetting APs from the Web Maintenance > System Browser Interface
Only the indoor APs have a reset button. You can restart and reset all APs from the Web Browser interface. APs can be reset to controlled mode OR autonomous mode.
Note: The E-M110 is a standalone AP.
Maintenance > Config file management
It operates in autonomous mode only.
Rev. 10.31
In Module 16: HP E-Series Wireless Hardware you learned how to reset and reboot APs using the reset buttons on their physical form factor. However, the HP E-MSM310-R and HP E-MSM320-R APs do not have reset buttons. You can reboot these devices and restore them to factory default settings using the Web browser interface. Similarly, you might want to reboot or reset other E-MSM APs, which do have reset buttons, remotely from the Web browser interface. Resetting an AP to the factory defaults returns all configured settings to their default status. Of particular interest to you are the defaults for these settings:

The manager username and password are set to admin. The DHCP client is enabled on any Ethernet ports. If no DHCP server assigns an address to the AP, its address defaults to 192.168.1.1. The AP returns to controlled mode unless you perform a special type of reset described below. (Note that the HP E-M1 AP is a standalone AP. It operates in 10 autonomous mode only.) User-installed licenses are deactivated but are not deleted. You must manually enable these licenses once the AP has restarted. (Factory-installed licenses are always active.)
17 6
Rev. 10.31
Note Before resetting an AP, find out if the customer has saved a copy of a working configuration for that AP. You can also back up the current file yourself. See The AP Config File: Backup in this module.
To reset to factory defaults, navigate to Maintenance > System and click Reset to Factory Default. To reset an AP to factory defaults while keeping it in autonomous mode, navigate to Maintenance > Config file management and click Reset. For complete instructions on rebooting and resetting E-Series wireless APsincluding how to use the CLI to do so if you cannot contact the Web browser interfacerefer to the Quickstart or Installation and Getting Started Guide for the specific wireless model. These guides are available at http://www.hp.com/rnd/support/manuals/index.htm.
Rev. 10.31
17 7
Reactivating User-Installed AP Licenses After Reset

Reactivating User-Installed AP Licenses After Reset
Maintenance > Licenses
After a reset: Factory-installed licenses are automatically reactivated. User-installed licenses must be manually reactivated.
Rev. 10.31
After a factory reset, factory-installed licenses are automatically reactivated, but userinstalled licenses remain in a deactivated state until manually activated. This is done to ensure a true factory-default reset. To activate all user-installed licenses, navigate to Maintenance > Licenses in the APs Web browser interface and click Activate.
17 8
Rev. 10.31
Accessing an AP Using the Default IP Address

Accessing an AP Using the Default IP Address
1. Assign the management station an IP address in the 192.168.1.0/24 network (except 192.168.1.1). 2. Power on the AP and connect it to the station. 3. Access the Web browser interface (https://192.168.1.1). 4. If the AP is an E-MSM AP, change the AP to autonomous mode (if a new AP or an AP reset to controlled mode). Regain access to the Web browser interface. 5. Accept the license agreement. 6. Register the AP. 7. Set the country code. 8. Set the manager password.
9 Rev. 10.31
After you have reset an AP to factory default settings, you might need to reach it at its default IP address (if it does not receive a DHCP address). Similarly, if the AP is not operational and/or needs to be replaced, you will need to access the replacement APs Web browser interface to set it up for the customers network.
Note Before replacing the AP, find out if the customer has saved a copy of a working version of the malfunctioning APs configuration file. You can also back up the current file yourself. See The AP Config File: Backup in this module.
When the customer has a DHCP server that can assign the AP an IP address, you do not need to complete this task. Simply install the AP, discover the dynamicallyassigned IP address (ask the customer to look in the DHCP servers leases), and contact the APs Web browser interface from a management computer connected to the customers LAN.
Rev. 10.31
17 9
Sometimes, however, the customer does not have a DHCP server, does not want to use the DHCP server to assign the AP an IP address, or cannot tell you the address that the server would assign to the AP. In these cases, you should follow these steps to reach the AP at its default IP address of 192.168.1.1/24: 1. Configure these IP settings on your management computer:

2.
IP address = Any address in the 192.168.1.0/24 subnet except 192.168.1.1 Subnet mask = 255.255.255.0 Default gateway = 192.168.1.1 DNS server = 192.168.1.1.
Power on the AP with the included external power supply and connect the Ethernet port on the management computer as follows: a. If the customers setup features a switch that operates at Layer 2, and all ports are in the same VLAN, you can connect both the workstation and any of the APs ports to the switch, and the switch will pass the workstations traffic to the AP. If the switch divides traffic into different VLANs, you can connect the workstation directly to any of the APs ports.
b. 3. 4.
Access the Web browser interface by opening a Web browser to https://192.168.1.1 and typing the default username and password: admin. The default mode for the E-MSM APs is controlled mode, so the fourth task when dealing with an autonomous E-MSM AP is to change the mode to autonomous mode. (The E- M1 AP is a standalone wireless device: It does not have a 10 controlled mode.) When you change the operating mode, the AP reboots. (You can skip this step, if you are configuring an AP that you reset to factory defaults but retained in autonomous mode.) Regain access to the Web browser interface after the AP has rebooted. When you gain access, you will be prompted to accept the license agreement and register your AP. You will then be prompted to set the country code, which ensures the AP operates according to the regulations for the country where it is installed. The final prompt will have you set a new manager password.
5. 6. 7.
17 10
Rev. 10.31
The AP Config File: Backup

The AP Config File: Backup
If resetting or replacing the AP, you can restore all customized settings using the config file.
10
Rev. 10.31
As you have seen, you might be resetting an E-Series wireless AP to factory defaults or replacing it entirely. (For information on what the factory default settings include, see Resetting APs from the Web Browser Interface.) In either case, it is best if you can restore a working configuration to the AP because the configuration file contains all the settings that customize the operation of the AP for the customers network. As noted earlier, you would need a backup configuration file that was either saved out by the customer or by you before you reset or replaced the malfunctioning AP. This slide explains how to back up the file yourself. When you back up the configuration, configuration information is saved in the backup file as follows:
Certificates and private keysIf you specify a password when saving the configuration file, certificates and private keys are encrypted with a key based on the password. This encryption protects the private keys in case the backup file is obtained by an unauthorized user. In addition, only a user who knows the password can restore the certificates and private keys to an AP. If you do not specify a password, certificates and private keys are still encrypted, but with a default key that is identical on all APs. Although the certificates and private keys are still protected within the backup file itself, any user can install them on an AP.
Rev. 10.31
17 11
Manager and operator username/passwordThis information is not saved in the backup configuration file. This means that if you restore a configuration file, the current username and password on the AP are not overwritten. All other configuration informationAll other configuration information is saved as plain text, allowing the settings to be viewed with a standard text editor. In the APs Web browser interface select Maintenance > Config file management. The Config file management screen is displayed. If you want to protect the certificates and private keys with a password, type the password for Password and Confirm Password. Under Backup configuration, click Backup to start the process.
Follow these steps to back up the configuration: 1. 2. 3.
17 12
Rev. 10.31
The AP Config File: Restore

The AP Config File: Restore
1. Browse to and select the config file you want to restore. 2. Enter the password if necessary. 3. Click Restore to load the selected file.
1 1
Rev. 10.31
You restore an APs saved configuration file from the Maintenance > Config file management window. Once you have accessed this window, follow these steps: 1. 4. Under Restore configuration, click Browse under Manual restore to navigate to and select the configuration file that you want to restore. If the configuration file is protected with a password you must supply the correct password to restore the complete configuration. If you supply an invalid password, all settings are restored except for certificates and private keys. Click Restore to load the selected file. The AP automatically restarts once the configuration file has been loaded.
5.
Rev. 10.31
17 13
Assigning an IP Address to an Autonomous AP

Assigning an IP Address to an Autonomous AP
1. Navigate to Network > Ports. 2. Click Bridge port. 3. Configure an IP address, subnet mask and default gateway. 4. Click Save.
12
Rev. 10.31
If you have set the AP back to factory default settings, or have installed a replacement AP, and do not have access to the configuration file to restore the customer-configured settings, the AP will need to be reconfigured. The customer will handle most of the reconfiguration, but you can start by assigning a static IP address to the AP (if it is not assigned one by DHCP). The IP address is assigned to a virtual port, rather than to a physical Ethernet port. This virtual port is called the bridge port, alluding to the fact that all ports on the AP bridge traffic onto a connected network. 1. 2. 3. 4. Navigate to Network > Ports in the top menu of the APs Web browser interface. Click Bridge port. Configure an IP address, subnet mask and default gateway. Click Save. The AP will begin using the new IP address, and you will lose access to the Web browser interface. The E-MSM AP can now be installed on the network.
For more detailed information about the initial setup tasks, see the Quickstart for your device or the HP MSM3xx /MSM4xx Access Points Management and Configuration Guide.
17 14
Rev. 10.31
Managing HP E-Series Controllers

Managing HP E-Series Controllers
Managing Autonomous HP E-Series APs Managing HP E-Series Controllers Using Controlled LEDs to Troubleshoot Navigating a Controllers Web Browser Interface Performing Controller Software Updates Resetting Controllers from the Web Browser Interface Reactivating User-Installed Licenses After Reset Accessing an E-MSM710/E-MSM760 at Its Default IP Address Checking E-MSM765 zl VLAN Assignments Replacing the E-MSM765 zl Controller Accessing an E-MSM765 zl at Factory Defaults The Controller Config File Assigning IP Addresses Managing the Discovery Process Managing the E-MSM317 Access Device Managing the E-MSM415 RF Security Sensor
13 Rev. 10.31
As with the APs, you have three options for managing the E-MSM controllers: a Webbased management interface, a command-line interface (CLI), and, finally, SNMP v3, which allows you to manage the controller and APs in the context of other devices on your network. The Web browser interface offers an intuitive, task-based approach. You can access this interface remotely using HTTP over Secure Sockets Layer (HTTPS), a protocol that encrypts data that is part of a Web session. The CLI can be used to perform configuration and management tasks via the serial port or an IP connection on any of the AP interfaces. With these products, however, the robust Web browser interface is the interface of choice. There are almost no features available through the CLI that cannot be configured through the Web browser interface. This module focuses on managing HP E-MSM Controllers with the Web browser interface. As you will see, however, when working with the HP E-MSM765 zl Controller, you must use its CLI to complete certain tasks.
Rev. 10.31
17 15
Using Controller LEDs to Troubleshoot

Using Controller LEDs to Troubleshoot
If the controller is operational, use its LEDs to troubleshoot. See Module 16, HP E-Series Wireless Hardware Overview.
14
Rev. 10.31
If the controller you are investigating is still operational, you can use its LEDs to try to determine the cause of the problem. Information on the wireless E-MSM Controller LEDs can be found in Module 16: HP E-Series Wireless Hardware.
17 16
Rev. 10.31
Navigating a Controllers Web Browser Interface

Navigating a Controllers Web Browser Interface
15
Rev. 10.31
You can also log in to the controllers Web browser interface to obtain more information. On a management computer that has IP connectivity to the controller, open a Web browser, navigate to https://<controllers LAN port IP address>, and log in with the correct username and password (the defaults are admin for both). On this slide you can see several key elements of the controllers Web browser interface, which is quite similar to the APs in design, with primary and secondary navigation bars. However, the controllers Web browser interface includes a new area to the left. At the top, is the Summary section, which indicates the status of APs discovered and configured by the controller. Below is the Network Tree. The selected element in the Network Tree determines the configuration options that are available in the primary and secondary tabs. From Controller, you configure settings that apply to the controller itself as well as to access-controlled client traffic that the controller handles. You can expand Controller, to see the VSCs and Controlled APs elements. From VSCs, you configure settings for the services offered by the controlled APs. (Virtual Service Communities, or VSCs, are similar to WLANs but provide more options.) The Controlled APs element expands into various AP groups, which in turn expand to display individual APs. For example, as you can see in the slide, the M1-Alternates group includes one AP. APs inherit settings from their group, which inherits settings for the Controlled APs level, but customers can break the inheritance and configure individual settings for groups and APs. If you need to configure an APs settings, you
Rev. 10.31
17 17
need to pay attention to your location in the Network Tree and to how settings are being inherited to ensure that your configurations are applied correctly.
Note This moduleand the controllers documentationwill use double brackets to separate the navigation for the Network Tree from the navigation for the primary and secondary tabs. For example, the window in the slide is Controlled APs > [AP group name] > [Individual AP name] >> Configuration > Sensor.
There are two links displayed at the top of every window: Home and Logout. Clicking Home returns you to the home page, and clicking Logout logs you out of the administrator account. Each configuration window has a Save button in the lower right corner. This button saves the changes to the startup configuration. It is recommended that you use Internet Explorer 7.0 or Mozilla Firefox 2.0 to access the controllers Web browser interface, but you might be able to use other browsers as well.
17 18
Rev. 10.31
Performing Controller Software Updates

Performing Controller Software Updates
Before updating, check for update issues in the Release Notes.
Controller >> Maintenance > Firmware updates
16
Rev. 10.31
As on the APs, a software update to an E-MSM Controller might aid in quick problem resolution. Before updating a controllers software, however, be sure to check for update issues in the Release Notes. Also, even though configuration settings are preserved during software updates, it is recommended that you back up your configuration settings before updating. See The Config File: Backup in this module for details. To update software, first obtain the file and save it to your management computer. In the controllers Web browser interface, select Controller >> Maintenance > Firmware updates. The Firmware updates window is displayed. Browse to the software file (extension .cim) and then select Install. At the end of the update process, the controller automatically restarts. Note that the controller automatically updates the software for all APs that it controlswhich means that APs will reset to apply the new software, temporarily disconnecting any wireless users. You should schedule the software update with the customer to minimize inconvenience for users.
Rev. 10.31
17 19
Rebooting/Resetting Controllers from the Web Browser Interface

Rebooting/Resetting Controllers from the Web Browser Interface Controller >> Maintenance > System
Only the E-MSM710 has a reset button. You can restart and reset the E-MSM710/760/765 zl from the Web Browser Controller >> Maintenance > Config file management interface.
17
Rev. 10.31
The E-MSM710 is the only controller with a reset button. However, you can also reboot and reset the E-MSM710and the E-MSM760 and E-MSM765 zlusing the Web browser interface. Resetting a controller to factory defaults:
Deletes all configuration settings or returns them to their default values. In particular, note these default settings:
Administrator username and password are admin. The DHCP server on the LAN port is disabled. The LAN port IP address is 192.168.1.1 (except for the E-MSM765 zl LAN port, which has no factory-default IP address). The Internet port operates as a DHCP client.
Causes all controlled APs to lose the configurations provided by the controller and their support for wireless servicesunless they become controlled by another controller Retains user-installed licenses but deactivates them
17 20
Rev. 10.31
Note Before resetting the controller to factory default settings, find out if the customer has saved a copy of the malfunctioning controllers configuration file. You may also be able to back up the current file yourself. See The Controller Config File: Backup in this module.
To reboot a controller, navigate to Controller >> Maintenance > System and click Restart. You can reset the controllers to factory defaults by navigating to Controller >> Maintenance > Config file management and clicking Reset. The controller will automatically restart itself.
Rev. 10.31
17 21
Reactivating User-Installed Licenses After Reset

Reactivating User-Installed Licenses After Reset
After a reset: Factory-installed licenses are automatically reactivated. User-installed licenses must be manually reactivated.
Controller >> Maintenance > Licenses
18
Rev. 10.31
After a factory reset, factory-installed licenses are automatically reactivated, but userinstalled licenses remain in a deactivated state until manually activated. This is done to ensure a true factory-default reset. To activate all user-installed licenses, navigate to Controller >> Maintenance > Licenses in the controllers Web browser interface and click Activate.
17 22
Rev. 10.31
Accessing an E-MSM710/E-MSM760 at Its Default IP Address

Accessing an E-MSM710/E-MSM760 at Its Default IP Address
1. Assign the management station an IP address in the 192.168.1.0/24 network (except 192.168.1.1). 2. Power on the controller and connect it to the management station. 3. Access the Web browser interface (https://192.168.1.1). 4. Accept the license agreement. 5. Register the controller. 6. Set the country code. 7. Set the manager password. 8. Configure the time server.
19
Rev. 10.31
Just as when you reset an E-MSM AP to factory default settings or install a replacement AP, you must gain access to it, you must gain access to a reset or new EMSM Controller. The E-MSM710 and E-MSM760 Controllers have a default IP address, 192.168.1.1/24, which you can reach.
Note The E-MSM765 zl Controller does not have a default IP address. You will learn how to reach the E-MSM765 zl a bit later. Note Before replacing the controller, find out if the customer has saved a copy of the malfunctioning controllers configuration file. You can also back up the current file yourself. See The Controller Config File: Backup in this module.
Follow these steps to reach the controller: 1. Configure these IP settings on your management computer:

Rev. 10.31
IP address = Any address in the 192.168.1.0/24 subnet except 192.168.1.1 Subnet mask = 255.255.255.0 Default gateway = 192.168.1.1 DNS server = 192.168.1.1.
17 23
2.
Power on the controller with the included external power supply and connect the Ethernet port on the management computer as follows: a. If the customers setup features a switch that operates at Layer 2, and all ports are in the same VLAN, you can connect both the workstation and the E-MSM Controllers LAN port to the switch, and the switch will pass the workstations traffic to the controller. If the switch divides traffic into different VLANs, you can connect the workstation directly to the controllers LAN port.
b. 3.
Access the Web browser interface by opening a Web browser to https://192.168.1.1. (A security certificate warning is displayed the first time you connect. Select whatever option is needed in your Web browser to trust the certificate.) Log in with the default username and password: admin. When you gain access you will be prompted to accept the license agreement, register your controller, and set the country code. The final prompt will have you set the administrator password. By default, the E-MSM Controller retrieves its time from a Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) server pool that is reserved for HP Networking devices. However, if the controller is not yet connected to the Internet, you cannot retrieve the time in this way. Having the correct time is particularly important to get accurate logs with proper timestamps for audits or troubleshooting, so, in this case, you should configure the time manually. In addition, the time configured on the controller is used on all controlled APs. Synchronization and certificate problems can occur if the controller time is not accurate. Configure the time settings in the Management > System time settings.
4. 5.
6.
17 24
Rev. 10.31
Checking E-MSM765 zl VLAN Assignments

Checking E-MSM765 zl VLAN Assignments
Verify that: The untagged VLANs for the modules internal ports match the IP addresses on the E-MSM765 zl:
Internet port = <slot>1 LAN port = <slot>2
The LAN port and Internet ports are in different untagged VLANs.
20
Rev. 10.31
As you may recall from Module 15: HP E-Series Wireless Overview, the E-MSM765 zls Internet and LAN ports do not have external RJ-45 interfaces, and you cannot connect Ethernet cables to them. Instead, the two 10G ports are internal to the module and connect to the switch through the switch backplane. The switch references these internal ports according to the switch slot in which the EMSM765 zl is installed. For example, if the E-MSM765 zl is installed in slot C, the first port (C1) corresponds to the Internet port, and the second port (C2) corresponds to the LAN port. Although you cannot see the connection, traffic is transmitted between the EMSM765 zl and the switch on these ports just as it is on other Ethernet ports:
Untagged traffic is assigned to the internal ports untagged VLAN and is forwarded on other switch ports in this VLAN. Traffic tagged for a particular VLAN is forwarded on other switch ports in this VLAN. In addition, the customer might have set up the E-MSM765 zl and the switch such that the switch routes some of the traffic from the E-MSM765 zl.
On the E-MSM765 zl itself, you cannot see the untagged VLAN assignments. Instead, the LAN port and Internet port each have an IP address, and the controller transmits traffic from those IP addresses as untagged. When the switch receives untagged traffic from either the LAN or Internet port, it determines the VLAN ID for
Rev. 10.31
17 25
traffic according to the untagged VLAN assigned to that internal port in its own configuration. Because the switch must assign the controllers untagged traffic to the correct VLANs in order for the controller to function on the customers LAN, you should check the VLAN assignments in the switch configuration. The untagged VLAN for the internal port 1 must correspond with the subnet for the IP address on the E-MSM765 zls Internet port, and that for internal port 2 must correspond with the subnet for the LAN port address. If necessary, you must alter the configuration. Also keep in mind these rules for how the E-MSM765 zl ports differ from typical Ethernet switch ports:
The E-MSM765 zl LAN port and Internet port must be on different VLANs and subnets. Unlike a switch port which does not require an untagged VLAN assignment if it has a tagged one, the E-MSM765 zl LAN port should be placed in an untagged VLAN because its IP address is always in that VLAN. (The port can also have tagged VLAN memberships for specific purposes beyond the scope of this course.) The Internet port, on the other hand, might not require an untagged VLAN. In the E-MSM765 zl configuration, the customer can choose not to configure an IP address on this port. Ask the customer if the E-MSM765 zl Internet port has no IP address and is configured only to carry VLAN traffic, which means that it carries on tagged VLAN traffic.
Note Most of the information above applies equally to E-MSM710 and E-MSM760 Controllers except that these controllers connect to visible Ethernet jacks.
You learned how to manage VLANs on an HP E-Series switch in Module 7: Basic Configuration of HP E-Series Switches. To review, refer to the table below.
Command
show vlan port <port ID> vlan <vlan ID> untagged <port ID> vlan <vlan ID> untagged <port ID>
Function
Displays the VLANs configured on a port Assigns the specified VLAN as the untagged VLAN for the specified port Assigns the specified VLAN as a tagged VLAN on the specified port
Example
show vlan port c2 vlan 50 untagged c2
vlan 55 tagged c1
For more information on defining and assigning VLANs to the E-MSM765 zl ports, see the controllers Getting Started Guide.
17 26
Rev. 10.31
Replacing the E-MSM765 zl Controller

Replacing the E-MSM765 zl Controller
Hot-swapping an HP switch module is detailed in Module 6: HP E-Series Switch Hardware.
Hot-Swapping
21
Rev. 10.31
If you determine that the E-MSM765 zl Controller needs to be replaced, the procedure for hot-swapping an HP switch module is detailed in Module 6: HP ESeries Switch Hardware. Please see the section entitled Hot-Swapping or HotInserting Modules.
Rev. 10.31
17 27
Accessing an E-MSM765 zl at Factory Defaults

Accessing an E-MSM765 zl at Factory Defaults
No factory-default LAN port IP address
Access the E-MSM765 zl CLI from the switch CLI. Configure the LAN port address. Launch the management tool using that address.
22 Rev. 10.31
You will need to know in which switch slot the module is housed.
Earlier, you learned about reaching E-MSM710 and E-MSM760 controllers that are operating at their factory defaults. But unlike the E-MSM710 and E-MSM760, the HP E-MSM765 zl has no factory-default LAN port IP address. You will need to assign its LAN port an IP address before you can access the controller through the Web browser interface. Because the E-MSM765 zl is a switch module, rather than a standalone appliance like the E-MSM710 and E-MSM760, the starting point for this procedure is the host switch CLI. But before you can proceed, you must first determine in which switch module slot the E-MSM765 zl is housed and also the switch-assigned index of the module. The slide above illustrates how numbers are assigned to switch module slots. The index number is assigned by the switch to identify the type of ONE application (or product) that is running on an HP Services zl Modulein this case, the EMSM765 zl application. The index number is dynamic, so you cannot memorize the index number but must check it at each customers site. That is, when the switch boots, it assigns an index to each type of ONE application that is running on an HP Services zl Module installed within it. The switch assigns index 2 to the application on the first module that loads, 3 to the next type of application, and so forth. (Index 1 is reserved for the Service OS CLI for all Services zl Modulebased products.) If more than one module runs the same application, the same index number applies. To determine the index assigned to your module, enter the command show services at the switch CLI prompt in either the manager or global configuration context.
17 28
Rev. 10.31
After you have determined the correct slot and index, you can access the CLI for the E-MSM765 zl and set the E-MSM765 zl LAN port IP address: 1. Enter the CLI for the correct E-MSM765 zl controller module, specifying the slot and index.
services <slot-id> <index>
2. 3.
The License Agreement is displayed. Read and accept it. Move to the privileged and then to the global configuration context of the EMSM765 zl CLI:
enable config
4. 5.
Select the E-MSM765 zl LAN port interface:

interface ip lan
Assign the interface an IP address on the customers network and the correct subnet mask for the addresss subnet.
To configure a management computer to access the replacement E-MSM765 zl Controller: 1. 2. Configure the management computer to use a static IP address on the controllers subnet. Set the subnet mask, default gateway, and DNS server. Connect your management computer to an Ethernet port on the switch that is untagged for the same VLAN that is untagged on the E-MSM765 zl internal port 2 (the LAN port). Open a command prompt and confirm that the E-MSM765 zl LAN port can now be pinged at the address to which it was set. In a Web browser, navigate to https://<controllers LAN port IP address >. A security certificate warning is displayed the first time you connect to the management tool. This is normal. Select whatever option is needed in your Web browser to continue to trust the certificate and continue to the Web browser interface. When you gain access, you will be prompted to register your controller and set the country code. The final prompt will have you set the administrator password. You should consider whether you need to set the time as on an E-MSM710 or EMSM760.
3. 4. 5.
6. 7.
Rev. 10.31
17 29
The Controller Config File: Backup

The Controller Config File: Backup
Controller >> Maintenance > Config file management
If resetting or replacing the controller, you can restore all customized settings using the config file.
23
Rev. 10.31
As part of the troubleshooting process, you have learned about restoring an E-Series wireless controller to factory defaults. (For information on what the factory default settings include, see Resetting Controllers from the Web Browser Interface.) You have also learned when to replace an inoperable controller with a new controller, which itself would initially be at factory default settings. To restore the controller to full functionality in the customers network, you need a back up copy of the original controllers working configuration file. Therefore, as a note reminded you, you always first find out if the customer has saved a copy of that configuration or, if possible, back up the current file yourself. This slide shows you how to do the latter task. Backing up an E-MSM Controllers configuration saves configuration information to a file in the same way that backing up an autonomous APs configuration does. (Please refer to The AP Config File: Backup.) For example, private keys for certificates are encrypted. Of course, the controllers configuration contains more settings and configurations for many controlled APs. 1. 2. 3.
17 30
In the controllers Web browser interface select Maintenance > Config file management. The Config file management screen is displayed. If you want to protect the certificates and private keys with a password, type the password for Password and Confirm Password. Under Backup configuration, click Backup to start the process.
Rev. 10.31
The Controller Config File: Restore

The Controller Config File: Restore
1. Browse to and select the config file you want to restore. 2. Enter the password if necessary. 3. Click Restore to load the selected file.
Controller >> Maintenance > Config file management
24
Rev. 10.31
Follow these steps to restore an E-MSM Controllers saved configuration file: 1. 2. 3. Select Maintenance > Config file management in the Web browser interface. The Config file management screen is displayed. Under Restore configuration, click Browse under Manual restore to navigate to and select the configuration file that you want to restore. If the configuration file is protected with a password you must supply the correct password to restore the complete configuration. If you supply an invalid password, all settings are restored except for certificates and private keys. Click Restore to load the selected file. The controller automatically restarts once the configuration file has been loaded.
4.
Rev. 10.31
17 31
Assigning IP Addresses: Controller LAN and Internet Ports

Assigning IP Addresses: Controller LAN and Internet Ports
If:
You have reset the controller. You do not have the config file.
E-MSM710
Then:
You will need to assign an IP address
Internet port
LAN port
to the LAN port and/or Internet port.
E-MSM760
Note:
You must use both ports when the
controller is an E-MSM765 zl.
E-MSM765 zl LAN/Internet ports connect through the switch backplane.
25
Rev. 10.31
If you have replaced or reset an E-MSM controller and do not have access to a backup file to restore the customer-configured settings, you should assign at least one IP address to the controller so that the customer can finish reconfiguring it. Decide whether to assign an address to either or both the controllers LAN and Internet ports based on the customers deployment. The two ports on the E-MSM controller have been designed to perform specific functions. The traditional use of the ports is:
The LAN port is client-facing, or the downlink port. That is, controlled APs and the controller communicate on this port. And, if the APs forward client traffic to the controller for handling (typically, guest client traffic), the traffic arrives on this port. Finally, if the controller is filtering and controlling wired devices trafficfor example, forcing wired users as well as wireless users to log in through a Web page before accessing the Internetthese devices are on VLANs that are either untagged or tagged on the controller LAN port. The Internet port is server or Internet-facing, or the uplink port. That is, when the controller is filtering and controlling client traffic, it forwards or routes the traffic out the Internet port.
That said, in reality some customers use the Internet port to control APs and to receive traffic from wireless clients. For example, many small and medium-sized businesses have a flat network structure: they have one VLAN (and one subnet). In
17 32
Rev. 10.31
these networks the E-MSM Controller has one connection to the network through its Internet port. The E-MSM Controllers LAN port is not used. The Internet port is preferred over the LAN port in this scenario because the controller can only route the wireless clients access-controlled traffic out of the Internet port. Even for customers with multiple VLANs, an Internet-port-only deployment might offer a desirable simplicity. However, make sure that the customer understands the limitations of this deployment so that he or she does not call on you to troubleshoot the limitations as problems:
The controller cannot provide dynamic IP addresses to APs on the Internet port (DHCP services for APs are supported on the LAN port but not the Internet port). All client traffic that is filtered and controlled by the E-MSM Controller passes through the Internet port. However, most customers need not worry because the controller only handles traffic for users that must log in through a Web portal (typically guests) and because the controllers Internet port bandwidth usually far exceeds these users needs. Typically, only customers with a high volume of guest traffic (such as a very large convention center) would need to consider whether they might need the extra bandwidth of the LAN port.
In addition, a customer might run into problems when configuring an Internet-portonly deployment on an E-MSM765 zl. Disabling the E-MSM765 zls ports from the switch side can lead to serious problems. In fact, the internal port 2 (corresponding to the LAN port) must never be disabled because one of the modules processes uses this port to communicate with the switch. After the port is disabled, the E-MSM765 zl will fail and eventually the switch will too. Therefore, when you see a faulting switch with an E-MSM765 zl, you should always verify that the E-MSM765s internal port 2 is enabled:
HP zl switch# config HP zl switch(config)# interface <slot>2 HP zl switch(config-eth-<slot>2)# enable
The customer can still use an E-MSM765 zl in an Internet-port only-deployment. Simply tell the customer to leave the port enabled and assign the LAN port an IP address on an unused subnet. Refer the customer to the HP MSM7xx Controllers Management and Configuration Guide for information on disabling other features (such as management) on this port for the sake of security.
Rev. 10.31
17 33
Assigning IP Addresses: Controller LAN and Internet Ports (Cont.)

Assigning IP Addresses: Controller LAN and Internet Ports (Cont.)
1. Navigate to the Controller >> Network > Ports page. 2. Click the port. 3. Configure the settings.
26
Rev. 10.31
By now, you know which port or ports need to be configured. Follow these steps to configure the Internet port on an E-MSM controller. 1. 2. Navigate to Controller >> Network > Ports. Click Internet port and then select Static and click Configure to configure a static IP address. (The E-MSM Controller can alternatively receive an IP address from an Internet router using PPPoE or DHCP. See the MSM7xx Series Controller Management and Configuration Guide for more details on these options.) For IP address, type an available IP address on the same subnet as the LAN side of the cable modem (or other device that provides the Internet connection). For Mask, type the subnet address for this subnet. Click Save.
3. 4. 5.
To configure the LAN port on the E-MSM710 and E-MSM760, the steps are the same.
Note The LAN port must be configured with a static IP address because the controller cannot function as a DHCP client on the LAN port.
17 34
Rev. 10.31
If you are configuring an E-MSM765 zl, you have already assigned an IP address to the controllers LAN port before you could reach the Web browser interface. It has no factory-default LAN port IP address. For more detailed information about the initial setup tasks, see the Quickstart for your device or the HP MSM7xx Controllers Management and Configuration Guide.
Rev. 10.31
17 35
Managing the Discovery Process

Managing the Discovery Process
Managing Autonomous HP E-Series APs Managing HP E-Series Controllers Managing the Discovery Process Using Controller and Controlled AP LEDs to Troubleshoot Discovery AP Discovery Settings on the Controller AP Discovery: Unprovisioned APs AP Discovery: Provisioned APs Verifying AP Discovery AP Discovery: Software Updates Managing the HP E-MSM317 Access Device Managing the HP E-MSM415 RF Security Sensor
27 Rev. 10.31
An E-MSM AP cannot offer any wireless services or broadcast any SSIDs until it discovers and becomes controlled by a controller. If troubleshooting device discovery, or if in the process of replacing wireless E-Series devices on your customers network you need to configure discovery, you can find information on the discovery process in this section.
17 36
Rev. 10.31
Using Controlled AP LEDs to Troubleshoot Discovery

Using Controlled AP LEDs to Troubleshoot Discovery
On each AP model, a set LED pattern indicates discovery mode.
See Module 16: HP E-Series Wireless Hardware.
28
Rev. 10.31
You can use the LEDs on controlled APs to gather clues to any AP discovery issues. For example, you can see whether the AP continually tries to discover a controller without success. Information on the wireless E-MSM AP LEDs can be found in Module 16: HP E-Series Wireless Hardware.
Rev. 10.31
17 37
AP Discovery Settings on the Controller

AP Discovery Settings on the Controller
Configure controllers to listen for discovery requests from APs on their LAN port, Internet port, or both.
Controller >> Management > Device Discovery
29
Rev. 10.31
Controllers listen for discovery requests from APs on their LAN port, Internet port, or both. The ports enabled for discovery are selected on the Controller >> Management > Device Discovery page. (Only the LAN port supports discovery at the factory default settings.) For example, follow these steps to enable E-MSM APs to discover the controller through the Internet port: 1. 2. 3. Click Controller >> Management > Device discovery. Under Controlled AP discovery, select the Internet port check box. You can leave the LAN port check box selected or clear it based on the customers requirements. The controller cannot assign DHCP addresses to APs that communicate with it on the Internet port. For this reason, when the customer wants APs to discover the controller on its Internet port, you must ask whether another DHCP server will provide the APs with their IP addresses. If so, you can clear the LAN port check box (unless, of course, some APs should discover the controller on this port). If the customer does not have a DHCP server for the APs, even when all APs will eventually discover the controller on the Internet port, you must leave the LAN port check box selected for now. You must temporarily connect the APs on the LAN port so that you can provision them with their connectivity settings before moving them to their final location.
17 38
Rev. 10.31
4.
Click Save.
For more information about discovery settings on the controller, as well as steps for provisioning APs connectivity settings, see the HP MSM7xx Controllers Management and Configuration Guide.
Rev. 10.31
17 39
AP Discovery: Unprovisioned APs

AP Discovery: Unprovisioned APs
No pre-configuration is necessary.
Connect the AP to a switch port in the same VLAN as the controller.
The AP must obtain an IP address from a DHCP server. You can follow the discovery process in the interface. Unprovisioned APs can also perform Layer 3 discovery:
The customer creates a vendor class on the DHCP server Or the customer creates an entry on the DNS server.
30
Rev. 10.31
Typically your customers networks will be set up such that, if you deploy an E-MSM AP with factory default settings and a controller in the same VLAN on the network, the AP will automatically find and connect with the controller. It can then offer the wireless services configured on the controller. No pre-configuration is necessary. As hinted in the previous slide, this factory defaultor unprovisionedAP must obtain an IP address from a DHCP serverwhether the E-MSM Controller or a network serverbefore it can begin to discover the controller. After the APs receive their addresses, they attempt to locate a controller on their subnet. If a controller port that supports discovery resides on this subnet, you do not need to configure anything. Simply connect the AP to an accessible switch port that is in the same VLAN as the controller port (if you have a PoE-capable switch, then you do not need an external power source) and verify that the controller has discovered and assumed control of the AP. See Verifying AP Discovery in this module.
Layer 3 Discovery
APs can also discover a controller across subnet boundaries. However, this option requires more setup. For example, when the AP receives its IP settings from a network DHCP server, the server might also return a vendor-specific option that specifies a list of E-MSM Controller IP addresses. Alternatively, the AP can search for the controller at its default discovery DNS names. If the APs DNS server knows how to resolve this name to the correct IP address, the AP can discover the controller.
17 40
Rev. 10.31
Because you will typically be deploying replacement APs in an existing E-MSM solution, must customers will have already set up Layer 3 discovery as necessary for their environment.
Note The default DNS names for controller discovery are cnsrv1, cnsrv2, cnsrv3, cnsrv4, and cnsrv5.
Rev. 10.31
17 41
AP Discovery: Provisioned APs

AP Discovery: Provisioned APs
Configure APs to look for controllers according to either DNS hostname or IP address. Required when APs do not have L2 connectivity to the controller AND:
Your customers are not using DHCP or DNS to give their APs the
location of the controller

It is not possible to control the DNS or DHCP server configuration
31
Rev. 10.31
However, sometimes your customers do not or cannot use DHCP or DNS to provide the controllers IP address to APs that require Layer 3 discovery. For example, the APs have static addresses, or the customer does not control the DHCP configuration because the connection to the controller is routed over the public Internet and the ISP provides the DHCP and DNS servers. In this case, you will need to provision discovery settings for the APs that are on a different subnet from the controller. To manually configure a single APs discovery settings, access its Web browser interface: https://<APs IP address>. Click Provision on the home page to access the provision configuration page.
Note The Provision button is only available when the E-MSM AP is in its factory-default state: it has not been provisioned already and has not discovered a controller since last being reset to factory defaults.
You can configure the APs to look for controllers according to either DNS hostname or IP address, or both. On the controlled AP you create a list of DNS names or IP addresses that the AP will try to discover. (If you specify hostnames, you might need to configure a domain name to be appended to these names. However, most DHCP servers furnish this domain name to clients. Ask the customer.) Then the AP will send messages to the controllers in the list, in the order they are displayed, until one of the controllers accepts the APs discovery request.
17 42
Rev. 10.31
The discovery method you choose depends on whether the APs DNS server can resolve the controllers hostname to an IP address. If not, you must specify the IP address instead.
Note To provision many replacement APs, you can use an E-MSM Controller. For example, you might pre-provision the APs at your central office. Simply connect the APs and controller LAN port to the same VLAN on a switch. Access the controller Web browser interface and activate its DHCP server. The APs will be assigned IP addresses, discovered by the controller, and assigned to the default AP group. You can then configure provisioning settings for the entire group of APs from a window that is much the same as the one on the individual AP. Refer to the instructions in the HP MSM7xx Controllers Management and Configuration Guide.
Rev. 10.31
17 43
Verifying AP Discovery
Verifying AP Discovery
You can follow the progress of the discovery process in the controllers Web browser interface.
Controlled APs >> Overview > Discovered APs
32
Rev. 10.31
You can follow the progress of the discovery process in the controllers Web browser interface by clicking Controlled APs in the Network Tree, and then, from the main menu, Overview > Discovered APs. Once configuration is complete and the AP is ready for operation, its status light will turn green and Synchronized will appear in the Diagnostic column as shown in the slide.
17 44
Rev. 10.31
AP Discovery: Software Updates

AP Discovery: Software Updates
33
Rev. 10.31
When a controller discovers an AP, it adds the AP to a group. If the AP is new or unknown to the controller, it will place the AP in the default group. If the AP was previously assigned to a configured group on the controller, the AP will be returned to this group. When the controller adds the AP to a group, it checks the APs software. If the APs software is out of date, the controller tells the AP to update. The AP retrieves the software from the controller, installs it, and then restarts itself. When the AP restarts the discovery process is performed again. (Discovery is performed every time the AP loses connectivity with its controller.) At this point the AP establishes a secure control channel with the controller to support the exchange of management traffic between the two devices. The controller also updates the APs configuration if it is out of sync with the group settings. The AP is now managed by the controller and can be configured and monitored using the controllers Web browser interface.
Rev. 10.31
17 45
Resetting Controlled APs

Resetting Controlled APs
If you cannot easily access the APs reset button (or if it does not have one), you can reboot or reset it from its controller.
Controlled APs >> Maintenance > System
34
Rev. 10.31
You can use the reset buttons on indoor E-MSM APs to reboot or reset them to factory defaults even when they are in controlled mode. If you have mounted these devices on the wall or ceiling, however, and cannot easily access the reset button, you can reboot or reset the devices from their controllers Web browser interface. You can also reset the outdoor HP E-MSM310-R and HP E-MSM320-R APs, which do not have reset buttons, from this interface. Resetting an E-MSM AP to the factory defaults returns all configured settings to their default status. Note the following effects, which are particularly important to you:

The manager username and password are set to admin. The DHCP client is enabled on any Ethernet ports. If no DHCP server assigns an address to the AP, its address defaults to 192.168.1.1. User-installed licenses are deactivated but are not deleted. You must manually enable these licenses once the AP has restarted. (Factory-installed licenses are always active.) The AP remains in controlled mode. If the AP had been manually provisioned for discovery, these settings are lost. The AP will almost definitely lose access to the controller because it presumably needed those settings to reach it. You will need to reprovision the discovery settings. (See AP Discovery: Provisioned APs.)
17 46
Rev. 10.31
Similarly, if the AP had been provisioned with connectivity settings (instead of receiving them via DHCP as by default), it will lose these settings. As mentioned above, when no DHCP server is available, the address defaults to 192.168.1.1, so you must access the AP at this address and reprovision the connectivity settings. Often, the environment is such that APs operating at factory defaults can automatically discover a controller. In this case, the AP might rapidly receive a DHCP IP address, rediscover a controller, and receive settings once again.
To reboot or reset the AP, in the Network Tree navigate to the appropriate AP under Controller > Controlled APs, and then select Maintenance > System in the main menu and sub menu. Click Restart to reboot the AP or Reset to Factory Default to reset the AP to factory defaults. For complete instructions on rebooting and resetting E-Series wireless APs, refer to the Quickstart or Installation and Getting Started Guide for the specific wireless model. These guides are available at http://h10144.www1.hp.com/customercare/support/ manuals/index.htm.
Rev. 10.31
17 47
Managing the HP E-MSM317 Access Device

Managing the HP E-MSM317 Access Device
Managing Autonomous HP E-Series APs Managing HP E-Series Controllers Managing the Discovery Process Managing the HP E-MSM317 Access Device Using E-MSM317 LEDs to Troubleshoot Provisioning the E-MSM317 from Its Web Browser Interface Managing the HP E-MSM415 RF Security Sensor
35
Rev. 10.31
Unlike most HP E-Series wireless devices, the HP E-MSM317 integrates wired and wireless connectivityit provides four Ethernet ports, a wireless AP, and a passthrough RJ-45 connection for service and user connectivityand is a controlled device only. It is primarily configured using the Web browser interface on an E-MSM Controller, though provisioning can be configured on the E-MSM317 itself. As with the APs, provisioning the E-MSM317 is generally not required when deploying the device in simple (unrouted Layer 2) network topologies, but is required when the E-MSM317 does not have Layer 2 connectivity to a controller and it is not possible to control the DNS or DHCP server configuration. Provisioning is also required when the E-MSM317 needs to be deployed with a static IP address assigned to the Uplink port.
Note If you want to assign a static IP address, you must use the E-MSM317s Web browser interface to do so. You cannot assign a static IP address from the controller interface.
Finally, provisioning can be used to accelerate the discovery process on networks with a large number of VLANs, or when many VLANs are connected to many controllers. You can provision the E-MSM317 with the hostname or IP address of the specific controller that should control it.
17 48
Rev. 10.31
If you want to provision multiple E-MSM317s at the same time and with the same settings, you can simplify the process by using the controller Web browser interface.
Rev. 10.31
17 49
Using E-MSM317 LEDs to Troubleshoot

If the E-MSM317 is operational, use its LEDs to troubleshoot. See Module 16: HP E-Series Wireless Hardware.
P1, P2, Uplink, and Power LEDs
P3, P4, PSE, and Wi-Fi LEDs
36
Rev. 10.31
If the E-MSM317 you are investigating is still operational, you can use its LEDs to try to determine the cause of the problem. Information on the wireless E-MSM317 LEDs can be found in Module 16: HP E-Series Wireless Hardware.
17 50
Rev. 10.31
Provisioning the E-MSM317 from Its Web Browser Interface

Provisioning the E-MSM317 from Its Web Browser Interface
Access the replacement devices Web browser interface to:
Configure a static IP address on the customers network
This is not possible from the controllers Web browser interface.
Configure
discovery
37
Rev. 10.31
If the E-MSM317 is not operational and/or needs to be replaced, you will need to install a replacement device and ready that device to be controlled. As mentioned earlier, often the customers environment is already set up to allow the E-MSM317 to automatically receive an IP address and discover its controller. However, you might determine that you need to assign the device a static IP address and/or provision it with discovery settings. In this case, you must access the E-MSM317 directly to provision the settings. Direct provisioning of the E-MSM317that is, provisioning from the E-MSM317s Web browser interfaceis possible only when the E-MSM317 is in its factory-default state: it has not been provisioned and has not discovered a controller since last being reset to factory defaults.
Note E-MSM APs can receive a DHCP address for the initial discovery and then receive a static IP address from the controller. But you can only configure a static IP address on an E-MSM317 from its own Web browser interface.
Follow these steps: 1. Your management computer will need an address in the 192.168.1.0/24 subnet, but the address cannot be 192.168.1.1.
17 51
Rev. 10.31
2. 3. 4.
Set the subnet mask to 255.255.255.0, the default gateway to 192.168.1.1, and the DNS server to 192.168.1.1. Use a standard Ethernet cable to connect the management computer to Port 1, 2, 3, or 4 on the E-MSM317. Power on the E-MSM317 by connecting an Ethernet cable from a PoE power source to the Uplink port on the rear of the E-MSM317. Initially, the Power light will blink once every two seconds. Wait until it blinks once per second before proceeding to the next step. Access the Web browser interface by opening a Web browser to https://192.168.1.1 and typing the default username and password: admin. Click Provision at the bottom of the home page, and then provision the EMSM317 using settings on the Connectivity and Discovery pages. a. Use the Connectivity page to define static IP addressing for the Uplink port. Configure an IP address, subnet mask and default gateway. (On this page you can also configure the Uplink port to act as a DHCP client and request an IP address from a DHCP server. The E-MSM317 sends DHCP requests on the specified VLAN if defined. If no VLAN is defined, the request is sent untagged.) From the Connectivity page you can also set the VLAN ID that will be used on the Uplink port for management traffic. This VLAN is only used for the discovery of a controller (or DHCP requests) and does not apply to user traffic sent on Ports 1 to 4 or the Uplink port. From the Discovery page you configure the E-MSM317 to look for controllers according to either DNS or IP address, or both. You can create a list of DNS hostnames or IP addresses that the E-MSM317 will try to discover. Then the device will send messages to the controllers in the list, in the order they are displayed, until one of the controllers accepts the E-MSM317s discovery request. The discovery method you choose depends on whether the APs DNS server can resolve the controllers hostname to an IP address. If not, you must specify the IP address instead.
5. 6.
b.
c.
7.
Once you have provisioned the E-MSM317, use an Ethernet cable to connect the Uplink port to a port on the switch. If you have a PoE-capable switch, then you do not need an external power source. Make sure that the port is either an untagged member of the VLAN associated with the E-MSM317s subnet or a tagged member of the VLAN that you specified in the Connectivity page. The E-MSM317 must be able to communicate with the MSM Controller, so you should ensure that the uplinks between switches are tagged with E-MSM317s and MSM controllers VLAN. (If you provisioned the E-MSM317 for Layer 3 discovery, then you must ensure that the E-MSM317 can reach its router and that that router can reach the controller.)
8.
17 52
Rev. 10.31
9.
You can follow the progress of the discovery process in the controllers Web browser interface by clicking Controlled APs >> Overview > Discovered APs.
10. Once configuration is complete and the E-MSM317 is ready for operation, its status light will turn green and Synchronized will appear in the Diagnostic column as shown in the slide.
Rev. 10.31
17 53
Managing the HP E-MSM415 RF Security Sensor

Managing the HP E-MSM415 RF Security Sensor
Managing Autonomous HP E-Series APs Managing HP E-Series Controllers Managing the Discovery Process Managing the HP E-MSM317 Access Device Managing the HP E-MSM317 Access Device Using E-MSM415 LEDs to Troubleshoot Troubleshooting E-MSM415 Zero Configuration Manually Configuring the E-MSM415 in SO Mode Troubleshooting ND and SNDC Mode Replacing the E-MSM415
38 Rev. 10.31
As its name suggests, the HP E-MSM415 RF Security Sensor is not an AP but rather a dedicated RF security sensor. Like the E-MSM320, E-MSM325, and E-MSM335 APs, the E-MSM415 RF Security Sensor works with HP RF Manager to provide wireless intrusion detection and prevention. Its single 802.1 a/b/g/n radio security sensor 1 continuously scans the 2.4 and 5 GHz bands to detect and counter security threats for 802.1 1a/b/g/n wireless devices and APs. In certain instances you will need to use the config shell to manually configure the EMSM415. We will discuss manual configuration in this section. We will also discuss the zero configuration option. Once the Sensor has discovered RF Manager, you can manage the E-MSM415 through the RF Manager Web browser interface, but beyond a useful tip or two, that level of detail is outside the scope of this manual. For information on managing the EMSM415 using RF Manager, please see the RF Manager and Sensors Management and Configuration Guide.
17 54
Rev. 10.31

If the E-MSM415 is operational, use its LEDs to troubleshoot. See Module 16: HP E-Series Wireless Hardware.
39
Rev. 10.31
If the E-MSM415 you are investigating is still operational, you can use its LEDs to try to determine the cause of the problem. Information on the E-MSM415 LEDs can be found in Module 16: HP E-Series Wireless Hardware.
Rev. 10.31
17 55
Troubleshooting E-MSM415 Zero Configuration

Troubleshooting E-MSM415 Zero Configuration
Ensure that:
DHCP is running on the subnet to which the E-MSM415 is connected The cable is properly connected The E-MSM415 can contact a DNS server The DNS server is configured with the wifi-security-server entry Port 3851 is open Multiple sensors are not connected to multiple RF Managers
Check to see if the sensor appears in RF Managers Web browser interface.
40
Rev. 10.31
The E-MSM415 RF Security Sensor either discovers RF Manager using zero configuration (its default option) or you configure the Sensor by establishing a terminal session with its CLI. Zero configuration is the simplest method: in this case the E-MSM415 configures itself automatically. When your customer connects the Sensor to the LAN, the Sensor receives its IP settings from a DHCP server, including a DNS server address. The Sensor then sends a request for RF Managers default hostname to the DNS server. As long as the DNS server can resolve the name to the correct IP address, the Sensor will automatically connect to RF Manager, download policies, and start to monitor the network. As discussed in the preceding section, if the E-MSM415 is operable when you arrive on the customers site, you can use its LEDs to gather clues to the nature of the problem with the device.
Note See Module 16: HP E-Series Wireless Hardware for a full explanation of all possible LED states on the E-MSM415 and what these states can tell you about the Sensor. You can also check RF Manager for informationfor example, whether the Sensor appears in RF Managers Web browser interface under Sensors in the Devices tab.
You can then troubleshoot based on what you see. For example, if the Sensor was connected to the customers network using zero configuration, and the LEDs indicate that the Sensor did not receive a valid IP address from the DHCP server, you can:
17 56
Rev. 10.31
Ensure that DHCP is running on the subnet to which the E-MSM415 is connectedIf DHCP is not enabled on the subnet, the E-MSM415 cannot connect to that subnet with zero configuration. Ensure that one end of the Ethernet cable is connected to the Ethernet port (port 1) on the E-MSM415, and the other end is connected to an Ethernet jack associated with the desired VLAN and subnetThe Sensors console port also accepts an RJ-45 connector, so make sure that the cable is not in the wrong port.
If the LEDs indicate that the E-MSM415 has an IP address, but it cannot discover RF Manager, you can:
Ensure that the DNS settings are correct The DHCP server must assign the EMSM415 the correct DNS server address and domain name suffix. The EMSM415 must be able to contact a DNS server, and that server requires the proper entry for RF Manager (wifi-security-server). To configure a DNS server for zero configuration, see the HP MultiService Mobility Solutions Implementation Guide. Verify firewall settingsNote as well that, if the E-MSM415 was deployed on a network segment that is separated from RF Manager by a firewall, your customer should have opened port 3851 for UDP and TCP bidirectional traffic on that firewall. This port is used for communication between the E-MSM415 and RF Manager.
Also, if multiple Sensors are set up to connect to multiple RF Managers, zero configuration is not possible. Finally, the customer must understand that when the E-MSM415 is installed with zero configuration, the device operates in Sensor Only (SO) mode, which is the factory default. That is, it is monitoring only the (untagged) VLAN on its switch port in addition to wireless signals within the Sensors range. RF Manager cannot change the Sensor mode, so the customer must access the Sensor over the console port to change this setting.
Rev. 10.31
17 57
Manually Configuring the E-MSM415 in SO Mode

Manually Configuring the E-MSM415 in SO Mode
If
the network does not meet the
specifications for zero configuration:
E-MSM415 Config Shell
Then:
You can manually configure the
Sensor for SO mode.
You must also manually configure if multiple Sensors connect to multiple RF Managers.
41
Rev. 10.31
As discussed in the preceding section, it is possible that the E-MSM415 was installed on a network or subnet that does not meet the specifications for zero configuration. There may be no DNS server on the network, for example, or the Sensor may have been placed in a subnet that is not DHCP enabled. If the network does not meet the specifications for zero configuration, you can manually configure the Sensor to discover RF Manager. You must also manually configure the Sensor if multiple Sensors are set up to connect to multiple RF Managers; all RF Managers need a unique hostname, so the Sensors default one does not work. To use the E-MSM415s config shell to manually configure the Sensor, use an RS-232 to RJ-45 adaptor cable to connect the console port on your management computer to the console port on the Sensor (this port is on the Sensors undercarriage). Log in to the sell with the default username and password (config for both). The config shell supports a pre-defined set of commands. You assign an IP address and identify the IP address for RF Manager. In this case, the customer wants the Sensor to operate in SO mode, which is the default, so you have finished. The Sensor connects to RF Manager, downloads the policies, and begins to monitor the network. The steps to configure the Sensor manually are explained in detail in the RF Manager and Sensors Management and Configuration Guide.
17 58
Rev. 10.31
After you finish the configuration, check the Status LEDs on the Sensor. If all LEDs glow green, then the Sensor is operational and connected to RF Manager.
Rev. 10.31
17 59
Troubleshooting ND and SNDC Mode

Troubleshooting ND and SNDC Mode
If a Sensor in ND or SNDC mode is malfunctioning, you should check the status of the VLANs:
42
Rev. 10.31
E-MSM415 Sensors can be configured in two other modes besides the default SO mode:
Network Detector (ND) modeND mode is for large installations where there are not enough SO-mode Sensors to cover all the VLANs, or where those Sensors are installed on the same VLAN. In ND mode, the E-MSM415 can monitor up to 100 VLANs. Sensor/Network Detector Combo (SNDC) modeSNDC mode is best for small, remote sites with multiple VLANs where a single Sensor is sufficient to provide good coverage of the RF frequencies. A Sensor in SNDC mode monitors both wireless signals and multiple VLANs on the wired side. E-MSM415 Sensors in SNDC mode can monitor up to16 VLANs.
If a Sensor in ND or SNDC mode is malfunctioning, you should check the status of the VLANs from the config shell, which labels each VLAN as in one of three states:
In the Inactive and Unmonitored state the VLAN is configured but the E-MSM415 is not detecting it. All configured VLANs are in this state when ND starts, but if they remain in this state the VLAN may be configured improperlyit may not be tagged on the switch port, for exampleand action is required to correct the problem.
17 60
Rev. 10.31
In the Active and Unmonitored stat e the VLAN is configured and detected but not monitored. This could mean the VLAN is being monitored by another Sensor, or there could be a problem that needs to be corrected. In the Active and Monitored state the VLAN is configured and is being monitored by the ND or SNDC Sensor.
Rev. 10.31
17 61
Replacing the E-MSM415

Replacing the E-MSM415
When installing the new E-MSM415 in SO mode, ensure that:
The E-MSM415 can contact a DNS server. The DNS server is configured with the proper entry for RF Manager. DHCP is running on the subnet to which the Sensor will be connected. Port 3851 is open on the firewall. Multiple Sensors are not connected to multiple RF Managers.
When installing the new E-MSM415 in ND or SNDC mode:

Assign an IP address. Identify the IP address for RF Manager. Identify the desired mode. Select the VLANs to be monitored; tag them as VLANs on the switch
port
43 Rev. 10.31
Installing the Replacement Sensor in SO Mode

To install a replacement E-MSM415 in the default SO mode using the zero configuration option, connect one end of an Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port (port 1) on the Sensor and the other end to an Ethernet jack in the desired VLAN and subnet. If you did not already do so while troubleshooting the faulty Sensor, follow these steps as well before installing the device:
Ensure that the E-MSM415 can contact a DNS server, and that that server is configured with the proper entry for RF Manager (wifi-security-server). To configure a DNS server for zero configuration, see the HP MultiService Mobility Solutions Implementation Guide. Ensure that DHCP is running on the subnet to which the Sensor will be connected and that the server assigns the proper IP settings, including DNS server address and domain name suffix. Ensure that port 3851, which Sensors and RF Manager use to communicate, is open on the firewall for both TCP and UDP.
If multiple Sensors are set up to connect to multiple RF Managers, zero configuration is not possible. Alternatively, you can install the E-MSM415 in SO mode without using the zero configuration option. See Manually Configuring the E-MSM415 in SO Mode in this module.
17 62
Rev. 10.31
Check the Status LEDs on the Sensor. If all LEDs glow green, then the Sensor is operational and connected to the Server.
Installing the Replacement Sensor in ND or SNDC Mode

To use the E-MSM415s config shell to manually configure a replacement Sensor in ND or SNDC mode, connect an RS-232 to RJ-45 adaptor cable between your management computers console port and the console port on the Sensor. Using the config shells pre-defined set of commands, assign the E-MSM415 an IP address, identify the IP address for RF Manager, and identify the desired mode. You also need to select the VLANs to be monitored and tag them as VLANs on the switch port.
Note If the ND or SNDC Sensor meets the other requirements for zero configuration, you do not need to identify the RF Manager IP address. You do need to complete the other tasks, however.
The Sensor connects to RF Manager, downloads the policies, and begins to monitor the network. The steps to configure the Sensor manually are explained in detail in the RF Manager and Sensors Management and Configuration Guide. Check the Status LEDs on the Sensor. If all LEDs glow green, then the Sensor is operational and connected to the Server.
Rev. 10.31
17 63
Summary
Summary
For the most part you will configure and manage these devices using a Web browser interface. The CLI can be necessary when configuring the E-MSM765 zl and E-MSM415. You can use device LEDs and the Web browser interface to troubleshoot these devices. If you must replace a device, you will need to access it at its default IP address. From the Web browser interface you can then configure a static IP address for the device port/ports. You cannot access the EMSM765 zl, however, without first configuring the static LAN port address for it. And this you can only do from the switch CLI. If you want to assign a static IP address to the E-MSM317, you must use its Web browser interface to do so. You cannot assign a static IP address from the controller interface.
44 Rev. 10.31
Though most of the HP E-Series wireless devices also offer a CLI, for the most part you will configure and manage them using a Web browser interface. The CLI can be necessary when configuring the E-MSM765 zl and E-MSM415. You can use device LEDs and the Web browser interface to troubleshoot these devices. If you must replace a device, you will need to reach the device at its default IP address, which might involve temporarily changing the address on your management computer. From the Web browser interface, you can then configure a static IP address for the device port/ports. You cannot access the E-MSM765 zl, however, without first configuring the static LAN port address for it. And this you can only do by accessing the E-MSM765 zl CLI from the switch CLI. If you want to assign a static IP address to the E-MSM317, you must use its Web browser interface to do so. You cannot assign a static IP address from the controller interface.
17 64
Rev. 10.31

Module 18
Objectives
This module introduces you to the HP V-Series wireless routers and AP, which are designed for small businesses with simple network requirements. This module presents you with the basic information you need to install and service these routers. After completing this module, you should be able to:

Describe the basic features of the HP V-Series wireless devices Use the LEDs on HP V-Series wireless devices to determine the status of a particular device and to identify any problems Explain the basic configuration steps for the HP V-Series wireless devices
Rev. 10.31
18 1
HP V1 Wireless-N Router Series 10

HP V110 Wireless-N Router Series
HP V110 Wireless-N Router Series HP V110 Wireless-N Router Series Overview LEDs Back Panel Hardware Reset Basic Settings HP V10ag
Rev. 10.31
This section introduces you to the HP V1 Wireless-N Router series. These routers 10 were previously branded as the 3Com Wireless 1 Router Series. 1n
18 2
Rev. 10.31
HP V1 Wireless-N Router Series Overview 10

HP V110 Wireless-N Router Series Overview
1 802.11b/g/n radio 4-port switch DHCP services Static routing and RIP support Firewall ADSL modem:
HP V110 ADSL-A Wireless-N HP V110 ADSL-B Wireless-N
Rev. 10.31
The HP V1 Wireless-N Router Series includes three models, which are designed for 10 small businesses that are investing in their first networking devices:

V1 Cable/DSL 10 V1 ADSL-A 10 V1 ADSL-B 10
Each router has a single radio that operates in 802.1 as well as 802.1 1n 1b/g for backward compatibility. (The radio does not support 802.1 1a.) The router also has two external antennas and one internal. Up to 32 users can connect to the wireless network. In addition to providing wireless networks, these routers connect a small business network to the Internet. The V1 Cable/DSL Router can be connected to a cable or 10 DSL modem. This router is intended for businesses that receive their modem from a service provider. The V1 ADSL-A and V1 ADSL-B, on the other hand, include an Asymmetric 10 10 Digital Subscriber Line (ADSL) modem to connect the small business network to the Internet. Businesses will consult their service provider to determine whether they should purchase the Annex A or Annex B model.
Rev. 10.31
18 3
ADSL Annex A is used in areas where ADSL is provisioned over Plain Old Telephone Service (POTS). ADSL Annex B is used when ADSL is provisioned over Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN). If you need to replace one of these routers, be sure to use the correct model. The V1 ADSL-A will not support an ADSL line that is 10 provisioned for ADSL B and vice versa. (For more information about ADSL A or B, see Module 19: Router Overview.) All models provide Internet connections for up to 253 network users. They also offer four Ethernet switch ports, a firewall, and up to five IP Security (IPsec) virtual private networks (VPNs). They include DHCP services so they can provide dynamic IP addresses to both wired and wireless users. The routers are installed on a flat surface, such as a table. The V1 Cable/DSL 10 Router connects to the cable or DSL modem. The V1 ADSL-A and V1 ADSL-B may 10 10 connect to a splitter or directly into a wall jack, which then connects to the local telephone infrastructure. An RJ1 cable is provided with the router to make this 1 connection. (A splitter is used in some ADSL installations to separate voice and data traffic. For more information about ADSL equipment, see Module 19: Router Overview.)
18 4
Rev. 10.31
LEDs
LEDs
Power: Logo lights up
Alert
ADSL Sync/Data*
WLAN Status
LAN (LEDs for4 switch ports)
Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)
*The HP V1 Cable/DSL Wireless-N has 1 Cable/DSL Status LED, 10 instead of an ADSL Sync LED and an ADSL Data LED.
5 Rev. 10.31
The V1 ADSL-A and V1 ADSL-B have 10 LEDs, which show: 10 10

Status of the power Any alert conditions ADSL synchronization, which indicates whether or not the ADSL modem is synchronized with the ADSL DSLAM at the public carriers central office ADSL data, which indicates when packets are transmitted to and from the Internet Wireless LAN (WLAN), which indicates the status and activity on the radio LAN, which report the status of the routers four switch ports WiFi Protected Setup (WPS), which indicates if this feature is being used to access the WLAN
WPS is described in more depth on the next slide. For more information about ADSL equipment and installations, see Module 19: Router Overview.
Rev. 10.31
18 5
The LEDs provide the following information: LED Power (white) State Off Description The power adapter is disconnected or is not connected properly. Check the connections and make sure the power source is operational. The power adapter is operating normally. The router is operating normally. One of the following conditions has occurred. In each case, wait until the router has completed the operation, and the LED is off. The router has just been started and is running a self test. The router has been reset to factory default settings. The system software is being upgraded. The router has detected and prevented a hacker from attacking the network from the Internet. The router has experienced a fault during startup. The ADSL modem is connected to an active ADSL line and is synchronized with the DSLAM at the central office. (The DSLAM sets up the ADSL line and receives the data sent from the customers modem.) The router is powering on. The router is not connected to an active ADSL line. The ADSL connection is down. Contact the service provider. The ADSL modem is receiving and sending data. The wireless LAN has been disabled, or a problem has occurred. Data is being transmitted or received. No connection exists. Ensure that the cable is not faulty, and ensure the cable is firmly seated on both sides of the connection. A link exists, and it is operating normally. Data is being transmitted or received. No WPS activity is occurring. The WPS function is active. The LED will continue to flash for 2 minutes after the WPS mode has been activated.
Alert (amber)
On Off Flashing rapidly
ADSL Sync (blue)
On for 2 seconds, then off Continuously on On
ADSL Data (blue) WLAN (blue) LAN (4 LEDs) (blue)
Flashes Off Slow flash Fast flash Off Flashing Off
WPS (blue)
On Flashing Off Flashing
The V1 Cable/DSL Router has the same LEDs, except the ADSL Sync and the ADSL 10 Data LEDs. Instead of these two LEDs, the V1 Cable/DSL Router has a Cable/DSL 10 Status LED. If this LED flashes, data is being transmitted or received from the attached cable or ADSL modem.
18 6
Rev. 10.31
Back Panel
Back Panel
Cable/ADSL Switch ports port
WiFi off/on
Reset button
WPS setup
Rev. 10.31
The cable or ADSL port and the switch ports are on the routers back panel. In addition, you will find:

WiFi buttonYou can use this button to turn the radio off or on. Reset buttonYou can use this button to return the Wireless-N Router to factory default settings, as explained later in this module. WPS buttonYou can press this button for 3 seconds to enable WiFi Protected Setup (WPS), an industry standard designed to simplify the setup of a wireless network and allow a wireless network interface card (NIC) to access that network. To take advantage of WPS, your wireless NIC must also support WPS. After you press the WPS button, this feature will remain enabled on the router for 2 minutes. You must initiate and complete the WPS process as outlined in your wireless NICs documentation. On the router, you can also enable WPS through the Web browser interface.
Rev. 10.31
18 7
Hardware Reset to Factory Default Settings

1. Power off the router. 2. Disconnect all computers and the Internet connection. 3. Reconnect power 4. Press and hold the Reset button for 5 seconds
Rev. 10.31
If you determine that the router needs to be returned to factory default settings, you can perform a hardware reset, using the instructions below. 1. 2. 3. 4. Power off the router. Disconnect all computers that are connected to the switch ports and remove the cable for the Internet connection. Reconnect the routers power. Press and hold the Reset button for 5 seconds.
18 8
Rev. 10.31
Manage the Router

Manage the Router
Web browser interface:
IP address:
Enter default IP address192.168.1.1 Ask customer for current IP address Use 3Com Detect Application
Password:
Type default password: admin Ask customer for current password
SNMP
Rev. 10.31
To manage a router using the Web browser interface, you need the routers IP address. If this is a new installation, simply enter the routers default IP address, 192.168.1.1, in your Web browser interface. If the default IP address has been changed, obtain the new address from your customer. You can also use the Detect Application, which shipped with the router on a CDROM, to identify the routers IP address. (For more information about the Detect Application, see Module 10: Basic Configuration of HP V-Series Switches.) When the routers Login Screen is displayed, enter the password. The default password is admin. If the customer has changed the password, obtain the correct password from the customer. The router can also be managed through a Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).
Rev. 10.31
18 9
Country Code
Country Code
You are prompted to set the Country Code the first time you log in.
Rev. 10.31
The first time you log in, you will be prompted to set the Country Code. This code ensures that the routers radio operates within the regulations for a particular country.
18 10
Rev. 10.31
Setup Wizard
Setup Wizard
Management password Time and time zone LAN IP settings WAN settings
IP settings ADSL settings Data Link layer
10
Rev. 10.31
If you are installing a new router, the Setup wizard will start automatically after you configure the country code. (The Wizard can also be accessed by clicking the Wizard tab and then the Wizard button.) The Setup wizard guides you through the process of configuring LAN, WAN, and WLAN settings. You should not use this wizard unless you have all the information required to configure these settings. For example, you will be prompted to change the management password, enter the correct time and time zone, and configure the routers LAN IP settings. For the V1 10 ADSL-A and V1 ADSL-B, you will need specific information about the WAN 10 connection, which the customer will get from the service provider. For example, you will need to know if the ADSL line is provisioned for Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) over Ethernet (PPPoE), PPP over Asynchronous Transfer Mode (PPPoA), or just ATM. If the line uses PPPoE or PPPoA, you will need the username and password. You will also need ADSL settings such as VPI and VCI. Again, the customer should receive these settings from the service provider. The wizard will also guide you through the process of configuring a Service Set Identifier (SSID)the name of the wireless networkand the related security settings.
Rev. 10.31
18 11
Configure LAN IP Settings and DHCP Server Settings
Configure LAN IP Settings and DHCP Server Settings

Configure IP address and subnet mask Accept automatic DHCP settings or modify as needed
Unit Configuration LAN Settings Change the IP address Apply Automatic Pool of IP addresses
1 1
Rev. 10.31
The router has two IP addresses: one for the LAN and one for the WAN. If you need to reconfigure the routers LAN IP settings, click LAN Settings in the left navigation bar and then click the Unit Configuration tab. Then enter the IP address and subnet mask that you want the router to use. In this window, you can also configure a pool of IP addresses, which the routers DHCP server will supply to wired and wireless clients.
18 12
Rev. 10.31
Back Up, Restore, and Reset Configurations
Back Up, Restore, and Reset Configurations

Back up configuration Restore configuration Reset to factory default configuration
Configuration
System Tools
12
Rev. 10.31
You can back up the current configuration, restore a configuration, and reset the router to factory default settings from one window. In the left navigation bar, click System Tools and then select the Configuration tab. Under Backup Configuration, click BACKUP to save the routers current configuration. Saving the configuration will allow you to restore it later. For example, you may need to save the configuration if you are replacing a router. You can save the configuration running on the old router and restore it to the new router. Under Restore Configuration Data, click Browse to locate a saved configuration file. Then select the Restore button. Under Reset to Factory Default, click RESET to erase the current configuration and return the router to the factory defaults. Be sure that this is the action you want to take and, if possible, take the precaution to save a backup copy of the current configuration file.
Rev. 10.31
18 13
Upgrade Software
Upgrade Software
1. Download software file to the management workstation. 2. Click System Tools > Upgrade. 3. Click Browse and locate firmware file on the management workstation. 4. Click Upgrade.
Upgrade
System Tools
1 2
13
Rev. 10.31
To upgrade the system software, or firmware, complete the following steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. Download the new software to your management workstation. Click System Tools in the left navigation bar, and then select the Upgrade tab. Click the Browse button to locate the software file you downloaded to your workstation. Click Upgrade.
18 14
Rev. 10.31
Problem: Software Image Has Become Corrupted

Problem: Software Has Become Corrupted
Determine if the router is in a recovery state, indicating software is corrupted:
Routers LAN IP address is reset to 192.168.1.1. DHCP is still enabled.
Install a new software image.
14
Rev. 10.31
If a customer complains because the routers LAN IP address has inexplicably been reset to 192.168.1.1, its software image may have become corrupted. You will probably find that the router is not performing functions normally. Note, however, that the routers DHCP server will still be enabled because the router has entered a recovery state. To fix this problem, you will need to install a new software image. Check the HP Networking Web site for the latest software image and download it to your management workstation. Then, complete the steps below to upload the software image to the router. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Disconnect the power from the router. Disconnect the cables from the DSL or cable modem and all your computers, except the management workstation that has the software image. Configure the management workstation to obtain a dynamic IP address. Restart the computer and re-apply power to the router. Using the Web browser on the computer, enter the following URL: http://192.168.1.1. You will access the routers Recovery utility. 6. Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter the path and filename of the software image file.
18 15
Rev. 10.31
7.
When the upload is completed, the router will restart, run its self-test, and if successful, resume normal operation. If the router does not resume normal operation after the new software is installed, the router may be faulty.
Refer to the routers user manual for information about troubleshooting the WAN connection.
18 16
Rev. 10.31
HP V10ag
HP V10ag
HP V110 Wireless-N Router Series HP V10ag HP V10ag Overview LEDs Basic Settings on the HP V10ag
15
Rev. 10.31
This section introduces you to the HP V10ag.
Rev. 10.31
18 17
HP V10ag Overview
HP V10ag Overview
Two radios:
802.11a 802.11b/g
Management options
Web browser interface (GUI) SNMP solution
16
Rev. 10.31
The HP V10ag is an access point (AP) designed for small businesses with relatively simple wireless network requirements. It has two radios, one that supports 802.1 1a and one that supports 802.1 1b/g. It can be wall-mounted or placed on a flat surface and can be powered by Power over Ethernet (PoE).
Management Options
Administrators can manage the V10ag through an intuitive Web browser interface using any JavaScript-enabled browser. You can access the APs interface from any network PC on the same subnet as the AP. You can also manage the AP from a network management station running an SNMP management application, such as PCM. The AP SNMP agent supports SNMP versions 1 and 2c.
18 18
Rev. 10.31
LEDs
LEDs
Power
Diag
LAN (2 LEDs)
Wireless (2LEDs)
17
Rev. 10.31
The LEDs on the V10ag convey basic information about its status and operation. LED Power (green) Diag (amber) State Off On Off Blinking Description The power adapter is not connected properly. The power adapter is operating normally. This is the normal state. The AP is being reset to factory default settings. Blinking stops when the AP has completed the resetting process and is about to reboot. A connection does not exist. The AP is transmitting or receiving data at 10/100 Mbps over the wired port. The flashing rate corresponds to the amount of data being processed. A slow rate means no data is being processed. When the LED is on without flashing, maximum bandwidth has been reached. A link does not exist. The AP is transmitting or receiving data over the wireless interface. The flashing rate corresponds to the amount of data being processed. A slow rate means no data is being processed. When the LED is on without flashing, maximum bandwidth has been reached.
LAN (green)
Off Flashing to solid
Link/Act
Off Flashing to solid
Rev. 10.31
18 19

Press and hold the Reset to Default button for 5 seconds. When LEDs shut off, release the button.
Default username = admin Default password = password
18
Rev. 10.31
You can restore the AP to its factory default configuration by pressing the Reset to Default button on the rear panel for more than 5 seconds. As soon as the LEDs (except the Power LED) shut off, release the Reset to Default button. The AP resets to factory default settings and reboots.
18 20
Rev. 10.31
Configure IP Settings and Set Country Code

Configure IP Settings and Set Country Code
Access the Web browser interface using the IP address:
Default: 192.168.1.14
Enter user name and password:

Default user name: admin Default password: password
2 1 3 4
Change the IP address
Set the country code
19
Rev. 10.31
The V10ag has a default IP address of 192.168.1.14/24. To change this default IP address, you must access the Web browser interface. Connect your workstation directly to the V10ag and change the workstation IP address so that it is on the same subnetwork as the AP. For example, you might change the workstation IP address to 192.168.1.1/24. Open a Web browser and enter http://192.168.1.14 as the URL. To access the V10ag Web browser interface, enter the user name and password:

Default username: admin Default password: password
After you access the Web browser interface, you should change the APs IP address to one on your companys network. You should also set the country code, using the steps outlined below. 1. In the navigation bar, click Basic Settings under Setup. 2. You can configure the V10ag to receive an IP address from a DHCP server, or you can configure a static IP address. Complete one of the following steps: a. b. To have the V10ag receive a dynamic IP address, select the Enable option for DHCP Client. To set a static IP address, type the appropriate settings for IP Address, IP Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway.
18 21
Rev. 10.31
3. 4.
For Country/Region, select the country where the AP will be operating. Click Apply.
18 22
Rev. 10.31
Upgrade Software
Upgrade Software
2 3
20
Rev. 10.31
You can easily upgrade the APs software from the Web browser interface. The software file must be stored on the local station (from which you are accessing the Web browser interface). Complete the following steps: 1. 2. Click Update Software under Management. The Update Software window is displayed. Type the filename for the software as stored on the local station. Or click Browse and navigate to the folder where you saved the software update file, select the file, and then click Open. Click Update.
3.
A progress bar is displayed. When the software update is completed, the AP reboots itself and then redirects you to the Information page. Check the Software Version and verify that the new version has been installed.
Rev. 10.31
18 23
Manage Configuration Files

Manage Configuration Files
Copy files between the V10ag and the management station.
Copy a configuration from the AP to the local station. 2a
2b
2c
Copy a configuration on the local station to the AP.
21
Rev. 10.31
To back up the configuration file or copy a configuration file to a V10ag, do the following. 1. 2. In the Web browser interface, click Back up Settings under Management. Complete one of the following steps: a. b. To copy a configuration file from the AP to the local management station, click the Backup button. To copy a configuration file from the local management station to the AP, click the Browse button under Restore Saved Setting from a File and select the file. Then click the Restore button. To return the V10ag to factory default settings, click the Erase button under Revert to Factory Default Settings. Click OK to continue. The following message is displayed:
c.
Please wait.... Access Point is rebooting...... PLEASE WAIT until re-directed to Information page.
When the AP has restored its settings to factory default, the Web interface refreshes and displays the Information page. If the AP was using an IP address other than the default, you may see a Page Not Found message in your browser. This is because the AP has already reverted to its default IP address, 192.168.1.14.
18 24
Rev. 10.31
Summary
Summary
HP V110 Wireless-N Router Series HP V10ag
22
Rev. 10.31
In this module, you learned the basic features offered by the HP V-Series wireless solutionsthe V1 Wireless-N Router Series and the V10ag. You learned how to 10 use LEDs to determine the status of each device and identify problems. You also learned how to access each devices Web browser interface and make basic configuration changes.
Rev. 10.31
18 25
18 26
Rev. 10.31
Router Overview
Module 19
Objectives
This module describes the basic elements of a WAN connection and then outlines the equipment that is required to provide different types of WAN connections, from a customers premises to the public carrier. This module is intended to help you become familiar with WAN connections so that you recognize the equipment at a customers site and can provide basic support for HP A-Series routers. (This module does not cover the configuration of WAN connections.) After you complete this module, you should be able to:
Describe the characteristics of T1, E1, T3, and E3 WAN connections and identify the equipment required at a customers premises Describe the characteristics of Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line (ADSL), ADSL2, and Single-Pair High-Speed Digital Subscriber Line (SHDSL) WAN connections and identify the equipment required at a customers premises Describe the characteristics of Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) WAN connections and identify the equipment required at a customers premises
Rev. 10.31
19 1
WAN Connection
WAN Connection
Geneva
CO Router A LAN A Public Carriers Central Office Public Carrier Network CO Public Carriers Central Office Router B
Paris
LAN B
Rev. 10.31
WAN connections are established over the infrastructure provided by public carriers around the world. In the United States and Canada, the network that provides this infrastructure is called the public switched telephone network (PSTN). In all other countries, Public Telephone and Telegraph (PTT) authorities provide the infrastructure for WAN connections. When a customer leases a WAN line, the customers network must be connected to the public carriers nearest central office (CO). The telecommunications infrastructure that is used to connect the network to the CO is collectively called the local loop. Because the CO may be located miles away from the customers premises, this telecommunications infrastructure may include repeaters, as well as switches, cable, and connectors. The infrastructure also varies slightly, depending on the type of WAN connection. The next several slides provide an overview of the infrastructure required for common WAN connections:

T1 and E1 lines T3 and E3 lines Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line (ADLS) Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)
T1, E1, T3, and E3 lines can be used for data or voice.
19 2
Rev. 10.31
Router Overview
Understanding the basic elements of these connections will help you install the WAN modules that provide these connections at a customers premises.
Rev. 10.31
19 3
T1 or E1 WAN Connection
Router (DTE)
Serial V.35 or X.21
Network Interface Unit (Smart Jack) CSU/ DSU*
Repeater OCU
Wire Span
Wire Span Office Channel Unit (Public Carriers CSU)
B Router with internal CSU/DSU Demarc
* With E1 lines, the public carrier provides only the CSU.
Rev. 10.31
A T1 or E1 line provides a permanent, dedicated, point-to-point, fixed-bandwidth link between two sites. Providing 1.544 Mbps bandwidth, T1 lines are used primarily in Canada and the United States. In Europe and other locations that follow the ITU Telecommunications Standardization (ITU-T) standards, the comparable dedicated, high-speed WAN connection is an E1 line. An E1 line, however, provides more bandwidth than a T1: 2.048 Mbps. J1 lines are defined for use in Japan. However, for the most part, public carriers in Japan use J1 lines for voice connections. They offer either E1 or T1 lines for WAN connections. The left side of the figure shows the subscribers network, which is connected to a router. The router is then connected to a device called a Channel Service Unit/Digital Service Unit (CSU/DSU). The CSU and DSU have separate purposes. Outgoing LAN traffic is sent from the router to the DSU, which translates it from the signaling format used on the LAN into the format necessary for transmission across the WAN connection. After the DSU translates the signal, the CSU generates the signal (or regenerates it, in the case of incoming traffic). The CSU and DSU can be two separate, standalone devices, or they can be integrated into a single CSU/DSU. In the U.S. and Canada, the service provider supplies a CSU/DSU, or the CSU/DSU is built into the router. In Europe, the Middle East and Africa (EMEA), the service provider supplies just the CSU, and either the router has a built-in DSU or the customer provides the DSU.
19 4
Rev. 10.31
Router Overview
The CSU/DSU (or just the DSU) can be connected to a router in the following ways:
The router can be connected to a standalone CSU/DSU or a standalone DSU with a cable that uses the V.35 or X.21 electrical interface. (This option is labeled A in the figure.) The cable is called a V.35 or an X.21 cable. The router can have a built-in CSU/DSU. (This option is labeled B in the figure.) The built-in CSU/DSU is connected to an RJ-48 wall jack.
From the CSU/DSU, the WAN connection leads to the demarcation point (demarc), which is typically used to separate the customers equipment from the public carriers equipment. To the right of the demarc is a Network Interface Unit (NIU), also known as a smart jack. Smart jacks automatically maintain the WAN connection. The smart jack is usually located outside the customers premises so that public carrier employees can always access it. However, in some cases, such as a large, multi-tenant office building, the smart jack might be located inside the subscribers premises. The next component shown in the figure is a repeater. Repeaters receive, amplify, and retransmit the digital signal. Repeaters ensure that signal attenuation never prevents the next repeater in the line from reading the signal. The distance between repeaters depends on the type of connection, including the transmission media being used. For example, on a T1 connection over unshielded twisted pair (UTP) wiring, the distance between repeaters is one mile or less. The last component shown in the figure is the Office Channel Unit (OCU) in the public carriers nearest central office (CO). The OCU performs the same function at the public carriers site that the CSU performs at the subscriber site. It generates or regenerates the signal.
Rev. 10.31
19 5
Standalone CSU/DSU
LAN HSSI Cable Router CSU/DSU Coaxial or Fiber Optic LAN Router Coaxial or Fiber Optic
Built-in CSU/DSU
CSU/DSU T3/E3 Service Jack T3/E3 Service Jack
BNC Coaxial Connector
50-Pin HSSI Connector
SC or ST Fiber Connector
* With E3 lines, the public carrier provides only the CSU.

5 Rev. 10.31
A T3 or E3 line also provides a dedicated, point-to-point, fixed-bandwidth link between two sites. As you might guess, a T3 WAN connection is used primarily in Canada and the United States; an E3 line is used in Europe and other locations that follow the ITU-T standards. Public carriers deliver T3 WAN connections as either a channelized or a nonchannelized service. A channelized T3 line delivers provides 44.736 Mbps bandwidth. In contrast, a non-channelized T3 line provides 44.2 Mbps in available bandwidth; 1.997 Mbps of the T3 bandwidth is used for in-band framing control and signal synchronization. In non-channelized T3, the customer is responsible for multiplexing if that customer wants to split the T3 into multiple channels. Both channelized T3 and non-channelized T3 require one of the following for the local loop:

75-Ohm, solid core RG-59 coaxial cable Single mode or multimode fiber optic cable
T3 WAN connections use BNC connectors for coaxial cable and SC or ST connectors for fiber optic cable. A standalone T3 CSU/DSU is connected to the WAN routers High Speed Serial Interface (HSSI) with an external HSSI cable. HSSI uses a sub-miniature, 50-pin male connector that is identical to a Small Computer Systems Interface-2 (SCSI-2) connector.
19 6
Rev. 10.31
Router Overview
The HSSI signaling interface is a subset of the SCSI-2 specification. HSSI provides a synchronous serial transmission rate of 52 Mbps and supports both channelized and non-channelized T3. HSSI also supports the 52 Mbps transmission rate of optical carrier-1 (OC-1). OC-1 is the base multiple of Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) and the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH), which are discussed later in this module. A standalone T3 CSU/DSU can be connected to the T3 WAN connection in one of two ways:

A 75-Ohm, solid core RG-59 coaxial cable with BNC connectors Two fiber optic cables with SC or ST connectors
As the figure shows, T3 CSU/DSUs can be built into the WAN router. Built-in T3 CSU/DSUs use HSSI to interface with the WAN router, but they do not require an external HSSI cable or connector. The connection between the built-in CSU/DSU and the T3 wall jack is identical to a standalone router: either coaxial or fiber optic cable and connectors. E3 WAN lines can also be either channelized or non-channelized. A channelized E3 line provides 34.368 Mbps bandwidth. In contrast, a non-channelized E3 line provides 30.720 Mbps in available bandwidth. In non-channelized E3, the subscriber is responsible for multiplexing if an application requires it. Both channelized E3 and non-channelized E3 require either 75-Ohm, solid core RG59 coaxial cable or fiber optic for the local loop. The public carrier provides a BNC connection for coaxial cable or an SC or ST connector for fiber optic cable. An E3 WAN connection requires a CSU/DSU on the subscribers end of the connection. The CSU is owned and operated by the PTT and is located on the PTTs side of the demarc. The DSU is owned by the customer and is installed at the customers premises.
Rev. 10.31
19 7
Fiber Optic Public Networks
Fiber Optic Public Networks

Offer substantially higher bandwidths than copper Use optical signaling Based on the following standards:
SONETUnited SDHEurope, OC-1base
States, Canada, and Japan
Asia (except Japan), and Australia signaling hierarchy based on OC-1
multiple for SONET and SDH
OCXoptical
Rev. 10.31
Fiber optic offers substantially higher bandwidth than copper and uses pulses of light rather than electrical signals to transmit digital WAN traffic. Fiber optic is rapidly replacing copper as the transmission medium for bandwidth-intensive applications. Although fiber infrastructure is more expensive to install, it provides significant advantages to the public carrier in terms of internetworking operations, administration, maintenance, and provisioning (OAM&P). Fiber optic also provides significant advantages for subscribers: In addition to providing higher transmission speeds, fiber optic is more reliable than twisted pair copper and provides superior redundancy features. Because of these advantages, fiber optic is now the transmission media of choice for T3, E3, and other high-speed WAN connections. Fiber optic is used on both the local loop and the public carrier network. For the purposes of this course, public carrier networks that use fiber optic are called fiber optic carrier networks. There are many standards and proposed standards for fiber optic carrier networks:
19 8
Rev. 10.31
Router Overview
SONET
SONET uses the Synchronous Transport Signal (STS) specification to convert coppercarrier electrical signals into optical signals. STS-1 serves as the base multiple for all STS signal levels in the SONET hierarchy. After an STS-1 electrical signal is converted into an optical signal, it becomes an Optical Carrier-1 (OC-1). OC-1 serves as the base multiple in the Optical Carrier X (OSX) hierarchy for SONET-based carrier networks. As the table shows, OC-1 provisions a 51.840 Mbps channel with 50.1 Mbps in available bandwidth. As is the case with DS0 in 12 copper-based carriers, OC-1 is the common channel used to multiplex higher bandwidth carriers in the OCX hierarchy.
SDH
Like SONET, SDH uses OC-1 as the base multiple in the SDH hierarchy. SDH uses Synchronous Transmission Mode (STM) designators rather than OCX designators to describe its optical signal hierarchy. STM-1 specifies the electrical and optical signaling specifications for an SDH carrier that is equivalent to SONET OC-3. Unlike SONET, SDH does not use STS, nor does it define any electrical-to-optical signal conversion specifications (interfaces) beyond STM-1 carriers. In other words, all SDH carriers above STM-1 are pure optical carriers.
SONET and SDH Channel Provisioning

Both SONET and SDH are capable of delivering channelized and unchannelized carrier services. Channelized SONET and SDH carriers are provisioned and use OC1 as the base multiple for higher bandwidth signal levels. For example, channelized OC-3 and STM-1 both contain 3 OC-1 channels. In unchannelized, or concatenated, SONET and SDH carriers, the entire line rate is available for payload transport, and all OAM&P functions are performed out of band. In unchannelized SONET and SDH, the public carrier does not provide any multiplexing to the subscriber.
Rev. 10.31
19 9
WAN Connection over SONET
WAN Connection over SONET (Japan)
Customers LAN WAN Router
Boundary
1
Add Drop Multiplexer (ADM)
Twisted Pair Cabling
2
Fiber Optic
RJ-48 Connector
Cable termination box
SONET Ring
Rev. 10.31
SONET-based fiber optic networks require different equipment than standard carrier lines. Instead of a CSU/DSU, an Add Drop Multiplexer (ADM) is used to establish the connection and the signaling between the customers premises and the CO. In addition, a fiber termination box is required between the twisted pair cabling used on the customers network and the fiber optic network. When a customer signs up for a leased line with the PSTN, the agreement may include rental of a WAN router. However, the customer should be able to purchase and use any WAN router that supports the T1 standard; however, the customer should double-check with the PSTN to ensure that WAN router is supported. Some WAN routers may also require a separate card that supports an external ADM.
19 10
Rev. 10.31
Router Overview
ADSL/SHDSL WAN Connection
ADSL/SHDSL WAN Connection

Regional Broadband Network
Broadband Switch (ATM)
Local Loop
Router
DSLAM
Broadband Access Server
Customers Premises
Central Office
Rev. 10.31
ADSL provides an end-to-end digital connection between the source device and the destination device. Like a T1 or E1 line, ADSL is a leased private line, which provides fixed bandwidth. An ADSL connection can use the following equipment. Keep in mind, however, that service providers and customers equipment can vary.
CPEThe customer premises equipment (CPE) includes the LAN or the PC that requires a WAN or Internet connection. The customer is, of course, responsible for purchasing and maintaining this equipment. DSL modem or routerNetwork termination at the CPE is provided by the DSL transceiver, or modem. The DSL transceiver is sometimes included with other functionality in a router, as shown in the slide. In addition to terminating the DSL connection, the DSL transceiver corrects errors caused by line conditions and attenuation. The public carrier is responsible for everything between the DSL transceiver and the CO, including the local loop. The customer is responsible for all equipment on the other side of the DSL transceiver. DSLAMThe access node is the DSL Access Multiplexer (DSLAM), which establishes the DSL connection at the public carriers CO. The DSLAM can support multiple modulation schemes and a variety of protocols. The public carrier is responsible for the DSLAM. The DSL transceiver, the DSLAM, and all the equipment in between these two devices are referred to collectively as the DSL network.
Rev. 10.31
19 11
Regional Broadband NetworkThe regional broadband network provides two important connections: It connects the DSLAMs from multiple public carriers, and it connects the DSLAM to the ISPs network. The ISP network includes a router that provides the connection to the Internet. As you might expect, the ISP is responsible for the ISP network.
Depending on the implementation, the ADSL network may also include a splitter. In addition to data, ADSL can support analog voice traffic or ISDN traffic. In the ADSL standards, support for analog voice is called ADSL over Plain Old Telephone Service (POTS), or ADSL Annex A. Support for ISDN is called ADSL over ISDN, or ADSL Annex B, and is common in countries such as Germany where ISDN is widely implemented. Because the local loop is being used for both data and voice traffic (or data and ISDN traffic), a splitter may be required to separate the traffic and route it to the proper destination. For example, at the CO, the analog voice must be transmitted to the voice switch and then routed over the public carrier network. The digital data, on the other hand, must be transmitted to the DSLAM and then routed over the regional broadband network. At the customers premises, the analog voice traffic or ISDN traffic must be sent to the telephones, and the digital data must be sent to the WAN router.
SHDSL
The "asymmetric" in Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line, or ADSL, refers to the fact that downstream data (CO to customer premises) travels faster than upstream data (customer premises to CO). Like ADSL, Single-Pair High-Speed Digital Subscriber Line (SHDSL)also known as Symmetric Digital Subscriber Lineuses a telephone line to transmit broadband data. However, unlike ADSL, SHDSL provides the same high speed in each direction. Because SHDSL allows for fast upload and download speeds, it is being deployed to enable the following:

Web hosting Videoconferencing File transfers involving a large volume of data Corporate LAN-to-LAN connections (virtual private networks [VPNs], for example) Remote LAN access IP Telephony
ADSL shares public telephone lines with voice transmissions by transmitting the data signal on a digital frequency. This sets these data streams apart from the analog signals used by the public telephone network.
19 12
Rev. 10.31
Router Overview
To provide equal transmit and receive data rates, SHDSL employs frequencies that include those used by public telephone carriers. Thus, unlike ADSL, the telephone line cannot be used to provide voice service and SHDSL service at the same time.
ADSL2
While, like ADSL (and unlike SHDSL), ADSL2 can share the public telephone line with voice transmissions, to increase transmission rates ADSL2 provides a digital-only mode, which enables the DSL transceiver to transmit data in the frequency range reserved for analog voice. If companies have separate lines for their telephone network, the digital-only mode enables them to use all of the available bandwidth for ADSL transmissions. ADSL2 also enhances ADSL by improving modulation, signal processing, and initialization. As a result, ADSL2 offers faster downstream transmission rates and supports longer distances on the local loop. The new initialization process also improves interoperability between ADSL equipment and offers a fast startup mode, decreasing startup time from approximately 10 seconds to 3 seconds. In addition, ADSL2 provides enhanced performance-monitoring capabilities. Public carriers can check line conditions to determine if the line will support other types of DSL that have faster transmission rates, and they can monitor line conditions over time and identify and correct any problems that may occur. ADSL2 also reduces the amount of power required for ADSL connections and can run on existing ADSL equipment.
Rev. 10.31
19 13
ISDN WAN Connection
ISDN WAN Connection
3
Terminal Equipment
2
Network Termination 2 (NT2)
Network Interface Unit (Smart Jack)
Repeater
Public Carriers CO OCU
Network Termination 1 (NT1)
Wire Span
Wire Span Office Channel Unit
Terminal Adapter S interface R interface T interface U interface
Demarc 9 Rev. 10.31
ISDN is a dial-up, digital WAN connection between the source device and the destination device. Because ISDN is a digital connection, it is not limited to the 54 Kbps maximum dial-up speed of an analog connection. Instead, ISDN provides transmission speeds of 64 Kbps and above. The exact transmission speed depends on the type of ISDN service and the region in which the service is delivered. Public carriers offer two ISDN services:
Basic Rate Interface (BRI)provides a transmission rate of 64 Kbps or 128 Kbps, while PRI ISDN provides a transmission rate of 1.544 Mbps or 2.048 Mbps. BRI ISDN is provided across the twisted-pair cable that is used for ordinary telephones. Primary Rate Interface (PRI)PRI is provided as a T1 connection in North America and Japan, or as an E1 connection in Europe and Asia.
An ISDN connection uses the following equipment:
Network Termination 1
On the subscribers side of the local loop, the Network Termination 1 (NT1) provides the physical and electrical termination for the ISDN line. The NT1 monitors the line, maintains timing, and provides power to the ISDN line. In Europe and Asia, the public carriers supply the NT1 device. In North America, however, the subscriber provides the NT1 device. Many vendors are now building the NT1 directly into ISDN equipment such as routers.
19 14
Rev. 10.31
Router Overview
PRI ISDN also requires a Network Termination 2 (NT2) device. NT2 provides switching functions and data concentration for managing traffic. In many regions, NT1 and NT2 are combined into a single device. In ISDN terminology, the device that combines these functions is called an NT12 (NT-one-two) or just NT.
Terminal Equipment
Any devicesuch as a telephone, fax machine, or routerthat connects to an ISDN line is called terminal equipment. Two types of terminal equipment are associated with an ISDN connection:
Terminal equipment 1 (TE1)Devices that are ISDN ready and can be connected directly to the NT1 or the NT2. TE1 devices include routers, digital phones, and digital fax machines. Terminal equipment 2 (TE2)Devices that do not natively support ISDN and cannot connect directly to an ISDN network. TE2 devices require a terminal adapter (TA) to convert the analog signals produced by the TE2 device into digital signals that can be transmitted over an ISDN connection. TE2 devices include analog telephones and analog fax machines.
Interfaces
You can add equipment at four interface points on the subscribers side of an ISDN WAN connection. These interfaces define the mechanical connectors, the electrical signals, and the protocols used for connections between the ISDN equipment.
U interfaceprovides the connection between the local loop and NT1. Because public carriers in Europe and Asia provide the NT1, these regions do not use the U interface. In regions that support the U interface, there can be only one U interface on the ISDN network. T interfaceconnects the NT1 to the NT2. In the United States and Canada, the T interfacealong with the NT1 and NT2is frequently built into a circuit board in an ISDN device such as a router. In other regions, the T interface is the first interface at the subscribers premises S interfaceconnects either the NT1 or NT2 to the TE1 or TA. The S and T interfaces are often combined as the S/T interface. R Interfaceconnects the TE2 to the TA. Because there are no standards for the R interface, the vendor providing the TA determines how the TA connects and interacts with the TE2.
Rev. 10.31
19 15
Summary
Summary
T1 or E1 WAN connections T3 or E3 WAN connections Fiber optic networks ADSL ADSL2 SHDSL ISDN
10
Rev. 10.31
In this module, you learned about common physical WAN technologies, including T1, E1, T3, E3, ADSL, ADSL2, SHDSL, and ISDN. Although you will not typically configure WAN connections for HP customers, understanding these basic WAN technologies will help you install, replace, and troubleshoot the HP A-Series routers and router components that are described in the next few modules in this course.
19 16
Rev. 10.31
HP A-Series Router Overview

Module 20
Objectives
This module introduces you to the HP A-Series Multi-Service Routers (A-MSRs). These routers offer reliable, secure end-to-end connections across the Internet for companies of all sizes from large enterprise branch offices to small to medium businesses (SMBs). After completing this module, you should be able to:

List the products that comprise the HP A-Series routing solutions For each router series, describe the following:
Types and numbers of fixed Ethernet ports Types of LAN, WAN, and voice connections supported Types of modules supported Other features such as Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) and firewalls
Rev. 10.31
20 1
HP A-MSR 50 Multi-Service Router Series

HP A-MSR 50 Multi-Service Router Series HP A-MSR 50-60 (DC and AC) HP A-MSR 50-40 (DC and AC) HP A-MSR 30 Multi-Service Router Series HP A-MSR 20 Multi-Service Router Series HP A-MSR 20-1X Multi-Service Router Series HP A-MSR 900 Multi-Service Router Series
Rev. 10.31
This section introduces the HP A-MSR 50 Multi-Service Router Series. These routers were formerly branded as H3C, but are now part of the HP A-Series. First, you will learn about the features common to all of the A-MSR 50 routers, and then you will learn to distinguish between the individual routers in the series.
Note
This course does not cover the following A-Series routers. To provide support for these routers, access the URL listed below and download the hardware installation guide: HP A8800 Router Series: (http://h20000.www2.hp.com/bizsupport/TechSupport/Home.jsp?lan g=en&cc=us&prodTypeId=12883&prodSeriesId=4177488&lang=en&cc= us) HP A6600 Router Series: (http://h20000.www2.hp.com/bizsupport/TechSupport/Home.jsp?lan g=en&cc=us&prodTypeId=12883&prodSeriesId=4177478&lang=en&cc= us) You can also use the HP Networkings Support and Lookup Tool: (http://h17007.www1.hp.com/us/en/support/converter/index.aspx)
20 2
Rev. 10.31
HP A-MSR 50 Multi-Service Router Series Features

High-density LAN and WAN routing and switching Security
Firewall VPN Hardware-based encryption at 600 Mbps (with optional modules)
Converged communications
T1/E1 wirespeed for voice services
PoE for 32 ports (with external power)
Rev. 10.31
The A-MSR 50 Series includes two chassis, each of which comes in two different models (which differ only in the type of power that they accept):

A-MSR 50-60 AC and A-MSR 50-60 DC A-MSR 50-40 AC and A-MSR 50-40 DC
Designed for large branch and regional offices, the A-MSR 50 Series routers deliver high performance LAN and WAN routing and switching with packet forwarding speeds of up to 600 or 1280 Kilopackets per second (Kpps), depending on the processor module. Adding enhanced security to high performance, the routers include an advanced firewall and VPN gateway. Because the routers embed encryption processes in hardware modules, performance does not suffer; the routers encrypt traffic at rates of up to 600 Mbps. Similarly, separate modules handle voice processing, enabling the routers to deliver voice traffic at T1/E1 wirespeed. When using an optional power supply, the A-MSR 50 Series routers can provide Power over Ethernet (PoE) to up to 32 devices such as VoIP phones, wireless APs, and others.
Rev. 10.31
20 3
Common Components of the HP A-MSR 50 Multi-Service Router Series
Common Components of the HP A-MSR 50 Multi-Service Router Series

Modular Require an A-MSR 50 Main Processor Module or HighPerformance Processor Module Support SICs and FICs for connectivity and other services Support a Multi-Service Module to provide enhanced services
Rev. 10.31
All A-MSR 50 Series routers are modular in design, enabling the routers to deliver a great flexibility in port type, port count, and services. First, the routers require a processor module, which can be either the A-MSR 50 Main Processor Module or the High-Performance Processor Module. Customers install other types of modules to provide more options for connectivity as well as other services. These modules are called Smart Interface Cards (SICs) and Flexible Interface Cards (FICs). Finally, the A-MSR 50 Series routers Multi-Service Module hosts additional modules that enhance voice and encryptions services. You will now learn about each of these types of module.
20 4
Rev. 10.31
HP A-MSR 50 Multi-Service Router Series Main Processor Module
HP A-MSR 50 Multi-Service Router Series Main Processor Module

A-MSR 50 Main Processor Module or MPUF (600 Kpps) provides:
One CF slot Four SIC slots Two fixed Gigabit dual-personality ports 4. One console port 5. One AUX port 6. Two USB 1.1 slots
1. 2. 3.
4 5
Rev. 10.31
The picture shows an A-MSR 50 Series router that uses an A-MSR 50 Main Processor Module, which is the module at the top of the chassis.
Note This module is sometimes referred to as the Main Processing Unit F (MPUF).
This module provides the main processor for the router as well as the following:
One slot for a compact flash (CF) card, which can hold the routers software and configuration Because you can remove this card from one router and place it in another, you can use it to quickly get a replacement router up and running. You will learn more in the next modules in this course.
Four SIC slots The picture shows slots that are populated with SICs; your customers router might have different SICs, so the ports may look slightly different.
One console port and one auxiliary (AUX) port You can connect to these ports to manage the router; you will learn more in Module 22: Basic Configuration of HP A-Series Routers.
Two Gigabit dual-personality ports, the only fixed ports on the A-MSR 50 routers, all other ports being included in the SICs or FICs that the customer has installed
20 5
Rev. 10.31
On all of the former 3Com and H3C devices, a Gigabit dual-personality port is actually a set of two ports, only one of which can be used at once:
One 10/100/1000 port (for copper cables) One SFP port into which a variety of mini-GBICs, supporting different types of connections, including fiber-optic ones, can be installed
Two USB 1.1 slots
20 6
Rev. 10.31
HP A-MSR 50 Multi-Service Router Series High-Performance Processor Module
HP A-MSR 50 Multi-Service Router Series High-Performance Processor Module

A-MSR 50 High-Performance Processor Module or MPU-G2 (1280 Kpps) provides:
Three fixed Gigabit dual-personality ports One console port One AUX port One Ethernet 1 management port 2-4 5. Two USB 1.1 slots 6. One CF slot
1. 2. 3. 4.
Rev. 10.31
You might encounter some A-MSR 50 Series routers that have an A-MSR 50 HighPerformance Module instead of the Main Processor Module. This module provides higher rates for packet forwarding (up to 1280 Kpps). Its exterior features resemble those on the Main Processor Module, but the High-Performance Module does not provide any SIC slots.
Note This module is sometimes referred to as the Main Processing-G2 (MPU-G2).
The module includes:

One console port One AUX port One Ethernet port dedicated to managing the device Three fixed dual-personality ports Two USB 1.1 slots One slot for a compact flash (CF) card
Rev. 10.31
20 7
HP A-MSR 50 Multi-Service Router Series SICs and FICs
HP A-MSR 50 Multi-Service Router Series SICs and FICs

Provide a variety of connectivity options:*
LAN WAN Voice
Double-width SIC Single-width SICs
Come in two widths:

Single-width (SIC or FIC) =
Occupy one slot

Double-width
(DISC or DFIC)= Occupy two slots

Double-width SIC
8 Rev. 10.31
Single-width FICs
*Several SICs and FICs provide other services instead of connectivity.
The A-MSR 50 Seriess FICs and SICs provide a wide variety of LAN, WAN, and voice connectivity options to fit a variety of enterprise remote and branch office communication needs. In addition, several SICs and FICs provide enhanced services. For example, one SIC enables the router to provide 802.1 1b/g/n wireless services. And the Open Architecture Module (OAM) FIC can run a wide variety of different services based on the Open Application Architecture (OAA). (OAA is a standard for IT infrastructure that enables third party vendors to develop applications that fit seamlessly within infrastructure.) Customers can choose whichever options they need. For example, a router might have one SIC with multiple 10/100 Ethernet ports to connect to the LAN, one FIC with a T3 port for a high-speed WAN connection, and another FIC with FXO ports to connect to a public switched telephone network (PSTN). For this reason, you will never know exactly which types of physical connections you will encounter in support situations. SICs and FICs come in two sizes: single-width, which occupy one slot, and doublewidth, which occupy two slots. A single-width SIC or FIC is referred to simply as a SIC or FIC while a double-width SIC or FIC is a DSIC or DFIC. Customers can install as many SICs, DSICs, FICs, and DFICs as will fit in their routers corresponding slots. For example, an A-MSR 50 router has four SIC slots in two rows; in these slots, a customer can install four single-width SICs, two double-width SICs, or two single-width SICs and one double-width SIC. The same principles hold for FICs.
20 8
Rev. 10.31
The table lists all SICs and FICs supported by the A-MSR 50 Series routers. You do not need to memorize them, but you should familiarize yourself with the different types of ports that they provide so that you will be prepared for many situations. Some of these SICs and FICs may no longer be in circulation, but you might see them in a support situation. Other modules might be released later; refer to the HP networking Web site for up-to-date information.
Note The ports on the LAN SICs and FICs operate at Layer 2 only. The Ethernet ports in the WAN rows can operate at Layer 3 (support an IP address and so forth). All Ethernet ports are Base-T ports that accept RJ-45 connectors unless otherwise indicated. Speeds are in Mbps. Also note that dual-personality ports are defined as earlier.
Table 1: SICs for A-MSR 20/30/50 Series Routers and FICs for A-MSR 50 Series Routers
Type of Connectivity Type of Card
SIC DSIC LAN FIC DFIC
Card
4-Port 10/100 Ethernet 4-Port 10/100 PoE 9-Port 10/100 Ethernet 9-Port 10/100 PoE 16-Port 10/100 and 1 Gigabit Dual-Personality Port 16-Port 10/100 PoE and 1 Gigabit Dual-Personality Port 24-Port 10/100 and 2 Gigabit Dual-Personality Ports 24-Port 10/100 PoE and 2 Gigabit Dual-Personality Ports 1-Port 10/100 Ethernet 1-Port 100 SFP Interface 1-Port 10/100/1000 Dual-Personality Port 1-Port Gigabit Ethernet Fiber (requires a mini-GBIC) 2-Port Gigabit Ethernet Fiber (requires a mini-GBIC) 1-Port E1/CE1/PRI 1-Port Fractional E1 1-Port Fractional T1 (T1/CT1/PRI) 1-Port ADSL/ADSL 2+ 1-Port Analog Modem 1-Port ISDN-U 1-Port Enhanced Serial (synchronous/asynchronous) 8-Port Asynchronous Serial 3G Wireless WAN Interface 1-Port 10/100 Ethernet 2-Port 10/100 Ethernet 4-Port 10/100 Ethernet 1-Port 10/100/1000 Ethernet 2-Port 10/100/1000 Ethernet 1-Port CE1/PRI 2-Port CE1/PRI 4-Port CE1/ PRI 8-Port CE1/PRI 8-Port CE1/PRI, 75 ohm 1-Port Fractional E1 2-Port Fractional E1
SIC
WAN
FIC
Rev. 10.31
20 9
SIC
Voice
FIC
SIC Other FIC
4-Port Fractional E1 8-Port Fractional E1, 75 ohm 1-Port Fractional T1/CT1/PRI 2-Port Fractional T1/CT1/PRI 4-Port Fractional T1/CT1/PRI 8-Port Fractional T1/CT1/PRI 1-Port Fractional T1 2-Port Fractional T1 4-Port Fractional T1 8-Port Fractional T1, 75 ohm 4-Port E1 IMA, 75 ohm 8-Port E1 IMA, 75 ohm 4-Port T1 IMA 4-Port Enhanced ISDN-S/T module 1-Port Fractional E3/CE3 1-Port Fractional T3/CT3 1-Port OC-3 ATM (Requires a mini-GBIC) 1-port OC-3 Packet over SDH/SONET (POS) 1-port OC-3 ATM Multi-Mode (MM) (fiber) 1-port OC-3 ATM Single-Mode (SM) (fiber) 1-port OC-3 ATM Single-Mode Long-Haul (SML) (fiber) 1-Port ATM Over E3 1-Port ATM Over T3 1-Port Channelized POS 155M to T1 Interface (Requires a mini-GBIC) 1-Port Channelized POS 155M to T1 Interface (Requires a mini-GBIC) 1-Port G.SHDSL (ATM Mode) 2-Port Enhanced Serial (synchronous/asynchronous) 4-Port Enhanced Serial (synchronous/asynchronous) 8-Port Enhanced Serial (synchronous/asynchronous) 8-Port Asynchronous Serial 16-Port Asynchronous Serial 1-Port ISDN-S/T 1-Port ISDN-S/T Voice 2-Port ISDN-S/T Voice 1-Port FXO (analog trunk) 2-Port FXO 1-Port FXS (analog line) 2-Port FXS 2-Port FXS + 1-Port FXO 1-Port E1 Voice 1-Port T1 Voice 2-Port FXS 4-Port FXS 2-Port FXO 4-Port FXS 1-Port E1 Voice 1-Port T1 Voice 2-port Channelized E1 Voice 2-port Channelized T1 Voice 4-Port ISDN BRI S/T Voice 4-port E&M (analog trunk) 802.1 1b/g/n Wireless Access Point WAN Application Accelerator Module (WAAM) for MSR 50 Series Routers Open Application Module (OAM) Rev. 10.31
20 10
HP A-MSR 50 Multi-Service Router Series FIC Slots
HP A-MSR 50 Multi-Service Router Series FIC Slots

A-MSR 50-60 AC and A-MSR 50-60 DC
6 FIC slots
A-MSR 50-40 AC and A-MSR 50-40 DC

4 FIC slots
Rev. 10.31
To hold the SICs and FICs, the A-MSR 50 Series routers provide SIC and FIC slots. You already learned about the A-MSR 50 Series SIC slots, which are provided by the Main Processor Module. One main difference between the A-MSR 50-60 and the AMSR 50-40 routers is in the number of FIC slots that they provide. The A-MSR 50-60 has six FIC slots and the A-MSR 50-40 has four.
Rev. 10.31
20 11
HP A-MSR 50 Multi-Service Router Series Multi-Service Module
HP A-MSR 50 Multi-Service Router Series Multi-Service Module

MSCA for Main Processor Module MSCB for High-Performance Processor Module Required to host modules that enhance processing power for services:
MSCA:
Four VPM slots (for voice) One VPCM slot (for voice)
MSCB: One VPCM slot Two ESM slots

Interior view of an A-MSR 50 MSCA
Two ESM slots (for encryption)
VPM
VCPM
ESM
ESM
10
Rev. 10.31
You should be aware of another component of A-MSR routers: the Multi-Service Module, which resides in the back of the switch and hosts the modules required for enhanced services. One Multi-Service Module, also called Multi-Service Card A (MSCA), works with the Main Processor Module while the High-Performance MultiService Module, or Multi-Service Card B (MSCB), works with the High-Performance Processor Module. The MSCA includes the following:
Four Voice Processing Module (VPM) slots One or more VPMs are required when the A-MSR 50 Series router supports digital voice traffic. A VPM provides digital signal processing (DSP), coderdecoder (CODEC) functions, echo cancellation, and noise suppression for multiple digital voice channels. Customers can install 8-channel, 16-channel, 24channel, and 32-channel modules.
One Voice Co-Processing Module (VCPM) slot A VCPM is also required for digital voice traffic. This module handles the processing for voice traffic, setting up the Time Division Multiplex (TDM) exchanges for each data voice channel.
20 12
Rev. 10.31
Two Enhanced Services Module (ESM) slots An ESM enhances performance when an A-MSR 50 Series router implements an IPsec VPN. Instead of implementing encryption and decryption in the software, which can decrease performance, the router offloads the encryption and decryption of packets to the ESM. Customers can choose from two types of ESM:
Advanced Network Data Encryption ESM Standard Network Data Encryption ESM
The MSCB includes:

One VCPM slot Two ESM slots
These slots accept the same modules as those on the MSCA.
Rev. 10.31
20 13

HP A-MSR 50 Multi-Service Router Series HP A-MSR 30 Multi-Service Router Series HP A-MSR 30-10 HP A-MSR 30-11 HP A-MSR 30-16 HP A-MSR 30-20 HP A-MSR 30-40 HP A-MSR 30-60 HP A-MSR 20 Multi-Service Router Series HP A-MSR 20-1X Multi-Service Router Series HP A-MSR 900 Multi-Service Router Series
1 1 Rev. 10.31
The next section outlines the basic features of the HP A-MSR 30 Multi-Service Router Series, another formerly branded H3C member of the HP A-Series.
20 14
Rev. 10.31

High-density LAN and WAN routing and switching
Packet forwarding up to 250 Kpps
Security
12
Rev. 10.31
The HP A-MSR 30 Multi-Service Router Series comprises six modular chassis designed for large branch and regional offices:

A-MSR 30-10 A-MSR 30-1 1 A-MSR 30-16 A-MSR 30-20 A-MSR 30-40 A-MSR 30-60
The HP A-MSR 30-16, 30-20, 30-40, and 30-60 are available in PoE and non-PoE models, and the HP A-MSR 30-30, 30-40, and 30-60 are available in AC and DC models. The A-MSR 30 Series provides a consistent feature set with that of the A-MSR 50 Series. However, the A-MSR 30 routers, which support fewer ports than the A-MSR 50 routers when operating at full capacity, deliver correspondingly smaller packet forwarding and packet encryption rates (250 Kpps and 240 Mbps, respectively).
Rev. 10.31
20 15
HP A-MSR 30 Series Common Features
HP A-MSR 30 Series Common Features

One CF slot (except the A-MSR 30-10 and 30-11) One console port One AUX port* One redundant power supply input (except the A-MSR 30-11 and A-30-16 AC) Two USB 1.1 slots (except the A-MSR 30-16, which has one) Support SICs and MIMs for connectivity and other features
*On the A-MSR 30-10 and 30-1 the console and AUX port are combined 1,
13 Rev. 10.31
The A-MSR 30 Series routers display some relatively consistent features, which will be familiar to you from the A-MSR 50 Series. The A-MSR 30 Series routers have:

One CF slot (except the A-MSR 30-10 and 30-1 routers) 1 One console port One AUX port However, the A-MSR 30-10 and 30-1 routers have a single port that can 1 function as either a console or an AUX port.
One redundant power supply input for backup power or extra power to deliver to PoE devices However, the A-MSR 30-1 and A-MSR 30-16 AC cannot connect to a redundant 1 power supply.
Two USB 1.1 slots (except the A-MSR 30-16, which has one)
20 16
Rev. 10.31
HP A-MSR 30 Multi-Service Router Series MIMs and SICs
HP A-MSR 30 Multi-Service Router Series MIMs and SICs

MIMs and SICs provide a variety of connectivity options:
LAN WAN Voice
Several MIMs support other services. MIMs come in several sizes:

Single-width (MIM) = Occupy one slot Double-width (DMIM) = Occupy two slots (side-by-side) XMIM = Only fit in XMIM slots
14
Rev. 10.31
The same SICs that are supported by A-MSR 50 routers provide connectivity options for the A-MSR 30 routers. However, instead of FICs, the A-MSR 30s use MultiFunction Interface Modules (MIMs). Like the other modules, MIMs provide LAN, WAN, and voice connectivity options, as well as support for a variety of other services, including OAA services. The MIMs simply fit into a different type of slot. Most MIMs are single-width and occupy one MIM slot, but some are double-width and occupy two. Two MIMs are XMIMs, which must be installed in a special slot that can hold either MIMs or XMIMs. For your reference, the table displays all MIMs and XMIMs for the A-MSR 30 Series routers. (Refer the table for the A-MSR 50 Series for the SICs for the A-MSR 30 Routers.) Some of these MIMs may no longer be in circulation, but you might see them in a support situation. Other MIMs might be released later; refer to the HP networking Web site for up-to-date information.
Note The ports on the LAN MIMs operate at Layer 2 only. The Ethernet ports in the WAN rows can operate at Layer 3 (support an IP address and so forth). All Ethernet ports are Base-T ports that accept RJ-45 connectors unless otherwise indicated. Speeds are in Mbps. Also note that dual-personality ports are defined as earlier.
Rev. 10.31
20 17
Table 2: MIMs for A-MSR 30 Series Routers

Type of Connectivity Type of Card
MIM LAN XMIM DMIM
Card
16-Port 10/100 Ethernet 16- Port 10/100 PoE 16-Port 10/100 24-Port 10/100 24-Port 10/100 Ethernet and 2 Gigabit Dual Personality Ports 24-Port 10/100 PoE and 2 Gigabit Dual Personality Ports 1 Port 10/100 Ethernet 2- Port 10/100 Ethernet 4-Port 10/100 Ethernet 1-Port 10/100/1000 Ethernet 2-Port 10/100/1000 Ethernet 1-Port Gigabit Ethernet Fiber (requires a mini-GBIC) 2-Port Gigabit Ethernet Fiber (requires a mini-GBIC) 1-Port Packet over SDH/SONET (POS) 1-Port G.SHDSL 1-Port G.SHDSL (RJ1 1) 2-Port Enhanced Serial (synchronous/asynchronous) 4-Port Enhanced Serial (synchronous/asynchronous) 8-Port Enhanced Serial (synchronous/asynchronous) 1-Port Channelized E1/PRI 2- Port Channelized E1/PRI 4-Port Channelized E1/PRI 4-Port E1 and Fractional E1 8-Port Channelized E1/PRI, 75-ohm 8-Port E1 and Fractional E1, 75 ohm 2-Port T1 and Fractional T1 4-Port T1 and Fractional T1 2-Port FT1/CT1/PRI 1-Port FE3/CE3 (full, channelized, or fractionalized) 1-Port FT3/CT3 (full, channelized, or fractionalized) 1-Port OC3 ATM (Requires a mini-GBIC) 4-Port E1 ATM IMA, 75 ohm 8-Port E1 ATM IMA, 75 ohm 2-port FT1/CT1/PRI 4-port E1 IMA 4-port T1 IMA 4-port Enhanced ISDN S/T 1-port FE3/CE3 1-port FT3/CT3 1-Port E1 Voice 1-Port T1 Voice 2-port E1 Voice (channelized) 2-port T1 Voice (channelized) 4-Port ISDN BRI S/T Voice 2- Port FXS 4-Port FXS 2- Port FXO 4-Port FXO 4-port E&M NDEC2 Encryption Accelerator WAAM for MSR 30 Series Routers OAM Rev. 10.31
WAN
MIM
Voice
MIM
Other
MIM
20 18
HP A-MSR 30-10 and 30-1 1
HP A-MSR 30-10 and 30-11

HP A-MSR 30-10 and 30-11 additional features: Connectivity:
Two fixed 10/100 Ethernet ports One fixed serial interface One MIM/XMIM slot Two SIC slots
Enhanced services:
One ESM slot
15
Rev. 10.31
The A-MSR 30-10 and 30-1 provide the same features. In addition to the features 1 already discussed, these routers include:
For connectivity:
Two fixed 10/100 Ethernet ports One fixed serial port One MIM/XMIM Slot This slot can hold either a MIM or XMIM. Two SIC slots, which can contain two single-width or one double-width module One ESM slot
For enhanced services:
All A-MSR 30 Series routers support the same ESMs as the A-MSR 50 Series.
Rev. 10.31
20 19
HP A-MSR 30-16
HP A-MSR 30-16
A-MSR 30-16 PoE and 30-16 AC additional features: Connectivity:
Two fixed 10/100 Ethernet ports One MIM slot Four SIC slots
Enhanced services:
Two ESM slots Two VPM slots One VCPM slot
16
Rev. 10.31
The HP A-MSR 30-16 is available in two models: the A-MSR 30-16 PoE and the AMSR 30-16 AC, which is a non-PoE model. In addition to the features that are common to the A-MSR 30 Series, these routers provide:
For connectivity:
Two fixed 10/100 Ethernet ports One MIM slot Four SIC slots in two rows of two
These slots can hold four single-width SICs, or two single-width and one doublewidth, or two double-width modules.
Two VPM slots One VCPM slots Two ESM slots
The entire A-MSR 30 Series uses the same VPMs and VCPMs, as well as the same ESMs, as the A-MSR 50 Series.
PoE on up to eight switched ports (A-MSR 30-16 PoE only)
20 20
Rev. 10.31
HP A-MSR 30-20
HP A-MSR 30-20
A-MSR 30-20 AC, 30-20 DC, and 30-20 PoE additional features: Connectivity:
Two 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports Two MIM slots (single-width only) Four SIC slots
Enhanced services:
17
Rev. 10.31
The HP A-MSR 30-20 is available in AC, DC, and PoE models. In addition to the features already discussed, the A-MSR 30-20 routers provide:
For connectivity:
Two 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports Two MIM slots These slots, which are on the back of the chassis and not shown in the slide, are placed one over the other. Therefore, they can contain only single-width MIMs.
Two SIC slots The SIC slots are placed in two rows of two. Therefore, they can hold four SICs, two SICs and one DSIC, or two DSICs.
PoE on up to eight switched ports (A-MSR 30-20 PoE only)
Rev. 10.31
20 21
HP A-MSR 30-40
HP A-MSR 30-40
Two Gigabit dual-personality ports Six MIM slots (Two single-width only; Two pairs can hold double-width) Four SIC slots
Enhanced services:
Two ESM slots Three VPM slots One VCPM slot
18
Rev. 10.31
The HP A-MSR 30-40 is available in AC, DC, and Power over Ethernet (PoE) models. The A-MSR 30-40 routers support the previously discussed common features of the AMSR 30 Series but provide a higher port density and more options for enhanced services:
For connectivity:
Two Gigabit dual-personality ports Six MIM slots These slots are arrayed in four rows, two of which have two slots and two of which have only one. This arrangement means that two MIM slots can only hold single-width MIMs while the other two pairs of MIM can each contain two MIMs or one DMIM.
Four SIC slots The SIC slots are arranged in two rows of two, so they can contain four SICs, two SICs and one DSIC, or two DSICs.

Rev. 10.31
PoE on up to 24 switched ports (A-MSR 30-40 PoE only)
20 22
HP A-MSR 30-60
HP A-MSR 30-60
Two Gigabit dual-personality ports Ten MIM slots (two single-width only; four pairs can hold double-width) Four SIC slots
Enhanced services:
19
Rev. 10.31
The HP A-MSR 30-60 is available in AC, DC, and PoE models. It provides all the common features of the A-MSR 30 Series and the highest potential port-density of this series. It provides:
For connectivity:
Two Gigabit dual-personality ports 10 MIM slots These slots are arrayed in six rows, four of which have two slots and two of which have only one. This arrangement means that two MIM slots can only hold single-width MIMs while the other four pairs of slots can each contain two MIMs or one DMIM.
Four SIC slots The SIC slots are arranged in two rows of two, so they can contain four SICs, two SICs and one DSIC, or two DSICs.
PoE on up to 24 switched ports (A-MSR 30-60 PoE only)

20 23
Rev. 10.31

HP A-MSR 50 Multi-Service Router Series HP A-MSR 30 Multi-Service Router Series HP A-MSR 20 Multi-Service Router Series HP A-MSR 20-20 HP A-MSR 20-21 HP A-MSR 20-40 HP A-MSR 20-1X Multi-Service Router Series HP A-MSR 900 Multi-Service Router Series
20
Rev. 10.31
This section outlines the basic features of the HP A-MSR 20 Multi-Service Router Series, another previously branded H3C member of the HP A-Series.
20 24
Rev. 10.31

High-density LAN and WAN routing and switching
Security
21
Rev. 10.31
The HP A-MSR 20 Multi-Service Router Series comprises three modular chassis:

A-MSR 20-20 A-MSR 20-21 A-MSR 20-40
These routers offer a feature set that is consistent with other A-MSR routers. However, with a generally lower port-density, a packet forwarding rate of up to 160 Kpps, and a packet encryption rate of up to 100 Mbps, these routers are designed for smaller deployments such as branch offices.
Rev. 10.31
20 25
HP A-MSR 20 Multi-Service Router Series Common Features
HP A-MSR 20 Multi-Service Router Series Common Features

One CF slot One console port One AUX port One USB 1.1 slot* Support SICs
*The A-MSR 20-40 provides 2 slots.
22
Rev. 10.31
All of the A-MSR 20 Series routers include the following familiar features for management access and basic functionality:

One CF slot for the software and saved configurations One console port for management One AUX port for management and other uses (which will be discussed in Module 22: Basic Configuration of HP A-Series Routers) One USB 1.1 slot (however, the A-MSR 20-40 provides two slots)
Customers install modules in the routers to provide connectivity options. The A-MSR 20 Series routers support only SICs. They support the same SICs as the other A-MSR Series routers (refer to the table for the A-MSR 50 Series); however, they do not support the SICs that provide PoE.
Note Because there are no OAM SICs, the A-MSR 20 Series routers cannot support open architecture services.
20 26
Rev. 10.31
HP A-MSR 20-20 and 20-21
HP A-MSR 20-20 and 20-21

HP A-MSR 20-20 connectivity:
Two fixed 10/100 Ethernet ports Two SIC slots
HP A-MSR 20-21 connectivity:

Two fixed 10/100 Ethernet ports Eight fixed Layer 2 10/100 Ethernet ports Two SIC slots
HP A-MSR 20-20 and 20-21 enhanced services:

One ESM slot
23
Rev. 10.31
In addition to the common features of the A-MSR 20 Series, the HP A-MSR 20-20 provides:
For connectivity:
Two fixed 10/100 Mbps Ethernet ports Two SIC slots
For enhanced services, one ESM slot Across the A-MSR 20 Series, the ESM slot supports the same encryption modules used by the A-MSR 50 and A-MSR 30 Series routers.
The A-MSR 20-21 supports the same features as the 20-20 except that it has 10 fixed 10/100 Mbps Ethernet ports. Eight of these ports are Layer 2 only. Note that the A-MSR 20-20 and 20-21 do not support VPMs or VCPMs. Therefore, these routers can support FXO and FXS connections but not digital E1 or T1 connections.
Rev. 10.31
20 27
HP A-MSR 20-40
HP A-MSR 20-40
HP A-MSR 20-40 Connectivity:
Two fixed 10/100 Ethernet ports Four SIC slots
Enhanced services:
One ESM slot Two VPM slots One VCPM slot
24
Rev. 10.31
The HP A-MSR 20-40 routers offer similar features but enhance them with more SIC slots and slots for modules that support digital voice services. In addition to the common features of the series, an A-MSR 20-40 provides:
For connectivity:
Two fixed 10/100 Mbps Ethernet ports Four SIC slots Arranged in two rows, these slots can hold four SICs, two SICs and one DSIC, or two DSICs.
One ESM slot Two VPM slots One VCPM slot
The VPMs and VCPMs that are accepted by the A-MSR 20 Series are the same modules used for the A-MSR 50 and 30 Series.
20 28
Rev. 10.31
HP A-MSR 20-1X Multi-Service Router Series

HP A-MSR 20-1X Multi-Service Router Series
HP A-MSR 50 Multi-Service Router Series HP A-MSR 30 Multi-Service Router Series HP A-MSR 20 Multi-Service Router Series HP A-MSR 20-1X Multi-Service Router Series HP A-MSR 20-10 HP A-MSR 20-11 HP A-MSR 20-12 HP A-MSR 20-13 HP A-MSR 20-15 HP A-MSR 900 Multi-Service Router Series
25
Rev. 10.31
Now you will learn about the next members of the HP A-Series, the A-MSR 20-1X Multi-Service Router Series. These routers were previously branded 3Com.
Rev. 10.31
20 29
HP A-MSR 20-1X Multi-Service Router Series Features
HP A-MSR 20-1X Multi-Service Router Series Features

WAN and LAN switching and routing
Security:
VPN Firewall Hardware-based encryption up to 30 Mbps
Integrated wireless services (for some models)
26
Rev. 10.31
Designed for enterprise branch offices or SMBs, the A-MSR 20-1X Series provides a similar feature set to that of the A-MSR 20 Series: WAN and LAN switching and routing with packet forwarding rates up to 160 Kpps; security features such as a VPN gateway and a firewall; and support for voice at T1/E1 wirespeed. Note, however, that the A-MSR 20-1X routers do not support ESMs, which means that they provide hardware-based encryption only up to 30 Mbps. Some of the A-MSR 20-1X Series routers also support integrated wireless services, delivering a complete suite of features for the branch or small office.
20 30
Rev. 10.31
Common Components of the HP A-MSR 20-1X Multi-Service Router Series
Common Components of the HP A-MSR 20-1X Multi-Service Router Series

One console/AUX port One USB 1.1 slot Five fixed 10/100 Ethernet ports
Four Layer 2 One Layer 3 (for WAN connectivity)
One SIC/DSIC slot for other connectivity options
27
Rev. 10.31
The A-MSR 20-1X Series consists of the following routers:

A-MSR 20-10 A-MSR 20-1 1 A-MSR 20-12 A-MSR 20-13 A-MSR 20-15
The A-MSR 20-12, 20-13, and 20-14 routers further divide into several models, which you will learn about a bit later. Before exploring the differences between each router in the series, examine the common components. Each A-MSR 20-1X Series router has one port that can be used as console port or as an AUX port and a USB 1.1 port. The A-MSR 20-1X routers include more fixed ports than other A-MSR routers, but they have only one SIC slot. The fixed ports are all 10/100 Mbps Base-T Ethernet ports. Four are Layer 2 only (they do not support IP addresses); these ports are intended for LAN connections. The other 10/100 Ethernet port supports Layer 3 functions and is intended to provide the WAN connectionfor example, to a cable modem.
Rev. 10.31
20 31
Note The A-MSR 20-1X Series routers support the same SICs as the other A-MSR routers. However, they do not support any of the SICs that provide PoE. In addition, the A-MSR 20-10, 20-1 and 20-13 do not support any of the SICs that 1, provide E1/T1 voice.
20 32
Rev. 10.31
HP A-MSR 20-10 and 20-1 1
HP A-MSR 20-10 and 20-11

A-MSR 20-10 has no additional features A-MSR 20-11 additional features:
One fixed serial port (synchronous/asynchronous)
28
Rev. 10.31
The first A-MSR 20-1X Series router, the A-MSR 20-10, provides only the baseline features. All of the other routers in this series provide additional fixed ports for WAN connections and, in some cases, other features as well. You will now examine the additional features provided by each router, learning to distinguish between them. The A-MSR 20-1 provides a fixed serial port, which can operate in synchronous or 1 asynchronous mode. The customer can connect this port to a modem instead of, or in addition to, the WAN Ethernet port.
Rev. 10.31
20 33
HP A-MSR 20-12
HP A-MSR 20-12
A-MSR 20-12, 20-12T, and 20-12W additional features:
One fixed E1/T1 port
20-12 or 20-12W = E1 20-12T = T1
One VPM slot 802.11b/g support (20-12W only)
29
Rev. 10.31
In addition to the five fixed Ethernet ports, SIC/DSIC slot, and other features, about which you already learned, the A-MSR 20-12, A-MSR 20-12T, and A-MSR 20-12W routers provide:
One fixed E1 or T1 port The 20-12 and the 20-12W models provide an E1 port while the 20-12T provides a T1 port.
One VPM slot A VPM allows the router to support digital voice traffic. The A-MSR 20-1X Series routers support the same VPMs as other MSR routers.
Support for 802.1 1b/g on the A-MSR 20-12W only, which enables this router to act as an AP and provide wireless connectivity
20 34
Rev. 10.31
HP A-MSR 20-13
HP A-MSR 20-13
A-MSR 20-13 and 20-13W additional features:
One G.SHDSL port One ISDN BRI-S/T backup port 802.11b/g support (20-13W only)
30
Rev. 10.31
The additional features, beyond the five fixed Ethernet ports and SIC/DSIC slot, offered by the A-MSR 20-13 and A-MSR 20-13W are:

One fixed G.SHDSL port, which the customer can use for WAN connectivity One ISDN BRI-S/T backup port, which provides a backup dial-up connection Support for 802.1 1b/g on the A-MSR 20-13W only, which enables this router to act as an AP and provide wireless connectivity
Rev. 10.31
20 35
HP A-MSR 20-15
HP A-MSR 20-15
A-MSR 20-15I, 20-15A, 20-15IW, and 20-15AW additional features:
One ADSL2+ over POTS port One backup port
20-15I and 20-15IW = ISDN BRI-S/T 20-15A and 20-15AW = V.92 analog modem backup port
One VPM slot 802.11b/g support
(20-15IW and 20-15AW only)
31
Rev. 10.31
The A-MSR 20-15I, 20-15A, 20-15IW, and 20-15AW offer the most advanced feature set in the A-MSR 20-1X Series. In addition to the five fixed Ethernet ports and SIC/DSIC slot offered by the other routers, the A-MSR 20-15 routers provide:
One fixed Asynchronous Digital Service Line 2+ over Plain Old Telephone System (ADSL2+ over POTS) port, which the customer can use for WAN connectivity One backup port of the customers choice:
The A-MSR 20-15I and 20-15IW provide ISDN BRI-S/T backup port, and the A-MSR 20-15A and 20-15AW, a V.92 analog modem backup port.
One VPM slot, which, when it contains a VPM, supports digital voice services Support for 802.1 1b/g on the A-MSR 20-15IW and A-MSR 20-15AW only, which enables these routers to act as APs and provide wireless connectivity
20 36
Rev. 10.31

HP A-MSR 50 Multi-Service Router Series HP A-MSR 30 Multi-Service Router Series HP A-MSR 20 Multi-Service Router Series HP A-MSR 20-1X Multi-Service Router Series HP A-MSR 900 Multi-Service Router Series HP A-MSR 900 HP A-MSR 900W HP A-MSR 920 HP A-MSR 920W
32
Rev. 10.31
This section outlines the basic features of the HP A-MSR 900 Multi-Service Router Series. These routers, which were formerly branded H3C, are now part of the HP ASeries.
Rev. 10.31
20 37

LAN and WAN switching and routing Security:
VLANs and 802.1X authentication on LAN ports Firewall and attack protection VPN
Integrated wireless services (on some models)
33
Rev. 10.31
The HP A-MSR 900 Multi-Service Router Series comprises two routers that deliver complete LAN and WAN solutions for SBMs. They provide solid security features, including:
Security measures implemented on LAN ports, such as VLANs, 802.1X authentication, and the ability to participate in an endpoint integrity solution A firewall and other attack protections such as denial of service (DoS) attack and Peer-to-Peer (P2P) file sharing detection VPN functionality
Some of these routers also provide wireless services, delivering a complete solution for the SMB.
20 38
Rev. 10.31
HP A-MSR 900
HP A-MSR 900
HP A-MSR 900 and 900W
One console port One USB slot,
which can support a USB 3G modem Four Layer 2 10/100 Ethernet ports Two Layer 3 10/100 Ethernet ports (for WAN connections) One 802.11b/g antenna (MSR 900W only) 70 Kpps packet forwarding
34
Rev. 10.31
The A-MSR 900 and A-MSR 900W provide the following:

One console port One USB slot, in which customers can install a USB 3G modem The modem provides an uplink connection to a 3G service provider of one of three types:
Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA) Code Division Multiple Access 2000 (CDMA2000) Time Division Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCDMA)
The router itself provides an internal interface for the 3G connection, which handles the IP functions and other functions at and above the Network OS Layer.
Six 10/100 Base-T Ethernet ports:
Four Layer 2 ports (no IP functionality) for LAN connections Two Layer 3 ports for WAN connections
On the A-MSR 900W only, one 802.1 1b/g antenna, which enables the router to act as an AP and provide wireless connectivity to endpoints
The A-MSR 900 routers support a 70 Kpps packet forwarding rate.
Rev. 10.31
20 39
Table 3: Supported USB 3G Modems for A-MSR 900 and 920 Routers
3G System
WCDMA CDMA2000 TD-SCDMA
Vendor
Huawei Sierra Huawei ZTE Huawei
Supported USB 3G Modem

E156, E160, E169, E170, E226, E172, E176, E180, E1750 AC875U EC226, EC169, EC1260 AC8710 ET128
20 40
Rev. 10.31
HP A-MSR 920
HP A-MSR 920
HP A-MSR 920 and 920W
One console port One USB slot, which can support a USB 3G modem Eight Layer 2
10/100 Ethernet ports
Two Layer 3
10/100 Ethernet ports (for WAN connections) Two 802.11b/g antennas (MSR 920W) 100 Kpps packet forwarding
35
Rev. 10.31
The A-MSR 920 routers provide a similar feature set to the A-MSR 900 routers with a higher port count and support for more wireless users. The A-MSR 920 and A-MSR 920W provide:

One console port One USB slot in which customers can install the same types of USB 3G modems as on the A-MSR 900 routers 10 10/100 Base-T Ethernet ports:
Eight Layer 2 ports (no IP functionality) for LAN connections Two Layer 3 ports for WAN connections
On the A-MSR 920W only, two 802.1 1b/g antennas, which enable the router to act as an AP and provide wireless connectivity to endpoints
The A-MSR 920 routers support a 100 Kpps packet forwarding rate.
Rev. 10.31
20 41
Summary
Summary
HP A-Series MSR routers:
General capabilities of each A-MSR series Modules supported on different A-MSR series Connectivity options for A-MSR routers
36
Rev. 10.31
This module has introduced you to the MSR devices in the HP A-Series. You have learned about the general capabilities of each A-MSR series, including the A-MSR 50, A-MSR 30, A-MSR 20, A-MSR 20-1X, and A-MSR 900 Series. Because most of these routers are modular in nature, providing flexibility in the port count and types, this module did not present a precise description of each routers ports. Instead, you learned about the various types of modules supported by the routers and the general types of connections that they provide. You can now recognize the A-MSR routers and distinguish between them.
20 42
Rev. 10.31
HP A-Series Router Hardware

Module 21
Objectives
This module introduces you to the HP A-Series Multi-Service Router (A-MSR) hardware. The module presents you with the basic information you need to recognize problems indicated by LEDs as well as to replace malfunctioning components. After completing this module, you should be able to:

Describe the placement of ports, slots, and LEDs on the HP A-Series routers Interpret LEDs to discover the status of an HP A-Series router and to diagnose problems Reset the HP A-Series routers to factory defaults using the hardware Install and remove modules Recognize SFP transceivers s supported by the HP A-Series routers and install them
Rev. 10.31
21 1
HP A-MSR 50 Series LEDs

HP A-MSR 50 Series LEDs HP A-MSR 50 Series LEDs HP A-MSR 50 Series Power Module LEDs HP A-MSR 30 Series HP A-MSR 20 Series HP A-MSR 20-1X Series HP A-MSR 900 Series Resetting Routers to Factory Defaults Installing Modules and Cards A-MSR SFP Transceivers
3 Rev. 10.31
This first section introduces you to the placement of ports, slots, and LEDs on HP AMSR 50 Series routers, which were previously branded H3C. You will learn how to identify LEDs and how to interpret them to find failed hardware components.
21 2
Rev. 10.31
HP A-MSR 50 Series Front Panel: Main Processor Module
HP A-MSR 50 Series Front Panel

Main Processor Module
SIC slots
CF card LED
Port LEDs
System and module LEDs
FIC slots
A-MSR 50-60 front panel with an A-MSR 50 Main Processor Module

4 Rev. 10.31
You already learned a bit about the front panel of an A-MSR 50 Series router in Module 20: HP A-Series Router Overview, which introduced you to these routers and taught you how to recognize them. The slide displays the front panel for an A-MSR 50-60 router in which an A-MSR 50 Main Processor Module is installed. You already learned about the general features such as the FIC slots, which are a feature of the router chassis, and the SIC slots and fixed dual-personality ports, which are provided by the Main Processor Module. For this module, you will focus on the LEDs. In the slide, you see the general placement of the LEDs on the Main Processor Module. A detailed view of the LEDs and a description of their meaning will be provided in a later slide.
Rev. 10.31
21 3
HP A-MSR 50 Series Front Panel: High-Performance Processor Module

High-Performance Processor Module
A-MSR 50 High-Performance Processor Module
Port LEDs System and module LEDs CF card LED
Rev. 10.31
When a High-Performance Processor Module is installed in the A-MSR 50 Series router, you must look for the LEDs in slightly different places, as indicated in the slide.
21 4
Rev. 10.31
Interpreting HP A-MSR 50 Series LEDs
Interpreting HP A-MSR 50 Series LEDs

Look for yellow LEDs to pinpoint a failed module or component. 345 1
2 6 1 7 1 8 12 9 13 10 14 15 16 17 18
19
CF slot section of the A-MSR 50 MPUF
20
21
Port and LED section of the A-MSR 50 MPUF
22
1. Fixed Gigabit SFP port 1 4. Fixed Gigabit Base-T port 1 7. System LED 10. Power 0 LED 13. VPM 1 LED 16. ESM 1 LED 19. CF card LED 22. Reset button
6 Rev. 10.31
2. Fixed Gigabit SFP 1 LED 5. Fixed Gigabit Base-T1 LED 8. Fan LED 1 VPM 3 LED 1. 14. VPM 0 LED 17. ESM 0 LED 20. Fixed Gigabit SFP port 0
3. Fixed Gigabit Base-T 0 LED 6. Console port 9. Power 1 LED 12. VPM 2 LED 15. VCPM LED 18. USB LED 21. Fixed Gigabit SFP 0 LED
Now that you can locate the LEDs on the A-MSR 50 Series processor modules, you must learn to identify and interpret these LEDs. They indicate the status of the system, power, Gigabit dual-personality ports, fan, voice processor modules (VPMs), voice coprocessor modules (VCPMs), enhanced service modules (ESMs), USB interfaces, and Compact Flash (CF) card. The picture illustrates the A-MSR 50 Main Processor Module LEDs because you will probably encounter this processor more often. The LEDs on the High-Performance Processor Module are similar, but do not include the VPM LEDs because the MultiService Card B (MSCB) used with this processor does not provide VPM slots. When you are troubleshooting the routers, you should first look at the System LED (7 in the picture). If this LED is yellow, the system has failed. You should also look for other yellow LEDs to pinpoint problems. For example, if the VPM 0 LED is yellow, this module has failed. You must replace it. You will learn how to replace components later in this module. Or if the SFP port LED is yellow, the port has not passed the selftest; it might not support the installed mini-GBIC (SFP transceiver). You will learn about the correct mini-GBICs for MSR devices later in this module.
Note The only LEDs that are yellow in normal operation are the LEDs for the Gigabit Dual-Personality Base-T ports.
The table provides a complete description of the states for each LED.
Rev. 10.31
21 5
Table 1: A-MSR 50 Main Processor Module LEDs

LED Color Number of LEDs 2 State Off Steady green Blinking green Yellow 2 Off Steady green Yellow Blinking yellow Description No connection is established. The module is connected. The module is transmitting or receiving data. The SPF port has not passed the self-test. No connection is established. A 1000 Mbps connection is established. A 10/100 Mbps connection is established. The port is transmitting or receiving data.
Green, Fixed Yellow Gigabit dualpersonality port (SFP) Ports 01 Green, Fixed Yellow Gigabit dualpersonality port (Base-T) Ports 01 System Green, Yellow
Off Blinking green slowly Blinking green rapidly Yellow Off Steady green Yellow Off Steady green Yellow Off Steady green Yellow Off Steady green Yellow Off Steady green Blinking green Yellow
There is no power input, or the main controller board has failed. The module is operating as configured. The system is being booted. The system has failed. A fan module is not installed. The fan module is operating normally. The fan module has failed. The power module is not installed. The power module is installed and operating normally. The power module has failed. The VPM is not installed. The VPM is installed. The VPM has failed. A VCPM is not installed. A VCPM is installed and operating normally. The VCPM has failed. An ESM is not installed. An ESM is installed. The ESM is processing services (encrypting or decrypting packets). The ESM has failed.
Fan
Green, Yellow Green, Yellow
Power 0-1
VPM Ports 03 VCPM
Green, Yellow Green, Yellow
ESM Ports 01
Green, Yellow
21 6
Rev. 10.31
USB
Green
Off Steady green
Blinking green
CF card
Green, Yellow
Off Steady green Blinking green Yellow
The USB interface is not connected to a host. The USB interface is connected to a host but is not transmitting or receiving data and can be disconnected safely. The USB interface is transmitting or receiving data and must not be disconnected. No CF card is installed. A CF card is installed and can be identified by the router. The system is accessing the CF card, and the card must not be removed. The CF card cannot be identified by the router.
Rev. 10.31
21 7
HP A-MSR 50 Series Back Panel

Fan Slot MSCA Slot
System Power Slots
A-MSR 50-40 back panel
Rev. 10.31
The back panel of the A-MSR 50 Series provides a slot for the fan, two system power slots, and an MSCA slot, in which the Multi-Service Module is installed. As you recall, this module hosts the VPMs, VCPM, and ESMs.
21 8
Rev. 10.31
HP A-MSR 50 Series Power Module LEDs
HP A-MSR 50 Series Power Module LEDs

Red Alarm indicates a problem. If Run is off, check the power switch, power source, power cord, and module seating. If Run and AC/DC OK are off, the power source is providing the wrong voltage.
AC Module
Normal operation AC/DC OK Run ALM

DC Module
Malfunction
8 Rev. 10.31
An A-MSR 50 Series power module (sometimes called PSU) has three LEDs, Alarm, Run, and AC/DC OK. Refer to these LEDs to discover problems with the power modules. There are two modules, an AC module and a DC module. The LEDs are identical on each module. Problems are indicated by a red Alarm LED and a Run or AC/DC OK LED that is off. If the Run LED is off, the power module is not functioning. First make sure that the power switch is on. Then check for problems with the power cord and power source. Try swapping them with known good components. Also try reinstalling the module; a red Alarm LED indicates that the module might not be seated properly. If the AC/DC OK LED is also off, the power source is supplying the wrong voltage. Check the specifications for the power module and adjust accordingly. If you cannot resolve the problem, the power module might have failed, in which case you must replace it.
Table 2: A-MSR 50 Power Module LEDs.

LED Alarm Run AC/DC OK
Rev. 10.31
Color Red Green Green
State Off On Off On Off On
Description The power module is not in an alarm state. The power module is not well connected or has failed. The The The The power module has failed. module is operating normally. input power voltage is not normal. input power voltage is normal.
21 9

HP A-MSR 50 Series LEDs HP A-MSR 30 Series LEDs HP A-MSR 20 Series LEDs HP A-MSR 20-1X Series LEDs HP A-MSR 900 Series LEDs Resetting Routers to Factory Defaults Installing Modules and Cards A-MSR SFP Transceivers
Rev. 10.31
This section introduces you to the placement of components on the HP A-MSR 30 Series routers, focusing on LEDs and how you interpret them.
21 10
Rev. 10.31
HP A-MSR 30-10 and 30-1 Front and Back Panels 1
HP A-MSR 30-10 and 30-11 Front and Back Panels

System LED Power LED ESM LED
Power Switch Power Socket
Activity LED Link LED

SIC Slots
10/100 Ports
10 Rev. 10.31
Console/ AUX Port
Serial Interface
MIM/XMIM Slot
Removable Slide Rails
Front Panel
To troubleshoot the router as a whole, refer to the routers front panel, which has three LEDs that show the status of the power, system, and ESMs. On an A-MSR 30 Series router, the System LED will be either on or off if the router is not operating normally (blinking is the normal state). Look for a yellow LED to find the failed component. If the Power LED is off, but the router is connected, use a similar troubleshooting process as for the A-MSR 50 Series power modules, checking the power switch, power source, and power cords. Note that the power switch and power socket are both on the front panel.
Back Panel
All of the fixed ports, SIC slots, and MIM slots that you learned about in the last module are located on the A-MSR 30-10 or 30-1 back panel, as shown in the 1s slide. You can troubleshoot a port by referring to the ports LEDs. Each fixed 10/100 port has two LEDs, an Activity LED at the top left and a Link LED at the top right. If the Link LED is off but the port is connected to a cable, try swapping out the cable. The port might also need to be enabled from the router software. Only as a last resort, determine that the port has failed.
Rev. 10.31
21 11
The ports provided by the SICs (30-1 only) and MIM or XMIM will also feature LEDs. 1 Ethernet ports typically have Activity and Link LEDs. WAN ports might have different LEDs. Examining the LEDs for every port on every module is beyond the scope of this course. However, you will learn about some of the WAN port LEDs later in this module when you look at routers with fixed WAN ports. The table displays all states for the MSR 30-10 and 30-1 routers LEDs. 1
Table 3: A-MSR 30-10 and 30-11 LEDs

LED Power System State Off On Off Blinking On Off Steady green Blinking green Steady yellow Off On Off On Description The power supply is disconnected. The power supply is operating normally. The system is not operating normally. The system is operating normally. The system is not operating normally. No ESM is installed. An ESM is installed and is operating normally. The ESM is processing data An ESM is installed but is faulty. The port is not sending or receiving data. The port is sending or receiving data. No link has been established on the port. A link has been established on the port.
ESM
Activity Link
21 12
Rev. 10.31
HP A-MSR 30-16 Front and Back Panels

Console Port
Power LED System LED
Power Switch
CF Card LED VCPM LED
CF Card Slot
AUX Port
Power Socket
ESM 0 LED Activity Link ESM 1 LED
10/100 Ports
VPM 0 LED VPM 1 LED

11 Rev. 10.31
SIC Slots
MIM Slots
The front panel of the A-MSR 30-16 features the main management features of the router, including the CF card slot, USB port, console and AUX ports, and the power switch and power sockets. This panel also provides several LEDs that show the status of the USB slot, power, system, and CF card. You already learned about using the Power and System LEDs to troubleshoot, and this process holds for the entire A-MSR 30 Series. When looking for the yellow LED that indicates the failed component, remember to check the back panel, the location of the LEDs that report on the status of the ESMs, VPMs, and VCPM. In addition, the back panel houses the fixed ports, SIC slots, and MIM slots.
Table 4: A-MSR 30-16 LEDs

LED USB Color Green Number of LEDs 1 State Off Steady green Description The USB interface is not connected to a host. The USB interface is connected to a host but is not transmitting or receiving data and can be disconnected safely. Data is being transmitted or received, and the interface must not be disconnected. The power supply is disconnected. The power supply is operating normally. The system is not operating normally.
21 13
Blinking green Power System

Rev. 10.31
1 1
Off On Off
LED CF card
Color Green, Yellow
Number of LEDs 1
Blinking On State Off Steady green Blinking green Steady yellow
The system is operating normally. The system is not operating normally. Description No CF card is installed, or the router cannot identify the card. The CF card is installed and is identified by the router. The CF card is being accessed and must not be removed. The CF card is installed, but the router cannot identify it. No VCPM is installed. A VCPM is installed and operating normally. A VCPM in installed but is not operating normally. No ESM is installed. An ESM is installed and operating normally. The ESM is processing data (encrypting or decrypting packets). An ESM is installed but is not operating normally. No data is being transmitted or received on the port. Data is being transmitted or received on the port. No link has been established. A link has been established. No VPM is installed. A VPM is installed and operating normally. A VPM is installed but is not operating normally.
VCPM
Green, Yellow
Off Steady green Steady yellow
ESM Ports 01
Green, Yellow
Off Steady green Blinking green Steady yellow
Activity
1 per port
Off On
Link VPM Ports 01 Green, Yellow
1 per port 2
Off On Off Steady green Steady yellow
21 14
Rev. 10.31

Power LED System LED USB LED
CF Card LED
USB Ports
Console Port
Power Switch
CF Card Slot
Auxiliary Port
Power Socket SIC Slots MIM Slots
ESM 1 LED GbE LEDs ESM 0 LED
VCPM LED
12 Rev. 10.31
VPM 1 LED VPM 0 LED
GbE Ports
The hardware of the A-MSR 30-20 routers closely resembles that for the A-MSR 3016. You will find the LEDs for the A-MSR 30-20 routers in the same locations as the AMSR 30-16 LEDs, and you will interpret them the same waywith two exceptions:

The USB LED on the A-MSR 30-20 is slightly to the right of the USB ports. An A-MSR 30-20 routers fixed ports are 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet ports. Each port has only one LED, which has several states, indicating the link status, speed, and activity. Color Green Number of LEDs 1 State Off Steady green Description The USB interface is not connected to a host. The USB interface is connected to a host but is not transmitting or receiving data and can be disconnected safely. Data is being transmitted or received, and the interface must not be disconnected. The power supply is disconnected. The power supply is operating normally. The system is not operating normally.
21 15

LED USB
Blinking green Power 1 Off On Off
System
Rev. 10.31
CF card
Green, Yellow
Blinking On Off Steady green Blinking green Steady yellow Off Steady green Steady yellow Off Steady green Blinking green Steady yellow Off Steady green Steady yellow Off Steady green Blinking green Steady yellow Blinking yellow
VCPM
Green, Yellow
ESM Ports 01
Green, Yellow
VPM Ports 01
Green, Yellow
10/100/1000 ports
Green, Yellow
The system is operating normally. The system is not operating normally. No CF card is installed, or the router cannot identify the card. The CF card is installed and is identified by the router. The CF card is being accessed and must not be removed. The CF card is installed, but the router cannot identify it. No VCPM is installed. A VCPM is installed and operating normally. A VCPM in installed but is not operating normally. No ESM is installed. An ESM is installed and operating normally. The ESM is processing data (encrypting or decrypting packets). An ESM is installed but is not operating normally. No VPM is installed. A VPM is installed and operating normally. A VPM is installed but is not operating normally. No connection exists. A 1000 Mbps connection has been established. Data is being transmitted or received at 1000 Mbps. A 10/100 Mbps connection has been established. Data is being transmitted or received at 10/100 Mbps.
21 16
Rev. 10.31
HP A-MSR 30-40 and 30-60 Front Panel
CF Card Slot
USB Ports
Console Port
Power Switch
Power Socket
A-MSR 30-40 front panel CF Card AUX port LED Power LED System LED USB LED
13
Rev. 10.31
The hardware for the A-MSR 30-40 and 30-60 routers is nearly identical; therefore, you will learn about both at once. As you see, the front panel has many of the same components as the A-MSR 30-20 routers. Use the LEDs to troubleshoot the system as always.
Table 6: A-MSR 30-40 and 30-60 Front Panel LEDs

LED CF card Color Green, Yellow State Off Steady green Blinking green Steady yellow Off On Off Blinking Steady on Off Steady green Description A CF card is not installed, or the router cannot identify it. A CF card is installed and identified by the router. The CF card is being accessed and must not be removed. A CF card is installed but cannot be identified by the router. The power supply is disconnected. The power supply is operating normally. The system is not operating normally. The system is operating normally. The system is not operating normally. The USB interface is not connected to a host. The USB interface is connected to a host but is not transmitting or receiving data and can be disconnected safely. Data is being transmitted or received, and the interface must not be disconnected.
21 17
Power System
USB
Green
Blinking green
Rev. 10.31
HP A-MSR 30-40 and 30-60 Back Panel

GbE LEDs
GbE Ports SFP Ports MIM Slots
A-MSR 30-60 back panel VPM 2 LED VPM 1 LED VPM 0 LED VCPM LED ESM 1 LED ESM 0 LED SFP 1 LED SFP 0 LED
SIC Slots
14
Rev. 10.31
Remember to look at the back panel on A-MSR 30-40 and A-MSR-60 routers for LEDs that report on the VPMs, VCPMs, and ESMs. The back panel also houses the dual-personality ports, each of which, as you can see, is actually two different ports, one a 10/100/1000 Base-T port and one an SFP port in which you must install a mini-GBIC. If the customer is trying to use both ports in the pair, remind him or her that only one can be used at once. Each fixed port has one LED, which indicates its status and activity. Just as on A-MSR 50 Routers, a BaseT yellow LED simply indicates that the port is only operating at 10/100 Mbps. But an SFP yellow LED indicates that the mini-GBIC is not recognized.
Table 7: A-MSR 30-40 and 30-60 Back Panel LEDs

LED Color Number of LEDs 2 State Off Steady green Blinking green Steady yellow Blinking yellow Off Description No connection exists. A 1000 Mbps connection has been established. Data is being transmitted or received at 1000 Mbps. A 10/100 Mbps connection has been established. Data is being transmitted or received at 10/100 Mbps. No VPM is installed.
Rev. 10.31
Green, DualYellow personality 10/100/1000 Mbps ports
VPM
21 18
Green,
Ports 02
Yellow
Steady green Steady yellow
VCPM
Green, Yellow
Off Steady green Steady yellow
ESM Ports 01
Green, Yellow
Dualpersonality SFP ports
Green, Yellow
A VPM is installed and operating normally. A VPM is installed but is not operating normally. No VCPM is installed. A VCPM is installed and operating normally. A VCPM in installed but is not operating normally. No ESM is installed. An ESM is installed and operating normally. The ESM is processing data (encrypting or decrypting packets). An ESM is installed but is not operating normally. No mini-GBIC has been installed or no connection exists to the mini-GBIC. A connection has been established on the mini-GBIC installed in the port. The connection is transmitting or receiving data. The mini-GBIC cannot be identified by the router.
Rev. 10.31
21 19

15
Rev. 10.31
This section introduces you to the HP A-MSR 20 Series port, slot, and LED placement, as well as how to interpret the LEDs. The HP A-MSR 20 Series was previously branded H3C but is now a part of the HP A-Series.
21 20
Rev. 10.31

System LED Power LED ESM LED
Fixed L2 Switching Ports LAN2LAN9*
Activity LED
Link LED
SIC Slots
CF Card Slot
Power Socket
Power Switch
Fixed Ethernet Ports
Console Port
AUX port USB Port
CF Card LED
*The A-MSR 20-20 does not have these ports.

16 Rev. 10.31
On the A-MSR 20-20 and 20-21 routers, the front panel has no components except for the LEDs that indicate the status for the power, system, and ESM. The back panel contains the power socket, the power switch, two fixed 10/100 Ethernet ports, a console port, an AUX port, a USB slot, two SIC slots, and a CF card slot. The A-MSR 20-21 router also has eight more 10/100 Layer 2 Ethernet ports on the back panel. As usual, each port has two LEDs, the Activity LED and the Link LED. On the A-MSR 20 Series routers, a blinking yellow or off System LED indicates abnormal operation. Other A-MSR 20 Series LEDs behave just like their counterparts in other A-MSR routers, and by now, you should understand how to use these LEDs to troubleshoot the router.

LED Power System Green, Yellow Color Number of LEDs 1 1 State Off On Off Blinking green rapidly Blinking green slowly Blinking yellow Description The The The The power supply is disconnected. power supply is operating normally. system is not operating normally. router is booting.
The system is operating normally. The system is malfunctioning.

21 21
Rev. 10.31
ESM
Green, Yellow
Off Steady green Blinking green slowly Steady yellow 2 or 8 Off Blinking
No ESM is installed. An ESM is installed and operating normally. The router is booting. An ESM is installed but is not operating normally. No data is being transmitted or received on the port. Data is being transmitted or received on the port. No link exists on the port. A link has been established on the port. No CF card is installed, or the CF card cannot be identified by the router. A CF card is installed. The CF card is being accessed and must not be removed. The CF card is not operating normally.
Activity
Link CF card Green, Yellow
2 or 8 1
Off On Off Steady green Blinking green Steady yellow
21 22
Rev. 10.31

USB Port Console Port Power LED Power Switch Power Socket
CF Card LED
CF Card Slot
Auxiliary Port SIC Slots
System LED
VPM1 LED ESM1 LED
Activity LED
Link LED
VCPM LED VPM0 LED ESM0 LED

17 Rev. 10.31
10/100 Ports
The slide displays where you find LEDs, system components, and ports on the A-MSR 20-40 front and back panels. The front panel features several management components: the CF card slot, a USB slot, a console port, an AUX port, the power switch, and the power socket. You also look on the front panel for the System and Power LEDs. The back panel provides the connectivity options. It has four SIC slots and two 10/100 Ethernet ports. It also has LEDs to indicate the status of the ESMs, VCPM, VPMs, as well as of the 10/100 Ethernet ports. Use the LEDs to troubleshoot as on other routers.

LED Power System Color Number of LEDs 1 1 State Off On Off Blinking On Off Steady green Blinking green slowly Description The The The The The power supply is disconnected. power supply is operating normally. system is not operating normally. system is operating normally. system is not operating normally.
ESM01
Green, Yellow
No ESM is installed. An ESM is installed and operating normally. The router is booting.
21 23
Rev. 10.31
Steady yellow Activity 2 Off Blinking Link CF card Green, Yellow 2 1 Off On Off Steady green Blinking green Steady yellow Off Steady green Steady yellow Off Steady green Steady yellow
VCPM
VPM01
An ESM is installed but is not operating normally. No data is being transmitted or received on the port. Data is being transmitted or received on the port. No link exists on the port. A link has been established on the port. No CF card is installed, or the CF card cannot be identified by the router. A CF card is installed. The CF card is being accessed and must not be removed. The CF card is not operating normally. No VCPM is installed. A VCPM is installed and operating normally. A VCPM is installed but is not operating normally. A VPM is installed. A VPM is installed and operating normally. A VPM is installed but is not operating normally.
21 24
Rev. 10.31
HP A-MSR 20-1X Series LEDs

HP A-MSR 20-1X Series LEDs
18
Rev. 10.31
This section shows you where to find LEDs and other components on A-MSR 20-1X Series routers, which were previously branded as 3Com.
Rev. 10.31
21 25
HP A-MSR 20-10 and 20-1 Front and Back Panels 1

System LED Power LED Ethernet LED
Serial interface*
Link LED Activity LED
Activity Link LED LED SIC/DSIC Slot
USB Port
Reset button
Console/ AUX Port
Layer 3 10/100 Ethernet Port
Layer 2 10/100 Ethernet Ports *The A-MSR 20-10 does not have this port.
The slide displays the locations of components and LEDs on the A-MSR 20-10 and 20-1 Series routers. As on many other A-MSR routers, most management 1 components, including the power switch, power slot, and USB port are on the front panel. As always, this panel also displays the System LED and Power LED. Note that the Ethernet LED is on the front panel, but the port that is tied to this LED, the Layer 3 10/100 port, is on the back panel. This port typically provides the WAN connection, so the front panel LED gives you an instant view of the status of this vital connection. The back panel also features the Layer 2 10/100 Ethernet ports, which have the typical Activity and Link LEDs, as well as a SIC/DSIC slot. There, you will also find the console/AUX port, to which you might need to connect in order to manage the router. You interpret these LEDs, as well as the same LEDs on other A-MSR 20-1X Series routers, almost exactly as you would those on other MSR routers (refer to the table). Therefore, the rest of this section will not describe these LEDs in detail. Instead, it will point out the LEDs for the fixed WAN ports, and other LEDs that are new to you. For example, the A-MSR 20-1 1features a serial port. Reporting on the status of this port are two LEDs to the left of itthe familiar Link and Activity LEDs, which indicate the status of and activity on the port.
21 26
Rev. 10.31

LED Power System Green, Yellow Color Number of LEDs 1 1 State Off On Off Blinking green rapidly Blinking green slowly Blinking yellow Off On Blinking Off Blinking Off On Description The The The The power supply is disconnected. power supply is operating normally. system is not operating normally. router is booting.
The system is operating normally. The system is malfunctioning. No link exists on the Layer 3 10/100 port A link has been established on this port. Data is being transmitted or received on this port. No data is being transmitted or received on the port. Data is being transmitted or received on the port. No link exists on the port. A link has been established on the port.
Ethernet
Activity
Link
Depends on the number of ports Depends on the number of ports
Rev. 10.31
21 27
HP A-MSR 20-12 Front Panel
HP A-MSR 20-12 Front Panel
Power Switch
Power Socket
WLAN LED* Power LED
*A-MSR 20-12W only

20 Rev. 10.31
System LED
Ethernet LED USB Reset
Port button
The front panel of the A-MSR 20-12 features the power switch and socket, USB port, and the familiar Power, System, and Ethernet LEDs. (As on all A-MSR 20-1X Series routers, the Ethernet LED refers to the Layer 3 port on the back panel.) On A-MSR 2012W routers, you will also see a WLAN LED. This LED reports on the status of the internal 802.1 1b/g radio, which provides wireless connectivity to endpoints. Typically, the LED should be blinking slowly. If it is off, the radio is experiencing a problem. The table describes states on the front panel LEDs.
Table 10: A-MSR 20-12 Front Panel LEDs

LED Power System Number of LEDs 1 1 State Off On Off Blinking green rapidly Blinking green slowly Blinking yellow Off On Blinking Description The The The The power supply is disconnected. power supply is operating normally. system is not operating normally. router is booting.
The system is operating normally. The system is malfunctioning. No link exists on the Layer 3 10/100 port A link has been established on this port. Data is being transmitted or received on this
Rev. 10.31
Ethernet 1
21 28
WLAN
Off Blinking (when the boot ROM code is loading ) On (when the boot ROM is loading) Slow blinking (when the router is running) Fast blinking (when the router is running)
port. The wireless radio is not operating normally. The basic boot ROM is loading.
The extended boot ROM is loading.
The wireless radio is operating normally.
The radio is transmitting and receiving a great deal of traffic.
Rev. 10.31
21 29
HP A-MSR 20-12 Back Panel
HP A-MSR 20-12 Back Panel

E1/T1 port Link/Activity LED Loopback/ Alarm LED Activity
LED
Link LED
SIC/DSIC Slot
Console/ AUX Port
Layer 2 10/100 Ethernet Ports
21
Rev. 10.31
Most of the components on the A-MSR 20-12s back panel should be familiar to you. However, this router also provides either an E1 or T1 port (depending on the model), which you have not yet seen. For this type of port, the Link and Activity LEDs are combined into a single LED. The other LED indicates when the E1 or T1 line is in loopback or is experiencing alarms. E1 and T1 alarms indicate specific problems on the line. You will need to check the E1 or T1 interfaces status from a management session with the router. You can put a malfunctioning line into loopback to test the line for particular problems. Then you can refer to this LED to verify that the line is indeed in loopback. Refer to the table for precise descriptions of each LED on the A-MSR 20-12s back panel.
Table 11: A-MSR 20-12 Back Panel LEDs

LED Link/Activity Number of LEDs 1 State Off Description No carrier signal has been received from the PSTN Central Office (CO); that is, the line is down. A carrier signal has been received. Data is being transmitted or received on the port. The line is not in loopback and has received no alarms.
Rev. 10.31
On Blinking Loopback/Alarm 1
21 30
Off
Blinking
On Activity 2 Off Blinking Link 2 Off On
The line has experienced an Alarm Indication Signal (AIS), Loss of Frame Alignment (LFA), or Remote Alarm Indication (RAI) alarm. The line is in loopback. No data is being transmitted or received on the port. Data is being transmitted or received on the port. No link exists on the port. A link has been established on the port.
Rev. 10.31
21 31
BRI LEDs*
Activity LED B1 B2 LED LED

Power LED
System LED
*A-MSR 20-15A and 20-15AW have analog LEDs **A-MSR 20-13W, 20-15IW, and 20-15AW only
22 Rev. 10.31
Ethernet LED
WLAN LED**
USB Port
Reset button
Here you see the front panel of an A-MSR 20-13 or A-MSR 20-15 router. (Note that only A-MSR 20-13W, 20-15IW, and 20-15AW routers have antennas and WLAN LEDs.) Turn your attention to the BRI LEDs, three LEDs that indicate the status for the routers backup connection (the BRI S/T port is on the back panel). You can use these LEDs to determine if the backup connection is active (perhaps indicating a primary connection failure) and functioning correctly. Refer to the table.
Note The 20-15A and 20-15AW routers provide an analog modem connection for backup instead of a BRI connection, so they do not have the BRI LEDs. However, they have similar LEDs to indicate the activity or inactivity of the connection.
Table 12: A-MSR 20-13 and 20-15 Front Panel LEDs

LED Activity Color Number of LEDs 1 State On Off On Off
21 32
Description The BRI interface is active (that is, it is establishing or has established a connection). The BRI connection is inactive. Data is being transmitted or received on the B1 channel. No data is being transmitted or received on the B1 channel.
Rev. 10.31
B1
B2
On Off
Power System Green, Yellow
1 1
Ethernet
Off On Off Blinking green rapidly Blinking green slowly Blinking yellow Off On Blinking Off Blinking (when the boot ROM code is loading ) On (when the boot ROM is loading) Slow blinking (when the router is running) Fast blinking (when the router is running)
Data is being transmitted or received on the B2 channel. No data is being transmitted or received on the B2 channel. The power supply is disconnected. The power supply is operating normally. The system is not operating normally. The router is booting. The system is operating normally. The system is malfunctioning. No link exists on the Layer 3 10/100 port A link has been established on this port. Data is being transmitted or received on this port. The wireless radio is not operating normally. The basic boot ROM is loading.
WLAN
The extended boot ROM is loading.
The wireless radio is operating normally.
The radio is transmitting and receiving a great deal of traffic.
Rev. 10.31
21 33

G.SHDSL (20-13) or ADSL (20-15) port
Console/ AUX port
Link/Activity LED
Activity LED Link LED
SIC/DSIC Slot
BRI S/T port*
Layer 2 10/100 Ethernet Ports
*On the A-MSR 20-15A and 20-15AW, an analog modem interface

23 Rev. 10.31
The back panel of the A-MSR 20-13 and 20-15 contains all the ports for connectivity and management. As usual, the Layer 2 10/100 Ethernet ports have Activity and Link LEDs. Remember the LED for the Layer 3 10/100 Ethernet port is on the front of the router. A-MSR 20-13 routers also provide a G.SHDSL port, and A-MSR 20-15 routers provide ADSL ports. These ports have only one LED, a combined Link/Activity LED.
21 34
Rev. 10.31

24
Rev. 10.31
This section introduces you to the HP A-MSR 900 Series port and LED placement. Remember, these routers were previously branded H3C.
Rev. 10.31
21 35
System LED
Power LED
WLAN LED*
Reset Button
A-MSR 920W front panel Ethernet Port LEDs USB LED USB Port
**A-MSR 900W and 920W only

25 Rev. 10.31
The front of the HP A-MSR 900 wireless router houses all the LEDs that show the status of the router. The USB port and reset button are also located on the front of the router.
Table 13: A-MSR 900 Series Front Panel LEDs

LED System Color Green, Yellow Number of LEDs 1 State Off Blinking green rapidly Blinking green slowly Blinking yellow rapidly Off On Off Blinking slowly Blinking rapidly Off On Description The system is not operating normally. The system is booting. The system is operating normally. The system is malfunctioning. The power supply is disconnected. The power supply is connected and operating normally. The system is not operating normally. The system is operating normally. The system is operating under a heavy traffic load. No link is present. A link has been established.
Rev. 10.31
Power
WLAN
Ethernet Ports 05
21 36
6 or 10
or 0-9
Blinking
Data is being transmitted or received.
10/100 Ports 01
10/100 Layer 2 Ports 29*
A-MSR 920W back panel Power Socket Console Port
**A-MSR 900 and 900W support four Layer 2 ports

26 Rev. 10.31
The back panel contains the power socket, console port, and the 10/100 Ethernet ports that correspond to the LEDs on the front.
Rev. 10.31
21 37
Resetting Routers to Factory Defaults

27
Rev. 10.31
This section explains how to reset the HP A-Series routers to factory defaults using the hardware.
21 38
Rev. 10.31

Hardware resets are supported on: A-MSR 50 Main Processor Module A-MSR 20-1X Series A-MSR 900 Series
Reset Button
Press the reset button and hold for 3 seconds

28 Rev. 10.31
The following A-MSR Series routers provide a hardware reset button:

A-MSR 50 Series routers with the A-MSR 50 Main Processor Module A-MSR 20-1X Series A-MSR 900 Series
The previous slides pointed out the Reset button, which is on the front panel of each of these devices. To reset a router to its factory default settings, press the reset button, or insert a small object such as a paper clip in the reset slot, and hold for at least three seconds.
Rev. 10.31
21 39
Installing Modules and Cards

Installing Modules and Cards
HP A-MSR 50 Series LEDs HP A-MSR 30 Series LEDs HP A-MSR 20 Series LEDs HP A-MSR 20-1X Series LEDs HP A-MSR 900 Series LEDs Resetting Routers Installing Modules and Cards Installing the PGND Wire Removing Filler Panels Removing and Installing MIMs, SICs, and FICs Removing and Installing MSCAs, VPMs, VCPMs, and ESMs Removing and Installing PSUs, Fan Modules, and Processor Modules on AMSR 50 Series Routers Removing and Installing CF Cards A-MSR SFP Transceivers
Rev. 10.31
29
When you examine an A-MSR routers LEDs, you might discover that a component has failed. In this case, you must replace that component. This section explains how to remove and install components in the HP A-MSR routers. The steps for installing the various modules are not difficult, but they do differ among the types of devices. Please note those differences. The power supply units (PSUs), fan modules, MPUFs, MSCAs, and FIC modules apply only to the HP A-MSR 50 Series.
Important
Before installing or removing modules and cards, be sure to wear an electrostatic discharge (ESD)-preventive wrist strap an ESD-preventive glove.
21 40
Rev. 10.31
Installing the PGND Wire
Installing the PGND Wire

1. Locate the grounding screw near the power input and remove it. 2. Refasten the PGND screw with the PGND wire between it and its hole. 3. Connect the PGND wire to the earth ground.
PGND screw PGND wire

30 Rev. 10.31
You must install the protection ground (PGND) wire. This wire disperses electrical leaks and minimizes electrical interference. It also helps to protect the router against lightning, which can strike the router through an E1 or T1 line. To install the wire, follow these steps: 1. 2. 3. Locate the grounding screw near the power input and remove it. Refasten the PGND screw with the PGND wire between it and its hole. Connect the PGND wire to the earth ground.
The earth ground must have a resistance no more than 5 ohms. If the router is mounted on a rack, make sure that the rack is grounded as well.
Rev. 10.31
21 41
Removing Filler Panels
Removing Filler Panels

Remove blank filler panel
Remove two screws
31
Rev. 10.31
Before you install any module, remove the filler panel in the slot where you will install it. Using a flat screwdriver, remove the two screws securing the filler panel, and remove the panel from the router.
21 42
Rev. 10.31
Removing MIMs/SICs/FICs
Removing MIMs/SIMs/FICs
1. Orient the router so that the module faces you. 2. Turn off power and unplug.* 3. Unplug any interface cables. 4. Remove the screws on both sides of the module. 5. For FICs, pull the ejector levers outward. 6. Pull the module until it is free of the router.
*You can omit this step for FICs on A-MSR 50 routers, which support hot-swapping.
32 Rev. 10.31
To remove a MIM, SIC, or FIC from a router, do the following: 1. Orient the router so that the module faces you. Modules are located as follows:
MIMs are on the rear panel of A-MSR 30 Series routers. SICs are on the rear panel of A-MSR 20-1X, 20, and 30 Series routers. They are on the front panel (Main Processor Module) of A-MSR 50 Series routers. FICs are on the front of A-MSR 50 Series routers.
2.
Turn off the power switch and unplug the power supply cord. You can omit this step for FICs on A-MSR 50 Series routers, which support hotswapping. However, you must use the remove slot <slot> command from the CLI to disable the module first; otherwise, errors might occur. If you do not have management access, you might choose to turn off the power.
3. 4. 5. 6.
Unplug all interface cables from the routers front or rear panel. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, loosen the screws on either side of the module. For FICs, pull the ejector levers on either side of the module outward. Pull the module toward you until it is free from the router.
Removing and Installing Slide Rails: SIC and FIC Slide Rails
Rev. 10.31
21 43
Slide rails divide slots that lie side by side in an A-MSR router chassis. You must install the proper slide rail before you install single-width modules. Conversely, you must remove the slide rail before you install a double-width module. Make sure to select the correct slide rail. Only SICs rails fit between SIC slots and so on for other types of modules. The figure illustrates how you slide a SIC slide rail into the guide rails between the SIC slots. When the rail is level with the chassis, you must fasten the screws. To remove the slide rail, you must first loosen the screws and then pull out the slide rail. A FIC slide rail is larger and looks slightly different, but you install and remove it in the same way.
Note Because the A-MSR 20-1X routers support only one single-width or one doublewidth SIC, the SIC slide rail for these routers includes a face plate that covers the right side of the slot.
21 44
Rev. 10.31
Removing and Installing Slide Rails: MIM Slide Rails
Removing and Installing Slides Rails

MIM Slide Rails
MIM slide rails include a left and right slide rail.
2
34 Rev. 10.31
MIM slide rails include a left slide rail and a right side rail. You first install the left side rail on the left side of the left MIM slot, as shown in the figure. Secure the rail with screws. You then install the right side rail between the MIM slots, again securing it with screws. To remove the slide rails, reverse this process.
Rev. 10.31
21 45
Installing MIMs/SICs/FICs
Installing MIMs/SICs/FICs
1. Orient the router so that the module slot faces you. 2. Turn off power and unplug.* 3. Insert the module, sliding it along guides until it meets the chassis. For FICs, press the ejector levers in. 4. Fasten the screws on either side of the module. 5. Turn on power.* 6. Check LEDs.
*You can omit these steps on an A-MSR 50.
35 Rev. 10.31
You are now ready to install the replacement module. Follow these steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn the router so that the proper module slot faces you. MIMs are on the rear panel of A-MSR 30 Series routers. SICs are on the rear panel of A-MSR 20-1X, 20, and 30 Series routers. They are on the front panel (Main Processor Module) of A-MSR 50 Series routers. FICs are on the front panel of A-MSR 50 Series routers. Turn off the power switch, and unplug the power supply cord. (Again, you can omit this step when installing FICs on the A-MSR 50 Series routers.) Align the module with the guides in an open slot. If you are installing a FIC, press the ejector levers until the module is against the front panel of the router. For other types of modules, simply slide the module along the guides until it meets the front or rear panel of the router. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, fasten a screw on either side of the module to secure it. Reattach the power cord and turn on the power to the router (if not already on). Check the modules LEDs to ensure that it is functioning correctly. After you reattach networking cables to ports on the module, the port LEDs should illuminate.
7. 8. 9.
21 46
Rev. 10.31
Removing A-MSR 50 Multi-Service Modules
Removing A-MSR 50 Multi-Service Modules

1. Face back of the router toward you. 2. Turn off the power. 3. Loosen screws on either side of the module. 4. Gently pull the levers on either side of the module and remove it from the router.
36
Rev. 10.31
You will now learn how to install or replace VPMs, VCPMs, and ESMs. For A-MSR 50 Series routers, which you will examine first, you must first remove the Multi-Service Module (MSCA or MSCB), which houses these modules. (Sometimes you might also need to replace the Multi-Service Module itself.) To remove a Multi-Service Module from a router, do the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Face the back of the router toward you. Turn off the power switch, or both power switches if two PSUs are used. Loosen the captive screws on either side of the Multi-Service Module. Gently pull on the ejector levers on either side of the module and slide the module out until it is free of the router.
Rev. 10.31
21 47
Installing and Removing VPMs on A-MSR 50 Series Routers
Installing and Removing VPMs on A-MSR 50 Series Routers

1. Align the VPM golden finger with the slot on the MSCA. 2. Insert the VPM in the slot. 3. Hold the upper edge and press until you hear a click.
VPM
VCPM
ESM
ESM
37
Rev. 10.31
You can now install components on the Multi-Service Module. Follow these steps to install a VPM: 1. 2. 3. Align the VPM golden finger with an empty VPM slot on the MSCA (the MSCB cannot hold VPMs). The slide shows the location of these four slots. Insert the VPM in the slot. Holding the upper edge, press the VPM into the slot until you hear a click. The VPM should be at an angle to the MSCA, as shown in the figure.
To finish the installation, you must install the MSCA back in the A-MSR 50 Series router; you will learn how in a moment. To remove a VPM, press the spring clips and pull it out of the slot.
21 48
Rev. 10.31
Installing and Removing VCPMs and ESMs on A-MSR 50 Series Routers
Installing and Removing VCPMs and ESMs on A-MSR 50 Series Routers

1. Remove the Multi-Service Module interface and find the correct position for the installation. 2. Install the base on the Multi-Service Module. 3. Align the VCPM or ESM with the slot and press down. Also align this module with the base. 4. Fasten the module to the base with screws.
Screws Base ESM or VPCM Slot
MSCA
38
Rev. 10.31
For A-MSR 50 Series routers, you also install VCPMs and ESMs on the Multi-Service Module (MSCA or MSCB). To install or replace one of these types of module, first remove the Multi-Service Module as you learned how. Then follow these steps: 1. Remove the Multi-Service interface board. Find the correct position for the module on the Multi-Service Module. The previous slide illustrated the location for the different types of modules. Install the pieces of the base on the Multi-Service Module. Align the module with the slot on the Multi-Service Module and press down. At the same time, align the modules screw holes with the base. Fasten the module to the base with the screws.
2. 3. 4.
Reverse these steps to remove a module.
Rev. 10.31
21 49
Installing A-MSR 50 Multi-Service Modules
Installing A-MSR 50 Multi-Service Modules

1. Face back of the router toward you. 2. Turn off the power. 3. Slide the module into the router. 4. Press ejector levers against module. 5. Fasten screws on either side of module. 6. Turn on the power. 7. Check the LEDs.
39 Rev. 10.31
Now that you have installed the components in the MSCA, you are ready to install the MSCA in the A-MSR 50 Series router. Do the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Face the front of the router toward you. Turn off the power switch or both power switches if two PSUs are used. Align the module with the guides in the top slot of the rear chassis. Slide the module into the router until it is seated. Press the ejector levers in until they lie horizontally against the module. Fasten the captive screws on either side of the module. Turn on the routers power. Check the LEDs on the front panel to ensure that the modules housed in the MSCA are operating normally. (The LED for the module in question should be green.)
21 50
Rev. 10.31
Installing VPMs, VCPMs, and ESMs in A-MSR 30 Series Routers
Installing VPMs, VCPMs, and ESMs in A-MSR 30 Series Routers

Install the cards inside the router. To open the chassis:
1. 2.
Power off the router and remove the power cord. Remove all cables on the back panel (except the ground cable). Loosen the back panel screws. Raise the chassis cover completely away from the bottom. Pull the chassis cover towards you until the back edge tab disengages from the front panel.
Rev. 10.31
3. 4. 5.
40
To install VPM, VCPMs, and ESMs on an A-MSR 30 Series router, you must open the routers chassis. Follow these steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Power off the router and remove the power cord. Remove all cables from the back panel except the grounding cable. Make sure that the router is on a level surface and face the routers rear panel towards you. Loosen the captive screws on the back panel. Raise the chassis cover until the front edge is lifted completely from the chassis bottom. Pull the chassis cover towards you until the tab on the back edge has disengaged from the front panel. Put the cover away.
You can now install the modules on the main board in much the same way that you install them on an MSCA. When you have finished, reverse the steps above to replace the chassis cover. After you have fastened the screws and secured the cover, you can restore power to the router. Once the router has booted, check the appropriate module LEDs and verify that they are green.
Rev. 10.31
21 51
Installing VPMs, VCPMs, and ESMs in A-MSR 20 and 20-1X Series Routers
Installing VPMs, VCPMs, and ESMs in A-MSR 20 and 20-1X Series Routers
Install the cards inside the router. To open the chassis:
1. 2.
Power off the router and remove the power cord. Remove all cables on the back panel (except the ground cable). Loosen the back panel screws. Place flathead drivers in the holes on both sides of the chassis. Turn until the front edge tab disengages from the front panel. Drag the chassis cover toward you and then lift it.
Rev. 10.31
3. 4.
5.
41
Follow almost exactly the same procedure to install VPMs, VCPMs, and ESMs on AMSR 20 and 20-1X Series Routers. However, when you open the chassis, instead of simply lifting the chassis cover after you remove the screws, place flathead screwdrivers in the holes on both sides of the chassis and turn them until the tab on the front edge has disengaged from the front panel. Then drag the chassis cover toward you and lift it. At that point, you can install the modules as you learned how to do previously.
21 52
Rev. 10.31
Removing PSUs from A-MSR 50 Series Routers
Removing PSUs from A-MSR 50 Series Routers

1. Face back of router toward you. 2. Turn off and remove power cord. 3. Loosen screws on either side of the module. 4. Gently pull the handle and slide module out along guides.
42
Rev. 10.31
If the LEDs indicate that a power supply has failed, you must replace it. To remove a failed power supply unit (PSU) from an A-MSR 50 Series router, do the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Face the back of the router unit toward you. Turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord. Loosen the captive screws on either side of the PSU module. Gently pull on the handle and slide the module out along the guides until it is free of the router.
Rev. 10.31
21 53
Installing PSUs on A-MSR 50 Series Routers
Installing PSUs on A-MSR 50 Series Routers

1. Face back router panel toward you. 2. Make sure that the power cord is removed. 3. Hold the module by handle and gently push into router. 4. Fasten screws on either side of the module. 5. Make sure power switch is off. 6. Plug in the power cord. 7. Turn on the power switch. 8. Check the LEDs.
43 Rev. 10.31
To install a PSU in the A-MSR 50 Series router, do the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Face the back of the router toward you. Make sure that all power cords are removed from the router. Hold the module by the handle and gently push the module into the router, following the guides until the module is seated. Fasten the captive screws on either side of the module. Make sure the power switch is off. Plug the power cord into the module and a power outlet. Turn the power switch on. Check the Power LED on the routers front panel to ensure the module is operating normally.
21 54
Rev. 10.31
Removing Fan Modules from A-MSR 50 Series Routers
Removing Fan Modules from A-MSR 50 Routers

1. Face back of router toward you. 2. Loosen screws on top and bottom of the module. 3. Gently pull on the handle and slide module part way out. 4. Wait for fans to stop rotating. 5. Pull the handle while supporting the bottom of the module.
44 Rev. 10.31
Perhaps the Fan LED is glowing yellow, and you have determined that you need to replace the fan. To remove a fan module from an A-MSR 50 Series router, do the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Face the back of the router toward you. Loosen the captive screws on the top and bottom of the fan module. Gently pull on the handle until the module is part way out of the router. Wait for the fans to stop rotating before removing the module completely. Pull on the handle with one hand while supporting the bottom of the module with the other hand until the module is free of the router.
Note The fan module is hot-swappable.
Rev. 10.31
21 55
Installing Fan Modules on A-MSR 50 Series Routers
Installing Fan Modules on A-MSR 50 Series Routers

1. Face back of router toward you. 2. Hold the module by the handle while supporting the bottom and gently push into router. 3. Fasten screws on top and bottom of the module. 4. If the router is off, turn the power back on. 5. Check the LEDs.
Rev. 10.31
45
To install a fan module in a router, do the following: 1. 2. Face the back of the router toward you. Hold the handle of the fan module with one hand while supporting the bottom of the module with the other hand and gently push the module into the router slot until it is seated. Fasten the captive screws on the top and bottom of the module. If necessary, turn the power on to the router. Check the routers Fan LED on the front panel to ensure that the fan is operating normally.
3. 4. 5.
21 56
Rev. 10.31
Removing the A-MSR 50 Main Processor or High-Performance Processor
Removing the A-MSR 50 Main Processor or High-Performance Processor

1. Face front of the router toward you. 2. Turn off the power. 3. Loosen screws on either side of the processor. 4. Gently pull the levers on either side of the processor and remove it from the router.
46
Rev. 10.31
You might need to replace a failed processor module on an A-MSR 50 Series router. To remove the processor module, do the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Face the front of the router toward you. Turn off the power switch or both power switches if two PSUs are used. Remove all cables connected to the module. Loosen the captive screws on either side of the processor module. Gently pull on the ejector levers on either side of the module and slide the module out until it is free of the router.
Rev. 10.31
21 57
Installing the A-MSR 50 Main Processor or High-Performance Processor
Installing the A-MSR 50 Main Processor or High-Performance Processor

1. Face front of the router toward you. 2. Turn off the power. 3. Slide the module into the router. 4. Press ejector levers against module. 5. Fasten screws on either side of the module. 6. Turn on the power. 7. Check the LEDs.
47 Rev. 10.31
To install the processor module in the A-MSR 50 Series router, do the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Face the front of the router toward you. Make sure that the power switch, or both power switches if two PSUs are used, is turned off. Align the module with the guides and slide the module into the router until it is seated. Press the ejector levers in until they lie against the module. Fasten the captive screws on either side of the module. Turn on the power to the router. Check the System LED and other LEDs to ensure the module is operating normally.
21 58
Rev. 10.31
Removing CF Cards
Removing CF Cards
Restore a router by replacing its CF card with a card with known good software and configuration. 1. Face the front of router toward you. Ensure that the CF LED is not blinking. 2. Press the spring-loaded CF extractor lever until it pops out. 3. Press the extractor lever in until it ejects the CF card partially out of the slot. 4. Remove the current CF card.
48
Rev. 10.31
In Module 20: HP A-Series Router Overview, you learned that many A-MSR routers have CF card slots. The CF card holds software images and configuration files. When a router is malfunctioning, you can attempt to restore it by installing a CF card in the module with a known good software image and configuration. This slide explains how to remove the existing CF card, and the next, how to install the known good card. To remove a CF card from a router, do the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Ensure the CF card LED is not blinking. A blinking LED indicates that the CF card is being accessed, and removing it can corrupt data such as the startup configuration. Press the spring-loaded ejector lever until the lever pops part way out. Press the spring-loaded ejector lever again to eject the CF card part way. Pull the CF card toward you until it is free of the router. It is good practice to press the spring-loaded ejector lever back in at this time.
Rev. 10.31
21 59
Installing CF Cards
Installing CF Cards
1. Face front of router toward you. 2. Press the spring-loaded CF extractor lever in until it clicks in place. 3. Align the new CF card with the slot in the router. 4. Press the CF card fully into the slot.
49
Rev. 10.31
To install a CF card in a router, do the following: 1. 2. Turn the router so the front panel is facing you. If the spring-loaded ejector lever on the left side of the CF card slot is not already depressed, press on the lever until is fully depressed and locked in place. Align the CF card with the slot in the router. Press the CF card into the slot until it is fully set in place.
3.
You can now reboot the router. Some will boot automatically from the new CF card. On others, you can access the routers Boot ROM Menu (see Module 22: Basic Configuration of HP A-Series Routers) and have the router boot from the new CF card. You can then copy the configuration or software from the CF card to the routers internal flash.
21 60
Rev. 10.31
A-MSR SFP Transceivers

A-MSR SFP Transceivers
H3C MSR 50 Series LEDs H3C MSR 30 Series LEDs H3C MSR 20 Series LEDs 3Com MSR 20-1X Series LEDs H3C MSR 900 Series LEDs Resetting Routers Installing Modules and Cards A-MSR SFP Transceivers A-MSR Router SFP Transceivers MIM and DMIM SFP Transceivers SIC SFP Transceivers FIC and DFIC SFP Transceivers
Rev. 10.31
50
The final section of this module covers the SFP transceivers (sometimes called pluggable SFP modules or transceivers) that are supported on A-MSR devices. Installing the devices themselves is straight-forward and similar to the installation process that you have learned for other devices. You simply plug the transceiver in the SFP port, following the guides. Then remove the protective cover, if present, and connect the appropriate cable to the port provided by the transceiver. To remove the transceiver, remove the cables and press the spring clips. You might be called in to look at a malfunctioning SFP transceiver. As you learned earlier, the SFP port LEDs will indicate whether the device is malfunctioning or is not recognized as a valid device. You might need to install a new transceiver, so you must know which devices you can install in various ports. The following slides provide a list. (However, you should always check the HP networking Web site for current lists.)
Rev. 10.31
21 61
SFP Transceivers for HP A-MSR Series Routers
SFP Transceivers for HP A-MSR Series Routers

SFP Transceiver HP X125 1G SFP LC SX HP X120 1G SFP LC LX HP X125 1G SFP LC LH40 1310nm HP X120 1G SFP LC LH40 1550nm HP X125 1G SFP LC LH70 A-MSR 50 (processor modules)

A-MSR 30-40

A-MSR 30-60

51
Rev. 10.31
Just a few models in the A-MSR Series provide fixed SFP ports:
The A-MSR 50 Main Processor Module and High-Performance Module provide two and three Gigabit dual-personality ports respectively. As you recall, a dualpersonality port is actually two ports, only one of which can be active:
An Ethernet Base-T port An SFP port that can hold an SFP transceiver
The latter port is the one in which you are interested now.
The A-MSR 30-40 and 30-60 both provide two Gigabit dual-personality ports.
The slide displays the transceivers that you can install in these ports.
21 62
Rev. 10.31
SFP Transceivers for HP A-Series MIMs and DIMs
SFP Transceivers for HP A-Series MIMs and DIMs

SFP Transceiver
HP X1 100M SFP 15 LC FX HP X1 100M SFP 10 LC LX HP X1 100M SFP 10 LC LH40 HP X1 100M SFP 10 LC LH80 HP X125 1G SFP LC SX HP X120 1G SFP LC LX HP X125 1G SFP LC LH40 1310nm HP X120 1G SFP LC LH40 1550nm HP X125 1G SFP LC LH70 52 Rev. 10.31
1-Port OC3 ATM
1-Port Gigabit Fiber
2-Port Gigabit Fiber
24-Port 10/100 and 2 Dual Personality Ports
24-Port 10/100 PoE and 2 Dual Personality Ports
Some of the MIMs and DIMs supported by A-MSR 30 Series routers provide SFP or dual-personality ports. The slide displays the SFP transceivers that customers can install in these ports.
Rev. 10.31
21 63
SFP Transceivers for HP A-Series SICs
SFP Transceivers for HP A-Series SICs

SFP Transceiver
HP X1 100M SFP LC FX 15 HP X1 100M SFP LC LX 10 HP X1 100M SFP LC LH40 10 HP X1 100M SFP LC LH80 10 HP X125 1G SFP LC SX HP X120 1G SFP LC LX HP X125 1G SFP LC LH40 1310nm HP X120 1G SFP LC LH40 1550nm HP X125 1G SFP LC LH70
1-Port 100 SFP
1-Port 10/100/1000 Dual-Personality Port
53
Rev. 10.31
Similarly, one SIC provides a 10/100 SFP port, and one provides a 10/100/1000 dual-personality port. The slide shows the wide array of SFP transceivers that customers can install in these ports.
21 64
Rev. 10.31
SFP Transceivers for HP A-Series FICs
SFP Transceivers for HP A-Series FICs

SFP Transceiver
HP X1 100M SFP LC 15 FX HP X1 100M SFP LC 10 LX HP X1 100M SFP LC 10 LH40 HP X1 100M SFP LC 10 LH80 HP X125 1G SFP LC SX HP X120 1G SFP LC LX HP X125 1G SFP LC LH40 1310nm HP X120 1G SFP LC LH40 1550nm HP X125 1G SFP LC LH70 54 Rev. 10.31
1-Port OC3 ATM
1-Port Gigabit Ethernet Fiber
2-Port Gigabit Ethernet Fiber
16-Port 10/100 and 1 DualPersonality Port
16-Port 10/100 PoE and 1 Dual-Personality Port
Refer to the table in this slide to see SFP transceivers supported by various A-MSR 50 Series FICs.
Rev. 10.31
21 65
SFP Transceivers for HP A-Series DFICs
SFP Transceivers for HP A-Series DFICs

SFP Transceiver HP X125 1G SFP LC SX HP X120 1G SFP LC LX HP X125 1G SFP LC LH40 1310nm HP X120 1G SFP LC LH40 1550nm HP X125 1G SFP LC LH70 24-Port 10/100 and 2 Gigabit DualPersonality Port 24-Port 10/100 PoE and 2 Gigabit DualPersonality Port
55
Rev. 10.31
Finally, this table applies to the DFICs that provide SFP ports for HP A-MSR 50 Series routers.
21 66
Rev. 10.31
Summary
Summary
Locating LEDs on MSR routers Using the LEDs to pinpoint failed components Resetting to factory default settings using the Reset button Replacing failed components Recognizing SFP transceivers supported by A-MSR routers and their modules
56
Rev. 10.31
In this module, you have learned how to locate A-MSR routers hardware components, focusing on their LEDs, and you have learned how to use those LEDs to pinpoint which router component has failed. Next you learned how to reset the router to factory defaults ad replace each A-MSR hardware component. And finally you were given a reference for SFP transceivers supported by MSR routers and their modules.
Rev. 10.31
21 67
21 68
Rev. 10.31
Basic Configuration of HP A-Series Routers

Module 22
Objectives
This module covers the basic configuration options for an HP A-Series Multi Service Router (A-MSR). Because these routers run ComWare, you manage them in much the same way and with much the same commands as A-Series switches, which are also built on ComWare. In other words, the same troubleshooting processes and tasks that you learned in Module 4: Basic Configuration of HP A-Series Switches apply to the A-Series routers. If you have not yet read Module 4, you should do so now; that module will provide the overarching troubleshooting process. This module will simply indicate the management options that are available on the A-Series routers, focusing on options and troubleshooting tasks that differ from those for A-Series switches. By the time that you have completed this module, you should be able to:

Manage configurations and software on A-Series routers Access an A-Series routers CLI out-of-band and in-band, locally and remotely even when the router has no IP address Access the Boot ROM menu to solve problems with lost passwords or corrupted software
Rev. 10.31
22 1
HP A-Series Router Software Images and Configuration Files

Software Images Configuration Files Flash and Compact Flash Memory
HP A-Series Router Management Solve Problems Using the Boot ROM Menu
Rev. 10.31
This section describes the HP A-Series routers support for multiple software images and configuration files. It also reminds you of the ways that you can manage these files, which you learned in Module 4: Basic Configuration of HP A-Series Switches.
22 2
Rev. 10.31
Managing Software on an HP A-Series Router
Managing Software on an HP A-Series Router

Three software images selected from file system:
One main One backup One secure
boot-loader file <filename> slot [all | <id>] main
<name1>.bin
Main attribute Backup attribute* Secure attribute*
<name2>.bin
boot-loader file <filename> slot [all | <id>] backup
secure.bin
Must be updated from the boot ROM menu
*Only booted when the router power cycles

4 Rev. 10.31
The HP A-Series routers have a complete file system in their non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM) which is stored on a compact flash card or in the flash memory. Management users can upload as many files as the memory can hold, including software files. However, only three software images are active:
Main softwareThe router first attempts to load this software whenever it reboots. Backup softwareThe router loads this software should the main software fail. Secure softwareThis is known good software that the router loads as a last resort if the main software and backup software both fail. If the router cannot load this software, the boot fails.
The CLI commands for setting a specific file as the main or backup software on HP ASeries routers match the commands that you learned for the A-Series switches, as shown in the slide. The secure software must be installed from the boot ROM menu; you will learn how a bit later. While the main and backup software files can have any name, the secure software must be named secure.bin; if you change this name, the software file no longer acts as the secure software image and will not be booted should the other software fail.
Rev. 10.31
22 3
Note The router can boot only the main software when it undergoes a soft reboot (a reboot initiated by the reboot command). If the main software image is corrupted, instead of booting the backup or secure software, the router fails to boot. The router must power cycle to boot the backup software. Therefore, if you are troubleshooting a router that fails to boot, always power cycle it to give the backup software an opportunity to boot.
Note that, on the A-Series routers, the boot ROM code is automatically updated when you update the software image.
22 4
Rev. 10.31
Managing Configurations on an HP A-Series Router
Managing Configurations on an HP A-Series Router

Running-config (VRAM) Multiple saved configurations (NVRAM):
One main startup-config One backup startup-config
Running-config
save <filename> save [safely] [main] save backup
Startup-config
Named file
Backup startup-config
startup savedconfiguration <filename> main

5 Rev. 10.31
startup savedconfiguration <filename> backup
By now, you should be familiar with the terms, running-config and startup-config, which apply to the HP A-Series routers as to other networking devices. When the HP A-Series router loads, it loads the configurations stored in the startup-config. If the router has a main and backup startup-config, the router typically loads the main configuration, only loading the backup one if the other fails. The router stores the configurations that are currently in effect in the running-config in the volatile RAM (VRAM). If you make configuration changes, you must save these changes to the compact flash memory to preserve them. Just as on HP A-Series switches, you can save the running-config directly to either the main or the backup startup-config, or you can save the changes to a named configuration file. You can later set a named file to act as either of the startup-config files. The slide illustrates the commands for these tasks, which should be familiar from Module 4: Basic Configuration of HP A-Series Switches.
Rev. 10.31
22 5
Flash and Compact Flash Memory
Flash and Compact Flash Memory

Many A-MSR routers have: Flash memory Compact flash memory When you specify a file name, specify the location
<ARouter> copy cf:/myconfig flash:/myconfig <ARouter> startup saved-configuration flash:/myconfig
Rev. 10.31
As you learned in the previous modules, many A-MSR routers have both a flash memory and a compact flash slot that can hold a compact flash card. Therefore, when you specify a filename as part of a CLI command, you need to specify to which memory you are referring. For example, you learned how to replace a routers compact flash card in Module 21: HP A-Series Router Hardware. After replacing the card, you could enter the first command shown in the slide to copy a working configuration file from the compact flash card (specified by the cf drive keyword) to the internal flash memory (specified by flash). You could then set the configuration file stored in the flash memory as the routers startup-config.
22 6
Rev. 10.31
HP A-Series Router Management

HP A-Series Router Management
HP A-Series Router Software Images and Configuration Files HP A-Series Router Management

Management Options Management Access Remote Access to a Router Without IP Connectivity CLI Commands Web Browser Interface
Solve Problems Using the Boot ROM Menu
Rev. 10.31
You will now learn about the options for managing an HP A-Series router. You will learn how to access the router CLI in several different ways, including a method for reaching the router from a remote location even when the router does not have IP connectivity. You will then briefly review CLI commands for ComWare devices before moving on to examine the Web browser interface.
Rev. 10.31
22 7
HP A-Series Router Management Interfaces
HP A-Series Router Management Interfaces

HP A-Series routers support:
CLI Web browser interface SNMP*
*Not discussed in this course

8 Rev. 10.31
Like other HP networking products, HP A-Series routers feature a CLI with commands for managing every aspect of the device; a Web browser interface, which guides you through management tasks in a graphical user interface (GUI); and support for Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) so that the routers can participate in a SNMP-compliant centralized management solution.
22 8
Rev. 10.31
HP A-Series Router CLI Review
HP A-Series Router CLI Review

Refer to Module 4: Basic Configuration of HP A-Series Switches
system-view User privilege level System (2)
quit return Ctrl+Z quit
Rev. 10.31
You will often use the CLI because you can access this management interface in troubleshooting scenarios in which the router has no IP connectivity. Because Module 4: Basic Configuration of HP A-Series Switches already covered troubleshooting processes and the related CLI commands, this module will not repeat the information at length. Instead the table below summarizes the commands for completing the various tasks. Commands that differ at all between the A-Series switches and routers are marked with an X in the final column. The main differences lie in the interface names; besides those differences, the A-Series router commands are identical to the ones that you already know. In addition, the A-Series router CLI divides into the familiar privilege levels and views. Also note that, on the A-MSR routers, you can assign IP addresses directly to an Ethernet interface when you need to establish IP connectivity. Remember that not all Ethernet interfaces support Layer 3, however. Assign the address to one of the routers fixed Layer 3-capable Ethernet ports. Finally, remember that when you specify a filename on the A-MSR routers, you should specify the full path, including the drive (cf or flash). If you do not, the filename is assumed to be in the current path.
Rev. 10.31
22 9
Table 1: Common HP A-Series CLI Commands

Display information about the routers software image, main control boards, and interface boards Display which saved configuration is being used as the startup-config (main and backup) Display the configurations in the running-config (different from default) Display the configurations in the main saved-config (different from default) Display the most recently entered commands (10 by default) Compile detailed information about the switchs operation and configuration View all files in the flash memory Assign an IP address to an Ethernet interface display version monitor (1) any
HP A-Series Router Command
Privilege Level
View
Different from A-Series Switch?
display startup
monitor (1)
any
display currentconfiguration display savedconfiguration display history-command display diagnosticinformation dir interface ethernet <ID> ip address [dhcp-alloc | <address> [mask | length] ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0 <router IP address> ip route <network address> <prefix length> <router IP address> ping <IP address>
system (2)
any
system (2)
any
monitor (1) monitor (1)
any any
manage (3) system (2)
user system Ethernet interface command system system
Set up IP connectivity on the router

X
Create a default route Create a static route
system (2) system (2)
Verify connectivity
visitor (0)
any
Backup and restore the startup-config

Back up the (main) startup-config to a TFTP server Restore the startup-config from a TFTP server backup startupconfiguration to <server address> [<file>] restore startupconfiguration from <server address> <file.cfg> save [safely] [main] or save <filename> startup savedconfiguration <filename> [main | backup] system (2) user
system (2)
user
Save configuration changes directly to the startup-config system (2) any
22 10
Rev. 10.31
Copy a configuration file Save configuration changes to a named file Set a saved configuration file as the startup-config
copy <filename> <filename> save <filename> startup savedconfiguration <filename> [main | backup] reset saved-configuration main reset saved-configuration backup undo startup savedconfiguration reboot tftp <server address> get <source filename> [<destination filename>] bootrom update file <filename> slot 1
manage (3) system (2) system (2)
user any user
Reboot or reset the router

Delete the startup-config and reset to factory defaults system (2) user
Reset to factory defaults, but preserve the file that is the current startup-config in flash memory Reboot the router
system (2)
user
system (2) manage (3)
user user
Upgrade the router software

Obtain a file (such as a software image) from a TFTP server Upgrade the Boot ROM code *You should not have to update the Boot ROM code separately; it should update when you update the software image. Select the software image from which the router will next boot
system (2)
user
boot-loader file <filename> [main | backup] sysname <name> snmp-agent sysinfo location <location> snmp-agent sysinfo contact <contact> user-interface console 0 authentication-mode password set authentication password [simple | cipher] <password> local-user <username> set password [simple | cipher] <password> level <level> service-type terminal quit user-interface console 0 authentication-mode scheme
system (2)
user

Set the system name Set the location that the router reports via SNMP Set the management contact that the router reports via SNMP Protect console access to the switch by setting a password on the console user interface system (2) manage (3) manage (3) system system system
Set up management access through console and Telnet connections

manage (3) manage (3) manage (3) system user interface command X
Protect console access by creating user accounts and enforcing scheme authentication (with local users)
manage (3)
system user interface command
Rev. 10.31
22 11
Set up Telnet access and protect it with a password
telnet server enable user-interface vty 0 <n> set password [simple | cipher] <password> user privilege level <level> telnet server enable local-user <username> set password [simple | cipher] <password> level <level> service-type telnet quit user-interface vty 0 <n> authentication-mode scheme super password level <level> [simple | cipher] <password>
manage (3)
system view user interface command
Set up Telnet access and protect it with scheme authentication
manage (3)
system user interface command system
Set super passwords to allow users to move to higher levels
manage (3) (or system for system and below)
22 12
Rev. 10.31

Console port
Local out-of-band management access User interface = CON0
AUX port (or asynchronous serial port)*

Backup for Console port User interface and physical interface = AUX0 Asynchronous mode = Flow (default)
Direct serial connection to console port Direct or indirect to AUX port
*Power cycle the router to access the AUX port

10 Rev. 10.31
In Module 4: Basic Configuration of HP A-Series Switches, you learned how to access an A-Series devices CLI in several different ways. But the HP A-Series switches only offered one means of out-of-band accessa console port. The HP A-Series routers provide an AUX port in addition to a console port. You can use the AUX port as a backup if the console port has failed. The AUX cable, provided with the router, has an RJ-45 connector, which fits in the AUX port, as well as two other connectors. For a management connection, connect the DB-9 female connector to the console port on your management station. Power cycle the router. (The management session might not open correctly unless you do.) Then open a console session just as you would to the console port. Over the AUX connection, you can do almost everything that you can do on a console connection. However, you cannot reach the boot ROM menu through the AUX port. You can also connect to the AUX port remotely by connecting it and your management station to modems that can reach each other. You or the customer must set up the routers modem as described for this form of remote console access in Module 4: Basic Configuration of HP A-Series Switches. Note that the AUX port can fulfill other functions besides providing management access; for example, the modem connection can provide a backup interface. To provide management access, the port must operate in flow mode for the asynchronous mode. Flow mode is the default setting for an AUX port, but you should confirm that the customer has not changed it before you attempt to access the CLI through this port.
Rev. 10.31
22 13
The extra port on the routers leads to an important difference between the A-Series switch and the A-Series router CLI. On the switches, the AUX0 user interface controls console port management access. For the routers, the AUX0 user interface controls access through the AUX port. The router CLI also has an AUX0 interface view that controls physical and data-link settings such as the asynchronous mode. On the routers, the user interface for the console port is CON0.
Note On the A-MSR 20-1X routers, the AUX and console port are combined, so, while you can manage the router remotely through the Console/AUX port, there is no backup in case the port fails. The A-MSR 900 Series routers provide only a console port.
The table compiles information about the console and AUX ports. You must match the ports terminal settings on your management stations terminal session software. Note that the settings listed in the table are defaults; ask the customer for the routers actual settings.
Table 2: Console or AUX Port Settings

Router Port
Console port
Cable
RJ-45 and DB-9 (female)
Default Terminal Settings

Baud rate = 9,600 Data rate = 8 Parity = None Stop bits = 1 Flow control = None Baud rate = 9,600 Data rate = 8 Parity = None Stop bits = 1 Flow control = None
User Interface on the Router

CON0
AUX port
RJ-45 to DB-9 (female) and DB-25 (male) *Use the DB-9 female connector to connect to your management station
AUX0
22 14
Rev. 10.31
Access the CLI on a TTY Interface
Access the CLI on a TTY Interface

True Type terminal
Accessed through a serial connection:
Type = Asynchronous Asynchronous mode = Flow
User interface = TTY1-TTYN Not typically used for management access

Direct or indirect asynchronous serial connection
WAN
Terminal
1 1
Rev. 10.31
You can also connect to the CLI over an asynchronous serial connection between a terminal and a serial port on the router. The serial port must operate in asynchronous mode and flow mode. The user interfaces that control this form of management access are labeled TTY1, TTY2, and so on. By default, no authentication is required to login via TTY. However, TTY interfaces support the same authentications methods as user interfaces on any ComWare device. Instead of using the TTY user interfaces for management access, customers typically use the interfaces as part of a terminal access solution, in which a terminal at a branch office is connected to the asynchronous port on the router. The router connects to a central Front End Processor (FEP) through the network and pushes services that run on the FEP to the terminal. Therefore, you will rarely use TTY to access the router. If a customer asks you to do so, the router will presumably already have a correctly configured and functional asynchronous serial connection. However, for your reference, the table below provides further details.
Rev. 10.31
22 15
Table 3: Serial Port Settings

Prerequisites
Connected asynchronous serial port
Related tasks or commands
Router has a module with an asynchronous serial port or

synchronous/asynchronous port configured in asynchronous mode.
This port is connected to your terminal with the correct cable
Correctly configured serial interface
(typically, V.24, V.35, X.21, RS449, or RS530); or this port is connected to a modem to which your terminal, with its own modem, has access. system-view interface [async | serial] <ID> physical-mode async async mode flow
22 16
Rev. 10.31
Access the CLI In-Band
Access the CLI In-Band

Telnet or SSH
Remote IP connectivity required User interfaces = VTY0-4
Connection through the network LAN/ WAN
12
Rev. 10.31
If you have IP connectivity to the HP A-Series router, you can use Telnet or SSH to reach the CLI. The routers support up to five Telnet or SSH connections on user interfaces labeled VTY0 to VTY4. You set up and obtain Telnet access to an HP ASeries router just as you do to an A-Series switch. Refer to Module 4: Basic Configuration of HP A-Series Switches.
Rev. 10.31
22 17
Use Telnet to Access a Router with No IP Connectivity
Use Telnet to Access a Router with No IP Connectivity

Set up router 1 to redirect Telnet sessions out its AUX or asynchronous serial port. Router 2s connecting port must permit management access.
LAN/ WAN
Connection through the network
Redirect on Telnet to 60009
Telnet to 60009
Asynchronous serial connection
Router without IP connectivity

13 Rev. 10.31
You already learned one way to obtain remote access to A-Series router without IP connectivity: use an asynchronous serial port. However, your management station might not be able to create such a connection. If the customer has another functional A-Series router, you can configure that router to redirect Telnet connections over an asynchronous serial connection to the router without IP connectivity. For this solution to work:
The malfunctioning routers AUX port (or asynchronous serial port) must be functional and operating in flow mode. The user interface (AUX0 or TTY1-N) that corresponds to the connected port on the malfunctioning router must permit management access. Obtain management access to the CLI of the fully functional A-Series router. You will require manage level access. Move to the system view:
<ARouter> system-view
If the customers environment meets these requirements, follow these steps: 1. 2. 3. 4.
If necessary, set up Telnet access on this router. (Refer to the table of Common HP A-Series CLI Commands.) Establish an asynchronous serial connection between the two routers.
22 18
Rev. 10.31
5.
On the functioning router, set up either the AUX0 user interface or a TTY user interface (depending on which port you connected) to redirect Telnet sessions that arrive on a particular TCP port. Enter these commands:
[ARouter] user-interface [aux0 | tty <n>] [ARouter-ui-name] stopbit-error intolerance [ARouter-ui-name] redirect [ARouter-ui-name] redirect listen-port <port> Note When you enter the redirect listen-port command, you must specify a TCP port that is not used in the customers environment. If you do not enter this command, the default port is 2000 plus the absolute number of the user interface. The table explains how to calculate the absolute number.
Table 4: Numbers for A-MSR Router User Interfaces

User interface
CON First TTY to nth TTY AUX First VTY to nth VTY
Absolute Number
0 1 to n+1 n+2 n+3 to n+3+m
6. 7. 8.
You also need to set up the physical interface with the settings that you require. On your management station, open a Telnet session to the functional router using the TCP destination port that you indicated earlier. You will be redirected to the other router. Ask the customer for the correct credentials for AUX or TTY logins (depending on the type of connection).
Rev. 10.31
22 19
Use the Web Browser Interface
Use the Web Browser Interface

Access the interface as on any HP A-Series device*:

URL = IP address or FQDN Login = Same users as Telnet Tabs
Navigation bar
Complete initial setup
Select a task
14
*You might need to enable access: <ARouter> ip http enable

Rev. 10.31
You can also manage HP A-Series routers through their Web browser interface, which you reach by opening a Web browser on your management station and browsing to the routers IP address or fully-qualified domain name (FQDN). In the case of the latter, your management stations Domain Name Services (DNS) server must be able to resolve the routers FQDN. You will be prompted to log in. Use the same credentials that you would use to log in to the CLI on a Telnet connection.
Note If you cannot reach the Web browser interface, you might need to enable it from the CLI. Access the system view and enter ip http enable. The router also requires a local user account that specifies Telnet for the service type (Telnet access authorizes users for Web access as well). Also note the authentication-attribute for the user as this setting determines the level of access that the user will be allowed (you will need manage level access to complete all of the tasks discussed in this module).
The A-Series routers Web browser interface includes a navigation bar on the left, from which you select your high-level task. The top of the page displays tabs from which you can access more pages related to that task. You can explore the interface to find the options that you need to configure. The Web browser interface of the wireless-capable A-MSR 20-1X and A-MSR 900 Series routers includes a WLAN option in the navigation bar (not displayed in the slide). You will not usually need to set up wireless services, but you might be asked to check settings.
22 20
Rev. 10.31
Note the Setup Wizard in the navigation bar, which will help you complete the initial configuration for a device should you be called on to do so.
Rev. 10.31
22 21

HP A-Series Router Software Images and Configuration Files HP A-Series Management Solve Problems Using the Boot ROM Menu

Access the Boot ROM Menu Install New Software Solve Problems with Passwords
15
Rev. 10.31
In Module 4: Basic Configuration of HP A-Series Switches, you learned how useful the Boot ROM menu can be for solving problems such as corrupted software or forgotten management passwords. The HP A-Series routers also provide a Boot ROM menu, from which you can solve similar problems. The process for accessing the Boot ROM menu, as well as the options that you select within the menu, differ slightly from those for the switches. This section explains how to use the HP A-Series routers menu.
Note Although enabled by default, access to the boot ROM menu can be disabled on HP A-Series routers. Verify with the customer the routers state. The CLI command for disabling and re-enabling such access is [undo] startup bootrom-access enable.
22 22
Rev. 10.31
Access the HP A-Series Router Boot ROM Menu
Access the HP A-Series Router Boot ROM Menu

Access the Boot ROM to solve problems when the router is faulting or the configuration locks you out.
1 Open a console session 3 Basic boot ROM runs Do not press [Ctrl+D] 2 Boot the router
Basic Boot ROM Extended Boot ROM 4 Extended boot ROM runs
When prompted, 5 press [Ctrl+B] The boot process 6 is interrupted

16 Rev. 10.31
A customer has called you in to service a router that fails to boot. Or you must service a router, but the configuration locks you outperhaps no one can tell you the correct password, or perhaps the router is configured such that none of its functioning interfaces provides adequate management access. Therefore, you decide to access the routers Boot ROM menu. Follow these steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Open a console session with the router. Power cycle the router. The basic boot ROM begins to run. You will be prompted to press [Ctrl+D] to interrupt the process. Do not do so. The extended boot ROM runs next. Now interrupt the extended boot ROM process by pressing [Ctrl+B]. By doing so, you access the extended boot ROM menu. You will be prompted to log in. By default, the boot ROM menu has no password (simply press [Enter]). But you should ask the customer whether you need to enter a password.
Rev. 10.31
22 23
Boot from CF Card
Boot from CF Card

1. Install a CF card with known good software and config. 2. Copy the software and config to the routers internal flash.
============<EXTEND-BOOTROM MENU>=========== <1> Boot From CF Card <2> Enter Serial SubMenu <3> Enter Ethernet SubMenu <4> File Control <5> Modify Bootrom Password <6> Ignore System Configuration <7> Boot Rom Operation Menu <8> Clear Super Password <9> Device Operation <a> Reboot ============================================ Enter your choice(1-a):
17
Rev. 10.31
Often when a router cannot boot, the software or startup-config is faulty. To repair the router, you can load a CF card with known good software and configuration file. Then you can install the card in the router as you learned how to do in Module 21: HP A-Series Router Hardware. Reboot the router. If it does not boot from the CF card, access the Boot ROM menu and select 1 to force it to. When the router reboots, you can copy the configuration file and software to the routers internal flash and configure the router to use the good files. For example:
<ARouter> copy cf:/goodconfig.cfg flash:/goodconfig.cfg <ARouter> copy cf:/goodimage.bin flash:/goodimage.bin <ARouter> startup saved-configuration flash:/goodconfig.cfg main <ARouter> boot-loader file flash:/goodimage.bin main
22 24
Rev. 10.31
Install New or Secure Software
Install New or Secure Software

1. 2. 3.
Access the serial submenu. Set the baud rate. Update the software.
==========<EXTEND-BOOTROM MENU>========== <1> Boot From CF Card 1 <2> Enter Serial SubMenu <3> Enter Ethernet SubMenu <4> File Control <5> Modify Bootrom Password <6> Ignore System Configuration <7> Boot Rom Operation Menu Download Application Program To <1> <8> Clear Super Password SDRAM And Run <9> Device Operation 3 <2> Update Main Application File <a> Reboot <3> Update Backup Application File ========================================= <4> Update Secure Application File Enter your choice(1-a): 22 <5> Modify Serial Interface Parameter <6> Exit To Main Menu
18 Rev. 10.31
You can install new software from the boot ROM menu as the main software image, the backup image, or the secure image. As you recall, you must install the secure image, which is known good software that is loaded as a final resort, from the boot ROM menu. To update the software using XModem over the console port, you should first set the baud rate as high as possible and then update the software. Setting a high baud rate speeds the process. Enter 2 (Enter Serial SubMenu) to complete both tasks. You can then access the steps for configuring baud rate settings through option 5 and those for updating the software image (or main application file) through option 2. You should find the process fairly straight-forward, but if you need help, refer to the A-MSR Series Routers Installation Guide. Remember that when you change the baud settings on the router, you must match the new settings on your terminal session software. When you have finished the update process, restore the baud rate on both to 9600. Also, remember that, if you are installing an image that will act as the secure software image, the image must always be named secure.bin. After you update the software image, you must reboot the router for the update to take effect. (The boot ROM code is automatically updated during the software update.) Return to the main menu and enter a (Reboot).
Rev. 10.31
22 25
Note You can also update the software using TFTP or FTP; because these options provide a faster update, they are recommended when you have Ethernet access to the router. In this case, you would enter 3 from the main Boot ROM menu, and follow the prompts from there. Note On the A-MSR 20-1X and A-MSR 900 Series routers, the Boot ROM menu is called the BootWare Menu, and the menu names the options slightly differently. For example, Ignore System Configuration is labeled Skip Current System Configuration. However, the options provide the same functionality.
22 26
Rev. 10.31
Update the Boot ROM Code
Update the Boot ROM Code

1. Set the baud rate. 2. Update the boot ROM code.
==========<EXTEND-BOOTROM MENU>========== <1> Boot From CF Card <2> Enter Serial SubMenu <3> Enter Ethernet SubMenu <4> File Control <5> Modify Bootrom Password <6> Ignore System Configuration 2a <7> Boot Rom Operation Menu =====<BOOTROM OPERATION MENU>======= <1> Backup Full Boot ROM <8> Clear Super Password <2> Restore Full Boot ROM <9> Device Operation 2b <3> Update Full Boot ROM With XModem <a> Reboot <4> Update Extended Boot ROM With ========================================= Xmodem Enter your choice(1-a): 7 <5> Update Basic Boot ROM With Xmodem
<6> Exit To Main Menu ================================ Enter your choice(1-a): 3
19 Rev. 10.31
Although an A-Series router should typically update the boot ROM code when it updates the software image, you might encounter a situation in which the code is experiencing problems. In this case, you must reinstall it. First access the serial submenu and set the baud rate. Then exit back to the main boot ROM menu and enter 7 (Boot Rom Operation Menu). Enter one of the options shown in the slide; the software update release notes should indicate which portion of the boot ROM code must be updated. From there, the menu will guide you through the process. When you have finished the update, return to the main boot ROM menu and enter a (Reboot).
Rev. 10.31
22 27
Solve Problems with Passwords
Solve Problems with Passwords
============<EXTEND-BOOTROM MENU>=========== <1> Boot From CF Card <2> Enter Serial SubMenu <3> Enter Ethernet SubMenu <4> File Control <5> Modify Bootrom Password Any other problem with <6> Ignore System Configuration management access <7> Boot Rom Operation Menu <8> Clear Super Password Forgotten super <9> Device Operation password <a> Reboot ============================================ Enter your choice(1-a):
20
Rev. 10.31
If the customer has forgotten the super password for moving to a higher command privilege level, access to important commands can be lost entirely. The HP A-Series router boot ROM menu lets you clear the super passwords. Enter 8 (Clear Super Password) and then reboot the router. When the router reboots, it loads the current configuration but without the super passwords. The customer can then set the correct passwords. Customers might experience other management problems such as:
They have forgotten the credentials for logging in to the CLI or Web browser interfaces. The user interfaces are misconfigured such that management users cannot log in or complete necessary tasks. For example, no user has manage-level access, and there is no super password for manage level either.
To solve this problem, you should enter 6 (Ignore System Configuration), reboot the router, and then restore a fixed configuration. For the detailed process, refer to Module 4: Basic Configuration of HP A-Series Switches.
22 28
Rev. 10.31
Summary
Summary
Software images Configuration files Management access through:
CLI Web browser interface Boot ROM Menu
21
Rev. 10.31
In this module, you have learned how to manage software images and configuration files on HP A-Series routers. You have also briefly reviewed managing the routers using the CLI, Web browser interface, and boot ROM menu, focusing on the tasks and features that are unique to the A-Series routers.
Rev. 10.31
22 29
22 30
Rev. 10.31
Legacy HP ProCurve Switches

Appendix A
This appendix includes information about legacy HP ProCurve switches. Although HP ended the sale of these switches, many customers will continue to use them for many years to come. If you are asked to service these switches, this appendix will provide some information to help you do so.
Rev. 10.31
A 1
Legacy HP ProCurve Unmanaged and WebManaged Switches

Legacy HP ProCurve Unmanaged and WebManaged Switches
Legacy HP ProCurve Unmanaged and Web-Managed Switches
HP ProCurve 408 Switch HP ProCurve 2300 Switch Series HP ProCurve 2700 Switch Series HP ProCurve 1800 Switch Series
Legacy HP ProCurve Managed Switches Supporting Legacy HP ProCurve Switches
Rev. 10.31
This section describes the legacy unmanaged and Web-managed switches.
A 2
Rev. 10.31
HP ProCurve 408 Switch

408 switch

8 auto-sensing 10/100 ports Auto-negotiation of half/full duplex on all ports Fanless
Rev. 10.31
The HP ProCurve 408 Switch (J4097C) is a fixed, unmanaged Layer 2 switch ideal for small networks requiring basic connectivity. Because it is fanless, it can be deployed in an open workspace. It also has a plug-and-play setup, making it a good choice for companies that have little or no IT support. The 408 switch has the following features:
Eight auto-sensing 10/100 ports (IEEE 802.3 Type 10Base-T, IEEE 802.3u Type 100Base-T) Auto-negotiation of half/full duplex on all ports
Rev. 10.31
A 3

2124 switch

24 auto-sensing 10/100 ports One open transceiver slot Throughput up to 3.52 mpps Fanless
Rev. 10.31
The HP ProCurve 2124 switch (J4868A) is a fixed, fanless, multiport Layer 2 switch designed for edge deployment in small networks. It is intended for open deploymentenabled by fanless designwith companies that have small or no IT departments. The switch includes the following features:

24 auto-sensing 10/100 ports One open transceiver slot for installing an HP 100-FX SC Transceiver (see Module 6: HP E Series Switch Hardware for more information about these highspeed ports) Throughput 3.52 mpps
A 4
Rev. 10.31
HP ProCurve 2300 Switch Series

2312 switch

12 10/100 ports Two open transceiver slots 1 RS-232C DB-9 console port (or download port) Throughput up to 4.8 mpps Fanless
2324 switch

24 auto-sensing 10/100 ports Two open transceiver slots 1 RS-232C DB-9 console port (or download port) Throughput up to 6.6 mpps Fanless
Rev. 10.31
The HP ProCurve 2300 Switch Series consists of fixed, unmanaged switches that provide basic connectivity. These fixed switches are suitable for a small company or branch office requiring a high-speed uplink. Both models are fanless and are intended for environments with little or no IT support. Unlike the other unmanaged switches, the 2300 switch can be updated with new software. For example, ProCurve might release new software to enable the switch to support a new transceiver. The 2312 switch (J4817A) includes the following features:

12 auto-sensing 10/100 ports Two open transceiver slots for Gigabit or 100Base-FX uplinks One RS-232C DB-9 console port, or download port, to connect a PC to the switch by using any null modem cable. The PC can then be used to initiate a download of new software to the 2300 switch. Throughput up to 4.8 mpps 24 auto-sensing 10/100 ports Two open transceiver slots for Gigabit or 100Base-FX uplinks
The 2324 switch (J4818A) includes the following features:

Rev. 10.31
A 5
One RS-232C DB-9 console port, or download port, to connect a PC to the switch by using any null modem cable. The PC can then be used to initiate a download of new software to the 2300 switch. Throughput up to 6.6 mpps
A 6
Rev. 10.31

2708 switch

8 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Throughput up to 1 mpps 1.9 Fanless
2724 switch

24 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Throughput up to 35.7 mpps Fanless
Rev. 10.31
The HP ProCurve 2700 Switch Series consists of two fixed, Layer 2 models: the 2708 switch and the 2724 switch. These are fanless, unmanaged, edge devices intended for small networks requiring the flexibility of a high-speed uplink. The 2708 (J4898A) switch includes the following features:

Eight auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Throughput up to 1 mpps 1.9 24 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Throughput up to 35.7 mpps
The 2724 (J4897A) switch includes the following features:

Rev. 10.31
A 7

1800-8G switch

8 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Throughput up to 1 mpps 1.9 Fanless
1800-24G switch

22 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports 2 dual-personality ports Throughput up to 35.7 mpps Fanless
Rev. 10.31
The HP ProCurve 1800 Switch Series is intended for small business networks that need basic capabilities and simplified management. These switches are ideal for businesses making the transition from unmanaged to managed networks. The 1800 switches are designed for quiet operation. They are fanless. The 1800-8G (J9029A) switch includes the following features:

Eight auto sensing 10/100/1000 ports Throughput up to 1 mpps 1.9 The 1800-24G (J9028B) switch includes the following features: 22 auto sensing 10/100/1000 ports Two dual personality portsEach port can be used as either an RJ-45 10/100/1000 port or an open SFP slot. Throughput up to 35.7 mpps
A 8
Rev. 10.31
Legacy HP ProCurve Managed Switches

Legacy HP ProCurve Managed Switches
Legacy HP ProCurve Unmanaged and Web-Managed Switches Legacy HP ProCurve Managed Switches
HP ProCurve HP ProCurve HP ProCurve HP ProCurve HP ProCurve HP ProCurve HP ProCurve HP ProCurve HP ProCurve HP ProCurve HP ProCurve HP ProCurve 2500 Switch Series 2600 Switch Series 2800 Switch Series 2900 Switch Series 3400cl Switch Series 4000m and 8000m Switches 4100gl Switch Series 5300xl Switch Series 6108 Switch 6400cl Switch Series 8100fl Switch Series 9300m Switch Series
Supporting Legacy HP ProCurve Switches

8 Rev. 10.31
The next section describes the legacy managed switches.
Rev. 10.31
A 9

2512 switch

12 auto-sensing 10/100 ports 2 open transceiver slots 9.6 Gbps switch on a chip for non-blocking performance Throughput of 4.8 million packets per second (mpps)
2524 switch

24 auto-sensing 10/100 ports 2 open transceiver slots 9.6 Gbps switch on a chip for non-blocking performance Throughput of 6.6 mpps
Rev. 10.31
The HP ProCurve 2500 Switch Series consists of fixed, Layer 2 devices. These costeffective stackable switches are ideal for low-cost migration to 10/100 managed switching with high-speed uplinks.

The 2512 (J4812A) switch comes with the following features: 12 10/100 ports Two open transceiver slots One RS-232C DB-9 console port 4.8 mpps throughput The 2524 (J4813A) switch comes with the following features: 24 10/100 ports Two open transceiver slots One RS-232C DB-9 console port 6.6 mpps throughput
Both the 2512 and 2524 switches offer a full line of management capabilities, enhancing customers ability to command from the center. For simpler deployment, however, the 2300 switch, which is an unmanaged switch, offers similar features.
A 10
Rev. 10.31

2600-8-PWR
8 1
10/100 ports dual-personality port
2626 and 2626-PWR

24 2
10/100 ports
dual-personality ports
2650 and 2650-PWR

48 2
10/100 ports
10
Rev. 10.31
The HP ProCurve 2600 Switch Series features fixed, stackable switches with light Layer 3 capabilities. Power over Ethernet (PoE) is available on selected models for those customers seeking cost-effective deployment and management of wireless access points (APs), ProCurve Radio Ports (RPs), IP phones, and security cameras.
The 2600-8-PWR (J8762A) switch features:
Eight auto-sensing 10/100Base-TX ports which provide 15.4 W per-port for PoE One dual-personality Gigabit Uplink portThe dual-personality ports are either auto-sensing 10/100/1000Base-T or SFP slots. One RS-232C DB-9 console port Throughput up to 6.6 mpps 48 auto-sensing 10/100Base-TX ports
The 2650 (J4899C) and 2650-PWR (J8165A) switches feature:
For PoE, the 2650-PWR provides up to 406 W (for example, 15.4 W for 24 ports or 8.4 W for 48 ports).
Two dual-personality Gigabit Uplink portsThe dual-personality ports are either auto-sensing 10/100/1000Base-T ports or SFP slots.
Rev. 10.31
A 11
One rear RS-232C DB-9 console port Throughput up to 10.1 mpps 24 auto-sensing 10/100Base-TX ports
The 2626 (J4900C) and 2626-PWR (J8164A) switches feature:
For PoE, the 2626-PWR provides the full 15.4 W per-port.
Two dual-personality portsThe dual-personality ports are either autosensing 10/100/1000Base-T ports or SFP slots. One rear RS-232C DB-9 console port Throughput up to 6.6 mpps
Note The 2626-PWR and 2650-PWR switches can connect to a Redundant and External Power Supply to provide backup power and additional power for PoE. These switches support the ProCurve 600 Redundant and External Power Supply (RPS/EPS) (J8168A) or ProCurve 610 EPS (J8169A).
A 12
Rev. 10.31

2824 switch
20 4
10/100/1000 ports up to 34.65 mpps
Throughput
2848 switch
44 4
10/100/1000 ports up to 69.3 mpps
Throughput
1 1
Rev. 10.31
The HP ProCurve 2800 Switch Series consists of fixed, stackable Gigabit switches capable of Layer 2 switching and Layer 3 routing. The series is designed for networks requiring secure Gigabit performance at the edge of the network. The 2800 switches handle digital imaging, graphic-intensive applications, mediastreaming and other complex applications requiring gigabit performance. They are ideal for medium to large networks.

The 2824 (J4903A) switch comes with the following features: 20 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Four dual-personality portsEach port can be used as either a 10/100/1000 port or an open SFP slot. One RS-232C DB-9 serial console port Throughput up to 34.7 mpps The 2848 (J4904A) switch comes with the following features: 44 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Four dual-personality portsEach port can be used as either a 10/100/1000 port or an open SFP slot. One RS-232C DB-9 serial console port Throughput up to 69.3 mpps
A 13
Rev. 10.31

2900-24G switch
20 2
10/100/1000 ports CX4 10-GbE ports and 2 10-GbE X2 transceiver slots 4 dual-personality ports Throughput up to 75.7 mpps
2900-48G switch
44 2
10/100/1000 ports CX4 10-GbE ports and 2 10-GbE X2 transceiver slots 4 dual-personality ports Throughput up to 1 1.5 mpps 1
12
Rev. 10.31
The HP ProCurve 2900 Switch Series is designed for small or large companies looking for high performance gigabit switches. These switches also work well as segment switches, interconnecting network segments. The 2900-24G (J9049A) switch provides the following features:

20 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Four dual-personality portsEach port can be used as either a 10/100/1000 port or an open SFP slot. Two fixed CX4 10-Gigabit per second Ethernet (10-GbE) ports at the back of the switch and two open 10-GbE X2 transceiver slots also located at the back of the switch One RS-232C DB-9 console port Throughput up to 74 mpps 44 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports Four dual-personality portsEach port can be used as either a 10/100/1000 port or an open SFP slot. Two fixed CX4 10-GbE ports at the back of the switch and two open 10-GbE X2 transceiver slots also located at the back of the switch One RS-232C DB-9 console port Throughput up to 1 mpps 10
Rev. 10.31
The 2900-48G (J9050A) switch provides the following features:

A 14
HP ProCurve 3400cl Switch Series

3400cl-24G switch

20 10/100/1000 ports 4 dual-personality ports 1 open module slot (rear panel) Throughput up to 64 mpps
3400cl-48G switch

44 10/100/1000 ports 4 dual-personality ports 1 open module slot (rear panel) Throughput up to 99.5 mpps
13
Rev. 10.31
The HP ProCurve 3400cl Switch Series delivers intelligent, high performance at network edge. The Layer 2 and Layer 3 switches come with one RS-232C DB-9 console port and an open slot for a module with two10-GbE ports. (This slot is on the rear panel of the switch chassis.) The switches also support two external power supply sources for redundant power. The 3400cl-24G (J4905A) switch includes the following additional features:

20 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports 4 dual-personality portsEach port can be used as either a10/100/1000 port or an open SFP slot. Throughput up to 64 mpps 44 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports 4 dual-personality portsEach port can be used as either an RJ-45 10/100/1000 port or an open SFP port. Throughput up to 99.5 mpps
The 3400cl-48G (J4906A) switch includes the following additional features:

Rev. 10.31
A 15
HP ProCurve 4000m and 8000m Switches

HP ProCurve 4000m and 8000m Switches
4000m and 8000m switches

10-slot chassis 3.8 Gbps backplane Maximum of 80 10/100Base-TX ports
14
Rev. 10.31
The HP ProCurve Series 4000m (J4121A) and 8000m (J41 10A) switches are managed, Layer 2 switches. They provide expandable, low-cost 10/100 switching for the desktop and gigabit uplinks. The 4000m and 8000m switches consist of the same modular, 10-slot chassis. At the time of their production, the 4000m switch shipped with five pre-installed modules five 8-port 10/100Base-TX Modules for a total of 40 pre-installed portsand five empty slots. The 8000m switch shipped with ten empty slots and no pre-installed modules. The switches support the following modules:

8-port 10/100Base-TX Module (HP J41 1A) 1 4-port 100Base-FX Module (HP J41 12A)
Note
A redundant power supply is required if more than five 100-FX modules are installed. 4-port 10Base-FL Module (HP J41 18A) 1-port Gigabit-SX Module (HP J41 13A) 1-port Gigabit-LX Module (HP J41 14A) 1-port 100/1000Base-T (HP J41 15B)
Rev. 10.31
A 16
HP ProCurve 4100gl Switch Series

HP ProCurve 4100gl Switch Series
4104gl switch
4
open module slots up to 35.7 mpps switch
Throughput 4140gl 40 2 4
10/100/1000 ports
open module slots open SFP slots up to 35.7 mpps
Throughput
4148gl switch
48 2
10/100 ports up to 35.7 mpps
open module slots
Throughput
15
Rev. 10.31
The HP ProCurve 4100gl Switch Series provides reliable, high-performance, highdensity 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps, or gigabit connectivity for growing networks. At its time of production, the 4100gl switch was a low-cost, modular alternative to stackable switches and an excellent solution for bringing high-density gigabit connectivity to the edge. All models are capable of Layer 2 switching and Layer 3 routing. Three of the 4100gl switches have a four-module form factor:

4104gl switch 4140gl switch 4148gl switch
The switches were built on the same chassis but shipped with different modules installed. The 4104gl (J4887A) switch shipped with four open module slots. Depending on the modules the customer purchased, the switch can support a maximum of 96 10/100 ports or 80 Gigabit ports and 8 mini-GBICs. It has one RS-232C DB-9 console port. It has a throughput of up to 35.7 mpps.

The 4140gl (J8151A) switch included the following: 40 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports (two ProCurve Switch gl 20-Port 10/100/1000 Modules J4908A) Four open SFP slots
A 17
Rev. 10.31
Two open module slots One RS-232C DB-9 console port Throughput of up to 35.7 mpps 48 auto-sensing 10/100 ports (two ProCurve Switch gl 24-Port 10/100-TX Modules J4862B) Two open module slots One RS-232C DB-9 console port Throughput of up to 35.7 mpps
The 4148gl (J4888A) switch includes the following features:
A 18
Rev. 10.31
HP ProCurve 4100gl Switch Series (Cont.)

HP ProCurve 4100gl Switch Series (Cont.)
4108gl switch

8 open module slots Throughput up to 71.4 mpps 72 10/100 ports 3 open transceiver ports 4 open module slots Up to 71.4 mpps throughput 60 10/100/1000 ports 6 open SFP slots 5 open module slots Up to 71.4 mpps throughput
4108gl switch bundle

4160gl switch

16
Rev. 10.31
Three 4100gl switches have an eight-slot form factor:

4108gl switch 4108gl switch bundle 4160gl
The switches have the same chassis but were shipped with different modules installed. The 4108gl switch (J4865A) shipped with eight open module slots. Depending on the modules installed, the switch can support a maximum of 192 10/100 ports or 160 Gigabit ports and 16 mini-GBICs or a combination of these. It also has one RS-232C DB-9 console port. The switch has a throughput of up to 71.4 mpps. The 4108gl (J4861A) switch bundle includes the following features:
72 10/100 auto-sensing ports (three HP ProCurve Switch gl 24-Port 10/100-TX Modules J4862B) 3 open transceiver ports (one HP ProCurve Switch gl Transceiver Module J4864A) 4 open module slots
Rev. 10.31
A 19
One RS-232C DB-9 console port Throughput of up to 71.4 mpps 60 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports (three HP ProCurve Switch gl 20-Port 10/100/1000 Modules J4908A) Six open SFP slots Five open module slots One RS-232C DB-9 console port Up to 71.4 mpps throughput
The 4160gl (J8152A) switch included the following:
A 20
Rev. 10.31
HP ProCurve 4100gl Switch Series Modules

HP ProCurve 4100gl Switch Series Modules
HP ProCurve Switch gl 20-Port 10/100/1000 Module (J4908A) HP ProCurve Switch gl 24-Port 10/100-TX Module (J4862B) HP ProCurve Switch gl 6-Port Mini-GBIC Module (J4893A) HP ProCurve Switch gl 6-Port 100/1000-T Module (J4863A) HP ProCurve Switch gl Transceiver Module (J4864A) HP ProCurve Switch gl 12-Port 100-FX MTRJ Module (J4892A)
17
Rev. 10.31
The four-slot 4104gl and eight-slot 4108gl switches did not ship with any modules all slots were open. Supported modules include:

HP ProCurve Switch gl 20-Port 10/100/1000 Module (J4908A) HP ProCurve Switch gl 24-Port 10/100-TX Module (J4862B) HP ProCurve Switch gl 6-Port Mini-GBIC Module (J4893A) HP ProCurve Switch gl 6-Port 100/1000-T Module (J4863A) HP ProCurve Switch gl Transceiver Module (J4864A) HP ProCurve Switch gl 12-Port 100-FX MTRJ Module (J4892A) (MTRJ stands for .Mechanical Transfer Register Jack.)
Rev. 10.31
A 21
HP ProCurve 5300xl Switch Series

HP ProCurve 5300xl Switch Series
5304xl switch
(all 5304xl models)
5304xl-32G switch
28 10/100/1000 ports 4 dual-personality ports 2 open module slots
5348xl switch
48 10/100 ports 2 open module slots
18 Rev. 10.31
The HP ProCurve 5300xl Switch Series provides scalable Layer 2, 3, and 4 switching in a four-module or eight-module form factors. All models have an open power supply slot for redundant power. The series is ideal for large network environments driven by the need for performance, security, mobility, and convergence capabilities. The HP ProCurve 5300xl Series Switch has two switch chassisone with a fourmodule form factor and one with an eight-module form factor. The four-module form factor options are listed below:

5304xl switch 5304xl-32G switch 5348xl switch
The 5304xl switch (J4850A) does not include any modules. It has the following features:

Four open module slots One RS-232C DB-9 console port Throughput up to 24 mpps
The 5304xl switch supports a maximum of 96 auto-sensing 10/100 ports or 64 autosensing 10/100/1000 ports
A 22
Rev. 10.31
The 5304xl-32G (J8166A) switch has the following features:
28 auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports (two ProCurve Switch xl 16-Port 10/100/1000 Modules J4907A) Four dual-personality ports Two open module slots One RS-232C DB-9 console port Throughput up to 24 mpps
Please note that the 5304xl-32G (J8166A) bundle is no longer offered. The 5348xl switch (J4849A) has the following features:
48 auto-sensing 10/100 ports (two ProCurve Switch xl 24-Port 10/100-TX Modules J4820B) Two open module slots One RS-232C DB-9 console port Throughput up to 24 mpps
Rev. 10.31
A 23
HP ProCurve 5300xl Switch Series (Cont.)
HP ProCurve 5300xl Switch Series (Cont.)

5308xl switch
8
open slots up to 48 mpps (all 5308xl models)
Throughput
5308xl-48G switch
42 6 5
10/100/1000 ports
dual-personality ports open module slots 10/100 ports
5372xl switch
72 5
open module slots
19
Rev. 10.31
There were also three different options in the eight-module form factor:

5308xl switch 5308xl-48G switch 5372xl switch
The eight-slot 5308xl switch (J4819A) did not include any modules. It has the following features:

Eight open slots One RS-232C DB-9 console port Throughput up to 48 mpps 42 10/100/1000 ports (three HP ProCurve Switch xl 16-Port 10/100/1000 Modules J4907A) Six dual-personality ports Five open module slots One RS-232C DB-9 console port Throughput up to 48 mpps
The 5308xl-48G switch (J8167A) has the following features:
Please note that the 5308xl-48G (J8167A) bundle is no longer offered.

A 24
Rev. 10.31
The 5372xl switch (J4848B) has the following features:
72 10/100 ports (three HP ProCurve Switch xl 24-Port 10/100-TX Modules J4820B) Five open module slots One RS-232C DB-9 console port Throughput up to 48 mpps
Rev. 10.31
A 25
HP ProCurve 5300xl Switch Series Modules

HP ProCurve 5300xl Switch Series Modules
HP ProCurve Switch xl 24-Port 10/100-TX Module (J4820B) HP ProCurve Switch xl 4-Port 100/1000-T Module (J4821B) HP ProCurve Switch xl 4-Port Mini-GBIC Module (J4878B) HP ProCurve Switch xl 12-Port 100-FX MTRJ Module (J4852A) HP ProCurve Switch xl 24-Port 10/100-TX PoE Module (J8161A) HP ProCurve Switch xl 16-Port 10/100/1000 Module (J4907A) HP ProCurve Switch xl 1-Port 10-GbE X2 Module (J8988A) HP ProCurve Switch xl Access Controller Module (J8162A) HP ProCurve Wireless Edge Services xl Module (J9001A) HP ProCurve Redundant Wireless Services xl Module (J9003A)
20
Rev. 10.31
The 5300xl switches support the following modules for connectivity:

HP ProCurve Switch xl 24-Port 10/100-TX Module (J4820B) HP ProCurve Switch xl 4-Port 100/1000-T Module (J4821B) HP ProCurve Switch xl 4-Port Mini-GBIC Module (J4878B) HP ProCurve Switch xl 12-Port 100-FX MTRJ Module (J4852A) HP ProCurve Switch xl 24-Port 10/100-TX PoE Module (J8161A) HP ProCurve Switch xl 16-Port 10/100/1000 Module (J4907A) HP ProCurve Switch xl 1-Port 10-GbE X2 Module (J8988A) HP ProCurve Switch xl Access Controller Module (J8162A)
The 5300xl switches also support the HP ProCurve Wireless Edge Services xl Module (J9001A), which manages HPs coordinated AP solution for mobility, and the HP ProCurve Redundant Wireless Services xl Module (J9003A), which provides highavailability for wireless services.
Note The xl 24-Port 10/100-TX PoE Module requires ProCurve 600 EPS/RPS or 610 EPS to supply PoE power.
A 26
Rev. 10.31

6 10/100-TX/1000-T ports 2 dual-personality ports Throughput up to 1 mpps 1.9
21
Rev. 10.31
The HP ProCurve 6108 Switch (J4902A) is a stackable, fixed switch with Layer 3 capabilities. It is an ideal distribution switch. It provides these features:

Six 10/100/1000 ports One RS-232C DB-9 console port Two dual-personality portsEach port can be used as either an additional 10/100/1000 ports or an open SFP slots. Throughput up to 1 mpps 1.9
Rev. 10.31
A 27

6400cl switch

6 CX4 10-GbE ports Up to 8 10-GbE ports Throughput up to 1 mpps 19
6410cl switch

6 open transceiver slots Up to 8 10-GbE ports Throughput up to 1 mpps 19
22
Rev. 10.31
Designed to be used primarily in a high-density wiring closet or in a data center, the HP ProCurve 6400cl Switch Series has two models:

6400cl switch (J8433A) 6410cl switch (J8474A) 6 CX4 10-GbE ports Open module slot on the back panel for a two-port 10-GbE module, which allows the switch to support a maximum of eight 10-GbE ports One RS-232C DB-9 console port Throughput up to 1 mpps 19 Six open transceiver slots Open module slot on the back panel for a two-port 10-GbE module, which allows the switch to support a maximum of eight 10-GbE ports One RS-232C DB-9 console port Throughput up to 1 mpps 19
The 6400cl switch provides the following features:

The 6410cl switch provides the following:

A 28
Rev. 10.31
The switches support these modules:

HP ProCurve Switch cl 10-GbE Media Flex Module (J8435A) HP ProCurve Switch cl 10-GbE CX4 Copper Module (J8434A)
Rev. 10.31
A 29
HP ProCurve 8100fl Switch Series

HP ProCurve 8100fl Switch Series
8108fl switch
8 1 1 1
open module slots management module switch fabric module power supply up to 1 mpps 19
Throughput
81 16fl switch
16 1 1 2
open module slots
management module switch fabric module power supplies up to 238 mpps
Throughput
23
Rev. 10.31
The HP ProCurve 8100fl Switch Series consists of multiport modular switches that perform non-blocking, wire-speed, Layer 2 switching and Layer 3 routing.
The 8108fl switch (J8727A) is an eight-slot chassis that shipped with one management module, one switch fabric module, one backplane, and one power supply. The switch supports a throughput of up to 1 mpps. 19 The 81 16fl switch (J8728A) is a 16-slot chassis with one management module, one switch fabric module, one backplane, and two power supplies. It supports throughput of up to 238 mpps.
A 30
Rev. 10.31
HP ProCurve 8100fl Switch Series Modules
HP ProCurve 8100fl Switch Series Modules

HP ProCurve 8108fl Redundant Switch Fabric Module (J8729A) HP ProCurve 81 16fl Redundant Switch Fabric Module (J8730A) HP ProCurve Switch fl Redundant Management Module (J8731A) HP ProCurve Switch fl 10-Port 100/1000-T Interface Module (J8734A) HP ProCurve Switch fl 10-Port Mini-GBIC Interface Module (J8735A) HP ProCurve Switch fl 2-Port 10-GbE X2 Interface Module (J8737A) HP ProCurve Switch fl Fan Tray (J8989-61001) HP ProCurve Switch fl RJ45-to-DB9 Serial Adapter (5092-1718)
24
Rev. 10.31
The HP ProCurve 8100fl Switch Series supports the following modules:

HP ProCurve 8108fl Redundant Switch Fabric Module (J8729A) HP ProCurve 81 16fl Redundant Switch Fabric Module (J8730A) HP ProCurve Switch fl Redundant Management Module (J8731A) HP ProCurve Switch fl 10-Port 100/1000-T Interface Module (J8734A) HP ProCurve Switch fl 10-Port Mini-GBIC Interface Module (J8735A) HP ProCurve Switch fl 2-Port 10-GbE X2 Interface Module (J8737A) HP ProCurve Switch fl Fan Tray (J8989-61001) HP ProCurve Switch fl RJ45-to-DB9 Serial Adapter (5092-1718)
Rev. 10.31
A 31
HP ProCurve 9300m Switch Series

HP ProCurve 9300m Switch Series
9304m switch
4 open module slots Requires a management module Max. of 56 Gigabit Ethernet ports, 144
10/100-TX ports, or 6 10-GbE ports

Throughput up to 83 mpps
9308m switch
8 open module slots Requires a management module Max. of 120 Gigabit Ethernet ports, 336
10/100-TX ports, or 14 10-GbE ports

25 Rev. 10.31
The HP ProCurve 9300m Switch Series includes three models of multilayer, high-port density switches: 9304m, 9308m, and 9315. These core switches provide scalable, reliable network infrastructures. The 9304m switch (J4139A) includes the following features:

Four open module slots Support for a maximum of 56 Gigabit Ethernet ports, 144 10/100-TX ports, six 10-GbE ports, or a combination Throughput up to 83 mpps Eight open module slots Support for a maximum of 120 Gigabit Ethernet ports, 336 10/100-TX ports, 14 10-GbE ports, or a combination Throughput up to 178 mpps
The 9308m switch (J4138A) includes the following features:

A 32
Rev. 10.31
HP ProCurve 9300m Switch Series (Cont.)
HP ProCurve 9300m Switch Series (Cont.)

9315m switch
15 open module slots Requires a management module Max. of 232 Gigabit Ethernet ports,
672 auto-sensing 10/100-TX ports, or 28 10-GbE ports

26
Rev. 10.31
The 9315m switch (J4874A) includes the following features:

15 open module slots Supports for a maximum of 28 10-GbE ports or 672 10/100 ports or 232 Gigabit ports or a combination Throughput up to 345 mpps HP ProCurve 9300 EP 8-Port Mini-GBIC Redundant Management Module (J4885A) HP ProCurve 9300 2-Port 10-GbE Module (J8174A) HP ProCurve 9300 EP 16-Port Mini-GBIC Module (J4894A) HP ProCurve 9300 EP 16-Port 100/1000-T Module (J4895A) HP ProCurve 9300 EP 48-Port 10/100-TX RJ-45 Module (J4881B) HP ProCurve 9300 EP 48-Port 10/100-TX Telco (RJ-21) Module (J4889B) HP ProCurve 9300 EP 24-Port 100Base-FX Module (J8178A)
The 9300m switches support the following modules:
Rev. 10.31
A 33

Legacy HP ProCurve Unmanaged and Web-Managed Switches Legacy HP ProCurve Managed Switches Supporting Legacy HP ProCurve Switches
Reset Legacy Unmanaged Switches Reset Legacy Web-Managed Switches Supporting HP ProCurve 9300M Switch Series
27
Rev. 10.31
This section provides information about the hardware for the legacy HP ProCurve switches described in this module. When servicing these switches, keep in mind that the Web-managed and unmanaged switches are similar to the V Series switches that were previously branded HP ProCurve. Likewise, the managed switches are similar to the HP E Series switches that were formerly branded HP ProCurve. For more information, refer to the following modules:

Module 8: HP V Series Switch Overview Module 9: HP V Series Switch Hardware Module 5: HP E Series Switch Overview Module 6: HP E Series Switch Hardware
A 34
Rev. 10.31
Reset Legacy HP Unmanaged Switches

Reset Legacy HP Unmanaged Switches
HP 408 switch:
No
Reset buttonreset switches by unplugging the power cord and plugging it back in again Reset button to:
HP 2124 switch and HP Series 2300 and 2700 switches:

Press
Execute a warm boot Initiate a recently installed transceiver (HP 2300 switch)
Reset button
ProCurve 2124 Switch
28
Rev. 10.31
The unmanaged switches shown here do not have management interfaces or manageable configurations. Consequently, there is no need to delete management passwords or restore factory default configuration settings. Sometimes, however, you may need to reboot the switch to clear an error condition. The HP 408 switch does not have a Reset button. You can clear any temporary operational problem by unplugging the switch from its power source and plugging it back in again. This action reboots the switch and executes the self-test. The HP 2124 Switch, HP 2300 Switch Series, and HP ProCurve 2700 Switch Series are equipped with a Reset button. Press this button to:

Initiate a warm reboot and self-test Activate a transceiver recently installed on a 2300 switch
Rev. 10.31
A 35
Restore HP ProCurve 1800 Switch Series to Factory Default Settings

Restore HP ProCurve1800 Switch Series to Factory Default Settings
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Remove the switchs power adapter. Remove all cables. Connect port 1 to port 2. Reconnect the power adapter. Wait at least 40 seconds before disconnecting port 1 from port 2.
No Reset or Clear button
Cable ProCurve 1700-8 Switch
29
Rev. 10.31
The HP ProCurve 1800 Switch Series does not have a Reset or Clear button. However, the switches in this series are equipped with a Web browser management interface that can be used to customize the configuration. You may need to reset the configuration to the factory default settings due to problems with the configuration or a forgotten password. Follow these steps: 1. 2. 3. Remove the switchs power adapter from the back of the switch. Remove all cables from the front-panel ports. Connect port 1 to port 2 on the front panel using a network cable. You can use either a straight-through cable or a cross-over cable because the switch ports support auto-MDIX (as described in the Connectors and Cable section later in this module). Reconnect the power adapter to the rear of the switch. Wait at least 40 seconds before disconnecting port 1 from port 2.
4. 5.
A 36
Rev. 10.31
HP ProCurve 9300m Switch Series: Management Modules

HP ProCurve 9300m Switch Series: Management Modules
Each chassis must have at least one management module, which:

Provides flash memory for storing the software image and configuration files Provides dynamic RAM for storing forwarding tables and routing information Enables direct serial connection for configuration and monitoring Supports in-band management through SSH, Telnet, HTTP, and SNMP Supports file transfers through TFTP and Secure Copy
Two management modules work together as active and standby modules. If the active module becomes unavailable, the standby takes over operation after booting and loading synchronized configuration. Each type of management module supports a family of port modules:

30
Extended Performance (EP) management module M4 management module M2 management modules M1 management modules T-Flow management module
Rev. 10.31
The remainder of this appendix focuses on the HP ProCurve 9300m Switch Series. The HP ProCurve Series 9315m switch (J4874A) includes 15 open module slots that can accommodate 28 10-gigabit ports, 232 Gigabit Ethernet ports, 672 auto-sensing 10/100 ports, or a combination of these ports. The 9300m switch requires at least one management module, which has flash memory for storing the switchs software image and its configuration information. The management module also has dynamic memory that holds the tables the switch uses to make forwarding decisions. (All 9300m switches forward IP, IPX, and AppleTalk traffic. IPX is a proprietary protocol used by early versions of Novell NetWare, and AppleTalk is used by Apple networks.) The management module supports IP management and transfer protocols, such as Secure Shell (SSH), Telnet, the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP), HTTP, and Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP). If the management module fails, the 9300m switch will continue to forward traffic, but it cannot add entries to its memory-resident tables. To guard against such a failure, the 9300m switch supports redundant management modules. If the primary management module fails, the redundant management module will continue to provide remote access to the switch and allow it to continually update its tables.
Rev. 10.31
A 37
The 9300m switch supports several management modules, and each management module supports a family of port modules for network connectivity. The M1, M2, M4, and T-flow management modules were discontinued some time before the 9300m switch itself was.
A 38
Rev. 10.31
EP Redundant Management Module and Port Modules

EP Redundant Management Module and Port Modules
J4885A ProCurve 9300 EP Mini-GBIC Redundant Management Module
J4894A ProCurve 9300 EP 16-Port Mini-GBIC Module
J4895A ProCurve 9300 EP 16-Port 100/1000-T Module (RJ-45 connectors)
J4889B ProCurve 9300 EP 48-Port 10/100-TX Telco (RJ-21) Module
J4881B ProCurve 9300 EP 48-Port 10/100-TX RJ-45 Module (occupies 2 slots)
J8178A ProCurve 9300 EP 24-Port 100Base-FX Module (MTRJ connectors)

31 Rev. 10.31
Note
The remainder of this appendix focuses on the 9300m Switch Series. EP port modules support twice as many ports as the modules in the M4 family, which is described later in this appendix. The use of EP modules results in the high port density that makes the ProCurve 9300 switch suitable for data center applications and medium-to-large enterprise networks. There are two choices for gigabit port modules, each of which supports 16 ports. One supports mini-GBICs, and the other has RJ-45 ports for Category 5 cable. Each of these modules occupies a single module slot. There are two choices for 10/100 port modules, each of which supports 48 ports. The port module with RJ-45 connectors occupies two slots in the 9300m switch. The port module with RJ-21 connectors occupies a single module slot. Each of the four 50pin Telco ports can be connected to a patch panel that converts the signal into 12 RJ45 ports.
Rev. 10.31
A 39
M4 Redundant Management Module and Port Modules
M4 Redundant Management Module and Port Modules

J4857A ProCurve 9300 Mini-GBIC Redundant Management Module (8-port, M4) J4856A ProCurve 9300 Mini-GBIC Module (8-port) J4842A ProCurve 9300 1000Base-T Module (8-port) J4140A ProCurve 9300 10/100 Module (24-port) J4142A ProCurve 9300 100Base-FX Module (24-port MT-RJ)
32
Rev. 10.31
The 9300m M4 management module can be used with any of the port modules shown in this slide. The port modules in the M4 family are not compatible with the EP modules described previously.
A 40
Rev. 10.31
M2 Redundant Management Modules
M2 Redundant Management Modules

1 Link 2 3 Link 4 5 Link 6 7 Link 8 Console Activity Activity Activity Activity
J4845A ProCurve 9300 GigLX Redundant Management Module (8-port, M2)*

1 Link 2 3 Link 4 5 Link 6 7 Link 8 Console
Activity
Activity
Activity
Activity
J4846A ProCurve 9300 GigSX Redundant Management Module (8-port, M2)*

Console
J4847A ProCurve 9300 Redundant Management Module (0-port, M2)*
* These management modules cannot coexist in the same chassis with non-redundant management modules
33
Rev. 10.31
The ProCurve 9300m switch supports redundant management modules with software version 5.0 or above. The ProCurve 9300 GigLX Redundant Management Module combines management capabilities with eight Gigabit-LX ports. Gigabit-LX ports allow connections of up to 5 kilometers with single mode fiber. With multimode fiber, Gigabit-LX ports support distances of up to 550 meters; however, you need to use a conditioning cable when using multimode fiber with Gigabit-LX ports. The ProCurve 9300 GigSX Redundant Management Module combines management capabilities with eight Gigabit-SX ports. With 50 micron multimode fiber, Gigabit-SX ports support connections of up to 500 meters. The ProCurve 9300 Redundant Management Module supports no external connections and is dedicated to management tasks. All of these management modules contain a Central Processing Unit (CPU), 128 MB of RAM, flash memory for storing the software image, and other critical hardware and software components. These modules cannot coexist with the non-redundant management modules shown on the next slide.
Rev. 10.31
A 41
T-Flow Management Module
T-Flow Management Module

J4879A ProCurve T-Flow Management Module
34
Rev. 10.31
The T-Flow management module can be used with the same port modules supported by the M4 management module.
A 42
Rev. 10.31
M1 Management Modules
M1 Management Modules
1 Link 2 3 Link 4 5 Link 6 7 Link 8 Console Activity Activity Activity Activity
J4144A ProCurve 9300 Gigabit SX Management Module (8-port)

LX
1 Link 2 3 Link 4 5 Link 6
SX
7 Link 8 Console
Activity
Activity
Activity
Activity
J4146A ProCurve Gigabit 4LX/4SX Management Module (8-port)

Console
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
J4141A ProCurve 9300 10/100 Management Module (16-port)
* These management modules cannot coexist in the same chassis with redundant management modules
35
Rev. 10.31
The HP ProCurve 9300 Gigabit SX Management Module (8-port) combines management capabilities with eight Gigabit-SX ports. With 62.5 micron multimode fiber, Gigabit-SX ports allow connections of up to 200 meters; 50 micron multimode fiber allows connections up to 500 meters. The HP ProCurve Gigabit 4LX/4SX Management Module (8-port) combines management capabilities with four Gigabit-LX ports and four Gigabit-SX ports. Gigabit-LX ports allow connections of up to 5 kilometers with single-mode fiber. With multimode fiber, the ports support distances of up to 550 meters; however, you must use a conditioning cable when using multimode fiber with Gigabit-LX ports. The HP ProCurve 10/100 Management Module (16-port) supports 16 10/100 ports with RJ-45 connectors that auto-negotiate with attached devices, supporting 10Base-T half/full duplex and 100Base-T half/full duplex. These management modules contain a CPU, 32 MB of RAM, flash memory for storing the software image, and other critical hardware and software components. If the management module fails, the system will not operate fully, and the management module must be replaced. The management modules shown here do not support redundancy; only one of these management modules can be installed in the 9300m switch chassis at one time.
Rev. 10.31
A 43
Using Two Management Modules
Using Two Management Modules

Management modules must be matched: that is, M2s with M2s, M4s with M4s, EPs with EPs.
Primary Management Module
J4885A EP Mini-GBIC Redundant Management Module Any M2 or M4 Redundant Management Module J4879A T-Flow Redundant Management Module Any M1 Management Module
Secondary Management Module

Another EP Redundant Management Module Another M2 or M4 Redundant Management Module Another J4879A T-Flow Redundant Management Module Not applicable
Notes
Supported only in the ProCurve 9304M and 9308M switches. No redundant management options.
36
Rev. 10.31
As this slide shows, you must use the same type of redundant modules in the same switch chassis. For more information about compatibility among modules, see the matrices at the end of this module.
A 44
Rev. 10.31
Port Modules
Port Modules
Supported by M1 or M2 management modules:
1 Link 2 3 Link 4 5 Link 6 7 Link 8 Activity Activity Activity Activity
J4143A ProCurve 9300 Gigabit SX Module (8-port)

LX
1 Link 2 3 Link 4 5 Link 6 Activity Activity Activity
SX
7 Link 8 Activity
J4145A ProCurve 9300 Gigabit 4LX/4SX Module (8-port)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
J4140A ProCurve 9300 10/100 Module (24-port)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
J4142A ProCurve 9300 100Base FX Module (24-port MT-RJ)
37
Rev. 10.31
These modules can be used with the M1 or M2 management modules. The HP ProCurve 9300 Gigabit SX Module (8-port) has eight Gigabit-SX ports with SC connectors that support distances up to 500 meters with 50 micron multimode fiber. The HP ProCurve 9300 Gigabit 4LX/4SX has four Gigabit-SX ports with SC connectors that support distances up to 220 meters with multimode fiber, and four Gigabit LX ports with SC connectors that support distances up to 5 kilometers with single-mode fiber. The HP ProCurve 9300 10/100 Module has 24 10/100 ports with RJ-45 connectors. The ports auto-negotiate with attached devices, supporting 10Base-T half/full duplex and 100Base-TX half/full duplex. The HP ProCurve 9300 100Base FX Module has 24 100Base-FX ports with MT-RJ connectors. MT-RJ connectors include both transmit and receive fibers in a single connector that is the same size as an RJ-45 connector, thus allowing higher port density than SC connectors.
Rev. 10.31
A 45
HP ProCurve 9300 1-Port 10 Gb Module

1310nm serialsingle mode fiber Compatible with the M2, M4, and EP Management Modules (but not compatible with M1 Management Module) Complies with IEEE 802.3ae Supports distances up to 10km
J4891A ProCurve 9300 1-Port 10 Gb Module
38
Rev. 10.31
The HP ProCurve 9300 1-Port 10 GB Module complies with IEEE 802.3ae draft 3.3. It should be used with single-mode fiber and an SC connector. This module can be used in the 9304m, 9308m, and 9315m switches. It does not provide management services; it must be installed in a chassis that has at least one management module. This module is compatible with:

The EP redundant management module and other EP port modules The M4 management module and its related port modules
A 46
Rev. 10.31

Compatible with the M2, M4 and EP management modules (but not compatible with M1) Uses GBIC-like XENPAK Multisource Agreement (MSA) optics and is hot-swappable Supports the following types of XENPAK optics:
1310nm 1510nm
serial for single-mode fiber (10 km reach) serial for single-mode fiber (40km reach)
J8174A ProCurve 9300 2-Port 10 Gb Module
39
Rev. 10.31
The HP ProCurve 9300 2-Port 10 Gb Module is compatible with the M2, M4, and EP management modules, but it cannot be used with the M1 management modules.
Rev. 10.31
A 47
HP ProCurve 9300 GigLX Module (8-port)
HP ProCurve 9300 GigLX Module (8-port)
J4844A ProCurve 9300 GigLX Module
40
Rev. 10.31
The HP ProCurve 9300m switch also supports the 9300 GigLX Module, an 8-port non-management switch. It can only be used in a chassis with non-EP (M1, M2, M4, or T-Flow) management modules.
A 48
Rev. 10.31
Remove Modules
Remove Modules
To avoid brief service interruptions on the 9300m switch, disable non-management modules:
HP9300# disable module <slot_number>
For example:
HP9300# disable module 3
41
Rev. 10.31
Before you remove a port module from the 9300m switch, you should first disable by entering the following command:
HP9300# disable module <number>
If you remove the module without first disabling it, the 9300m switch reinitializes the other modules in the chassis; this causes a brief interruption in service, after which normal operation resumes. You do not have to disable a management module before removing it.
Rev. 10.31
A 49
Install Modules
Install Modules
You can hot-insert modules into empty 9300m switch chassis slots. You can hot-swap modules if you are replacing a module with the same type of module. If you replace a module with a different type of module, you must configure the slot for the module:
HP9300(config)# module <slot_number> <type_of_module>
List the options for the module command:

HP9300(config)# module <slot_number> ?
For example:
HP9300(config)# module 3 24-port-copper-module
42
Rev. 10.31
You can hot-insert modules into empty chassis slots; modules will be enabled automatically. You can hot-swap modules if you are replacing a module with the same type of module. If you replace a module with a different type of module, you must configure the slot for the module. You must then prepare slots for modules by manually entering the module command.
A 50
Rev. 10.31
Replace Management Modules
Replace Management Modules

By default, the redundant management module in the lower slot number becomes the active redundant management module when you power on the 9300m switch. To override the default setting and specify the active redundant management module, enter:
HP9300(config)# redundancy HP9300(config-redundancy)# active-management 5
Active management modules should be failed over to standby module before removal. By default, the system synchronizes:

The flash code and startup-config file automatically The running-config at regular user-configurable intervals
The boot code is not automatically set to synchronize but can be set to at startup or switch failover.
If you upgrade the boot code on the active module and the code contains a problem, you can still use the system by running the older boot code that is on the standby module.
Rev. 10.31
43
To replace a management module, complete these steps. 1. 2. 3. 4. Manually failover the active management module to the standby module using CLI or Web browser interface. Remove the module to be replaced that is now in standby mode. Insert replacement module, which will become enabled in standby mode; flash code and config files will automatically synchronize. Configure boot code synchronization if required.
Rev. 10.31
A 51
Power Supplies and Console Port
Power Supplies and Console Port

9315m Switch
Console Port
9308m Switch
9304m Switch
Power Supplies
44 Rev. 10.31
The 9315m switch requires a minimum of two J4875A power supplies to power up or reboot. With only two power supplies installed, if it becomes necessary to replace a failed power supply, you must first install and power up the replacement power supply before you remove the failed power supply. Otherwise, the 9315m switch will cease to operate. Also, for true power supply redundancy (N+1) in both the 9315m and the 9308m switches, you must install all four power supplies. Note that the power supply for the 9315m is J4875A and the power supply for the 9304m and 9308m is J4147A. These power supplies are not interchangeable.
A 52
Rev. 10.31
9300m Switch LED Behavior
9300m Switch LED Behavior

Verify proper behavior by observing the LEDs. When power is applied, some of the module LEDs will light. All of the power supply lights should light and stay a solid green. Management module power and active LEDs light solid, then the standby units active LED goes dark as it goes into standby mode. When diagnostics are complete, only port modules with active cables connected will have LEDs on.
45
Rev. 10.31
This slide outlines the behavior of the LEDs on the 9300m switch. Note that if all of the LEDs on a module do not light up during the diagnostics, this does not indicate an error. Only some of the LEDs are lit during the diagnostics.
Rev. 10.31
A 53
Port LEDs
Port LEDs
Port LED indicators for 100Base-FX, 1000Base-SX/LX, and 1000Base-T LEDs
LED Link Activity Position Top Bottom State On Off On Off Blinking Meaning Port is connected No port connection exists Traffic is being transmitted and received on that port No traffic is being transmitted Traffic is being transmitted and received on that port
Port LED indicators for 10Base-T/100Base-TX ports

LED Link/Activity Position Left State On Off Blinking FDX Right On Off Meaning Port is connected No port connection exists Traffic is being transmitted and received on that port The port is operating at full-duplex The port is operating at half-duplex
46
Rev. 10.31
Each 9300 switch is equipped with LEDs that denote port and power supply status. The slide lists the different port and expansion module port states.
A 54
Rev. 10.31
Management Users
Management Users
Three levels of users on 9300m switches:
No switch configuration allowed Read Only Limited configuration access

9315m Switch
Configure Port
Unlimited configuration access Super User

47 Rev. 10.31
9300m switches provide three levels of management user access:
Read-Only, or User EXECA user at this level can view some system information but cannot configure system or port parameters. Configure Port, or Privileged EXECThis user can access the enable context and configure port parameters. This user cannot configure system-wide parameters. Super User, or Config LevelThis user receives unlimited read-write access to the switch configuration. This is the only user who can set switch passwords.
By default, no passwords are configured for these users on the 9300m switch. When configuring management user passwords, you must first set the password for the super user. Then, you can set the passwords for the other users.
Rev. 10.31
A 55
Accessing the CLI
Accessing the CLI

After connectivity to the 9300m switch is established, you will see the prompt: HP9300> You are at the user EXEC level of the CLI. To move to the privileged EXEC level, enter: HP9300> enable To reach the config level, enter: HP9300# configure terminal HP9300(config)# You can then reach all other levels of the CLI.
48 Rev. 10.31
The 9300m switch CLI is organized into three levels:

User EXEC level Privileged EXEC level Config level
The user EXEC level is the starting point for a console session. A limited set of readonly commands is available at the user EXEC level. To make configuration change, you must enter the privileged EXEC level, which is also known as the enable mode. At factory default settings, the enable mode gives full read-write access to the system and is not protected by a password. You can move from the user EXEC level to the privileged EXEC level and have unlimited read-write access to the system by entering the command enable. The privileged EXEC level supports a powerful command set that allows dynamic configuration changes, manipulation of files in flash memory, and reloading of the operating system. To secure the system, you must establish a password for the privileged EXEC level. If you enter the privileged EXEC level when it is in an unprotected state, the system notifies you that no password has been assigned. If you enter the exit command from the privileged EXEC level, you will be returned to the user EXEC level. To move to the configuration level, enter the configure terminal command. Entering the configuration level causes the prompt to change, as shown in the slide.
A 56
Rev. 10.31
Global-level commands affect the entire system. Some examples of global-level configuration commands include the assignment of a host name and system passwords. Support for routing protocols, such as Routing Information Protocol (RIP) and Open Shortest Path First (OSPF), is enabled at the global configuration level, but changes to the operating parameters of the routing protocols are made within a router configuration context. You can give the switch a name by using the hostname command. The name can have embedded spaces if you enclose it in quotation marks.
Rev. 10.31
A 57
EXECthe Command Interpreter
EXECthe Command Interpreter

showdisplays system information clearreset system statistics counters ping, traceroutetest connectivity erase, write, copymanipulate image and configuration files configadvance to the configuration level
At factory default settings, there are two EXEC levels. To enter the privileged EXEC level: HP9304> enable HP9304# To leave the privileged EXEC level and return to the user EXEC level: HP9304# exit HP9304>
showdisplays system information ping, traceroutetest connectivity enablemoves to Privileged EXEC level
Privileged EXEC HP9304# User EXEC HP9304>
49
Rev. 10.31
The exit command returns you to the previous level within the configuration level. Regardless of the current configuration level, the end command exits the configuration level and returns you to the privileged EXEC level.
A 58
Rev. 10.31
Assign the Super User a Password
Assign the Super User a Password

To assign the password to the super user on the 9300m switch:
Router_A> enable Router_A# config term Router_A(config)# enable super-user-password secret
account password
privileged EXEC
Router_A#
super-user has all rights at the privileged EXEC level
To authenticate as super-user, supply the correct password:

Router_A> enable secret Router_A#
user EXEC
Router_A>
50
Rev. 10.31
As mentioned earlier, CLI access does not require a password by default. If you want to configure a password, you must use the CLI. A password cannot be assigned through the Web management interface. To protect the 9300m switch from unauthorized access, you should assign passwords for the management users. The configuration of a privileged EXEC password creates a super user account, which is unlimited in scope. You must enter the global configuration level to create this account and assign a password. You must configure a password for this user before you can configure a password for other users. In addition to protecting the enable mode from unauthorized access, the definition of a super user password removes most of the commands that are available at the user EXEC level at factory default settings, such as show and ping.
Rev. 10.31
A 59
Create the Read-Only and Configure Port Users
Create the Read-Only and Configure Port Users

The super user creates the read-only and configure port users by assigning a password:
Router_A> enable secret Router_A# config term Router_A(config)# enable read-only-password operator Router_A(config)# enable port-config-only-password techie account privileged EXEC Router_A# port-config user read-only user user EXEC
51 Rev. 10.31
password
To authenticate as a read-only user, enter the correct password:

Router_A> enable operator Router_A#
Router_A>
The system also supports the creation of a configure port account with capabilities that include all read-only functions and some limited port-level configuration. The read-only and configure port accounts do not exist until the super user creates them by defining passwords for the accounts. The read-only account should be used by system operators or other monitoring personnel who need read-only access to information. This type of user has unlimited access to show commands, including show configuration, but this is not a security risk because the show configuration command does not display the passwords configured for system-defined users. The read-only user can perform connectivity tests and can Telnet to other network devices from the 9300m switch, but cannot make any changes to the switchs configuration. A superset of the read-only account, the configure port account is suitable for use by technicians and other persons who must dynamically configure interface parameters. The configure port user can enable or disable individual ports and change their physical parameters such as speed and duplex settings.
A 60
Rev. 10.31
Boot Monitor
Boot Monitor
Boot monitor on the 9300m switch allows you to manually intervene in the boot process. The following commands are available at the boot monitor:
Router_A# reload M2 BI Boot Code Version 07.00.05 Enter b to go to boot monitor BOOT MONITOR> ? reset boot system flash primary boot system flash secondary boot system bootp boot system tftp 1.2.3.4 file name ip address 1.2.3.4 255.255.255.0 ip address 1.2.3.4/24 ip default_gateway 1.2.3.1 ping 1.2.3.4
52 Rev. 10.31
While the 9300m switch is booting, there is a 2-second window during which you can interrupt the boot process by pressing the b key from a terminal with a direct serial connection. This allows you to access the boot monitor. Interrupting the boot process by entering the boot monitor gives you an opportunity to specify the source of the system image. It is most useful in situations where you cannot access the privileged EXEC level. The slide displays examples of the options available at the boot monitor.
Rev. 10.31
A 61
Boot the HP ProCurve 9300m Switch from a TFTP Server
Boot the HP ProCurve 9300m Switch from a TFTP Server

The boot monitor allows you to interrupt the boot sequence and boot the system from an alternate location.
Router_A# reload M4 BI Boot Code Version 07.00.05 Enter b to go to boot monitor BOOT BOOT BOOT BOOT MONITOR> MONITOR> MONITOR> MONITOR> ip address 10.1.2.1/24 ping 10.1.2.1 ping 10.1.2.3 boot system tftp 10.1.2.3 h2r07054.bin
53
Rev. 10.31
If both primary and secondary flash images are corrupted, the system will be unable to boot without intervention. You can recover from this problem by booting from a system image file stored on a TFTP server. The first step is to enter the boot monitor. In this mode, the startup-config has not been loaded and thus the 9300m switch does not have an IP identity. To enable the routing switch to request the system image file from the TFTP server, you must enable IP on the switch by supplying an IP address and subnet mask. If the TFTP server is on another network, use the IP default-gateway command to define the address of the default gateway on the switchs local network. When the 9300m switch boots, it will automatically execute the startup-config, if one exists in flash memory. As soon as possible, you should copy a valid image to the primary and secondary flash areas using the copy tftp flash command.
A 62
Rev. 10.31
Recover from a Lost Password on the HP ProCurve 9300m Switch
Recover from a Lost Password on the HP ProCurve 9300m Switch

Boot monitor allows you to interrupt the boot sequence and boot the system without requiring the super-user password:
Router_A# reload M4 BI Boot Code Version 07.00.05 Enter b to go to boot monitor BOOT MONITOR> no password BOOT MONITOR> boot system flash primary Router_A> enable Router_A#
54
Rev. 10.31
You can use the boot monitor to recover from a lost super-user password. In this case, you must enter the boot monitor and enter the hidden command no password, followed by a boot system flash primary command. Note that booting without password protection does not remove the passwords from the configuration file; it simply removes the authentication requirement. When the system boots with no password, you can enter the privileged level EXEC simply by entering the enable command at the user level EXEC. You should assign a new super-user password and write the configuration to memory immediately to secure the system and replace the unknown password.
Rev. 10.31
A 63
Boot with the Factory Default Settings, Not the Startup-Config
Boot with the Factory Default Settings, Not the Startup-Config

The boot monitor allows you to interrupt the boot sequence and boot the system with the factory default configuration:
Router_A# reload M4 BI Boot Code Version 07.00.05 Enter b to go to boot monitor BOOT MONITOR> use default config BOOT MONITOR> boot system flash primary
55
Rev. 10.31
This command sequence instructs the switch to boot with the factory default configuration, rather than the startup-config. The 2-second boot monitor opportunity may be eliminated by enabling the fastboot feature. From the enable mode, enter:
HP9300# fastboot
Note that fastboot may be enabled (fastboot) or disabled (fastboot off) at both the user and privileged EXEC level. The fastboot command does not cause the system to restart; it does determine how quickly the system will boot.
A 64
Rev. 10.31
HP ProCurve Wireless Products

Appendix B
This appendix includes information about legacy HP ProCurve wireless products. Although HP ended the sale of these wireless products, many customers will continue to use them for many years to come. If you are asked to service these switches, this appendix will provide some information to help you do so.
Rev. 10.31
B1
HP ProCurve Standalone APs


HP ProCurve AP 420 HP ProCurve AP 530 HP ProCurve AP 10ag HP ProCurve 520wl
HP ProCurve Coordinated AP SolutionWireless LAN System HP ProCurve 700wl Secure Access Series HP ProCurve Antennas
Rev. 10.31
There are three families of legacy HP ProCurve wireless products, each of which is geared to provide particular functions:

HP ProCurve standalone APs HP ProCurve Wireless LAN System consisting of RPs controlled by a switch module HP ProCurve Secure Access 700wl Series
This section discusses the HP ProCurve standalone APs.
B2
Rev. 10.31

AP 420
One
AP 420
802.1 1b/g radio radios:

AP 530
AP 530
Two
Radio 1802.1 1b/g Radio 2802.1 or b/g 1a
AP 10ag
Two
radios:
AP 10ag
Radio 1802.1 1b/g Radio 2802.1 1a
Each AP comes in a North America (NA) or Worldwide (WW) model.
AP 520wl
Rev. 10.31
There are three legacy standalone APs:

AP 420 AP 530 AP 10ag
For each AP, HP ProCurve offered two modelsone for North America (NA) and one for all other areas, or worldwide (WW).
Rev. 10.31
B3
HP ProCurve AP 420
HP ProCurve AP 420
One radio:
802.1 1b/g Support
for external antennas
Management options:
Web
browser interface (GUI) HTTP or HTTPS CLISerial, Telnet, or SSH SNMP solution

Press
and hold the Reset button for 5 seconds Default username = admin No default password
Rev. 10.31
The AP 420s single-radio design supports 802.1 1g, with or without fallback support for 802.1 1b, as well as 802.1 alone. 1b
External Antenna Support

The AP 420 supports the following antennas: ProCurve 5 dBi Indoor/Outdoor Omnidirectional Antenna (J8441A) ProCurve 8 dBi Outdoor Omnidirectional Antenna (J8444A)
Note The ProCurve 8 dBi Outdoor Omnidirectional Antenna (J8444A) is not supported by the HP ProCurve Wireless Access Point 420 NA (J8130A).
Management Options
You have several options for managing the AP 420.

The Web browser interface offers an intuitive, task-based approach to managing the AP. You can access this interface remotely using either:

Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) HTTP over Secure Socket Layer (HTTPS), a protocol that encrypts data that is part of a web session
Rev. 10.31
B4
Command Line Interface (CLI)

You might prefer the precise control afforded by a CLI. You can also access the AP 420s CLI through:

A serial connection A remote Telnet session A remote, encrypted Secure Shell (SSHv2) session
SNMP
SNMP support allows you to manage the AP 420 in the context of other devices on your network. An SNMP v1/v2 agent on the AP 420:
Submits information such as device settings, traffic statistics, and alarms to a central SNMP server Accepts commands from SNMP management software, allowing for centralized administration
SNMP v3 offers the same services but adds encryption to protect sensitive information.
Flash Memory
The AP 420 includes 4 MB flash memory in which the following are stored:

A startup-config with custom configurations A factory default config, which allows you to return the AP 420 to default settings Software Default software, which is software loaded at production that enables the AP 420 to recover automatically should new software fail to download successfully or the primary software become corrupted. This default software cannot be altered.
Returning the AP to Factory Settings

To return the AP 420 to its factory default settings and password, locate the Reset button on the back of the device. Press and hold it for five seconds. The default username is admin. The AP 420 does not initially have a manager password; simply press Enter when prompted for the password.
Rev. 10.31
B5
Interpreting the HP ProCurve AP 420 LEDs
Status On
Power LED On
10/100 TX LED 100 Mbps connection up (green) 10 Mbps connection up (amber)
Wireless LED Associated with at least one station
Off Blinking
5 Rev. 10.31
Off (no power) Self-test
Connection down Activity on the link
No associations Activity on the link
The AP 420 has three LEDs (Power, 10/100 TX, and Wireless), each of which has three statuses: on, off, or blinking.
Power LED
The Power LED indicates whether the AP 420 is on or off. The AP 420 does not have a power switch. If the AP 420 receives power, it is on. If the Power LED is off, check the power cord and verify that you are using approved ProCurve equipment. When the AP 420 uses PoE, an off Power LED may indicate a problem on the connecting switchfor example, PoE is not enabled or the Ethernet connection is down. At the APs initial power up, the Power LED blinks for between 30 seconds and one minute while it performs a self-test and system initialization. If a component of the self-test fails, the LED continues to blink, indicating a problem with the boot code or software. The Power LED also blinks when the AP 420 downloads new software.
B6
Rev. 10.31
10/100 TX LED
The 10/100 TX LED reports the status of the AP 420s Ethernet connection. The LED glows when the far-end device sends a link indication (the link is up). The color indicates the speed of the connection:

Green100 Mbps Amber10 Mbps
Actual activity on the linkthat is, the Ethernet interface sending or receiving trafficcauses the LED to blink.
Wireless LED
The Wireless LED is on when both of these conditions are met:

The radio is on. At least one station is associated with the AP 420.
If the LED is off, either the radio is disabled or no stations are currently connected. The LED blinks when the radio sends or receives traffic.
Rev. 10.31
B7
Configure Country Code and IP Settings on the HP ProCurve AP 420

Establish a serial connection. Enter the default username and password:
Username: Password:
admin
none required
Set the country code.

ProCurve AP 420# configure ProCurve AP 420(config)# country <code>
Access the Ethernet configuration mode and set the IP address and default gateway.
ProCurve AP 420(config)# interface ethernet ProCurve AP 420(if-ethernet)# no ip dhcp ProCurve AP 420(if-ethernet)# ip address <A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> <gateway A.B.C.D>
6 Rev. 10.31
Establish a Serial Connection

To begin to configure the AP 420, you can establish a serial connection to the AP, or you can Telnet to its default IP address of 192.168.1.1/24. If you want to establish a serial connection, complete these instructions: 1. Use a DB-9 female-to-female serial cable to connect your workstation to the APs console port. Although the APs do not ship with this cable (5184-1894), many ProCurve switches include it. Open a terminal (VT-100) session using these settings:
Note When establishing a console session, press Enter until the CLI prompt is displayed.
2.
Port: COM-1 Typically, you will use COM-1. Baud rate: 9600 Data bits: 8 Stop bit: 1
B8
Rev. 10.31
Parity: None Flow control: None
You can then begin to enter the basic commands shown on the slide. (You can complete these tasks after installing and powering up the AP 420 or before installing it at all, depending on the ease of accessing the APs serial port at its installation location.)
Enter the Default Username and Password

When you are prompted for a username, enter the default username and password: Username: admin Password: none required
Set the Country Code

The North American model (J8130A or J8130B) comes configured with the us country code. If you are using the Worldwide model (J8131A or J8131B), you must always set the country code, which you should do immediately. The country code configures the AP 420 to use only the channels and transmit powers allowed by regulations in your country. You cannot activate the AP 420 WWs radio until you set the country code. The correct country code must be set for the country in which you operate the AP so that it uses the correct authorized radio channels for wireless network devices. On the AP 420, the country code can only be set using the CLI.
ProCurve AP 420# country <country_code> Note You can see a complete list of available country codes by using the country ? command.
Once you have set the country code and rebooted the system, the CLI command is no longer available. If you need to change the country code, you must reload the AP default configuration by using the reset configuration command, or by pressing the APs Reset button for more than 5 seconds.
Specify IP Settings
By default, the AP 420 receives a dynamic address from a DHCP server. If a DHCP server is not available, the AP 420 uses the IP address 192.168.1.1/24. You can also disable the DHCP client on the AP 420 and assign it a static address.
Rev. 10.31
B9
Enter these commands to access the Ethernet interface and configure the IP settings:
ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve <gateway AP 420# configure AP 420(config)# interface ethernet AP 420(if-ethernet)# no ip dhcp AP 420(if-ethernet)# ip address <A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> A.B.C.D>
Enter the IP address of the APs default gateway immediately after the APs own IP address. For example, you might enter:
ProCurve AP 420(if-ethernet)# ip address 10.1.1.10 255.255.255.0 10.1.1.1
The IP address on the APs Ethernet interface is its single address and also acts as its management address. You should assign the AP an address in your networks management VLAN. (By default, the APs management VLAN is VLAN 1; if necessary, change this setting with the management-vlanid <1-4094> <tagged | untagged> command, entered from the global configuration context.)
Note The actual CLI prompt on the AP 420 reads: HP ProCurve Access Point 420 This course will use the shortened prompt: ProCurve AP 420
When you enter commands in the AP 420 CLI, they are automatically saved to the startup-config. You do not have to enter the write memory command.
B 10
Rev. 10.31
CLI: Upgrade Software on the HP ProCurve AP 420
CLI: Upgrade Software on the HP ProCurve AP 420

Upgrade the software image by entering:
ProCurve AP 420# copy tftp file 1. Application image 2. Config file 3. Boot block image 4. Text Config file Select the type of download<1-4>: [1]:1 TFTP Source file name:hp420-2100B14.bin TFTP Server IP:192.168.1.10 Updating Boot Line in NVRAM, please wait! ... Do you want to reset to FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS? <y/n> [n]: n
Rev. 10.31
You can upgrade the software on the AP 420 using the CLI; you download the software file from a TFTP server to the APs flash memory using the commands shown on the slide. You must know the IP address of the TFTP server, and the AP must be able to reach this server. Follow these steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. Enter this command from the manager level of the CLI:
ProCurve AP 420# copy tftp file
You are prompted to select the type of file you want to download. Enter 1 for Application image. Enter the name of the .bin software file that is located on your TFTP server. Enter the IP address of the server.
The file copies to the APs flash memory, and you are asked whether you want to reset the AP to factory default settings. Enter n for no.
Rev. 10.31
B 11
Web: Upgrade Software on the HP ProCurve AP 420
Web: Upgrade Software on the HP ProCurve AP 420
Rev. 10.31
You can also upgrade the AP 420s software using the Web browser interface. When you use this method, the AP can download the new software file from either the local workstation (the station from which you are accessing the Web browser interface) or from a remote FTP or TFTP server. When you store the software file on the local workstation, you must make sure that the filename is valid. The name must not contain slashes (\ or /), the leading character must not be a period, and the maximum length for the name is 32 characters. Valid characters are alphanumeric characters and ., -, _. Follow these steps to upgrade the software: 1. 2. 3. Click the Administration tab. Click the Software Upgrade button. If the new software is stored locally, follow these steps: a. b. c. Move to the HTTP section. For New Firmware File, type the path and filename of the software on the local workstation. You can also use the Browse button to find the file. Click Start Upgrade.
B 12
Rev. 10.31
4.
If the new software is stored remotely, follow these steps: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Move to the Remote, section. For Direction, select Download. For File Type, select Application. For Server Type, select FTP or TFTP depending on the type of server that you are using. For File Name, type the name of the software file as stored on the FTP or TFTP server. For Server IP, specify the IP address of the FTP or TFTP server. If using an FTP server, specify the user name and password, if required.
5. 6.
Click the Start Upgrade button. When either the local or remote download is complete, click the Reboot button. After the AP 420 reboots, it runs the new software.
Rev. 10.31
B 13
CLI: Manage Configuration Files on the HP ProCurve AP 420
CLI: Manage Configuration Files on the HP ProCurve AP 420

Download a configuration file from a TFTP server.
ProCurve AP 420# copy tftp file 1. Application image 2. Config file 3. Boot block image 4. Text Config file Select the type of download<1-4>: [1]:[2 | 4] TFTP Source file name:hp420-config.cfg TFTP Server IP:192.168.1.10
Copy a configuration file from the AP 420 to a TFTP server.

ProCurve AP 420# copy config tftp <binary | text> TFTP Source file name:hp420-config.txt TFTP Server IP:192.168.1.19
Rev. 10.31
You can download a previously saved configuration file from the TFTP server to the AP to restore an earlier configuration. Follow these steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. Enter this command from the manager level of the CLI:
ProCurve AP 420# copy tftp file
You are prompted to select the type of file you want to copy. Enter 2 for Config file or 4 for Text Config file (if the configuration file has a .txt extension). Enter the filename of the configuration file. Enter the TFTP server IP address.
You can also copy a configuration file from the AP to a TFTP server with the copy command. Follow these steps: 1. 2. 3. Enter this command from the manager level:
ProCurve AP 420# copy tftp <binary | text>
Enter the filename of the text (.txt) or binary (.bin) file that will be stored on the TFTP server. Enter the IP address of the TFTP server.
B 14
Rev. 10.31
Web: Manage Configuration Files on the HP ProCurve AP 420
10
Rev. 10.31
You can also use the Web browser interface to upload configuration files to a remote server (for purposes such as for backup) as well as to download files to the AP. Unlike software files, configuration files can only be copied to and from remote FTP or TFTP servers. Follow these steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Click the Administration tab. Click the Software Upgrade button. Move to the Remote section. For Direction, select Download to copy a file from the remote server to the AP. Select Upload to copy a file from the AP to the server. For File Type, select Config or Text Config. For Server Type, select the type of server you are using. For Server IP, type the IP address of the server. For File Name, type the name under which the configuration file you are transferring is stored on the remote server (for downloads) or will be stored on the remote server (for uploads). If using an FTP server, specify the user name and password, if required.
9.
10. Click the Start Upgrade button.

Rev. 10.31
B 15
CLI: Reset the HP ProCurve AP 420 to Factory Defaults
CLI: Reset the HP ProCurve AP 420 to Factory Defaults

Reset to factory defaults.
ProCurve AP 420# reset configuration
When asked to confirm the reset, press y.
1 1
Rev. 10.31
The reset configuration command resets the AP 420 to the factory default settings and then reboots the AP.
B 16
Rev. 10.31
Web: Reset the HP ProCurve AP 420 to Factory Defaults
Web: Reset the HP ProCurve AP 420 to Factory Defaults
12
Rev. 10.31
You can use the Web browser interface to reset the AP 420s configuration to the factory defaults settings and reboot the system. 1. 2. 3. Click the Administration tab. Click the Software Upgrade button. Click the Reset button.
Rev. 10.31
B 17
HP ProCurve AP 530
HP ProCurve AP 530
Two radios:
Radio Radio
1802.1 1b/g 2:
802.1 1a 802.1 1b/g (external antenna required) Support
for external antennas
Management options:
Web
browser interface (GUI)HTTP or HTTPS Telnet, or SSH solution
CLISerial, SNMP
13
Rev. 10.31
The AP 530 offers many of the same features that the AP 420 provides, with several additional features. For example, the AP 530 includes two built-in radios. Radio 1 supports 802.1 1g, 802.1 1b, and 802.1 with fallback support for 802.1 1g 1b. Radio 2 supports all of these options, as well as 802.1 1a. The radios can be set to the same 802.1 standard or to different standards. 1 However, whenever Radio 2 is configured to use 802.1 1b/g, it must be connected to an external antenna. The external antenna should be separated from the internal antenna by 2 to 4 meters.

The AP 530 supports the following antennas:

ProCurve 5 dBi Indoor/Outdoor Omnidirectional Antenna (J8441A) ProCurve 8 dBi Outdoor Omnidirectional Antenna (J8444A) ProCurve 14 dBi Yagi Antenna (J8448B) ProCurve Antenna Lightning Arrester (J8996A) ProCurve 3 dBi Dual Band Diversity Antenna (J8997A) ProCurve 6 dBi 5 GHz Omnidirectional Antenna (J8998A) ProCurve 7 dBi Dual Band Directional Antenna (J8999A)
Rev. 10.31
B 18
ProCurve 14 dBi 5 GHz Directional Antenna (J9000A)
Management Options
You can access the AP 530s CLI, as well as its Web browser interface, both nonsecurely and securely. The AP 530 supports the same security protocols as the AP 420SSHv2 and HTTPS. To better integrate within a network, the AP 530 uses Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP, which is defined in the IEEE 802.1AB standard) to:

Report information about itself to the connecting switch Automatically populate the LLDP and proprietary management information bases (MIBs) on which SNMP servers such as ProCurve Mobility Manager (PMM) rely
Rev. 10.31
B 19
HP ProCurve AP 530 Default Configurations
HP ProCurve AP 530 Default Configurations

Two default configurations:

Custom default configuration created by the customer Factory default configuration Press the Reset and Clear buttons. When LEDs turn off, release Reset. When LEDs flash, release Clear. Press the Reset and Clear buttons. When LEDs turn off, release Reset. When LEDs flash, press Reset. When LEDs flash rapidly, release Clear. Default username = admin Default password = admin
Rev. 10.31
Reset to custom default settings:

Clear button

Reset button
14
The AP 530 has supports several configurations in its flash memory, so you can return it to factory default settings or custom default settings.
Flash Memory
The AP 530s 16 MB of flash memory hold:

Software and backup software to ensure smooth upgrades Startup-configthe individualized configuration from which the AP loads Factory default configurationa functional configuration to which the AP 530 can always return Custom default configurationa baseline configuration customized to the customers environment
The AP 530 can transfer files to and from its flash memory using Secure Copy Protocol (SCP) in addition to File Transfer Protocol (FTP) and Trivial FTP (TFTP).
Returning the AP to Default Settings

Using the Clear and Reset buttons on the back of the device, you can reset the AP 530 to its:
Custom default settings (custom reset) Hold down the Clear and Reset buttons together. Release the Reset button when the LEDs turn off. Release the Clear button when the LEDs begin to flash.
B 20
Rev. 10.31
Factory default settings (factory reset) Hold down the Clear and Reset buttons together. Release the Reset button when the LEDs turn off. When the LEDs begin to flash, hold down the Reset button again. When the LEDs begin to flash rapidly, release the Clear button.
The default username and password for the AP 530 are both admin.
Rev. 10.31
B 21
Status
Power LED Radio 1 LED
Radio 2 LED
Wireless LED
On Blinking
On Booting
Radio enabled and currently using Ethernet link up and currently its full bandwidth using its full bandwidth Radio enabled and currently using partial bandwidth Booting Radio disabled Ethernet link up and currently using partial bandwidth Booting Ethernet link down
Off
Off (no power)
15
Rev. 10.31
The AP 530 has four LEDs:

Power LED Radio 1 LED Radio 2 LED LAN LED
Power LED
View the Power LED to verify the AP 530 is on and has loaded successfully; in this case, the LED glows solid green. If the LED is off, the AP is not receiving power. Look for problems with the power cord or with PoE. While the AP 530 initially loads, all LEDs blink. The pattern of the blinking indicates the stage in the boot-up processfor example, loading the boot software or decompressing the software. If the LEDs continue to blink too long, you can match the pattern to the stage and attempt to rectify the problem. (Refer to the table below.) For example, when the LAN and radio 2 LEDs remain on (stage 5), but the radio 1 LED does not also turn on (stage 6), the AP cannot initialize the software, which may be corrupt.
B 22
Rev. 10.31
Stage
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
LED Pattern
Power LED on 5 seconds LAN LED blinks 5 times in 1 second all LEDs on 5 seconds only LAN LED on LAN and Radio 2 LEDs on LAN, Radio 1, and Radio 2 LEDs on LEDs operating normally
Step Completed in the Boot-Up Process

system initialization started boot ROM initialized operating system kernel loaded file system mounted radio drivers loaded software initialized AP successfully booted
Radio LEDs
The ProCurve AP 530 has two Radio LEDs labeled Radio 1 and Radio 2. Both LEDs behave in the same manner: they are off when the radio is disabled and blink when the radio is enabled. The rapidity of the blinking indicates the amount of activity on the radio: the faster the blinking, the more traffic. When the radio is not sending or receiving any traffic but the radio is on, the LED blinks once every five seconds. On the other hand, when all bandwidth on a radio is consumed, the LED glows solid green. View the radio LEDs to track wireless activity and monitor for congestion.
LAN LED
The LAN LED reports the status of the AP 530s Ethernet connection. When the LAN LED is off, the Ethernet connection (either the Physical Layer or the Data Link Layer) is down. When on, the LAN LED blinks to signal the amount of activity on the line.
Rev. 10.31
B 23

Establish a serial connection and enter default settings:
Username: Password:
admin
admin
Set the country code.

ProCurve AP 530# configure ProCurve AP 530(config)# country <code>
Access the Ethernet configuration mode and configure the IP settings.

ProCurve AP 530(config)# interface ethernet ProCurve AP 530(ethernet)# ip address <A.B.C.D> <A.B.C.D> ProCurve AP 530(ethernet)# ip default-gateway <A.B.C.D>
Save the configuration.

ProCurve AP 530(ethernet)# write memory
16 Rev. 10.31

You follow the same steps you used to establish a serial connection with the AP 420: 1. Use a DB-9 female-to-female serial cable to connect your workstation to the APs console port. Although the APs do not ship with this cable (5184-1894), many ProCurve switches include it. Open a terminal (VT-100) session using these settings:
Note When establishing a console session, press Enter until the CLI prompt is displayed.
2.

B 24
Port: COM-1 Typically, you will use COM-1. Baud rate: 9600 Data bits: 8 Stop bit: 1 Parity: None Flow control: None
Rev. 10.31
Username and Password

When prompted, enter the default username and password: Username: admin Password: admin

You must set the AP 530s country code so that it uses the authorized radio channels for wireless network devices in the country in which it operates. The country code must be set before configuring other radio settings because it affects the radio channels that are available. Enter this command to set the country code:
ProCurve AP 530# country <code> Note You can see a complete list of available country codes by using the country ? command. At factory default settings, the country code is preset to US in the HP ProCurve Access Point 530 NA (J8986A). On the AP 530 NA, the code can be changed from US to only the code for Canada, Mexico, or Taiwan. When the code is set to Canada, Mexico, or Taiwan and you want to reset it to US, you must reset the AP to its factory defaults. The radios are disabled if the country code is not set. When the country code is set, the radios can be enabled. When you reset the unit to its factory default settings, the HP ProCurve Access Point 530 WW (J8987A) requires that you set its country code. The AP 530 NA returns to US.
Specify IP Settings
Like the AP 420, the AP 530 takes a dynamic address by default. If a DHCP server is not available, however, the AP 530 uses this IP address: 192.168.1.10/24.
Note If you connect two AP 530s set to factory defaults to the same network, you should immediately connect to them with console sessions and change their IP addresses. Otherwise, the duplicate IP address may cause confusion.
To set the AP 530s static IP address manually, enter these commands:

ProCurve AP ProCurve AP ProCurve AP <A.B.C.D>] ProCurve AP 530# configure 530(config)# interface ethernet 530(ethernet)# ip address <A.B.C.D> [/<prefix length> | 530(ethernet)# ip default-gateway <A.B.C.D>
Rev. 10.31
B 25
Note The AP 530s actual CLI prompt is: ProCurve Access Point 530 This course will use this shortened prompt: ProCurve AP 530
Save the Configuration

To save the changes, enter:
ProCurve AP 530(Ethernet)# write memory
B 26
Rev. 10.31
CLI: Manage Files on the HP ProCurve AP 530
CLI: Manage Files on the HP ProCurve AP 530

Upgrade software.
ProCurve AP 530# copy tftp flash <A.B.C.D> <filename>
Download a configuration file from a TFTP server.

ProCurve AP 530# copy tftp <startup-config | custom-default> <server A.B.C.D> <filename>
Copy a configuration file from the AP 530 to a TFTP server.

ProCurve AP 530# copy <startup-config | custom-default> tftp <server A.B.C.D> <filename>
17
Rev. 10.31
Use the commands displayed on the slide to upgrade software and to manage configuration files from the CLI.
Upgrade Software
Using the CLI, you can have the AP 530 download new software from a TFTP, FTP, or SCP server. Enter this command:
ProCurve AP 530# copy <tftp | ftp | scp> flash <A.B.C.D> <filename> [user-name <user> password <password>]
Replace <A.B.C.D> with the IP address of the server and <filename> with the name under which the software is stored on the server. For FTP or SCP, you may need to enter a valid username and password. When the upgrade is complete, use the reboot command to reboot the AP and have the new software take effect.
Note Upgrading the software does not affect the configuration of the AP 530. However, you might want to back up the APs configuration as a failsafe.
Rev. 10.31
B 27
Download a Configuration File from a Remote Server

The AP 530 can obtain a configuration file from a remote TFTP, FTP, or SCP server. This AP can store two configuration files: a startup-config file, which stores the settings that this AP runs, and a custom-default configuration file, which stores default settings that have been customized for all APs in a system. You can download a configuration file from a remote server to either of these files on the AP 530. Enter this command:
ProCurve AP 530# copy <tftp | ftp | scp> <startup-config | customconfig> <A.B.C.D> <filename> [user-name <user> password <password>]
Replace <A.B.C.D> with the IP address of the server and <filename> with the name under which the configuration file is stored on the server. For FTP or SCP, you may need to enter a valid username and password.
Copy a Configuration File from the AP 530 to a Remote Server

You can also copy a configuration file from the AP 530 to a remote TFTP, FTP, or SCP server. For example, you might want to create a custom-default configuration and transfer that file to the remote server to be uploaded to another AP. Or you might want to backup the APs startup-config. Enter this command:
ProCurve AP 530# copy <startup-config | custom-config> <tftp | ftp | scp> <A.B.C.D> <filename> [user-name <user> password <password>]
Replace <A.B.C.D> with the IP address of the server and <filename> with the name under which you want to store the configuration file on the server. For FTP or SCP, you may need to enter a valid username and password.
B 28
Rev. 10.31
Web: Update Software on the HP ProCurve AP 530
Web: Update Software on the HP ProCurve AP 530
18
Rev. 10.31
Using the Web browser interface, you can complete a remote software update (from a TFTP, FTP, or SCP server) or a local update (from the station from which you are accessing the Web browser interface). When you store the software file on the local workstation, you must make sure that the filename is valid. The name must not contain slashes (\ or /), the leading character must not be a period, and the maximum length for the name is 32 characters. Valid characters are alphanumeric characters and ., -, _. To complete a remote update, follow these steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Rev. 10.31
Click Management > System Maintenance in the left navigation bar. Click the Software tab. For Server Type, select FTP, TFTP, or SCP. For Server IP, type the IP address of the remote server. For File Name, type the name under which the software is stored on the remote server. For Username and Password, type valid credentials (if required by your FTP or SCP server). Click Upgrade to initiate the operation. Click Management > System Maintenance in the left navigation bar.
B 29
To complete a local upgrade, follow these steps:
9.
Click the Software tab.
10. Under Local Update for File Name, type the name under which the software is stored on the local management station. 11. Click Upgrade to perform the operation. 12. Reboot the AP 530 (select the Reboot tab and click Reboot). 13. Clear the browser cache before attempting to manage the AP using the new software version. After the upgrade has completed, reboot the AP 530 (select the Reboot tab and click Reboot). Clear the browser cache before attempting to manage the AP using the new software version.
B 30
Rev. 10.31
19
Rev. 10.31
You can save the APs configuration file to a remote server (upload) or transfer a file from a remote server to the AP (download) using the Web browser interface. Follow these steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Select Click Management > System Maintenance. Select the Configuration Files tab. For Server Type, select FTP, TFTP, or SCP. For Direction, select Download or Upload for the option. For Server IP, type the IP address of the remote server. For File Name, type the name under which the software is stored on the remote server. For Username and Password, type valid credentials (if required by your FTP or SCP server). Click Update to perform the upload or download operation.
Rev. 10.31
B 31
CLI: Reset the HP ProCurve AP 530 to Factory or Custom Defaults

CLI: Reset the HP ProCurve AP 530 to Factory or Custom Defaults
Reset an AP 530 to factory defaults.
ProCurve Access Point 530# copy factory-default startupconfig
To get a replacement AP 530 up and running, copy a custom-default configuration to its startup-config.
ProCurve Access Point 530# copy custom-default startupconfig
Restart an AP 530.
ProCurve Access Point 530# reload Device will be rebooted, do you want to continue [y/n]? y Do you want to save the current configuration [y/n]? n
20
Rev. 10.31
Reset an AP 530 to Factory Defaults

You can return a misconfigured AP to its factory default configuration. Enter this command:
ProCurve AP 530# copy factory-default startup-config
Restart the AP with the reload command. When prompted, enter y to confirm the reboot. When prompted, enter n so that you do not save the running-config.
Reset an AP 530 to Custom Defaults

You can also return an AP 530 to a custom-default configuration, which is a default configuration that has been customized for a particular system. Resetting an AP to a custom-default configuration is a quick way to get a replacement AP 530 up and running. (First download the custom-default configuration to the AP from a remote server as you learned how to do earlier.) Enter this command:
ProCurve AP 530# copy custom-default startup-config
Restart the AP with the reload command. When prompted, enter y to confirm the reboot. When prompted, enter n so that you do not save the running-config. After the AP 530 reboots, you can access it with a console session and set individual settings such as an IP address. It should then be ready to function in the system.
B 32
Rev. 10.31
Web: Reset the ProCurve HP AP 530 to Factory or Custom Defaults
Web: Reset the HP ProCurve AP 530 to Factory or Custom Defaults
21
Rev. 10.31
To reset the settings on the AP 530 using the Web browser interface, follow these steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click Management > System Maintenance. Click the Configuration Files tab. Click the Reset button next to Reset to Factory Default to restore the AP to its factory settings. Click the Reset button next to Reset to Custom Default to restore the AP to the settings stored in a custom-default configuration file.
A message appears stating that the selected configuration will be restored and that the Web browser connection to the AP will be lost. Click OK to continue. The AP 530 reboots automatically.
Rev. 10.31
B 33
HP ProCurve AP 10ag
HP ProCurve AP 10ag
Two radios:
802.1 1a 802.1 1b/g
Management options:
Web
browser interface (GUI)HTTP solution
SNMP

Press
and hold the Reset to Default button for 5 seconds. LEDs shut off, release the button. username = admin password = password
When
Default Default
22
Rev. 10.31
The ProCurve Wireless Access Point 10ag is designed for small businesses with relatively simple wireless network requirements. It has two radios, one that supports 802.1 and one that supports 802.1 1a 1b/g. It can be wall-mounted or placed on a flat surface and can be powered by Power over Ethernet (PoE).
Management Options
Administrators can manage the ProCurve AP 10ag through an intuitive Web browser interface using any JavaScript-enabled browser. You can access the APs interface from any network PC on the same subnet as the AP. You can also manage the AP from a network management station running an SNMP management application, such as PCM. The AP SNMP agent supports SNMP versions 1 and 2c.
Resetting the AP to Factory Defaults

You can restore factory default configuration by pressing the Reset to Default button on the rear panel for more than five seconds. As soon as the LEDs (except the Power LED) shut off, release the Reset to Default button. The AP resets to factory defaults and reboots.
B 34
Rev. 10.31
Interpreting the HP ProCurve AP 10ag LEDs
Interpreting the HP ProCurve AP 10ag LEDs
Status
Power LED
Diag LED
LAN LEDs
Wireless LEDs
On Blinking
AP powered on
Normal operation
Ethernet link up and Radio enabled and using full bandwidth using full bandwidth
Boot in progress Reset to factory Ethernet link up and Radio enabled and defaults in using partial using partial bandwidth progress bandwidth AP not receiving Normal power operation Ethernet link down Blinking slowlyRadio disabled or no stations associated
Off
23
Rev. 10.31
The LEDs on the AP 10ag convey basic information about its status and operation.
Power LED
View the Power LED to verify the AP 10ag is receiving power. If the LED is off, the AP is not receiving power. Look for problems with the power cord or with PoE.
Diag LED
This amber LED blinks when a reset to factory default settings is in progress.
LAN LED
The LAN LEDs report the status of the AP 10ags Ethernet connection. When the LAN LED is off, the Ethernet connection (either the Physical Layer or the Data Link Layer) is down. When the Ethernet connection is established, the LED blinks at a rate proportional to the traffic it is handling.
Wireless LEDs
The Wireless LEDs indicate the status of the radios. If the LED is off, either the radio is disabled or no stations are currently connected. When the radio is enabled, its LED blinks at a rate proportional to the traffic it is handling. The table on the following page lists the LEDs, their behaviors, and what the behaviors indicate. Refer to this table for guidelines on the next step to take when you see a particular pattern of LED behavior.
Rev. 10.31
B 35
LED Label
Power
State
Green Off
Meaning
The AP is receiving power. The AP is not receiving power. If the power adapter is connected to a power source, verify that the power jack is connected properly to the power connector on the back panel of the AP. Reset to factory default is in progress. Blinking stops when the AP has completed resetting to factory defaults and is about to reboot. Normal state The RJ-45 port has no network cable connected, or is not receiving a link signal. Try swapping the Ethernet cable. Also check the settings on the uplink switch. Verify that the port is enabled and does not require authentication. The RJ-45 port has a link indication from a 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps device and is transmitting or receiving traffic. The LED blinking rate is proportional to the traffic rate. If there is no traffic, the blinking rate will be once every five seconds. As the traffic rate increases, the blinking rate also increases until the LED is solid on, which indicates there no further bandwidth available on the port. The wireless interface may be disabled. Check the radio status on the Information page. The wireless interface is enabled and transmitting or receiving traffic. The LED blinking rate is proportional to the traffic rate. If there is no traffic, the blinking rate will be once every second. As the traffic rate increases, the blinking rate also increases until the LED is solid green, which indicates there no available bandwidth on the interface.
Diag
Blinking amber
Off LAN Off
Blinking or solid green
Link/Act 802.1 1a Link/Act 802.1 1b/g
Off Blinking fast or solid green
B 36
Rev. 10.31
Configure Basic Settings on the HP ProCurve AP 10ag
Configure Basic Settings on the HP ProCurve AP 10ag

Access the Web browser interface using the default IP address:
192.168.1.14 Username: admin

Password: password
Enter default username and password:
2 1 3 4
Change the IP address
Set the country code
24
Rev. 10.31
The AP 10ag has a default IP address of 192.168.1.14/24. To change this default IP address, you must access the Web browser interface. Connect your workstation directly to the AP 10ag and change the workstation IP address so that it is on the same subnetwork. For example, you might change the workstation IP address to 192.168.1.1/24.
Note You should not connect two AP 10ags set to factory defaults to the same network. Because the default IP addresses are the same, you will not know which one you are configuring when you access the Web browser interface.
Open a Web browser and enter http://192.168.1.14 as the URL. To access the AP 10ag Web browser interface, enter the default username and password:

Username: admin Password: password
Rev. 10.31
B 37
After you access the Web browser interface, you should change the APs IP address to one on your companys network. You should also set the country code, using the steps outlined below. 1. 2. In the navigation bar, click Basic Settings under Setup. You can configure the AP 10ag to receive an IP address from a DHCP server, or you can configure a static IP address. Complete one of the following steps: a. b. 3. 4. To have the AP 10ag receive a dynamic IP address, select the Enable option for DHCP Client. To set a static IP address, type the appropriate settings for IP Address, IP Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway.
For Country/Region, select the country where the AP will be operating. Click Apply.
B 38
Rev. 10.31
Upgrade Software on the HP ProCurve AP 10ag
Upgrade Software on the HP ProCurve AP 10ag
2 3
25
Rev. 10.31
You can easily update the APs software from the Web browser interface. The software file must be stored on the local station (from which you are accessing the Web browser interface). Complete the following steps: 1. 2. Click Update Software under Management. The Update Software window is displayed. Type the filename for the software as stored on the local station. Or click Browse and navigate to the folder where you saved the software update file, select the file, and then click Open. Click Update.
3.
A progress bar is displayed. When the software update is completed, the AP reboots itself and then redirects you to the Information page. Check the Software Version and verify that the new version has been installed.
Rev. 10.31
B 39
Manage Configuration Files on the HP ProCurve AP 10ag
Manage Configuration Files on the HP ProCurve AP 10ag

Copy files between the AP 10ag and the management station.
Copy a configuration from the AP to the local station.
2 2b Copy a configuration
2a
on the local station to the AP.
2c
26
Rev. 10.31
You might want to back up a configuration file or copy a configuration file to an AP 10ag. 1. 2. In the Web browser interface, click Back up Settings under Management. Complete one of the following steps. a. b. To copy a configuration file from the AP to the local management station, click the Backup button. To copy a configuration file from the local management station to the AP, click the Browse button under Restore Saved Setting from a File and select the file. Then click the Restore button. To return the AP 10ag to factory default settings, click the Erase button under Revert to Factory Default Settings. Click OK to continue. The following message is displayed: Please wait.... Access Point is rebooting...... PLEASE WAIT until re-directed to Information page.
c.
When the AP has restored its settings to factory default, the Web interface refreshes and displays the Information page. If the AP was using an IP address other than the default, you may see a Page Not Found message in your browser. This is because the AP has already reverted to its default IP address, 192.168.1.14.
B 40
Rev. 10.31
HP ProCurve AP 520wl
HP ProCurve AP 520wl
Variety of features depending on the card installed in its two slots Management options:

Web browser interfaceHTTP CLITelnet and Serial SNMP v1/2c Press and hold the Reload button for 10 seconds. Or, from the CLI, enter this command twice: set sysresettodefaults 1 AP 520wl
27
Rev. 10.31
ProCurve Networking no longer sells the AP 520wl, but it continues to support the product. The AP 520wl requires the installation of a radio card. With its two cardbus radio slots, the AP can accommodate almost any combination of 802.1 1b, 802.1 1a, and 802.1 modes. 1g Radio cards for the AP 520wl include the following:
ProCurve Wireless 802.1 Access Point Card 150wl 13 CH (J8136A) with 131b channel support; for use in Europe and Asia only (except Japan) ProCurve Wireless 802.1 Access Point Card 150wl 14 CH (J8137A) with 141b channel support; for use in Japan only ProCurve Wireless 802.1 Access Point Kit 160wlSingapore (J8148A) for use 1a in Singapore only ProCurve Wireless 802.1 Access Point Kit 160wlEurope (J8149A) for use in 1a selected European countries only ProCurve Wireless 802.1 Access Point Kit 160wlJapan (J8150A) for use in 1a Japan only ProCurve Wireless 802.1 Access Point Card 170wl 1 CH (J8432A) IEEE 1g 1 802.1 radio card for AP 520wl Wireless Access Point, 1 1g 1-channel
Rev. 10.31
B 41
ProCurve Wireless 802.1 Access Point Card 170wl 13 CH (J8430A) IEEE 1g 802.1 radio card for AP 520wl Wireless Access Point, 13-channel 1g ProCurve Wireless 802.1 Access Point Card 170wl 14 CH (J8431A) IEEE 1g 802.1 radio card for AP 520wl Wireless Access Point, 14-channel 1g

Depending on which radio cards are installed, the AP 520wl supports a variety of external antennas to extend coverage. No external antennas are approved for use with the AP in North America. The following antennas are approved for use in Europe, Middle East and Africa (EMEA) and Asia Pacific (AP) countries:

HP ProCurve 5 dBi Omnidirectional Antenna (J8441A) HP ProCurve 2 dBi Omnidirectional Diversity Antenna (J8442A) (not applicable with the 170wl radio card) HP ProCurve 7 dBi Directional Antenna (J8443A) HP ProCurve 8 dBi Outdoor Omnidirectional, Antenna (J8444A) HP ProCurve 6 dBi Direct Diversity Antenna (J8445A) (not applicable with the 170wl radio card) HP ProCurve 1 dBi Wide Angle Antenna (J8446A) 1 HP ProCurve MMCX to R-SMA cable (J8447A) HP ProCurve 14 dBi Yagi Antenna (J8448A)
Management Options
The AP 520wl supports two types of management interface:

Web browser interface Command line interface (CLI)
In addition, you can use an SNMP service such as PCM to manage the device from the center. The AP supports SNMPv1, v2c, and v3. SNMPv3 provides data privacy and authentication with Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) to protect management sessions.
Returning the AP to Default Settings

If you cannot access the Web browser interface, return the AP to its default settings by pressing and holding the Reload button for 10 seconds. You can also return the AP to factory default settings from the CLI by entering this command twice: set sysresettodefaults 1.
B 42
Rev. 10.31
Interpreting the HP ProCurve AP 520wl LEDs
Interpreting the HP ProCurve AP 520wl LEDs

Power LED Ethernet Card Slot A Card Slot B Indication
Green Amber Amber Red Green
Green flash with activity Red Red
Green flash with activity Amber Red Amber
Green flash with activity Amber Red Amber
Normal operation Rebooting/Power on Self Test (POST) Missing or bad image POST running Card incompatible on indicated interface Indicated interface in administrative state
28
Rev. 10.31
After connecting the AP 520wl to a power source, the four LED lights on its face will turn on as the unit completes its startup processes. Allow the unit at least two minutes to boot. The AP has finished booting and operating normally when all LEDs are green. The power LED remains solid green, while the Ethernet and Card LEDs blink to indicate activity on the corresponding interfaces. The boot process may stall or the AP may encounter certain problems; look at the LED pattern to find the problem. During the boot process, the LEDs change color. The pattern at which the LEDs stop changing indicates the problem, as shown in the slide.
Rev. 10.31
B 43
Configure IP Settings on the HP ProCurve AP 520wl
Configure IP Settings on the HP ProCurve AP 520wl

Configure the IP address and default gateway.
ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve AP AP AP AP 520wl> 520wl> 520wl> 520wl> set set set set ipaddrtype static ipaddr <A.B.C.D> ipsubmask <subnet mask> ipgw <gateway A.B.C.D>
29
Rev. 10.31

As with other APs, establish a console session so that you can complete initial configurations. Follow the steps below: 1. Use a standard straight-through serial data (RS-232) cable with a one male DB-9 connector and one female DB-9 connector to connect your workstation to the serial port on the AP 520wl. (This type of cable ships with the ProCurve Series 9300m switch; the part number for the cable is 5183-7771.) Open a terminal session using these settings:
2.
Port: COM-1 Typically, you will use COM-1, but your station might have assigned a different ID to the console port to which you connected the cable.
Baud rate: 9600 Data bits: 8 Stop bit: 1 Parity: None Flow control: None
Password
When prompted, enter the APs password. The default is public.
B 44
Rev. 10.31
Specify IP Settings
Like other HP ProCurve APs, the AP 520wl obtains an IP address automatically from a network DHCP server. If you want to assign a static IP address to the AP, enter these commands:
ProCurve AP 520wl>set ipaddrtype static ProCurve AP 520wl>set ipaddr <A.B.C.D> ProCurve AP 520wl>set ipsubmask <mask> ProCurve AP 520wl>set ipgw <gateway A.B.C.D>
Rev. 10.31
B 45
CLI: Manage Software and Configuration Files on the HP ProCurve AP 520wl
CLI: Manage Software and Files on the HP ProCurve AP 520wl

Upgrade software
ProCurve AP 520wl> download <server A.B.C.D> <filename> img
Download a configuration file from a TFTP server

ProCurve AP 520wl> download <server A.B.C.D> <filename> config
Copy a configuration file from the AP 520wl to a TFTP server

ProCurve AP 520wl> upload <server A.B.C.D> <filename> config
30
Rev. 10.31
To update the AP 520wl software using the CLI, enter the command below. Your TFTP server must be running and set to transmit and receive.
ProCurve AP 520wl> download <server A.B.C.D> <filename> img
When the download is complete, you must reboot the AP for the changes to take effect:
ProCurve AP 520wl> reboot 0
You can also back up a configuration file by uploading it from the AP to your TFTP server:
ProCurve AP 520wl> upload <server A.B.C.D> <filename> config
If you want to restore an AP to the settings saved in your backup configuration file, download the file from your TFTP server to the AP.
ProCurve AP 520wl> download <server A.B.C.D> <filename> config
B 46
Rev. 10.31
Web: Upgrade Software and Download Files for the HP ProCurve AP 520wl
Web: Upgrade Software and Download Files for the HP ProCurve AP 520wl
2 3
4-7 8
31
Rev. 10.31
Upgrade Software
Follow these steps to upgrade the AP 520wl software using the Web browser interface: 1. 2. In the left navigation bar, click the Commands button. Click the Update AP tab.
You can then use either TFTP or HTTP to transfer the new software to the AP. The HTTP option allows you to upgrade the software from a file stored on the local management station. To upgrade via TFTP (as shown on the slide): 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Click the via TFTP tab. For Server IP Address, type the IP address of your TFTP server. For File Name, type the filename (including extension) of the new software file. For File Type, select Img. For File Operation, select Update AP or Update AP & Reboot. Click Update AP.
Rev. 10.31
B 47
To upgrade via HTTP (local): 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click the via HTTP tab. For File Type, select Image. For File Name, type the filename (including the path and extension) of the new software file. Or use the Browse button to find the file. Click Update AP. Click OK on the warning message to proceed.
The AP 520wl runs the new software after it reboots.
Download Configuration Files from a TFTP Server

You can also download saved configuration files to the AP using the Update AP tab. Follow the steps for a TFTP software upgrade, but select Config for File Type.
B 48
Rev. 10.31
Web: Copy HP ProCurve AP 520wl Configuration Files
Web: Copy HP ProCurve 520wl Configuration Files

2 3
1 4-5 6
32
Rev. 10.31
You might want to copy the APs configuration files to another location. 1. 2. In the left navigation bar, click the Commands button. Click the Retrieve File tab.
You can then copy the configuration files either to a TFTP server or to your management workstation (via HTTP). To copy the file to a TFTP server (as shown on the slide): 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select via TFTP. For Server IP Address, type the IP address of your TFTP server. For File Name, type the filename (including extension) under which the file will be stored on the server. Click Retrieve Config File. Select via HTTP. Click the Retrieve Config File button. Click OK in the confirmation window that opens. Click Save in the File Download window that opens. In the Save As dialog box, navigate to the location where you want to save the configuration file and enter a file name. Click Save.
B 49
To copy the file to the local station via HTTP:
Rev. 10.31
Web: Reset the HP ProCurve AP 520wl to Factory Defaults
Web: Reset the HP ProCurve AP 520wl to Factory Defaults
33
Rev. 10.31
You can use the Web browser interface to reset the AP to its factory default settings. 1. 2. 3. Click Commands. Click the Reset tab. Click Reset to Factory Default.
Note
Resetting the AP to its factory default configuration will permanently overwrite all changes that you have made to the units settings. The AP will reboot automatically after this command has been issued.
B 50
Rev. 10.31
HP ProCurve Coordinated AP SolutionWireless LAN System

HP ProCurve Coordinated AP Solution Wireless LAN System
Introduction to 802.1 Standards 1 HP ProCurve Standalone APs
HP ProCurve Coordinated AP SolutionWireless LAN System
HP ProCurve 700wl Secure Access Series HP ProCurve Antennas
34
Rev. 10.31
This section discusses the ProCurve Wireless LAN System, which is ProCurves coordinated AP solution.
Rev. 10.31
B 51
HP ProCurve Wireless LAN System

HP ProCurve Wireless LAN System
ProCurve Wireless Edge Services zl/xl Module ProCurve Redundant Wireless Services zl/xl Module Wireless services-enabled switch
ProCurve Switch 5400zl Series or ProCurve 8212zl Switch ProCurve Switch 5300xl Series
ProCurve Radio Ports (RPs) RP licenses
Wireless Edge Services zl Module
Redundant Wireless Services zl Module
Wireless services-enabled switches
RP 210
35 Rev. 10.31
RP 220
RP 230
Large businesses that need many APs often use the ProCurve Wireless LAN System, which provides centralized management for those APs. The Wireless Edge Services Module controls all settings for the coordinated APs, which are called RPs. The Wireless LAN System includes the following components:

Wireless Edge Services zl Module or Wireless Edge Services xl Module Redundant Wireless Services zl Module or Redundant Wireless Services xl Module Wireless services-enabled switch:
HP ProCurve Series 5300xl switch HP ProCurve Series 5400zl switch HP ProCurve Switch 8212zl
RPs RP licenses
B 52
Rev. 10.31
Wireless Edge Services Module

As the central controller for the wireless network, the Wireless Edge Services Module provides the intelligence for the RPs, which are coordinated APs. Rather than configuring each RP separately, you configure settings on the Wireless Module. When the Wireless Module adopts connected RPs, it downloads your configuration settings to them.
Redundant Module
The Wireless LAN System can also include the Redundant Wireless Services Module, which provides failover capabilities in the event that the Wireless Module becomes unavailable for any reason. The only optional component in the Wireless LAN System, the Redundant Module also provides load sharing capabilities, which are discussed in the Mobility v8.21 course.
Wireless Services-Enabled Switch

A Wireless Edge Services zl Module must be installed in either a 5400zl switch or a Switch 8212zl. A Wireless Edge Services xl Module must be installed in a 5300xl switch. A Redundant Wireless Services zl Module is also installed in either a 5400zl switch or a Switch 8212zl. It can be installed in the same switch as the primary module or a different switch. Similarly, a Redundant Wireless Services xl Module can be installed in the same 5300xl switch as the primary module or a different switch. After you install a Wireless Edge Services Module or a Redundant Wireless Services Module in a switch, it is referred to as a wireless services-enabled switch.
RPs
RPs provide the radio signals that are used to establish the wireless network. Because they are coordinated APs, however, the RPs cannot create a wireless network on their own. They must first establish communication with and be adopted by a Wireless Module to receive the appropriate WLAN configurations. They then forward traffic from stations to the Wireless Module, which processes the traffic. ProCurve Networking offers three RPs, which support a variety of 802.1 1b/g and 802.1 combinations: RP 210, RP 220, and RP 230. The RPs 210 and 230 do not 1a support external antennas. The RP 220 requires at least one external antenna and supports the following models:

ProCurve Antenna Lightning Arrester (J8996A) ProCurve 3 dBi Dual Band Diversity Antenna (J8997A) ProCurve 6 dBi 5 GHz Omnidirectional Antenna (J8998A) ProCurve 7 dBi Dual Band Directional Antenna (J8999A) ProCurve 14 dBi 5 GHz Directional Antenna (J9000A) ProCurve 5 dBi Indoor/Outdoor Omnidirectional Antenna (J8441A)
B 53
Rev. 10.31
ProCurve 8 dBi Outdoor Omnidirectional Antenna (J8444A) ProCurve 14 dBi Yagi Antenna (J8448B)
RP Licenses
To adopt an RP, the Wireless Module must have sufficient RP licenses. Each Wireless Edge Services xl Module or Wireless Edge Services zl Module ships with 12 nonremovable RP licenses, which allow the module to adopt up to 12 RPs. The module will not adopt more than 12 RPs unless the customer purchases and installs additional licenses:
For the Wireless Edge Services xl Module:
ProCurve Wireless Services Module 12 RP License (J9002A) ProCurve Wireless Services zl 12 RP License (J9053A) ProCurve Wireless Services zl 48 RP License (J9090A)
For the Wireless Edge Services zl Module:
Customers can install up to three Wireless Services Module 12 RP Licenses on a Wireless Edge Services xl Module for a maximum of 48 RPs. Customers can install various combinations of licenses on a Wireless Edge Services zl Module for a maximum of 156 RPs. Customers cannot install licenses on Redundant Wireless Services Modules; these modules share the licenses of the primary module in the redundancy group.
B 54
Rev. 10.31
RP Adoption
RP Adoption
The country code is set on Wireless Module. The Wireless Module has sufficient RP licenses. The Wireless Module can detect the RPs.
Not adopted
VLAN 1
VLAN 2100 (manual) VLAN 2100 (manual)
VLAN 2100 (manual)
VLAN 2100 (autoprovisioning)
VLAN 2100 (autoprovisioning)
36
Rev. 10.31
Before an RP can forward traffic on the network, it must be adopted by its controllerthe Wireless Module. When it adopts an RP, the Wireless Module sends configuration settings to the RP and manages it according to the parameters you have defined. The RP can then send and receive network traffic. The Module can adopt RPs automatically, or you can control the process with manual adoption.
Automatic adoption: The Module adopts any RP it detects until it reaches its maximum number of RP licenses. This is the default setting. Manual adoption: The MAC address of each authorized RP is configured on the Wireless Module, which adopts only these APs.
Whether you choose automatic or manual adoption, the following conditions must be met before the Wireless Module can adopt an RP:

The country code must be set on the Wireless Module. The Wireless Module must have enough RP licenses to adopt the RP. The Wireless Module must detect the RP. As illustrated in the slide, the Radio Port VLAN (default, 2100) must extend between the RP and the Wireless Module. This VLAN is automatically tagged on the modules downlink port and, with auto-provisioning on ProVision ASIC switches and 5300xl switches, ports to which RPs connect automatically become members of this VLAN. When RPs connect to other types of switches, you must
Rev. 10.31
B 55
make RP ports untagged members of the Radio Port VLAN. You also need to add the RP VLAN to uplink ports. The Wireless Module also supports Layer 3 adoption, which allows RPs on different VLANs to be adopted. However, this topic is beyond the scope of this course.
B 56
Rev. 10.31
Install the Wireless Module and Monitor LEDs
Install the Wireless Module and Monitor LEDs
Module Status
indicator
Shutdown Module
(recessed button)
Mode Activity indicators

Transmission on uplink or downlink ports Overall system load ranges
(recessed button)
Reset Module
Locate Ports
Press once to illuminate LEDs of downlink ports, which connect to RPs, on the switch front panel Press again to illuminate LEDs of switch ports in uplink VLANs
37 Rev. 10.31
Install the Wireless Module

You install the Wireless Edge Services zl Module in the 5400zl or 8212zl Switch, and you install the Wireless Edge Services xl Module in the 5300xl Switch. Be careful to insert the Wireless Module correctly so that you do not inadvertently damage any of the components. (Damage caused by incorrectly installing the Wireless Module is not covered by the ProCurve warranty.)
LED Activity During the Boot Process

After you install the Wireless Module and power up the wireless services-enabled switch, you can observe the LEDs on the Wireless Module to monitor its boot process. When the boot process begins, the Module Status LED lights up, indicating the start of the Wireless Modules self-test. At the same time, the Module Activity LEDs all light up and then begin to indicate the percent of the startup process that has been completed. For example, when 10 percent of the startup process is completed, the 10% LED lights up; when 50 percent of the startup process is completed, the 50% LED lights up. When the self-test is completed, the Module Fault light turns off. This occurs at nearly the same time the 80% LED lights up, indicating that 80 percent of the startup process is completed. When the Wireless Module is ready to begin receiving and transmitting traffic, the Module Ready LED lights up.
Rev. 10.31
B 57
LED Activity When the Wireless Module Is in Use

The LEDs and buttons on the Wireless Modules front panel are described below:
Shutdown Module buttonPress this button for at least 2 seconds to shut down the Wireless Module without accessing the Wireless Modules CLI. When the shutdown is completed, the Module Ready LED turns off. (The Shutdown Module button does not reboot the Wireless Module.) Reset Module buttonPress this button to reboot the Wireless Module without accessing a management interface. Locate Ports buttonUse this button to locate the following ports on the wireless services-enabled switch:
Downlink attached RPsPress the Locate Ports button one time to illuminate the LEDs of the ports that connect to RPs or that are configured for the Radio Port VLAN. Uplink ports that are associated with the modulePress the Locate Ports button one more time to illuminate the LEDs of the uplink network ports ports that carry traffic in VLANs for which the modules uplink port is tagged. After several seconds, the LEDs automatically turn off.
Module StatusAfter the boot process is completed, this LED indicates the Wireless Module can begin transmitting and receiving traffic. ModeThe Mode LEDs report on the modules internal downlink port (the left LED) and uplink port (the right LED). The meaning of the LED depends on the current setting of the LED Mode Select button on the wireless services-enabled switch chassis. For example, if the LED Mode Select is set to Act, the Mode LEDs on the Wireless Module report on the activity on the modules internal ports. The LED Mode Select can be set to:
ActThe LED flashes to indicate traffic sent or received on the internal port. FDxThe LED lights up if the port is acting in full-duplex, which both internal ports do. MaxThe LED lights up if the LEDs are operating at their maximum bandwidth. !The LED lights up if the port is experiencing errors.
Module ActivityAfter the Module Ready LED lights up, the Module Activity LEDs begin to report the Wireless Modules system load.
B 58
Rev. 10.31
Interpreting LEDs on the HP ProCurve RP 220 and RP 230
Interpreting LEDs on the HP ProCurve RP 220 and RP 230

Amber LEDstatus of 802.1 radio 1a Green LEDstatus of 802.1 1b/g radio
1 and 1 1a 1b/g Link Activity LED LEDs illuminate Green LED is off; amber LED flashes three times per second. LEDs turn off for a moment; then illuminate for a few seconds. Without wireless traffic, LEDs flash once every 5 seconds. With wireless traffic, the LEDs flash more frequently. LEDs flash steadily once every second. Without wireless traffic, LEDs flash once every 5 seconds. With wireless traffic, the LEDs flash more frequently.
38 Rev. 10.31
Bootup or Adoption Process RP performs a self-test RP attempts to communicate with a Wireless Module RP is communicating with the Wireless Module Normal operation
Error condition Normal operation
You can monitor the LEDs on the RP 220 and RP 230 to ensure that the RPs are functional and that they have been adopted by a Wireless Module. The table on the following page lists the LED behavior and the corresponding stage in the bootup or adoption process. Note the LED behavior that indicates an errorboth LEDs flash steadily once every second. If this occurs, you should ensure that the RP adoption requirements are met: Can the RP communicate with the Wireless Module? Ensure that all the interfaces between the RP and the Wireless Module are members of the Radio Port VLAN. Also, ensure that the Wireless Module has sufficient RP licenses and that the country code has been set.
Rev. 10.31
B 59
LED Behavior in Sequence

Green and amber LEDs illuminate Green LED is off; amber LED flashes three times per second. Both LEDs turn off for a moment; then both illuminate for a few seconds. Green LED indicates the status of the 802.1 1b/g radio; amber LED indicates status of the 802.1 a radio. 1 Without wireless traffic, LEDs flash once every 5 seconds. With wireless traffic, the LEDs flash more frequently. Green and Amber LEDs flash steadily once every second.
Bootup or Adoption Process

RP performs a self-test. RP attempts to communicate with a Wireless Module. If no error conditions have occurred, RP is communicating with Wireless Module. Normal operation
Error conditions
B 60
Rev. 10.31
Interpreting LEDs on the HP ProCurve RP 210
Interpreting LEDs on the HP ProCurve RP 210

Green LEDstatus of 802.1 1b/g radio Amber LEDself-test and startup
1 1b/g Link Activity LED LEDs illuminate Green LED is off; amber LED flashes three times per second. LEDs turn off for a moment; then illuminate for a few seconds. Green LED flashes to indicate connection and traffic. Amber LED is off. Green LED flashes steadily once every second. Amber LED is off.
Bootup or Adoption Process RP performs a self-test RP attempts to communicate with a Wireless Module RP is communicating with the Wireless Module Normal operation Error condition
39
Rev. 10.31
The LEDs on the RP 210 function differently than those on the RP 220 and RP 230 because the RP 210 has only one radio. Use the table below to monitor the RP 210.
LED Behavior in Sequence
Green and amber LEDs illuminate Green LED is off; amber LED flashes three times per second. Both LEDs turn off for a moment; then both illuminate for a few seconds. Green LED flashes to indicate the amount of traffic being transmitted on the connection. Amber LED is off. Green LED flashes steadily once every second. Amber LED is off.
Bootup or Adoption Process

RP performs a self-test. RP attempts to communicate with a Wireless Module. If no error conditions have occurred, RP is communicating with Wireless Module. Normal operation
Error conditions
Rev. 10.31
B 61
Access the HP ProCurve Wireless Modules CLI and Set Country Code
Access the HP ProCurve Wireless Modules CLI and Set Country Code
Access the CLI of the wireless services-enabled switch. Move to the switchs global configuration mode context and enter the Wireless Modules CLI
ProCurve Switch# configure terminal ProCurve Switch (config)# wireless services <slot>
Replace <slot> with the letter of the slot in which the Wireless Module is installed. Move to the global configuration mode in the Wireless Modules CLI and set the country code.
ProCurve(wireless-services-C)# configure terminal ProCurve Switch(wireless-services-C) (config)# country-code <code>
40 Rev. 10.31
Communicating with the Wireless Module

Because the Wireless Module resides in a wireless services-enabled switch, you communicate with it through the switch. You can access the switchs CLI using either a Telnet, serial, or SSH session. To establish a serial session, use the following settings:

Baud Rate = 9600 Parity = None Data Bits = 8 Stop Bits = 1 Flow Control = None
After you enter the username and password for the switchs CLI, move to the global configuration mode context. To begin a Telnet link on a Windows workstation, enter telnet <A.B.C.D> at the command prompt. In addition, most ProCurve devices include Telnet clients, so you can access your AP from a management session with a switch.
B 62
Rev. 10.31
Accessing the Wireless Services Context

At the switchs prompt, enter the following command to access the wireless services contextthe Wireless Modules CLI:
ProCurve(config)# wireless-services <slot>
Replace <slot > with the letter of the slot in which the Wireless Module is installed. After entering the command, the CLI prompt shows that you are in the manager mode of the wireless services context: ProCurve(wireless-services-C)#

One of the first tasks you should complete is to set the country code. Setting the country code is one of the requirements for adopting RPs and enables the RPs to operate within the ranges that are legal for your country. ProCurve(wireless-services-C)# configure terminal ProCurve(wireless-services-C)(config)# country-code <code> To view the available codes, you can enter: ProCurve(wireless-services-C)(config)# country-code ?
Rev. 10.31
B 63
View or Configure IP Settings on the HP ProCurve Wireless Module
View or Configure IP Settings on the HP ProCurve Wireless Module

DHCP addressdefault setting
Determine
the IP address of the default management VLAN (VLAN 1)
ProCurve(wireless-services-C)# show ip interface
Static IP address
Assign
the management VLAN an IP address and default gateway
ProCurve(wireless-services-C)# configure terminal ProCurve(wireless-services-C)(config)# interface vlan1 ProCurve(wireless-services-C)(config-if)# ip address <A.B.C.D>/<prefix length> ProCurve(wireless-services-C)(config-if)# exit ProCurve(wireless-services-C)(config)# ip default-gateway <A.B.C.D> ProCurve(wireless-services-C)(config)# exit ProCurve(wireless-services-C)# write memory
41 Rev. 10.31
View the IP Address Received from a DHCP Server

By default, the Wireless Module is configured to receive a dynamic IP address for the management VLANVLAN 1. If you do not want to change this setting, you can use this IP address to access the Web browser interface. Enter the following command to view the IP address that the Wireless Module received from your companys DHCP server:
ProCurve(wireless-services-C)# show ip interface
Assign the Management VLAN a Static IP Address

If you want to assign the management VLAN a static IP address, complete the following steps: 1. Move to the Wireless Modules global configuration mode context:
ProCurve(wireless-services-C)# configure terminal
The Wireless Modules CLI supports shortcuts, so you can enter conf to move to the global configuration mode context. 2. Enter the following command to access the interface context for the management VLAN. Typically, you will access the interface VLAN 1 context:
ProCurve(wireless-services-C)(config)# interface vlan1
B 64
Rev. 10.31
3.
Assign the static IP address:

ProCurve(wireless-services-C)(config-if)# ip address <A.B.C.D>/<prefix length>
Replace <A.B.C.D> with the IP address and replace <prefix length> with the Classless Inter-domain Routing (CIDR) notation. Do not include a space between the IP address and the CIDR notation. 4. 5. Exit to the global configuration mode context:
ProCurve(wireless-services-C)(config-if)# exit
Assign the Wireless Module a default gateway by entering:

ProCurve(wireless-services-C)(config)# ip default-gateway <A.B.C.D>
6.
Exit to the manager context and save your changes by entering:

ProCurve(wireless-services-C)(config)# exit ProCurve(wireless-services-C)# write memory

When you configure the Wireless Module from the CLI, you must ensure that you save your changes before you exit the wireless services context. If you are in the switchs CLI and enter write memory to save changes, the command affects only the changes that have been made to the wireless services-enabled switch. The command will have no affect on the Wireless Module.
Rev. 10.31
B 65
CLI: Software and Configuration Files on the HP ProCurve Wireless Module
CLI: Software and Configuration Files on the HP ProCurve Wireless Module

Upgrade software.
ProCurve(wireless-services-<slot>)# upgrade <url>
Download a configuration file from a remote server.

ProCurve(wireless-services-<slot>)# copy <url> {nvram: startup-config | flash: /<path>/<filename>}
Copy a configuration file from the module to a remote server.

Switch(wireless-services-<slot>)# copy {nvram: startup-config | flash: /<path>/<filename>} <url>
<url> = tftp://<hostname or A.B.C.D>/path/filename ftp://<user:password>@<hostname or A.B.C.D>/path/filename

42 Rev. 10.31
You can use the CLI to manage software and configuration files. The Wireless Module can store a primary software image and a secondary image and multiple configuration files.
Upgrade Software
You can upload new software from a TFTP server. Enter this command:
ProCurve(wireless-services-<slot>)# upgrade <url>
The format for <url> is:

tftp://<hostname or A.B.C.D>/path/filename ftp://<user>:<password>@<hostname or A.B.C.D>/path/filename
If, during the process, you decide that you need to cancel the upgrade, enter this command from the manager level:
ProCurve(wireless-services-<slot>)# upgrade-abort
You must reboot the module (use the reload command) for the upgrade to take effect.
B 66
Rev. 10.31
Download a Configuration File from a Remote Server

You might want to copy a configuration file that is stored on a remote server to the Wireless Module. Enter this command:
ProCurve(wireless-services-<slot>)# copy <url> {nvram: startupconfig | flash: /<path>/<filename>}
If you want the module to take the downloaded configuration as its new startupconfig, use the nvram: startup-config option. You can also simply copy the configuration to a location on the Wireless Modules flash memory. In this case, the configuration does not affect the module until you copy it to the startup-config (and reboot the module). Copy a Configuration File to a Remote Server You can archive the startup-config or any named configuration file (or for that matter any file stored on the Wireless Module) to a remote server. Enter this command:
ProCurve(wireless-services-<slot>)# copy {nvram: startup-config | flash: /<path>/<filename>} <url>
Rev. 10.31
B 67
Web: Upgrade the Software on an HP ProCurve Wireless Module
Web: Upgrade Software on the HP ProCurve Wireless Module
43
Rev. 10.31
After you complete initial configurations, you can access the Wireless Module Web browser interface. Simply open a Web browser and navigate to the IP address assigned to the module. Log in as a manager (default name, manager; default password, procurve). From the Web browser interface, you can upgrade the Wireless Modules software. Follow these steps: 1. 2. 3. In the left navigation bar, click Management > System Maint. Software. Click Upgrade Software. Complete the settings for the FTP or TFTP server on which the software file is stored: a. b. c. d. e. In the From field, accept the default setting, Server. In the File field, enter the name of the new image file. In the Using field, select FTP or TFTP. In the IP Address field, enter the IP address of the FTP or TFTP server. If you are using an FTP server, enter the login credentials for that server. 1) 2)
B 68
In the User ID field, enter the username. In the Password field, enter the password for that username.
Rev. 10.31
f.
In the Path field, enter the path where the new software file is saved. If you are using an FTP server and the file is saved at the servers root level, enter a period followed by a slash (./). If the file resides at a different level on the FTP server, enter the complete path. (If you are using a TFTP server, this field may not be required.)
4.
Click the Do Upgrade button.
Rev. 10.31
B 69
Web: Manage Configuration Files on an HP ProCurve Wireless Module
Web: Manage Configuration Files on the HP ProCurve Wireless Module
5 2 View configuration file

44 Rev. 10.31
Delete configuration file
Return to factory default settings
To copy, or transfer, a configuration file from the Wireless Module Web browser interface, complete the following steps: 1. Access the Management > System Maint.Config Files window. This window displays all of the configuration files stored on the Wireless Module. You will see at least startup-config and running-config, but there may be more. From this window, you can also view the settings in a configuration file or delete the file from the Wireless Module. 2. 3. Click the Transfer Files button at the bottom of the window. Specify the source of the copy operationServer (FTP or TFTP) or Wireless Services Module. After you select a source, the Web browser interface displays the fields needed to copy a configuration file from that source. The slide shows the fields required to copy a file from an FTP or TFTP server. 4. Specify the destination for the copy operation. Again, once you select a destination, the Web browser interface displays the fields needed to copy a file to that destination. For example, to copy a file to the Wireless Module, you must specify the filename. 5.
B 70
Click the Transfer button. In the Status area at the bottom of the window, a message is displayed, reporting if the transfer was successful.
Rev. 10.31
CLI: Save a Copy of System Information

CLI: Save a Copy of System Information
Obtain a comprehensive copy of system information.
ProCurve(wireless-services-B)# support copy tech-support <url>
Obtain information on the internal state server.

ProCurve(wireless-services-B)# support wireless dump-state
Obtain a core file of the ccsrv state.

ProCurve(wireless-services-B)# support wireless core
45
Rev. 10.31
When you are troubleshooting a Wireless Module, you may be asked to obtain information about the modules state. You can do so by entering support commands from the manager level of the CLI. The table below displays some useful commands, the information that each saves to a file, and the location to which the file is saved. The next slide will show you how to find and export files saved to the flash through the Web browser interface.
Command
support copy tech-support [tftp:// | ftp://user:password@ | sftp://user@][hostname | A.B.C.D]/path/filename support wireless dump-state support wireless dump-core
Information Saved
A wide range of information on system functions
File Destination
A file on an TFTP, FTP, or secure copy (SCP) server
Internal state server Core file of the ccsvr state
flash:/crashinfo/ccsrvr.core flash:/crashinfo/ccsrvr_tim estamp.core
Rev. 10.31
B 71
Web: Export Support Files
Web: Export Support Files

Core snapshots are created when you enter the support command. Panic snapshots are created when the system is forced to reboot.
Select the file you want to download.
A screen opens that guides you through the download.
46
Rev. 10.31
You now know how to create files with system information. This slide shows how to find these files in the Wireless Modules Web browser interface and export them to a remote server. The Web browser interface calls the files snapshots and sorts them into two categories:
Core snapshotsCore snapshots are created when you enter support commands such as those discussed on the previous slide. For example, entering the support wireless dump-core command created the ccsvr_16915_03.core.gz file. Panic SnapshotsPanic snapshots are created when the system faults. For example, if a fatal error causes the Wireless Module to reboot, it first writes its processes into a panic file. The Wireless Module preserves up to 10 panic snapshots; the snapshot with the highest number is the most recent. Under the heading Troubleshooting, select Core Snapshots or Panic Snapshots, depending on the file for which you are looking. Select the file you want to download. Click Transfer Files. The window that is displayed is similar to the window that you use to transfer configuration files. The source is already set to the file you have selected. Specify the IP address of the destination server, the server type, and the filename and path for the saved file.
Rev. 10.31
To export one of these files, complete these steps: 1. 2. 3.
B 72
Before you decide whether to export or delete panic shots, you can preview them. However, you cannot preview core snapshots. The Panic Snapshots window includes a Preview section; simply select the snapshot, and a preview is displayed in this section.
Rev. 10.31
B 73
HP ProCurve Secure Access 700wl Series

Introduction to 802.1 Standards 1 HP ProCurve Standalone APs HP ProCurve Coordinated AP SolutionWireless LAN System
HP ProCurve Antennas
47
Rev. 10.31
The HP ProCurve Secure Access 700wl Series includes:

HP ProCurve Access Controller 720wl HP ProCurve Access Control Server 740wl HP ProCurve Wireless Network Access Control Server (ACS) 745wl HP ProCurve Integrated Access Control Server 760wl (J9038) HP ProCurve Switch xl Access Controller Module (J8162A)
The 720wl, 740wl, and 760wl have been discontinued, but ProCurve continues to support these products.
B 74
Rev. 10.31
HP ProCurve Secure Access Products

HP ProCurve Secure Access Products
ProCurve Wireless Network Access Control Server (ACS) 745wl
Provides Enables Offers
centralized management policy-based authentication and access control
a good solution for existing wireless networks that have multiple standalone APs in a 5300xl switch
Switch xl Access Controller Module (ACM)

Installed Controls
APs and enforces authentication and access controls configured on the Access Control Server
ACS 745wl
48 Rev. 10.31
ACM
5300xl Switch
The ProCurve Secure Access products provide advanced management and security features for companies that have standalone APs that support large numbers of mobile users. The slide shows the ProCurve ACS 745wl, which is the current representation of the ProCurve 700wl Series family of products. Designed to provide wireless services for a large enterprise environment, the products support distributed wireless services that are managed from a central device. This solution includes the following:
ACS 745wlThe ACS 745wl provides centralized management, controlling hundreds of ACMs and thousands of users. You configure policies that implement authentication and access controls on the ACS 745wl. ACMsInstalled into 5300xl switches, ACMs enforce the authentication, authorization, and data privacy policies you configure on the ACS 745wl. APsThe Secure Access products can control hundreds of APs. This solution supports ProCurve standalone APs, ProCurve Wireless LAN Systems, or thirdparty WLAN solutions.
Rev. 10.31
B 75
Interpreting the Front Panel of the HP ProCurve Access Control Server 745wl
Interpreting the Front Panel of the HP ProCurve Access Control Server 745wl
(network information)
LCD display
Network Uplink Status LEDs Power button System Status LED
(green = powered on)

49 Rev. 10.31
The ACS 745wl has a Power button, which turns the device on and off (however, the device should be shut down through the CLI or Web browser interface). For the Power button to The LCD display on the ACS 745wls front panel displays information about the system such as network settings (IP address and so forth) and uptime. The Uplink port has two Network Uplink Status LEDs, which indicate the status of the Ethernet connection. When the left LED is on, it indicates a 10 Mbps connection, and the left LED blinking indicates activity on a 10 Mbps connection. Similarly, the right LED indicates 100 Mbps connectivity and activity. Finally, when both LEDs are on or blinking, a 1000 Mbps connection is up or active.
B 76
Rev. 10.31
Interpreting LEDs on the HP ProCurve Switch xl Access Controller Module
Interpreting LEDs on the HP ProCurve Switch xl Access Controller Module
Shutdown Module
(recessed button)
Module Ready
(module status)
Mode Activity indicators
(error conditions)
Module Fault
(recessed button)
Reset Module
downlink ports - Overall system load ranges
- Transmission on uplink or
Locate Ports
Press once to illuminate LEDs of downlink ports, which are in the correct VLAN to connect to APs, on the switch front panel Press again to illuminate LEDs of uplink ports, which are members of the VLAN on the ACMs uplink port and connect to the ACS 745wl
50 Rev. 10.31
The LEDs and buttons on the ACMs front panel are described below:
Shutdown Module buttonPress this button for at least 2 seconds to shut down the ACM manually. When the shutdown is completed, the Module Ready LED turns off. (The Shutdown Module button does not reboot the ACM.) Reset Module buttonPress this button to reboot the ACM manually. Locate Ports buttonUse this button to locate the following ports on the 5300xl switch:
Downlink client portsPress the Locate Ports button one time to illuminate the LEDs of the ports that are configured for the VLAN on the ACMs downlink port. You can connect AP 420s to these ports. Uplink Network portsPress the Locate Ports button one more time to illuminate the LEDs of the uplink network ports, which carry traffic in the VLAN on the ACMs uplink port. You can use one of these ports to connect to the ACS 745wl.
ModeThe Mode LEDs report on the modules internal downlink port (the left LED) and uplink port (the right LED). The meaning of the LED depends on the current setting of the LED Mode Select button on the wireless services-enabled switch chassis. For example, if the LED Mode Select is set to Act, the Mode LEDs on the ACM report on the activity on the modules internal ports. The LED Mode Select can be set to:
B 77
Rev. 10.31
ActThe LED flashes to indicate traffic sent or received on the internal port. FDxThe LED lights up if the port is acting in full-duplex, which both internal ports do. MaxThe LED lights up if the LEDs are operating at their maximum bandwidth. !The LED lights up if the port is experiencing errors.
Module ActivityAfter the Module Ready LED lights up, the Module Activity LEDs begin to report the ACMs system load.
B 78
Rev. 10.31
Access the CLI on the HP ProCurve Access Control Server 745wl

Access the CLI on the HP ProCurve Access Control Server 745wl
1. Establish a serial connection 2. Enter the default username and password:

Username: admin Password: admin
Serial cable with DB9 female connectors
51
Rev. 10.31
At factory default settings, the ACS 745wl receives its IP address with DHCP. Typically, you should access the ACS 745wl CLI using a console session and set a static IP address. You can connect to the device using the same type of serial cable that ships with ProCurve switches. The correct console session settings are:

Baud = 9600 Data Bits = 8 Stop Bits = 1 Parity = None Flow Control = None
Log in to the CLI manager lever. The default settings are: Username = admin Password = admin
Rev. 10.31
B 79
Configure Initial Settings on the HP ProCurve Access Control Server 745wl

Configure Initial Settings on the HP ProCurve Access Control Server 745wl
Set the IP address, default gateway, and DNS server.
ProCurve 700wl Series: set ip <A.B.C.D> <subnet mask> ProCurve 700wl Series: set gateway <gateway A.B.C.D> ProCurve 700wl Series: set dns <A.B.C.D> [A.B.C.D]
Set the shared secret (for communicating with ACMs).

ProCurve 700wl Series: set sharedsecret Secret: <secret> Confirm secret: <secret>
52
Rev. 10.31
Once you have accessed the CLI, you can set the initial settings for the ACS 745wl.
Specify the IP Settings

To configure the IP address for the ACS 745wl, enter this command:
ProCurve 700wl Series: set ip <A.B.C.D> <subnet mask>
You must also set the ACS 745wls default gateway with this command:
ProCurve 700wl Series: set gateway <gateway A.B.C.D>
For example, enter these commands:

ProCurve 700wl Series: set ip 192.168.1.15 ProCurve 700wl Series: set gateway 192.168.1.1
You should also specify the IP address of a DNS server to allow the ACS 745wl to resolve hostnames. You can specify up to two DNS servers. Enter this command:
ProCurve 700wl Series: set dns <A.B.C.D> [A.B.C.D]
Set the Shared Secret

You must set a shared secret on the ACS 745wl. When you configure an ACM to connect to the ACS 745wl, you will set the same shared secret. Enter this command:
ProCurve 700wl Series: set sharedsecret
You will then be prompted to enter and confirm the shared secret.
B 80
Rev. 10.31
Configure Initial Settings on the HP ProCurve ACM
Configure Initial Settings on the HP ProCurve ACM

Access the Access Controller configuration context from CLI of the 5300xl switch in which the ACM is installed.
ProCurve(config)# access-controller <slot> ProCurve(access-controller-<slot>)#
Set the IP address and default gateway.

ProCurve(access-controller-<slot>)# ip address <A.B.C.D> <subnet mask | /prefix length> ProCurve(access-controller-<slot>)# ip default-gateway <A.B.C.D>
53
Rev. 10.31
To initially set up an ACM, you must access the 5300xl switch in which the ACM is installed. Then access the Access Controller context of the switch CLI. Enter this command from the global configuration level:
ProCurve(config)# access-controller <slot>
The prompt changes to reflect the new context:

ProCurve(access-controller-<slot>)#
Specify IP Settings
Configure the IP address of the ACM with this command:
ProCurve(access-controller<slot>)# ip address <A.B.C.D> <subnet mask | /prefix length>
When the ACM is on a different subnet from the ACS 745wl, the ACM requires a default gateway, which is configured with this command:
ProCurve(access-controller-<slot>)# ip default-gateway <A.B.C.D>
For example, enter these commands:

ProCurve(access-controller-b)# ip address 192.168.5.50/24 ProCurve(access-controller-b)# ip default-gateway 192.168.5.1
Rev. 10.31
B 81
Ready the Network for the Access Control System
Ready the Network for the Access Control System

The The
ACM must be able to reach the ACS 745wl on its uplink port. ACM connects to APs on its downlink port.
ACS 745wl 5300xl switch
U p LA l i n N k 2 D o V wn LA l N ink 5
ACM
AP 420s
54
Rev. 10.31
The ACM must be able to reach the ACS 745wl on its uplink port. In the illustration, the ACMs uplink port is tagged for VLAN 2, and the ACS 745wls uplink port is also on VLAN 2. Both devices would have an IP address on the same subnet. It is also possible for the ACS 745wls and ACMs communications to be routed. So that the ACM can control AP, the APs must connect to ports that are members of the VLAN on the ACMs downlink port (VLAN 5 in the illustration).
B 82
Rev. 10.31
Establish Communications Between the HP ProCurve ACS 745wl and ACM

Establish Communications Between the HP ProCurve ACS 745wl and ACM
On the ACM, set the Access Control Server IP address and shared secret.
ProCurve(access-controller-<slot>)# access-controlserver <A.B.C.D> secret <shared secret> <shared secret>
55
Rev. 10.31
The ACM can now reach the ACS 745wl. To initiate communications and have the ACS 745 begin managing the ACM, enter this command:
ProCurve(access-controller<slot>)# access-control-server <A.B.C.D> secret <shared secret> <shared secret>
Replace <A.B.C.D> and <shared secret> with the IP address and shared secret configured on the ACS 745wl. Note that you must type the shared secret twice. For example:
ProCurve(access-controller<slot>)# access-control-server 192.168.1.15 secret procurve! procurve!
Rev. 10.31
B 83
CLI: Upgrade Software on the HP ProCurve Access Control Server 745wl

CLI: Upgrade Software on the HP ProCurve Access Control Server 745wl
Upgrade from software stored on a TFTP server.
ProCurve 700wl Series: get upgrade <url> <key> [reboot]
URL for downloading the software from the ProCurve FTP site = ftp://ftp.hp.com/pub/networking/software/700software/ambit4-hp
56
Rev. 10.31
You can update the ACS 745wls software from a TFTP or FTP server. For example, you can save the file with the new software on your own TFTP server. Or, if the ACS 745wl has an Internet connection, you can upgrade from the ProCurve Networking FTP site. Upgrading software on the ACS 745wl is slightly different from other products discussed in this module because you must obtain a key. Enter this command from the manager level of the ACS 745wls CLI:
ProCurve 700wl Series: get upgrade <url> <key> [reboot]

tftp://<A.B.C.D or hostname>/<path>/<filename> ftp://<A.B.C.D or hostname>/<path>/<filename>
The default ProCurve Networking FTP site is: ftp://ftp.hp.com/pub/networking/software/700software/ambit4-hp The ACS 745wl begins to run the new software after you reboot it. Specify the reboot option if you want the ACS 745wl reboot immediately after downloading the new software. Note that this can cause a temporary wireless network outage.
B 84
Rev. 10.31
Web: Upgrade Software on the HP ProCurve Access Control Server 745wl

Web: Upgrade Software on the HP ProCurve Access Control Server 745wl
1
3 4-8
9
57 Rev. 10.31
After completing the initial set up, you can access the ACS 745wl from its Web browser interface (also called the Administrative Console). Log in with the same default username and password used to log in to the CLI (admin and admin). In the Web browser interface, you can also update the software. Follow these steps: 1. 2. 3. In the navigation bar at the top of the interface, click the Maint button. Click the Software Setup tab. The Software Setup window displays the current software version. To upgrade the software, click Update Software.
You can download the software from a remote FTP, TFTP, or HTTP server. You also might store the software on your local management station. When you upgrade the software using the Web browser interface, you can download the software directly from there.
Complete a Remote Update

Follow these steps to download new software from a remote server 1. 2. The Remote Update tab should be selected. For URL, type the URL for the remote server (such as ftp://hp.procurve.com) including the path and filename for the software. If the ACS 745wl has an
B 85
Rev. 10.31
Internet connection, you can download the software from the ProCurve FTP site. Accept the default. 3. 4. For Key, type the key that you have already obtained for this software. If you want, select the Restart using updated software when finished installing check box. Note that this option will cause a temporary outage while the ACS 745wl reboots. If you do not choose to reboot the ACS 745wl immediately, the device does not run the software until you do. 5. 6. Click Update Now. If the ACS 745wl uses a proxy server to reach the Internet (or other remote server), select Enabled for Proxy and, for Host IP, type the IP address of the proxy server. Otherwise select Disabled for Proxy and leave the Host IP box empty. For Port, type the number for the port on which the remote server listens. If you are using the default URL, use the default port, 3128. Click Update Now.
7. 8.
Complete a Local Update

Follow these steps to download software locally: 1. 2. 3. Click the Local Update tab. In the Upload New Software Version section, for Key, type the key that you have already obtained for this software. Click Upload. After the software copies to the ACS 745wl, it fills one of the four slots for software files. These files are displayed in the Uploaded Software Versions section. 4. 5. Select the software that you just obtained. If you want, select the Restart using updated software when finished installing check box. Note that this option will cause a temporary outage while the ACS 745wl reboots. If you do not choose to reboot the ACS 745wl immediately, the device does not run the software until you do. 6. Click Update Now.
B 86
Rev. 10.31
CLI: Manage Configuration Files on the HP ProCurve Access Control Server 745wl
CLI: Manage Configuration Files on the HP ProCurve Access Control Server 745wl
Create a backup configuration file.
ProCurve 700wl Series: create backup
Copy the backup file to a remote server.

ProCurve 700wl Series: store backup <url> [<path>/<filename>]
Copy a backup file from a remote server to an ACS 745wl.

ProCurve 700wl Series: get backup <url>/<path>/<filename>
Restore from the backup.

ProCurve 700wl Series: restore backup
58
Rev. 10.31
You might want to create a backup configuration file for archival purposes, particularly before upgrading the software. You can store the backup file on an external FTP server. You can then copy the file back the ACS 745wl if necessary. (You could also copy the configuration to another ACS 745wl.) The ACS 745wl can store only one backup file. The backup configuration includes the configuration for the ACS 745wl and the information that the ACS 745wl has on ACMs; however, it does not back up the ACMs individual configurations. Use the commands shown in the slide to manage the backup configuration file.
Create a Backup File

Note that creating the backup configuration file briefly shuts down the system, which can cause a wireless network outage. To create the file, enter this command from the enable level of the CLI:
ProCurve 700wl Series: create backup
The enter y to confirm.
Rev. 10.31
B 87
Copy a Backup File to an FTP Server

To copy the backup configuration file from the ACS 745wl to an FTP server, enter this command from the enable level:
ProCurve 700wl Series: store backup <url> [<path/filename>]

tftp://<hostname or A.B.C.D> ftp://<username>:<password>@<hostname or A.B.C.D>
For example:
ProCurve 745wl# store backup ftp://acs:procurve@procurve.com
If the FTP server supports anonymous login, simply specify the URL. For example:
ProCurve 745wl# store backup ftp://192.168.6.3
The [<path/filename>] option specifies the filename under which the backup configuration file is stored on the FTP server and is optional. (By default, the filename is hp-yyyy-mm-dd, indicating the time at which the file is saved.) If you do choose to specify your own filename, you must take care when entering the path. When you log in with a username, you must specify the complete path for the file. When you log in anonymously, you must specify the path from the root FTP directory.
Copy a File from an FTP Server to the ACS 745wl

To copy a previously saved backup file from an FTP server to an ACS 745wl, enter this command:
ProCurve 700wl Series: get backup <url>/<path/filename>
As when copying the backup file to the FTP server, you can log in to the FTP server with a username or anonymously (depending on your servers requirements). You must specify the path and filename for the file that you want to copy to the ACS 745wl. Again, specify the complete path when you log in with a username and the path from the root FTP directory when you log in anonymously.
Restore from a Backup File

To restore the ACS 745wl to the backup configuration that you downloaded from the FTP server, enter this command:
ProCurve 700wl Series: restore backup
The ACS 745wl copies the backup configuration to its running and startup configuration and reboots. However, the configuration for the uplink port remains unaltered; therefore, you can use a backup configuration from another ACS 745wl to copy settings to a new ACS 745wl without causing a duplicate IP address in the network. Note that this command causes a temporary wireless network outage.
B 88
Rev. 10.31
Web: Manage Configuration Files on the HP ProCurve Access Control Server 745wl
Web: Manage Configuration Files on the HP ProCurve Access Control Server 745wl
1
59
Rev. 10.31
You can complete much the same configuration file management tasks from the Web browser interface. However, the backup files are copied to and from the local management station rather than an FTP server.
Create a Backup File

Follow these steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. In the top navigation bar, click the Maint button. Click the Backup & Restore tab. Click the Create Backup Now button. You are asked to confirm the backup (which causes a temporary network outage). Click Continue.
The ACS 745wl becomes temporarily unavailable while the backup is completed.
Copy a Backup File to the Local Management Station

After you create a backup file, you can copy it to the local management station. Follow these steps: 1. 2. 3.
Rev. 10.31
In the top navigation bar, click the Maint button. Click the Backup & Restore tab. Click the Save Backup As button.
B 89
4.
The management station displays a series of dialog boxes related to downloading the file. Accept the download, name the file (the default name is hp-yyyy-mm-dd), and finish saving the file to the local station.
Restore from a Backup File to the ACS 745wl

From the Web browser interface, you restore from a backup file at the same time that you copy it from the management station. Follow these steps: 1. 2. 3. In the top navigation bar, click the Maint button. Click the Backup & Restore tab. In the Restore Backup File section, type the path and filename of the backup configuration on the management station. Or click Browse and navigate to the file. Click Restore Backup Now. You are asked to confirm the reset to the backup configuration, which causes temporary network outage. Click Continue.
4. 5.
You will need to log in again after the process has completed.
B 90
Rev. 10.31
CLI: Reset the HP ProCurve Access Control Server 745wl to Factory Defaults
CLI: Reset the HP ProCurve Access Control Server 745wl to Factory Defaults
Reset to the factory default configuration.*
ProCurve 700wl Series: factoryreset This operation will erase all configuration information and return this system to factory default settings. Are you sure that you want to perform a factory reset [n]? y
*Resetting to the factory defaults erases the backup config, so you should copy it to an external server.
60
Rev. 10.31
Sometimes you need to reset a system to the factory default configuration. Remember: all configurations on the ACS 745wl are reset, including IP settings and uplink port configuration. In addition, the backup configuration file is erased, so you should copy it to the local management station (or an FTP server) before you reset to factory defaults. ACMs are also reset to factory defaults. Enter this command from the ACS 745wl CLI manager level:
ProCurve 700wl Series: factoryreset
Then enter y to confirm. The ACS 745wl reboots and, when it restarts, it is running the factory default configuration. This command can cause a wireless network outage.
Rev. 10.31
B 91
Web: Reset the HP ProCurve Access Control Server 745wl or ACM to Factory Defaults
Web: Reset the HP ProCurve Access Control Server 745wl or ACM to Factory Defaults
1 2
Select the ACS 745wl or one of its ACMs
61
Rev. 10.31
From the Web browser interface, you can reset the ACS 745wl or one of its ACMs to factory defaults. Note that, when you reset an ACM to factory defaults, you must then delete the ACM from the ACS 745wl configuration. Otherwise, the next time that the ACM connects to the ACS 745wl (after you reconfigure it to do so), it will received its old configuration. Follow these steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. In the top navigation bar, click the Maint button. Click the Shutdown/Restart tab. Select the component that you want to reset to factory defaults (Access Control Server or Access Controller). Click Reset to Factory Defaults. You are asked to confirm the action. Click Continue.
If you have reset the ACS 745wl, the device reboots, so you will lose management access.
B 92
Rev. 10.31
Introduction to 802.1 Standards 1 HP ProCurve Standalone APs HP ProCurve Coordinated AP solutionWireless LAN System HP ProCurve 700wl Secure Access Series HP ProCurve Antennas
62
Rev. 10.31
This section lists the ProCurve external antennas supported by ProCurve mobility products.
Rev. 10.31
B 93
Array of antennas including:
Omnidirectional Diversity
and directional antennas
and non-diversity antennas
Examples:
Directional antenna
Omnidirectional antennas
Omnidirectional diversity antenna
63
Rev. 10.31
ProCurve Networking provides a variety of antennas to increase radio frequency (RF) coverage. ProCurve provides several types of antennas:

Omnidirectional and directional Diversity and non-diversity
External antenna support varies on ProCurve devices: some do not support external antennas at all, while others require them or require specific models.
B 94
Rev. 10.31
Summary of Regions Permitting HP ProCurve External Antennas

Summary of Regions Permitting ProCurve External Antennas
Part J8441A Description Indoor / outdoor omnidirectional NA (FCC) EMEA (ESTI) AP (ESTI) 420 520wl 530 220 420 520wl 530 220 420 520wl 530 220
J8444A Outdoor omnidirectional J8448B J8997A J8998A J8999A Yagi Dual band diversity Omnidirectional Dual band directional
J9000A Directional
64
Rev. 10.31
The table above lists the ProCurve antennas, the ProCurve products that support them, and the region in which they can be used.
Rev. 10.31
B 95
Summary
Summary
HP ProCurve standalone APs:
AP AP
420 530 AP 10ag AP 520wl
HP ProCurve coordinated AP solutionWireless LAN System:

Wireless
Edge Services xl/zl Module Wireless Services xl/zl Module RP 210, 220, and 230
Redundant
HP ProCurve 700wl Secure Access Series HP ProCurve antennas

65 Rev. 10.31
HP ProCurve Networking offers three families of products to meet a wide range of customers wireless needs:

Standalone APs 420, 530, 510ag, and 520wl The ProCurve Wireless LAN System, consisting of radio ports (RPs 210, 220, and 230) controlled by a switch module The ProCurve Secure Access 700wl Series
These products operate on IEEE 802.1 standards to deliver a variety of data rates 1 and security options. They support a variety of external antennas to shape and extend wireless coverage. You can configure and manage them via a Web browser interface, and most of the devices also offer a CLI.
B 96
Rev. 10.31
Conversion Tables
Appendix C
A Series Switches
3Com/H3C Name
H3C S3100-8TP-EI H3C S3100-8TP-EI H3C S3100-8TP-PWR-EI H3C S3100-16TP-EI H3C S3100-16TP-EI H3C S3100-16TP-PWR-EI H3C S3100-26-TP-EI H3C S3100-26-TP-EI H3C S3100-26TP-PWR-EI H3C S3100-8T-SI H3C S3100-16T-SI H3C S3100-26T-SI H3C-S3100-8C-SI H3C S3100-16C-SI H3C H3C H3C H3C H3C H3C H3C H3C H3C H3C H3C H3C H3C H3C H3C H3C H3C H3C H3C H3C H3C H3C H3C H3C H3C H3C H3C H3C S3100-26C-SI S3600-28P-EI S3600-28P-PWR-EI S3600-28F-EI S3600-52P-EI S3600-52P-PWR-EI S3610-28TP S3610-28P S3610-28F S3610-52P S5120-20P-SI S5120-28P-SI S5120-52P-SI S5120-24P-EI S5120-28C-EI S5120-28C-PWR-EI S5120-48P-EI S5120-52C-EI S5120-52C-PWR-EI S5500-28C-SI S5500-28C-PWR-SI S5500-52C-SI S5500-52C-PWR-SI S5500-28F-EI S5500-28C-EI (DC) S5500-28C-EI (AC) S5500-28C-PWR-EI S5500-52C-EI
New HP Name
HP A3100-8 DC-EI HP A3100-8-EI HP A3100-8-PoE-EI HP A3100-16 DC-EI HP A3100-16-EI HP A3100-16-PoE-EI HP A3100-24 DC-EI HP A3100-24-EI HP A3100-24-PoE-EI HP A3100-8-SI Switch HP A3100-16-SI Switch HP A3100-24-SI Switch HP A3100-8-SI Switch with 1 Extended Module Slot HP A3100-16-SI Switch with 2 Extended Module Slots HP A3100-24-SI Switch with 2 Slots HP A3600-24-EI HP A3600-24-PoE-EI HP A3600-24-SFP-EI HP A3600-48-EI HP A3600-48-PoE-EI HP A3610-24 with 2 GigT and 2 SPF Ports HP A3610-24 with 4 SPF Ports HP A3610-24-SFP HP A3610-48 HP A5120-16G-SI HP A5120-24G-SI HP A5120-48G-SI HP A5120-24G-EI HP A5120-24G-EI Switch with 2 Slots HP A5120-24G-PoE-EI HP A5120-48G-EI Switch HP A5120-48G-EI Switch with 2 Slots HP A5120-48G-PoE-EI Switch with 2 Slots HP A5500-24G-SI HP A5500-24G-PoE-SI HP A5500-48G-SI HP A5500-48G-PoE-EI HP A5500-24G-SFP-EI HP A5500-24G DC-EI HP A5500-24G-EI HP A5500-24G-PoE-EI HP A5500-48G-EI
3Com/H3C Part #
0235A23T 0235A29Y 0235A19B 0235A23H 0235A300 0235A19C 0235A23P 0235A301 0235A19D 0235A15B 0235A15C 0235A15D 0235A15F 0235A15G 0235A15H 0235A10H 0235A10C 0235A10L 0235A10K 0235A10E 0235A22E 0235A22D 0235A22F 0235A22C 0235A42B 0235A42D 0235A41W 0235A0BQ 0235A0BS 0235A0BU 0235A0BR 0235A0BT 0235A0BV 0235A04U 0235A05H 0235A04V 0235A251 0235A24U 0235A24S 0235A253 0235A255 0235A24X
New HP Part #
JD316A JD318A JD31 1A JD314A JD319A JD312A JD315A JD320A JD313A JD304A JD305A JD306A JD307A JD308A JD309A JD331A JD326A JD326A JD333A JD328A JD337A JD336A JD338A JD335A JE073A JE074A JE072A JE066A JE068A JE070A JE067A JE069A JE071A JD369A JD371A JD370A JD376A JD374A JD373A JD377A JD378A JD375A
Rev. 10.31
C1
H3C S5120-52C-PWR-EI H3C S5800-32F H3C S5800-32C H3C S5800-32C-PWR H3C S5800-56C H3C S5800-56C-PWR H3C S5800-60C-PWR H3C S5810 48-BT, 2 SFP+, AC 3Com NJ1000 3Com NJ2000
HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP
A5500-48G-PoE-EI A5800-24G-SFP A5800-24G A5800-24G-PoE A5800-48G A5800-48G-PoE A5800-48G with 2 Slots A5810 48-BT, 2 SFP+, AC
0235A251 0235A374 0235A36U 0235A36S 0235A379 0235A378 0235A36W 0235A42H 3CNJ1000L 3CNJ2000
JD376A JC103A JC100A JC099A JC105A JC104A JC101A JF242A JD052A JD057A
HP NJ1000G IntelliJack HP NJ2000G IntelliJack
E Series Switches
3Com/H3C /ProCurve Name
3Com 4210 9-Port 3Com 4210 PWR 9-Port SWITCH 4210 PWR 9-PORT 3Com 4210 18-Port 3Com 4210 PWR 18-Port 3Com 4210 26-Port 3Com 4210 PWR 26-Port 3Com 4210 52-Port 3Com 4210G 24-Port 3Com 4210G 48-Port 3Com 4210G PWR 24-Port 3Com 4500 26-Port 3Com 4500 PWR 26-Port 3Com 4500 50-Port 3Com 4500 PWR 50-Port 3Com 4500G 24-Port 3Com 4500G PWR 24-Port 3Com 4500G 48-Port 3Com 4500G PWR 48-Port 3Com 4510G-24-Port 3Com 4510G PWR 24-Port 3Com 4510G-48-Port 3Com 4800G 24-Port 3Com 4800G PWR 24-Port 3Com 4800G 24-Port SFP 3Com 4800G 48-Port 3Com 4800G PWR 48-Port 3Com 5500-EI 28-Port 3Com 5500-EI PWR 28-Port 3Com 5500-EI 28-Port FX 3Com 5500-EI 52-Port 3Com 5500-EI PWR 52-Port 3Com 5500G-EI 24-Port 3Com 5500G-EI PWR 24-Port 3Com 5500G-EI 24-Port SFP 3Com 5500G-EI 48-Port 3Com 5500G-EI PWR 48-Port ProCurve 2510-24
New HP Name
HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP E4210-8 E4210-8-PoE E4210-8-PoE E4210-16 E4210-16-PoE E4210-24 E4210-24-PoE E4210-48 E4210-24G E4210-48G E4210-24G-PoE E4500-24 E4500-24-PoE E4500-48 E4500-48-PoE E4500-24G E4500-24G-PoE E4500-48G E4500-48G-PoE E4510-24G E4510-24G-PoE E4510-48G E4800-24G E4800-24G-PoE E4800-24G-SFP E4800-48G E4800-48G-PoE E5500-24 E5500-24-PoE E5500-24-SFP E5500-48 E5500-48-PoE E5500-24G E5500-24G-PoE E5500-24G-SFP E5500-48G E5500-48G-PoE E2510-24
3Com/H3C Part #
3CR17331-91 3CR17341-91 3CR17341A-91 3CR17332-91 3CR17342-91 3CR17333-91 3CR17343-91 3CR17334-91 3CRS42G-24-91 3CRS42G-48-91 3CRS42G-24P-91 3CR17561-91 3CR17571-91 3CR17562-91 3CR17572-91 3CR17761-91 3CR17771-91 3CR17762-91 3CR17772-91 3CRS45G-24-91 3CRS45G-24P-91 3CRS45G-48-91 3CRS48G-24-91 3CRS48G-24P-91 3CRS48G-24S-91 3CRS48G-48-91 3CRS48G-48P-91 3CR17161-91 3CR17171-91 3CR17181-91 3CR17162-91 3CR17172-91 3CR17250-91 3CR17252-91 3CR17258-91 3CR17251-91 3CR17253-91 N/A
New HP Part #
JE021A JE028A JE029A JE024A JE031A JE026A JE032A JE027A JF844A JF845A JF846A JE045A JE047A JE046A JE048A JE057A JE061A JE059A JE063A JF847A JE065A JF428A JD007A JD008A JD009A JD010A JD01 1A JE101A JE105A JE109A JE103A JE107A JE088A JE092A JE096A JE090A JE094A J9019B Rev. 10.31
C2
Conversion Tables
ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve
2510-48 2510G-24 2510G-48 2520-8-PoE 2520-24-PoE 2520G-8-PoE 2520G-24-PoE 2615-8-PoE 2610-24/12PWR 2610-24 2610-24-PWR 2610-48 2610-48-PWR 2810-24G 2810-48G 2915-8G-PoE 2910al-24G 2910al-24G-PoE+ 2910al-48G 2910al-48G-PoE+ 4204vl 4204vl-48GS 4202vl-72 4208vl 4208vl-72GS 4208vl-96 3500yl-24G-PWR 3500yl-24G-PoE+ 3500yl-48G-PWR 3500yl-48G-PoE+ 3500-24 3500-24-PoE 3500-48 3500-48-PoE 5406zl 5406zl-48G 5406zl 48G-PoE+ 5412zl 5412zl-96G 5412zl-96G-PoE+ 6200yl-24G-mGBIC 8206zl
ProCurve 8212zl ProCurve 6600-24G ProCurve 6600-24G-4XG ProCurve 6600-24XG ProCurve 6600-48G ProCurve 6600-48G-4XG H3C RPS 1000-A3 H3C RPS 800-A H3C RPS 500-A3 Rev. 10.31
HP E2510-48 HP E2510-24G HP E2510-48G HP E2520-8-PoE HP E2520-24-PoE HP E2520-8G-PoE HP E2520-24G-PoE HP E2615-8-PoE HP E2610-24-PPoE HP E2610-24 HP E2610-24-PoE HP E2610-48 HP E2610-48-PoE HP E2810-24G HP E2810-48G HP E2915-8G-PoE HP E2910-24G al HP E2910-24G-PoE+ al HP E2910-48G al HP E2910-48G-PoE+ al HP E4204 vl Switch Chassis HP E4204-44G-4SFP HP E4202-72 vl HP E4208 vl Switch Chassis HP E4208-68G-4SFP vl HP E4208-96 vl HP E3500-24G-PoE yl HP E3500-24G-PoE+ yl HP E3500-48G-PoE yl HP E3500-48G-PoE+ yl HP E3500-24 HP E3500-24-PoE HP E3500-48 HP E3500-48-PoE HP E5406 zl HP E5406-48G zl HP E5406-44G-PoE+/4SFP zl HP E5412 zl Switch Chassis HP E5412-96G zl HP E5412-92G-PoE+/4SFP zl HP E6200-24G-mGBIC yl HP E8206 zl Switch Base System HP E8212 zl Switch Base System HP E6600-24G HP E6600-24G-4XG HP E6600-24XG HP E6600-48G HP E6600-48G-4XG HP RPS 1000 A3 HP RPS 500 A HP RPS 500 A3
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 0213A01S 0213A02R 0213A01T
J9020A J9279A J9280A J9137A J9138A J9298A J9299A J9565A J9086A J9085A J9087A J9088A J9089A J9021A J9022A J9562A J9145A J9146A J9147A J9148A J8770A J9064A J8772B J8773A J9030A J8775B J8692A J9310A J8693A J931 1A J9470A J9471A J9472A J9473A J8697A J8699A J9447A J8698A J8700A J9448A J8992A J9475A J8715B J9263A J9264A J9265A J9451A J9452A JD181A JD183A JD182A
C3
V Series Switches
3Com/H3C/ProCurve Name
3Com Baseline 2816 3Com Baseline 2824 3Com Baseline 2016 3Com Baseline 2024 3Com Baseline 2026-G 3Com OfficeConnect Gigabit 5 3Com OfficeConnect Gigabit 8 3Com OfficeConnect Gigabit 16 3Com OfficeConnect Fast E 5 3Com OfficeConnect Fast E 8 3Com OfficeConnect Fast E 16 3Com 2920 3Com 2928 3Com 2952 3Com 2928 PWR 3Com 2928 HPWR 3Com 2226 Plus 3Com 2250 Plus 3Com 2426-PWR Plus 3Com OfficeConnect Managed Gigabit PoE 3Com OfficeConnect Managed Gigabit 3Com OfficeConnect Managed Fast E PoE 3Com OfficeConnect Managed 9 FX ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve 1410-8G 1410-16G 1410-24G 1400-8G 1400-24G 1810G-8 1810G-24 1700-8 1700-24
New HP Name
HP V1405-16G HP V1405-24G HP V1405-16 HP V1405-24 HP V1405-24-2G HP V1405C-5G HP V1405C-8G HP V1405-16G HP V1405C-5 HP V1405C-8 HP V1405-16 HP V1910-16G HP V1910-24G HP V1910-48G HP V1910-24G-PoE(170W) HP V1910-24G-PoE(365W) HP V1905-24 HP V1905-48 HP V1905-24-PoE HP V1905-10G-PoE HP V1900-8G HP V1905-8-PoE HP OfficeConnect 9 FX Managed Switch HP V1410-8G HP V1410-16G HP V1410-24G HP V1400-8G HP V1400-24G HP V1810-8G HP V1810-24G HP V1700-8 HP V1700-24
3Com/H3C Part #
3CBLUG16A 3CBLUG24 3C16470B 3C16471B 3CBLUF26 3C1670500C 3C1670800C 3C1671600A 3C16790C 3C16791C 3C16792C 3CRBSG2093 3CRBSG2893 3CRBSG5293 3CRBSG28PWR93 3CRBSG28HPWR93 3CBLSF26H 3CBLSF50H 3CBLSF26PWRH 3CDSG10PWR 3CDSG8 3CRDSF9PWR 3CR16709-91 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
New HP Part #
JD998 JD022A JD984A JD986A JD020A JD838A JD841A JD844A JD853A JD856A JD858A JE005A JE006A JE009A JE008A JE007A JD990A JD994A JD992A JD864A JD865A JD877A JD875A J9559A J9560A J9561A J9077A J9078A J9449A J9450A J9079A J9080A
A Series Wireless Products

3Com/H3C Name
H3C WA2620E-AGN H3C WA2620-AGN H3C WA2612-AGN H3C WA2610E-AGN H3C WA2220-AG H3C WA21 10-AG 3Com 9552 1 2.4+5.4GHz PoE 1n 3Com 9152 1 1n 3 Com 8760 1 1a/b/g PoE 3Com 7760 1 1a/b/g PoE 3Com WX3024
New HP Name
HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP A-WA2620E A-WA2620 A-WA2612 A-WA2610 A-WA2220 A-WA21 10 A9552 A9152 A8760 A7760 A3000-24G-PoE+
3Com/H3C Part #
0235A42M 9801A0AA 0235A0CD 0235A42L 0235A40N 0235A22W 3CRWE955275 3CRWE915275 3CRWE876075 3CRWE776075 3CRUWX302475
New HP Part #
JD453A JD472A JD445A JD452A JD451A JD446B JD019A JE501A JD016A JD015A JD449A Rev. 10.31
C4
Conversion Tables
H3C WX3010 3Com WX3008 3Com WX5004 H3C WX5002 H3C Low-End Wireless Controller Module for the S5800 Chassis High-end Wireless Controller Module for the S5800 Chassis
HP A3000-10G-PoE+ HP A3000-8G-PoE+ HP A-WX5004 HP A-WX5002 HP A5800 Access Controller Module for 32-64 APs HP A5800 Access Controller Module for 64256 APs
0235A37U 0235A0AS 3CRUWX500475 0235A34B 0231A98V
JD450A JD444A JD469A JD447A JD443A
0231A94G
JD441A
E Series Wireless Products

ProCurve Name
ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve ProCurve MSM422 MSM410 MSM335 MSM325 MSM320 MSM310 MSM310-R MSM320-R MSM317 MSM765zl MSM760 MSM710 MSM415 RF M1 10
New HP Name
HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP E-MSM422 E-MSM410 E-MSM335 E-MSM325 E-MSM320 E-MSM310 E-MSM310-R E-MSM320-R E-MSM317 E-MSM765 zl E-MSM760 E-MSM710 E-MSM415 RF E-M1 10
3Com/H3C Part #
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
New HP Part #
J9358A J9426A J9356A J9369A J9360A J9374A J9380A J9365A J9422A J9370A J9420A J9325A J9522A J9388A
V Series Wireless Products

3Com/H3C/ProCurve Name
3Com Wireless 1 Cable/DSL Router 1n 3Com ADSL Wireless 1 Firewall 1n Router (ADSL over POTS) 3Com ADSL Wireless 1 Firewall 1n Router (ADSL over ISDN variant) ProCurve Wireless Access Point 10ag NA
New HP Name
HP V1 Cable/DSL 10 Wireless-N HP V1 ADSL-A Wireless-N 10 HP V1 ADSL-B Wireless-N 10 HP V10ag
3Com/H3C Part #
3CRWER300-73 3CRWDR300A-73 3CRWDR300B-73 N/A
New HP Part #
JE468A JE459A JE461A J9140A
A Series Multi-Service Routers

3Com/H3C Name
MSR MSR MSR MSR MSR MSR MSR MSR MSR 50-60 AC 50-40 DC 50-40 AC 30-1 1 30-16 30-16 PoE 30-20 30-20 DC 30-20 PoE
New HP Name
HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP HP A-MSR50-60 A-MSR50-40 DC A-MSR50-40 A-MSR30-1 1 A-MSR30-16 A-MSR30-16 POE A-MSR30-20 A-MSR30-20 DC A-MSR30-20 POE
3Com/H3C Part #
0235A20L 0235A20P 0235A20N 0235A29L 0235A237 0235A238 0235A19L 0235A267 0235A239
New HP Part #
JF231A JF285A JD433A JF800A JF233A JF234A JF284A JF235A JF802A
Rev. 10.31
C5
MSR 30-40 MSR 30-40 DC MSR 30-40 PoE MSR 30-60 MSR 30-60 DC MSR 30-60 PoE MSR 20-20 MSR 20-21 MSR 20-40 MSR 20-10 MSR 20-1 1 MSR 20-12 MSR 20-12T MSR 20-12W MSR 20-13 MSR 20-13W MSR 20-15I 20-15A 20-15IW 20-15AW
HP A-MSR30-40 HP A-MSR30-40 DC HP A-MSR30-40 POE HP A-MSR30-60 HP A-MSR30-60 DC HP A-MSR30-60 POE HP A-MSR20-20 HP A-MSR20-21 HP A-MSR20-40 HP A-MSR20-10 HP A-MSR20-1 1 HP A-MSR20-12 HP A-MSR20-12 T1 HP A-MSR20-12 W HP A-MSR20-13 HP A-MSR20-13 W HP A-MSR20-15 I HP A-MSR20-15 A HP A-MSR20-15 IW HP A-MSR20-15 AW
0235A20J 0235A268 0235A25R 0235A20K 0235A269 0235A25S 0235A19H 0235A19J 0235A19K 0235A0A7 0235A31V 0235A32E 0235A32B 0235A32G 0235A31W 0235A31X 0235A31N 0235A31Q 0235A31P 0235A31R
JF229A JF287A JF803A JF230A JF801A JF804A JF283A JD432A JF228A JD431A JF239A JF241A JF806A JF807A JF240A JF808A JF236A JF237A JF809A JF238A
A Series Modules & Transceivers

3Com/H3C Name
Short-Haul Dual-Port 10 GE CX4 Interface Module Dual-Port 10 GE SFP+ Interface Module Dual-Port 10 GE XFP Interface Module One-port 10 GE XFP Interface Module Dual-port GE SFP interface module S5800 300W DC Power Supply 150W AC Power Supply Module 150W DC Power Supply Module S5800 Fan Module S5800 4-Port 10GBASE-X (SFP+) Expansion Module S5800 2-Port 10GBASE-X (SFP+) Expansion Module S5800 16-Port 1000BASE-X (SFP) Expansion Module S5800 16-Port 10/100/1000BASE-T (RJ45) Expansion Module S5800 750W DC Power Supply, PoE S5800 750W AC Power Supply, PoE
New HP Name
HP 2-Port 10-GbE A5500 Local Connection Module HP 2-Port 10-GbE SFP+ A5500/E4800/E4500 Module HP 2-Port 10-GbE XFP A5500 Module HP 1-Port 10-GbE XFP A5500 Module HP 2-Port GbE SFP A5500/E4800 Module HP A5800 300W DC Power Supply HP A5500 150WAC Power Supply HP A5500 150WDC Power Supply HP A5800 2RU Spare Fan Assembly HP 4-Port 10-GbE SFP+ A5800 Module HP 2-Port 10-GbE SFP+ A5800 Module HP 16-Port SFP A5800 Module HP 16-Port Gig-T A5800 Module HP A5800 750W DC Power Supply HP A5800 750W AC PoE Power Supply
3Com/H3C Part #
0231A27P 0231A98L 0231A27N 0231A30M 0231A833 0231A93D 0231A66A 0231A73P 0231A93R 0231A93G 0231A93H 0231A93M 0231A93L 0231A0AC 0231A0AD
New HP Part #
JD360B JD368B JD359B JD361B JD367A JC090A JD362A JD366A JC096A JC091A JC092B JC095A JC094A JC088A JC089A
C6
Rev. 10.31
Conversion Tables
S5800 SecBlade Advanced VPN Firewall Module S5800 PoE Module for S5800-60CPWR S5800 300W AC Power Supply 1-Port 10/100/1000BT Interface Module for S3100-SI 1-port 1000BASE-SX Multi-Mode Optical Interface Module (850nm, 500m, SC) 1-port 1000BASE-LX Single Mode Optical Interface Module (1310nm, 10km, SC) 1-port 100BASE-FX Ethernet MultiMode Optical Interface Module (1310nm, 2km, SC) S3100 1PT 100M POE Int Mod 1-Port 10 Gigabit Module (XFP) 150W AC Power Supply Module for WX5000 150W DC Power Supply Module for WX5000 100BASE-FX-SFP 100BASE-LX10 SFP 100BASE-LX BIDI SFP 100BASE-LX BIDI SFP 100BASE-LH40 SFP 100BASE-LH80 SFP 1000BASE-SX SFP 1000BASE-LX SFP 1000BASE-LX BX10-U (BIDI) SFP 1000BASE-LX BX10-D (BIDI) SFP 1000BASE-LH40 SFP 1000BASE-LH40 SFP 1000BASE-LH70 SFP 1000BASE-T SFP 1000BASE-LH70 CWDM SFP 1470NM 70KM LC 1000BASE-LH70 CWDM SFP 1490NM 70KM LC Rev. 10.31
HP A5820 VPN Firewall Module HP PoE A5800 Module HP A5800 300W AC Power Supply HP 1 Port Gig-T 3100 SI Module HP 1 Port Gig-SX SC 3100 SI Module HP 1 Port Gig-LX SC 3100 SI Module HP S3100-SI 1PT 100MB FX MM MDL HP 1-Port 10/100Base-T POE 3100 SI Module HP 1-Port 10-Gig Mod (XFP) E4200G Module HP A5500 150WAC Power Supply HP A5500 150WDC Power Supply HP X1 100M SFP LC FX 15 Transceiver HP X1 100M SFP LC LX 10 Transceiver HP X1 100M SFP LC BX 10-U 15 Transceiver HP X1 100M SFP LC BX 10-D 15 Transceiver HP X1 100M SFP LC LH40 10 Transceiver HP X1 100M SFP LC LH80 10 Transceiver HP X125 1G SFP LC SX Transceiver HP X120 1G SFP LC LX Transceiver HP X120 1G SFP LC BX 10-U Transceiver HP X120 1G SFP LC BX 10-D Transceiver HP X125 1G SFP LC LH40 1310nm Transceiver HP X120 1G SFP LC LH40 1550nm Transceiver HP X125 1G SFP LC LH70 Transceiver HP X125 1G SFP RJ45 T Transceiver HP X170 1G SFP LC LH70 1470 Transceiver HP X170 1G SFP LC LH70 1490 Transceiver
0231A94J 0231A93S 0231A0A9 0231A65Q 0231A65W
JD255A JC097B JC087A JD298A JD300A
0231A65V
JD299A
0231A65U
JF444A
0231A65X 3C17666 0231A66A 0231A73P 0231A320 0231A564 0231A12T 0231A12U 0231A089 0231A090 0231A562 0231A563 0231A1 1U 0231A1 1V 02312170 2312172 02312173 0231A085 0231A453 0231A454
JD301A JE014A JD362A JD366A JD102B JD120B JD100A JD101A JD090A JD091A JD1 18B JD1 19B JD098B JD099B JD061A JD062A JD063B JD089B JD1 13A JD1 14A
C7
1000BASE-LH70 CWDM SFP 1510NM 70KM LC 1000BASE-LH70 CWDM SFP 1530NM 70KM LC 1000BASE-LH70 CWDM SFP 1550NM 70KM LC 1000BASE-LH70 CWDM SFP 1570NM 70KM LC 1000BASE-LH70 CWDM SFP 1590NM 70KM LC 1000BASE-LH70 CWDM SFP 1610NM 70KM LC SFP+ SR 850NM 300M LC SFP+ LRM 1310NM 220M LC SFP+ LR 1310NM 10KM LC 10GBASE-SR XENPAK 10GBASE-LR XENPAK 10GBASE-SR XFP 10GBASE-LR/LW XFP
HP X170 1G SFP LC LH70 1510 Transceiver HP X170 1G SFP LC LH70 1530 Transceiver HP X170 1G SFP LC LH70 1550 Transceiver HP X170 1G SFP LC LH70 1570 Transceiver HP X170 1G SFP LC LH70 1590 Transceiver HP X170 1G SFP LC LH70 1610 Transceiver HP X130 10G SFP+ LC SR Transceiver HP X130 10G SFP+ LC LRM Transceiver HP X130 10G SFP+ LC LR Transceiver HP X135 10G XENPAK SC SR Transceiver HP X135 10G XENPAK SC LR Transceiver HP X130 10G XFP LC SR Transceiver HP X130 10G XFP SC LR Transceiver
0231A455 0231A456 0231A449 0231A450 0231A451 0231A452 0231A0A6 0231A0A7 0231A0A8 0231A363 0231A323 0231A494 0231A438
JD1 15A JD1 16A JD109A JD1 10A JD1 1A 1 JD1 12A JD092B JD093B JD094B JD106B JD104B JD1 17B JD108B
C8
Rev. 10.31

HP2 Z12 Study Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

HP2 Z12 Study Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Switch Overview

Servicing HP Networking Products

networking solutions from the H3C division of 3Com

Servicing HP Networking Products

customers with changing networking needs solutions from ProCurve

simplicity management lifetime warranty

Single-pane-of-glass Industry-leading Reduced

total cost of ownership

lifetime warranty on most products

Servicing HP Networking Products

Categorizing Switches Based on Form Factor or Manageability

Servicing HP Networking Products

Categorizing Switches Based on the OSI Model

4 Transport Layer 3 Network Layer 2 Data Link Layer

Layer 3 Switch Dynamic Routing Protocols IP Static Routes

Layer 4 Switch Policy-Based Switching Application-Based Prioritization

OSI Protocol Stack

Servicing HP Networking Products

Layer 2, 3, and 4 Switches

Layer 2 Forward traffic based on MAC address

Layer 3 Route traffic based on IP address

Layer 4 Enable policy-based switching Support application-based prioritization

Servicing HP Networking Products

Light Layer 3 Switches

Servicing HP Networking Products

Servicing HP Networking Products

HP A-Series Switch Overview

Servicing HP Networking Products

HP A-Series Switch Overview

HP A3100-SI Switch Series

Eight auto-sensing 10/100 ports

Servicing HP Networking Products

The HP A3100-16-SI switch includes the following:

HP A-Series Switch Overview

HP A3100-SI Switch Series (Cont.)

A3100-8-SI switch with 1 extended module slot

The A3100-24-SI switch includes the following features:

Servicing HP Networking Products

HP A3100-SI Switch Series (Cont.)

A3100-24-SI Switch with 2 slots

The A3100-24-SI switch with 2 slots includes the following features:

HP A-Series Switch Overview

HP A3100-EI Switch Series

Servicing HP Networking Products

HP A3100-EI Switch Series (Cont.)

A3100-24-EI switch A3100-24-PoE-EI switch

The A3100-16-EI and A3100-16-PoE-EI switches include the following features:

HP A-Series Switch Overview

HP A3600-EI Switch Series

Servicing HP Networking Products

The A3600-24-SFP-EI switch includes the following features:

HP A-Series Switch Overview

HP A3600-EI Switch Series (Cont.)

The A3600-48-EI and A3600-48-PoE-EI switches include the following features:

The A3600-48-PoE-EI switch provides PoE on all Ethernet ports.

Servicing HP Networking Products

HP A3610 Switch Series

A3610-24 switch with 4 SFP ports

HP A-Series Switch Overview

Throughput up to 9.53 mpps One RJ-45 console port

Servicing HP Networking Products

HP A3610 Switch Series (Cont.)

The A3610-24-SFP switch includes the following features: